r 9
\
A GREEK GRAMMAR
BY
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, HON. LL.D. AND D.C.L,
MI
ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE
IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY
EE VISED AND ENLARGED
GINN AND COMPANY
BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON
ATLANTA DALLAS COLUMBUS SAN FRANCISCO
PA
COPYRIGHT, 1892,
BT WILLIAM W. GOODWIN.
ALL BIGHTS KESKKYED.
418.5
atftcnaeum
GINN AND COMPANY PRO-
PRIETORS BOSTON U.S.A.
PREFACE.
iv PREFACE.
therefore, not merely to bring the pupil face to face with
the facts of a language by means of examples carefully
selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state-
ment of the general principles which show the full mean-
ing of the facts and their relation to other principles. 1 In
other words, systematic practice in reading and writing
must be supplemented from the beginning by equally sys-
tematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics are not
learned by merely observing the working of levers and pul-
leys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments on gases ;
although no one would undertake to teach either without
such practical illustrations. It must always be remem-
bered that grammatical study of this kind is an essential
part of classical" study ; and no one must be deluded by
the idea that if grammar is not learned by rote it is not
to be learned at all. It cannot be too strongly emphasized,
that there has been no change of opinion among classical
scholars about the importance of grammar as a basis of all
sound classical scholarship ; the only change concerns the
time and manner of studying grammar and the importance
to be given to different parts of the subject.
What has been said about teaching by reference and by
example applies especially to S} r ntax, the chief principles
of which have always seemed to me more profitable for
a pupil in the earlier years of his classical studies than the
details of vowel-changes and exceptional forms which are
often thought more seasonable. The study of Greek syn-
tax, properly pursued, gives the pupil an insight into the
processes of thought and the manner of expression of a
highly cultivated people ; and while it stimulates his own
powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more careful
expression by making him familiar with many forms of
statement more precise than those to which he is accus-
tomed in his own language. The Greek syntax, as it was
developed and refined by the Athenians, is a most impor-
tant chapter in the history of thought, and even those
whose classical studies are limited to the rudiments cannot
afford to neglect it entirely. For these reasons the chief
increase in the present work has been made in the depart-
ment of Syntax.
1 These objects seem to me to be admirably attained in the First
Lessons in Greek, prepared by my colleague, Professor John \V.
White, to be used in connection with this Grammar. A new edition
of this work is- now in press.
PREFACE. V
The additions made in Part I. are designed chiefly to
make the principles of inflection and formation in Parts
II. and III. intelligible. Beyond this it seems inexpedient
for a general grammar to go. In Part II. the chief changes
are in the sections on the Verb, a great part of which have
been remodelled and rewritten. The paradigms and syn-
opses of the verb are given in a new form. The nine tense
systems are clearly distinguished in each synopsis, and also
in the paradigms so far as is consistent with a proper dis-
tinction of the three voices. The verbs in pi are now
inflected in close connection with those in <o, and both con-
jugations are included in the subsequent treatment. The
now established Attic forms of the pluperfect active are
given in the paradigms. The old makeshift known as the
" connecting-vowel " has been discarded, and with no mis-
givings. Thirteen years ago I wrote that I did not venture
" to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the
tense stems with the variable vowel attachment " ; and I
was confirmed in this opinion by the appearance of the
Scliulgrammatik of G. Curtius the year previous with the
" Bindevocal " in its old position. Professor F. D. Allen
has since shown us that the forms of the verb can be
made perfectly intelligible without this time-honored fic-
tion. I have now adopted the familiar term "thematic
vowel," in place of " variable vowel " which I used in 1879,
to designate the o or e added to the verb stem to form the
present stem of verbs in o>. I have attempted to make the
whole subject of tense stems and their inflection .more clear
to beginners, and at the same time to lay the venerable
shade of the connecting-vowel, by the distinction of "sim-
ple and complex tense stems/' which correspond generally
to the two forms of inflection, the " simple " form (the /xt-
form) and the "common" form (that of verbs in <u). See
557-565. I use the term " verb stem " for the stem from
which the chief tenses are formed, i.e. the single stem in
the first class, the " strong " stem in the second class, and
the simple stem in the other classes (except the anomalous
eighth). Part III. is little changed, except by additions.
In the Syntax I have attempted to introduce greater sim-
plicity with greater detail into the treatment of the Article,
the Adjectives, the Cases, and the Prepositions. In the
Syntax of the Verb, the changes made in my new edition
of the Greek Moods and Tenses have been adopted, so far
as is possible in a school-book. The independent uses of
vi PREFACE.
the moods are given before the dependent constructions,
except in the case of wishes, where the independent opta-
tive can hardly be treated apart from the other construc-
tions. The Potential Optative and Indicative are made
more prominent as original constructions, instead of being
treated merely as elliptical apodoses. The independent use
of /AT? in Homer to express fear with a desire to avert the
object feared is recognized, and also the independent use
of pr) and pr) ov in cautious assertions and negations with
both subjunctive and indicative, which is common in Plato.
The treatment of wore is entirely new ; and the distinction
between the infinitive with wore ^ and the indicative with
wo-rc ov is explained. The use of Trpiv with the infinitive
and the finite moods is more accurately stated. The
distinction between the Infinitive with the Article and its
simple constructions without the Article is more clearly
drawn, and the whole treatment of the Infinitive is im-
proved. In the chapter on the Participle, the three classes
are carefully marked, and the two uses of the Supplemen-
tary Participle in and out of oratio obliqua are distinguished.
In Part V. the principal additions are the sections on dac-
tylo-epitritic rhythms, with greater detail about other lyric
verses, and the use of two complete strophes of Pindar
to illustrate that poet's two most common metres. The
Catalogue of Verbs has been carefully revised, and some-
what enlarged, especially in the Homeric forms.
The quantity of long a, t, and v is marked in Parts I.,
II., and III., and wherever it is important in Part V., but
not in the Syntax. The examples in the Syntax and in
Part V. have been referred to their sources. One of the
most radical changes is the use of 1691 new sections in
place of the former 302. Eeferences can now be made to
most paragraphs by a single number ; and although special
divisions are sometimes introduced to make the connection
of paragraphs clearer, these will not interfere with refer-
ences to the simple sections. The evil of a want of dis-
tinction between the main paragraphs and notes has been
obviated by prefixing N. to sections which would ordinarily
be marked as notes. I feel that a most humble apology is
due to all teachers and students who have submitted to the
unpardonable confusion of paragraphs, with their divisions,
subdivisions, notes, and remarks, often with (a), (6), etc.,
in the old edition. This arrangement was thoughtlessly
adopted to preserve the numbering of sections in the Syntax
PREFACE. vii
of the previous edition, to which many references had already
been made ; but this object was gained at far too great a
cost. I regret that I can make no better amends than this
to those who have suffered such an infliction. A complete
table of Parallel References is given in pp. xxvi.-xxxv.,
to make references to the former edition available for the
new sections.
I have introduced into the text a section (28) on the
probable ancient pronunciation of Greek. While the sounds
of most of the letters are well established, on many impor-
tant points our knowledge is still very unsatisfactory. With
our doubts about the sounds of 0, <, x> an d & of tne double
ei and ov, not to speak of and ^, and with our helplessness
in expressing anything like the ancient force of the three
accents or the full distinction of quantity, it is safe to say
that no one could now pronounce a sentence of Greek so
that it would have been intelligible to Demosthenes or
Plato. I therefore look upon the question of Greek Pro-
nunciation chiefly as it concerns the means of communication
between modern scholars and between teachers and pupils.
I see no prospect of uniformity here, unless at some future
time scholars agree to unite on the modern Greek pronun-
ciation, with all its objectionable features. As Athens be-
comes more and more a centre of civilization and art, her
claim to decide the question of the pronunciation of her
ancient language may sometime be too strong to resist. In
tke meantime, I see no reason for changing the system of
pronunciation l which I have followed and advocated more
than thirty years, which adopts what is tolerably certain
and practicable in the ancient pronunciation and leaves the
rest to modern usage or to individual judgment. This has
brought scholars in the United States nearer to uniformity
than any other system without external authority is likely
to bring them. In England the retention of the English
1 By this the consonants are sounded as in 28,3, except that f has the
sound of z ; and \f/ have the sounds of x (&s) and ps ; 0, <, and x those
of th in thin, ph in Philip, and hard German ch in machen. The vowels
are sounded as in 28, 1, v being pronounced like French u or German
it. The diphthongs follow 28, 2 ; but ov always has the sound of ou in
youth, and ei that of ei in height. I hold to this sotind of ei to avoid
another change from English, German, and American usage. If any
change is desired, I should much prefer to adopt the sound of i (our t
in machine), which ei has held more than 1900 years, rather than to
attempt to catch any one of the sounds through which either genuine
or spurious ei must have passed on its way to this (see 28, 2).
v iii PREFACE.
pronunciation of Greek with Latin accents has at least the
advantage of local uniformity.
Since the last edition was published, Allen's new edition
of Hadley's Grammar has appeared and put all scholars
under new obligations to both author and editor. The new
edition of Monro's Homeric Grammar is of the greatest
value to all students of Homer. Blass's new edition of. the
first quarter of Kuhner is really a new work, abounding in
valuable suggestions. From the German grammars of Koch
and Kaegi I have gained many practical hints. I am also
greatly indebted to many letters from teachers containing
criticisms of the last edition and suggestions for making it
more useful in schools, too many indeed to be acknowledged
singly by name. Among them is one from which I have de-
rived special help in the revision, a careful criticism of many
parts of the book by Professor G. F. Mcolassen of Clarks-
ville, Tennessee. Another of great value came to me with-
out signature or address, so that I have been unable even to
acknowledge it by letter. I must ask all who have thus
favored me to accept this general expression of my thanks.
Professor Herbert Weir Smyth of Bryn Mawr has done me
the great service of reading the proofs of Parts I. and II.
and aiding me by his valuable suggestions. His special
knowledge of Greek morphology has been of the greatest
use to me 'in a department in which without his aid I should
often have been sorely perplexed amid conflicting views.
All scholars are looking for the appearance of Professor
Smyth's elaborate work on the Greek Dialects, now print-
ing at the Clarendon Press, with great interest and hope.
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN,
HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
CAMBRIDGE, MASS., June 30, 1892.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION. THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS,
PAGES
3-6
PART I.
LETTEKS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
SECTIONS
1-4. The Alphabet 7,8
5-10. Vowels and Diphthongs 8, 9
11-15. Breathings 9
16-24. Consonants and their Divisions 9, 10
25,26. Consonants ending Greek Words 10
27. Ionic and Athenian Alphabets .... 10, 11
28. Ancient Pronunciation 11
29-33. Changes of Vowels 12,13
34. Collision of Vowels. Hiatus 13
35-41. Contraction of Vowels. 13-15
42-46. Crasis 15, 16
47. Synizesis 16
48-54. Elision 16, 17
55. Aphaeresis 17
56-63. Movable Consonants , 17, 18
64-67. Metathesis and Syncope 18, 19
68, 69. Doubling of Consonants 19
70-95. Euphonic Changes of Consonants 19-24
96, 97. Syllables and their Division 24
98-105. Quantity of Syllables 24,25
106-1 15. General Principles of Accent 25-27
116. Anastrophe 27
117-120. Accent of Contracted Syllables and Elided Words. . 27, 28
121-129. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives..., 28,29
130-135. Accent of Verbs 29, 30
136-139. Proclitics 31
140-146. Enclitics , , 31-33
147-149. Dialectic Changes in Letters 33
150. Punctuation-Marks 33
ix
CONTENTS.
PART II.
INFLECTION.
SECTIONS PAGES
151-154. Definitions. Inflection, Root, Stem, etc. 34
155-163. Numbers, Genders, Cases 34-36
NOUNS.
164-166. Three Declensions of Nouns 36
167. Case-endings of Nouns 36
FIRST DECLENSION.
168-170. Stems and Terminations of First Declension 37
171-182. Paradigms of First Declension ... , 37-40
183-187. Contract Nouns of First Declension 40
188. Dialects of First Declension 40, 41
SECOND DECLENSION.
189-191. Stems and Terminations of Second Declension 41, 42
192-195. Paradigms of Second Declension , 42
196-200. Attic Second Declension 42, 43
201-203. Contract Nouns of Second Declension 43, 44
204. Dialects of Second Declension 44
THIRD DECLENSION.
205-208. Stems and Case-endings of Third Declension 44
FORMATION OF CASES.
209-213. Nominative Singular of Third Declension 45, 46
214-218. Accusative Singular of Third Declension 46
219-223. Vocative Singular of Third Declension 47
224. Dative Plural of Third Declension 47
PARADIGMS OF THIRD DECLENSION.
225. Nouns with Mute or Liquid Stems 47-50
226-240. Nouns with Stems in S (chiefly contract) 50-52
241-248. Stems in O or 52,53
249-262. Stems in I or T 53-55
263-272. Stems ending in a Diphthong 55, 56
273-279. Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension 57, 58
280-285. Gender of Third Declension 58, 59
286. Dialects of Third Declension 59
287-291. Irregular Nouns 59-62
292-297. Endings -0i, -Oev, -de, -<re, -0t, -<t><.v, etc 62
CONTENTS.
XI
ADJECTIVES.
SECTIONS PASES
298-309. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions 63, 64
310, 311. Contract Adjectives in -eos and -oos 65, 66
312-317. Adjectives of the Third Declension 66, 67
318-333. First and Third Declensions combined 67-69
334-339. Participles in -wv, -ovs, -as, -ets, -us, -ws 70-72
340-342. Contract Participles in -awv, -ewv, -owv, -aws . 72, 73
343-345. Adjectives with One Ending 73
346-349. Irregular Adjectives : /*<fyas, iro\vs, irpyos, etc 73, 74
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
350-356. Comparison by -repos, -TO.TOS 74, 75
357-360. Comparison by -lav, -WTOS 75, 76
361^364. Irregular Comparison 76, 77
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
365-368. Adverbs formed from Adjectives, etc 77, 78
369-371. Comparison of Adverbs 78
NUMERALS.
372-374. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Numeral
Adverbs 78-80
375-385. Declension of Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, etc.. . 80, 81
THE ARTICLE.
386-388. Declension of 6, f|, r6 81, 82
PRONOUNS.
Personal and Intensive Pronouns 82, 83
Reflexive Pronouns 84
Reciprocal Pronoun 84, 85
Possessive Pronouns 85
Demonstrative Pronouns 85, 86
Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns 86, 87
Relative Pronouns 87, 88
Pronominal Adjectives and Adverbs 88-90
VERBS.
Voices, Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons 90-92
Tense Systems and Tense Stems 92, 93
Principal Parts of a Greek Verb 93, 94
Conjugation. Two Forms: Verbs in w and Verbs
in/it 94
Xll
CONTENTS.
SECTXOKS CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN n .
469-473. Description of following Synopses 94, 95
474,475. Synopsis of Xvo> 96,97
476, 477. Synopsis of \elirw 98
478, 479. Synopsis of <f>alvw 99
480. Inflection of Xtfw 100-104
481. Inflection of 2 Aor., Perl, and Pluperf. of \elirw. . 105
482. Inflection of <f>aLvo) (Liquid Forms) 106, 107
483-485. Eemarks on Verbs in w , 108
486-491. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of
Verbs with Consonant Stems ..,..,... 108-111
492, 493. Contract Verbs in aw, ew, and ow 112-114
494. Synopsis of ri/idw, 0iX&>, 17X60;, dTjp&u 115
495-499. Remarks on Contract Verbs 115, 116
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ju.
500-503. General Character of Verbs in /u. Two Classes, 116
604, 505. Synopsis of ftrrTj/u, rl6ritu, 5J5w/xi, and 5ekvu/*i in
Present and Second Aorist Systems 116, 117
506. Inflection of peculiar Tenses of these Verbs 117-122
507, 508. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the ju-fonn 123
509. Full Synopsis of these Verbs in Indicative 123, 124
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION.
510-512. Syllabic and Temporal Augment defined 124, 125
513-519. Augment of Imperfect and Aorist Indicative 125
520-528. Reduplication of Peri, Pluperf., and Put. Perl . . 126, 127
529-533. Attic Reduplication 127, 128
534-536. Reduplicated Aorists and Presents 128
537-539. Syllabic Augment prefixed to a Vowel 128, 129
640-546. Augment and Reduplication of Compound Verbs, 129, 130
647-550. Omission of Augment and Reduplication 130, 131
ENDINGS.
551. Personal Endings 131
652. Personal Endings of Indie., Subj., and Opt 131
653. Personal Endings of Imperative 131
664, 555. Endings of Infinitive, etc 132
656. Remarks on the Endings 132,133
TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OF INFLECTION.
667-560. Simple and Complex Tense Stems 133, 134
561 . Tense Suffixes 134
662. Optative Suffix , 134
563. Two Forms of Inflection of Verbs 134
664. The Simple Form 135
666. The Common Form 185, 136
CONTENTS.
xiii
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE SYSTEMS.
SBCTIONS PAGES
566. General Statement 136
567. Formation of the Present Stem from the Verb
Stem 136
568-622. Eight Classes of Verbs 136-143
623-633. Inflection of Present and Imperfect Indicative . . . 143, 144
634-659. Modification of the Stem in certain Tense Systems, 145-149
660-717. Formation of Tense Stems, and Inflection of Tense
Systems in Indicative 149-158
FORMATION OF DEPENDENT MOODS AND PARTICIPLE.
718-729. Subjunctive 159, 160
730-745. Optative 160-163
746-758. Imperative 163-165
759-769. Infinitive 165,166
770-775. Participles 166, 167
776. Verbals in -ros and -reos 167
DIALECTS.
777-783. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in w 167-170
784-786. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs 170-172
787-792. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in / 172, 173
ENUMERATION AND CLASSIFICATION OF MI-FORMS.
793-797. Enumeration of Presents in m 173, 174
798-803. Second Aorists of the /it-form 175, 176
804. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the /-form. . . 176, 177
805. Irregular Verbs of the /xt-f orm 177
806-821. Inflection of dpi, el/xi, %u, <t>-rjiJ.l, ^/xai, mi/tai, and
o?5a . , 177-183
PART III.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
822. Simple and Compound Words
184
SIMPLE WORDS.
823-825. Primitives and Denominatives 184, 185
826-831. Suffixes 185
FORMATION OF NOUNS.
832-840. Primitives , 186,187
841-848. Denominatives 187,188
xiy
CONTENTS.
SECTIONS PAGBS
849-858. Formation of Adjectives 189, 190
859, 860. Formation of Adverbs 190
861-868. Denominative Verbs 190, 191
COMPOUND WORDS.
869, 870. Division of the Subject 191
871-877. First Part of Compound Word 192,193
878-882. Last Part of Compound Word 193, 194
883-889. Meaning of Compounds 194,196
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
890-893. Subject, Predicate, Object 19C
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
894. Subject Nominative of Finite Verb 197
895. 1. Subject Accusative of Infinitive 197
2, 3. Subject of Infinitive omitted 197
896-898. Subject Nom. omitted, Impersonal Verbs, etc. . . . 197, 198
899-906. Subject Nominative and Verb 198, 199
907-910. Predicate in same Case as Subject 199
APPOSITION.
911-917. Various Forms of Apposition 200, 201
ADJECTIVES.
918-926. Adjectives agreeing with Nouns 201, 202
927-931 . Adjectives belonging to omitted Subject of Infinitive, 202-204
932-934. Adjectives used as Nouns 204
THE ARTICLE.
935-940. Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun) 204-206
941-958. Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article) .... 206-208
959-980. Position of the Article 208-212
981-984. Pronominal Article in Attic (6 fiAv . . . 6 5<?, etc.) . . 212
PRONOUNS.
985-992. Personal and Intensive Pronouns 213, 214
993-997. Reflexive Pronouns 214, 215
CONTENTS.
XV
SECTIONS PASES
998-1003. Possessive Pronouns 215, 216
1004-1010. Demonstrative Pronouns 216, 217
1011-1014. Interrogative Pronoun 217
1015-1018. Indefinite Pronoun 217, 218
1019-1025. Relative Pronoun as related to its Antecedent. . 218, 219
1026-1030. Relative with omitted Antecedent 219, 220
1031-1038. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives 220-222
1039. Relative in Exclamations 222
1040-1041. Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new Case . . 222
THE CASES.
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
1042. General Remark on the Cases 222
1043. Nominative, as Subject or Predicate 222
1044. Vocative used in addressing 222
1045. Nominative used for Vocative 225
ACCUSATIVE.
1046. Various Functions of the Accusative 223
1047-1050. Accusative of Direct (External) Object 223
1051-1057. Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object) 223-226
J058, 1059. Accusative of Specification or Limitation 226
1060,1061. Adverbial Accusative 226
1062-1064. Accusative of Extent of Time or Space 226
1065. Terminal Accusative (Poetic) 226, 227
1066-1068. Accusative after N^ and md 227
Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying
1069-1072. To f sk, teach, remind, clothe, conceal, deprive,
divide, etc 227
1073-1075. To do anything to or say anything of a person
or thing 228
1076. Cognate and Object Accusative together 228
1077-1082. Predicate and Object Accusative together 228, 229
GENITIVE.
1083. Various Functions of the Genitive 229
1084. Genitive after Nouns (Attributive) 229, 230
1085-1087. Seven Classes of Attributive Genitive 230
1088-1092. Partitive Genitive (specially) 231, 232
Genitive after Verbs :
1093-1096. Predicate Genitive 232, 233
1097, 1098. Genitive expressing Part . . . 233
XVI
CONTENTS.
SECTIONS PAGES
With verbs signifying
1099-1101. To take hold of, touch, aim at, claim, hit, miss,
begin, etc 233, 234
1102-1108. To taste, smell, hear, perceive, remember, for-
get, desire, spare, neglect, admire, despise. . 234,236
1109-1111. To rule, lead, or direct 236
1112-1116. Fulness or Want 236
1117-1120. Genitive of Separation and Comparison 237, 238
1121-1125. Genitive with Verbs of Accusing, Convicting,
Acquitting, and Condemning (with Accus.) . . 238, 239
1126-1128. Genitive of Cause 239
1129. Causal Genitive in Exclamations 239
1130. Genitive of Source 239
1131. Genitive of Agent or Instrument (Poetic) 240
1132. Genitive after Compound Verbs 240
1133-1135. Genitive of Price or Value 240, 241
1136. Genitive of Time within which 241
1137-1138. Genitive of Place within which (chiefly Poetic) 241
1139-1142. Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives 242, 243
1143-1145. Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting
Possession, etc 243
1146. Genitive with certain Adject, of Place 243
1147-1151. Genitive with Adverbs 243, 244
1152. Genitive Absolute (see also 1568) 244
1153-1156. Genitive with Comparatives 244, 245
DATIVE.
1157. Various Functions of the Dative 245
Dative expressing to or for:
1158. Dative of Indirect Object 245
1159-1163. Dative after certain Intransitive Verbri 245, 246
1164. Dative with Verbs of Ruling, etc 247
1165-1170. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage 247, 248
1171. Ethical Dative : 248
1172. Dative of Relation 248
1173. Dative of Possession (with efcf, etc.) 248
1174. Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding
Verbs 249
1175-1178. Dative of Resemblance, Union, and Approach 249, 250
1179, 1180. Dative after Compound Verbs 250, 251
1181,1182. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instru-
ment 251
1183. Dative after xp^o, wse 251
1184, 1185. Dative of Degree of Difference (with Compara-
tives) , 261, 252
CONTENTS.
XVll
SECTIONS , PAGES
1186, 1187. Dative of Agent (with Perfect and Pluperfect
Passive) 252
1188. Dative of Agent (with Verbal in -Teas or -TeW) 252
1189-1191. Dative of Accompaniment (sometimes with
aur<k) 252, 253
1192-1195. Dative of Time 253
1196. Dative of Place (Poetic) 253
1197. " " " Occasional Use in Prose (Names
of Attic Demes) 254
1198. Local Datives as Adverbs 254
PREPOSITIONS.
1199. Prepositions originally Adverbs 254
1200. Improper Prepositions '. 254
1201. Prepositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusa-
tive 254
1202-1219. Uses of the Prepositions 254-262
1220. Uses of the Improper Prepositions 262
1221-1226. Remark on the Prepositions 262, 263
1227. Prepositions in Composition taking their own
Cases. . . i 264
ADVERBS.
1228, 1229. Adverbs qualifying Verbs, Adjectives, and Ad-
verbs 264
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
VOICES.
1230-1232. Active Voice 264,265
1233. Passive Voice 265
1234-1237. Agent after Passive Verbs (M and Genitive) 265
1238. Dative of Agent (see also 1186-1188) 265
1239. Passive Construction when Active has two
Cases 265, 266
1240. Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive. 266
1241. Intransitive Active forms used as Passives .... 266
1242-1248. Middle Voice (three uses) 267, 268
TENSES.
1249. Two relations denoted by the Tenses 268
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
1250-1266. Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) 268-271
1267-1270. Primary and Secondary Tenses 27 1, 272
xvm
CONTENTS.
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
SECTIONS A. NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. PAGES
1271. Present and Aorist chiefly used 272
1272. Distinction between Present and Aorist here. . . 272
1273-1275. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) 272, 273
1276-1278. Future Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse (ex-
ceptional) 273
B. IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1279. Definition of Indirect Discourse 273
1280-1284. Optative and Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. . . 274
1285. Present Infin. and Optative include Imperfect. . 274
1286. Infinitive after Verbs of Hoping, Promising, etc.
(two Constructions allowed) 275
1287. Future Optative used only in Indirect Discourse 275
III. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1288. Expressing time relatively to leading Verb 275
1289. Present Participle as Imperfect 275, 276
1290. Aorist sometimes denoting same time as leading
Verb 276
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
1291. Gnomic Present, expressing Habit or General Truth 276
1292-1294. Gnomic Aorist " " " " 276
1295. Gnomic Perfect " " " 276
1296-1298. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with &v 276, 277
THE PABTICIiE "Av.
1299-1301. Two Uses of &v 277
"Av with the Indicative :
1302. Never with Present or Perfect 277
1303. With Future (chiefly Homeric) 277, 278
1304. With Secondary Tenses 278
1305. "Av with the Subjunctive 278
1306, 1307. "Av with the Optative (always Potential) 278
1308, 1309. "Av with the Infinitive and Participle (Potential) 278, 279
1310,1311. Position of &v 279,280
1312. "Av repeated in long Apodosis 280
1313-1316. Special Uses of &v 280
THE MOODS.
GENERAL STATEMENT AND CLASSIFICATION.
1317-1319. Various Uses of Indicative 280, 281
1320, 1321. Various Uses of Subjunctive 281
CONTENTS. xix
SECTIONS PAGES
1322, 1323. Various Uses of Optative 281, 282
1324. The Imperative 282
1325. The Infinitive, Participle, etc 283
1326. Classification of Constructions of the Moods... 283
I. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE AND INDICATIVE.
1327-1334. Potential Optative with &v 283-285
1335-1341, Potential Indicative with &v 285, 286
II. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SEN-
TENCES. INDEPENDENT SENTENCES WITH prj OR OTTCOS.
1342, 1343. Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, etc. . . 287
1344, 1345. First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations ... 287
1346, 1347. Present Imper. or Aorist Subj. in Prohibitions 287
1348, 1349. Independent Subjunctive in Homer with /wj, ex-
pressing fear or anxiety 287, 288
1350, 1351. Subjunctive or Indicative with itf or ^ 06 in
cautious assertions or negations 288
1352-1354. Future Indicative with &TWS and STTWS ^ in
Commands and Prohibitions 288
III. HOMERIC SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE.
INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
1355-1357. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as simple Future 288, 289
1358, 1359. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt) 289
IV. SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH OV ftlj.
1360, 1361. As Emphatic Future and in Prohibitions 289
V. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER /a, cos, O7TG>S, O<f>pa,
AND firj.
1362, 1363. Three Classes of these Clauses 290
1364. Negative Particle in these Clauses 290
I. PURE FINAL CLAUSES (AFTER ALL THE FINAL PARTICLES) :
1365-1368. With Subjunctive and Optative 290, 291
1369, 1370. With Subjunctive after Secondary Tenses 291
1371. With the Past Tenses of the Indicative 292
II. OBJECT CLAUSES WITH #7TWS AFTER VERBS OF Striving ETC. :
1372. With Future Indicative or Optative 292
1373. Same construction with Verbs of exhorting etc. 292
1374-1376. Present or Aorist Subjunctive or Optative here 292, 293
1377. Homeric Subj. and Opt. with torws or w$ 293
XX CONTENTS.
SECTIONS PAOK&
III. CLAUSES WITH /*ij AFTER VERBS OF Fearing :
1378. With Subjunctive and Optative 293
1379. With Future Indicative (rare) 293
1380. With Present or Past Tenses of Indicative 294
VI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1381. Definition of Protasis and Apodosis 294
1382. Use of Av (Horn. /c<?) in Protasis and Apodosis. . 294
1383. Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodosis 294
1384. Distinction of Particular and General Sup-
positions 294, 295
1385-1389. Classification of Conditional Sentences 295, 296
I. PRESENT OR PAST CONDITIONS WITH NOTHING IMPLIED.
1390. Simple Supposition (chiefly Particular) with
Indicative 296, 297
1391.' Future Indicative denoting Present Intention . . 297
1393-1396. Present and Past General Suppositions 297, 298
II. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPOSITIONS
CONTRARY TO FACT.
1397. Past, Tenses of Indicative (&v in Apodosis) 298, 299
1398. Present Optative used here in Homer in Present
Conditions . . . 299
1399. Optative with i<4 in Homer rarely Past in Apodosis 299
1400-1402. "E5et, XP^"> etc. with Infinitive in Apodosis
without &v 299, 300
III. FUTURE CONDITIONS, MORE VIVID FORM.
1403, 1404. Subjunctive with tdv in Protasis 300
1405. Future Indicative with el in Protasis 300
1406, 1407. Subjunctive with simple el (in Homer) 301
IV. FUTURE CONDITIONS, LESS VIVID FORM.
1408-1412. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis 301
PECULIAR FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1413. Protasis contained in Participle or other Word . . 301, 302
1414-1417. Ellipsis of Protasis or Apodosis 302
1418. Infinitive or Participle in Indirect Discourse
forming Apodosis '. 303
1419. Infinitive (not in Indirect Discourse) forming
Apodosis 303
1420. Apodosis implied in Context 303
1421. Protasis and Apodosis of different Classes 303, 304
1422. A<? introducing an Apodosis 304
1423, 1424. El after Verbs of Wondering (tfau/^w) etc 304
CONTENTS.
VII. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
1425. Eelative including Temporal Clauses 305
1426. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained . . 305
1427. Relative with Definite Antecedent 305
1428. Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. Condi-
tional Relative 305, 306
1429. Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence
corresponding to those of ordinary Protasis
(1385-1389) 306
1430. I. (a) Simple Present or Past Conditions 306
1431, 1432. (&) Present and Past General Conditions 306, 307
1433. II. Present and Past Unfulfilled Conditions ... 307
1434, 1435. III. Future Conditions (more Vivid Form) 307
1436. IV. Future Conditions (less Vivid Form) 307
1437, 1438. Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences 307, 308
1439-1441. Assimilation in 'Conditional Relative Sentences 308, 309
1442-1444. Relative Clauses expressing Purpose 309
1445-1448. Relative Clauses expressing Result 309, 310
1449-1459. Consecutive Clauses with wore or cJs, with
Infinitive and Finite Moods 310, 311
1460. 'E</>' v or e0' <re with Infin. or Fut. Ind 311
1461, 1462. Causal Relative Sentences 312
TEMPORAL PARTICLES SIGNIFYING Until AND Before.
1463-1468. Constructions after ws, eo-re, &xP<-> f^XP l i ##/>
until , 312, 313
1469-1473. Ilplv with the Infinitive and the Finite Moods. . 313, 314
1474. Ilplv ^ irpbrepov #, TrpdffBev %, etc. used like irplv ' 314
VIII. INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1475. Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions 814,315
1476-1479. Indirect Quotations and Questions, how introduced 315
1480. Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse .... 315
1481-1486. General Principles of Indirect Discourse. Use
of &v. Negative Particles ...... 316, 316
SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1487. Indicative and Optative after tfri or s, and in
Indirect Questions 816, 317
1488. Pres. Opt. occasionally represents Imperfect . . . 317
1489. Pres. and Perf . changed to Iniperf. and Pluperf. 817
1490-1492. Subjunctive or Optative in Indirect Questions,
representing Interrogative Subjunctive ...... 817, 318
1493. Indicative or Optative with &v (unchanged) .... 818
1494. Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotations 318, 319
XX11
CONTENTS.
SECTIONS
1495.
1496.
When Infin. is said to be in Indirect Discourse
Negative of Infin. and Part, (sometimes /*??) . . .
PAGES
319
319
INDIRECT QUOTATION OP COMPLEX SENTENCBS.
1497. Kule for Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation 319, 320
1498. One Verb changed to Optative, another un-
changed 320
1499. Dependent Aorist Indie, not changed to Optative 320
1500,1501. Special Cases 320
1502, 1503. Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse,
independently of the rest of the .Sentence.
Four Classes 321, 322
1604. Oi>x 3ri,
IX. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
1505. Causal Sentences with Indicative 322, 323
1506. Optative sometimes used after Past Tenses .... 323
X. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
1507-1 MO. Optative in Wishes (with or without cf0e etc.) . . 323, 324
1511. Indicative in Wishes (with et6e etc.) ......... 324
1512-1515. "ftyeXoi* with Infinitive in Wishes 824, 325
Jutf JTJLPJ l'l k l V JU.
1516. Infinitive as Verbal Noun (with and" without
Article) 326
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE.
1617. Infinitive as Subject, Predicate, or Appositive. 325
1518. Infinitive as Object of a Verb :
1519-1521. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and
Aorist) , . 326
1522-1525. In Indirect Discourse (with Time of Tenses
preserved) 326, 327
1626-1531. Infinitive with Adjectives, Adverbs, and Nouns 328
1632, 1533. Infinitive of Purpose (or Kesult, Horn.) , . 329
1634, 1535. Absolute Infinitive. 'EKO) v elvat etc 329
1636-1540. Infinitive in Commands, Wishes, Laws, etc 329, 330
INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE.
1541. Character of Articular Infinitive . 330
1642-1544. Infinitive with r6 as Subject or Object 330, 331
1545. Infinitive with r6 with Adjectives and Nouns . . 331
1646. Infinitive with rpv, ry t or r6 after Prepositions 381
CONTENTS.
xxin
1547, 1548. Infin. with rod or r<p in Various Constructions 331, 332
1549-1553. Infinitive with or without rov or TOV /J,TJ, r6 or rb
fj.7i (or /A?/ ou), after Verbs of Hindrance etc. 332,333
1554. Infinitive (generally with r6) in Exclamations 333
1555. Infinitive with Adjuncts and r6, as Noun 333
THE PAKTICIPLE.
1557, 1558. Participle as Verbal Adjective. Three Uses . . 334
ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE.
1559. Participle qualifying a Noun (as Adjective) 334
1560, 1561. Participle with Article as Substantive 334, 335
1562. Neuter Participle with Article as Abstract Noun 335
CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
1563, 1-8. Various Uses of this Participle 335, 336
1564-1567. Peculiar Idioms 336,337
1568. Genitive Absolute 337
1569, 1570. Accusative Absolute 337
1571. "ttv omitted (rarely) 337, 338
1572-1577. Various Adverbs with Circumstantial Participle 338, 339
SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
1578, 1579. Showing to what the action of the Verb relates
NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
339
1580, 1581.
1582, 1583.
1584.
1585.
1586.
1587.
1588.
1589.
1590.
1591, 1592.
1593.
With Verbs signifying to begin, continue, cease,
repent, etc ............................... 339, 340
With Verbs signifying to perceive, find, or repre-
sent .................. . .................. 340
Rov\6fjt,evo$, i)d6fju-vos, etc., agreeing with Dative 340
With irepiopdw and tyopdu, overlook, see, allow 340
With \av6dvw, rvyxdvu, and <j>edvw .......... . 340, 341
With 5iare\X ofto/tat, etc ........ . ...... _____ 341
IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
Participle (like Infin.) with verbs signifying to
see, hear, learn, perceive, know, etc ......... 341, 342
A^X6s or 0ai>ep6s el/ju with Participle ........... 342
2vvoi8a and ffvyyiyvAffKu with a Participle in
Nominative or Dative ..................... 342
Verbs of 1588 with other Constructions ....... 342
'fls with Participle of Indirect Discourse ...... . 342
XXIV
CONTENTS.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -T&S AND -Wov.
SECTIONS PAGES
1594. Two Constructions 343
1595,1596. Personal Construction of Verbal in -Tfos 343
1597-1599. Impersonal Verbal in -reov (or -rea) 343
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
1600. Direct and Indirect Interrogatives 344
1601. Two or more Interrogatives with one Verb 344
1602. Interrogative as Predicate 344
1603. Direct Interrogatives, dpa, ^, ou, /XT), /icDv, 01)-
KOVV : 344
1604. "AXXo TI t? ; or &\\o n; 345
1605. Indirect Questions with el (Homeric $ or ef) ... 345
1606. Alternative Questions, ILorepov . . . #, etc. . . . 345
NEGATIVES.
1607. Two negatives, 01) and pj 345
1608. Oi) with independent Indicative and Optative . . 345
1609. E/ 01) or el ^ in Indirect Questions 345
1610. Mr) with Subjunctive and Imperative 346
1611. Negative with Infinitive 346
1612-1614. Negative with Participles and Adjectives 346
1615. Mi) with Infin. after Verbs with Negative Idea 346
1616, 1617. Mr/ otf with Infinitive (after Negative Leading
Verb) 34?
1618,1619. Two or more Negatives in one Clause 347
1620, 1621.
1622-1624.
1625.
1626.
1627, 1628.
1629, 1630.
1631.
1632.
1633.
1634.
PART Y.
VERSIFICATION.
Foot. Ictus. Arsis and Thesis.
Rhythm and Metre
Ictus and Word-accent
Long and Short Syllables. Tunes
348
350
350
350
Enumeration of Feet 350, 351
Place of the Ictus in a Foot 351
Resolution and Contraction 351, 352
Syncope 352
Irrational Time ' 352
Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest 352
CONTENTS.
xxv
SECTIONS PAGES
1635. Anacrusis 352
1636. Syllaba Anceps 352
1637. Rhythmical Series and Verse 353
1638. Close of Verse 353
1639. Catalexis 353
1640. Pauses 353
1641. Brachycatalectic and Hypercatalectic Verses ... 353
1642-1644. Caesura and Diaeresis 353, 354
1645. Names of Verses 354
1646. Monometers, Dimeters, etc 354
1647. Tripodies, Tetrapodies, etc 355
1648. Rising and Falling Rhythms 355
1649. Distichs, Systems, Strophes, etc 355
1650-1656. Trochaic Rhythms 355^357
1657-1667. Iambic Rhythms 357-360
1668-1674. Dactylic Rhythms 360-362
1675-1678. Anapaestic Rhythms 362-364
1679-1683. Logaoedic Rhythms 364-366
1684, 1685. Dactylo-Epitritic Rhythms 366, 367
1686. Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Times 367
1687. Choriambic Rhythms 367
1688. Ionic Rhythms 367
1689. Cretic and Paeonic Rhythms 368
1690. Bacchic Rhythms 368
1691. Dochmiacs 368
APPENDIX.
1692. CATALOGUE OF VERBS . . 369-406
PARALLEL REFERENCES
FROM THE EDITION OF 1879 TO THE PRESENT EDITION.
OLD
1
4,1
Notel
N.2
Note
Note
N.I
N.2
2
5,1
2
6
1
2
Note
Note
Note
Note
N.I
N.2
Remark
10
11,1
(a)
(6)
N.I
N.2
N.3
xxvi
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD
1
11, 2, N. 4
55
17, 1, Note
2
N. 5
42
2
3
12,1
48
Note
5
2
54
3
6
N.I
51
18, 1, 2
7
N.2
50
2, Note
10
N. 3
53
19,1
11
N. 4
52
2
12
13,1
56
3
13
N.I
57; 59
N.I
15
N.2
60
N.2
16
2
62; 63
20
18
3
63
1,2,3
19
14,1
64
21,1
20
2
65
Bern.
21; 22
N.I
66
N.I
23; 24
N.2
67
N.2
25
15,1
68,1
2
26
2
69
3
34
16
70
22,1
35; 36
1
71
2
37
N.I
72
N.I
38,2
N.2
73
N.2
39,1
2
74
23,1
38,1
3
75
Note
,1&2
Note
76; 77
2
38,4
4, Note
88
24,1
39,3
5
78,1
Note
>,4&5
6
78, 2'& 3
2
40,1
N.I
79
3
40,2
N.2
80
25,1
47
N.3
81
Note
42
N.4
83
2
43,1
7
84
Note
43,2
(a)
84,1
3
44
(&)
84,3
N.I
45
(c)
84,4
N.2
46
(d)
84,5 & 6
26
47,2
17,1
92; 93
N.I
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
XXVll
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD NEW
26 N.2
134
40
189
53, 2, N. 2 319
N. 3 (1)
131,4;
41
190
3 263
133,2
Note
191
N. 1 265
(2)
131, 5;
42,1
192; 193
N.2 266
131,2
Note
195
N. 3 267
(3)
131, 1 ;
2
196; 197
N.4 264
133,3
N.I
199
54 268
N.4
135
N.2
200
Note 269; 270
27
140
43
201
55 242; 245
1
141,1
Note
203
N.I 238-241; 243; 244
2
141,2
44
204
N. 2 248
3
141,3
45,1
205
N. 3 245 ; 247
4
141,4
Note
206
56, 1 228
28, 1-3
142; 143
2
207
2 & Note 237, 1
N.I
144
Note
167; 208
57 273
N.2
145
46
209
1 274, 1
N. 3
146
1
209,4
N. 1 274; 275
29
136; 137
2
209,1
N.2 276; 279
N.I
138
3
209,2
2 277, 1 ; 278
N.2
139
4
209,3
3 277, 2; 278
30,1
147
N.I 212,1; 210, 1&3
58 280
2
148
N.2
212,2
1-3 281-285
3
149
N.3
213
59 286
31
150
47,1
214,1;
60, 1 287
32,1
151
214, 2 & 3 ; 216
2 288
2
152
N.I
217
3 289
Note
153; 154
N.2
218
4 290
33,1
155
48, 1
219
5 291
2
156
2
220-222
61 292-294
N.I
157
3
223
N. 1 295
N.2
158
49
224
N.2 296
N.3
159
50
225
N.3 297
3
160; 161
51,1
226
62, 1, 2 298
N.I
162
2
208,3
3 299-301
N.2
163
Note
88, 1 ; 90, 3
Note 302
34
164; 165
52,1
227
63 304; 506
Note
166
Note
85; 88,1
Note 307
35
168
2
228; 234
64 305; 306
36
169
N.I
228; 230; 235
65 310
Note
170
N.2
39,2
66 312; 313
37,1
171; 179
N.3
231
N.I 333
2
173-175
N.4
232
N.2 344
N.I
182
53
249; 256
N. 3 316
N.2
177
1
249; 250
N.4 343; 345
N.3, 4
178
N.I
254
67,1,2 318-320; 324;
38
183; 184
N.2
251
325; 328; 329
N.I
186
N.3
255
N. 1 322 ; 74
N.2
187
2
257
N. 2 332
39
188
N.I
261
N. 3 325-327
XXV111
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
68 334;
335; 338
79, 1, N. 5
396
93, 1
464
Note
336; 337
N. 6
397
2 (a)-(c)
465; 466
69
340; 341
N. 7
398
3
467
Note
342
2
399; 989, 2
Note
468
70
346
Note
400
94 456
; 458; 561
N.I
347
80
401
95, 1
469; 470
N.2
348
Note
402; 403
I
474
71
350
81
404
II
476
N.I
351
82
406
III
478
N.2
352
N.I
407
Note
472
N.3
353
N.2
408
2,1
474; 475
N.4
354
83
409
II
477
N.5
355
N.I
411
III
479
72,1
357
N.2
412
Note
473
2
358
N.3 '
413
96, I
480
N.I
359
84,1
415
II
481
N.2
360
2
416
III
482
73,1
361
N.I
417
N.I
483
Note
362
N.2
418
N. 2
484
2
363
3
419
N. 3
485
3
364
85
420
97, 1&2
486, 1&2
74,1
365
86
421; 425
3
487,1
Note
366
N.I
426
4
487,2
2
367
N.2
424; 428
N.I
488
Note
368
87,1
429; 430
N.2
489
75
369
Note
434
N.3
490
N.I
370
2
436
98
492
N.2
371
Note
438
Rem.
493
76
372; 373
88,1
441
N.I
495
Note
374
Note
442
N.2
496
77,1
375
2
443
N.3
497
N.I
376; 377
Note
444
N. 4
498
N.2
378
89
445
N.5
499
N.3
379
Note
446
N. 6
737
2
380
90,1
447
99, 1
510; 520
N.I 381; 382,2
2
448
2 (a)
511, 1
N. 2 (a)
382, 1
N.I
449
(&)
511,2
(&)
382,3
N.2
450
(?)
521
N. 3
383
N.3
451
Rem.
512; 520
N. 4
384
91
452; 453
100,1
513
N.5
385
Note
454
2
515
78
386
92, 1,2 & Note 458;
N.I
516
N.I
387
459; 567
N.2
517
N.2
388
3
460
N.3
534
79,1
389
Note
461
N. 4
535
N.I
391; 392
4
459
N.5
514
N.2
393
I-VII
455-457
101, 1
521
N.3
394
5
462
Note
522
K.4
395
6
463
2
523
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD NEW
OLD NEW
OLD NEW
101, 2, N. I 524
108, V, N. 1 (6) 611
110, IV ; (a) 698
N. 2 525
N. 2 612
(l)-(5) 699-
3 526
VI 613
702
4 527
N. 1 615
(6) 682; 683
102 529-531
N. 2 616
(l)-(5) 684
N. 1 532
N. 3 617
Note 686; 694
N. 2 533
N. 4 618
(c) 703
103 518
VII 653; 654
N.I 704
Note 519
Note 656
N. 2 705
104 537
VIII 621
(d) 687; 692
N.I 538
Note 622
N.I 690
N. 2 539
Kern. 634
N. 2 See 693
105, 1 540
109, 1 635 ; 636
N. 3 691 ; 773
N. 1 541
N. 1 471; 638
N. 4 774
N. 2 543
N. 2 639
V 675
N. 3 544
2 640; 641
N. 1 676
2 545, 1
3 643; 644
N. 2 677
Note 545, 2
N. 1 693 ; 689
N. 3 678
3 546
N. 2 See 692 VI 707 ; 710
106, 1 547; 548
4 645
N. 1 708
Note 550
N.I 646
N. 2, 3 709
2 549
N. 2 711
VII 712; 715
107 567
5 672
N. 1 716
108 668
6 647
N. 2 713
I 569
Note 648
N. 3 714
Note 571
7 (a) 649
111 717
II, 1 572
(&) 650
112, 1 551
2 574
(c) 651; 652
2 552
Note 575; 642
8 653; 657
Note 556
III 576-578
(a) 658, 1
3, 4 557-561
IV 579
(6) 658, 2
113, 1 See 561, 1 ; 623
1 (a) 580
Note 659
2, N. 1 565, 6; 624
Note 582; 583
Rem. 661
N.2 625
(6) 585; 588
110, 1 660
N. 3 556, 2
N.I 590
II, 1 662
N. 5 556, 3
N. 2 591
2 663
114 718
2 592
N. 1 (a) 665, 1
(end) 721
(c) 593
(6) 665, 2
N.I 723; 725
(ti) 594; 596
(c) 665, 3
N.2 724; 727
N. 1 598
(d) 665,4
115 730
N.2 599
N. 2 666
1 731
N. 3 600
N. 3 667
2 740
3 (e) 601
N. 4 668
3 739
Note 602
III, 1 669
4 737
V, 1 603
N. 1 670
N.I 735
2 605
N. 2 671
N. 2 732
P. 607
2 672
116, 1 553
4 608
N. 1 673
2 746; 747
N. 1 (a; 610
No 2 674
3 757
XXX
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD NEW
OLD NEW
OLD KB*
117, 1 564; 759; 765
122, 2, N. 4 724
129, 1 832
1 (end) 766-769
N.5 728; 631
2 (a) 833, 1; 841
2 770; 772; 775
N. 6 803, 1
Note 841
Note 337
123,1 504; 605
(b) 833, 1,2; 841
3 776, 1
2 506
Note 833, 3
N. 1 776, 2
3 509
3 834
N. 2 776, 3
124,1 607; 508
N.I 835
118,1 721; 733
2 804
N.2 836
Note 734
125, 1, 2 794, 1, 2
4 837
2 720; 733
N.I 795
Note 837 (end)
Note 751; 748
N.2 796
5 838
3 706
3 798; 799
Note 839
5 486, 2; 701
N.I 801
6 843
Note 701
N.2 802; 803, 2
7 842 (837)
6 1254
4 804
Note 842
119, 1-9 777 < l-
5 797
8 844
10 778
126, 1-6 787, 1-5
Note 845
11 779
6 800,2
9 846
12 (a) 780, 1
7 (a) 788, 1
(a)-(c) 846, 1-3
(b) 780,2
(c) 780, 3
(6) 788, 2
(c) 788,3
Note 847
10 848, 1
<4> 780,4
8 789
Note 848, 2
IS 781
9 791
11 849, 1
14 782
10 792
12 850
16 783
127 805
13 851
330, 1 (a) 784, 1
I 806,1
14 852
(6) 784, 2
N.I, 2 806, 2, 3; 807
Note 853
(c) 784, 3
II 808, 1
15 854
(4) 784, 4
N.l-3 808,2; 809
16 849, 4
() 784, 5
HI 810, 1
17 855
3 (a) 785, 1
N.1,2 810,2; 811
18 859; 860
<6> 785, 2
IV 812
130, 1-8 861, 1-8
(c) 785, 3
N. 1, 2 813
N.I 868
<d) 785, 4
V 814-816
N.2 866
3 (a) 786,1
Note 817
N. 3 867
<6) 786,2
VI 818
131 869
Bern, before 121
Note 819
Bern. 870
468; 500; 501
VII 820
1 871
121,1 557; 558; 627
Note 821
Note 872
N.I 801; 802,1
128, 1 822
2 873
N.2 629
2 (a) 823
(a) 873, 1
2 ()-(/) 564,1-6
(6) 824
(6) 873, 2
3 794,2
Note 825
3 874
122 002; 793
3 826
4 (a)-(d) 876, 1-4
1 794
N. 1 827
N. 1 876
2 797
N.2 828
N. 2 877
N. 1 630; 741
N. 3 829
5 878
N.2 729; 742
N.4 830
6 879; 881
N. 3 632
N.5 831
Note 880
PARALLEL REFERENCES,
XXXi
M
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
131,7
882
138, N. 7
926
143,
2
984
132
883
N. 8
927; 928
144,
1
985
1
884
139,1
932,1
Note
986
Note
885
Note
932,2
2 (a)
987
2
886
2
933
(&)
988
Note
887
Note
934
145.
1 t
>89, 1
3
888
140
935
Note
990
Bern.
889
N.I
936
2 *
189,3
133,1
890
N. 2 (o)-(d)
Note
992
N.I
891
937, 1-4
146
993
2
892
N.3
938
N.I
994
Note
893
N.4
939
N.2
995
134,1
894
N.5
940
N.3
996
2
895,1
141
941
147
998
3
895, 2 & 3
N.I
942
N.I
999
N.I
896
(a)
943
N.2
1000
N. 1 (a)-(e)
(&)
944
N.3
1002
897, 1-5
(c)
945; 946
N.4
1003
N.2
898
(d)
947
148
1004
135,1
899,1
N.2
949
N.I
1005
2
899,2
N.3
952
N.2
1006
3
900
N.4
953
N.3
1007
N.I
901
N.5
954
N.4
1010
N.2
902
N.6
955,1
149,
1
1011
N. 3
903
N.7
955, 2
2
1012
N.4
904
N.8
956
(last part)
1013
N.6
905
142,1 959, 1; 962
Note
1014
136
907
Note
960
150
1015
Bern.
908
2
959,2
Note
1017
N.I
909
Bern.
963
151
1019
N.2
910
N.I
964
N.I
1020
N. 3 (a)
927; 928
N.2
965
N. 2 (a) 1021
,a,6
(&)
931
N. 3 (a)
966
(6) 1021, c
N.4
930
(&)
967
N.3
1023
137
911
N.4
968
N.4
1024
N.I
913
N.5
969
152
1026;
1027
N.2
914
N.6
970
N.I
1028
N.3
915
3 971;
972; 973
N.2
1029
N.4
916
4
974
N.3
1030
138
918
N.I
975
153
1031
Bern.
919
N.2
976
N.I
1032
N. 1 (a)
923
N. 3 (a)
977,1
N.2
1033
N. 2 (a)
924, a
(6)
977,2
N.3
1034
<M
924, 6
N.4
978
N.4
1035
(c)
925
N.5
979
N.5
1036
N.3
920
N.6
980
154
1037
N.4
921
143,1
981
Note
1038
N.5
388; 410
N.I
982
155
103S
x.e
922 N.S
983
1M
:o&>
XXX11
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD NEW
156, Note
1041
169,1
1094, 1 & 7
183 1152
Rem. before 157
1042
2
1095
Rem. before 184 1157
157,1
1043
Note
1096
184, 1 1158
2
1044
3
1094
2 1159; 1160
Note
1045
170,1
1097, 1
N. 1 (a) 1161
Rem. before 158
1046
2
1097, 2
(6) 1162
158
1047
Note
1098
N. 2 1163
N.I
1048
171,1
1099
3 11B5
N. 2
1049
Note
1100
N. 1 1166
N. 3
1050
2
1102
N. 2 1167
159
1051
N.I
1103
N.3 1168; 1169
Rem.
1052
N.2
1105
N. 4 1170
N.I
1053
N.3
1106
N. 5 1584
N.2
1054
Rem
1107; 1108
N. 6 1171
N.3
1055
3
1109; 1110
4 1173
N.4
1076
Note
1164
5 1172
N.5
1057
172,1
1112
185 1174
160,1
1058
2 -
1113
186 1175
Note
1059
N.I
1114
N. 1 1177
2 .
1060
N.2
(a) 1115
N. 2 1178
Note
1061
(6) 1116
187 1179; 1180
161
1062
173,1
1126
188, 1 1181
Note 1063;
1064
N.I
1127
N. 1 1182
162
1065
N.2
1128
N. 2 1183
163 1066;
1067
2
1121
2 1184; 1185
N.I
1067
Note
1123; 1124
3 1186; 1187
N.2
1068
3
1129
4 1188
164
1069
174
1117
5 1189; 1190
N.I
1070
175,1
1153
Note 1191
N.2
1071
N.I
1154
189 1192
N.3
1072
N.2
1156
N. 1 1193
165
1073
2
1120
N. 2 1194
N.I
1074
176,1
1130
190 1196
N.I (last pt.) 1241
2
1131
N. 1 1197
N.2
1075
177
1132
N. 2 1198
166
1077
178
1133
191 1199; 1200;
N.I
1078
Note
1135
1220
N.2
1080
179,1
1136 I-VI 1201-1219
N.3
1081
2
1137 (w. prepositions
N.4
1078
180
1139
alphabetically)
Rem. before 167
1083
1
1140
N. 1 1221
167
1084
N.I
1140
N. 2 1222, 1
1-5 1085
,1-5
N.2
1141
N. 3 1222, 2
6 1085, 7
2
1142
N. 4 1223
Note
1086
181
1143
N. 5 1224
166
1088
Note
1146
N-6 1225
N.I
1090
182, 1
1147
193 1227
N,9
1091
2
1148-1150
194 1228
N.3
1092
Now
1151
195 1230
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
XXXlll
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
195, N. 1
1231
205,2
1292
218, N. 1
1379
N.2
1232
N.I
1293
N.2
1350
196
1233
N.2
1294
N.3
1380
197,1
1234; 1236
3
1295
219,1
1381
N.I
1237
206
1296
2
1382
N.2
1239
Rem.
1297
3
1383, 1
2
1238
Note
1298
Note
1383, 2
198
1240
207
1299
220 1384; 1385-1387
199, 1-3
1242, 1-3
1
1299,1
Rem.
1 1388
Rem
1243
2
1299,2; 1300
Rem.
2 1389
N.I
1244
Rem
1301
221
1390
N.2
1245
208,1
1302
Note
1391
N. 3
1246; 1247
2
1303
222
1397
N. 4
1248
3
1304
N.I
1402
200
1250; 1251
209,1
1305, 1
N.2
1400
N.I
1252
2
1305,2
N.3
1398; 1399
N.2
1255
210
1306
223
1403
N. 3
(> 1256
Note
1307
Rem.
1404
(6) 1257
211
1308
N.I
1405
N. 4
1258
Note
1309
N.2
1406; 1305, 2
N. 5
(a) 1259, 1
212,1
1310
224
1408
(6) 1260
2
1312
N.I
1332; 1333
(c) 1259, 2
3
1313
N.2
1412
N. 6
1263
4
1314
225
1393, 1, 2
N. 7
1264
Note
1316
Rem.
1394
N. 8
1265
213,1
1317; 1318
N.I
1395
N. 9
1266
Rem
1319
N.2
1396
201
1267
2
1320
226, 1
1413
Rem.
1268
Rem.
1321
2 (a)
1329; 1340
N.I
1269
3
1322
(ft)
1327; 1328;
N.2
1270
Rem.
1323
1335; 1336
202
1271
4
1324
N.I
1330; 1328
1
1272
5
1325
N.2
1337
2
1273
214
1326
3
1418
N.I
1274
215
1362
4
1419
N.2
1275
Rem.
1363
N.I
1420
3 (a)
1276
N.I
1364
N.2
1416
(&)
1277
N.2
1362; 1368
227,1
1421,1
Note
1278
216,1
1365
Note
1421,2
4
1287
N.I
1366
2
1422
Rem. before 203 1279
N.2
1367
228
1423
203
1280; 1281
2
1369; 1370
Note
1424
N.I
1285
3
1371
Rem. before 229 1425
N.2
1286
217
1372
229
1426
N.3
1287
N.I
1374; 1375
230
1427
204
1288
N.2
1373
231
1428,1
N.I
1289
N.3
1377
Note
1428,2
N.2
1290
N. 4
1352-1354
232
1429
205,1
1291
218
1378
i
1430
xxxiv
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
OLD NEW
232,2
1433
247, N. 3
1500
265 1532
3
1434
N. 4
1501
Note 1533
Note
1435
248,1-4
1502, 1-4
266, 1 1449
4
1436
Note
1503
2 1453
233
1431
249,1
1478, 1
N. 1 1456
N.I
1432
2
1478, 2
N. 2 1449
N. 2
1438
250
1505
N. 3 1455
234
1437
Note
1506
N. 4 (a) 1458
235,1
1439
251, 1
1507
(6) 1531
2
1440
N.I
1508
N. 5 1457
Note
1441
N.2
1509
267 1460
236
1442
N. 3
1510
268 1534
N.I
1443
2
1511
269 1536
N. 2
1460
N.I
1512
Note 1536; 1537
N. 3
1444
N.2
1513
270 1537
237
1449
252
1342
Note 1538
Rem.
1450
Note
1343
271 1540
Note
1445
253
1344
272 1554
238
1461
Note
1345
273 1525
239,1
1464
254
1346
274 1470; 1471, 1
2 "
1465
Note
1347
Note 1474
N.I
1466; 1473
255
1355
275 1557
N.2
1467
Note
1356
276, 1 1559
240, 1
1469; 1471, 2
256
1358; 1359
2 1560
2
1470
257
1360
277 1563
Note
1474
Note
1361
1 1563,1
241,1
1475
258
1516
2 1563, 2 & 3
2
1476
259
1517
3 1563, 4
Note
1477
Note
1542
4 1563, 5
3
1479
260
1518
5 1563, 6
Note
1480
1
1519
6 1563, 7
242,1
1481
N.I
1520
N. 1 (rt) 1572
Note
1482
N.2
1543; 1544
(6) 1573
2
1483
2
1522
N. 2 (a) 1574
3
1484
N.I
1523
(6) 1575
Note
1485
N.2
1524
N.3 1576; 1577
4
1486; 1496
261, 1
1526
278, 1 1568
243
1487
N.I
1526; 1521
Note 1568
N.I
1488
N.2
1545
2 1569
N.2
1489
2
1528
Note 1570
244
1490
Rem.
1529
279 1578
N.I
1492
Note
1530
1 1580
N.2
1491
262,1
1546
N. 1 1581
245
1493
2
1547
N. 2 1262
246
1494
263,1
1549
2 1582
Note
1495
Note
1550
Note 1583
247
1497
2
1551
3 1585
N.I
1498
Note
1552
4 1586
N.2
1499
264
1555
Note 158T
PARALLEL REFERENCES.
XXXV
OLD
NEW
OLD
NEW
OL1>
NEW
280
1588
284, 3, Note
1623-1625
293, 1
1665,1
N.I
1589
285, 1
1626
2
1665,3
N.2
1590
2
1627
3
1664
N.3
1591; 1592
Note
1628
4
1658-1662
N.4
1593
3
1629
294
1668
281
1594
N.I
1630
295, 1
1674, 1
1
1595; 1596
4
1635
2
1674, 2
2
1597-1599
286,1
1631
3
1674, 3
282,1
1600
2 1626,2; 1632
4
1669
2
1603
3
1633
5
1670; 1671
3
1604
4
1634
Note
1672; 1673
4
1605
5
1636
296
1675
5
1606
287,1
1637
Note
1675
283
1607
2
1638
297,1
1676, 1
1
1608
3
1639
2
1676, 2
Note
1609
4
1640
3
1676, 3
2
1610
288, 1
1642
4
1676, 4
3
1611
2
1643
298
1677
4
1612
Note
1644
Note
1654; 1666
5
1613
289,1
1645
299,1
1679
6
1615
2
1646; 1647
2
1680; 1681
7
1616
3
1648
300,1-7
1682, 1-7
Note
1617
4
1649
Note
1687,2
8
1618
290
1650
301, 1
1687
9
1619
291,1
1653, 3 & 4
2
1688
284,1
1620
2
1651
3
1689
2
1621
3
1653,1
4
1690
a
1622
292
1657
302
1691
Catalogue of Verbs 1692
CITATIONS OF GREEK AUTHORS
IN PARTS IV. AND V.
Aeschines Aesch.
Aeschylus A.
Agamemnon Ag.
Choephori Ch.
Eumenides Eu.
Persians Pe.
Prometheus Pr.
Septem Se.
Supplices Sp.
Alcaeus Alcae.
Andocides And.
Antiphon Ant.
Aristophanes Ar.
Acharnenses Ach.
Aves Av.
Ecclesiazusa* Eccl.
Equites Eq.
Lysistrata Ly.
Nubes N.
Pax Pa.
Plutus PI.
Ranae R.
Thesmophoriazusae Th.
Vespae V.
Demosthenes D.
Euripides E.
Alceetis Al.
Andromache And.
Bacchae Ba.
Cyclops Cyc.
Electra El.
Hecuba Hec.
Helena Hel.
Heraclidae Her.
Hercules Furens H. F.
Hippolytus Hip.
Medea Me.
Orestes Or.
Phoenissae Ph.
Rhesus Eh.
Troades Tro.
Hesiod Hes.
Theogonia Th.
Herodotus Hd.
Herondas Herond.
Hipponax Hipp.
Homer:
Iliad 17.
Odyssey Od.
Isaeus Isae.
Isocrates I.
Lysias. L.
Mimnermus Mimn.
Menander Men,
Monostichi . . Man.
Pindar Pind,
Olympian Odes 01.
Pythian Odes Py.
Plato P.
Alcibiades i Ale. i.
Apology Ap.
Charmides Ch.
Crito Cr.
Cratylus Crat.
Critias Critias.
Euthydemus Eu.
Euthyphro Euthyph.
Gorgias G.
Hippias Major ff.M,
Laches Lach.
Leges Lg.
Lysis Lys.
Meno Men.
Menexenus Menex.
Phaedo Ph.
Phaedrus Phdr.
Philebus Phil.
Politicus Pol.
Protagoras Pr.
Republic Rp.
Sophist So.
Symposium Sy.
Theaetetus Th.
Timaeus Ti.
Sappho Sapph.
Sophocles S.
Ajax Aj.
Antigone An.
Electra El.
Oedipus at Colonua O. C.
Oedipus Tyrannus O. T.
Philoctetes Ph.
Trachiniae Tr.
Stobaeus Stob.
Theocritus Theoc.
Theognis . Theog.
Thucydides T.
Xenophon X.
Agesilaus Ag.
Anabasis A.
Cyropaedia C.
De re Equestri Eq.
Hellenica H.
Hipparchicus Hip.
Memorabilia M.
Oeconomicus Oe.
De Republica Atheniensi. JJp. A.
Symposium Sy.
The dramatists are cited by Dindorf's lines, except the tragic
fragments (frag.), which follow Nauck's numbers. The orators are
cited by the numbers of the orations and the German sections.
GREEK GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION.
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS.
THE Greek language is the language spoken by the
Greek race. In the historic period, the people of this
race called themselves by the name Hellenes, and their
language Hellenic. We call them Greeks, from the Koman
name Graeci. They were divided into Aeolians, Dorians,
and lonians. The Aeolians inhabited Aeolis (in Asia),
Lesbos, Boeotia, and Thessaly ; the Dorians inhabited
Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete, some cities of Caria (in Asia),
with the neighboring islands, many settlements in Southern
Italy, which was known as Magna Graecia, and a large
part of the coast of Sicily ; the lonians inhabited Ionia
(in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean Sea, a few
towns in Sicily, and some other places.
In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a
record (before 850 B.C.), there was no such division of the
whole Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians as
that which was recognized in historic times ; nor was there
any common name of the whole race, like the later name
of Hellenes. The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in
South-eastern Thessaly, of which Achilles was king; and
the Greeks in general were called by Homer Achaeans,
Argives, or Danaans
3
4 INTRODUCTION.
The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known
as the Aeolic and Doric dialects. These two dialects are
much more closely allied to each other than either is to
the Ionic. In the language of the lonians we must dis-
tinguish the Old Ionic, the New Ionic, and the Attic dialects.
The Old Ionic or Epic is the language of the Homeric
poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New Ionic was
the language of Ionia in the fifth century B.C., as it appears
in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was the Ian-
guage of Athens during her period of literary eminence
(from about 500 to 300 B.C.). 1 In it were written the trag-
edies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, the comedies
of Aristophanes, the histories of Thucydides and Xenophon,
the orations of Demosthenes and the other orators of Athens,
and the philosophical works of Plato.
The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form
of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of
Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated,
for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of
the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic
has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in
respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects.
The literary and political importance of Athens caused
her dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever
Greek was spoken ; but, in this very extension to regions
widely separated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little
modified by various local influences, and lost some of its
1 The name Ionic includes both the Old and the New Ionic, but not
the Attic. When the Old and the New Ionic are to be distinguished
in the present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Horn, (for Homeric) is used
for the former, and Hdt. or Hd. (Herodotus) for the latter.
INTRODUCTION. 5
early purity. The universal Greek language which thus
arose is called the Common Dialect. This begins with the
Alexandrian period, the time of the literary eminence of
Alexandria in Egypt, which dates from the accession of
Ptolemy II. in 285 B.C. The Greek of the philosopher
Aristotle lies on the border line between this and the
purer Attic. The name Hellenistic is given to that form
of the Common Dialect which was used by the Jews of
Alexandria who made the Septuagint version of the Old
Testament (283-135 B.C.) and by the writers of the New
Testament, all of whom were Hellenists (i.e. foreigners who
spoke Greek). Towards the end of the twelfth century
A.D., the popular Greek then spoken in the Byzantine
Eonian Empire began to appear in literature by the side
of the scholastic ancient Greek, which had ceased to be
intelligible to the common people. This popular language,
the earliest form of Modern Greek, was called Romaic ('Pw-
IMLLK-rj), as the people called themselves *Po>/xatot. The name
Romaic is now little used; and the present language of
the Greeks is called simply 'EAA^WKT}, while the kingdom
of Greece is 'EAAas and the people are "EAA^ves. The lit-
erary Greek has been greatly purified during the last half-
century by the expulsion of foreign words and the restora-
tion of classic forms; and the same process has affected
the spoken language, especially that of cultivated society
in Athens, but to a far less extent. It is not too much to
say, that the Greek of most of the books and newspapers
now published in Athens could have been understood with-
out difficulty by Demosthenes or Plato. The Greek lan-
guage has thus an unbroken literary history, from Home*
to the present day, of at least twenty-seven centuries.
6 INTRODUCTION.
The Greek is descended from the same original language
with the Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic,
Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the
Indo-European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of
languages. Greek- is most closely connected with the
Italian languages (including Latin), to which it bears a
relation similar to the still closer relation between French
and Spanish or Italian. This relation accounts for the
striking analogies between Greek and Latin, which appear
in both roots and terminations; and also for the less ob-.
vious analogies between Greek and the German element
in English, which are seen in a few words like me, is,
j etc.
PART I.
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
THE ALPHABET.
1.
The Greek alphabet
has twenty-four letters :
Form.
Equivalent.
Name.
A
a
a
a\(f>a
Alpha
B
13
b
(3ijTa
Beta
r
7
g
ydfjifjia
Gramma
A
8
d
Se\ra
Delta
E
e
e (short)
el, e tyl\6v
Epsllon
Z
e
z
tfra
Zeta
H
*7
e (long)
r)ra
Eta
e
(9
* th
OijTa
Theta
i
fc
i
la>ra
Iota
K
K
k or hard
G KaTTTTO,
Kappa
A
X
1
\d(f*)l3Sa
Lambda
M
yu,
m
fJLV
Mu
N
z;
n
vv
Nu
g
f
X
& f _
Xi
O
o
o (short)
OV, O /M/CpOV
Omlcron
n
7T
P
irel t TTI
Pi
P
P
r
pa>
Rho
s
CT
9 S
Sigma
T
T
t
rav
Tau
T
V
00 y
^, v ^l\6v
Upsilon
$
(f)
P h
<j>el, ty
Phi
X
X
- kh
X [> X*
Chi
\\r
f
ps
"\lr6L, ^Irt
Psi
n
CD
o (long)
&) ft) LLG f yCL
Omega
2.
N
. At the end of a word
the form ? is used,
elsewhere the
form
o-;
thus, (TVOTUO'l?.
8 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [3
3. N. Three letters belonging to the primitive Greek alphabet,
Van or Digamma (f), equivalent to V or W, Koppa (9), equivalent to
Q, and Sampi (7?))? a form of Sigma, are not in the ordinary written
alphabet. They were used as numerals (384), Van here having the
form , which is used also as an abbreviation of err. Van had not
entirely disappeared in pronunciation when the Homeric poems were
composed, and the metre of many verses in these is explained only
by admitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are
explained only on the supposition that f has been omitted (see 269).
4. N. The Athenians of the best period used the names el for
epsilon, oS for omicron, % for upsilon, and w for omega ; the present
names for these letters being late. Some Greek grammarians used
e \f/l\6v (plain e) and v \pl\bv {plain v) to distinguish e and v from 01
and cu, which in their time had similar sounds.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS,
5. The vowels are a, e, 77, t, o, a>, and v. Of these,
e and o are always short ; 77 and co are always long ; a, t,
and v are long in some syllables and short in others,
whence they are called doubtful vowels.
6. N. A, e, rj, o, and CD from their pronunciation are called open
vowels (a being the most open) ; t and v are called close vowels.
7 The diphthongs (&l-(f)6oyyo(,, double-sounding*) are
at, au, et, eu, <n, ov, 771;, vi, a, 77, <w. These (except vi)
are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close
one. The long vowels (a, 77, co) with i form the (so
called) improper diphthongs a, 77, . The Ionic dialect
has also cov.
8. N. Besides the genuine ei (= e + i) and ov (= o + v) there are the
so-called spurious diphthongs ei and ou, which arise from contraction
(ei from ee, and ov from eo, oe, or oo) or from compensative lengthening
(30) ; as in eVcne* (for eVoke), \tyeiv (for \e7eev, 565, 4), XP^ ^ (f r
XpDcreos), dels (for Bcrrs, 79), TOV and roi/s (190). In the fourth century
B.C. these came to be written like genuine et and ou ; but in earlier
times they were written E and 0, even in inscriptions which used H
and O for e and o. (See 27.)
9. N. The mark of diaeresis (5iafy>e<m, separation'), a double dot,
written over a vowel, shows that this does not form a diphthong with
the preceding vowel ; as in irpottvou (irpo-itvai'), to go forward, 'ArpeiS^s,
son of Atreus (in Homer).
10. N. In 9, 17, <fj, the t is now written and printed below the first
vowel, and is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in
the line ; as in THI KftMfilAIAI, TT) Kuwdlg., and in "fttxero, vx ero -
This t was written as an ordinary letter as long as it was pronounced.
17] BREATHINGS. CONSONANTS. 9
that is, until the first century B.C., after which it was sometimes
written (always in the line) and sometimes omitted. Our iota sub-
script is not older than the twelfth century A.D.
BREATHINGS.
11. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of
a word has either tike rough breathing ( e ) or the smooth
breathing ('). The rough breathing shows that the
vowel is aspirated, i.e. that it is preceded by the sound
h; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not
aspirated. Thus opwv, seeing, is pronounced horon;
but bpwv, of mountains, is pronounced or on.
12. N. A diphthong takes the breathing, like the accent (109),
upon its second vowel. But a, 77, and o> (10) have both breathing
and accent on the first vowel, even when the i is written in the
line. Thus ot^erat, eixfrpawa), AI/AOH/; but a>x eTO or "flt^ero, aSa> or
"AiSo), 7?Setv or'HtSeiv. On the other hand, the writing of diStos
('At'Stos) shows that a and t do not form a diphthong.
13. N. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. "When this
was taken to denote e (which once was not distinguished from e),
half of it I was used for the rough breathing; and afterwards the
other half I was used for the smooth breathing. From these fragments
eame the later signs e and '.
14. N. In Attic words, initial v is always aspirated.
15. At the beginning of a word p is written p ; as in
prjrwp (Latin rhetor), orator. In the middle of a word
pp is sometimes written pp ; as apprjros, unspeakable ;
Ylvppos, PyrrJius (pp rrh).
CONSONANTS.
16. The simple consonants are divided into
labials, TT, /?, <, /*,
palatals, K, y, #
linguals, r, 8, 0, <r, X, v, p.
17. Before K, y, x> o r , gamma (y) had a nasal sound, like that
of n in anger or ink, and was represented by n in Latin ; as ayyeA.05,
(Latin angelus), messenger; ayKvpa, (uncord), anchor;
sphinx.
10 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [18
18. The double consonants are , ^, . E is composed o
K and <r ; ^, of TT and o\ Z arises from a combination of 8
with a soft s sound; hence it has the effect of two con-
sonants in lengthening a preceding vowel (99).
19. By another classification, the consonants are divided
into semivowels and mutes.
20. The semivowels are X, n, v, p, and <r, with nasal y (17).
Of these *
X, /A, v, and p are liquids;
p, v, and nasal y (17) are nasals;
<r is a spirant (or sibilant} ;
f of the older alphabet (3) is also a spirant.
21. The mutes are of three orders :
.smooth mutes ir K T
middle mutes (3 y 8
rough mutes < %
22! These mutes again correspond in the following
labial mutes (7r-mutes) TT ft <j>
palatal mutes (K-rnutes) K y x
lingual mutes (r-rnutes) r 8
23. N". Mutes of the same order are called co-ordinate ; those of
the same class are called cognate.
24. N. The smooth and rough mutes, with <r, , and ijs, are
called surd (hushed sounds) ; the other consonants and the vowels
are called sonant (sounding).
25. The only consonants which can end a Greek word are
v, p, and s. If others are left at the end in forming words,
they are dropped.
26. N. The only exceptions are e/c and OVK (or ov^), which
have other forms, e and ov. Final $ and \}/ (K<T and ira) are no
exceptions.
27. The Greek alphabet above described is the Tome, used by the
Asiatic lonians from a very early period, but first introduced officially
at Athens in 403 B.C. The Athenians had previously used an alphabet
which had no separate signs for e, o, ks, or ps. In this E was used
for e and e and also for the spurious et (8) ; O for 6 and 5 and for spu-
rious ov (8) ; H was still an aspirate (h) ; XS stood for E, and 3>S for ^.
Thus the Athenians of the time of Pericles wrote EAOX2EN TEI
BOkEI KAI TOI AEMOI for edo&v T$ /3ovX^ /cal T$ SiJ/*v, TO
$SE4>ISMA TO AEMO for rb r/^iovwi TOV Sj/wv, HES for fo-
28] PRONUNCIATION. 11
HEI for 77, HEMHEN for ir^ireiv, XPTSOS for xpvffovs, TOTTO
for both TOUTO and rouVou, TOS IIPTTANES for rods Trpurcbets,
APXOSI for &pxov<n, AEOSON for deovo-uv, HOIIOS for SITUS,
HOIEN for Troieiv, TPES for rpets, AHO TO $OPO for airb TOV
v, XSEN02 for &v
ANCIENT PRONUNCIATION. 1
28. 1. (Vowels.) The long vowels a, TJ, t, and w were pronounced
at the best period much like a in father, e in fete (French e or e),
i in machine, and o in tone. Originally u had the sound of Latin u
(our u in prune), but before the fourth century B.C. it had come to
that of French u or German u. The short vowels had the same sounds
as the long vowels, but shortened or less prolonged : this is hard to
express in English, as our short a, e, i, and o, in pan, pen, pit, and pot,
have sounds of a different nature from those of a, e, i, and o, given
above. We have an approach to a, e, i, and o in the second a in
grand-father, French e in real, i in verity, and o in monastic, renovate.
2. (Diphthongs.) We may assume that the diphthongs originally
had the sounds of their two vowels, pronounced as one syllable. Our
ai in aisle, eu in feud, oi in oil, ui in quit, will give some idea of at,
ev, oi, and vi and ou in house of au. Likewise the genuine ei must
have been pronounced originally as e + 1, somewhat like ei in rein (cf .
Horn. ' Arpetdir)s, Attic 'Arpddijs) ; and ov was a compound of o and v.
But in the majority of cases ei and ov are written for simple sounds,
represented by the Athenians of the best period by E and O (see 8 and
27). We do not know how these sounds were related to ordinary
e and o on one side and to ei and ou on the other ; but after the begin-
ning of the fourth century B.C. they appear to have agreed substantially
with et and ou, since EI and OT are written for both alike. In ei the
sound of t appears to have prevailed more and more, so that by the
first century B.C. it had the sound of t. On the other hand, ou became
(and still remains) a simple sound, like ou in youth.
The diphthongs , 77, and v were probably always pronounced with the
chief force on the first vowel, so that the t gradually disappeared (see
10). The rare yv and u probably had the sounds of ij and w with an
additional sound of u.
3. (Consonants.) Probably ft, 5, K, \, n, v, IT, and p were sounded
as b, d, k, I, m, n, p, and r in English. Ordinary 7 was always hard,
like g in go ; for nasal 7, see 17. T was always like t in tin or to ;
<r was generally (perhaps always) like s in so. Z is called a compound
of 5 and <r ; but opinions differ whether it was da- or <r5, but the ancient
testimony seems to point to o-5. In late Greek, f came to the sound of
English z, which it still keeps. S represents K<T, and \f/ represents TTO-,
although the older Athenians felt an aspirate in both, as they wrote
X<r for and 0<r for \f/. The.rough consonants 6, Xi and m the best
period were T, K, and ?r followed by h, so that ZvQa. was tv-rd, &<f>lijfu
was a-Trlyni, e^w was t-Kw, etc. We cannot represent these rough
mutes in English ; our nearest approach is in words like ho^ouse,
bloc/Wiead, and iipAill, but here the h is not in the same syllable with
the mute. In later Greek e and came to the modern pronunciation
of th (in thin) and/, and x to that resembling German ch in machen.
i For nrantinal remarks on Denunciation, see the Preface.
12 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [29
CHANGES OF VOWELS.
29. (Lengthening.) Short vowels are often lengthened in
the formation and the inflection of words. Here the follow-
ing changes generally take place :
a becomes rj (a after e, e, or p)
" r), i becomes I,
o ' " , v 6.
Thus Ti/Aatt) (stem ri/xa-), fut. rl/x^-crw; ca-w, fut. ea-o~co; ri-Orj-fjii
(stem Oe-) ; oY-Sco-/u,i (stem So-) ; iKereva), aor. iKercvcra ; 7re-<v-Ka,
perf. of <vco, from root <v- (see Averts).
30. (Compensative Lengthening.) 1. When one or more
consonants are dropped for euphony (especially before o-),
a preceding short vowel is very often lengthened to make
up for the omission. Here
a becomes d, I becomes I,
c " ei, v - " v.
o " ov,
Thus /u-c'Xas for /xcXav? (78), to-rds for toravrs (79), 0ets for
(79), Sovs for SOVT?, Avov(rt for Avovrcn, cKpiva for e/c/oivo-a,
for SetKi/vi/r? (79). Here ct and ov are the spurious diph-
thongs (8).
2. In the first aorist of liquid verbs (672), a is lengthened to 17
(or a) when o- is dropped ; as Z<f>r)va for e<ai/-ou, from <f>aiva> (<a^),
cf. eoreA-o-a, eo-retAa, from o*Te'AAa> (o^TeA-).
31. (Strong and Weak Forms.) In some formations and
inflections there is an interchange in the root of ei, ot, and i,
of ev, (sometimes ov,) and v, and of 97, (rarely <o,) and a.
The long vowels and diphthongs in such cases are called
strong forms, and the short vowels weak forms.
Thus AetV-o), Ae-Aoi7r-a, -At7r-ov; <evy-(u, 7re-<evy-a, e-^>vy-oj/;
TTIJK-W, Te-TTj/c-a, -Ta.K-r)V ', prjy-vv /xt, ep-pwy-a, ep-pdy-'rjv ; eAev-o*oyMai
(74), A-^Aov0-a, ^Av^-ov (see ^PXO/JML) ; so o-TrevS-w, hasten, and
o-7rov8-ij, ^aste ; d/orjyo), Ae/p, and dpwyds, helping. Compare English
smite, smote, smit (smitten). (See 572.)
32. An interchange of the short vowels a, e, and o takes
place in certain forms ; as in the tenses of rpeTr-w, reV/ao^-a,
c-rpaTr-T/v, and in the noun rpdV-os, from stem rpcTr-. (See
643, 645, and 831.)
88] EUPHONY OF VOWELS. CONTRACTION. 13
33. (Exchange of Quantity.} An exchange of quantity some-
times takes place between a long vowel and a succeeding short
one ; as in epic vdos, temple, and Attic vews ; epic /Sao-iA^os, /ScunAr/a,
king, Attic /JacriAea)?, /3cunAe'a; epic /ner^opos, in the air, Attic
/nerewpos ; Meve'Ados, Attic Mej/e'Aea>s (200).
EUPHONY OF VOWELS.
COLLISION OP VOWELS. HIATUS.
34. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a
diphthong, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In
the middle of a word this could be avoided by contraction
(35-41). Between two words, where it is called hiatus, it
could be avoided by crasis (42-46), by elision (48-54) or
aphaeresis (55), or by adding a movable consonant (56-63)
to the former word.
CONTRACTION OF VOWELS.
35. Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong,
may be united by contraction in a single long vowel or a
diphthong ; </>iAeo>, <iAoi ; <i Aee, <i Aec, ; rt/xae, rt/Aa. It seldom
lakes place unless the former vowel is open (6).
36. The regular use of contraction is one of the charac-
teristics of the Attic dialect. It follows these general prin-
ciples :
37. I. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (7)
simply unite in one syllable ; as rei^ci, re^ei > ye/oat, yepai ;
pat'oTos, pao-ros.
38. II. When the two vowels cannot form a diph-
thong,
1. Two like vowels (i.e. two a-sounds, two e-sounds, or
two o-sounds, without regard to quantity) unite to form
the common long (d, vj, or o>). But ce gives a (8), and oo
gives ov (8). E.g.
Mi/ad, /xva(184); <f>L\rjrc, <#>tA^Te; SqXoco, SqXa> ; but tyt' \C,
<{ Aet ; TrAoos,
14 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [39
2. When an o-sound precedes or follows an a- or an e-
sound, the two become o>. But oe and eo give ov (8). E.g.
, S^Xoare ; c^tAeom, <iAu>o-t ; rZ/xao/xev, TZ/tco/xei/ ; TZttawttev,
but i/oe, vo9 ; yei/eos, yevovs.
3. When an a-sound precedes or follows an e-sound, the
first (in order) prevails, and we have a or 77. E.g.
'Ert/xae, eri/xd ; rZ/xcfyrc, rZ/xare ; rei^ca, TCtjp; ; 'Ep/xeds, 'Eptojs.
4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong
beginning with the same vowel, and e is always absorbed
before 01. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a
diphthong is contracted with the first vowel of the diph-
thong; and a following t remains as iota subscript, but a
following v disappears. E.g.
Mraal, /xwt; /xvaa, /xva; <iAe, <iAei; faXey, <^A.iy; 877X001,
8r;A.ot; voa>, va>; SriAdov, 877X01); <j>i\oi, <iAot
rZ/xaei, rZ/xa ; Tt/xar^, rl/xa ; rZ/xaot, rZ/xaJ ; rZ/xaov, rZ/xui ;
; Aveat, Av^ (39, 3) ; Ai^ai, Au?7 ; /xe/xi/Tyoto,
39. Exceptions. 1. In contracts of the first and second de-
clensions, every short vowel before a, or before a long vowel or
a diphthong, is absorbed. But in the singular of the first
declension cd is contracted regularly to rj (after a vowel or p, to a).
(See 184.)
2. In the third declension ca becomes a after c, and d or 77 after
i or v. (See 229, 267, and 315.)
3. In the second person singular of the passive and middle, ecu
(for eo-cu) gives the common Attic form in ct as well as the regular
contract form in 77 ; as Aveat, Avrj or Avei. (See 565, 6.)
4. In verbs in oa>, oct gives ot, as 877Aos, 8r7Aots; ot is found
also in the subjunctive for 077, as 8r7Ao>7, o^Aoi.
5. The spurious diphthong ct is contracted like simple e; as
TrAaKoet?, TrAaKo^s, cake. Thus infinitives in aeiv and ov los t in
the contracted forms; as ri/xaeu/, rt/xav; fyXoav, fyXovv. (See
761.)
40. 1. The close vowel t is contracted with a following t in the
Ionic dative singular of nouns in is (see 255) ; and v is contracted
with t or e in a few forms of nouns in v<s (see 257 and 258).
2. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declension,
contraction is confined to certain cases ; see 226-263. For exceptions
in the contraction of verbs, see 496 and 497. See dialectic forms of
verbs in aw, ew, and <w, in 784-786.
42]
CONTRACTION. CRASIS.
15
41. Table of Contractions.
a. -f- a = a ye'paa, yepa
a -4- at = at tiraai, /xi/at
a + a = a firoa, /xi/a
a -f- e = a ert/xae, ert/xd
a -+- et = a
or a
= a
ri/xaei, Tt/xa ; rt/xaeti/,
rZ/xav (39, 5)
Tt/xa^Te, rt/xare
a* -j- t = at yepat, yepat
a + t = a ypd-t'6W, ypaStov
co
ov = <D
a + o
a + ot
a
e+a = 77
or a
Tt/xao/xev
rt/xaoi/xt, rt/xftJ/xi
TLfMLOV, Tt/Xft)
Tt/XaO), Tl/XO)
/77 ; 'Ep/xea?,
;; oo-rea, oa-ra
(39, 1)
Aveat, A
or at ^pva-OLL (39, 1 and 3)
et ^ et c^tAeet, <tAet
c
c
6
c
c -}- ot = ot <tAeot, </>tAot
c -|- ov = ov <tAeov, 0tAov
e -f- v = ev ev, ev
e - ft) =
t = et TCtxet, ret;(t
o = ov yeveos, yeVovs
C
77 -f-
<0, OOTTO)
Tt/x^evTt, rt/x^i/rt
rt/x^eis, rttt^s (39, 5}
/, K\fj6pov
77+1 =>7
77 -f- Ot = ft)
/xrjv
t -J- t =t Xi'tos, Xtos
o -f- a = o) atSoa, aiSoi ; aTrAoa,
or a aTrAa (39, 1)
o + at = at aVAoai, a?rAat
o -f- e = ov voe, vov
o + et = ot S^Ao'et, S^Aot (39, 4);
or ov S^Aoetv, S^Aow (39,
5)
"~ II ==
or 27 aVA27 (39, 1)
o + t = ot 7ret$ot,
O -|- O = OV VOOS, VOV5
o -f- ot = ot S^Aoot,
o -|- ov = ov S^Aoov,
o + ft) = ft) aTrAoft), aTrAft)
Rarely the following:
r </
ft) + a = ft)
CD + e = CD
<o -f- 1 = ft)
a) -f o = ft)
CRASIS.
42. A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word may be
contracted with one at the beginning of the following word.
This occurs especially in poetry, and is called cram (/cpao-ts,
mixture). The coronis (') is placed over the contracted
syllable. The first of the two words is generally an article,
a relative (o or 5), KOI, Trpd, or <2.
17/00.1,
16 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [43
43. Oasis generally follows the laws of contraction, with
these modifications :
1. A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last
vowel before crasis takes place.
2. The article loses its final vowel or diphthong in crasis
before a ; the particle rot drops ot before a ; and /cat drops
at before all vowels and diphthongs except e and . But we
have Ket and KCIS for Kat ei and Kat ets.
44. The following are examples of crasis :
To ovofM., Tovvo/xa; TO. ayaOd, Td.ya.0a,', TO evavTtov, TouvavTtbv ;
6 e/c, OVK; 6 eVt, ovrrt; TO r/xaTtov, #ot/xaTtov (93); a av, av; /cat av,
/cdV ; /cat etra, Kara ; 6 a.vrjp, dLvrjp ', ot a.8eA.c/>ot, a,8eAc/>ot ; TO> dvSpt,
Tci vSpt ; TO avTO, TavTO ; TOV auToO, Tavrov ; TOI av, TO.V (/xevTOt av,
/xevTai/) ; TOI apa, Tapa ; /cat ariTOs, KQVTO'S ; Kat avTr), \avTr) (93) j
Kat eo-Tt, Kd(TTL ; Kat et, Ket ; Kat ov, KOV ; Kat ot, ^ot ; Kat at, ^ai. So
eyw olSa, eywSa ; w avOpwire, wV^pa>7re ; T^ eiraprj, Trjiraprj. Likewise
we have irpovpyov, helpful, for vrpo epyov, ahead in work ; cf . <poSos
for Trpo 68ov (93).
45. N. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough
breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable,
taking the place of the coronis; as in av, aviyp.
46. N. In crasis, crepes, other, takes the form oVepos, whence
dVepos (for 6 Tepos),.0aTepov (for TOV eTepov), ^aTepo),etc. (43,2 ; 93).
SYNIZESIS.
47. 1. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a
diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the
sake of the metre, although no contraction appears in writ-
ing. This is called synlzesis (oWfrpis, settling together).
Thus, 0eot may make one syllable in poetry; o-Tijflea or
Xpvo-e'a) may make two.
2. Synizesis may also take the place of crasis (42), when the
first word ends in a long vowel or a diphthong, especially with
eW, since, ^77, not, -tj, or, ^ (interrog.), and eyw, 7. Thus, eVet ov
may make two syllables, ^ etSe'vai may make three ; /AT) ov always
makes one syllable in poetry.
ELISION.
48. A short final vowel may be dropped when the next
word begins with a vowel. This is called elision. An apos-
trophe (') marks the omission. E.g.
56] ELISION AND APHAERESIS. 17
At' e/xov for ota e/xov ; avr CKCI'V^S for avrl eKeiV^s ; Aeyoi/tx' av for
Aeyoi/u ai/ ; aAA. tvOus for dAAa e.v8v<s ; CTT dv$pw7ra> for 7rt av@pit)7T<j).
SO <' Tepa>| VU;($' oA^V for l/UKTO, oA^l/ (92).
49. Elision is especially frequent in ordinary prepositions, con-
junctions, and adverbs ; but it may also be used with short vowels
at the end of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs.
50. Elision never occurs in
(a) the prepositions Trf.pt. and Trpo, except Trept in Aeolic (rarely
before t in Attic),
(b) the conjunction ort,
(c) monosyllables, except those ending in c,
(d) the dative singular in t of the third declension and the
dative plural in ox, except in epic poetry,
(e) words ending in v.
51. N". The epic and comic poets sometimes elide at in the verbal
endings /xat, out, rat, and <r0at (0at). So ot in ot/i,ot, and rarely in poi.
52. N. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain
writers (as Thucy dides) . Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use.
53. (Apocope.) The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel before
a consonant. Thus in Homer we find &v, KCIT, and 7rd/o, for avd, /card,
and irapd. Both in composition and alone, K<T assimilates its r to a
following consonant and drops it before two consonants, and v in &v
is subject to the changes of 78 ; as icdppaXe and /cd/cra^e, for /car^SaXe
and /car^/cTtti/e, but Kardaveiv for Karadaveiv (68, 1), KO.K Kopv<f>-^v, Kay
ybvv, KOLTT iredlov ; d^u-jSciXXw, dX-X^at, &/J, iredtov, A/A <t>6vov. So u/S-jSdXXetf
(once) for foro-jSdXXeu/.
54. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it
comes before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here
no apostrophe is used. E.g.
'ATr-aireo) (OTTO and atrew), 8i-/2aAov (Bid and !/3aAov).
atpe'a) (aTTo and atpe'w, 92) ; Se^-^/x-epos (ScK'a and ^
APHAERESIS.
55. In poetry, a short vowel at the beginning of a word is
sometimes dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong, especially
after pr), not, and 77, or. This is called apkaeresis (d^atpeo-ts, taking
off). Thus, fjnj *yo> for fj.r) eyw ; TrovVrtv for TTOT) etrrtv; cya> <f>dvrjv
for eyto l(f>dvTfjv ; ^ '/aov for
MOVABLE CONSONANTS.
56. Most words ending in -o-t (including -i and -/rt), and
all verbs of the third person ending in c, generally add v
18 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [57
when the next word begins with a vowel. This is called
v movable. E.g.
Tlaa-L StSowri ravra ; but Trcuni/ tSto/cej/ e/cetra. So oYoWri /MOI; but
oYoWnp ffJLOl.
57. N. *E(m takes v movable, like third persons in <n.
58. N. The third person singular of the pluperfect active in -et has
v movable ; as rj8ti(v), lie knew. But contracted imperfects in -et
(for -te), as c<^>i Act, never take v in Attic.
59. N. The epic KC (for ai/) is generally KeV before a vowel, and
the poetic vvv (enclitic) has an epic form vv. Many adverbs in -Oev
(as TrpovOev) have poetic forms in -0c.
(>0. N". N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of
a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in
poetry, to make position (99).
61. N. Words which may have v movable are not elided in prose,
except eon'.
62. Ou, not, becomes OVK before a smooth vowel, and ov^
before a rough vowel ; as ov 0eAo>, OVK avros, ofy OVTOS. M^
inserts K in /xryK-eVi, no longer, by the analogy of oiW.
63. OVTCDS, thus, c (e/cs), from, and some other words may
drop s before a consonant ; as OVTOS fx et > OVTM SOKCI, e^ ao-rews,
t/c TToAcws.
METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE.
64. 1. Metathesis is the transposition of a short vowel
and a liquid in a word; as in K/oaros and Kapros, strength;
Odpo-os and fyao-os, courage.
2. The vowel is often lengthened ; as in pt-pXrj-Ka (from stem
/3aA-), re-r/XTy-Ka (from stem TC/A-), Opw-a-Kd) (from stem ^op-). (See
649.)
65. Syncope is the dropping of a short vowel between
two consonants ; as in Trare/oo?, TTO/T/OOS (274) ; 7rr^<ro/xai for
Trerr/o-Ojoat (650).
66. N. (a) When /x is brought before p or X by syncope or
metathesis, it is strengthened by inserting ft ; as /xeo^/x/Spia, midday,
for ju,e<rr7/*(e)pia (/KOTOS and ^/xepa) ; /xe/x/8XcoKa, epic perfect of
/?A<o<TKa>, #o, from stem /u,oA-, /A\O-, /wAo>- (636), /ne-pAw-Ka, /M-/A/3Ao>-/ca.
Thus the vulgar chimley (for chimney) generally becomes chimbley.
(&) At the beginning of a word such a /x is dropped before /Si
72] CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 19
as in /Jporos, mortal, from stem /uop-, /xpo- (cf. Lat. morior, die),
/u/?po-Tos, fipoTos (but the //, appears in composition, as in a-^PpoTos,
immortal}. So /?A.iTT<o, /a&e ^oney, from stem /xcAtr- of /AC At, Aone^/
(cf. Latin mel), by syncope /xXir-, /A/?A.ir-, /SAtT-, /3A.iTT<> (582).
67. N. So 8 is inserted after v in the oblique cases of avrjp,
man (277), when the v is brought by syncope before p ; as di/epos
(dv-pos),
CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS.
68. 1. A rough mute (21) is never doubled; but TT<, *x,
and T# are always written for <<, xx, and OB. Thus Sa7r<w,
Ba/c^os, KarOavelv, not 2a<^)^)(o, Ba^os, KaOOavelv (53). So in
Latin, Sappho, Bacchus.
2. A middle mute is never doubled in Attic Greek. In yy the
first y is always nasal (17).
3. The later Attic has TT for the earlier <r<r in certain
forms ; as Trpdrrw for Tr/adcrfrw, eXdrTcoi/ for eAd(r(T(ov ; ^aAarra
for OaXaa-a-a. Also TT (not for O-Q-) and even rO occur in a few
other words ; as 'ATTIKOS, 'AT&S, J.^ic. See also 72.
69. Initial /o is doubled when a vowel precedes it in form-
ing a compound word ; as in avappfTrra) (dva and pt7TT(o). So
after the syllabic augment ; as in I/O/OITTTOV (imperfect of pf
But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in cvpoos,
EUPHONIC CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
70. The following rules (71-95) apply chiefly to changes
made in the final consonant of a stem in adding the endings,
especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of verbs and
cases of nouns, and to those made in forming compounds :
71. (Mutes before other Mutes.) Before a r-mute (22), a
7r-mute or a /c-mute is made coordinate (23), and another
r-mute becomes a-. E.g.
TeVptTTTat (for TTp7/?-Tcu) , Se'SeKTat (for 8c8e^-Tat), Tr\^0rjvai
(for TrXeK-^vat), \i<p@r)V (for eXetTr-^v), ypafiSr/v (for ypa^-Sr/v).
HfTreto-Tat (jrf.TruO-TaC) , 7reL(rd-rjv (liruB-Oifjv), rjcrrcu (y'S-Tcu), IO-TC
(t8-Te), ^apteo-Tepo? (^apieT-Tepos) .
72. N. *EK, from, in composition retains K unchanged; as in
K-8po/x,i{, l/c-^eo-ts. For TT and T#, see 68, 3.
20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [73
73. N". No combinations of different mutes, except those in-
cluded in 68 and in 71 (those in which the second is r, 8, or 0),
are allowed in Greek. When any such arise, the first mute is
dropped; as in TreVeiKa (for 7re7reiO-Ka) . When y stands before K,
y, or x, as in crvy~x^ (<rvv and x e/w )> ^ is not a mute but a nasal (20).
74. (Mutes before 3.) No mute can stand before or except
TT and K. A ir-mute with a- forms \l/, a /c-mute forms , and a
T-mute is dropped. E.g.
Tpfyw (for Tpi/3-o-a>), ypdif/a) (for ypa<-(ra>), Aea> (for Aey-oxo),
TTL(T(i) (for 7rei#-cra>), aoxo (for aS-crw), (rw/u,a<n (for <ra>/AaT-<ri) , eATuo-i
(for eATTiS-cri). So ^Ac^ (for <Ae/?-s), eArn's (for eA7riS-s), vi;'
(for I/VKT-S). So xapt'ccn (for ^apier-cri, 331). See examples under
209, 1.
75. (Mutes before M.) Before /*, a 7r-mute becomes //,, and
a K-mute becomes y. jEJ.#.
AeAet/ot/xat (for XeXet7r-/xat), TTpt/x,/xat (for TTpt^8-/xat), yeypa/A/xat
(for yeypa<-jnai), TreVXey/oiat (for 7re7rAcx-/>tat), rerevy/xat (for TC-
76, N. But K/Z, can stand when they come together by metathesis
(64) ; as in K^-K^-KO. (/cd/x-pw). Both /r and x may stand before yu, in
the formation of nouns ; as in dKyu,^, edf^e, dK/aciv, anvil, a.l-x.^'n, spear-
point, 5pax/i?7, drachma.
'EK here also remains unchanged, as in ^K-/j,av6dv(a (cf. 72).
77. N. When 77^ or w/j, would thus arise, they are shortened to
7/u, or /i/u, ; as ^\^7%w, e\tf\ey-(ji.ai (for ^\7;Xe7x-yu,at, ^X7;Xe77-/iat); Ka/xTrrw,
/c^/ca/u,//,ai (for KeKa/A7r-//,cu, /ceKa/u,/*-/*ai) ; TT^/ATTW, Tr^Treyn/wu (for 7re7re/x.7r-/Mat,
7re7re/x/x,-/iai. (See 489, 3.)
78. (N before other Consonants.) 1. Before a 7r-mute v
becomes /x, ; before a K-mute it becomes nasal y (17) ; before
a T-mute it is unchanged. -#.#.
E^TTiTTTO) (for j/-7ri7TTa)), (rvfj./3aLV<a (for OW/&HVO)), e/x^av^s (for
tv-<j>avr)<;) ; crvy^ew (for (rvv-xeto), crvyyev^s (for (rwyevrjs) ; ev-TpeVa>.
2. Before another liquid v is changed to that liquid. J?.*/.
'EAAeiTrco ( for ei/-Xei7ro)), e/A/xevco (for j/-fieva>), trvppeo) (for (rw-pew),
crvAAoyos (for (rw-Aoyo?).
3. N before o- is generally dropped and the preceding
vowel is lengthened (30), a to a, e to a, o to ov. ^J.^.
MeAa? (for /u,eAai/-s), ets (for cv-?), A.UOVO-I (for Avo-vo-i) : see
210, 2 ; 556, 5. So Xvouo-a (for Avovr-ta, Avov-cra), Av^eto-a (for
Av^evr-ia, \vQev-o-a), Tracra (for Travr-ia, Trav-cra) : see 84, 2.
79, The combinations VT, v8> v^, when they occur before
84] EUPHONIC CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 21
<r in inflections, are always dropped, and the preceding vowel
is lengthened, as above (78, 3). E.g.
Ilacri (for Travr-cn), ytyas (for ytyai/rs), 8aKvv<s (for SetKi/wrs),
Aeovo-i (for ACOVT-O-I), ri^eto-i (for TI$J/T-<TI) , rivets (for TI$I/T-<J),
Sou's (for SOVT-S), (TTretcro) (for crTrei/S-crw), Treuro/^uu (for 7rev^-(ro/jtai) .
For nominatives in o>v (for OI/T-), see 209, 3 (cf. 212, 1).
80. N. N standing atone before o-t of the dative plural is dropped
without lengthening the vowel ; as Scu'/aoo-i (for 8ai/xoi/-(n).
81. N. The preposition lv is not changed before p or cr ; as
2w becomes o-vtr- before o* and a twye/, but o~u- before <r and a
consonant or before ; as crvor-o-tros, o-u-o-rvy/za, crv-vyos.
82. X. Hav and iraXiv may retain v in composition before o* or
change it to a- ; as 7roV-o-o<os or Trcuro-o^os, 7raAtV-(7K6os, TraAtcrcrvTos.
83. Most verbs in i/o> have cr for j/ before /xat in the perfect
middle (648) ; as <cuvw, 7T</)ao--/u,at (for 7re<^>av-/xat) ; and the v re-
appears before T and ^, as in Tre^av-rai, 7re<f>av-@e. (See 489, 2 ; 700.)
84. (Changes before t.) The following changes occur when
t (representing an original ,;) follows the final consonant of
a stem.
1. Palatals (K, y, ^) and sometimes T and with such an t be-
come (TO- (later Attic TT) ; as ^vAao-cr-cu (stem <vA.a/c-) for <uAaK-i-w ;
tfaatav, worse, for ^K-I-CDJ/ (361, 2) ; Taoxr-co (ray-), for ray-i-w (580) ;
rapdcrcr-w (rapa^-), for rapa^-t-w ; KOpv(T<r-(a (Kopv0-), for Kopv^-t-tu;
Kp^acra, for Kp^r-ia.
Thus is formed the feminine in co-era of adjectives in ?, from a
stem in er-, er-ia becoming co-o-a (331, 2).
2. NT with this t becomes vo- in the feminine of participles and
adjectives (331, 2; 337, 1), in which v is regularly dropped with
lengthening of the preceding vowel (78, 3) ; as Trai/r-, Travr-ia, Trdvaa
(Thessalian and Cretan), 7rao-a; X.VOVT-, Avovr-ta, Avov-o-a, Avovo-a.
3. A (sometimes y or yy) with t forms ; as ^>pa^-to (^>pa8-), for
<pa8-t-(o (585) ; Ko/u,t^-a (Ko/xiS-), for Ko/xt8-t-a> ; /cpct^-w (/<pay-), for
Kpay-t-<o (589) ; /xe^wv (Ion.) or /xet'^ooi/ (comp. of //.e'yas, great),
for /w,y-t-<ov (361, 4).
4. A with t forms AA; as oreAA-oo (oreA-), for crreA-i-o) ;
O\.\O-/JML (aA-), /ea/>, for aA-t-o/xat (cf . Lat. sa/io) ; aAAos, o^Aer, for
dA-t-os (cf. Lat. a/ms). (See 593.)
5. After av or ap the i is transposed, and is then contracted
with a to at ; as ^>atV-cu (<av-), for <^>av-t-co ; ^atp-w (x a P") f r
^ap-t-oo; /xe'Aatv-a (/xeAai/-), fern, of /u,eAas (326), for /xeAav-i-a.
22 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [85
6. After ev, ep, tv, ip, w, or vp, the t disappears, and the preced-
ing c, i, or v is lengthened (c to ) ; as rei'v-w (rev-), for rev-t-w ;
(stem x e P") worse, for ^ep-t-cov ; Kip-o> (/<ep-), for Kep-i-co ;
(/cpti/-), for 7cptv-t-(o; oiKTtpw (otKrtp-), for oump-i-o); d/xwou
), for d/x/ui/-i-<o ; <rvpo>, for trvp-t-w. So crormpa (fern, of o-cor^p,
saving, saviour, stem crtorep-), for (joorep-i-a. (See 594 and 596.)
85. (Omission of 2 and f.) Many forms are explained by the
omission of an original spirant (s or /r), which is seen sometimes
in earlier forms in Greek and sometimes in kindred languages.
86. (2.) At the beginning of a word, an original s sometimes
appears as the rough breathing. .E.gr.
'Icrrtypu, place, for owny/w-i, Lat. si's/o ; ^/ato-us, AaZ/J cf. Lat.
semi-; eofuu, siV (from root c8- crcS-), Lat. sed-eo ; CTTTO, seven, Lat.
teptem.
87. N. In some words both <r and /r have disappeared ; as os, A is,
for cryfos, suus ; ^8vs, swee< (from root a8- for cyraS-), Lat. suavis.
88. In some inflections, cr is dropped between two vowels.
1 . Tnus, in stems of nouns, e<r- and acr- drop <r before a vowel
of the ending; as yeVos, race (stem yei/ea-), gen. yeVc-os for ycveo--os.
(See 226.)
2. The middle endings <rai and <ro often drop a- (565, 6) ; as
Xve-o-ai, Xve-cu, Xvry or Xvei (39, 3 ) ; , c-Xve-cro, eAiJco, eAvov ; but a- is
retained in such fu- forms as tcrra-crai and fora-cro. (See also 664.)
89. In the first aorist active and middle of liquid verbs, <r is
generally dropped before a or a/x^i/; as <au/o> (<aj/-), aor. t<f>rjv-a
for (j)a.v(T-a, <j>rjv-aLjMjv for ffaw-afMrjv. So o/cc'AAa) (oKcX-), aor.
wKetX-a for a>KeXo--a ; but poetic /ceAXw has KeXo--a. (See 672.)
90. (/T.) Some of the cases in which the omission of vau (or
digamma) appears in inflections are these :
1. In the augment of certain verbs ; as 2 aor. ctSoi/, saw, from
root /:i&- (Lat. vid-eo), for e-pSov, e-tSov, etSov: see also the exam-
ples in 539.
2. In verbs in eo> of the Second Class (574), where cv became
ep and finally c; as pe-w, ^ow (stem pev-, pe/r-), fut. pev-o-o-pM.
See also 601.
3. In certain nouns of the third declension, where final v of the
stem becomes /r, which is dropped ; as vavs (vav-), gen. i/d-os for
i/av-os, vii/r-os (269) ; see /JacnXcvs (265). See also 256.
91. The Aeolic and Doric retained p long after it disappeared
in Ionic and Attic. The following are a few of the many words
in which its former presence is known :
96] EUPHONIC CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 23
fiovs, ox (Lat. bov-is), lap, spring (Lat. ver), 8109, divine (divus),
epyov, tt?0r& (Germ, iverk), ea^s, garment (Lat. vestis), T7repos,
evening (vesper) , Is, strength {vis), K\.rft<s (Dor. /cXctis), &e?/ (clavis),
ols, sAeejo (ovis), OIKOS house (yicus}, otvos, wine (w'num), CTKCUOS, fe/2
92. (Changes in Aspirates.} When a smooth mute (TT, K, T)
is brought before a rough vowel (either by elision or in
forming a compound), it is itself made rough. E.g.
'A<n;/xi (for aTr-t^/xt) , Ka0aipe'a> (for Kar-atpea)), d</>' a>v (for OTTO
toy), v^x^' oAiyv (for VVKTO. oXrjv, 48; 71).
93. N. So in crasis (see examples in 44). Here the rough
breathing may affect even a consonant not immediately preced-
ing it ; as in <povSos, gone, from Trpo oBov ; <f>povpo<s, watchman
94. N. The Ionic generally does not observe this principle in
writing, but has (for example) ctTr' ou, aTrirjfU (from faro and L-qfu).
95. The Greeks generally avoided two rough consonants
in successive syllables. Thus
1. In reduplications (521) an initial rough mute is always
made smooth. E.g.
IIe'</>vKa (for <e<uKa), perfect of <va> ; Ke^va (for x e Xn va )i P er ^*
of ^ao-Kw; reOrjXa (for fle&yAa), perf. of ^aA.Aa>. So in rt-^/xt (for
^t-^/xt), 794, 2.
2. The ending 0i of the first aorist imperative passive
becomes n after Brf- of the tense stem (757, 1). E.g.
AvOrjTL (for Av09-0t)> <f>avO-rfTL (for favOrf-Di) ; but 2 aor.
(757, 2).
3. In the aorist passive IriOfjv from TtOrj/JLL (^e-), and in
from ^uw (^v-) ^ and 0v become re and TV before ftyv.
4. A similar change occurs in d/xTr-ex^ (f r d/x<^-ex<>) and d/x?r-
wr^o) (for a/x<-i<rj(a>), clothe, and in e/ce-^ctptd (^X 00 an( ^ X t/ P)' t ruce -
So an initial aspirate is lost in e^w (stem l^- for <re;(-, 539), but
reappears in fut. e^oo.
5. There is a transfer of the aspirate in a few verbs which are
supposed to have had originally two rough consonants in the stem ;
as rpe'^xo (stem rpe<f>- for 0pe<-), nourish, fut. Optya) (662) ; rpe^ai
(rpe^- for Ope\-}, run, fut. 0peo/uuxt; cra^ryv, from OaTrrw (ra^>- for
0a<f>-), bury; see also Opvirrw, Tixpw, and stem #0,77--, in the Catalogue
of Verbs. So in 0pi(225), ^iatr, gen. rptx? (stem rptx* fo^* Qp l X~)'
and in ra^v's, swt/i, comparative 0d<7(ro>v for ^a^-Kov (84, 1 ). Here
24 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [96
the first aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost by an^
euphonic change.
In some forms of these verbs both rough consonants appear; as
. (See 709.)
SYLLABLES.
96. A Greek word has as many syllables as it has
separate vowels or diphthongs. The syllable next to
the last is called the penult (paen-ultima, almost last) ;
the one before the penult is called the antepenult.
97. The following rules, based on ancient tradition, are now
generally observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line :
1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin
a word (which may be seen from the Lexicon), and mutes followed
by fji, or v, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Qther combina-
tions of .consonants are divided. Thus, Z-x<*>, e-yw, e-cnre-pa, ve-Krap,
d-K/A?;, Se-o/AOs, /ai-/cpoj/, Trpd-y/xa-TO?, Trpaor-cra), eX-TTt?, ev-(W, ap-/ua-ra.
2. Compound words are divided into their original parts ; but
when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in composi-
tion, the compound is sometimes divided like a simple word : thus
7rpocr-a-ya> (from 7rpo<s and ayo>) ; but 7ra-pa-ya> or 7rap-aya> (from
Trapa and ayco).
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
98. A syllable is long by nature ($>vcrei) when it has
a long vowel or a diphthong ; as in rlfjuij^ Krelvw.
99. 1. A syllable is long by position (0eVet) when its
vowel is followed by two consonants or a double con-
sonant i as in f iaravTs, rpaTre^a, oprvt;.
2. The length of the vowel itself is not affected by position.
Thus a was sounded as long in TrpoUnro), 7rpay/*a, and 7rpais, but
as short in racro-co, ray/aa, and rats.
3. One or both of the consonants which make position may be
in the next word ; thus the second syllable in ovro? <f>r)(nv and in
Kara (rrofjua is long by position.
100. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a
mute and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e. it may be
either long or short) ; as in re/cvov, VTTVOS, vj3pi$. But
in Attic poetry such a syllable is generally short; in
nnp.frrtr it: is <TftnArfl.llv Inner.
106] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. ACCENT. 25
101. N. A middle mute (/?, y, 8) before ju, or v, and generally
before A., lengthens a preceding vowel ; as in dyvws, (3i(3\ov, 8oy/x.
102. N. To allow a preceding vowel to be short, the mute and
the liquid must be in the same word, or in the same part of a
compound. Thus e in e/c is long when a liquid follows, either in
composition or in the next word ; as e/cAeyw, CK veoii/ (both w ) .
103. The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once.
Thus r) and w and all diphthongs are long by nature ; c and o
are short by nature. (See 5.)
104. When a, t, and v are not long by position, their quan-
tity must generally be learned by observing the usage of
poets or from the Lexicon. But it is to be remembered that
1. Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis is long ;
as a in yepa (for yepaa), aKcw (for deKw), and KO.V (for /cat aV).
2. The endings as and v are long when v or vr has been
dropped before o- (79).
3. 'The accent often shows the quantity of its own vowel,
or of vowels in following syllables.
Thus the circumflex on Kvlcra, savor, shows that t is long and a
is short ; the acute on x^P^ land, shows that a is long ; on rives ;
whof that t is short; the acute on j3a<n\tLd, kingdom, shows that
the final a is long, on )8a(76Xa, queen, that final a is short. (See
106,3; 111; 112.)
105. The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs wilJ
be stated below in the proper places.
ACCENT.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
106. 1. There are three accents,
the acute ( 7 ), as \6yos, avros,
the grave ( N ), as auro? efyrj (115, 1),
the circumflex (" or ~), as TOVTO, rl^v.
2. The acute can stand only on one of the last three
syllables of a word, the circumflex only on one of the
last two, and the grave only on the last.
3. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable long
by nature.
26 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [107
107 1. The Greek accent was not simply a stress accent (like ours),
but it raised the musical pitch or tone (rd^os) of the syllable on which
it fell. This appears in the terms r6vos and Trpoaydla, which designated
the accent, and also indi;s, sharp, and /3api)s, grave, flat, which described
it. (See 110, 1 and 3.) As the language declined, the musical accent
gradually changed to a stress accent, which is now its only represen-
tative in Greek as in other languages.
2. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of Byzan-
tium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B.C., in order to teach for-
eigners the correct accent in pronouncing Greek. By the ancient theory
every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was said to
have the grave accent ; and the circumflex, originally formed thus " "*,
was said to result from the union of an acute and a following grave.
108. !N". The grave accent is written only in place of the acute
in the case mentioned in 115, 1, and occasionally on the indefinite
pronoun TIS, rl (418).
109. N. The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second
vowel of a diphthong (12) ; as in atpto, /u,o<ra, TOVS avrovs. But in
the improper diphthongs (a, y, <o) it stands on the first vowel even
when the L is written in the line; as in nprj, dirXw, *&i (o)
110. 1. A word is called oxytone (6v-Tovo$, sharp-toned)
when it has the acute on the last syllable, as /JomAevs;
paroxytone, when it has the acute on the penult, as /Jao-iAe'tos ;
proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult, as
2. A word is called perispomenon (TTCPIO-TTW/ACVOV) when it
has the circumflex on the last syllable, as eA0eu/; propens-
pomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult, as /nouo-a.
3. A word is called barytone (/fopv-roi/os, grave or Jlat-
toned) when its last syllable has no accent (107, 2). Of
course, all paroxytones, proparoxytones, and properispo-
mena are at the same time barytones.
4. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible
(111), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especially
the case with verbs (130). (See 122.).
111. The antepenult, if accented, takes the acute.
But it can have no accent if the last syllable is long by
nature or ends in f or ty ; as TreXe/tu?, a^pwTro?, 7r/oo$uXaf .
112. An accented penult is circumflexed when it is
long by nature while the last syllable is short by nature ;
117] PRINCIPLES OF ACCENT. 27
as fj,ij\ov t 1/770-09, r)\^. Otherwise it takes the acute;
as X(xyo9, TOVTCOV.
113. N. Final at and ot are counted as short in determining the
accent ; as a.v6poyrro^ vrfcroL i except in the optative, and in OIKO*, at
home; as Ti/x^crai, TTOI^O-OI (not ri^rjcraL or Trooyoroi) .
114. N. Genitives in ews and ewv from nouns in is and vs of the
third declension (251), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and wv
of the Attic second declension (198), and the Ionic genitive in ew of the
first (188,3), allow the acute on the antepenult; as eiryews, 7r6Xews,
T^pew (T?7/)?7s). So some compound adjectives in ws; as ity^-Ke/ows,
high-horned. For the acute of uWep, ol'Se, etc., see 146.
115. 1. An oxytone changes its acute to the grave
before other words in the same sentence ; as rotV Trovy-
povs av@pa)7TOV$ (for TOU? Trovrjpovs av6p(i)7rov<i).
2. This change is not made before enclitics (143) nor before an
elided syllable (48), nor in the interrogative ris, TI (418). It is not
made before a colon : before a comma modern usage differs, and
the tradition is uncertain.
116. (Anastrophe.) Dissyllabic prepositions (regularly
oxytone) throw the accent back on the penult in two cases.
This is called anastrophe (avaa-Tpoffrrj, turning back). It occurs
1. When such a preposition follows its case; as in TOVTWI/ Trepi
(for Trcpt TOVTWV), about these.
This occurs in prose only with Trepi, but in the poets with all the
dissyllabic prepositions except dVa, Sta, a/x,<i', and dim. In Homer
it occurs also when a preposition follows a verb from which it is
separated by tmesis ; as oAe'o-as aVo, having destroyed.
2. When a preposition stands for itself compounded with COTIV;
as irdpa for Trdtpeo-nv, Ivi for Ivecmv (evt being poetic for ci/). Here
the poets have ova. (for dra-OT?70i)> up !
ACCENT OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES AND ELIDED WORDS.
117. A contracted syllable is accented if either of the
original syllables had an accent. A contracted penult or
antepenult is accented regularly (111; 112). A contracted
final syllable is circumflexed ; but if the original word was
oxytone, the acute is retained. E.g.
Tt/xw/xevo? from rt/juxo/xevo?, ^tXetTe.from ^tXeere, <iA.ot/Aev from
c^iAe'oi/xei/, <iAowTo>v from (^lAeoj/Tcw, Tt/xoi from Tt/xaco ; but
from
28 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [us
This proceeds from the ancient principle that the circumflex
comes from '+ N (107, 2), never from N + '; so that rt/>taw gives TI/AW,
but /3e/?aa>s gives /2e/2a>s.
118. N. If neither of the original syllables had an accen-t, the
contracted form is accented without regard to the contraction ; as
Ti/xd for Ti/Aae, ewot for cvi/ooc.
Some exceptions to the rule of 117 will be noticed under the
declensions. (See 203; 311.)
119. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that
of the second remains ; as Ta.ya.0a. for TO, ayaOd, eywSa for eyw
oTSa, Kara for /cat etra; raAAa for TO, dAAa; rdpa for rot dpa.
120. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions
lose their accent with the elided vowel ; other oxytones
throw the accent back to the penult, but without changing
the acute to the grave (115, 1). E.g.
'ETT' avro) for CTTI avrw, dXX* eiTrei/ for dAAa OTrev, <^>^/A' yo> for
<j>r}[u eyw, KO.K emy for KO.K.O.
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
121. 1. The place of the accent in the nominative singu-
lar of a noun (and the nominative singular masculine of
an adjective) must generally be learned by observation.
The other forms accent the same syllable as this nominative,
if the last syllable permits (111); otherwise the following
syllable. E.g.
dAacrcra, daXdcrarj^, @aXa(T<rav, OaXa<r(rai, 0aA.acrcra.is ; /copa,
/copaKo?, KopaKe?, KopaKtov; Trpay/xa, Trpay/mros, Trpdy/xartoi/ ; oSous,
oSdi/ros, oSovcrtv. So Capias, ^aptecrcra, ^aptev, gen. ^apt'evro?, etc. :
a^tos, d^td, aiov, d^tot, d^tat, d^ta.
2. The kind of accent is determined as usual (111 ; 112) ; as
T^CTOS, VT/CTOV, v^crov, v^crot, viycrots. (See also 123 ; 124.)
122. N. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent
(110,4):-
(a) Contracted compound adjectives in oos (203, 2):
(6) The neuter singular and vocative singular of adjectives in wr,
ov (except those in Qpwv, compounds of typ-qv), and the neuter of com-
paratives in uv\ as euSa//iwj', evdatfwv (313); ^eXriw*', )8e XTIOJ> (358);
but datypwv, datypov :
(c) Many barytone compounds in TJS in all forms ; as atfrd/ojcTjs,
airapKes, gen. pi. avTdpKwv ; 0iXaXiJ^7/s, ^tXdXij^es (but dX^^s, dX?7^s);
this includes vocatives like SciKpores, AT/^o-^ews (228) ; so SQme othei
adjectives of the third declension (see 314):
131] ACCENT OF NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 29
(d) The vocative of syncopated nouns in rjp (273), of compound
proper names in wv, as 'Ayd/j.e/m.i'ov, MrbfjueSov (except AaKedai/j.oi>), and
of > A7r6X\w', llotreiduv (Horn. Ilo<rei5dwj>), crarr??/), saviour, and (Horn.)
ddrjp, brother-in-law, voc. 'ATroXXoj', Hdaeidov (Horn. HotreLSaov),
tr&rep, 5aep (see 221, 2).
123. The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxy-
tones of the first and second declensions is circumflexed. E.g.
Tt/x^s, rlfJirj, rlfjuuv, TI/XCOI/, rl/xats ; Oeov, 0e<o, Oe&v, 0eois.
124. In thejlrst declension, <ovof the genitive plural (for
cW) is circumflexed (170). But the feminine of adjectives
and participles in os is spelt and accented like the masculine
and neuter. E.g.
AtKtoi/, 8o(ov (from SLKYJ, S6a), TroXtTwv (from TroXi-n??) ; but
dtW, Aeyo/xevcoj/ (fern. gen. plur. of aios, Aeyo/xevos, 302). For
the genitive plural of other adjectives and participles, see 318.
125. N. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension
(198) are exceptions ; as vews, gen. veto, dat. i/e<w.
126. N. Three nouns of the first declension are paroxytone-in
the genitive plural : a<f>vrj, anchovy, a<f>vo)v ', XP 7 ? " 7 " 7 ? 5 ' usurer, \pvf-
OTOH>; Trj<riai, Etesian winds, IrrjcrMV.
127. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent
the last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers :
here on/ and oiv are circumflexed. E.g.
iys, servant, Orjr6<s, Orjri, OYJTOLV, OrjT&v, 0r)(ri.
128. N. Aa?, torch, 8/xo>5, slave, ov<s, ear, Trots, child, Tpws, Trojan,
0a>5, light, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive
dual and plural ; so Trek, all, in both genitive and dative plural: as
Trat?, TratSo?, TrauSi, TraLCTL, but TraiStoi/; Tras, Travros, TTOVTI, Travrcoy,
Tracrt.
129. N. The interrogative TI'S, rtVos, rtVt, etc., always accents the
first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles ; as <oV, OI/TOS, ovrt,
, ovo-t ;
ACCENT OF VERBS.
130. Verbs generally have recessive accent (110, 4);
as /SovXeva), /3ovAevo/xev, (3ov\evov<nv ; Trape^w, Trapeze ;
aTTi'Sore ; ^ovXeuovrat, ftovXevo-ai (aor. opt. act.), but
(aor. imper. mid.). See 113.
131. The chief exceptions to this principle are these :
30 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS, [132
1. The second aorist active infinitive in civ and the second
aorist middle imperative in ov are perispomena : as Aa/3e/, cX.6e.2v,
AtTretv, At7To9, Aa/?ov. For compounds like Kard-Oov, see 133, 3.
2. These second aorist imperatives active are oxytone : CITTC,
cAfle, evpe, Aa/3e. So tSe in the sense behold ! But their compounds
are regular ; as aTr-eiTre.
3. Many contracted optatives of the /u,i-inflection regularly cir-
cumflex the penult ; as toTairo, 8t8oto-0c (740).
4. The following forms accent the penult : the first aorist active
infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive (except Trpiaa-Oat,
and ovao-0at, 798), the perfect middle and passive infinitive and
participle, and all infinitives in vat or ftev (except those in /xevat).
Thus, /?ovAevcrai, yei/eV0at, AeAvcr$ai, AeAu/xevos, to-ravat, StSovai,
AcAvKe'vat, So'/xo/ and So/xerat (both epic for Sowat).
5. The following participles are oxytone : the second aorist
active ; and all of the third declension in -s, except the first aorist
active. Thus, AITTOJV, Av0et's, StSous, SCIKVUS, AeAvKois, toras (pres.) ;
but Avo-as and o-T^crds (aor.).
So ton/, present participle of c*/xt, go.
132. Compound verbs have recessive accent like simple verbs ;
as a-vvufjLL (from <rvv and ei/xt), owotSa (crvv and oTSa). e^a/*t (e^
and ct/xt), Trap-core.
133. But there are these exceptions to 132 :
1. The accent cannot go further back than the augment or
reduplication ; as Trap-eixov (not Trapei^oi/), / provided, Trap-rjv (not
TrapTyv), he was present, a^-t/crat (not a^tKrat), he has arrived.
So when the augment falls on a long vowel or a diphthong
which is not changed by it; as VTT-CIKC (imperfect), he was yielding;
but v7r-etKc (imperative), yield !
2. Compounds of Sds, cs, 0e's, and erne's are paroxytone ; as
aTroSos, Trapao-^es (not aVoSos, etc.).
3. Monosyllabic second aorist middle imperatives in -ov have
recessive accent when compounded with a dissyllabic preposition ;
as KOLTa-Oov, put down, aTro-oov, sell : otherwise they circumflex the
ov (131, 1) ; as Iv-Oov, put in.
134. N". Participles in their inflection are accented as adjectives
(121), not as verbs. Thus, ySovAevoov has in the neuter fiov\evov
(not /?ovAevov) ; <tAe<Dv, <iAaiv, has <iAe'ov (not ^>tAeov), faXovv-
(See 335.)
135. For the accent of optatives in at and ot, see 113. Some
other exceptions to 130 occur, especially in poetic forms.
141] PROCLITICS AND ENCLITICS. 3^
PROCLITICS.
136. Some monosyllables have no accent and are closely
attached to the following word. These are called proclitics
(from 7rpoK\tv(o, Ivan forward).
137. The proclitics are the articles 6, 17, 01, at ; the prepo-
sitions ets (es), e (e/c), eV; the conjunctions ei and ws (so ws
used as a preposition) ; and the negative ov (OUK, ov^).
138. Exceptions. .1. Ov takes the acute at the end of a sen-
tence ; as TTOJS yap ov ; for why not f So when it stands alone as
Ov, No.
2. 'O? and sometimes e and ets take the acute when (in poetry)
they follow their noun ; as KO.K&V :, from evils ; 0eos ws, as a God.
3o 'Os is accented also when it means thus; as cSs CITTCV, thus
he spoke. This use of o>s is chiefly poetic ; but /cat a>s, even thus,
and ov8' d>s or ^78' <os, no even thus, sometimes occur in Attic prose.
For a proclitic before an enclitic, see 143, 4.
139. N". When 6 is used for the relative os, it is accented (as*
in Od. 2, 262) ; and many editors accent all articles when they are
demonstrative, as 11. 1, 9, o yap (3acn\rJL xoAa>0ei's, and write o /xev
. . . o 8e, and ot ftcv . . . dt 8e, even in Attic Greek.
ENCLITICS.
140. An enclitic (eyKAu/o>, lean upon) is a word which
loses its own accent, and is pronounced as if it were part of
the preceding word; as avO pa-rot re (like h6min6sque in Latin).
141. The enclitics are :
1. The personal pronouns />tov, /W, /x-c; crov, rrot", o-c; ov, ot,
e, and (in poetry) <r<f>icri.
To these are added the dialectic and poetic forms, jucv, o-eo, o-ev,
rot' TV (accus. for o-e), eo, ev, Wev, fj.iv, viv, o-^>t, 'j-^)tv, o-^>e, o-</>a>e,
o-^>wfv, o-^eW, o-<^ea5, o-<as, o-<^>ea.
2. The indefinite pronoun TIS, rl, in all its forms (except
oYra) ; also the indefinite adverbs TTOV, /ro#i', TH/, TTOC, Tro^eV,
Trore, TTW, 7T(05. These must be distinguished from the inter-
rogatives rt's, TTOV, TTO^I, 7717. TTOI, iroOev, TTOTC, TTCO, TTW?.
3. The present indicative of et/xi', be, and of ^/u, say,
except the forms et and $$<>. But epic eo-o-t and Ionic c?s
are enclitic.
M
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [142
4. The particles ye, re, rot', irep : the inseparable -8c in oSe,
rouVSe, etc. (not 6V, Zm) ; and -Oe and -^t in eWe and vat^t
(146). So also the poetic vw (not vvv), and the epic K
(xeV), 6^i/, and pa.
142. The enclitic always loses its accent, except a dis-
syllabic enclitic after a paroxytone (143, 2). See examples
in 143.
143. The word before the enclitic always retains its own
accent, and it never changes a final acnte to the grave (115, 2).
1. If this word is proparoxytone or properisporaenon, it
receives from the enclitic an acnte on the last syllable as a
second accent. Thus avOpwTros Tts, avBpwiroL TII/CS, 8eidV /x,o/.,
TraiSe's rive?, OVTOS ivTiv.
2. If it is paroxytone, it receives no additional accent
(to avoid two acutes on successive syllables). Here a dis-
syllabic enclitic keeps its accent (to avoid three successive
unaccented syllables). Thus, Aoyos TIS (not A.oyos TIS), Aoyoi
T6i/es (not Aoyoi TU/CS), Aoywi/ Tti/cov, ovra> <j>it)criv (but OVTOS <f>T)<nv
3. If its last syllable is accented, it remains unchanged ;
as Ttfuu T (115, 2), rtftwi/ ye, erodes rts, o-o^ot rives, <ro<$>uv
rives.
4. A proclitic before an enclitic receives an acute ; as et
TIS, ei <f>r)criv OVTOS.
144. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis
falls upon them : this occurs
1. When they begin a sentence or clause ; or when pronouns
express antithesis, as ov rapa Tpwo-iv oAXa aot fjLa.xpvfj.e6a, we shall
fight then, not with Trojans but with you, S. Ph. 1253.
2. When the preceding syllable is elided; as in TroAA' eoriV
(120) for TroXXa eoru>.
3. The personal pronouns generally retain their accent after an
accented preposition; here e/xov, ep,ot, and e/xe' are used (except in
TT/OOS //e).
4. The personal pronouns of the third person are not enclitic
when they are direct reflexives (988) ; o-<n never in Attic prose.
5. *EcrTt at the beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies
existence or possibility, becomes eori ; so after OVK, pr), et, the adverb
(os, Kat, dAA' or oAAa, and TOVT' or TOVTO.
150] DIALECTIC CHANGES. PUNCTUATION. 33
145. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes an
acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as
i TL<S ri <rot <f>r)<rw, if any one is saying anything to you.
146. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word,
the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word.
Thus, OVTII/OS, wnvL) wvTivwj/, woTre/o, wore, otSe, rowrSe, etre, ovre,
, are only apparent exceptions to 106 ; 111 j 112.
DIALECTIC CHANGES.
147. The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of 17 where
the Attic has a ; and the Doric and Aeolic by the use of d
where the Attic has 17.
Thus, Ionic yei/e?/ for yevea, oycro/xai for ia<ro/A<u (from tao/xai,
635) ; Doric n/xdo-w for Ti/>ujo-o> (from Tt/xaa>) ; Aeolic and Doric
XdOd for XrjOrj. But an Attic d caused by contraction (as in TI/AO,
from rf/iae), or an Attic vj lengthened from e (as in </>iA.iJo-<o from
(f>i\eo), 635), is never thus changed.
148. The Ionic often has et, ou, for Attic e, o ; and tji for
Attic in nouns and adjectives in eios, etovj as ^eti/os for
/o?, yoiowo? for /x,oros 5 (3a<n\rj/io<s for j3a.(TL\io<s
149. The Ionic does not avoid successive vowels to the
same extent as the Attic ; and it therefore very often omits
contraction (36). It contracts co and cov into eu (especially
in Herodotus) ; as ?roti;/u,ev, 7roiev<rt (from Troteo/xev, 7TOiov<ri),
for Attic Trotov/xev, TTOIOUCTI. Herodotus does not use v mo-y-
able (56). See also 94 and 785, 1.
PUNCTUATION MARKS,
150. 1. The Greek uses the comma (, ) and the period (.)
like the English. It has also a colon, a point above the
line (), which is equivalent to the English colon and semi-
colon ; as OVK ZcrO* o y* elirov ' ov yap <58' a(f>pwv !<vi/, it is not
what I said; for I am not so foolish.
2. The mark of interrogation (;) is the same as the
English semicolon j as TTOTC rjXOev; when did he come ?
PART II.
INFLECTION.
151. INFLECTION is a change in the form of a word,
made to express its relation to other words. It includes
the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, and
the conjugation of verbs.
152. Every inflected word has a fundamental part,
which is called the stem. To this are appended various
letters or syllables, to form cases, tenses, persons, num-
bers, etc.
153. Most words contain a still more primitive element thai*
the stem, which is called the root. Thus, the stem of the verb
Ti/xaw, honor, is TI/UUX-, and that of the noun Tipr), is rt/xa-, that of
runs, payment, is TKTL-, that of rf/xios, held in honor, is TI/UO-, that
of Ti/Arj/m (rt/xiy/xaTos), valuation, is Tt/A^/zaT-; but all these stems
are developed from one root, TI-, which is seen pure in the verb
Ti-G>, honor. In TIW, therefore, the verb stem and the root are the
same.
154. The stem itself may be modified and assume various
forms in different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same verb
stem may in different tense stems appear as \ITT-, \CITT-, and A.OITT-
(see 459). So the same noun stem may appear as rtftd-, rt/xa-, and
rlfj^rj- (168).
155. There are three numbers; the singular, the dual,
and the plural. The singular denotes one object, the
plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used to
denote two objects, but even here the plural is more
common.
162] GENDERS, NUMBERS, AND CASES.
156. There are three genders; the masculine, the
feminine, and the neuter.
157. N. The grammatical gender in Greek is very often differ-
ent from the natural gender. Especially many names of things
are masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine,
feminine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take
the form adapted to either of these genders, and the adjective or
article is then said to have the gender of the corresponding noun ;
thus 6 ev/ovs TTora/xos, the broad river (masc.), ^ KaXrj oiKi'd, the beau-
tiful house (fern.), TOVTO TO Trpayfjuj., this thing (neat.).
The gender of a noun is often indicated by prefixing the article
(386) ; as (6) avrjp, man; (17) yvvtj, woman; (TO) Trpayfjui, thing.
158. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are
said to be of the common gender: as (6, i)) 0tos, God or Goddess.
Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one
grammatical gender, are called epicene (eTrt'/coii/os) ; as 6 deros, the
eagle ; f) oAwTr^, the fox; both including males and females.
159. The gender must often be learned by observation. But
(1) Names of males are generally masculine, and names of
females feminine.
(2) Most names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine ; and
most names of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine.
(3) Most nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine;
as dper?;, virtue, \TTL<S, hope.
(4) Diminutive nouns are neuter ; as -rraioYoi/, child ; yvvaiov, old
woman (literally, little woman).
Other rules are given under the declensions (see 168; 189;
281-284).
160. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive,
dative, accusative, and vocative.
161. 1. The nominative and vocative plural are always
alike.
2. In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative
are alike in all numbers ; in the plural these end in a.
3. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are
always alike ; and the genitive and dative dual are always
alike.
162. The cases of nouns have in general the same meaning as
the corresponding cases in Latin; as Norn, a man (as subject),
36
INFLECTION.
[163
Gen. of a man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a man (as object),
Voc. man. The chief functions of the Latin ablative are
divided between the Greek genitive and dative. (See 1042.)
163. All the cases except the nominative and vocative are
called oblique cases.
NOUNS.
164. There are three declensions of nouns, in which
also all adjectives and participles are included.
165. These correspond in general to the first three declensions
in Latin. The first is sometimes called the A declension (with
stems in d), and the second the declension (with stems in o).
These two together are sometimes called the Vowel declension, as
opposed to the third or Consonant declension (206).
The principles which are common to adjectives, participles, and
substantives are given under the three declensions of nouns.
166. N. The name noun (#vo//,a), according to ancient usage, in-
cludes both substantives and adjectives. But by modern custom noun
is generally used in grammatical language as synonymous with sub-
stantive, and it is so used in the present work.
167.
SING.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
DUAL.
N.A.V.
G.D.
PLUR.
N.V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
CASE-ENDINGS OF NOUNS.
VOWEL DECLENSION.
Masc. and Fein. Neuter.
s or none v
s or 10
i
v
none v
none
IV
vs (as)
b)V
UTl (IS)
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
Masc. and Fern. Neuter.
s or none
v or a
none or like Nom.
6
OIV
i, e<r<ri
vs, as
none
none
none
The relations of some of these endings to the terminations actually
in use will be explained under the different declensions. The agree-
ment of the two classes in many points is striking.
171]
FIRST DECLENSION.
37
FIRST DECLENSION.
168. Stems of the first declension end originally in a.
This is often modified into rj in the singular, and it
becomes a in the plural. The nominative singular of
feminines ends in a or ??; that of masculines ends in
a? or 779. There are no neuters.
169. The following table shows how the final a or TJ of the
stem unites with the case endings (167), when any are added, to
form the actual terminations :
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Feminine.
Masculine.
Masc. and Fern.
Nom. d or d
T) d-s
1J-S
a- 1
Gen. d-s or TJ-S
TJ-S a
-to (Horn, d-o)
wv (for -wv)
Dat. d-i or ij-i
TJ-I d-i
ij-i
a-to-i or a-is
Ace. d-v or d-v
T|-V d-V
T]-V
as (for a-vs)
Voc. d or d
Jl *
dor r\
a-i
DUAL.
<*<
Masc. and Fern.
N.A.V.
d
G. D.
aiv
170. N. In the genitive singular of masculines Homeric do comes
from a-io (169); but Attic ou probably follows the analogy of ou for oo
in the second declension (191). Circumflexed u>v in the genitive plural
is contracted from Ionic tuv (188, 5). The stem in d (or a) may
thus be seen in all cases of otictd and %c6pa, and (with the change of d
to f] in the singular) also in the other paradigms (except in ov of the
genitive). The forms ending in a and 77 have no case-endings.
FEMININES.
171. The nouns (97) %<w/oa, land, (ff) TI/JLIJ, honor,
(77) oitcid, house, (77) Movcra, Muse, are thus declined :
Stem. (x<o/>a-)
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc,
Xc&pd
a land
of a land
to a land
a land
O land
oticCd
otictds
Movo-a
Mover T]S
otKidv
OLKld
Mov<rav
Movo-a
38 INFLECTION. [172
N. A.V. \<opa. two land's rl^d olicCd Movo-d
G. D. x"P aiv f or to two lands rijiaiv oticCaiv Movo-aiv
Nom. x."P ai lands ripaC oticCcu Mov<rai
Gen. x w P" v of lands rlp&v OIKIWV Movo-wv
Dat. \wpais to lands rifiais OIKICUS Movcrcus
Ace. x^pds lands rljids olicids Movcrds
Voc. \wpai lands rljiaC otxCai Movcrai
172. The following show varieties of quantity and accent :
sea, 6aX.da-(Trj<s, Oa\d(rcrr), Od\aa-crav ; PL
bridge, ye^vpds, y(f>vpa, yec^vpav; PL yec^vpat, etc.
ovaa, shadow, crKtas, <r/<ia, crKtai/; PL <7/acu, CTKIWJ/, (TKtats, etc.
yj/w/uty opinion, yvco/x^s, yvwfJir), yvwfJirjv ', PL yvw/xat, yvw/xwv, etc.
Treipa, attempt, Tretpds, Tretpa, Tretpav; PL Tretpat, Tretpoii/, etc.
173. The stem generally retains a through the singular
after e, t, or p, but changes a to 7; after other letters. See
OLKLO.J xwpa, and rl/x>; ID 171.
174. But nouns having <r, XX, or a double consonant (18)
before final a of the stem, and some others, have a in the
nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, and y in the
genitive and dative, like Movo-a.
Thus afJM^a, wagon ; 8tif/a, thirst ; pi'a, root ; a/xtXA.a, contest ;
OdXao-o-a (with later Attic OaXarra), sea. So /xepi/>iva, care ; Se'o-Troti/a,
mistress; Xcaiva, lioness; rpiaiva., trident; also roX/xa, daring ; Statra,
living ; aKavOa, thorn ; evOvva, scrutiny.
175. The following have a in the nominative, accusative, and
vocative, and d in the genitive and dative, singular (after e, t,
orp):-
(a) Most ending in pa preceded by a diphthong or by v; as
/xotpa, ye<vpa.
(6) Most abstract nouns formed from adjectives in rjs or oos ;
as dX^eta, truth (dXrjOijs, true~), ewota, kindness (evvoos, kind). (But
the Attic poets sometimes have aXrjOeid, ewoid, etc.)
(c) Nouns in eta and rpta designating females ; as /?a<7i'Xeta,
queen, ^dXrpia, female harper (but /3atnXeia, kingdom). So
j^y, gen. /avtds.
For feminine adjectives in a, see 318.
181]
FIRST DECLENSION.
39
176. (Exceptions.) Aepr/, neck, and Koprj, girl (originally
, have 77 after p (173). "Epo-yy, dew, and Kopcrr; (new Attic
, temple, have r; after <r (174). Some proper names have d
irregularly; as A?jSd, Leda, gen. ArJSd?. Both od and orj are
allowed ; as fioy, cry, <rrdd, porch.
177. N". It will be seen that a of the nominative singular is
always short when the genitive has 17?, and generally long when
the genitive has as.
178. N. Av of the accusative singular and a of the vocative
singular agree in quantity with a of the nominative. The quan-
tity of all other vowels of the terminations may be seen from the
table in 169.
Most nouns in a have recessive accent (110, 4).
MASCULINES.
179, The nouns (o) ra/x/a?, steward, (o) vroXtr^?, citi-
zen, and (6) icpLT^, judge, are thus declined :
Stem.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N.A.V.
G.D.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat
Ace.
Voc.
(TroXIra-)
SINGULAR.
Tajxuds
Tajxuov
iroXtrov
KplTT]?
KplTOV
rajxidv
rajxiai
DUAL.
PLURAL.
iroXfTijv
iroXira
TroXtrd
iroXtraiv
iroXirai
iroXtTwv
-iroXirats
iroXtTas
iroXirai
KplTO,
KplTO.
Kptraiv
KpiraC
Kpirais
Kpir&s
KpiraC
180. Thus may be declined i/cdi/ta?, youth, o-Tpariamy?, soldier
poet.
181. The a of the stem is here retained in the singulai
after , i, or p; otherwise it is changed to rj : see the para
digms. For irregular ov in the genitive singular, see 170.
40 INFLECTION. [182
182. The following nouns in 175 have d in the vocative singular
(like TroA-tr^s) : those in -nys; national names, like Htpo-^s, Persian,
voc. Hepcrd ; and compounds in 779, like yeoo'/xerp^s, geometer, voc.
yew/x,Tpd. Aeo-TTOTT/s, master, has voc. SeWord. Other nouns in
175 of this declension have the vocative in rj ; as Kpovi'Sjys, son 0/
Cronos, Kpovi'S?;.
CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
183. Most nouns in ad, ed, and eds are contracted (35) in
all their cases.
184. Mj/dd, fjiva, mina, o-v/ced, o-vKfj, Jig-tree, and ']
IT}?, Hermes, are thus declined :
(/ij/d- for /ij>ad-) (<ri;/cd- for tru/ced-) ('Ep/id- for ']
SINGULAR.
Nom. (/jivda) [iva (O-VK&X) <rvid]
Gen. (yields) jjtvas (o-u:^ds) O-VKT]S ('E/o^ou) 'Epjiov
Dat. (/zpcip) p,va (cru/c^) o'VK'g
Acc. ((j.vddv) (ivdv (eru/c^d^) O"VKTJV
Voc. (/ivdd) fjtvd (o-D/c^d) <rvKf]
DUAL.
N. A.V. (/xpdd) (Jiva (aD/c^d) crvKa ('Ep/*^d) 'EpfJid
N. V. ((Avdai) |ivai (<ruK^at) <rvKat
Gen. (/xvacDj>) fxvwv ((rv/cetDi') CTVKWV
Dat. (/abacus) (jLvais ((TUK^ats) crvKais ('E/9/x^ats) 'Epp.ais
Acc. (/xmds) fxvds ((TVK^ds) crvKas ('Ep/i^ds) 'Epjxas
185. So yfj, earth (from an uncontracted form ye-d" or ya-d), in
the singular : yvj, yfjs, yfj, yvjv, yrj (Doric ya, yas, etc.).
186; N. Bopeds, North wind, which appears uncontracted in
Attic, has also a contracted form Boppds (with irregular pp), gen.
Boppa (of Doric form), dat. Boppa, ace. BoppoV, voc. Boppa.
187. N. For ea contracted to d in the dual and the accusative
plural, see 39, 1. For contract adjectives (feminines) of this class,
see 310.
DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
188. 1. The Ionic has rj for d throughout the singular, even
after e, i, or p ; as yevery, \u>pr), ra/xti;?. But Homer has 0ea, God-
191] SECOND DECLENSION. 41
dess. The Doric and Aeolic have d unchanged in the singular.
The Ionic generally uses uncontracted forms of contract nouns
and adjectives.
2. Norn. Sing. Horn, sometimes a for rjs ; as iinrora for ITTTTOTT;^
horseman, sometimes with recessive accent, as /xryrtera, counsellor.
(Compare Latin poeta = TroiryT^?.)
3. Gen. Sing. For ov Homer has the original form do, as
'ArpeiSdo ; sometimes <o (for eo) after vowels, as Bope'eo (from
Bope'as). Horn, and Hdt. have Ionic ew (always one syllable in
Horn.), as 'ArpeiSeco (114), T^/aew (gen. of Trjprjs) ; and coo occurs in
proper names in older Attic. The Doric has d for do, as 'Arpet'Sd.
4. Ace. Sing. Hdt. sometimes forms an ace. in eo, (for rjv) from
nouns in -179, as in the third declension, as Seo-TroVea (for
from Seo-TroT^s, master (179) : so Eepr;s, ace. Eepea or Hep^ry
5. e'en. P/. . Horn, aw, the original form, as /cAtcnaon/, o/
sometimes on/ (170). Horn, and Hdt. have Ionic eW (one syllable
in Horn.), as TrvXeW, of gates. Doric av for aw, also in dramatic
chorus.
6. Dat. PL Poetic awn (also Aeolic and old Attic form) ; Ionic
rjm (Horn., Hdt., even oldest Attic), Horn, also rj<; (rarely ais).
7. Ace. PL Lesbian Aeolic ats for ds.
SECOND DECLENSION.
189. Stems of the second declension end in o, which
is sometimes modified to w. The nominative singular
regularly ends in 09 or ov (gen. ov). Nouns in 09 are
masculine, rarely feminine ; those in ov are neuter.
190. The following table shows how the terminations of nouns
in os and ov are formed by the final o of the stem (with its modifi-
cations) and the case-endings :
SINGULAR.
Masc. & Fern. Neuter.
N. o-s o-v
G. ov (for o-o)
D. w(foro-t)
A. o-v
V. O-V
Masc., Fem., & Neuter.
N.A.V. (foro)
G. D. o-tv
PLURAL.
Masc. & Fem. Neuter.
N. o-i a
G. a>v
D. o-uri or o-is
A. ovs (for o-vs) d
V. o-i a
191. N. In the genitive singular the Homeric o-to becomes o-o and
then ov. In the dative singular and the nominative etc. dual, o becomes
w. E takes the place of o in the vocative singular of nouns in os, and
X takes the place of o in the nominative etc. of neuters. There being
42 INFLECTION. [192
no genitive plural in owv, uv is not accented as a contracted syllable
(Xoywv, not Xo7<!Dj').
192. The nouns (6) ^0709, word, (77) ^770-09, island,
(o, 77) avdpwrros, man or human being, (77) 6809,
(TO) Sojpov, gift, are thus declined :
Stem. (\070-) (v-r)<TO-} (divOpuTro-} (65o-)
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Xd^os
a word
VTJCTOS
avOp (OTTOS
656s
8u>pov
Gen.
Xd-yov
of a word
v^jo-ou
dvOpWTTOV
6Sov
Swpov
Dat.
Xdv*
to a word
vrfj<T(p
dvOpoSnuo
6S(o
8(0p(0
Ace.
Xd-yov
a word
vr\<rov
avBpcDTrov
68dv
Swpov
Voc.
Xd-ye
word
vTjo-6
av6p(OTT
68
8wpov
DUAL.
N. A.V Xd-yw two words vf\<ro> dvOpwrrw 68 aS 8(opa>
G. D. Xd-yoiv o/or to taoo words vVjo-oiv dvOpwiroiv oSoiv Swpoiv
PLURAL.
Nom. Xd^oi words vfjo-oi avOpwirot 68oC 8(Spa
Gen. Xd<y(ov of words v^<rwv dvOpwirwv 68(3v Swpwv
Dat. Xd-yois to words VTJO-OIS dvBpwrrois 68015 8wpois
Ace. Xd-yovs words v^jo-ovs dvOpwirovs 68ovs Swpa
Voc. Xd-yot O words vtjo-oi avOpwTroi 68o( 8(opa
193. Thus may be declined VO/AOS, law, KtVSvvos, danger,
p,os, river, jSios, life, OdvaTOs, death, ravpos, bull, <rvKov,Jig, If.
outer garment.
194. The chief feminine nouns of the second declension are
the following :
1. /?curai/os, touch-stone, j3LJ3\o<s, book, yepavos, crane, yvdOo's, jaiv,
So/co5, beam, 8p6cro<s, dew, Ka/xtvos, oven, KapSoTros, kneading-trough,
KtySwros, chest, votros, disease, TrXivOos, brick, pd(3So<s, rod, tropes, coffin,
o"7roSos, ashes, ra<^>pos, ditch, //CI/X/AOS, sand, \j/f)<f>o<s, pebble ; with 6805
and K&evOos, way, a/xa^cros, carriage-road, drpaTros, path.
2. Names of countries, towns, trees, and islands, which are regu-
larly feminine (159, 2) : so r;7retpos, mainland, and vjjo-os, island.
195. The nominative in os is sometimes used for the vocative
in e ; as w <t'Aos. eos, God, has always 0eos as vocative.
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION.
196. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this declen-
sion have stems in o>, which appears in all the cases. This
201]
SECOND DECLENSION.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
Nom.
Mfa
Gen.
Mi
N. A. V. vc&
Dat.
Ace.
ve^'
vccov
G. D. v<pv
Voc.
vtws
is called the Attic declension, though it is not confined to
Attic Greek. The noun (6) i/ews, temple, is thus declined:
PLURAL.
Nom. yew
Gen.
Dat.
ACC.
VOC. V6(p
197. N. There are no neuter nouns of the Attic declension in
good use. But the corresponding adjectives, as ?Aeo>s, propitious,
cuyeoos, fert He, have neuters in o>i/, as fAetov, evyeon/. (See 305.)
198. N. The accent of these nouns is irregular, and that of the
genitive and dative is doubtful. (See 114; 125.)
199. N. Some nouns of this class may have <o in the accusative
singular; as Aayws, accus. Aaywv or Aayto. So*A0a>s, T6v*A0a>j/ or
v A0a> ; Kws, rrjv Koiv or Kai ; and Keoos, Tews, Mtvws. v E<os, dawn,
has regularly TTJV "Eto.
200. N". Most nouns of the Attic declension have older forms
in dos or ^os, from which they are probably derived by exchange
of quantity (33) ; as Horn. Ados, people, Att. Aews ; Dor. i/dds,
Ion. vrjos, Att. vews ; Horn. Meve'Ados, Att. McveAco>s. But some
come by contraction ; as Aayws, hare, from Aayeoos. In words like
Mtvc'Aecos, the original accent is retained (114).
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
201. 1. From stems in oo- and co- are formed contract
nouns in oos and cov.
For contract adjectives in cos, cd, cov, and oos, od, oov, see .310.
2. Noos, vovs, mind, and ooWov, OCTTOVV, bone, are thus de
clined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. (/6os) vovs
Geft. (^6ou) vov
Dat. (v6 v ) vo>
Ace (^60^) vovv
Voc. (>6e) vov
N. A.V. (6<TTtov) 00-TOVV
Gen. (6o"T^ou) O<TTOV
Dat
DUAL.
N.A.V.(^w)
G.D.
volv
G. D.
toiv) OO-TOUV
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N.A.\
Gen.
Dat.
vot
vwv
vots
vovs
vol
oo-Tto
44 INFLECTION. [202
202. So may be declined (irAoos) irAovs, voyage, (poos) povs,
stream, (/cai/eoi/) KO.VOW, basket (accented like adjectives in eos, 311).
203. The accent of some of these forms is irregular :
1. The dual contracts ecu and oo> into <o (not w).
2. Compounds in oos accent all forms like the contracted nomi-
native singular; as TreptVAoos, TrepiVAous, sailing round, gen. Trept-
TrAoou, TrcptVAov, etc.
3. For ca contracted to a in the plural, see 39, 1.
DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
204. 1. Gen. Sing. Horn, oto and ov, Aeolic and Doric co (for
oo) ; as 0eoio, fieyaA<o.
2. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Horn, oiiv for otv ; as LTTTTOUV.
3. Dat. Plur. Ionic and poetic own; as ?7r7ron; also Aeolic and
old Attic, found occasionally even in prose.
4. Ace. Plur. Doric <os or os for ovs; as I/O/AWS, TO>S A.VKOS; Les-
bian Aeolic ots.
5. The Ionic generally omits contraction.
THIRD DECLENSION.
205. This declension includes all nouns not belonging
to either the first or the second. Its genitive singular
ends in 09 (sometimes o>?).
206. N. This is often called the Consonant Declension (165), be-
cause the stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems,
however, end in a close vowel (t or i>), some in a diphthong, and a few
in o or <a.
207. The stem of a noun of the third declension cannot
always be determined by the nominative singular ; but it is
generally found by dropping os of the genitive. The cases
are formed by adding the case-endings (167) to the stem.
208. 1. For final ws in the genitive singular of nouns in is, vs, v,
evs, and of raOs, ship, see 249 ; 265 ; 269.
2. For a and as in the accusative singular and plural of nouns in
us, see 265.
3. The contracted accusative plural generally has eis for ed*s irregu-
larly, to conform to the contracted nominative in ets for ees. (See 313.)
So ous in the accusative plural of comparatives in Iwv (358) .
4. The original v<s of the accusative plural is seen in t'%0Cs (for
ixQv-vs} from IvOvs (259), and the Ionic iro\ls (for TroXt-i/s) from ?r6Xts
'255).
210] THIRD DECLENSION. 45
FORMATION OF CASES.
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
209. The numerous forms of the nominative singular of
this declension must be learned partly by practice. The
following are the general principles on which the nominative
is formed from the stem.
1. Masculine and feminine stems, except those in v, p, <r,
and OVT (2 and 3), add 9, and make the needful euphonic
changes. E.g.
<l>uAa, guard, <f>v\a.K-o<; ', yv{(/, vulture, yvTr-os ; <A./r, vein, <f>Xe(3-6s
(74) ; eX-Tris (for cA-TrtSs), hope, eA.7ri'S-os; x^P 1 -^ gi'O-ce, X ( *-P LT ~ 0<s 'i opvZs,
bird, opvl6-os ; vv, night, VTJKT-OS; /u,dtrrt, scourge, /Maoriy-os; adA-
7ny, trumpet, crdA-Tnyy-os. So Aids, Ajax, Aiavr-os (79) ; Avcrds,
AwavT-os; Tras, Travr-os; Tibet's, Tt^eVr-os ; ^a-piets, xapicvr-as ; SCIKVVS,
SeiKi/vj/r-os. (The neuters of the last five words, Avo-av, irav, ri.6f.Vy
Xa.pLC.v t and SCIKI/W, are given under 4, below.)
2. Masculine and feminine stems in v, p, and <r merely
lengthen the last vowel, if it is short. E.g.
Atw, age, cuwv-os; Sat/xwv, divinity, SCU/AOJ/-OS; Xifjrfv, harbor,
\t/aeV-os ; &y/3, beast, Ov)p-6<i ; diy/a, at'r, dep-os J !SwKpaTiys (2o>K/oarcr-),
/Socrates.
3. Masculine stems in ovr drop T, and lengthen o to o>. E.g.
Aecov, lion, Aeovr-os ; Aeywv, speaking, Ac'yoir-os ; wv, being,
OI/T-OS.
4. In neuters, the nominative singular is generally the
same as the stem. Final T of the stem is dropped (25). E.g.
SW/AO,, body, erw/xar-os ; /xeAav (neuter of /xeAds), black, /xe'Aav-os;
Aixrav (neuter of Avcrds), having loosed, AtJo-avr-os; Trav, all, Travr-d?;
n6tv, placing, TI^CVT-OS ; ^apt'ev, graceful, ^aptevT-os ; SiSov, giving,
StSovros ; Aeyov, saying, Ae'yovr-os ; SKVW, showing, SCIKJ/WT-OS.
(For the masculine nominatives of these adjectives and participles,
see 1, above.)
210. (Exceptions to 209, 1-3.) 1. In TTOVS, foot, TroS-o's, 089 be-
comes ovs. Ad/wxp, w^ye, Sd/xapr-os, does not add 5. Charge in
quantity occurs in aAaiTn;^, yba;, dAwTTCK-os, Krjpv, herald, KrjpvK os,
and $>oti/i, $otVtK-os.
2. Stems in Zv- add 5 and have I? (78, 3) in the nominative ; as
pts, nose, plv-ds. These also add s : KTCIS comb, KTCV-OS (78, 3) ; els,
one, ev-ds ; and the adjectives /xeAds, black, ^teAav-os, and
wretched, rdAav-os.
46 INFLECTION. [211
3. 'OSous (Ionic 6Son>), tooth, gen. oSdi/r-os, forms its nominative
like participles in ovs : for these see 212, 1.
211. (Exceptions to 209, 4.) Some neuter stems in ar- have ap
in the nominative ; as rj-jrap, liver, gen. ^7rar-os (225), as if from a
stem in apr-. For nouns in as with double stems in ar- (or ar-)
and cur-, as /cpeas, Trepas (225), and rtpas, see 237. 3>uis (for <aos),
light, has gen. ^MOT-OS; but Homer has <aos (stem <aeo--). For
Trvp, fire, gen. irvp-os, see 291.
212. (Participles.) 1. Masculine participles from verbs in oyu
add s to OVT- and have nominatives in ovs (79) ; as StSovs, giving,
SiSoW-os- Neuters in OVT- are regular (209, 4).
Other participles from stems in OVT- have nominatives in <ov,
like nouns (209, 3).
2. The perfect active participle, with stem in or-, forms its
nominative in cos (masc.) and os (neut.) ; as A.eA.vKws, having
loosed, neut. AeAvKOs, gen. A.eAvKor-os. (See 335.)
213. N". For nominatives in 175 and 05, gen. cos, from stems in
tr-, see 227. For peculiar formations from stems in o (nom. o>),
see 242.
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
214. 1. Most masculines and feminines with consonant
stems add a to the stem in the accusative singular ; as
<pu'Aa (<vA.a/<-), <vA.a,Ka; Aeon/ (\eovr-), lion, Xeovra.
2. Those with vowel stems add v ; as TroAis, state, TTO\IV ;
i\0us, fish, i^Bvv ; i/avs, S&lp, raw ; /Sous, Ofl?, (3ovv.
3. Barytones in is and vs with lingual (T, 8, ^) stems
generally drop the lingual and add v; as C/CHS (epiS-), strife,
(x a P tT ~)' orace, x^/ tJ/ 5 opvts (opvt^-), 6/rd, opvlv;
, hopeful, ev\7riv (but the OXytone eA.7rts,
, has eATriSa).
215. N. /cAecs (/cAciS-), ^ey, has K\elv (rarely KXetSa).
216. N. Homer, Herodotus, and the Attic poets make accusa*
tives in a of the nouns of 214, 3; as IptSa (Horn.) ^ap LTa (Hdt.),
opvlOa (Aristoph.).
217. N. 'ATroXAwi/ and Hoo-etSoiv (Uoo-eiSawv) have accusatives
'ATroAAo) and Hoo-eiSoi, besides the forms in <ora.
For CD in the accusative of comparatives in Zcov, see 359.
218. N. For accusatives in ea. from nominatives in r)s, in ea from
those in evs, and in w (for wa or oa) from those in ws or w, see 228 ;
265; 243.
225] NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS. 47
VOCATIVE SINGULAR.
219. The vocative singular of masculines and feminines
is sometimes the same as the nominative, and sometimes the
same as the stern.
220. It is the same as the nominative
1. In nouns with mute stems ; as nom. and voc.
((f>v\.a.K-) , watchman. (See the paradigms in 225.)
2. In oxytones with liquid stems ; as nom. arid voc.
(Trot/xev-), shepherd, AI/ATJV (Ai/Aei/-), harbor.
But barytones have the vocative like the stem ; as
(8aiju,ov-), voc. 8at/x,oj/. (See the paradigms in 225.)
221. (Exceptions.) 1. Those with steins in 18-, and barytones
with stems in vr- (except participles), have the vocative like the
stem; as eX-Tris (eA.7riS-), hope, voc. eATri (cf. 25): see Aewi/ and yiyds,
declined in 225. So Aids (Aiavr-), Ajax, voc. Aiav (Horn.), but
Aid? in Attic.
2. ^t<i)T-tjp (o-wTr/p-), preserver, 'ATroAAan/ ('ATroAAan/-), and IIo<rei-
Soiv (IIoo-t8ojv- for IIo<m8dov-) shorten rj and o> in the vocative.
Thus voc. trcorep, *A7ro\\ov, IlocretSov (Horn. IIo(ret / 8do'). For the
recessive accent here and in similar forms, see 122 (d).
222. All others have the vocative the same as the stem.
See the paradigms.
223. There are a few vocatives in ot from nouns in < and <oi/,
gen. ovs : see 245; 248.
For the vocative of syncopated nouns, see 273.
DATIVE PLURAL.
224. The dative plural is formed by adding o-t to the
stem, with the needful euphonic changes. E.g.
(74) ; TTOVS (TroS-), Troert; AeW (Aeovr-), Aeovcrt (79);
v-), Saifwcri (80); rivets (TI^CVT-), rt^etcrt ; ^aptet? (^
^aptecrt (74); to-ras (t(rrai/T-), to-rdo-t ; 8ei/cvus (SctKvwr-), Set/cvvcrt; /3acn-
Aevs (ySacriXev-), j3a<n\ev(n ; /^ovs (/itov-), ySovcrt"; ypavs (ypav-), ypavcri.
For a change in syncopated nouns, see 273.
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
225. The following are examples of the most com
mon forms of nouns of the third declension with mute
48
INFLECTION.
[225
For the formation of the cases, see 209-224. For euphonic
changes in nearly all, see 74 and 79. For special changes in
see 95, 5.
MUTE STEMS.
I. Masculines and Feminines.
watchman vein trumpet hair lion
Stem. (0vXaK-) (0Xe/3-) (0-0X71-177-) C 7 "/"*-) (Xeovr-)
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen. <j>v'XaKos
Dat. <J>v'\aKi
Ace. 4>v'Xa.Ka
Voc. <j>v'Xa
o-eiXiri-yi
o-aXiri-yyos
o"aXiriYY l
o-aXmYy a
rpixos
X&ov
XCOVTOS
XOVTI
Xcovra
Xlov
N.A.V.<J>v'XaK
G. D. <j>vXaKoiv
o-oiX-iriYY*
<raX < irCyY olv
Xe'ovre
Xeo'vroiv
N.V.
Gen.
Dat. <|>v'Xa|i
Ace. <|>vXaKas
(d) -yfyas
giant
Stem.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N. A.V.
G.D.
N.V.
Gen.
Dat. Y^Y^" L
Ace. vtvavrttc
(d) 0i]'s
hired man
Otis
0T]TO'S
0TJS
(tj) Xaffiras
torch
(Xa/i7ra5-)
SINGULAR.
Xafiiras
XafiiraSos
XajjLiras
DUAL.
0TJTOIV XajJiiraSoiv
PLURAL.
0TJTCS XajjnraSts
OTJTWV XafiiroiSoiv
XajjLiracn
Xauira8a
Tpt X s X^ovrts
rpi X wv Xeovrwv
6pi|i Xe'ovcri
rp( X as Xeovras
(d 11) 6'pvls
bird
(Ipvie-)
opvls
opviGos
opvl0i
opvlv
opvls
OpVl06
dpvtOoiv
OpVt0S
opvtOcov
opvlo-i
oovl6a<:
(ij) 'Xir S
hope
c'Xirts
e'XirCSos
XTrC8i
c'XirCSa
cXiriSc
cXiriSoiv
c'XirCSes
cXirCScov .<>.
tXirtSa?
225]
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
49
II. Neuters.
Stem.
N. A.V.
Gen.
Dat.
N. A.V.
G. D.
N. A.V.
Gen.
Dat.
(o) iroi|)'v
shepherd
Stem. (7rot/ie^-)
(TO) o-cSna (T<$) iw'pas (TO) VJirap
body end liver
(CTW/ACIT-) (TrepaT-) (flTrcvr-)
SINGULAR,
o-wfia ire'pas (237) rfirap
a-wfiaros ircparos -qiraros
<rwp.aTt irepart TJfiraTi
DUAL.
o-co|xaT irlpa/rc ifiraTC
a-a>|iaTOiv ircparoiv ijiraroiv
PLURAL.
o-wpara irc'para T]iraTa
<ra>(jLaTa)v ircpdrwv TJirartov
O*(*>p>OUri TTCpOKTl T]ir<XOTl
LIQUID STEMS.
(o) alwv (o') TJ'YH Lft * v
age leader
(d) Satjicov
divinity
(d) (TtOTTJp
preserver
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
irOlJXTJV
-irOlJieVOS
attov
atwvos
alwvi
alcGva
alwv
lfy|*o'vOS
TJ-y6|10Vl
t]-y6|xova
SaCfxcov
Saijiovos
5a.Ljj.ovi
8aip.ova
Satjxov
o-wrrfp
<TftTT]pOS
crtOT-qpi
o-wTTjpa
o-iirep (12!
DUAL.
G. D.
iroifievoiv
attovc
atwvoiv
ljYfio'v
TJYCtJLOVOkV
SaCfiovc
SatfjLovoiv
o-wnjp*
OTWTTJpOlV
PLURAL.
N. V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
iroifu'vcov
Troifi<ri
n-OL(j.e'vas
alcoves
attovcov
alcoo-i
alcovas
TJ-y|10VS
tj-yp.o'va>v
t!1f|xovas
SaC|xovcs
Saifidvcov
Saifioo-L
Sai(xovas
O-COTTJpUV
50
INFLECTION.
(o)
orator
(o) fclf
beast
Stem.
Nom.
Gen. pTJropos
Dat. prJTopi
Ace, prJTopa
VOC. pTJTOp
(o) aXs
salt
(aX-)
SINGULAR.
a s 0T)' P
dXo's 0Tjpo's
d\C
oXa
CtXs 0TJp
DUAL.
(tj) <t>pTf
mind
pts
pivo's
pivt
piva
<j> P Vl
<j,p'va
N.A.V. fa'TOpC
aXe
0t)pe
pive
G. D. pTJTOpOLV
dXoiv
Oijpoiv
pivoiv
PLURAL.
N. V. fa'ropes
dXes
0V] P es
pives
Gen. pTjro'pcov
dXwv
0t]pwv
pivwv
Dat. piiropo-i
dXo-t
0Tjp<ri
pio-i
Ace. p-rfropas
aXas
0rjpas
ptvas
<|>pVOlV
J>pves
<|>pVWV
STEMS ENDING IN S.
226. The final a- of the stem appears only where there
is no case-ending, as in the nominative singular, being else-
where dropped. (See 88, 1.) Two vowels brought togethei
by this omission of o- are generally contracted.
227. The proper substantive stems in co-- are chiefly
neuters, which change r- to os in the nominative singular.
Some masculine proper names change co-- regularly to rjs (209,
2). Stems in ao-- form nominatives in as, all neuters (228)
228. ^co/cpdrr)? (Sw/c/oareo--), Socrates, (TO)
(761/60--), race, and (TO) 76/3^9
thus declined: 8mGULAR
N. A.V.
Gen. (SwKpdreos) SwKpdrous
prze, are
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
2KpaTi
(Swfcptirea)
St&Kparcs
Gen.
Dat.
DUAL.
G. D. (yevtoiv) *yvoiv
PLURAL.
Gen. ycv&ov -Yevwv
237] STEMS ENDING IN 2k 51
229. In the genitive plural eon/ is sometimes uncontracted, even
in prose ; as raxe'coi/ from ret^os. For cea contracted ea, see 39, 2.
230. Proper names in r/s, gen. eos, besides the accusative in ij,
have a form in vp'oi the first declension; as Scofeponp/,
For the recessive accent in the vocative of these nouns, see 122.
231. Proper names in /cA-oys, compounds of /cAeos, glory, are
doubly contracted in the dative, sometimes in the accusative.
, Pericles, is thus declined :
Nom.
Gen. (ITepi/'cX&os) ZtepucXeovs
Dat.
Acc. (IlepiKXeea) IlepiKXed (poet. UepiK\f])
Voc. (IlepkXees)
232. N. In proper names in /cAe^s, Homer has 1709, 171, ^a,
Herodotus eos (for e'eos), e'i', ea. In adjectives in 075 Homer some-
times contracts ee to : as, cvKAerys, ace. plur. evKAetas for evKAeea?.
233. Adjective stems in co-- change eo-- to rjs in the masculine
and feminine of the nominative singular, but leave es in the
neuter. For the declension of these, see 312.
234. The adjective Tpiijpiys, triply fitted, is used as a
feminine noun, (fi) rpirjp^ (sc. vavs), trireme, and is thus
declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. Tpi/fjpTjs
Gen. (rpi^peos) rpi^jpovs
Dat. (rpt^oei) rpi-qpei
Acc. (rpt?7pea) rpi^pt]
Voc.
DUAL.
N. A.V.
G. D. (rpirjptoiv)
PLURAL.
N.V. (rpi^pees)
Gen. (rpiriptwv} TpLTjpwv
Dat.
Acc.
235. N. Tpirjprps has recessive accent in the genitive dual and
plural : for this in other adjectives in rj<s, see 122.
For the accusative plural in ets, see 208, 3.
236. N. Some poetic nominatives in as have c for a in the
other cases ; as otJSas, ground, gen. ovSeos, dat. ov'Set, ovSei (Homer).
So /Speras, image, gen. /fyercos, plur. J3prrj, /?/oereW, in Attic
poetry.
237. 1. Some nouns in as have two stems, one in ar- or dr-
with gen. aros (like irepas, 225), and another in a(r- with gen.
52 INFLECTION. [23
a(o--)os, aos, contracted <os (like yepas, 228). Thus /cepas
/cepao--), &orn, is doubly declined.
SINGULAR.
N.A.V. Ke'pas
Gen. Kpa,TOS, (/cepaos) Kps
Dat. Kcpdri, (Ktpai) Kt'pcu
DUAL.
N. A.V. Kc'pdrt, (fee/me) Kepd
G. D. Kepdroiv, (/cepaotj') Kepwv
N.A.V. Kepdra, (fcepaa) Kpd
Gen. Kepcmov, (icepauj'') Kp<av
Dat. Kt'pdcri
2. So rcpas, prodigy, repar-os, which has also Homeric forms
from the stem in acr-, as repaa, repawv, repaecro-t. Ilepas, enc? (225),
has only Trepar-os, etc.
238. There is one Attic noun stem in o<r-, cuSocr-, with nominar
tive (17) aeSws, shame, which is thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Norn. al8<&s DUAL AND pLURAL
Gen. (ai'Soos) atSovs
Dat. (aWoV) alSol
Ace. (aldoa') alSw
Voc. alSws
239. AtSw? has the declension of nouns in <o (242), but the
accusative in o> has the regular accent. (See also 359.)
240. The Ionic (17) ^ws, dawn, has stem ^o<r-, and is declined
like euSws : gen. ^oi)s, dat. ^ot, ace. ^o>. The Attic loos is declined
like i/ews (196) : but see 199.
STEMS IN li OR O.
241. A few stems in o>- form masculine nouns in <os, gen. <o-os,
which are often contracted in the dative and acoasative singular
and in the nominative and accusative plural.
242. A few in o- form feminines in w, gen. ovs (for o-os),
which are always contracted in the genitive, dative, and accusa-
tive singular. The original form of the stems of these nouns is
uncertain. (See 239.)
243. The nouns (6) rjpus, hero, and (^) 7rei0w, persuasion,
are thus declined :
250] STEMS IN OR ; I AND T. 53
SINGULAR. Nom.
Gen. tiptoes
Dat. -qpwi or TJp<p (Treitfoi) iri0oi
Ace. tipwa or i]pw
Voc.
DUAL. N. A.V. T]pW
G. D. rjpc&otv
PLURAL. N. V. tiptoes or tjpws
Gen. fjp<&v
Dat. -fipwo-t
ACC. -qpwas Or ijpttS
244. These nouns in a>s sometimes have forms of the Attic
second declension ; as gen. ypw (like i/eu>), accus. rjpw. Like lypws
are declined T/ows, Trojan (128), and fnfrpws, mother's brother.
245. N. The feminines in o> are chiefly proper names. Like
7m0oi may be declined 2<x7r<a> (Aeolic ^aTr^wo), Sappho, gen.
<ovs, dat. 2a7r<oi, ace. 2a7r<(6, voc. SaTr^ot. So A^T
and ^w, ec^o. No dual or plural forms of these nouns are found
in the third declension ; but a few occur of the second, as ace. plur.
yopyous from yopyw, Gorgon. No uncontracted forms of nouns in
oi occur.
246. N. The vocative in ot seems to belong to a form of the
stem in 01-; and there was a nominative form in <o, as A^TW, 2$a7r<o>.
247. N. Herodotus has an accusative singular in ow ; as 'lovv
(for i lw) from 2 Iw, 70, gen. Z lov5.
248. A few feminines in tuv (with regular stems in 01^) have
occasional forms like those of nouns in (6 ; as dr/Swi/, nightingale,
gen. dr/Sovs, voc. drjSoi; CIKCUI/, image t gen. CIKOVS, ace. CIKW; ^eXtSwv,
swallow, voc. ^eXlSot.
STEMS IN I AND Y.
249. Most steins in i (with nominatives in is) and a few
in v (with nominatives in v? and v) have e in place of their
final i or v in all cases except the nominative, accusative,
and vocative singular, and have o>s for 05 in the genitive
singular. The dative singular and the nominative plural
are contracted.
250. The nouns (/;) vroXt? (VoX^-), state, (o) TT^%U?
-)' cubit, and (TO) CLGTV (ao-ru-), city, are thus
INFLECTION
36;
SINGULAR.
Nom,
iroXts
mix^S
Gen.
iro'Xews
irrfxcws
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
(TToXe'l) TToXCL
iro'Xiv
iro'Xb
irVJxw
mf|x
DUAL.
ourrv
N. A. V.
G. D.
(?r6Xee) iro'Xci
iroXe'oiv
(d(rrel) ourrci
cwrn)
CWTTV
(daree) aorei
dorloiv
N. V.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
(Tro'Xees) iro'Xcis
iro'Xewv
iro'Xeo-i
iro'Xeis
irr\\oiv
PLURAL.
(Aorea) OWTTTJ
currewv
owrT6<rt
(dtorea) OMTTT]
251. For the accent of genitives in eo>s and e<w, see 114. For
accusative^ like TroXets and 7nJx et s> see 208, 3.
252. N. The dual in ec is rarely left uncontracted.
253. N. *A<TTV is the principal noun in v, gen. ecus. Its geni-
tive plural is found only in the poetic form acreon/, but analogy
leads to Attic aoreom/.
254. No nouns in i, gen. cws, were in common Attic use. See
Ko'/x/xt and TreVe/oi in the Lexicon.
255. N. The original i of the stem of nouns in is (Attic gen. ews) is
retained in Ionic. Thus, 7r6Xts, 7r6Xios, (?r6Xu) 7r6Xi, ir6\iv ; plur. ?r6Xies,
Tro\lo)v ; Horn. TroX/etro-i (Hdt. TroXttrt), iroXtas (Hdt. also Tro'Xis for woXi-vs,
see 208, 4). Homer lias also WXei (with Trro'Xet) and 7roXe<ri in the
dative. There are also epic forms TTO'XIJOS, TTO'X^I, TroXijes, TroX-rjas. The
Attic poets have a genitive in eos.
The Ionic has a genitive in eos in nouns in us of this class.
256. N". Stems in v with gen. cws have also forms in cv, in
which cv becomes c/r, and drops /:, leaving c : thus
( See 90 3 )
257. Most nouns in v<? retain v; as (6)
fish, which is thus declined :
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
SINGULAR.
orn.
DUAL.
N.A.V.
G. D.
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
266] STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG. 55
258. N. The nominative plural and dual rarely have vs and v ;
as i\8vs (like accus.) and l\0\} (for l^Ovf) in comedy.
259. N. Homer and Herodotus have both l^Ova? and l\0v<s in
the accusative plural. 'I^tfus here is for l^Ov-vs (208, 4).
260. Oxytones and monosyllables have u in the nominative,
accusative, and vocative singular: see ixOvs. Monosyllables are
circumflexed in these cases ; as /w)s (f-v-)? mouse, /AVOS, /xut, /JAJV,
jut) ; plur. /xvs, {JLVWV, /Avert, /AWS.
261. N. "EyxeXvs, ee l> i g declined like ixOvs in the singular,
and like TT^^VS in the plural, with gen. sing. ey^eXv-os and nom.
plur. eyxeXeis.
262. N. For adjectives in vs, eta, v, see 319.
STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG.
263. 1. In nouns in evs, ev of the stem is retained in the
nominative and vocative singular and dative plural, but
loses v before a vowel; as (6) /?ao-iXevs (/JcunXev-), king,
which is thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen. Pa<ri\6d>s
))at. (/3curiX<?i)
paoriXe'd
DUAL.
PLURAL.
N. Y. (/3a<nX&s)
Gen.
Dat. pa<ri\v<ri
Ace.
N.A.V,
G. D. pao-iXe'oiv
2. So yovevs (yovev-), parent, tepev? (tcpev-), priest, '
('A^iAAev-), Achilles, 'OSvo-o-ev? ('OSuo-crev-), Ulysses.
264. Homer has eu in three cases, /JacrtXevs, /?ao-i\ev, and fiatn-
Xcvort ; but in the other cases /JacriX^os, ySacriX^i, fiacriXfja, jSatrtX^e?,
{3a<n\fja<;, also dat. plur. apwrr^-ea-o-i (from a/no-rev's) ; in proper
names he has cos, e etc., as Il^Xeos, n^Xet (rarely contracted, as
"A^iXXet). Herodotus has gen. eos.
265. Nouns in evs originally had stems in yv, before vowels rjp.
From forms in ly/ros, r)pi, rjpa, etc., came the Homeric rjos, rji, >ya,
etc. The Attic ews, ea, eds came, by exchange of quantity (33),
from rjo<s, iya, ^as.
266. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) with Plato have
$9 (contracted from Tye?) in the nominative plural; as IT
/ftacriXi}?, for later tTTTrets, /JatriXeis. In the accusative plural,
usually remains unchanged, but there is a late form in ?.
56 INFLECTION. [267
267. When a vowel precedes, eo>s of the genitive singular may
be contracted into u>s, and ed of the accusative singular into a;
rarely e'ds of the accusative plural into as, and eW of the genitive
plural into Gv. Thus, IleipaieJs, Peiraeus, has gen. Ileipaiews,
Ileipaiw?, dat. Ilapaiei, Ileipaici, ace. Ileipeued, Ileipaia ; Awptev's,
Dorian, has gen. plur. AwpteW, Awptwj/, ace. Acopieds, Applets-
268. The nouns (6, 17) /Sous (/?ou-), oa; or cow, (^)
(ypav-), o/d woman, (^) vavs (vav-), s/iip, and o?s (01-),
are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. POVS YP a vs vavs ols
Gen. poo's vpao's vcws oto's
Dat. Pot -ypat vi)C oU
Ace. POVV YP a ^ v vavv otv
Voc. POV -ypav vav ol
DUAL.
N. A. V. po'c -ypde vrjc otc
G. D. POOIV -ypdotv veotv oloiv
PLURAL. .,
N. V. po'es -yPs "! ot S
Gen. powv ypdwv vecov olcov
Dat. POUO-C ypavorC vavo-C otcrt
Acc. POVS -ypavs vavs ots
269. N. The stems of |8ous, 7/jaus, and j/aus became /So/:-, 7pa/r-, and
t>a.f- before a vowel of the ending (compare Latin bov-is and nav-is").
The stem of ols, the only stem in ot-, was dpi- (compare Latin ovis).
Afterwards f was dropped (90, 3), leaving /So-, ypa-, va-, and oK Attic
veds is for VTJOS (33).
270. In Doric and Ionic vavs is much more regular than in Attic :
SINGULAR.
Doric. Homer. Herod.
Nom. vavs vtjvs vtjvs
Gen. vdos vqos, ve6s ve6s
Dat. vdt v-qC VT]
Acc. vavv vf]a, ve'a v^a
PLURAL.
Doric. Homer. Herod.
VttS VTJ6S, V^S VS
vdwv VT]<SV, vewv vewv
vavo-C, VTJVO-C,
vaeorcri VTjecrcri,
VT|VO-C
vaas vfjas, v'as veas
271. Homer has yprjvs (yp-rjv-} and 7^771*5 (7pi;0-) for 7/oaus. He has
/So'as and /SoOs in the accusative plural of /3oOs.
272. XcOj, three-quart measure, is declined like /Jous, except in the
accusatives xo'<* and xo'<*s (See xoOs in 291.)
277] SYNCOPATED NOUNS. 57
SYNCOPATED NOUNS.
273. Four nouns in rjp (with stems in ep-) are synco-
pated (65) in the genitive and dative singular by dropping
c. The syncopated genitive and dative are oxytone; and
the vocative singular has recessive accent (122), and ends
in cp as a barytone (220, 2). In the other cases c is re-
tained and is always accented. But in the dative plural ep-
is changed to pa-.
274. These are (6) iranrjp (?raTep-), father, (17) /ar/r^p
(fjiyrep-), mother, (17) Ovydrrfp (0uyarep-), daughter, and (ij)
yaaryp (yacrrep-) belly.
1. The first three are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. irartfp H- 1 ! 7 " 1 !? 0i>YaTT]p
Gen. (Trarfyos) irarpos (^r^pos) p/qrpo's (Ovyartpos) 0vy aT Ps
Dat. (TTttT^pi) irarpi (/u^T^pi) )jiT)Tp{ (6vyo.rpC)
Ace. irarepa |ii]Tpa Ovyarepa
Voc. irarep (iTJrcp Ov'-yarep
N. A. V. ircm'p*
G. D. irare'poiv p.T|Tepotv Gvyarepoiv
N. V. irarepts
Gen. irarpo)v p.T]Tepa>v Qvyartpw
Dat. iraTptwri p.i]Tpouri Qvya.Tpo.a-i
Ace. -n-cm'pas |AT)repas 0uYa.Tpa<j
2. rao-T>/p is declined and accented like Trarrjp.
275. 'Aor^p (6), stor, has a&Tpdm, like a syncopated noun, in
the dative plural, but is otherwise regular (without syncope).
276. N. The unsyncopated forms of all these nouns are often used
by the poets, who also syncopate other cases of dvydryp ; as dvyarpa,
Gvyarpes, dvyarp&v. Homer has dat. plur. 6vya.Ttp<r<Ti, and ira.Tp(av
for irartpuv.
277. 1. 'Avrjp (6), man, drops' e whenever a vowel i'ol-
lows ep, and inserts 8 in its place (67). It has di/Spotv and
di/8paii/. In other respects it follows the declension of Trarijp.
2. AijiA.rJTTrip, Demeter (Ceres), syncopates all the oblique
cases, and then accents them on the first syllable.
58
INFLECTION.
[278
278.
and
are thus declined : - -
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
Norn.
dvT|p
Gen.
(dc^po?) dvSpos
Dat.
(di^pi) dvSpi
Ace.
(avtpa) dvSpa
Voc.
avep
N.A.V.
(di^pe) av8p
G. D.
(a.vtpoiv) dvSpoiv
N.V.
(d^pes) avSpes
Gen.
(dv^pcof) dvSpuv
Dat.
dvSpdcri
Ace.
(dv^pas) avSpas
279. The poets often use the unsyncopated forms. Homer has
avBp(T(n as well as dvSpacrt in the dative plural.
GENDER OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
280. The gender in this declension must often be learned
by observation. But some general rules may be given.
281. 1. MASCULINE are stems in
eu-; as /JacnAeu's (fiaonXtv-), king.
p- (except those in ap-) ; as Kparrjp (/cpar^p-), mixing-bowl, \{/dp
(\f/dp-), starling.
v- (except those in Zv-, yov-, 8oi>-) ; as Kavwi/ (KUVOV-), rule.
vr-y as oSovs (o8oi/r-), tooth.
rjr- (except those in TT/T-) ; as Ae/fys (XcySiyr-), kettle.
<OT- ; as cpcos (epcoT-), love.
2. Exceptions. Feminine are yaoriyp, 6eZ/y, Kyp,fate, x l/ P? hand,
<f>pyv, mind, dX/cucov, halcyon, CIKWV, image, rjuav, shore, ^tuv, earth,
\i(i)v, snow, fjLrjKwv, poppy, lo-Oys (f&Orrr-), dress.
Neuter are Trvp,jire, ^>ws (^>COT-), %fa.
282. 1. FEMININE are stems in
i- and V-, with nomin. in is and vg; as TroAts (770X1-), ctVy, to^s
, strength.
av- ; as i/avs (vau-).
8-, ^-, TTyT-; as ept? (eptS-), s^r^7e, raxvrrjs (rax^TTyr-), sjoeerf.
-, yor-, Sov-; as dfCTt? ((XKTIV-), ray, o-raywv (crrayoi/-), 6?roj,
^eXtSoi/-), swallow.
2. Exceptions. Masculine are f\i-<s, viper, o<t-s, serpent, /
cluster of grapes, 0prjw-<s, footstool, tx^v-s, j^5^, /AV-S, mouse,
289] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 59
corpse, crra^v-s, ear of grain, TTC'ACKV-S, axe, TT^^V-S, cubit, TTOVS
(7roo-),foot, SeA^is (SeA^m/-), dolphin.
283. NEUTER are stems in
i and v with noniin. in i and v; as ircVcpi, pepper, atrrv, c%.
as-; as ye'pas, /?nze (see 227).
cs-, with nomin. in os ; as yeVos (yevco--), race (see 227).
ap- ; as veKrap, nectar.
ar-; as o-oi/xa (aw/xar-), 6orfy.
284. Labial and palatal stems are always either masculine or
feminine. (See 225. )
285. Variations in gender sometimes occur in poetry : see, for
example, aWyp, sky, and 0is, heap, in the Lexicon. See also 288.
DIALECTS.
286. 1. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Homeric oiiv for oiv.
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric eo-cri, rarely cert, and <r<n (after vowels) ;
also (7i.
3. Most of the uncontracted forms enclosed in ( ) in the para-
digms, which are not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or
Herodotus ; and some of them occur in the Attic poets.
4. For special dialectic forms of some nouns of the third declen-
sion, see 232, 236, 237, 240, 247, 255, 259, 264, 270, 271, 276, 279.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
287. 1. Some nouns belong to more than one declension.
Thus O-KOTOS, darkness, is usually declined like Adyo? (192),
but sometimes like yeVos (228). So OiStVovs, Oedipus, has
genitive O&tVoSos or OiStVov, dative OtStVoSi, accusative
TroSo, or OtStVow.
See also yc'Xws, epws, iSpws, and others, in 291.
2. For the double accusatives in rj and rjv of SooK/oaTiy
, etc., see 230.
288. Nouns which are of different genders in different
numbers are called heterogeneous ; as (6) o-tro?, corn, plur.
(TO.) o-tra, (6) Sea/ads, chain, (ot) SeoyW and (TO.) Se<r/Aa.
289. Defective nouns have only certain cases ; as ovap,
dream, o<eAos, use (only nom. and accus.) ; (T^V) vt<a, snow
(only accus.). Some, generally from their meaning, have
only one number ; as 7r0d>, persuasion, ra 'OAv//,7ria, the Otym
pic games.
60 INFLECTION. [290
290. Indeclinable nouns have one form for all cases.
These are chiefly foreign words, as 'A8d/x,, 'Io-par}A. ; and
names of letters, "AX<f>a, B^ra, etc.
291. The following are the most important irregular
nouns :
1. "AiSrjs, Hades, gen. ov, etc., regular. Horn. 'AiSrjs, gen. ao or
eto, dat. 77, ace. 771/5 also v Ai'8os, v Ai'8i (from stem 'Ai'S-).
2. dvo (6), king, dvaKTOs, etc., voc. dra (poet, dVa, in addressing
Gods).
3. "A/077?, ^ re6> > "Apews (poet. "Apeos), ("Ape'i) "Apa, ("Apea) "ApT?
or "Apyv, "Ape? (Horn. also'Apes). Horn, also *Apr?os, "Aprji, "Aprja.
4. Stem (dpv-), gen. (TOV or rr;s) dpvo's, /ami, dpvt, dpi/a ; pi. dpves,
dpvaii/, dpvcun, dpi/as. In the nom. sing, d/wds (2d decl.) is used.
5. ydAa (TO), mtVA:, ydAa/cros, ydXa/crt, etc.
6. ycAws (6), laughter, ye'Awros, etc., regular: in Attic poets ace.
yeAwra or yeAcov. In Horn, generally of second declension, dat.
ye'A.0), acc.'ye'Aw. yeAwi/ (ye'Aoi/?). (See. 287, 1.)
7. yoVu (TO), A;nee, ydvaTos, yoVa/n, etc. (from stem yovaT-) ; Ion.
and poet. yovVaTOs, yowan, etc.; Horn, also gen. yowos, dat. yovn,
pi. yovva, yovVcov, yovVeacrt.
8. yvvT/j (?)) wife, yurai/cos, ywat/ct', ywaiKa, ywat; dual yuvaiKC,
ywaiKoiv; pi. ywatKes, yuvaue&v, ywat^t, yvvatxaso
9. SevSpov (TO), ^ree, SeVSpov, regular (Ion. SevSpcov); dat. sing.
ei ; dat. pi. SeVSpeo-i.
10. Seos (TO), /ear, 8e'ovs, Sea,' etc. Horn. gen. oVovs.
11. 8opv (TO), spear (cf. yovv) ; (from stem SopaT-) SopaTo?,
86pa,TL ; pi. SopaTa, etc. Ion. and poet. Bovparos, etc. ; Epic also
gen. 8ovpos, dat. Soupt; dual Sovpc; pi. Sovpa, Sovpoyv, Sovpeo"o*i.
Poetic gen. Sopds, dat. Sopt and Sdpet.
12. po>s (6), love, epwTos, etc. In poetry also epos, cpw, cpov.
13. Zevs (Aeol. Acvs), Zeus, Aids, An', Aia, Zev. Ion. and poet.
Zrjvos, Zrfvi, Zrjva. Pindar has At for Att.
14. e/us (r)), justice (also as proper name, Themis), gen. e/xiSo?,
etc., reg. like epts. Horn. 0e/x,rros, etc. Pind. ^C/AITOS, etc. Hdt.
gen. 0//,ios. In Attic prose, indeclinable in #e/us ecm, /as es/; as
^cp:is emu.
15. ISpois (6), swea^, tSpwTos, etc. Horn, has dat. tSpw, ace. iSpw
(243).
16. Kaptt (TO), ^eaa 7 , poetic ; in Attic only nom., accus., and voc.
sing., with dat. xdpa (tragic). Horn. Kapr;, gen. KapriTO?, Kapr/aTo?,
, KpaTO? ; dat. /cdp^Tt, Kaprjan, Kpaan, Kpari ; ace. (TOV)
(TO) Kapr; or Kap ; plur. nom. Kapa, Kap^aTa, /cpaaTa; gen,
291] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 61
, dat. KpoVt; ace. Kapd with (roi>s) /cpaTas; noiu. and ace.
pi. also K(ipr)va, gen. Kapr/t/a>j/. Soph. (TO) K/oara.
17. /cptVov (TO), Jtfy, /cptVou, etc. In plural also KptVea (Hdt.)
and KptVeo-t (poetic). (See 287, 1.)
18. KVIOV (6, 17), c/o^r, voc. KVOV: the rest from stem KVV-, KW<K.
KvW, Kwa | pi. KVVCS, KWWI/, KVCTL, /cwas-
19. Aas (6), stone, Horn. Aaas, poetic; gen. Aaos (or Aaou), dat.
Aat, ace. \aav, AoV ; dual Aae ; plur. Adw, Aaeo-crt, or Aaeo"t.
20. AtVa (Horn. AtV, generally with e'Aatw, oil), fat, oil: proba-
bly AtVa is neut. accus., and AtV is dat. for AMU. See Lexicon.
21. /uapTvs (6, i/), witness, gen. /AapTvpos, etc., dat. pi. fidprvcn.
Horn. nom. pdpTvpos (2d decl.).
22. iML(TTi (%), whip, gen. /Mwrrtyos, etc., Horn. dat. fuw-rl, ace.
23. ots (^), sheep, for Attic declension see 268. Horn, ots, oi'os,
otV, oi'es, 6io)i/, 6i(r(n (oieo-t, oeo-o-t), ots. Aristoph. has dat. 61.
24. ompos (6), wetpov (TO), dream, gen. ov; also ovap (TO), gen.
oi/ctpaTOs, dat. ovetpaTt; plur. oVa'para, ovctpaTwv, 6vctpao"t.
25. 6We (TW), dual, e^es, poetic; plur. gen. 6W<ov, dat. oo-o-ois
or ocro"oio~t.
26. opns (6, ^), bird, see 225. Also poetic forms from stem
opvt-, nom. and ace. sing, opns, opvtv ; pi. opveis, opvewv, ace. opi/cis
or opvts. Hdt. ace. opvlOa. Doric gen. opvl^os, etc. .
27. ovs (TO), ear, WTOS, wrt; pi. cara, WTCDI/ (128), am. Horn.
gen. ovaTos ; pi. ovaTa, otfao-t, and oW. Doric ws.
28. IIvv^ (T/), Pnyx, IIvKvos, HVKVI, HvKva (also UWK-OS, etc.).
29. -Trpecr^vs (6), old man, elder (properly adj.), poetic, ace. Trpe-
crftvv (as adj.), voc. 7rpe'o-/?v; pi. TrpeV/fes (Ep. TrpeVyS^es), chiefs,
elders: the common word in this sense is Trpeo-^rrys, distinct from
7rpeo-/?evrys. UpcV^s = ambassador, w. gen. TrpeVySecos, is rare and
poetic in sing. ; but common in prose in plur., TrpeV/fos, TrpeV/Jecoi/,
TrpeV/Jco-i, Trpeo-ySets (like 7r>7;( v )' IIpeo-/3cvT^s, ambassador, is com-
mon in sing., but rare in plural.
30. 7n)p (TO), fire (stem irvp-), Trvpos, irvpt ; pi. (TCI) irvpa, watch-
fires, dat. Trvpois.
31. crrreos or oTreios (TO), cave, Epic; o-7rctovs,
32. Taws or raws, Attic Taws (6), peacock, like vews (196) : also
dat. raoivt, Tao>o"t, chiefly poetic.
33. TV^WS (6), whirlwind; declined like vews (196). Also proper
name Tv^ois, in poetry generally Tv<oivos, Tu</>u>n, Tv<^wva. (See
287, 1.)
34. v&op (TO), water, v6aTos ; v&tTt, etc. ; dat. plur. v&wrt.
62 INFLECTION. [292
35. vtos (6), son, vtov, etc., reg. ; also (from stem vtv-) we'os,
(we'i) wet, (vte'a), wee, vteW; (vices) wets, vUW, we'en, (vieas) vteis:
also with v for vt ; as vos, vov, i>eos, etc. Horn, also (from stem ui-)
gen. wos, dat. vlt, ace. via; dual me; pi. vies, was, also dat. vldxn.
36. xet'p (17), hand, x et p> X 6 ^ etc - > but X Pw (poet. xetpotv)
and x P"^ (poet. ^ctpco*<n or ^et/aecrt) : poet, also \epds, x^ 1 '' e ^ c *
37. (xs) X^ s (o) mound, xSi X^ X^ v 0^ e /2fo> 268).
38. x^5 (o), three-quart measure : see 272. Ionic and late
nem. x o ^?> with 8' en - X 0/ws ' X^ s e ^ c< regularly like Ileipaievs
and Awptevs (267).
39. xp^ (o)> *** n XP* 9 ' XP 401
; dat. xp&> (only i n cy XP^' near )*
LOCAL ENDINGS.
292. The endings -0i and -^ev may be added to the stem
of a noun or pronoun to denote place :
1. -Otf denoting where; as oAAo-^t, elsewhere; ovpavo-Oi, in
heaven.
2. -Bfv denoting whence; as olKo-Oev, from home; avro-^ev,
from the very spot.
293. The enclitic -8e (141, 4) added to the accusative denotes
whither; as Me'yapaSe, to Megara, 'EAevau/aSe, to Eleusis. After
o-, -8e becomes e (see 18; 28, 3); as 'A&jvd^e (for 'A^r;vas-Se y l, to
Athens, ri/3ae (for >y^as-8e), to Thebes, 0upde, OM of doors.
294. The ending -o-e is sometimes added to the stem, denoting
whither ; as oAAcxre, in another direction, Travroo-e, in every direction.
295. N. In Homer, the forms in -Oi and -6cv may be governed
by a preposition as genitives ; as 'IA.io0i 77730, fa/ore 7/t'tim ; e^ aXo^ev,
from the sea.
296. N". Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found
with the ending i in the singular and cri in the plural ; as 'lo-fytot,
at the Isthmus; OLKOL (oi/co-t), at home; H.vOo'i, at Pytho ; 'Afryvrpn,
at Athens; ILWcuacri, at Plataea; 'O\vfjnria<n, at Olympia; Ovpao-i,
at the gates. These forms (and also those of 292) are often classed
among adverbs; but inscriptions show that forms in am and in
r/crt were both used as datives in the early Attic.
297. N". The Epic ending <f>i or </ forms a genitive or dative
in both singular and plural. It is sometimes locative, as K\iurir)<J>i,
in the tent; and sometimes it has other meanings of the genitive or
dative, as fiirjfa, with violence. These forms may follow preposi-
tions ; as Trapa vavfa, by the ships.
301] ADJECTIVES-FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 63
ADJECTIVES.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS (VOWEL
DECLENSION).
298. 1. Most adjectives in 09 have three endings, 09,
17, ov. The masculine and neuter are of the second
declension, and the feminine is of the first; as cro</>e9,
ero</7, (TOffroV) wise.
2. If a vowel or p precedes 09, the feminine ends in
a; as aftos, df/a, afyov, worthy. But adjectives in 009
have OT? in the feminine, except those in ^009 ; as a-TrXoo?,
simple; a#poo?, aOpoa, ddpoov, crowded.
wise, and afto9, worthy, are thus de-
299. 2 o
clined :
cro<J>6s
Nom.
Gen. <ro4>ov
Dat. o-o<f>tt>
Ace. o-o<J>6v
Yoc. o-o<j>e
(|)f|
SINGULAR.
<TO<j>OV
<ro<j>oO
CTO<f>a>
o-cxj>6v
cro<j>6v
DUAL.
N.A.Y. <ro<|>(G <ro<{>d <ro<|>w
G. D. o-o<J)oiv o-o<|)uiv oro<f>oiv
agios dd o|iov
agiov d^Cdv
a^iov
dgiov
diou
N. V. <ro<j>oi o-o4>at <ro<j>d
Gen. cro4>wv croc})wv <ro<})uv
Dat. (robots o*o<{>ais <ro<f>ois
Acc. oro<{>ovs trowels <ro(f>d
a|iai
dgCois
300. So /xaKpos, /ua/cpa, yaa/cpov, long; gen. fjuaKpov,
fJWLKpOV] dat. fJLOLKpU), /jUXKptt, /XttKpW J aCC. fJLdKpOV, fJMKpaV,
etc., like a^ios (except in accent).
301. This is by far the largest class of adjectives. All parti-
ciples in 05 and all superlatives (350) are declined like <ro<os, and
all comparatives in rcpos (350) are declined like /Aa*pos (except
in accent).
64 INFLECTION. [302
302. The nominative and genitive plural of adjectives in o*
accent the feminine like the masculine : thus aios has aioi, dtW
(not dt'ai, at>Vt as if from di'a; see 124).
For feminines in a of the third and first declensions combined,
see 318.
The masculine dual forms in o> and otv in all adjectives
and participles may be used for the feminine forms in d and aw.
304. Some adjectives in os, chiefly compounds, have only
two endings, os and ov, the feminine being the same as the
masculine. They are declined like o-o<os, omitting the
feminine.
305. There are a few adjectives of the Attic second!
declension ending in ws and o>v.
306. 'AXoyos, irrational (304), and iXews, gracious (305),
are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. oXo-yos aXo-yov fXews Xcv
Gen. dXd-yov
Dat. &\6-y?
Ace. aXo-yov
VOC. aXo-ye aXo-yov tXews tXcwv
DUAL.
N.A.V. &X6</ tXcw
G. D.
PLURAL.
N.V. aXo<yoi aXo-ya
Gen. aX6-yv
Dat. dX6yois
Ace. &X6^ovs oXo-ya tXews
307. Some adjectives in os may be declined with either two or
three endings, especially in poetry.
308. Adjectives in o>s, <ov, commonly have a in the neuter plural.
But cKTrXco) from l/CTrXews occurs.
309. nXe'ws, full, has a feminine in a : irXews, irXe'a, irXeW.
The defective <ro>? (from o-a-os), safe, has nom. o-ois, oxov (also fern.
<ra), ace. o-tov, neut. pi. aa, ace. pi. o-ois. The Attic has o-woi, o-wou,
oxx in nom. pi. Homer has aoos.
310] ADJECTIVES -FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 65
310. Many adjectives in eos and oos are contracted. X/ov-
o-eo?, golden, dpyv/oeos, of silver, and a?rAoos, simple, are thus
declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. (xpfrreos)
Gen. (xpwr&u)
Dat. (xpC0^y) \pv<r<$
Acc. (xpuo'eov) XP VO " OVV (xpv ff ta.v) XP^"n v (,XPv ffOV ) XP^ *' 1 '
DUAL.
N.A.
G.D.
Nom. (xpv0"eot)
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
SINGULAR.
Norn. (dp75peos) dp-yupovs (dpyvpta) dp-yupd (dpyvpeov} dp'yvpovv
Gen. (dp7up^oi/) dp-yvpov (apyvptai) dp-yvpds (apyvptov} dp-yvpov
Dat. (dp7up^) dp'yupw (dp7vp^t) dp-yvpa (dp7up^y) dp-yvpcu
Acc. (dp7upeoi') dp-yvpoxiv (apyvptav) dp~yvpdv (dpyvpeov^ dp-yupovv
N. A. (dp7up^w) dp-yvpw (dp7up^a) dp-yvpd (dpyvptu) dp-yvpw
G. D. (&pyvpo(.v) dp-yvpotv (a.pyvpa.Lv) dp-yvpatv (dpyvptoiv) dp-yvpoiv
Nom. (dp7upeot) dp^vpot (dp7upecu) dp*yvpai (dpyvpea} dp-yupd
Gen. (dpyvp^wv*) dp^vpcov (dpyvp^uv} dpvvpwv (&pyvpi>)v} dpvvpwv
Dat. (dp7i;p^ots) dp'yvpois (dp7up^ais) dp^yupats (dp7up^ots) dp^vpois
Acc. (dp7ip^oi;s) dp-yupovs (dp7i/p^as) dp^yupas (dp7i5pea) dp-yvpd
SINGULAR.
Nom. (aVXo'os) dirXovs (aVXrfi;) dirX^ (dir\6ov) dirXovv
Gen. (ciTrXoou) dirXou (aVXoT;?) dirX^s (aTrXoou) dirXoi)
Dat. (aVXo'y) dirXw (aVXo'??) dirXfj (aTrXrfy) dirXw
Acc. (ciTrXooi') dirXovv (airXoyv) dirX{)v (c^VXoov) dirXovv
DUAL.
' A. (oJTrXow) dirXw (aVXoa) dirXa (aVXow) dirXw
G. D. (aTrXo'ou') dirXotv (aTrXo'aii') dirXaiv (ctTrX^oiv) dirXovv
66 INFLECTION. [311
PLURAL.
Nom. (oVXooi) dirXoi (aTrXocu) dirXcu (aTrXo'a) dirXd
Gen. (aVXowy) dirXuiv (aVXoW) dirXwv (aVXo'wi') dirXwv
Dat. (aVXoois) dirXois (aVXo'ais) dirXais (aVXo'ois) dirXois
Acc. (aVXo'ous) dirXovs (aVXo'as) dirXds (aTrXo'a) dirXd
311. ^All contract forms of these adjectives are perispomena ;
except o> for e'w and ow in the dual (see 203, 1). See also 203, 2
and 39, 1. Compounds in 005 leave oa in the neuter plural uncon-
tracted. No distinct vocative forms occur.
THIRD (OR CONSONANT) DECLENSION.
312. Adjectives belonging only to the third declen-
sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as
the masculine. Most of these end in 775 and e? (stems
in to--), ox in cov and ov (stems in ov-). See 233.
313. 'A\r)6fa true, and euSaipcov, happy, are thus
declined :
M.F. N. M.F. N.
SINGULAR.
Nom. dXT]9TJs dXi^Ocs v8aC(twv evSatnov
Gen. (dXijfl&s) dXrjOovs evSatjiovos
Dat. (a\Tj6ti) dXt]0ci evSaCjxovi
Acc. (dXTj^^a) dXt]OTi dXTjOe's eviSafnova evSaiftov
Voc. dXtjOe's
DUAL.
N.A.V. (clX^e) dXri0i
G.D. (aX7706>iv) dXTiOoiv cv8ai|xovoiv
PLURAL.
N. V.
Gen. (a.\T]6t<dv) dXrjO
Dat.
Acc.
314. For the recessive accent of neuters like evScu/xov and of
many barytone compounds in rj<s (as aurap/c?;?, aimxpKCs), see 122.
"AA^fles, indeed ! is proparoxytone.
315. Tn adjectives in ^5, ca is contracted to a after e, and to d
or rf after t or v; as evKXeiys, glorious, ace. (ev/cA.ee'a) evK\ed;
320] ADJECTIVES -FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 67
healthy, (vyie'a) vyia and vyifj ; ev<v7/s, comely, (ev<vca) ev<va and
tv<j>vf). (See 39, 2.)
For ets in the accusative plural, see 208, 3.
316, N. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are
generally declined like those nouns; as eveAms, eveA.7ri, hopeful,
gen. eveA.7ri8os, ace. ev\Tnv (214, 3), ve\7n; c^apis, ev^api, grace-
ful, gen. etn^apiros, ace. ev^apiv, ev^apt. But compounds of Trarr/p
and /xT/Ti/p end in cup (gen. 0/009), and those of irdAts in is (gen.
iSos) ; as o.7raT<op, airdrop, gen. aTraropos, fatherless ; aTroAts, aTroAt,
without a country, gen.
317. For the peculiar declension of comparatives in uv (stem in ov-~),
see 358.
FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED.
318. Adjectives of this class have the masculine and
neuter of the third declension and the feminine of the
first. The feminine always has a in the nominative
and accusative singular (175) ; in the genitive and
dative singular it has a after a vowel or diphthong,
otherwise 77.
Ov of the feminine genitive plural is circumflexed regularly
(124). Compare 302.
For feminine dual forms, see 303.
319. {Stems in v.) Stems in v form adjectives in
f<?, em, v. The masculine and neuter are declined like
Trfyvs and acrrv (250), except that the genitive sin-
gular ends in 09 (not o>?) and the neuter plural in ea
is not contracted.
320. T\vKvs, sweet, is thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. -yXvKvs -yXvKeia -yXvicv
Gen. -yXvKc'os -yXvKctas
Ace. y\\)K\>v -yX^KCiav
Voc. -yXvKv -yXyKeia
N. A.V. (y\vK&) -yXvKi yXvKeid
G. D, -yXvKc'oiv
68
INFLECTION.
[321
PLURAL.
N. V. (yXi/K&s) yXuiceis -yXviwiai
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
321. The feminine stem in eta- comes from the stem in ev- (e/r-)
by adding ia: thus yXv/cev-, yXvKe- (256), yXvKe-ia, yXv/ceia. (See
90, 3.)
322. N. The Ionic feminine of adjectives in vs has ecu Homer
has evpe'a (for evpw) as accusative of cvpvs, unWe.
323. N. Adjectives in vs are oxytone, except Of]\v<s, female^
fresh, and ij/xtcrvs, AaZ/I iJAvs sometimes has only two termina-
tions in poetry.
324. 1. (Stems in av and cv.) Two adjectives hav^
Stems in av, /xe'Ads (/xcXai/-), /AeXatva, /xeAav, black, and ToXdv
(raXav-), raXacva, raXav ? wretched.
2. One has a stem in /, rep^v (repev-), repetva, Tpev, tender
(Latin tener).
325. MeXas and repiyv are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. fJLe'Xds fieXaiva fie'Xav
Gen. (jtcXavos (xeXatv-qs fjtt'Xavos
Dat. [ie'Xavi p.eXaivT] |ieXavi
Ace. (jte'Xava ft^Xaivav fie'Xav
Yoc. p.'Xav [leXaiva jjte'Xav
DUAL.
N.A.V.p.^Xav
G. D. (icXdvoiv
N. V. jiAaves
Gen. fLcXdvcov
Dat. |i&.a<ri
Ace. jie'Xavas
[icXaCvd
jieXaCvaiv (leXavoiv
repeva rc'pcivav repev
rt'pev rcpciva rcpcv
repeve Tepeivd rcpcvc
repcvoiv repeivaiv repe'voiv
(icXaivai
PLURAL.
fieXava
(icXaCvais
fieXaivas
(jie'Xao-L
|icXava
Tp6ves repeivai r^pcva
Tcpevwv repeivwv reptvajv
Ttpta-L rcpcivais Tp<rt
Tpvas repetvds re'peva
326. The feminine stems /x,eAa/a- and repetva- come from
fteXav-ta- and repev-ta- (84, 5).
327. Like the masculine and neuter of Ttprjv is declined
appei/ (older apo-iyv, apcrev),
333] ADJECTIVES -FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 69
328. (Stems in z/r.) Adjectives from stems in ez>T
end in et?, ecro-a, ez/. From a stem in avr comes 7ra<?,
Tracra, TTCLV, all.
329. ^a/net?, graceful, and 7ra<? are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. x a pk ls \a.pit<r<ra. x a P^ 6V <ir *S ira<ra irav
Gen. x a P^ VTOS X 01 ? 16 ' " " 1 ! 5 x a P^ VTOS iravros irdo-Tjs iravros
Dat. x a pfe VTt X a P l/<r<r fl X a P' VTt iravri ircurr| iravrt
Ace. x a P^ VTa x a P^ O "" av X a P^ 6v iravra ircl<rav irav
Voc. x.apiev \a.pU<r<ra, \apkv
DUAL.
N. A.V.xa-p^vre x a P l ' <r(r * x a P^ VTe
G. D. x a P l6 ' VTOtv X a P t ' <r<ratv X a P t6 ' VTOlv
PLURAL.
N. V. x a P^ VT S \o.pUcr<ra,\, x a P^ 6VTa iravres irourat trAvra
Gen. x a P l * VTa>v X a P t<r<r " v X a P t/VTft)V iravrcov iroUrwv iravrwy
Dat. \apUa-i \a.pie<ro-a.is \a.pk<ri ira<ri irdo-ais irao-t
Ace. x a P' VTas X a P t/<r<r * s x a P^ VTa iravras irdo-ds iravra
330. Most adjective stems in cvr, all in ai/r except TTO.VT- (Tras),
and all in ovr except C/COKT- and SLKOVT- (eKwv and d/cwv, 333), belong
to participles. (See 334.)
331. 1. The nominatives ^aptet? and ^apt'ev are for ^aptei/r-s
and xapitKT-, and Tras and irav for Travr-? and Travr- (79). The a
in Trav is irregular; but Homer has Q.TTQ.V and Trporrav. For the
accent of TTOLVTW and Tracrt, see 128. Ilao-aii/ is regular (318).
2. For the feminine ^apt'ecro-a (for ^apter-ia from a stem in CT-),
see 84, 1 ; and for dat. plur. ^apteo-i (for ^aptcr-crc), see 74. Ilacra
is for Trai/T-ta (84, 2).
332. Homer occasionally contracts adjectives in i}ets, as TI/XT}?
(for Ti/xi}ets), TifMJvra (for Tt/xijcvra), valuable. The Attic poets
sometimes contract those in oets ; as TrAa/covs, TrXaKoOvros (for TrAa-
KOS, TrAa/coevros), ^ai (cdA;e), Trrepowra (for Trrepoevra), winged,
aWa\ov(r<ra. (for cu#aAoe(T(ra), flaming, irrepovcrva. (for 7TTepoe(rcra),
/xeAtTovTTa (for ^cAtroeo-o-a, 68, 3), honied (cake). So names of
places (properly adjectives) ; as *EAcuoi)s, 'EAcuowros, Elaeus,
'EAawwcrcra (an island), from forms in -oeis, -oc<ro-a. So *Pa/xvovs,
'Pa/ivovvros, Rhamnus (from -oets). (See 39, 5.)
333. One adjective in wv, e/cwv, eKovo-a, CKOV, willing, gen. CKWTOS,
etc., has three endings, and is declined like participles in wv ( : >30).
70
INFLECTION.
[334
PARTICIPLES IN (OV, OU9, 9, e^9, 9, AND 6)9.
334. All participles, except those in 09, belong to the
first and third declensions combined.
335. Auwi/ (Avoi/T-), loosing, SiSov? (SiSorr-), giving,
(TI&I/T-), placing, Set/ci/vs (Sei/o/wr-), showing, terras (
erecting, an/ (OVT-), &em#, (present active participles of A.VW,
Si'S<o//,i, TLOrjfJii, BeLKvvfJLi, i(TTr)iJLi, and ei/xi), Avo-as (Avo-avr-), ^av-
tn<7 loosed, and AeAv/os (AeAv/cor-), having loosed (first aorist
and perfect participles of Avo>), are thus declined:
SINGULAR.
Nom. XTJUV Xvov<ra Xvov
SiSovs
SiSova-a 8iS6v
Gen. \VOVTOS Xvovtrrjs X^OVTOS SiSovros 8i8ovo"ns SiSovros
Dat. XWOVTI Xvov<rrj XVOVTI
Ace. Xvovra X*ov<rav Xvov
Voc. Xvwv Xvovo-a Xvov
SiSovn SiSovo*T] SiSovri
SiSovra 8i,8ovcrav SiSov
SiSovs SiSovo-a SiSov
DUAL.
N. A.V.Xvovre Xvovo-d Xvovre 8i86vT 8i8ovo-d SiSovrc
G. J ). XVOVTOIV Xvovo-aiv XVOVTOIV 8i8ovroiv 8i8ovaraiv
PLURAL.
v.v.
XvOVTCS
Xvovo-ai
XliovTtt
8l86vTS
SiSovcrai
SiSovra
Gen.
XvOVTWV
Xvovo~c3v
XvOVTWV
SlSoVTCUV
SiSovo-tov
8l86vTWV
Dat.
Xvovoa
Xvovo~ais XTJOVCTL SiSovo'i
SiSovo-ais
SiSovo^i
Ace.
XvOVTttS
Xvovcrds
Xvovra
SiSovras
SiSova-ds
SiSovra
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Ti0eCs
Ti6eio-a
T106V
SCIKVVS
SeiKvvo-a
SCIKVVV
Gen.
Ace.
T106VTOS
T10CVTI
TiOcvTCt
Ti0eo~T)s
T10IO~TJ
Ti0tio~av
T106VTOS
T106VTI.
SCIKVVVTOS
SciKVVVTl
SeiKvvvra
SeiKvvo-T)s
SciKVVO"Q
SciKvvo~av
SeiKVVVTk
SCIKVVV
Voc.
ri0cCs
Ti0to-a
T10'V
SCIKVVS
SeiKvvo-a
SCIKVVV
DUAL.
N. A. Y. ri0VT Ti0eCo-6L rtOevre SCIKVVVTC
G. D. Ti06VTOiv Ti0eio~aiv ri0evroiv SEIKVVVTOIV SciKvva'aiv SCIKVVVTOK
PLURAL.
N.V. Tt0VT6S Tt0lO-ai Tl0'vTtt SeiKVVVTeS
Gen. T10VTWV T10IO"WV T10VTO)V SciKVVVTW
Dat. Ti0eio~k ri0icrais n0io*i SCIKVVO~I
Ace. TiOevras Ti0cCo~ds riO^vra Seucvvvras SciKvvo'ds
8IKVVO"WV StlKVVVTWV
337]
PARTICIPLES.
71
SINGULAR.
Xvo-ds
Xvo-do-a Xwrav
Nom. terras lo-rdo-a lo-rdv
Gen. IcrrdvTOs lcrTdo~r]S lo-rdvTOS Xvo-avros XVO-OUTTJS Xvo-avros
Dat. lo-ravTi i<TTcUrT| IcrravTi Xvc-avri Xvo'do-r) X&ravTi
Acc. lo-Tavra lo-rdo-av lo-rav
Voc. lo-rds lo-rdo-a lo-rav
Xvo-avra
Xvo-ds
Xvcracrav Xvcrav
Xvo-do-a Xvo-av
DUAL.
N. A. V. l<TTavT t(TTdcrd l<TTdvT
G. D. lo-ravTOiv lo-rdo-aiv to-ravTOiv
Xii<rd<rd
Xvcrdvroiv Xv<rd<ratv Xvoravroiv
N. V. t<rTavTs l<rTa<rai icrrdyra Xv<ravTs
Gen. lo-rdvTwv IO-TOUTWV to-rdvTwv Xvo-dvrwv
Dat. lo-Tolo-i lo-rdo-ais ttrTacri Xv(rd<ri
Acc. to-ravras lorTd<rds to-Tavra Xv<ravras
Xv<rd<rai
Xvo-curwv Xii<rdvTwv
Xvo-cwrais Xv<rd<rt
Xv<rd<rds Xv<ravra
Norn. v ovo-a
Gen. OVTOS OVO-TJS
Dat. 6'vTi ovo-g
Acc. ovTa ovo-av
Voc. v ovo-a
N.A.V.oVre oo-d
G. D. OVTOIV ovo-aiv
N. V. ovT ova-ai
Gen. ovTb)v ovcrwv
Dat. ovo-i ovcrais
Acc. ovras ovcrds
SINGULAR.
6v XeXvKws XcXvKvta XeXvicds
OVTOS XeXvKOTOS XcXvKvCaS XcXvKOTOS
OVTI XeXvKori XcXvKvCa
ov XeXuKora XcXvKviai
6v XeXvKcos XeXvKvia XcXvK6s
DUAL.
6We
OVTOIV
XcXvKuCd XeXvKore
XeXvKoroiv XeXvKvCaiv XeXuKoroiv
XeXvK6ra
PLURAL.
6'vra
OVTCOV XeXvKorwv XeXvKvitov
o5<ri XeXuKocrt XcXvKvCais XXvK6<ri
ovra XeXuKoras XeXuKvids XeXvKora
336. All participles in <oi/ are declined like Xvtov (those in <ov
being accented like cov) ; all in ovs, vs, and o>s are declined like
Si8ou<, 8et/<v^s, and AeAv/ctos ; all in eis (aorist passive as well as
active) are declined like TI&IS; present and second aorist active
participles in as (from verbs in pi) are declined like to-rds, and
first aorists in cis like Accra's.
3?7. 1. For feminines in ovo-a, cwra, v<ra, and d<ra (for ovr-ia,
evr-ia, wr-ta, avr-ia), formed by adding ia to the stem, see 84, 2.
2. Perfects in <os (with stems in or-) have an irregular femi-
nine in via.
72
INFLECTION.
[338
338. The full accent of polysyllabic barytone participles ap-
pears in (3ovXeva)v, fiovX.evovaa, /SouAeuov, and yftouAevo-as, /JovAev-
adcra, j3ov\tv<rav. (See 134.)
339. For the accent of the genitive and dative of monosyllabic
participles, see 129 and the inflection of wv above. Thus 0ets has
gen. $VTos, $evTw, etc.
340. Participles in aw, e'w, and ow are contracted.
Tlfjidcw, Tifjiuv, honoring, and <iAW, <j!>tAoii/, loving, are de-
clined as follows :
SINGULAR.
N. fTl/xdwv) TLLLCOV ( TlU,diOV(TCt ) TtLLUJO"Cl (Tr/idoj^ > ) TLLLCOV
G. (rt/xdoj'Tos) TiftoJvTOS (Tt/iaoi5(T77s) Ti|i(tf(rT)s (rt/xdoi/ros) TIJJLWVTOS
D. (ri^tdoj'Ti) TijxwvTt (rt/xaoi5(r]7) TifKMT'Q (rt/udoj'Tt) TIJJLWVTI
A. (rt/udoi'Ta) rifiuvra (rt/xdou<rai') njiwcrav (rt/xdov)
V. (rt/xdwj') TIJJICOV (rt/xdoucra) ripcocra (rt^dov)
Tl(JL(3vT
TIJIWVTOIV
Ti|i(oord
PLURAL.
N. (rt/xdoi'Tes) TijiwvTes
G. (rlfJLO.l)VT(j}V) TIJJLWVTWV
D. (ri/cxdouo-i) ri|iuxri
A. (rt/xdo'Tas) TifjLwvras (rt/xaouo-ds)
V. (rt/xdoi'Tes)
<|>iXovvros
4>lXoVVTl
<|>iXovvTa
^iXwv
(rt/xdoj'Ta)
TL(jtcixrai (ri/xdoira)
SINGULAR.
<|>iXov<ra
4>lXoV(TT|S
<{>iXov(rav
(jnXovcra
TI|JLWVT
TLfJLCOVTWV
<|>i\ovv
<j>iXoiVTi
<{>iXot)v
<f>iXovv
cj>tXovvTOiv
<f>iXov<rd
aiv
PLURAL.
<{>iXov(rai
<|>iXovvTs
<)>iXovvT6)V
<|>iXovcri (0tXeoi5crais) <|>iXov<rais
4>iXovvras (0tXeo;<ras) 4>iXou<rds
(}>i.XovvTes (0iX^outrat) <}>iXovcrai
4>lXovVTC
) <f>lXovVTOl*
4>tXovvTa
<f>lXoV(Tl
4>iXovvTa
tjnXovvTCi
3461
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
73
341. Present participles of verbs in ow (contracted w) are de-
clined like <iAu>v. Thus Sr/Aoii/, SrjXovcra, S^Aow, manifesting ; gen.
fyXovvros, Si/Aown;? ; dat. Si/Aowri, Sr)\ov(rr), etc. No uncontracted
forms of verbs in oo> are used (493)..
342. A few second perfect participles in aws of the pi- form
have oi<ra in the feminine, and retain <o in the oblique cases. They
are contracted in Attic ; as Horn, eoracu?, eorawou, ecrraos, Attic
eoTtocra, (TTOS or eoTais, standing, gen. ICTTWTOS, eo-rwcr?;?,
etc. ; pi. eoTwres, eorbjom, eoTWTa, gen. eorwrouv, ecrrawraiv,
etc. (See 508.)
ADJECTIVES WITH ONE ENDING.
343. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one
ending, which is both masculine and feminine ; as <vyas,
fugitive; aTrcus, aTrcuSo?, childless; dyvtos, dyvwros, unknown; a
avaA.KtSos, weak. The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter.
344. The poetic i'Spts, knowing, has ace. tSptv, voc. tSpt, nom.
345. A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first
declension, ending in as or 175 ; as yewa&xs, noble, gen.
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
346. The irregular adjectives, /xeya? (/xcya-, /xeyaAo-), great,
? oAvs (TroAv-, TroAAo-), YflUcJly and Trpaos (Trpao-, Trpdv-), OT
, mi/d, are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nona. p-eyas JXYOI\T]
Gen. (ie^oiXou fjL-ya\i]s jxe-yoiXov
Dat. |A-yaX.t>>
Acc.
Voc.
DUAL.
N. A. V. fjie-yaXa) \LtyaXa.
G. D. (ic-ydXoiv pe-yaXaiv
TroXiIs "iroXXtj iroXv
iroXXov iroXXrjs iroXXov
iroXXw iroXXTj iroXXw
iroXvv iroXXTJv iroXv
N. V. (jLc-ydXoi
Gen. |i-yaXa>v
Dat. (xcyaXois
Acc. (leyciXous p.-yd\a$ jie-ydXa
iroXXoC iroXXaC iroXXd
iroXXwv iroXX(3v TroXXwv
iroXXois iroXXats iroXXois
iroXXov's iroXXds iroXXd
74 INFLECTION. [347
SINGULAR.
Nom.
rrpaos
irpdeta
Gen.
irptfov
irpcUias
Dat.
irpau
irpatia
Ace.
irp*ov
irpcUiav
DUAL.
N. V.
irpaw
irpoUCd
G. D.
-n-paoiv
irpdcCaiv
PLURAL.
N.A.
irpaoi or irpdcis
iTpdeiai
Gen.
n-pcU'wv
irpdciwv
Dat.
Trpaois or Trpde'cri
irpdetais
Ace.
Trpaovs
irpaeLas
-n-paa or irpae'a
irpaiEcov
irpaois or irpcUVi
irpaa or irpuea
347. N. IIoXXo's, ij, oV, is found in Homer and Herodotus, declined
regularly throughout. Homer has forms TroX^os, TroX^es, tro\wv, iroKtei, etc.,
not to be conf ounded with epic forms of TTO'XIS (255) : also TrovXtfs, TronX^.
348. N. 11/0905 has two stems, one irpyo-, from which the masculine
and neuter are generally formed ; and one irpdv-, from which the femi-
nine and some other forms come. There is an epic form Trptjvs (lyric
Trpavs) coming from the latter stem. The forms belonging to the two
stems differ in accent.
349. N. Some compounds of TTOVJ (iroS-), foot, have ow in the n4mi-
native neuter and the accusative masculine ; as rpLirovs, rpi-n-ow, three-
footed.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
I. COMPARISON BY -repos, -raros.
350. Most adjectives add re/oo? (stem re/oo-) to the
stem to form the comparative, and raro? (stem rare-)
to form the superlative. Stems in o with a short penult
lengthen o to CD before re/oo? and rare?. For the declen-
sion, see 301. E.g.
Kov<f>o<; (KOV<O-), light, Kov<orepos (-a, -ov), lighter,
(-rj, -ov), lightest.
(vo<o-), wise, o-o<<jorepos, wiser, o-o^xoraro?, wisest.
(aio-), worthy, d^twrepos, dici>TaTos.
(O-C/AVO-), august, o-e/xvdrepos, o-c/x,voraros.
(TriKpo-), bitter, Trt/cporepos,
(6v-), sharp, o^vrepos, o^
MeXas (/AtAav-), black, /xeXavrepos, /xeXavraros.
), true, dXr/^eo-repos, dA^^eoraTOs (312)
360J COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 75
351. Stems in o do not lengthen o to o> if the penultimate
vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (100). See TUK/OOS above.
352. MeVos, middle, and a few others, drop o of the stem and
add aiTepos and curaros ; as /xeVos (/xeo-o-), /xeo-airepos, /xecracTaros.
353. Adjectives in oos drop final o of the stem and add corepos
and eWaros, which are contracted with o to ovorepos and bvcrraro^ ;
as (ewoos) ewovs (ewoo-), well-disposed, ewowrrepos, ewov'oTaros.
354. Adjectives in cov add eorepos and COTO/TOS to the stem; as
(rw<p<ov (crox^pov-), prudent, crox^poveorepos, crox^poi/eoraTOS.
355. Adjectives in as add repos and TO.TOS to the stem in cr-
(331, 2) ; as ^apt'eis, graceful, fern, ^apceo-aa (papier-), ;(apieo-Tepos,
^apieo-raros for ^apter-repos, ^apiT-Taros (71) .
356. Adjectives may be compared by prefixing /xoAAov, more,
and fuA.wrra, mos ; as /otoAAov O-Q^OS, more toise, ^wXurro. KUKOS, mos
oat/.
II. COMPARISON BY -twy, -to-ros.
357. 1. Some adjectives, chiefly in w? and /oo?, are com-
pared by changing tfAesg endings to Za>z/ and tcrro?.
vs, sweet, rjSiaiv, T^Sttrros.
/?, rayiuv (rare), commonly ^acro-wv (95, 5),
/ tcr^pos, base,
os, hostile, l
(poet.), glorious, KV&'WV
2. The terminations twv and KTTOS are thus added to the rooJ
of the word (153), not to the adjective stem.
358. Comparatives in Iwv, neuter toy, are thus de-
clined :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Norn. rjStwv ^8iov N. V. ijStoves tiSfovs tjSfova ifStw
Gen. TJStovos Gen.
Dat. ijStovi Dat.
Ace. T]8tova tj8ta> t|8iov Ace. i|8fovas ijSfous ijStova
DUAL.
N. A. V.
G. D.
359. N. (a) The shortened forms come from a stem in wr- (cf,
238), CD and ovs being contracted from o-a and o-es. The accusa
tive plural in ovs follows the form of the nominative (208, 3).
(6) Homer sometimes has comparatives in tow.
f6 INFLECTION. [360
(c) The vocative singular of these comparatives seems not to
occur.
(d) For the recessive accent in the neuter singular, see 122.
360. The irregular comparatives in <ov (361) are declined like
1/8lC01/.
III. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
361. The following are the most important cases of
irregular comparison :
1. dyaOo's, good, oljjietvwv,
(apeiuv), apurros,
ffcXrtwV, P&TMTTOS,
(j3<?\Tepos), 03 ATCITOS),
Kpe tcro-cov or KpcCrrwv (/f/>6nru> j>) , KparurTOs,
Xwwv (Xw^wi', Xw/re/oos), XWO-TOS-
2. KaKOS,*^acZ, KttKtwv (/caKcirepos), KaKwrros,
XeCpcov
(for TJK-I-UV, 84,1) or (rjKio-ros, rare);
O-O-WJ/), adV. TjKMTTa,
ZeasJ.
3. KaXos, beautiful, KaXXtwv, KaXXwrros-
4. iie-yas, great, 'n(twv(/^ui'for/>ie7-i-c ( ;j>,84,3), ^c-yio-ros.
5. fxtKpo's, smaZZ, fiiKporepos, jiiKpoTaros,
(Horn. 4\dx-a,
fern, of IXaxv's), l\a<ro-wv or IXarrwv (84, 1), 4XdxrTOS,
ueCtov (/u,e?a"ros, rare).
6. oXC-yos, Z^e, (fa-oMfrv, rather Zess),
7. IT^VTJS (TTvr)T-),pOOr, ireveVTCpos,
8. iroXv's, wwcA, irXei'wv or irX^wv (neut. some- irXeurros.
times TrXeti'),
9. p<8ios, easy,
(Ion. pytdios'),
pcuov,
pqxrros,
(p^froros,
10. <J>iXos, dear,
(jjCXrepos (poetic),
cjuXairtpos (rare),
<t>CXraTOS,
4>tXaiTaTO
(rare).
, twice in Horn.)
Ionic or poetic forms are in ( ).
367] ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 77
362. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words
will be found in the Lexicon :
aicrxpos, dAyeivos, ap7ra, a<0ovos, ax a P l ?> J3a0v<;, (3Xd, /3paSvs,
yepcuos, yAuKvs, eTriA^oyxooi/, eu-t^apis, 7j<ru;(os, 18109, tcros, AaAos,
/AOLKCLp, /ZttKpOS, VCOS, TTaAcUOS, TTtt^VS, TTCTTtOV, TTlW, TrA^CTtOS, 7Tp(7/?VS,
irpovpyov, irpauos, (TTrov&xtos, cr^oAatos, if/V&*ij<s, <OKVS.
363. Some comparatives and superlatives have no posi-
tive, but their stem generally appears in an adverb or
preposition. E.g.
'Avtorepos, upper, dvomxros, uppermost, from aixo, wp ; Trporepos,
former, rrpwro? or Trpomoros, ^r6'<, from irpo, before ; Karwrcpo?,
lower, Karwraros, lowest, from /carto, downward.
See in the Lexicon dy^orcpos, d^xxprepos, KepStoov, OTrAorcpo?,
Trpocrwrepos, ptytov (neuter), VTreprepos, vo-rcpo?, v//tW, <^>aavrepo5,
with their regular superlatives ; also ccr^aros, VTraros, and K^Swrros.
364. Comparatives and superlatives may be formed from
nouns, and even from pronouns. .7.^.
BomAevs, fcin^r, ySao-tAcvrepo?, a greater king, ySao-tAevraros, <^c
greatest king ; KAeW^?, ffo'e/, KAeTrTto-rcpo?, KAeTTTtcrTaTOs ; KVWV, c?o<7,
Kvvrepos, wiore impudent, Kwraros, mos impudent. So avros, se(/J
wroVaTos, ^is very se//, ipsissimus.
ADVEEBS AND THEIK COMPARISON.
365. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives.
Their form (including the accent) may be found by
changing i/ of the genitive plural masculine to 9.
^tAws, dearly, from <i'Aos ; SiKcuois, justly (StKcuos) ;
ttritety (ao^os) ; lySews, sweetly (iy8i>s, gen. plur. ^Sewv),
<rw^ (0X77^7/5, gen. plur. dA^^cwv, dAi^oiv) ; cra^w? (Ionic aa^ecus),
plainly (<ra<t>r]<s, gen. plur. aa^eoov, cra^tuv) ; TTCIVTCUS, wholly (Tras,
gen. plur. Travrcov).
366. Adverbs are occasionally formed in the same way from
participles ; as 8ia<epoi/r<os, differently, from 8ia<ep<ov (Sia<epov-
rtov) ; Teray/xevws, regularly, from reray/xevos (racrcrto, order J.
367. The neuter accusative of an adjective (either
singular or plural) may be used as an adverb. _Z?.<7.
IIoAi; and TroAAo, mwcft (TroAvs) ; /xcya or yoieyaAa, greatly (/xcyas) ;
also /xeyoAcos (365), /AOVOV, on^y (/xovo?, alone).
78
INFLECTION.
368. Other forms of adverbs occur with various terminations ;
as fjiaXa, very, Td\a, quickly, aivto, above, eyyvs, near.
369. The neuter accusative singular of the compara-
tive of an adjective forms the comparative of the corre-
sponding adverb, and the neuter accusative plural of the
superlative forms the superlative of the adverb. E.g.
2o<(os ((TO<OS), wisely ; oxx^curepov, more wisely ; (nx^amxra, most
wisely. *AA?7$<jos (dAr/^s), truly; dAr^ecrrepov, aXrjOea-Tara. 'HSe'ws
(i^Sus), sweetly, y&lov, ^Sierra. Xapievrws (Capias), gracefully ; x a P L *~
arepov, ^apteo-rara. 2oa^poi/o>s (crampon/), prudently;
370. 1. Adverbs in <o generally form a comparative in
and a superlative in rarw ; as ava>, above, avwrepoo, avwrarco.
2. A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in re'ptos;
as /2e/&uoTp<os, morejirmly, for /Se/JatoTCpoi/, from y8cj8atojs.
371 . N".. MaXa, mwcA, very, has comparative /xoAAoi/ (for
84, 4), more, rather ; superlative /xaAiorra, most, especially.
NUMERALS.
372. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives, and
the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows :
Sign.
Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
1
a'
els, |x(a, e'v, one
irpwros, first
airag, once
2
P'
Sw'o, 100
8evTpos, second
8C S , twice
3
y'
rpcis, rpia
rpfros
rpfs
4
8'
T<ro-aps, T<r<rapa
TTapros
TTp<XKlS
(rTTaps, T^rrapa)
5
'
1TVT6
Tre'fiirTos
ITCVTOKtS
6
'
l
KTOS
e'ioucis
7
r
f< irrd
cpSoftos
CTTTOKIS
8
V
OKT(0
o'ySoos
OKTOKIS
9
6'
tvvta
evaros
VOKIS
10
t '
SCKCL
ScKaros
SCKOIKIS
11
ia'
cvSeKa
cvScKaros
evScKaKis
12
1 P'
StoScKa
SwSeKaros
SuScKOlKlS
13
iV
rpeis Kal SCKU (or
Tpiros Kal Sexaros
rpeia-KaCSeKa)
374]
NUMERALS.
79
Sign.
Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
14 18'
retro-apes Kal 8cKa
rcrapros Kal SeKaros
(or retnrapeo-KaCScKa)
15 i'
irevrcKaiScKa
ire'jjnrTos Kal SeKaros
16 i'
KKO.l6eKa
eKTos Kal SeKaros
17 if
eirraKaCScKa
e'pSofios Kal ScKaros
18 lt|'
oKTWKaiSeKa
o-ySoos Kal SCKUTOS
19 i0'
cvvcaKaCScKa
i' varos Kal SeKaros
20 K'
etKOOTl(v)
elKoo-To's
elKoattKis
21 K a'
els Kal ^KOO-I(V) or
irptoros Kal iKoo-To's
etKoo-i (Kal) els
30 V
TpiaKovra
TpiaKOWTOS
TptdKOVTOKtS
40 |i'
T<ro-apaKOVTa
T0-(rapaKOO-TOS
reo-crapaK o vrctK ts
50 v
irevTrfKOVTa
irevTiiKoo-Tos
irevTTjKOVTaKts
60 i'
C^'KOVTO
C |t]KO<TTOS
gT]KOVTCtKtS
70 o'
tpSo^KOvra
e'pSop.1] Kotrros
epSo(JH]KOVTGlKtS
80 IT'
o-ySoifKOvra
o-ySoTjKocrro's
o-y8oi]KOVTaKts
90 9'
e'vevqKovTa
evevTiKoo-To's
ivevt]KovTou<ts
100 p'
eKaro'v
6KaTO<TTOS
CKaTOVTOKlS
200 <r'
SiaKocTLOu ai, a
8iaKO<rio<rTo's
StdKoo-icuas
300 r
TpioucoVioi, ai, a
TptOKOCrtOCTTOS
400 v'
rerpaKo'crioi, ai, a
TTpaKO<TlO<TTOS
500 <j>'
irevTaKoVtoi, at, a
irVTaKO<rtocrTos
600 x'
e|aKo'o-iot, ai, a
e|aKO<rioo-Tos
700 ij/'
e'lrraKoViot, at, a
e'TTTaKO<rto<rTos
800 '
oKraKocriot, at, a
OKTaKOO-lOO-TOS
900 7*)'
cvaKoVtot, at, a
vaKO<rioo-To's
1000 ,a
XtXtot, at, a
XtXtoo-To's
XiXioucis
2000 ,p
6icrxji.Xi.oi. at, a
Sto-xiXioa-To's
3000 f y
rpto-xtXtot, at, a
Tpto-xiXtoa-To's
10000 ,i
uivptot, at, a
p.i5piocrTos
(JLVptGUCtS
20000 ,K
St(T|JLVptOt
100000 ' /P
ScKaKio-fivptot
373. Above 10,000, Bvo /xvptaSes, 20,000, rpets /xvptaSes, 30,000,
etc., may be used.
374. The dialects have the following peculiar forms :
1 4. See 377.
5. Aeolic 7re/x7r for TrcVre.
9. Herod, etvaros for evaros ; also emms, etc.
12. Doric and Ionic SuwSeKa ; Poetic
20. Epic cet/cocri ; Doric
80 INFLECTION. [375
30, 80, 90, 200, 300. Ionic rpiyKovra, oySuSKovra, cwrJKovra (Horn.),
Si^KOcrtoi, T/otry/cocrtot.
40. Herod. reoxrepaKovra.
Homer has rpiraros, TeVparos, eySSo/taros, oySoaros, etWros,
Se/caros, eetKoorros, and also the Attic form of each.
375. The cardinal numbers el?, one, Suo,
Ar0e, and re'cr crape? (or rerra/oe?), /owr, are thus de-
clined :
Nom. els |xa cv
Gen. vos |uds evo's N. A. 8vo
Dat. vC iu< e'vC G. D. Svotv
Ace. vct
Nom. rpeis rpCa r^ro-apes T6<r<rapa
Gen. rpicSv T<r<rapv
Dat. rpio- T<r<rap<ri
Ace. rpeis Tpia T6<r<rapas Wo-o-apa
376. N". Avo, two, with a plural noun, is sometimes indeclinable.
377. N. Homer has fern, ta, lrj<s, Irj, lav, for /Ata; and tw for kvi
Homer has 8vo and 8wa>, both indeclinable; and 8oio> and 80101,
declined regularly. Herodotus has Svwv, Svotcrt, and other forms:
see the Lexicon. Homer sometimes has Tuicrvpes for reWapes.
Herodotus has reWepes, and the poets have reVpam.
378. The compounds ovSet's and /xr;8et's, no one, none, are de-
clined like els. Thus, oljSa's, ot>Se/Aia, ovSeV ; gen. ovScvo?, ov8e/xias ;
dat. ovSevt", ovBefua ; ace. ovSeVa, ovfafuav, ouSeV, etc. Plural forms
sometimes occur; as ovSeVes, ovSeVwv, o^SeVi, ovSe'vas, /xrySeve?, etc.
When ov8 or /xr/Se is written separately or is separated from el?
(as by a preposition or by ai>), the negative is more emphatic ; as
c ovSevos, yrom no one ; o8' e^ ei/os, from not even one ; ouSc cts, nof
a man.
379. Both is expressed by a/x<a>, am&o, d/A^>otj/; and by d/A<(>
repos, generally plural, d/x^orcpot, at, a.
380. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclin-
able. The higher numbers in tot and all the ordinals are
declined regularly, like other adjectives in os.
381. In rpeis (Tpia) KCH Se/ca and reoxrapes (T<r<rapa) Kat 8e/ca
for 13 and 14, the first part is declined. In ordinals (13th to 19th)
the forms Tpacr/caiSeKaTos etc. are Ionic, and are rarely found in
the best Attic,
388] NUMERALS. -THE ARTICLE. 81
382. 1. In compound expressions like 21, 22, etc., 31, 32, etc.,
the numbers can be connected by KOI in either order ; but if /cat is
omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, els KCLL etKocrt, one and twenty,
or etKocrt KO.I els, twenty and one; but (without KCU) only et/cocrii/ els,
twenty-one.
2. In ordinals we have rrpwTos KCU ei/cocrros, tiventy-jirst, and also
CIKOO-TOS /cat 7rpo>Tos, etc. ; and for 21 els KCU CIKOOTOS.
3. The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 29, 38 and 39, etc., are often
expressed by ei/os (or Suotv) SeWres eucoo-t (rpiaKovra, Teao-apaKOi/To,
etc.) ; as err] eves SCOI/TO. rptaKovra, 29 years.
383l 1. With collective nouns in the singular, especially ^
TTTTTOS, cavalry, the numerals in tot sometimes appear in the sin-
gular ; as rrjv StaKocriav ITTTTOV, the (troop of) 200 cavalry (200
horse)', doTTts /xvpi'a /cat Terpcucocrta (X. J.n. i, 7 10 ), 10,400 shields
(i.e. wen zwVA shields).
2. Mvpiot means ten thousand; /xvpi'ot, innumerable. Mupibs
sometimes has the latter sense; as /xvptos x/ 0/vos ' countless time;
fjujpia Trevt'd, incalculable poverty.
384. N. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters ; the two
obsolete letters Vau (in the form ) and Koppa, and the character San,
denoting 6, 90, and 900. (See 3.) The last letter in a numerical ex-
pression has an accent above. Thousands begin anew with ,a, with a
stroke below. Thus, ao^', 1868 ; fix, 2625 ; 5/ce', 4025 ; 7', 2003 ;
0//, 540 ; pd', 104. (See 372.)
385. N. The letters of the ordinary Greek alphabet are often used
to number the books of the Iliad and Odyssey, each poem having
twenty-four books. A, B, r, etc. are generally used for the Iliad, and
a, j8, 7, etc. for the Odyssey.
THE AETICLE.
386. The definite article o (stem TO-), the, is thus
declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. 6 TJ r6
Gen. TOV TS TOV
Dat.
Ttt Tj T
DUAL.
N.A. T(& TC& TW
G.D. TOtv TOIV TOIV
PLURAL.
Nom. ol at T&
Gen. TWV
Dat. TOIS rais TOIS
Ace. TOVS xds TCI
Ace. rdv -HJV r6
387. K The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the
indefinite rts (415, 2) may be translated by a or an ; as avfyxorros
rts, a certain man, often simply a man.
388. N. The regular feminine dual forms rd and ratv (espe
82 INFLECTION. [389
cially ra) are very rare, and TOO and row are generally used for all
genders (303). The regular plural nominatives rot and rat are
epic and Doric ; and the article has the usual dialectic forms of
the first and second declensions, as TOIO, TOIW, rdwv, rotcri, 1770-1,
TJTS. Homer has rarely TowrSeom or roto-Secri in the dative plural.
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
389. The personal pronouns are e^yco, I, av, thou, and
ov (genitive), of him, of her, of it. AUTO?, himself, is
used as a personal pronoun for him, her, it, etc. in the
oblique cases, but never in the nominative.
They are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. l-y *) I "v> thou avros avnf avrd
Gen. IJJLOV, |W>v <rov ov avrov avTrjs avrov
Dat. (ioi, jjioC <roC ol avro> avrrj avrol
Acc. u.e, u,c <r t avrov avT-nv avrd
N. A. v <r<U DUAL< aw aiJrd
G. D. vwv <r<f><pv avroiv avraiv avrotv
PLURAL.
Nom. t]|i6is, we vp.is, yow <r<j>is, ^ey avroC avraC avra
Gen. TJ|a.uiv v|xwv <r<|>(ov avrwv avrwv avrwv
Dat. ijfxiv ' vfiiv cr4>io-L avrots avrais avrois
Acc. TJ|J.as vjids o-4>as avrovs avrds avrd
390. N. The stems of the personal pronouns in the first person are
I/M- (cf. Latin me), vu- (cf. igos), and ij/jf-, 76 being of distinct forma-
tion ; in the second person, <re- (cf. te), atyw-, u/ie-, with <rtf distinct; m
the third person, <?- (cf. se) and <r0e-.
391. AVTOS in all cases may be an intensive adjective
pronoun, like ipse, self (989, 1).
392. For the uses of ov, ot, etc., see 987 ; 988. In Attic prose,
ot, o-<ets, o-<wv, o-^tb-t, o-<as, are the only common forms ; ov and I
never occur in ordinary language. The orators seldom use this
pronoun at all. The tragedians use chiefly o-<tV (not o-<t') and
o-</> (394).
393. 1. The following is the Homeric declension of eyw, e, arid
ov. The forms not in ( ) are used also by Herodotus. Those with
ajjijj.- and U/J./4- are Aeolic.
400J PRONOUNS. 83
SINGULAR.
Nom. eyti (ey&v) crv (rvvrj}
Gen. f^o, e/Aeu, /AeG <r<:o, treO (^) cu
(^/Aeto, tptdev} (<re?o, <r6ev} efo (6ev)
Dat. ^/Aof, /AO <ro/, TO/ (Tet>) o? (eot)
Ace. ^/A^, /A^ <r^ (2) (e^) /t/y
DUAL.
N. A. (j/Wt, J/(i) ((70U>i, (T0C6)
G. D. (v&lv) (<r0wi>, o-0wv)
Nom. if/Acts (5/A/Aes) uyaets (i5/A/Aes) o*0ets (not in Horn.)
Gen. i]fj.<dv (^rjfjieLuv) U/A^WI
Dat. ^AltV (#/A/Al) U/AiV
Ace.
2. Herodotus has also ox^ea in the neuter plural of the third
person, which is not found in Homer.
394. The tragedians use cnfrc. and <r<j>tv as personal pronouns,
boiji masculine and feminine. They sometimes use <r</>e' and rarely
cr<iv as singular.
395. 1. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a per-
sonal pronoun in all genders, and in both singular and plural.
2. The Ionic fuv is used in all genders, but only in the singular.
396. 1ST. The penult of ^/xoii/, rj/MV, i^/x-as, v/xtov, v/xtv, and V/JLO.S
is sometimes accented in poetry, when they are not emphatic, and
tv and as are shortened. Thus rjfjiwv, rj/jav, ^/xas, v/xtov, v/ui/, V/JLO.S.
If they are emphatic, they are sometimes written i//xiV, -^/xas, v/xtv,
v/xas. So o-<as is written for o-^>as.
397. N. Herodotus has avrecov in the feminine for avrcov (188,
5). The Ionic contracts 6 ouro? into covros or wtiros, and TO avro
into TCOVTO (7).
398. N. The Doric has iy&v t ^os, IIJLOVS, ^/*eus (for.^ou) ; ^lv for
t/jwl ; a//.^s, afttuv, d/j.iv, a/i^ (for i)/J.is, i]fj.G)v, TH&V, ^A^s); ru for cru; reO
(for r^o), r^os, reov, reous, reus (for (rou); rof, r/v (for <ro/); T^, ru (en-
clitic) for <rt ; v/i^s and btf (for V/AC?S and u/ias) ; IV for of ; ft for <r0^.
Pindar has only tydv, TV, rol, rtv.
399. AUTO? preceded by the article means the same
(idem) ; as o auro? ai^/o, tAe sawe ma/i. (See 989, 2.)
400. Avros is often united by crasis (44) with the article ; as
TavroO for TOV avrov ; ravrw for TW avraJ ; Tavrrj for T^ a^T^ (not
to be confounded with ravrrj from OVTOS). In the contracted form
the neuter singular has ravrd or ravroi/.
84
INFLECTION.
[401
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
401, The reflexive pronouns are tpavTov, tjAavrf)?, of
myself; o-eavrov, o-eavrfjs, of thyself; and eavrov, eavrrjs,
of himself^ herself, itself. They are thus declined :
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Masc.
Ipavrov
Fern.
SINGULAR.
Masc. Fern.
Masc. Fern.
Ifiavrr)
e|xavTo'v
(TCaVTO) O*aVTT]
o-eavTo'v
or
o-avTa>
o-avro'v
orauTTv
PLURAL.
Masc.
Fern.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Masc. Fern.
TJJXWV avrwv
vp.iv avrois vp.iv avrais
vjids avTovs vp.ds avrds
avrois IIM-IV a vrais
qpas avrovs i]p.as avrds
SINGULAR.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut.
Gen. cavrov cavrfjs eavrov avrov avTiijs avrov
Dat. e'avT<p avTt| tavrtS or avrco avrrj avrta
Ace. eavro'v eavrrjv eavro' avrov avTtjv avro'
PLURAL.
Gen. eavrwv eavraiv avTc3v avrwv avrcSv avrwv
Dat. cavrois eavrais avrois or avrois avrais avrois
Acc. cavrovs cavras cavra avrovs avras avroi
also
Gen. cr<jx3v avrow
Dat. o-<f>Co-iv avrois o-<j><riv avrats
Acc. o-<j>ds avrovs cr<f>ds avrds
402. The reflexives are compounded of the stems of the per-
sonal pronouns (390) and atrros. But in the plural the two
pronouns are declined separately in the first and second persons,
and often in the third.
403. N. In Homer the two pronouns are always separated in
all persons and numbers ; as crot avrw, ol avrw, e avriqv. Herodotus
Lias e/Ao>vTov, orewvrov, ewvrov.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
404. The reciprocal pronoun is d\\ij\cov, of one an-
other, used only in the oblique cases of the dual and
plural. It is thus declined :
409]
PRONOUNS.
85
DUAL. PLURAL.
Gen. dXXrjXoiv dXXrjXaiv dXXrjXoiv dXXrjXwv dXXrjXwv dXX-rjXwv
Dat. dXXrjXoiv dXXTjXeuv dXXrfXoiv dXXrjXois dXXTJXcus dXXrjXois
Ace. dXXrjXw dXXTJXd dXXrfXw dXXri'Xovs aXXifXas dXXt]Xa
405. The stem is dXX^Ao- (for dXA-aAXo-).
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
406. The possessive pronouns e/o?, my, 0-09, thy, rjfjie-
Te/oo9, our, vfjuerepos, your, <j(pere/909, their, and the poetic
09, his, are declined like adjectives in 09 (298).
407. Homer has dual possessives vo/trepos, of us two, o-^wfrepo?,
of you two ; also reo's (Doric and Aeolic, = tuus) for <ros, eos for os,
d/AO? for Ty/xtVepo?, ^o? for fyxerepos, (T<f>6<5 for cr^erepos. The Attic
poets sometimes have d/^os or dp,os for e/xos (often as our for w?/).
408. "Os not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed
by the genitive of avros, as 6 Trarrjp avrov, his father.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
409. The demonstrative pronouns are ot>T09 and o5e,
this, and etcelvos, that. They are thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom. OVTOS av-rrj
Gen. TOVTOV TavTt]s
Dat. TOVTW TavTfl
Ace. TOVTOV TavTrjv
N.A.
G. D.
Nom. 6'8c
Gen.
Dat.
Ace. To'vSe
TTJO-Sc
;. PLURAL.
TOVTO OVTOI avrai
TOVTOV TOVTWV TOVTWV
TOVTij) TOVTOIS TttVTttlS
TOVTO TOVTOVS TttVTaS
DUAL.
TOVTW TOVTW TOVTW
TOVTOIV TOVTOIV TOVTOIV
TttVTa
TOVTWV
TOVTOIS
TttVTtt
KCIVO
KcCvOV
SINGULAR.
To'Se
TOvSc
CKCIVOS CKCIVT]
CKCIVOV KIVT]S
To'Sc
DUAL.
N.A.
G. D. ToivSe
Nom. o'iSe
Gen. TtovSc
Dat. TourSc
Ace.
ToivSc
ai5e
T(3vSc
TaurSc
TourSc
TvtSi
ToivSe
PLURAL.
Toio-Se
KIVOV KLVTJV CK61VO
CKcCvw
tKeivoiv
CKCIVOI
CKeCvwv
6K61VOLS
CKcivai
KIVWV
KCVOIV
cKfiva
(Keiva
86 INFLECTION. [410
410. Feminine dual forms in d and atv are very rare (303).
411. 'E/<eti/os is regular except in the neuter Ktvo. Keo/os is
Ionic and poetic. "OSe is formed of the article 6 and -8e (141, 4).
For its accent, see 146.
412. N. The demonstratives, including some adverbs (436),
may be emphasized by adding i, before which a short vowel is
dropped. Thus ovroat, avrrjf, TOVTI ; 6St, 1781, roBt ; rovrovt, TOLVTI,
TOVTWVI. So TOcrovTOcrt (429), wSt, ovroxn. In comedy yt (rarely
Se) may precede this f, making yf or Si ; as rovroyf, rovroSt.
413. N. Herodotus has TOVTC'COV in the feminine for TOVTMV (cf.
397). Homer has TotaSeom or roto-Secrt for rotcrSe.
414. N. Other demonstratives will be found among the pro-
nominal adjectives (429).
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
415. 1. The interrogative pronoun T/?, rt, who? which?
what ? always takes the acute on the first syllable.
2. The indefinite pronoun rt?, TI, any one, some one,
is enclitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last
syllable.
416. 1. These pronouns are thus declined :
Interrogative. Indefinite.
SINGULAR.
Nom. T(S T( rls rl
Gen. TVOS, TOV TIVO'S, TOU
Dat. rivi, T<*> TIV, T<p
Ace. rCva ri nvd rl
DUAL.
N. A. T(V6 TIV6
G. D. rtvoiv TIVOIV
PLURAL.
Nom. rives rlva. TIV^S rivet
Gen. T(VV TIVWV
Dat. Tio-i Tio-C
Ace. rCvas rva rivas TIVCI
2. For the indefinite plural rtva there is a form arra (Ionic
acrcra) .
424]
PRONOUNS.
87
417. OVTIS and /xr/rts, poetic for ovSct's and //.^Sei's, no one, are
declined like TIS.
418. 1. The acute accent of rt's is never changed to the grave
(115, 2). The forms rts and TL of the indefinite pronoun very
rarely occur with the grave accent, as they are enclitic (141, 2).
2. The Ionic has Wo and rev for TOT), rew for rw, reW for rtVwv,
and reoun for TIOTI; also these same forms as enclitics, for TOV,
TO), etc.
419. "AAA.OS. other, is declined like avros (389), having
oAAo in the neuter singular.
420. 1. The indefinite Si/a, such a one, is sometimes
indeclinable, and is sometimes declined as follows :
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
(All Genders).
(Masculine').
Nom.
Sciva
SIVS
Gen.
Selves
Setvwv
Dat.
Scivi
Ace.
Sciva
Seivas
2. Aetra in all its forms always has the article.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
421. The relative pronoun 09, rf, o, who, is thus de-
clined ;
SINGULAR.
Nom. os t] &
Gen. ov Vjs 01
Dat. to tf cj?
Ace. 6v tiv o
DUAL.
N.A. & & Ji
G. D. olv olv olv
PLURAL.
Nom. of af
Gen. (ov ajv civ
Dat. ols als ols
Ace. ovs s &
422. Feminine dual forms a and alv are very rare and doubtful
(303).
423. N. For os used as a demonstrative, especially in Homer,
see 1023. For the article- (T- forms) as a relative in Homer and
Herodotus, see 935 and 939.
424. N. Homer has oov (oo) and 075 for ov and rjs.
88
INFLECTION.
[425
425. The indefinite relative o
whatever, is thus declined :
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
N. A.
G. D.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
OOTIS
OVTIVOS, OTOU
(OTIVI, OT<>
ovriva
WTIVC
otvrivoiv
tfo-rivos
-JJTIVI
TjVTiva
DUAL.
)TIV
otvrivoiv
PLURAL.
oiTivts aiTivcs
wvrivwv, OTOIV tovrivuv
olo-Ticri, OTOIS alo-rio-i
ovo-rivas ao-rivas
o , whoever
o TI
OVTIVOS, OTOV
WTIVI, OTO>
o TI 9
ftfTI.VC
olvrivoiv
ariva, arra
covnviov, orwv
olo-rio-t, OTOIS
ariva, arra
426. N. "Ocrrts is compounded of the relative os and the indefi-
nite rts, each part being declined separately. For the accent, see
146. The plural arra (Ionic acr<ra) for artva must not be con-
founded with arra (416, 2). "O TL is thus written (sometimes o, rt)
to distinguish it from OTL, that.
427. N. The shorter forms orov, OTO>, OTCDV, and 0x015, which
are genuine old Attic forms, are used by the tragedians to the
exclusion of OVTIVOS, etc.
428. 1. The following are the peculiar Homeric forms of
mm? :
8ns
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Gen. <Jrev, STTCO,
Dat. oTw
Acc. Sriva
PLURAL.
fioxra
OT0>V
OT60LO-L
orivas ao-cra
2. Herodotus has orcv, oreo), oreon/, oreoto-t, and awa (426).
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
429. There are many pronominal adjectives which corre-
spond to each other in form and meaning. The following
are the most important :
430]
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
89
INTERROGATIVE.
INDEFINITE.
DEMONSTRATIVE.
RELATIVE.
ir6<ros; how much?
TTOO-O'S, of some
(r6cros), Too~6<r5e,
6Vos, 6r6<ros, (as
how many?
quantity.
TOO"OUTOS, SO
much, as many)
quantus ?
much, tantus,
as, quantus.
so many.
TOKOS; of what
TTOI&S, of some
(TO?OS), Toi6o-5e,
Of OS, OTTOtOS, Of
kind? qusklis?
kind.
TOIOUTOS, such,
which kind,
talis.
(such) as, qualis.
TTTjX/Kos; how old?
(T^X^KOS), TTjXi-
^XfKOS, OTTT/XkoS,
how large?
/c6cr5e, rri\iKOv-
of which age or
TOS, so oZo* or so
size, (as old) as,
Zar^e.
(as large) as.
irbrepos; which of
7r6repos (or Trore-
^Tepos, the one or
oTrdrepos, which-
the two?
/6s), one of two
the other (of
ever of the two.
(rare).
two).
430. The pronouns -us, rts, etc. form a corresponding
series :
T/S; who? rh, anyone. 8de,ovTos,th
this one.
8s, 6Vrts, who,
which.
431. Tts may be added to otos, oo-os, OTTOO-OS, OTTOIOS, and oTrorepos,
to make them more indefinite; as OTTOIOS rts, of what kind soever.
432. 1. Ovv added to indefinite relatives gives them a purely
indefinite force; as ocmo-ow, OTIOW, any one, anything, soever, with
no relative character. So sometimes 8r; ; as OTOV orj.
2. N. Rarely oTrorepos (without ow) has the same meaning,
either of the two.
433. N. Homer doubles TT in many of these relative words; as
oTTTTo'repos, oTTTrotos. So in 6V7TWS, oTnr^Te, etc. (436). Herodotus has
OfcoVe/aos, oxoVos, 6xou, oKodev, 6/co're, etc., for OTro'repos, etc.
434. N. ToVos and rotos seldom occur in Attic prose, TTjXkos never.
To<roV5e, rotoVde, and Trj\iKo<rde are declined like roVos and rotos;
as rotroVSe, TotrrjSe, roffovde, etc., rotoVSe, roi^5e, roiovde. Tocrouros,
TotoCros, and TTjXiKoDros are declined like OUTOS (omitting the first T in
rotfrou, roOro, etc.), except that the neuter singular has o or ov ; as
rotoOros, TOiatfTT/, rotouro or TOLOVTOV ; gen. roiotirov, roiatiTys, etc.
435. There are also negative pronominal adjectives ; as OUTIS,
jM^Tts (poetic for ovSei's, /ut^Set's), ovSerepos, /x-^ScVcpos, neither of two.
(For adverbs, see 440.)
436. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other,
like the adjectives given above. Such are the following:
90
INFLECTION.
INTERROGATIVE.
INDEFINITE.
DEMONSTRATIVE.
RELATIVE.
TTOV; where?
irotf, somewhere.
(Jevda), v6dde,
ov, OTTOV, where.
evravda, ticei,
there.
Try; which way?
-irrj, some way,
(T^), rrjSe, ratirri,
rj, Siry, which way,
how?
somehow.
this way, thus.
as.
irot; whither?
Troi, to some
Ki<re, thither.
of, oTrot. whither.
place.
Trodev; whence?
Trodfv, from
(Itvdev), ivetvoe,
odev, oirodev,
some place.
tvrevOev, ticeWev,
whence.
thence.
irws; how?
it 6s, in some way,
(rtis),(ws), J5e,
us, STTWS, in which
somehow.
ovrws, thus.
way, as.
v ore; when?
Tror4, at some
rare, then.
6Ye, OTro're, when.
time.
TryvlKa; at what
(r^yffca), TTjvtKd-
rjvlica., &Trr)vti<a, at
time?
5e, TyviKCLvra,
which time,
at that time.
when.
437. The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (141, 2).
438. Forms which seldom or never occur in Attic prose are
in ( ). "Ev0a and tvOev are relatives in prose, where, whence ; as
demonstratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like ZvOa
Kal v6a, here and there, evOev KOL tvOtv, on both sides. For <os, thus,
in Attic prose, see 138, 3. Tws (from TO-), like OVTWS (from OVTOS),
thus, is poetic.
439. 1. The poets have icet0i, KtWev, KCIO- for CKCI, fKtWev, and
Ket<re, like KCII/OS for CKCU/OS (411).
2. Herodotus has evOavTa, ev^evrcv for wravQa, ei/rcv^ev.
3. There are various poetic adverbs ; as TroQi, -jroOi, oOi. (for TTOV,
TTOV, ov), ToOi, there, roOtv, thence.
440. There are negative adverbs of place, manner, etc.; as
ov&x/xov, p.r]Oa/jLov, nowhere, ovSa/Ar/, a^Sa/XTj", in no way,
in no manner. (See 435.)
VEKBS.
441. The Greek verb has three voices, the active,
middle, and passive.
442. 1. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject
performs an action upon himself or for his own benefit (1242), but
sometimes it is not distinguished from the active voice in meaning.
460] VERBS. 91
2. The passive differs from the middle in form in only two
tenses, the future and the aorist.
443. Deponent verbs are those which have no active
voice, but are used in the middle (or the middle and
passive) forms with an active sense.
444. IS". Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the
middle form. A few, which have an aorist (sometimes a future)
of the passive form, are called passive deponents ; while the others
are called middle deponents.
445. There are four moods (properly so called), the
indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. To
these are added, in the conjugation of the verb, the
infinitive, and participles of the chief tenses. The
verbal adjectives in TO? and reo? have many points of
likeness to participles (see 776).
446. The four proper moods, as opposed to the infinitive, are
called Jinite moods. The subjunctive, optative, imperative, and
infinitive, as opposed to the indicative, are called dependent moods.
447. There are seven tenses, the present, imperfect,
future, aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect.
The imperfect and pluperfect are found only in the
indicative. The future and future perfect are wanting
in the subjunctive and imperative. The future perfect
belongs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes
has the meaning of the active or middle.
448. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect
indicative are called primary (or principal) tenses ; the
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called
secondary (or historical) tenses.
449. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in
all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the
second future (passive). These tenses are generally of more
simple formation than the first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, etc.
Few verbs have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the
two forms generally differ in meaning (for example, by the first
being transitive, the second intransitive), but not always.
450. The aorist corresponds generally to the indefinite or hi*
92 INFLECTION. [451
torical perfect in Latin, and the perfect to the English perfect or
the definite perfect in Latin.
451. N. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the full
paradigm of the regular verb must include parts of three different
verbs. See 470.
452. There are three numbers, as in nouns, the singu-
lar, dual, and plural.
453. In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and
optative, there are three persons in each number, the
first, second, and third ; in each tense of the imperative
there are two, the second and third.
454. N. The first person dual is the same as the first person
plural, except in a very few poetic forms (556. 2). This person is
therefore omitted in the paradigms.
TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS.
455. The tenses are divided into nine classes or tense
systems, 'each with its own tense stem.
456. The tense systems are the following :
SYSTEMS. TENSES.
1. Present, including present and imperfect.
n. Future, future active and middle.
in. First-aorist, " first a^ist active and middle.
iv. Second-aorist, " second aorist active and middle.
v. First-perfect, " first perfect and pluperfect active.
vi. Second-perfect, " second perfect and pluperfect active.
vn. Perfect-middle, " perfect and pluperfect middle and
future perfect.
vin. First-passive, " first aorist and future passive.
ix. Second-passive, " second aorist and future passive.
457. 1. The last five tense stems are further modified to form
special stems for the two pluperfects, the future perfect, and the
two passive futures.
2. As few verbs have both the first and the second forms of any
tense (449), most verbs have only six tense stems, and many have
even less.
458. The various tense stems are almost always formed
from one fundamental stem, called the verb stem. These
formations will be explained in 568-622.
463] TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS. 93
459. Before learning the paradigms, it is important to
distinguish between verbs in which the verb stem appears
without change in all the tense systems, and those in which
it is modified more or less in different systems (154).
Thus in Aeyo>, speak, the verb stem Aey- is foun 1 in Aeoi
(Aey-crco), cAeo, A.e-Aeyyuu, G-X^-Or^v (71), and all other forms.
But in <j>aw<o, show, the verb stem <j>av- is seen pure in the second
aorist l-cjxiv-yv and kindred tenses, and in the futures <avw and
<avov//.oi; while elsewhere it appears modified, as in present <jWv-<D,
first aorist <jyqv-aL, second perfect vc<fnjru. In AeiV-w the stem
Aewr- appears in all forms except in the second-aorist system
(l-Awr-ov, -Awr-o/>M7i>) and the second-perfect system (Ae-Aowr-a).
460. Verb stems are called vowel stems or consonant
stems, and the latter are called mute stems (including labial,
palatal, and lingual stems) or liquid stems, according to
their final letter. Thus we may name the stems of <iAeo)
(<iAe-), Aewrw (Aew-, AMT-),
irAe'ica) (irAac-), <evya> ($ry-,
($av-), oreAAai (orcA-).
461. A verb which has a vowel verb stem is called a pure verb;
and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem is called a mute or
a liquid verb.
462. 1. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the first
person singular of the present, future, first aorist, and (first
or second) perfect, indicative active; the perfect middle,
and the (first or second) aorist passive; with the second
aorist (active or middle) when it occurs. These generally
represent all the tense systems which the verb uses. E.g.
Avo), Xucrci), eXvera, AeAvKct, \e\vfjuu, I\v0rjv (471).
AccVco (\ettr-, AITT-), Aettyw, A&owra, A.eAa//,fuu, eAee^^i/, eAiTrov.
OatW (<av), <f>av<a, ityrjva, ire^ayxa (2 pf. Tre'^va), 7r(<a(7AUU,
I<f>dv0r)v (and tydvqv).
, do, irpa<0, 7rpaa, 2 perf. TrcVpa^a and
SWAAw (crrcA-), wnrf, o-TcAS, lo-TAa, lo-raAfca, eo-raAfiai, loraXrp.
2. If a verb has no future active, the future middle may be given
the principal parts; as CTKWTTTCO, /eer,
463. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the pres-
ent, future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. l.gf,
94 INFLECTION. [464
(*Hyeo/xai) ^yov/wxt, lead, Tyyiyo'O/xat, rjy-qcrdfJ^v, ^'y^/tat,
(in compos.).
BovAo/xai, MJI'S^, povXyo-ofJUJLi, j3ef3ov\r)[JLaL, ejSovXiqOrjv.
lYyvo/xai (yev-), become, yev^o-o/xat, yeyeV^/xai, eyej/o/^v.
(A&eo/uai) aioovfJiM, respect, aiSeoro/xat, rj8t(T[Juii, r/Seaflrv.
*Epyao/Aai, work, cpyao-o/xat, elpya(rdfJLr)v, eipyaa/uu,
CONJUGATION.
464. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices, moods,
tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order.
465. These parts of the verb are formed as follows :
1. By modifying the verb stem itself to form the differ-
ent tense stems. (See 568-622 ; 660-717.)
2. By affixing certain syllables called endings to the
tense Stem ; as in A.eyo-/x.ev, Aeye-re, Aeye-rat, Aeyo-/Ae#a, A,yo-
KTOI, Aee-rai, Ae^-o-fc. (See 551-554.)
3. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pre-
fixing c to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant),
or lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short
vowel) j as in l-Aeyo-v, e-Aee ? -<f>rjva-To; and in TJKOVO-V and
^KOVO-O, imperfect and aorist of d/cou'eo, hear. This prefix or
lengthening is confined to the indicative.
4. A prefix, seen in A.e- of \t\vKa and AeA/x/x,ai, in ire- of
ircfao-fjuu, and c of lo-roA/xat (487, 1), for which a lengthening
of the initial vowel is found in ^AAay/xat (dAAay-) from
oAAaercra> (487, 2), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and
remains in all the moods and in the participle.
466. These prefixes and lengthenings, called augment (3) and
reduplication (4), are explained in 510-550.
467. There are two principal forms of conjugation of
Greek verbs, that of verbs in co and that of verbs in /M.
468. Verbs in /u form a small class, compared with those in w, and
are distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the present
and second-aorist systems, generally agreeing with verbs in CD in the
jther systems.
CONJUGATION OP VERBS IN fl.
469. The following synopses (474-478) include
I. All the tenses of Ai5o> (A?-), loose, representing tense
systems I., II., III., V., VII., VIII.
473] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
II. All the tenses of AaVo) (Aewr-, AITT-), leave; the second
perfect and pluperfect active and the second aorist active
and middle, representing tense systems IV. and VI., being
in heavy-faced type.
III. All the tenses of <aiVw (<av-), show; the future and
aorist active and middle (liquid form) and the second
aorist and second future passive, representing tense systems
II., III., and IX., being in heavy-faced type.
470. The full synopsis of Avo>, with the forms in heavier type
in the synopses of AetTrto and <aiVo>, will thus show the full conju-
gation of the verb in to, with the nine tense systems ; and all these
forms are inflected in 480-482. For the peculiar inflection of the
perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs with consonant
stems, see 486 and 487.
471. N. Aixo in the present and imperfect generally has v in
Attic poetry and v in Homer; in other tenses, it has v in the
future and aorist active and middle and the future perfect, else-
where v.
472. The paradigms include the perfect imperative active, although
it is hardly possible that this tense can actually have been formed in
any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, in a few verbs (748), it is
given here, to complete the illustration of the forms. For the rare
perfect subjunctive and optative active, see 720 and 731.
473. Each tense of Avo> is translated in the synopsis of 474,
except rare untranslatable forms like the future perfect infinitive
and participle, and the tenses of the subjunctive arid optative.
The meaning of these last cannot be fully understood until the
constructions are explained in the Syntax. But the following
examples will make them clearer than any possible translation of
the forms, some of which (e.g. the future optative) cannot be used
in independent sentences.
Avw/xev (or Avo-w/xev) avrov, let us loose him; JJUYJ Avo^s avrov, do
not loose him. Eav Auo> (or Avcrto) avrov, ^atp^orei, if I (shall) loose
him, he will rejoice. ^Ep^o/xat, Iva avrov Avoo (or Auo-a>), I am coming
that 1 may loose him. Ei'0e Avot/u (or Avo-cu/u) avrov, that I may
loose him. Ei Avoi/xt (or Avcrat/xt) avrov, \atpoL av, if I should loose
him, he would rejoice. T HA0ov Iva avrov Avoi/u (or Avo-at/xt), / came
that 1 might loose him. EITTOI/ on avrov Avoi/u, / said that I was
loosing him ; eiTrov 6Vi avrov Xvo-aifjLi, I said that I had loosed him ;
ei7rov on avrov Avcrot/xt, / said that 1 would loose him. For the
difference between the present and aorist in these moods, see 127-,
1 j for the perfect, see 1273.
INFLECTION.
SYNOPSIS
I. PRESENT SYSTEM.
II. FUTURE SYSTEM.
III. FIRST-AORIST SYS1
UTIVE
Present & Imperfect
Future
1 Aorist
MCE.
Active.
Active.
Active.
T J-
Xvw / loose or am loosing
XT)O-O> I shall loose
inuic.
eXiov I was loosing
cXva-a / loosed
Subj.
Xfa
Xtkrw
Opt.
X&>k|U
X&rotfu
Xvo-a^i
Imper.
Xvc Zoose
Xvo-ov loose
Infin.
Xeiv to loose
Xvo-eiv to be about to
Xv<rai to loose or to h
loose
loosed.
Part.
Xtfwv loosing
Xwrcov about to loose
Xv<rds having loosed
IDDLE
Present & Imperfect
Future
1 Aorist
MCE.
Middle.
Middle.
Middle.
Xflojiai / Zoose (for my-
Xccrofxat / shall loose
Tnrlin
self)^
(for myself)
inaic.
IXvofiTjv I was loos-
Xvo-d|jtT)v I loosed (
ing (for myself)
myself).
Subj.
X&i>|ACU
Xvo-wjiai
Opt.
XvOLfIT)V
Xv<ro(|iT)v
XvoraCjJLTjv
Imper.
Xvov Zoose (for thyself)
XOo-ai Zoose (for thys
Infin.
Xv(r0ai to loose (for
X^a-ecrOai to be about to
X^<rao-0ai to loose o
one's self)
loose (for one's self)
have loosed (for o
self)
Part.
Xv6(Xvos loosing (for
Xvo-6|ivos about to loose
Xvo-d|xevos having loc
one's self)
(for one's self)
(for one's self)
VIII. FIRST-PASSIVE SYSTEM.
SSIVE
)ICE.
Pres. & Imperf. Passive.
1 Future Passive.
1 Aorist Passive.
Indie.
Xvop.cu 7am J (being)
eXv6|XT]v / was \ loosed
Xv0^<ronai I shall be
loosed
Xv0T]v I was loosed
Subj.
Xv0 (for \vdtdj)
Opt.
etc.
Xu0T]<roC}u]v
Xv0(t]V
tmper.
with same
Xt0t]Tt be loosed
Infin.
forms as the
Xv0^<To-0ai to be about
to be loosed
XvOrivai to be looseo
to have been loosei
Part.
Middle
Xv0t]o-6|xvos about to be
Xv0is having been
loosed
loosed
VERBAL ADJECTIVES : Xt)T s th <* ma be l OSed ''
that must be loosed
475]
\{j(o (\D-), loose.
SYNOPSIS OF
V. FIRST-PERFECT SYSTEM.
VII. PERFECT-MIDDLE SYSTEM.
1 Perfect & Pluperfect
Active.
I have loosed
/ /wd loosed
XcXuKb) Or XeXuKUS <>
XcXi>Koi|u or XcXvKws etriv
[XIXvKe] (472)
XeXuKvai o Aave loosed
X\UKWS having loosed
Perfect & Pluperfect
Middle.
Xe\vp.ai / /iaye loosed {for myself}
/iad Zoosed (/or myself)
W
\c\vo-o (750)
XeXva-Oai to ftave loosed {for one's
having loosed (for one's
Per/, cfc Pluperf. Passive.
Xe\u}jLcu 7 /ave f been
\ loosed
etc.
with same
forms as the
Middle
Future Perfect Pas
XeXuo-oucu / s
been loosed
X.\vcroi|rqv
(1283)
(1284)
475. The middle of Xvoo commonly means to release for one's
self, or to release some one belonging to one's self, hence to ransom
(a captive) or to deliver (one's friends from danger). See 1242,3.
INFLECTION.
476. SYNOPSIS OF \e7ra> (\ITT-, XtTT-), leave.
TENSE SYSTEM: I.
ACTIVE
VOICE.
Indie.
Subj.
Opt
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
MIDDLE
VOICE.
Indie.
Subj.
Opt.
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
PASSIVE
VOICE.
Indie.
Subj.
Opt.
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
Pres. & Impf.
Active.
\elirw
\elirotfu
Xeiire
\elireiv
Pres. & Impf.
Middle.
\elirufMt,
\earolfif] v
\elirov
\elireff0ai
\eiir6fjkevos
Pres. & Impf.
Passive.
same forms
as the
Middle
ii.
Future
Active.
Future
Middle.
\efyecr0ai
IV.
2 Aorist
Active.
cXiirov
XCirw
XClTi
Xiiwlv
XllTWV
2 Aorist
Middle.
Xiirov
XiireVGat
VIII.
1 Put, Pass.
. Pass.
w (for
VI.
2 Per/. < PZtp.
^ci
Xt'Xoiira
XeXotirw or
XeXowr&s
XeXotiroi
or
[XAoi-ire]
XeXoiirlvai
XeXours
vn.
Perf.&Plup.Mid.
Future
Pr/cc.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES: Xenrro's,
477. 1. The active of Aeurco in the various tenses means 7 /a (01
am leaving), I left (or was leaving), I shall leave, etc. The second perfect
means / have left, or / have failed or am wanting. The first aorist lAei^o
is not in good use.
2. The middle of Xero> means properly to remain (leave one's self), in
which sense it differs little (or not at all) from the passive. But the second
aorist IKnroprjv often means 1 left for myself {e.g. a memorial or monument) ;
so the present and future middle in composition. ^EXarofjirjv in Homei
sometimes means / was left behind or was inferior, like the passive.
3. The passive of XetVo) is used in all tenses, with the meanings / am
left, 1 was left, 1 have been left, 1 had been left, I shall have been left, I was
left, I shall be left. It also means 1 am inferior (left behind).
479]
SYNOPSIS OF
,_, w SH as
I 8 | |l
P.f-| 2 1
$%
8- -e- -e- -e- - - SH
S S, 2, 2 S, , **
?
py O c
&| s- 1
f P B . p H
y 2 3
O M
&
-e- -e-
P P P to
t!
1. 1
A
I
r-i*i ^ ^
=i ^^ ^ ^ ^ K!
<D<n=1si<t>:i<T, <TK T1
Q- J- J^ S & m "8- - L .
^ eg
^ 2'
"^ S
e ?
1 Future Passive
wanting
479. 1. The first perfect 7re<ay/ca means T have shown; the second
perfect Trtyrjva. means / have appeared.
2. The passive of <cuVa> means properly to be shown or made evident;
the middle, to appear (show one's self). The second future passive
<av7^cro/xai, 1 shall appear or be shown, does not differ in sense from
<ai/ou/Aai ; but tcfxivOyv is generally passive, / was shown, while e(f>dvr)v
is 1 appeared. The aorist middle f^Tjvd/jLrjv means / showed ; the simple
form is rare and poetic ; but aTr-e^rjvd^v, I declared, is common.
100
INFLECTION.
[480
480.
INDICATIVE.
,ji:
IP,.
1. ACTIVE VOICE OF Xvw.
Present. Imperfect.
4'Xvov
rxvt*
4'Xvc
IXverov
<-3. X&i
D f 2. XVCTOV
'\3. X&TOV ,
{1. XvO|JL6V
2. X*T
3. X^ovo-i
SUBJUNCTIVE
. rl. X4.
^ 3. Xvjj
D -{ 2 S ; xtt
P. ] 2. XvT]T
U. X^oxri
OPTATIVE.
{1. Xvoijii
2. Xvois
3. Xvoi
D f 2. XVOITOV
' 1 3. XvotTTjv
{1. XvOlJiV
2. Xvoirc
3. Xoicv
IMPERATIVE.
s.{g; ^
D f 2. XVCTOV
' 1 3. XV^TWV
{2. XV6T6
3. XVOVTWV or
Xve'rojo-av
INFINITIVE.
\V61V
PARTICIPMS.
Xvwv, X^ov<ra
Xvov (335)
4XvO|XV
XvT6
cXvov
Future.
XtKTO,
Xvcrcis
Xv(Tl
Xv(TTOV
Xv<TTOV
Xv(TO|lCV
Xv(TCT6
Xvo-ovo-b
Xvo-ots
Xvcroi
Xvo-oCrrjv
Xv(TOl|iV
Xv<roiT
Xvaoicv
X<rwv, Xvcrovoro
XCn-o* (335)
480]
ACTIVE VOICE OF Xvw.
101
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
. j 2!
Is.
OPTATIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
1 Aorist.
1 Perfect.
1 Pluperfect.
e'Xvo-a
X'XVKCL
IXcXvKT)
tXva-as
Xc'XvKas
eXcXvKTis
cXvo-6
Xt'XvK
(XeXvKci
eXvo-arov
XeXvicarov
IXeXvKcrov
eXvo-dnjv
XeXvKarov
4XXVKTT]V
cXvo-apcv
XeXvKafiev
4XcXvKC(iev
cXvcrarc
XcXvKarc
eXeXvKT
e'Xvo-av
XeXvKacri
cXeXvKetrav
(See 683, 2)
X\VKT)S
(720)
Xv<TT]TOV
XvOTJTOV
Xv(TCO|JtV
Xv<rw<rt
XeXvKTJTOV
XcXvKT]TOV
XcXvKWfJICV
XcXtlKT]T
XcXvKoxri
X^craifii
Xvcrais, Xvo-tias XcXvKOis
Xtorai, Xxicreit XcXvKOi
Xiicrairov XeXvKOirov
(733)
Xvo-aifiev XcXvKOk|icv
Xvo-airc XeXvKoire
Xvcraiev, Xv<Tiav XcXvKOicv
Xv<rov
Xvcrdrci)
X&rarov
Xva-drcov
(472)
XcXviclru
XvcrdvTwv or
Xvo-droxrav
Xvo-ai
XvtrdS) Xvaroura,
Xv<rav (335)
XcXvKcri
XcXvKcroxrav]
XcXvK^vai
XeXvKws, XcXtiicvta,
(335)
102
INFLECTION.
f480
2. MIDDLE VOICE OF Xvw.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
fl.
Ms
Present.
Xvoncu
Xvei. XVTJ
Xverai
Imperfect. Future
6\v6^Li\v Xvo-ojiai
IXvov Xvtrt, XVO-TJ
eXvcro Xvo-erai
-(I:
XV(T00V
Xv(T00V
eXvo~0ov XvcrecrSov
cXv&r0T]v XvcrecrOov
p.{i
1 3,
Xvovrai
iXvo'|i.e0a Xv<ro'(xe6a
cXv6(T0 Xv(TC(r0
tXvovro Xvo-ovrai
,{i
u
x^"
MS
Xvt)CT00V
P. {2!
Xvw(ji0a
XvT](T0
Xvtovrai
a{i
is.
XvOL|JLT|V
X^oio
XvOlTO
XvcroijA-riv
Xvo-oio
XCO-OITO
MS
Xvoio-0ov
XvoC(T0T]V
Xv(TOl<T00V
Xt5(TOlO-0TlV
1 3.
Xvoip.e0a
XvOl(T0
XVOIVTO
Xvo-oio-Oc
XlJCTOlVTO
IMPERATIVE.
X^ov
D.
,{!:
Xuo-6a)<rav
INFINITIVE.
Xve<r0ai
Xvo-ecrOat
PARTICIPLE,
Xvo'p.evos, XvOfAevT],
XVO>VOV (301)
-ov (301)
480
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
OPTATIVE.
IMPERATIVE,
INFINITIVE.
IV\ irnciPLE.
MIDDLE VOICE OF X6w.
103
1 ^OriVtf.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
s.|
1.
2.
i^r""
XcXvaai
IXe'Xvo-o
1
3.
cXvo-aro
XeXvrai
eXeXvro
)
2.
IXv<ra<r0ov
Xe'Xv<r0ov
IXeXvo-Oov
D. <
3.
4Xva-a<r0i]V
XcXvo-Oov
4XXv<T0T]V
(
1.
eX{j(rd|j.0a
XeXvjjieOa
IXcXv|M9a
p -
2.
4Xtio-aor0
Xe'Xvo-06
eXeXvcr0
t
3.
eXvo-avTO
XeXvvrai
IXeXvvro
,j
1.
2.
3.
Xvcrcojiai
Xvori]Tai
XcXvpe'vos -ps
XeXv|ievos g
I
2.
Xv(TT](r00V
XeXvjicvco T|TOV
13. x
i
.3.
XvcrrjcrOov
XeXvp.evb) TITOV
H
'1.
2.
Xv<rw(j.0a
XeXvfxevoi top.cv
XcXvfjievoi T]T6
i
^3.
Xvo-covrai
XcXvfJievoi ciicrt
i
1.
Xvcra((a.T)v
XeXvfxe'vos efr]V
s ^
2.
Xvcraio
XeXv|xvos cC-qs
^3.
Xvo-airo
XeXvjievos el't]
2.
Xtjo-ai(r0ov
XeXvfievco ctrov
D.
3.
XvVa^v
or tt]Tov
Or iTJTT]V
1.
Xv<raC|jL60a
XeXv(JiVOL tl|JLV
or ei!T]fj.6v
P.
2.
Xvorai(r0
XeXvfjicvoi etre
Or ti]T6
3.
Xti<rcuvTO
XeXup-tvoL cfcv
I
or LT]crav
S. -
f2.
Xvcrat
XXvo-o (750)
Is.
Xii<rd<r0w
XeXvVOw (749)
f2.
Xvo-ao-0ov
X'Xv<T00V
1 3.
Xv<rdo-0wv
XcXvVOcov
(2.
Xv<ra<r0e
Xc'Xvo-06
P.-
3.
Xv<rour0(ov or
XtXv'<r0a>v or
I
Xvcrcio-0cacrav
XeXva-Ooxrav
Xv<ra<r0at
XeXv<T0ai
Xvo-apevos, -t],
XXl)p.VOS, -T],
104
INFLECTION.
[480
3. PASSIVE VOICE OF Xtfw.
^wre Perfect.
1 Aorist.
1 Future.
INDICATIVE.
^j
S.J2.'
u.
XcXv<ro|iai
XeXv<ri, XcXv<TQ
XcXvo-crai
XcXvo-co-Oov
XeXv<re<r0ov
eXv'0T)v
cXv'0i]s
IXv'01)
Xv'0T]TOV
Xv0TJO-0|i<U
Xu0t]'o-i, XuOtja
Xv0TJ<rTai
XvOrio-ccrOov
Xv0TJOr(T00V
p 'fi
XeXva-60-06
XeXvcrovrai
4Xv0T|T
Xv0T](ror0e
Xv0TJ<rovrai
SUBJUNCTIVE
rl.
S.J2.
Xv0c3
Mi
f 1 -
P. 2.
1 3.
Xv01]TOV
XV0TJTOV
XuBwuev
XV0TJTC
OPTATIVE.
8. {2!
u.
XcXv<ro(|lT]V
XcXvo-oiro
XvOcCr^v
Xv0Ti<ro(|i.i]V
Xu0i]<roio
2.
D ' r
XcXvo-oio-Oov
XcXv(ro(r0T]V
XcXv(roi(ic0a
XvOetTov or
Xv0iT)TOV
Xv0tTT]v or
X0 ITJTTJV
Xv0i|icv or
Xv0T]'<roi<r0ov
Xu0T]<TOC<T0T]V
Xv0T](ToC|JLC0a
p.. 2 -
XcXvo-oi<r0
Xv0iT6 or
X^Wrfc
3.
X\VIO-OIVTO
XvOctcv or
Xv0c(T)<rav
Xv0T]<roiVTO
IMPERATIVE.
g /2.
XV0TJTI
D -(i:
Xv0T]TM
XvOrjTov
INFINITIVE.
f 2 -
P.J3.
XcX^a-ca-Oai
XvOi^rc
Xu0VTv or
XvOtfraxrav
PARTICIPLE.
XcXv<ro|icvos,
-fj, -ov (301)
XvOcCs, XvOcicra,
XvO^v (335)
XvOtjcrofJLcvos,
-T,, -ov (301)
481] SECOND AORIST, PERFECT, ETC. OF Aefcrw. 105
481. SECOND AORIST (ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) AND SECOND PERFECT
AND PLUPERFECT OF
2 .4om
2 ^lom
2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect.
Active.
Middle.
INDICATIVE.
rl.
4'Xwrov
IXiiro'ixriv
XeXoi-rra
IXtXoClTT]
S. 2.
e'Xkires
IXCirov
XeXoiiras
iXeXoi'irtis
u.
4'Xl1T
eXirTO
Xt'Xonre
IXeXoiirci
D f2.
eXtireTOV
eXiireo-Gov
XeXoiirarov
4XXoirTov
'\3.
eXiirenjv
Xlir0-0TlV
XeXotiraTOV
XtXonrTT]v
fl-
cXCiro|iV
eXLTTO|X0a
XeXoiirafxev
eXeXoL-rrefiev
P. 2.
XClTT
eXiTreo-06
XcXoCirare
eXcXoCircTE
u.
e'Xtirov
cXtirovTO
XeXoiirdcri
cXcXotTTCcrav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
fl.
Xi-n-co
Xira>nai
XeXoiira)
(See 683, 2)
8. 2
Xiirgs
Xirg
XeXoCirflS
U.
Xirxj
XirT]Tat
XeXoC-iqi
D./ 2 '
XCin]Tov
XlirK]<T00V
Xt\oiirr\TOV
\3.
X(irr|TOV
Xiin]<r0ov
XtXoiirTjTov
,{i
U.
X(m]T6
XCiroxri
Xiirc0|ic0a
Xirii<r0
XCircovrai.
XeXoiir axri
OPTATIVE.
fl.
XCiroi|i,i
Xiiroi(j.T]V
XeXoCiroifJii
S. 2.
XC-rrois
Xiiroio
XcXoCirois
U.
Xiiroi
XiroiTO
XcXoiiroi
r / 2 -
XCiroiTov
XCiroi(r0ov
XeXoCiroiTov
-L) <
1 3.
XiiroCTTjv
XlirOlT0T]V
XeXoiiroiTTjv
r 1 -
XCiroip.cv
Xi7roi[xe0a
XcXoiroi)XV
P. 2.
XCiroire
X(iroio-0
XeXoCiroire
Is.
XCiroiev
Xtiroivro
XtXoiTTOLtV
IMPERATIVE.
s/ 2 -
XlT
Xiirov
Xe'Xonr
1 3.
XlTT^TW
Xnr<r0a>
XeXonrerco
D.{ 2 '
XlT6TOV
X lire o-0o v
XcXoCireTov
1 3.
XnrCTwv
Xl1TOr00)V
XeXotir^Twv
2.
Xl1TT
Xir<r0
XcXoCirerc
P. 8 -
XtlTOVTWV
Xnro-0o)V or
XXoiir^Tv
or Xiir^-
Xiireo-Oaxrav
Two-av
INFINITIVE.
Xiiretv
Xiirco-eai
XcXoiir^va^
PARTICIPLE.
XlTTWV,
XiiroVevos,
XeXoLirws,
Xiirovora, -t^, -ov XeXoiirvia,
Xiirov (301) XeXoiiro's
f335) (335)
106
INFLECTION.
[482
482. FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (LIQUID
FORMS) AND SECOND AORIST AND SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE OF <J>aCv.
Future Active. 1 Future Middled I Aorist Active.
INDICATIVE. f 1.
<}>ava>
<(>avov}j.ai
(f>T]Va
8. j 2.
4>aveis
<(>avi, <j>avg
<j>T)vas
u.
4>avei
4>avirai
?|>T,V6
D / 2 *
<{>avetTov
<J>aveio-0ov
<f>^varov
'13.
4>aVUTOV
<|>avcio-6ov
<j>T]vdTT]l>
f 1 '
<j>avovfi,v
4>avovifi0a
<{>^Va(lV
P. 2.
<j>aviT6
4>avio-0e
l^varc
Is.
4>avoi)o-t
4>avovvTai
4 T i vav
SUBJUNCTIVE. ( 1.
<HV
1 3.
jsr
D 't.
^^TOV
p.{i
JSr
1 3.
4>T)va>cri
OPTATIVE. f 1.
<j>avoCr]v or <|>avoi|ii
<|>avoCfXT)v
4>TJVCUfU
S. 2.
(}>avoiT|s or cf)avos
4>avoio <|)i
]vais or 4>T)veia
u.
4>avoLT| or 4>avot
<(>avotTO <|)
qvat or <j>T]VL
D -f 2 '
<j>avoirov
<{>avoi<r0ov
4>T]vai.TOv
' 1 3.
<j>avorT]v
<j>avoC(T0T|v
^>T)vaCrr)v
,{i
(j)aVOLT
4>avoicr0e
<|>T|vak}i.ev
u.
<{>avoicv
4>avoivro <|)i
]vaicv or <j>T|Vtc
IMPERATIVE, g /2.
|>fjvov
MS
<j)TjvaTOv
f 2 '
p-ja.
<J>T]vdvTft)v or
<J>T]vaTa)(rc
INFINITIVE.
<f>aviv
<f>avio-0ai
<|>fivai
PARTICIPLE.
4>avwv, 4>avovo-a,
<f>aVOV|AVOS,
<)>V|vds, (Hvdo-c
c}>avoi)v (340)
-^,^(301)
<j>fivav (335)
1 The uncontracted futures,
inflected like 0i\^w and 0iX6>/icu (492)
and 0o^o/wti (478; 483), are
482]
FUTURES AND AORISTS OF
107
INDICATIVE.
lAor.Mid.
{1. tytivdpiv
2. <j>TlVa)
3.
3. <j>Tjvdo-0T]v
SUBJUNCTIVE. fl. <j>T]'va>|iai
S. i 2. <j>TJvg
-3.
OPTATIVE.
{
-p I 2. <f>TJVT)<r0ov
I 3. <{>T]VTi<r0ov
fl. <H
P.] 2. <M
U. 4>rj
{! ^T
2. <K
O A '
o. mn'
3. 4>T>'VCOVTCU
S
D.
P.
2. 4>T]'vai(r0ov
3,
1.
2. <|>-nvaicr0c
IMPERATIVE, g /2. <|>V}vai
^ 3. <f>t]vcu
-p |2. <|>Tfvao-0ov
,
4>T]'vaa-06
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
P'-j 3. <f>T|vdo-0a>v or
<f>Tjvcur0(oo-av
fvaa-0ai
-ov (301)
2 Aor. Pass. 2 Put. Pass.
!<|>avT]v ^avTJo-ojjLai
i<t>dvT]s <j>avTJo-i, 4>avTJo-j
6<j>aVT] <j>aVTJ(TTai
4>aVTlTOV 4>aVTf<T(T00V
<j>avTJTT]v <J>avT]V<r0ov
<j>dvT)<rav
4>avw
<|>avf|S
4>ttVTJT
(j>av(5<ri
<j>avCii
<j>avctrov or
<J>avif<roio
4>avTf<roiTO
<j>avCrr)v or <|>av^o-oCa-0T]v
<j>aVlT]TTlV
4>avi|Xv or
(j)aVLT|p.V
<f>avciT6 or
4>avcicv or c^avifo-OLvro
<f>aviT](rav
4>avT]Tco
<j>dvt]TOV
^avTJTcav
<fra,vvrci)v or
<{>avTfTtt<rav
4>avrjvai 4>avTfo-o-0ai
4>aveis, <f>avr|<ro'p.vos,
4>avLcra, -t|, -ov (301)
<bavv (335)
108 INFLECTION. [483
483. The uncontracted forms of the future active and middle
of </>atV<o (478) and of other liquid futures are not Attic, but are
found in Homer and Herodotus. So with some of the uncon-
tracted forms of the aorist subjunctive passive in eco (474).
484. The tenses of AetTrw and <aiW which are not inflected
above follow the corresponding tenses of Avo> ; except the perfect
and pluperfect middle, for which see 486. AeAet^-juat is inflected
like TeV/ot/A-/xai (487, 1), and 7rc'<aor-/zai is inflected in 487, 2.
485. Some of the dissyllabic forms of Avo> do not show the
accent so well as polysyllabic forms, e.g. these of KtoAvw, hinder :
Pres. Imper. Act. KoiAve, KwAverto, KwArcre. A or. Opt. Act.
<ca)Av<raifi(., KcoAvo-etas (or KO>Av<rcus), KwAvo-ete (or KtoAvcrai). A or.
Imper. Act. K<uAv<rov r K<o\v<Ta.T<0. Aor. Inf. Act. jccoAuotu. Aor.
Imper. Mid. KwAvo-at, Ko)\vo-d<rO<a.
The three forms /ccoAvcrai, KwAvo-at, KwAvaat (cf. Aucrat, Avcrai,
Avo-at) are distinguished only by accent. See 130 ; 113 ; 131, 4.
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE OF
VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS.
486. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect middle, many
euphonic changes (489) occur when a consonant of the
tense-stem comes before /A, T, a-, or of the ending.
2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person
plural of these tenses is formed by the perfect middle par-
ticiple with curt, are, and rj<rav, were (806).
487. 1. These tenses of rpffia), rub, TrAe'/cw, weave,
persuade, and o-reAAo) (o-roA-), send, are thus inflected :
Perfect Indicative.
1. TTpipLp.ai irlirXc-ypcu irlircicrpai eo-TaX|iai
2. TTpL\j/at irerrXegai ircimcrai ecrraXa-at
3. Tfrplirnu ir&rXcKTai irir6i<TT<u eo-TaXrat
2. Trpu|>0ov irirXx0ov iriri<r0ov rTaX0ov
rraX0ov
i(TTdX|JLC0a
earraXOe
ct<rC el<r eto-t
4:
..{i
ISL
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
SUBJ. Tcrpip.|ilvos to ireTrXe-y^vos w ircirewrjic'vos w
OPT. cti]v * ctTjv T
487]
s.
VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS.
Perfect Imperative.
109
2.
3. TTpt<}>0a>
ireireCo-do)
Mi
MI
INF.
PART.
eo-raXero
4<rTdX0w
<TTaX0OV
TTpf<f>0v or
Tcrpt<j>0a>crav
TTpl<f>0(U
TTpl|J.|AVOS
or ircireCo-Owv or 4<rrdX0ci>v or
irTTeio-0a><rav lo-rdXOwcrav
4<TTdX0ai
ecrraXjie'vos
Perfect Infinitive and Participle.
ireirei<r0ai
iriri<r|j^vos
"I:
Pluperfect Indicative.
1. TTptfJL|JLT|V
2. tr^rpuj/o
3. 4TTplTTTO
yj f 2. TeTpL(j>00V
*\3. 4TT P t<|)0TlV
lirlirXeicro
6<TTaXo-o
co-ToXro
<TTaX0OV
,{i
18.
3. TTpl|i(l.e'vOl
T|<rav
rorav
Tjo-av
C(TTaX0
CTTaX|JLl
rjo-av
2. The same tenses of
(stem reXc-), finish,
(<av-), s^ow, dXAao-o-o) (dAAay-), exchange, and
, convict, are thus inflected :
Perfect Indicative.
,\i
u
D -{|
3.
2. TT'X<T00V
[ir&j>av<rcu,700]
TT<j>avraL rjXXaKrai
ir<{>av0ov rjXXax0ov
ire<t>av0ov -qXXaxOov
P. -{2.
3. TereXecrfie'voi
clo-C
t<rC
el<rC
4X^^x66
,T|XY|
cio-C
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
SUBJ. rcreXco-fJilvos w -rre^acr^evos w TJXXa-y|Wvos tXT)Xry|ilvos w
OPT. * ettv " lf <ftv 4t T
110 INFLECTION. [488
Perfect Imperative.
g ("2. rtreXeo-o [>&{>av<ro] ijXXago
' 1 3. TTX6r0a> ire<j)dv0w
j) f 2. TerAecrOov ir&f>av0ov
1 3. TT6X6r0a>v irc<|>dv0(i>v
p f 2. TTA.<r0e ire<j>av06
'13. TTX^<r0wv or ire<|>dv0<i>v or T|XXdx0wv or
ir<|>dv0a><rav
Perfect Infinitive and Participle.
INF. TTeX6r0ai ire<f>dv0ai TJXXdx0on>
PART. TCTeXeo-jj^vos ir<j>aor(xvos -qXXa-yjUvos
Pluperfect Indicative.
{1. rT\l<r|iT|v 4ir(|>d<r(Lt]v
2. iTer&jtvo [!ir&|>av<ro]
O TT\O"TO CTTCOCLVTO TIAA.CIKTO
2. T6TXe<r0ov iir^<f>av0ov
1T(|>dv0T]V
'{i
! i:
IS.
TJXXa-y^voi
TJ<rav T|<rav TJ<rav -qcrav
488. N. The regular third person plural here
7rc7rXcK-vTO, etc., formed like Xe'Xv-vrai, e/UAv-i/To) could not be
pronounced. The periphrastic form is necessary also when <r is
added to a vowel stem (640), as in TereAeo--/xat. But when final
v of a stem is dropped (647), the regular forms in vrai and I/TO are
used ; as /cAivo), KK\I-JJML, KCicXivral (not Ke/cAi/xeVot etcrt).
489. For the euphonic changes here, see 71-77 and 83.
1. Thus TerplfjL-fjMi is for reTpifi-fJiai (75) ; TTpti/u for rerpi/?-
trai (74) ; rerplTr-rai for Terpi/8-rat, TTpl<f>-@ov for Tf.Tpif$-6ov (71).
So TTTr\ey-fJuai is for Tre.TrXf.K- pan (75) ; TreVAe^-^ov for Tr7r\CK-Oov
(71). nreicr-Tai is for TreTrei^-rat, and Trejr.i<r-6ov is for TreTretd-
&>v (71); and TreVewr/xai (for 7re7rei0-/>iai) probably follows their
analogy; TrcVei-o-ai is for TreTra^-crai (74).
2. In TTAe-o--/u,ai, o- is added to the stem before /A and T (640),
the stem remaining pure before <r. TeTe'Aeoyxai and TreTretcr/uat,
therefore, inflect these tenses alike, though on different principles.
On the other hand, the o- before /x in Tre'^aoyxot (487, 2) is a sub
401] VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS. HI
stitute for v of the stem (83), which v reappears before other
letters (700). In the following comparison the distinction is
shown by the hyphens :
TTc'Xc-<r-}jtai irirei<r-|Aai ir6f>cur-|uu
TT6\e-crat ire'irei-crcu [ir'4>av-<rai]
ir6<|)av-Tai
3. Under yXXay-fjuai, ^?AAaai is for ^AAay-crai, ^AAax-rae for
^AAay-rai, rjXXax-Oov for iJAAay-0ov (74: 71). Under eAi}Aey-/u,
yy/x, (for yx/w.) drops one y (77) ; A.7}A.eyai and eA^Acy/c-rcti are for
eA^Aeyx-crai and eA^Aeyx-Tai (74 ; 71). See also 529.
490. 1. All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect these
tenses like TTpt/x-/xat ; as AetVw, AeAei/x.-/>uu ; ypa<w (ypa<-), write,
yeypaju,-/u (75) ; pi7TTa> (pi<-, pi<-)> ^row, ppt/x-/xai. But when
final /ATT of the stem loses TT before /x (77), the TT recurs before
other consonants; as /ca/x/TTTO) (/ca/A7r-), 6enrf, KKa/x,-/xat,
: compare 7re7re/x,-/xat from Treacrw (TTCTT-), coo
inflected TreTrei/^ai, TreVeTT-rai, 7re7r<^>-^e, etc.
2. All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like 7reVAey-/)UU and
lijAAayyAai ; as Trpacroxo (Trpdy-), c?o, 7re7rpay-/xai ; Tapao-tra) (rapa^-),
confuse, rerapay-/xat ; <j>vXa.cr(Ta) (^>vAax-), 7re^>vAay-/Aat. But when
y before /x, represents yy, as in eA?jAey-/wH from eAey^-w (489, 3),
the second palatal of the stem recurs before other consonants (see
487, 2).
3. All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like 7re7ra<r-
/oat, etc. ; as <pao> (<pa8-), te//, 7r<pao--/Aat, 7re'<pa-<Tai, Tre^pacr-rat ;
0i'a> (c&S-), accustom, et^tcr-/xai, et^t-crat, et^wr-rat, t0r-0e; pluf.
flOia-pfjv, et^t-(7O, et^to--TO ; oWvSw (crTrevS-), pour, (77rio--/xat (like
7T7retcr-/xat, 489, 1) for e(77rev8-/xat, ecrTra-crai, ecrTretcr-rai, t<nrei<T-0.
4. Most ending in v (those in av- and w- of verbs in aipa> or
vvo>) are inflected like 7r^>ao--/>tat (see 489, 2).
5. When final v of a stem is dropped (647), as in KAfvw,
6entf, KK\i-fjML, the tense is inflected like AeAv-fwxt (with a vowel
stem).
6. Those ending in A or p are inflected like eoraA-fiai; as
dyyc'AAw (dyycA-), announce, ^yyeA-/xai; atpcu (dp-), raz'se,
eyeipeo (eycp-), rouse, lyfiyep-fjuai; Treipw Orep-), pierce,
(645).
491. For the full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. For
<<uva>, see also 478.
112
INFLECTION.
[492
CONTRACT VERBS.
492. Verbs in aw, ew, and o<o are contracted in the present
and imperfect. These tenses of TI/XCUO (rt/m-), honor, <,Xe'w
(<iXc-), love, and 8n\6<a (877X0-), manifest, are thus inflected :
ACTIVE.
Present Indicative.
' 1. (xt/u,dw) Tifiw (04Xe'o>) 4>iXu> (57;X6w) 8T|Xu>
2. (xF/tde4s) Tijias (04X&45) <J>iXeis (577X6545) 8t]Xots
3. (x4/u,de4) Tifia (04X^64) <j>iXei (577X664) 8f]Xoi
4>lX6lTOV (577X66X0^) 8
<)>iXiTOv (577X66x0^) 8r]XovTOV
tfuXovjiev (577X60^61') 8r]Xov)JLv
<{>lXlT (577X6eX6) Sr)XoVT
D.{ 2 '
(xF/idexop)
Tl|XO,TOV
1 3.
(xi'/idexoj')
TIJJLCITOV
f 1 '
(xF/^do/Aei')
Tt|xw(Jiev
P. 2.
(x4/id6X6)
Tl[iaT
li.
(x4yU,doi/0*4)
TLJXCOfTt
fi.
(xi>da;)
TljJLU
S. 2.
(xZ/idrjs)
Tijt^S
(s.
(xi"/id77)
TIJWJ
D.{ 2 '
(x4/U,d77XOJ')
TlHttTOV
1 3.
(x4/id77XO>')
Tifidrov
fl.
(x4>dfcVAe>)
TL(JLOO[XV
P. 2.
(x4/id77xe)
Ti}ldT
u.
(xt/idwo*4)
Tip.tb<ri
Present Subjunctive.
8r]Xois
<)>lXf]TOV
(577X677)
(577> 6-rjrov)
(577X677x01')
S.
P-
' 1. (xtjlld04/>t4)
2. (xFjiido4s)
3. (x4jU,do4)
2. (x4/ido4XOJ')
. 3. (x4//-aO/X77I') Tl|10>TT)V
2. (xi>do4X6) Tl(JLWT
^- 3. (Xl>do46') TLJiweV
or or
{1. (rt/iao4 / 77v) TifxcpT]v
2. (xt/ittO/775) Tl|fclpT|S
3.
( 2 -
1 3.
rl. (TlfJ.ao[-rj/ilV~) [TlJlCOTJfWV
S 2. (xZ/XaO/77Xe) Tl(JL<>T|T
I 3.(r*)uaof7;crai') Ttjiwrjo-av]
<|>lXfjT
4>LXw(TI.
Present Optative (see 737).
[4uX<*,u
<|>iXots
4>iXot]
<|>lXoiTOV
(577X677X6)
(577x60)0-4)
or
<f>lXoi(JLV
fiXotrc
<|>lXoi6V
or
8T]X|XV
8T)Xa><ri
[ 8T]Xo'lfJLt
Si]Xois
8T]XOITOV
(577X00^x771') SrjXoCTTjv
8r]Xoi|icv
(577X0015)
Si]Xoi6V
or
<j>iXoi]v (577X00/771')
<}>iXoiT]s (577X00/775)
(577x00/77)
(577XOO/77XOJ/) [8T)Xo(TJTOV
(577X0047^X77^) Sl^Xoi^TT] v]
) [<J>lXo(T||16V (5?7XoO/77 / tX6J') [8t]XoiT]fJLV
4>lXoiT|T (577XoO/77Xe) 8TjXo(T|T
0<j)iXoT]<rav] (577X00'
CONTRACT VERBS.
113
P.
; (2.(rVae)
J 2. (TijU.deroj') Tijidrov
13. (Tt/aaeTajp) TifidrcDV
'2. (ri/xdere) TijidTe
3. (rt/xa6j'Tu') TIJJLWVTWV
Present Imperative.
(0{Xee)
or
i TifjidTaxrav
or
4>lXciTCi)V
({>lXciT
4>iXovvra>v
or
S. j
3. (erf/xae)
'I 3.
P. | 2'. (ert/xdere;
<- 3. (MAWIO,,)
Tijjidv
TlfJlUV
ertp-cov
ertfids
Present Infinitive.
(04X^1^) <j>tXeiv
Present Participle (see 340).
Imperfect.
Tl(JLaTt]V
Tl|XU)|J.V
Ttp,dT
<|>lXlTOV
c<|>iXeiTT]v
|)lXoii(JLV
<j)lX6tT
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
'{
2.(rt/Adei
3. (rt/xderat)
2. (Tt/xdea-^ov) Ti|idr0ov
3. (rt/xdc(T0ov) Tijxd<r0ov
rl. (Ti/xa6/xe#a) Ttp.wjj.60a
j 2. (Ttitdeo-^e) ri|id(r0e
^3. (rt/xdo^rat)
<)>iXeiTai
<j>iXei<r0ov
<J>iXeio-0ov
<|>iXov|Jt0a
<J>iX6i<r06
{1. (rijudw/Aai) Ti(i,w|jiai
3.
jj f 2. (rtjud 770-^0 j/) Ti|j.do-0ov
* 3. (^Tifjidrjffdov^ TifidcrOov
11. (rt/iaw/xe^a) Tip.c6|i0a
2. (rMvrae) riftdo-Oe
3. (ri/idajj/Tcu rij.wvTai
Present Subjunctive.
<|>iXci)(JLai
<j>iXf](r0ov
a ) <|>iX(d|i0a
(SrJXoe) 8^Xov
8TJ\OtTOV
SrjXovTwv
8T)XOVT
or or
(STjXoeYoxraj') 8T]XovT<i><ra
(e^Xoov)
cS^Xovv
Si]Xov|j.<u
, d-rj\6rj) 8i]Xoi
ST]Xov(r6ov
( 577X660" flop) St]Xo(r0ov
8i]Xovo-0
8T)Xovvrai
8t]Xco|JL(U
(577X677) 8r]Xoi
8-r]X<o<r0ov
6(jieda.} 8t]X(tf(ic0a
($77X6770-06)
114
{1. (jllUlolfJ.t)v) Tl|lCp|XT]V
2. (rt/idoio) TIJJUOO
3. (rt/idotro) TIJJLWTO
' I 3. (Ttjuao<r077J>) Ti|i,(j><r0T]v
{1. (rt/ioju,e0a) Ti[xw'[Jie0a
2. (Tt/idoiO*0e) Tl|A(OO'0
3. (jlfJidoiVTO) TlfJKpVTO
p.
2. (rt/tdov) TIJI.W
TLjAdCT0a)
Tl|xd(T0OV
Ti|id(r0wv
Tl(Xa<T0
Ti|j.dcr0a>v
or
(Tt/ta^o-^wcra^TijJi.do-Oaxrav
Ti[io-0ai
rt|i.<&|j.evos
S.
P.
CTl|JL(&(LT)V
ITIJJLW
CTijxdro
Tijid<r0ov
2. (<hrt,udecr0e) Ttndo-0
3. (ert/xdovro) trip-covTO
INFLECTION.
Present Optative.
4>iXolo
(|>lXoiTO
<j>iXoicr0ov
<|>iXoC)j.0a
<|>iXoi(r0e
<|>lXoiVTO
Present Imperative.
4>iXov
iiXeto-00)
<j>lXl(T00V
4>lXlCT0
4>lXcC(T0(l)V
or or
Present Infinitive.
<j>iXio-0ai
Present Participle.
<|>iXov{j.vos
<|>iX6iTO
[493
(Sr^Xo'oto) 8T)Xoio
(5;Xo'on-o) 8t]Xotro
8T)XoiO~0OV
8riXo(r0T)v
(Sr/XJou)
or or
')87]XoV(T0COOr(
I<J)1.XOVVTO
493. N. The uncontracted forms of these tenses are not Attic (but
see 495, 1). Those of verbs s in ao> sometimes occur in Homer ; those
of verbs in ca> are common in Homer and Herodotus; but those of
verbs in ow are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see
784-786.
498] CONTRACT VERBS. 115
494. SYNOPSIS of Ti/iacu, <iAe'a), o^Aoco, and Oypdu, hunt,
in the Indicative of all voices.
ACTIVE.
Pres. Tljjiw <f>iXo> St]Xw 0T]p
Impf. irtfxwv l<j>iXovv
Fut. rifi^cro) 4>iXT|cra>
Aor. TtfjtT|cra e4>iXT)cra e8ir|Xtacra eGTjpacra
Perf. T6Tip.T]Ka ir(|>CXT)Ka ScSi^XtdKa re0T|paKa
PlUp. TTlp.T)KT] 1TC<}>lX^KT) cScSl^XtOKT) Tt0T]pa.KT]
MIDDLE.
Pres. TLM.wfj.aL <f>iXov(i.ai
Impf. CTl|JL(0)JLT]V 4<|>lXoV)J.T]V
Fut. TL(j.T]cro(j,aL <)>iXrjo-0|icu St]X(6o-O)i.ai 0r]pdtroM.aL
Aor. Ti(jtT|<rd(jLT]v
Perf. TTlfJ.T|[XaL
Plup. TTl(i^(J.1]V lir6({>lX^}lT]V 4SeST]X(&)lT)V TC0T]pdfJLT]V
PASSIVE.
Pres. and Imp. : same as Middle.
Fut. Ti|j.T]0T|o-op,aL (j)LXr|0T|(roM.ai
Aor. ITIJJL^OTJV 4<j>iX^6i]v
Perf. and Plup. : same as Middle.
Fut. Perf. TCI
495. 1. Dissyllabic verbs in eo> contract only ce and c. Thus
sail, has pres. TrAew, TrXets, TrXci, TrXeiroi/, TrAeo/xev, TrAetre,
; imperf. cTrXeoy, IvrXets, cTrAa, etc.; infin. TrXeiv; partic.
2. Ae'o>, &mrf, is the only exception, and is contracted in most
forms ; as SoOcrt, 8or)/xat, Sowrai, ISow, partic. S<uv, Sow. Ae'w, wa/i<,
is contracted like TrXew.
496. N. A few verbs in aco have rj for d in the contracted forms ;
as 8t^d<u, Sti^w, thirst, SH/^S, St^, Sti/^re; imperf. eoY^w, eSt^s,
8ti//>7 ; infin. 8/^/. So ^a<o, /zve, Ki/ao), scrape, Treimtu, hunger, cr/xdw,
smear, x/od"<o, ^i ye oracles, with ^pao/xat, wse, and ^acu, rw6.
497. N. 'Ptyow, shiver, has infinitive ptywv (with plyovv), and
optative pl-yiprjv. C l8/ooo>, swea^, has tSpwo-t, iSpwrj, iSp&vri, etc.
Aovcu, wasA, sometimes drops v, and Aoo> is then inflected like
877X000 ; as eXov for lAove, AoG/xat for Aovo/uat.
498. N. The third person singular of the imperfect active does
116 INFLECTION. [499
not take v movable in the contracted form ; thus e<i'Aee or e<i'Aeev
gives e<iA (never e<iAv). See 58.
499. For (aetv) av and (octi/) ovv in the infinitive, see 39, 5.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
500. The peculiar inflection of verbs in /mi affects only the
present and second aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second
perfect system. Most second aorists and perfects here included do
not belong to presents in /u, but are irregular forms of verbs in 00 ;
as tfiyv (second aorist of /JaiVw), cyi/an/ (yiyi/wo-Kca), 7TTa/u,ryv (TTCTO-
/xat), and Tf&mfticv, TtOvafyv, reOvdvai (second perfect of 0n/cr/ca>).
(See 798, 799, 804.)
501. Tenses thus inflected are called /xt-forms. In other tenses
verbs in JJLL are inflected like verbs in <o (see the synopses, 509).
No single verb exhibits all the possible /tu-forms, and two of the
paradigms, TtOrj/ju and StSoyu, are irregular and defective in the
second aorkt active (see 802).
502. There are two classes of verbs in /u :
(1) Those in rjfju (from stems in a or e) and <o/u (from
stems in o), as i-or^-fii (ora-), set, Ti-Orj-fju ($e-) , place, Si-Sa)-/u
(80-), give.
(2) Those in vu/u, which have the /u-form only in the
present and imperfect ; these add w (after a vowel vw) to
the verb stem in these tenses, as Seuc-vv-/u (SeiK-), show,
pu-vvv-pL (pw-), strengthen. For poetic verbs in v?7/A(, (with va
added to the stem), see 609 and 797, 2.
503. For a full enumeration of the /u-forms, see 793-804.
504. SYNOPSIS of ionr7/u, ri&^t, StSw/xi, and Sct/cpu/xi in the
Present and Second Aorist Systems.
ACTIVE.
Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part.
t<mi|U t<rrw i<rra(T|v Wrrj icrrdvai Icrrds
t<TTTJV
Tt0T)Hl T10W T10(T]V r0l
lT(0t]V
c9
SiSw SiSo(T]v 8i6ou SiSovai SiSovs
iSCSovv
SeiKvvfjik SCIKVVW SeiKvvoijii. ScCicvv SeiKvvvai
506] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. H?
Indie. Subj.
Opt.
Imper. Infin.
TTT)V <TT
<rraCT)v
(FTTlvt CFTT^VCtt
C06TOV 0W
0LT)V
0's 0eivai
dual (506)
eSorov 8<
So(t]v
86$ Sovvai
dual (506)
c8vv (505) 8vw
SvOi Svvai
O-TOS
Sous
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
lo-raC|jLT]v io-Tacro IVrao-Oai l<rrd|ivos
t<rTd|iT]V
Ti0wp.at Ti0tip.T]v rC0c(ro rCOca-Oai riOlpevos
Si8)iai 8iSoi|j.7]v SiSocro SCSocrOai SiSdpcvos
ScCKWfjiai. SciKvva>|j.ai SeiKvvoC^v ScCKwcro SeCicvvo-Oai
4irpid|JLT|v irpa>|xai irpiaC)JLT]v irpico irptcurOai
0ov 0e'cr0ai
w
I
M
C
<
<M
505. As to-r^/xt wants the second aorist middle,
bought (from a stem Trpia- with no present), is added here and in
the inflection. As SeiWv/u-i wants the second aorist (502, 2), !&)v,
I entered (from Svoo, formed as if from Si>-/u), is added. No second
aorist middle in v^v occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see
A.VW, Trvew, o-evw, and ^e'co, in the Catalogue).
8oi(jLT]v 8ov 86or0ai
506. INFLECTION of fcrr^/xi, riOt]^ St'Sayu, and Set'KviJ/xt in
the Present and Second Aorist Systems; with ZSvv and
ACTIVE.
Present Indicative.
t0TT)(u rC6r]|ii 88o)|iL
Sing, -j 2. to-rris rC0i]s 8t8s Sedcvvs
I'o-T-qo-i Ti0t]o-t. 8C8o>o-i 8c(KVV(Tl
Dual <! ^' ' <rTaTOV rC0Tov 8(8orov SeCKwrov
rC0Toy 8CSoTOV SeCKwrov
rCOepcv S(8o|JL6V SeCKwiuv
Plur. -| 2. wrTaT rCOerc 8C8or SKWT
IO-TOO-I. Ti0a<ri. SiSo'oUri 8tiKw'ao-i
118
INFLECTION.
1
Imperfect,
fl. &TTTJV
Sing. .j 2. foTtjs
U. iVTT]
T0T]V 48C80VV
T10CI S(SOV
cSeiKvvs
T-I i f 2. iVrarov
Dual 4
I- 0. l(TTaTT]V
TC06TOV 48C80TOV
T10TT]V eSlSoTTJV
eSeiKvurov
8eiKVVTT]V
Plur. j 2. fa-rare
* 3 forTeurav
TL0fJLV ISl'SofJLCV
lr0<rav 48(8oorav
e8lKVV)JLV
Present Subjunctive.
fl- l<rT "
Sing, j 2. uri-fls
U. ICTTT)
ri0<3 SiSw
T10TJS 8t8w$
SeiKVv'w
SeiKVVTJS
Dual | 2 - f l<rTV j TOV
I 3. UTTTJTOV
n0T]Tov 8i8(3rov
T10TJTOV SlSwTOV
SIKVUTJTOV
{1. UTTtO|J.V
2. ' IOTTJTC
3. UTTWO-I
TL0WJJ.6V 8l8w(JlV
T10T|T SlS(tfT6
TL0COCTI SlSuKTt
SciKVVCdfJlCV
8eiKVV1]T
SciKVVdXTl
Present Optative.
Sing. J 2. UrraCi|s
^ 3. LCTTaLT|
Ti0ciT)V 8i8oi-qv
TL06LT] SlSoiT]
8eiKvvoi|xi
SeiKvvots
SCIKVVOI
"Dual -/ MTTCUTJTOV
^ 3. l<rTanJTr]v
T10IT]TOV 8l8oiT|TOV
T10IT]TT]V 8l8oiT]TTJV
8eiKvv'oiTov
SeiKVUOlTTJV
{1. L<rTaiT|[j.ev
2. lO'TaCT]T
3. l<TTa(i]<rav
T1061TJTC 8l8oiT]T6
Ti0tiT]<rav 8iSoit]<rav
SeiKvv'oifxcv
8eiKVVOI.T6
SeiKvv'oicv
Commonly thus contracted :
Dual I 2 ' j- TatTOV
t 3. lO-Ta(TT]V
T10CITOV SlSoiTOV
TiQtlrr\v 8i8oCrrjv
{1. l(TTaip,V
2. l<TTaiT
3. lo-rawv
Tl0LfJ.V 8l8oi|JLV
T10IT 8l8oiT
T10C16V SlSoiCV
Present Imperative.
Sing. | 2 - J^I
< o. wrraTft)
T10CTCI) 8lSoTO)
ScCKVV
SdKVVTtt
Dual ^ 2 ' ^^ftT "
^ 3. lo-Tartav
T10TOV SlSoTOV
T10TO)V SlSoTWV
SciKVUTOV
SeiKVVTWV
[506
506]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
119
f 2 -
Plur. | 3.
to-rare r(0er StSore Sedcwre
urravTcov or nOevrtov or SiSo'vraiv or SCIKVVVTCDV or
lOTOTtto-av riOe'rwo-av SiSo'ruo-av
Present Infinitive.
lo-ravai ri&vcu SiSovai
Present Participle (335).
io-rds riOcCs SiSov's
Second Aorist Indicative (802).
Sing
li
i3
Dual |
CO-TTJS
4'o-TT,
lo-TTJT-qv
Plur.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
0TOV
0E[JLV
c'Sorov
I'SOTC
t'Soo-av
Second Aorist Subjunctive.
OTW 0c3 S
f 1 -
Sing. ^2.
u
Dual
Plur.
SciKw'vai
ISvv
ISvs
c'Sv
e'Svrov
8VTC
cSvo-av
Sv'a>
O-TTJTOV
0TJTOV
0TJTOV
StOTOV
SiOTOV
SvTJTOV
SvTJTOV
O"TT]T
O-TCOO-l
0CO(JLCV
0TJT6
Owo-i
Score
Scoo-i
Sva>(j.cv
8vT]T
Svwa-t
Second Aorist
Optative.
oTat-rjv
Q^v
6oiTjv
o-raCt,
ll^
So^ S
(See 744)
o-ranJTrjv
0CIT)TT)V
8oit]TOV
8oiTfrr,v
trra.Li\<rov
0ll]|XV
0eiT)rc
06Ct|(rav
SoiT)|iV
8oiT)T6
Soiijo-av
120
INFLECTION.
[606
Commonly thus contracted :
Dual
/2.
<TTllTOV
06tTOV
SOITOV
1 3.
<rTCtlTT]V
0(TTJV
SoCTTJV
f L
CTTaiU.V
0t|JLCV
Sotficv
Plur.
2 '
<rraiT6
Octrc
801T
u
o-raicv
Octcv
SOIV
Second Aorist Imperative.
Sing.
f 2.
(TTTJ01
Mi
So's
Sv0i
13.
<TTT]TW
Mtw
80TO>
8dm
Dual
I 2 '
0"TV|TOV
0TOV
SoTOV
8vTOV
(3.
(TTTJTWV
0TWV
SoTO)V
SvTWV
f 2 -
^TT)T
0*rc
SOT
SVTC
Plur.
i 3 -
o-ToivTwv (
)r 0vTwv or
SO'VTWV or
SVVTWV or
o-TTJraxrav 0ra><rav
Soraxrav
Svraxrav
Second Aorist Infinitive.
rrr|vai
0civai
Sovvai
Svvai
Second Aorist Participle (335).
TT<fe
0fe
Sovt
Sis
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
fi.
IWafiai
rC0c|jiak
SCSofxai
SetKwjjioi
Sing.
r
IVracrai
r(06(rai
SCSoo-ai
ScCicwcrai
l3.
XcrraTai
riOcrai
8C8oT<u
SeiKVurai
Dual
I 2 '
to-rao-Oov
T0C(T00V
8i8oo-0ov
Sc(KVV<T0OV
13.
t<rTeur0ov
T(0<T00V
SCSo<r0ov
8IKVU(T00V
f 1 -
io-TafJL0a
Tl0>0a
8i8o'(i0a
SciKVvficOa
Plur.
2>
V<TTO,<r0
rCOea-Oe
8i8oo-0e
ScCKVU(T0C
u.
to-ravrai
Tl0VTai
SCSovrai
SeiKVuvrai
Imperfect.
{1.
l(rTClJJLT)V
T10(JLT)V
ISlSo)JLT|V
ISfUCV^MJt
Sing.
2.
tcPTCMTO
rC06<ro
81800-0
cSe(KW(ro
3.
t<rraTo
T10TO
eSiSoro
cScfKWTO
Dual
I 2 '
t<TTO<r0OV
T(0(T00V
S(So<r0ov
IScCicvwrOov
1 3.
l<TTCMr0T]V
Tl0<r0TlV
iSlSo(T0T]V
CSCIKVV(T0T]V
{1.
l(TTd|ic0a
Ti0e'fi0a
8l8ojJL0a
cSeiKvv'ficOa
Plur.
2.
Vcrrao-0
T10(T0
cSCSoo-Oe
eScCKVvorOc
3.
urravro
er0vro
88ovTo
cScCKvvvro
506]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
121
Present Subjunctive.
1. urrufiCLk
Sing. ^2. to-TT]
,. {i
U.
Sing.
Dual
SciKVvotfJiai
^3.
10-TTJTCU
T10TJTCU
SiSamu
8lKVVT)Tat
Dual {I
10-TTJO-00V
l<n"q<r00V
T10110-00V
T10TJO-00V
8i8<3<r0ov
8k8too-0ov
SeiKVvi](r0ov
SciKVVT)CT0OV
Plur. 4 2.
lCTTWfi0a
t<TTTJ<r0
ICTTtOVTCU
T10VJO-06
TL0WVTCU
Si8c3o-0
SiSuvrai
SeiKvvw^JicOa
SciKVVT]O'0C
SciKVvctfvrai
Present Optative.
(1.
Sing. 42.
u.
l<TTaC(JLT|V
i(rraio
to-raiTO
T1010
T10ITO
818010
SlSoiTO
SCIKVVO(|J.T]V
SciKVVOlO
8dKVVOlTO
Dual { 2 ;
urraurOov
Tl0l<T00V
T1061CT0T1V
Si8our0ov
8i8oCo-0T|v
8etKVvoi(r0ov
SciKWoCcrO^v
f 1 '
Plur. 4 2.
1 3.
IcrraifjieOa
t<TTaur06
toTttiVTO
Tl0Cl|JLC0a
riOeurOc
T1061VTO
SiSoi(jic0a
8i8oio-0e
SiSotvro
SciKVUOt|A0a
SciKVVOl(T0C
SdKVVOlVTO
Present Imperative.
f o
Sing. < '
(.3.
to-rao-o
i<rrour0a>
T106CTO
T10CO-00)
SCSoo-o
8i8o(r0&)
8c LKVUO-0
8ciKvv'o-0<i>
Dual {2-
i<TTao-0ov
lo-TcurOwv
T0CT00V
T10CT0COV
Si8oo-0ov
Si8oo-0cov
8LKVUO-00V
SciKVV(T00)V
r 2.
Plur. \3.
i'o-Tacr0
l<rToi<r0wv or
T1060-0C
Ti0<r0a)v or
8CSo<T0c
8i8o'cr0av or
8tlKVUO-0
SciKvva-Ouv or
t<rTcur0w<rav Ti0<r0w<rav 8i8o'<r0a><rav 8iKVv<r0wo-ai
to-rao-Oai
Present Infinitive.
rC0<r0ai 8CSo<r0ai
Present Participle (301).
oTO|J.VOS TL0|1VOS 8l8o'|lVOS 8ci.KVV|JLVOS
Second Aorist Middle Indicative (505).
3. lirpCaro
3. 4irpior0nv
C0CTO
40<T0T)V
(SOTO
8oo-0ov
e8o'<r0t)V
122 INFLECTION. [508
1. iirpuxpeOa
Plur. -1 2.
U
eirptavTo
lei
6'80<T06
6'SOVTO
Second Aorist Middle
Subjunctive
f 1 -
Sing. J 2.
Is.
sr
5"
8Vrai
Dual | 2 '
;S:
0TJO-00V
0T]O"0OV
8<i3o-0ov
Swo-Oov
C 1 '
Plur. -1 2.
1 3.
irpti]o-0c
Trptwvrai
0Tjo"0e
0WVTOI
Swvrai
Second
Aorist Middle Optative
rl.
Sing. ^2.
1 3.
irpCaio
irpCairo
061TO
8010
Soiro
Dual {I
irpcuo-0ov
irpiao-0i)v
06UT00V
06(<r0T|v
Soto-Oov
Soto-0T)V
Plur. j 2.
1 3.
irpia)X60a
irpCaio-06
irpiaivTO
Mm
So(|X60a
801(T0
SOIVTO
Second Aorist Middle
Imperative.
sin *- {
irpfa
irpicurOw
00V
06V00)
Sov
8oo-ew
Dual |^
irpao-0ov
irpicurOaiv
06V00V
060-0COV
SoorOov
8o'or0wv
f 2 '
Plur, J3.
irpCao-06
irpicurOttv or
irpiour0 r coo-av
04(706
0cr0tov or
0eV0coo-av
SoV06
SoV0o)v or
SoV0a)o-ov
^econt? ^lomi Middle Infinitive.
irpta<r0ai 0e'<r9ai 8oV0ai
Second Aorist Middle Participle (301
Trpl(XfJlV09 06[16VO$
500]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
123
507. "lo-Trjfu and a few other verbs have a second perfect
and pluperfect of the /u-forin. These are never used in the
singular of the indicative, where the first perfect and plu-
perfect are the regular forms.
508. These tenses of IO-T^/U are thus inflected :
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
$ =
la. .
SECOND PERFECT.
lr
3.
f2. t
OT<xCl]V
<TTaTJS
cVratr]
8. IO-TO.TOV C'OTTJTOV
1. cVrantv <<rr5jJi6V
3. ccTTcicrt
Infinitive. cVravai
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
or -airov
TaiijTuv
or -aCrriv
TO.
or
ra
or -aiT
<rTClTW
C OTTttTOI'
<TTCITWV
'<TTavTwv or
or -aiev
Participle. o-Ttfs (342)
Dual. <rTa,Tov,
Plur. eo-rajAev, 4'oraTc, 4'<rra<rav
For an enumeration of these forms, see 804.
509. FULL SYNOPSIS of the Indicative of t<ro;/u,
and Seuwv/u, in all the voices.
ACTIVE.
Pres.
Imperf. &TTTJV
Fut. <rr^o-<*
1 Aor. ?<TTT]o-a, set
2 Aor. 60-Tiiv, stood
ISCSovv
8CKVV)U t
show
IScCKVVV
0Tov etc.
e'SwKa
cSorov etc.
in dual and plur. in dual and plur.
124
INFLECTION.
f510
1 Perf. ?<rTT]ica
2 Perf. ^o-rarov etc.
in dual and plur.,
stand (508)
1 Plupf. eiO-TTJKT) T0T|KT)
Or <TT1]KT|
2 Plupf. ilo-TdTov etc.
in dual and plur.,
stood (508)
Fut. Perf. !o"Hjo>, shall
stand (705)
MIDDLE.
Pres. IVrajKu, stand
Impf.
Fut.
lAor.
2 Aor.
Perf.
Plupf.
t<TT<X[J.T]V
o-r/j 0-0(10,1
(trans.)
6T10'HT]V
0t]o-ofxai
SCSoftai (simple
only in pass.)
c8i86p.T]v
-8<oo-o)jLai
(trans.)
(trans.) (
Attic)
f|XT]V
.) TcOeifjiai
8e'8o|a.cu
PASSIVE.
Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect : as in Middle.
Aor.
Fut.
Fut. Perf. 6<rT^|ofxai,
shall stand
late)
AUGMENT.
510. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, the
verb receives an augment (i.e. increase) at the begin-
ning, which marks these as past tenses.
511. Augment is of two kinds :
1. Syllabic augment, . which prefixes e to verbs be-
ginning with a consonant; as X&>, imperfect e-\vov\
WTTW, second aorist e-\i7rov.
2. Temporal augment, which lengthens the first syl-
lable of verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong ; as-
lead, imperf. fyov ; oitckw, oiVco, dwell, aor.
519] AUGMENT. 125
512. The augment is confined strictly to the indicative,
never appearing in the other moods or the participle, even
when any of these denote past time.
IMPERFECT AND AORIST INDICATIVE.
513. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs
beginning with a consonant have the syllabic augment
e. E.g.
Auto, eXvov, eXiJo-a, eXvo/xryv, IXvadfJirjv, fXvOrjv', ypd<p<o, write,
ypa(f>ov, eypou/fa, eypd^v ; ptTrra), throw, IppiTrrov, ppi<pr)v.
For p doubled after the syllabic augment, see 69.
514. In Homer any liquid (especially A.) may be doubled after
the augment e ; as e XXa^ov for eXax<n>, l^xafo for t/juaOe. So some-
times cr ; as ecrcret'ovTO from creto).
515. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs be-
ginning with a short vowel have the temporal augment,
which lengthens the initial vowel ; a and e becoming ?/,
and , o, v becoming , &>, v. E.g.
Y Ayo>, lea d, -rjyov, tfx@ r ) v ' ^Xaww, drive, rjXavvov ; IKCTCVW, implore,
t/cerevov, iKertvcra ; 6vet8ta>, reproach, wvet'St^ov ; v/SpL^o), insult, v/3pi-
(r6r)V ; d/coXov^ea), accompany, ^KoXovOrja-a ; 6p^oa>, erect, a>p0co<ra.
516. A long initial vowel is not changed, except that d gener-
ally becomes 77 ; as atfXe'eo, struggle, rfOXqaa. But both d and 77 are
found in dvdXio-Kco and di/aXdw, and duo (poetic), hear, has ai'ov.
517. BovXo/xcu, M?isA, 8vva/xt, &e a6/e, and /xeXXw, intend, often
have 77 for e in the augment, especially in later Attic ; as /3ovXo/Ar?v
or r)j3ovX6fjL7)V, e/SovXrjOrjv or rj(3ovXrj@r)V, iBvvdfJLrjv or f]8vvd(J<r)V,
8vvrjOr]v or rjSvvrjOrjv ; 1/AcXXov or rjjjieXXov.
518. A diphthong takes the temporal augment on its
first vowel, at or a becoming rj. E.g.
Airecu, ask, rJTyo-a', ctKa^w, guess, rj/axou; OIACCCD, dwell, wKiTcra;
av^avco, increase, yjv^rja-a, trjv^rjd^v ', a8w, sm^r, TjSov.
519. Ov is never augmented. Et and ev are often without
augment, especially in later Attic ; but MSS. and editors differ in
regard to many forms, as ctKacra or rj/caa-a (from et/caa>, liken),
evSov or rjvBov (from evSw, sleep), evptOrjv or rjvpcOrjv (from evpibvcw,
/we?), ev^d^v or rj\)^d.^v (from ev^o/xat, pray}. Editions vary also
in the augment of avatvw, rfry, and of some verbs beginning with
ot, as otdKO(rTpo^)e(o,
126 INFLECTION. [520
REDUPLICATION.
520. The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, in
all the moods and in the participle, have a reduplica-
tion, which is the mark of completed action.
PERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT.
521. Verbs beginning with a single consonant (ex-
cept p) are reduplicated in the perfect and future per-
fect by prefixing that consonant followed by e. E.g.
AVW, Ae-Avica, \e-\vfJLaL, Ae-Av/ceVcu, Ae-Av/ccos, Ae-Av//,evos, Ae-AiWo-
fjua ; AaVa), AeAotTra, AeAet/xfuu, AeAeii/'o/xat. So 0ua>, sacrifice, rt-OvKa. ;
<^>aiVa> (<av), show, Tre-^atr/xat, 7re-(f>a.vOaL ; ^atvw, gape, Ke-^rjva..
For the pluperfect, see 527.
522. N. (a) Five verbs have et in the perfect instead of the
reduplication :
Aayxai/o) (Aa^-), obtain by lot, ciA^a, etATyy/xat ;
Aa/A/3ava> (Aa/3-), ta&e, etA??<a, eiA^/Ajuai (poet. AeAiy/x/xat) ;
Aeycu, collect, in composition, -etAo^a, -etXcy/uac with -
SiaAeyo/xat, discuss, has 8t-etAey/xat ;
/xetpo/xat (/x,ep-), obtain part, ei/juapTca, it is fated ;
from stem (pe-) ciprjKa, have said, eip^/uat, fut. pf.
(see CITTOV).
(6) An irregular reduplication appears in Homeric Sei'Sot/ca and
fetiSco, from 8et8o>, /ear, and SetSey/xat '(for 8e8ey/xat), ^rree^, from
a stem 8e/c- (see 8etKvv/At).
523. In verbs beginning with wo consonants (except
a mute and a liquid), with a double consonant (f, f, T/T),
or with /o, the reduplication is represented by a simple
e, having the same form as the syllabic augment. J?.,*/.
SreAAw, sene?, <rraA/ca; ^rew, see^:, e^r^Ka; i/^evSw, cheat, Zif/ev-
crfjiai, l{j/v(TfJivo<s ; ptTrrw, throw, eppt/^/xat, lppi<f>6at (69).
524. 1. Most verbs beginning with a mute and a liquid have
the full reduplication ; as ypa^xo, write, yeypa<a, ycy/oa/A/xai, yey/oa-
2. But those beginning with yi/, and occasionally a few in /3A
or yA, have c ; as yvo)pio>, recognize, perf . eyvwpiKa ; ytyvwo-Kai
(yvo-), know, eyvco/ca. See /3Aao-ravo> and yAv^xu.
525. N. Mi/xvr/o-KO) (/xi/a-), remind, has jjL/jLvrjfWLL (memini),
remember, and Krao/Aat, acquire, has both /CC'/CT^/AOU and
possess. See also Homeric perfect passive of ptTrro) and pv
631] ATTIC REDUPLICATION. 127
526. Verbs beginning with a short vowel lengthen
the vowel, and those beginning with a diphthong
lengthen its first vowel, in all forms of the perfect and
future perfect, the reduplication thus having the form
of the temporal augment. E.g.
Ayo>, lead, ^\a, ^y/xai, ^y/xevos ; aKoAou0e<o, follow, rjKoXovOrjKa,
rjKoXovOrjKevat. ; opOota, erect, top^co/xat ; 6pi'eo, bound, u>pLka, wpiayxai ;
em/AO<D, dishonor, ^rt/xwKa, ^ri/xw/xat, fut. pf. rfTlfJutxrofua. Aipew,
take, -rjprjKa, ryprj/xai, rj p^tro/xat ; eiKaa), liken, yKaa-fJuu ', .vpio~K<i), Jind,
rjvprjKa, TfjvpTjfWLL (or evprjKa, evpiy/xai, 519).
Long a may become 7; (see 516) ; as in di/dAicrKto, pf. av^AxoKa
or di/uAooKu.
PLUPERFECT.
527. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a
consonant, the pluperfect prefixes the syllabic augment e
to the reduplication. In other cases the pluperfect keeps
the reduplication of the perfect without change. E.g.
Avtu, XeXvKa, -Xe\vKr), A.eXv/xai, c-AeAv/wyv ; oreAAw, coraA/cci,
f(TTa\Krj, (TTa\fjL<u, lo-TaXfjLrjv'j \afji ftdvw, ei'Ar/^a, tXrj<f)r) ', dyyeAAa),
^yyeAKa, ^yye A/cij, ^yyeA/xat, ^yye A/w/v ; atpew, yp^Ka, jJp^ K> y 5 efy>t-
(TKw, rjvprjKa, yvprjicq, ^vprf^v, (or evp-).
528. N. From ffmy/u (ara-), se, we have both ctor^/oj (older
form) and IOTT/AO; (through perf. ea-rrjKa) ; and from perf. eotKa,
resemble, CWKI;.
ATTIC REDUPLICATION.
529. Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o, followed
by a single consonant, reduplicate the perfect and plu-
perfect by prefixing their first two letters, and length-
ening the following vowel as in the temporal augment.
This is called Attic reduplication. E.g.
'Apow, plough, dp->7po/wu; /x,eo>, vomit, e/jny/x-CKa; eAey^w, prove,
cXrjXeyjjuai', cAaww (eAa-), drive, eA^AaKa, eA^Aa/xax; CIKOIXO, Aear,
aKi^Koa. For the pluperfect, see 533.
530. N. The Attic reduplication (so called by the Greek gram-
marians) is not peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer.
531. N. Other verbs which have the Attic reduplication are
dyecpw, dAei<o>, dAeco, eyeipoo, cpeiSw, epxo/xat, (rOi<a, oAAv/u, o/JivvfU,
opwro-w, </>ep<o. See also, for Ionic or poetic forms, atpew, dAdo/>uu,
dAvKTD, dpaptitTKOD, epetVco, e;(cu, ^/xvw, (6Su-) oSoaSvcr/xat, o^a>, opau
(oTrawra), ope'yw, opvvfju. (op-).
128 INFLECTION. [532
5. N. *Eyeip<D (eyep-), rowse, has 2 perf. eyp-ijyopa (for ey-^yop-a,
643), but perf. mid. ey-^yep/xai.
533. By strict Attic usage, the pluperfect takes a temporal
augment in addition to the Attic reduplication. Thus, OKOVCU,
hear, OLKT/JKOCL, plup. rjKrjKori', so aTr-ooAwAei (of a.7r-oAAv/u,t, aTr-dAwXa),
w/xo>/xoKCt (of OfJivvfAL, 6/xw/AOKa) , and Si-eopwpvKTO (of oVopvoxroo,
Si-opwpvy/xat) occur in Attic prose. See also Homeric pluperfects
of eAxxwco and epei'Sw.
But the MBS. and the editions of Attic authors often omit the
additional augment, as in eA-^Ae'y/wyv (487, 2).
REDUPLICATED AORISTS.
534. N. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods
and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; a^
7re'<pcuW from <pdo>, tell; ircmOav from 7rei'0a> (7U0-), persuade
TerapTTO^v (646) from repTrco, delight; KK\6/j.rjv and Ke/cXo/icvov
(650) from KeAo/ouu, command ; ypapov from dpapib-Kw (dp-), /oiVj
(531); wpopov from opvv/xt (op-), rouse; TreTraAwv (partic.) from
TroAAo) (?raA.-), shake; KeKa/xa> (subj.) from Ka/uvo> (/<a/x,-), so AeAci^
from Xayxavw; Tre^iSeo-^at, inf. from ^et'So/xai (<^iS-), spare, so
Xt-XaOecrOai, Xe-AayScV^at. In the indicative a syllabic augment
may be prefixed to the reduplication ; as eKc/cXo/A^v, %Trt<f>vov (from
535. N. The second aorist of ayw, /eac?, has a kind of Attic
reduplication (529), which adds the temporal augment in the
indicative. Thus -^y-ay-ov (ay-ay-), subj. aydyw, opt. dydyot/xt,
inf. dyaycti/, part, dyaycov ; mid. ^yayd/XTyv, dydyw/xui, etc., all in
Attic prose. See also the aorists ^j/ey/ca and rjvtyKov (from stem
CVCK-, ev-evcK-, cveyK-) of ^>ep(o, the Homeric dAaA.KOv (for dA-aXc/c-ov)
of aAea>, i^arc? o^ and eveviTroi/ or rjviTr-aTT-ov of VLTTT<D (CVITT-), chide.
See also epu/cco, ^pvK-aK-ov.
REDUPLICATED PRESENTS.
536. A few verbs reduplicate the present by prefixing the
initial consonant with t; as yi-yvwoTcou (yvo-), know, rtrOrjfJii (^e-),
/?<, yi-yvofjuai (for yi-yei/-o/u), become.
For these see 651 and 652, with 794, 2.
E AS AUGMENT OR REDUPLICATION BEFORE A VOWEL.
537. 1. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the
syllabic augment, as if they began with a consonant. These
verbs also have a simple c for the reduplication. When
another c follows, ee is contracted into a. E.g.
543] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 129
, push, (ocra, ewoyzai, IwaBrjv] aAtcr/co/wu, be captured,
, 2 aor. euAwj/ (or ijAwi/) ; ayvv^i (ay~)> break, taa, 2 pf.
laya ; epSw, do, Ionic, 2 pf. lopya ; wveojaai, 6w?/, ewvov/xryi/, etc. ;
e#ia>, accustom, ei0ra, ei0t/ca (from ee#-) ; eaw, permit, eidaa, eid/co,;
6X^, toe, ei^oi/ (from e-exov).
2. These verbs are, further, eAtoxfw, cXKoo, oro), epyao/>uxi, IpTrw
or epTTV^o), eoTiaco, t^/xt (e-), with the aorists e!8ov and elAov (atpew) ;
the perfects eta>0a (with irregular ci), Ionic ew^a (^-), and toiKa
(IK-, etK-), and plpf. eicrrij/o; (for e-eo-r-) of To-r^/xt. See also Ionic
and poetic forms under ai/Savw, aTrrw, et'8o/xat, etXtu, etTrov, cipa>,
eXTTO), evvu/xt, ?a>, and e^o/xat.
538. N. 'Opaw, .see, and dv-otyco, open, generally take the tem-
poral augment after e ; as ewpoov, ewpd/ca (or eopa/ca), ctupd/u,at
(with the aspirate retained) ; oWwyov, dv-ew^a (rarely i^votyov,
rjvoia, 544). Homer has e?yvSavoi/ from aVSaW, please; cwvo^oet
imp. of otvo^oeco, joowr wine; and 2 plpf. wA.7ret and ewpyei from
IATTW and epSco. 'Eopra^w, ^eep holiday (Hdt. 6praa>), has Attic
imp. ewpra^ov.
539. N. This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs
originally began with the consonant f or a-, which was afterwards
dropped. Thus eidov, saw, is for epidov (cf. Latin vid-i} ; copya is for
pepopya, from stem pepy-, cf. Eng. work (German WerK). So ^PTTW,
creep, is for ff-ep-rro) (cf. Latin serpo), with imperf. t-vepirov, e-epwov,
elpirov (see 86); and %w, 7iave, is for o-exw, whence imp. t-<rexov, e-
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION OF COMPOUND VERBS.
540. In compound verbs (882, 1) the augment or re-
duplication follows the preposition. Prepositions (except
nrepL and TT/OO) here drop a final vowel before e. E.g.
(133, 1); K-/3aAAa>, e-e/?aAAov (63); crvA-Aeyw, ow-eAeyoi/ ;
o-w-eVAeKov (78, 1) ; o^vy-^ew, o-w-ex eoi/ > o"vy-K^VKa ; crv-
u, o-w-(7Keva^oi/ (81); a7ro-/^aAAw, d,7r-e^aAAov ; dva-^8atVo>,
; but 7rept-ey8aAAov and Trpo-eAeyov.
541. N. IIpo may be contracted with the augment; as TT/OOV-
Aeyoi/ and Trpovfiaivov, for TrpoeAeyov and TrpoeySatvov.
542. N. "E* in composition becomes e before c; and ev and
(rvv resume their proper forms if they have been changed. See
examples in 540.
543. N. Some denominative verbs (861), derived from nouns
or adjectives compounded with prepositions, are augmented or
130 INFLECTION. [644
reduplicated after the preposition, like compound verbs; as V
TTTCv<i> (from VTTOTTTOS), suspect, vTTWTTTeuoi/, as if the verb were from
VTTO and OTTTCIXO ; aTroAoyeo/xat, defend one's self, aTT-eAoyiycra/x^i/ ; see
also fKK\ricna.o). Hapavo/xeo), transgress law, Traprjvofwvv, etc., is
very irregular. Kar^yopeeo (from KaT?Jyopos), accuse, has Karryyd-
pow (not e/cari/ydpow). See Statraa) and Std/coi/eco in the Catalogue
of Verbs.
Such verbs are called indirect compounds (882, 2).
544. N". A few verbs take the augment before the preposition,
and others have both augments; as Ka0eojouu, sit, /ca0eeTo;
CKO.OLOV ', KaOevSw, sleep, KaOev8ov and KaOrjvSov (epic
avt\(j), i^vet^o/xryi/, ^i/e(r^o/x?yv (or ^vcr^d/xiyj/) ; a<j>trjfJiL, a<j>tr)V or
See also d/>t</)tvvv/xt, d/x^>tyvoeo), d/XTrtV^o/xat, i/o^Xea>, and
/3r)T(a, dispute, impf. i)/i,<i(r/?^TOw and ^/x^etr^row (as if the
last part were -o^rco)).
545. 1. Indirect compounds of Suo--, i7, and occasionally
those of 6v, weZZ, are augmented or reduplicated after the ad-
verb, if the following part begins with a short vowel.
AvoupccrTect), 6e displeased, Suo^peorovv ; cvepycreo), c?o
tvr)pyTOW or evepyeVow.
2. In other cases, compounds of 8v<r- have the augment or
reduplication at the beginning, as Suo-Tv^eo) (from Svcr-rv^iys,
unfortunate), cSvvTvxovv, SeSuorvx'/'" 1 5 an( i those of ev generally
omit the augment.
546. Other indirect compounds are augmented or redu-
plicated at the beginning; as oiKo8o/xew, build (from OIKO-
Sdftos, house-builder) , <uKo8d/x,ovi/, wKoSdjLuyo'a, wKoSd/x^rat. See,
however, 68o7rotea>.
OMISSION OF AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION.
547. Homer and the lyric poets often omit both the syllabic
and the temporal augment; as 6/xtAeoj/, X W > ^ K (^ or
548. Herodotus often omits the temporal augment of the
imperfect and aorist, and the syllabic augment of the pluperfect.
He never adds the temporal augment to the Attic reduplication
in the pluperfect (533). He always omits the augment in the
iterative forms in O-KOV and O-KO/WJV ; as XdfitcrKov, X <TKOV (778).
549. The Attic tragedians sometimes omit the augment in
(lyric) choral passages, seldom in the dialogue.
663]
ENDINGS.
131
550. The reduplication is very rarely omitted. But Homer has
f rom 5e?x/u, for 5e5<?xarcu, receive, and a few other cases.
Herodotus occasionally fails to lengthen the initial vowel in the per-
fect; as in KaTapp&dirjKas (for
ENDINGS.
551. The verb is inflected by adding certain endings to
the different tense stems. Those which mark the persons
in the finite moods are called personal endings. There is
one class of endings for the active voice, and another for
the middle and passive ; but the passive aorists have the
active endings.
There is also one set of endings in each class for primary
tenses, and one for secondary tenses.
552. The personal endings of the indicative, subjunctive,
and optative, which are most distinctly preserved in verbs
in fu and other primitive forms, are as follows :
ACTIVE.
Primary
Tenses.
Sing. 1. P.I
2. s (o-i), (0a)
3. <ri (TI)
Dual 2. TOV
3. TOV
Plur. 1. (itv (|ws)
2. T
3. vo-i (VTI), oxrt
MIDDLE
AND PASSIVE.
Secondary
Tenses.
Primary
Tenses.
Secondary
Tenses.
V
|tai
Fl v
s
o-at
o-o
-
Tttl
TO
TOV
Tt]V
o-0ov (0ov)
o-0ov (0ov)
o-0ov (0ov)
0-0TJV (0T]V)
|MV (|iS)
T
0-06 (06)
o-06 (8c)
v, <rav
vrai
VTO
553. The personal endings of the imperative are as fol
lows :
ACTIVE.
Sing. Dual. Plur.
2. 01 TOV T
3. TW TWV VTWV Or Toxrav
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Dual. Plur.
0-0 0-00V (00V) <T0 (06)
0-0W (0) cr9u>v(6wv) o-0wv (0wv)
or
o-0wo-av (0wo- av
132 INFLECTION. [554
554. The endings of the infinitive are as follows :
ACTIVE : v (contracted with preceding to eiv),
vcu, sometimes cvai (probably for Fcvcu) .
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE : <r0<u (primitive 0cu).
555. For the formation of the participles and the verbals in
TOS and reos, see 770-776.
REMARKS ON THE ENDINGS.
556. 1. Only verbs in /u have the primary endings pi and m
in the indicative active. For ju in the optative, see 731. The
original <n of the second person singular is found only in the epic
CO--O-L, ihou art (807, 1). a (originally perfect ending) appears in
olvOa (for ol8-0a) from otSa (820) and in rjv-Oa from dpi (806);
whence (<r)0a in many Homeric forms (780, 4; 787, 4), and rarely
in Attic (as <[(f>T]-(r@ci) . In the third person singular TL is Doric,
as in Ti6r)-TL for TL@r]-(ri ; and it is preserved in Attic in ea-rt, is.
2. A first person dual in ptOov is found three times in poetry :
7repiS<o/*e0oi/, subj. of Tre/oi&'Sw/xi, 11. 23, 485; A.eA,ei)u,/x,e(9ov, from
A.ei7ra>, S. EL 950 ; 6p/x<o/i,e0oi/, from 6/o//,aa>, S. Ph. 1079. Generally
the first person plural is used also for the dual.
3. In Homer TOV and <rOov are sometimes used for rrjv and o-Qrjv
in the third person dual of past tenses. This occurs rarely in the
Attic poets, who sometimes have rt]v for TOV in the second person
The latter is found occasionally even in prose.
4. In the first person plural /ACS is Doric. The poets often have
fji<T6a for utOa (777, 1).
5. In the third person plural vvi always drops v (78, 3) and the
preceding vowel is lengthened ; as in \vov<n for Xvo-vvt. The more
primitive VTL is Doric ; as <j>ipo-vri (Latin ferunt) for
1 A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the
primitive verb be (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin es-),
as it appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and
Lithuanian (the most primitive modern language, still spoken on the
Baltic), will illustrate the Greek verbal endings.
SINGULAR.
Sanskrit, Older Greek. Latin. Old Slavic. Lithuanian.
1. as-mi 4(i-(i,C (for r-fu) [e]s-um yes-m' es-mi
2. asi lor-o-C es yesi esi
3. as-ti Icr-rC es-t yes-t' es-ti
PLURAL.
1. s-mas 4<r-p,e'v (Dor. el^s) [e]s-u-mus yes-mi es-me
2. s-tha 4o-H es-tis yes-te es-te
3. s-a-nti 1-vrC (Doric) [e]s-u-nt s-u-t* es-ti
559] TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OF INFLECTION. 133
6. t seldom appears in the imperative, except in the second
aorist active of /xi-forms (755), and in the aorist passive, which
has the active forms (551).
In the third person plural of the imperative the endings VTWV
and <rOa>v (6a>v) are used in the older and better Attic.
7. The primitive middle forms Oov, Oyv, Oc, Oai, etc. appear in
the perfect and pluperfect after consonants ; as TeVpt<-0e (rpift-a)).
See 489.
TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OP INFLECTION.
SIMPLE AND COMPLEX TENSE STEMS.
557. Tense stems are of two classes, simple and complex.
A simple tense stem is the verb stem (often in a modified
form), to which the endings are applied directly. A com-
plex tense stem is composed of the verb stem (with its
modifications) prolonged by a tense suffix (561,5), to which
the endings are applied. See 458.
558. (Simple Tense Stems.) Simple tense stems are
found
(a) in the present and imperfect, the second aorist ac-
tive and middle, and the second perfect and pluperfect, of
the conjugation in /u (500), except in the subjunctive ;
(b) in the perfect and pluperfect middle of all verbs.
E.g.
(a) From <f>rjfu (stem <f>a-), say, come </>a-/xv, <a-re, <a-vai,
-<a-re, etc. From rtdip/u (stem 0e-), put, come 2 aor. !-0e-re,
-0e-To, Oe-o-Oa), 0e-<r0ai, 0c-/Aevos, etc. ; and from the reduplicated
Ti-$e- (536) come riOe-ftey, Tide-re, Ti$e-cra.i, rcOe-rai, i-riOt-vro, i-riOf.-
<r6e, TiBe-cro, TtOe-a-OaL, etc.
(&) From Ae-Xv- (reduplicated stem of A.V-W) with the middle
endings (552) come XeAv-/xat, AeAv-crat, AeXv-cr^e, AeAv-a&u, AeAv-
/xevo? ; e-XtXv-fjirjv, c-Ae'Av-o-o, e-Ae'Av-cr^e, e-Ae'Av-vro.
559. (Complex Tense Stems.) Complex tense stems are
found in all other forms of the verb. E.g.
Avo> (stem AiJ-), has (pres.) Xvo-pev, Ave-re, Avo-/x,e0o, Ave-cr^c,
Avo-i/rat, etc. ; (fut.) Avo-o-/xei/, Avcre-re, Av(re-<7#ai, etc. ; (aor.)
-Auo-a-/xev, e-Avou-Te, l-Xvaa-o-Oe, Xixra-vQai, etc.; (1 aor. pass.)
, e-XvOrj-re, etc.
134 INFLECTION. [560
560. This distinction will be seen by a comparison of the
present indicative middle of TI'&^I (r60e-) with that of <iAeeo
in its uncontracted (Homeric) form :
T0-<rai <|>i\--(<r)ai Ti0c-<r0 <jnXe-6-o-6e
r(0-Tai <>I\^--TCU T0-vrai
561. (Tense Suffixes.) 1. In the present, imperfect, and
second aorist active and middle of the conjugation in w , in
all futures, and in the future perfect, the tense stem ends
in a variable vowel, called the thematic vowel, which is o
before /* and v and in the optative, and is elsewhere e.
This is written %- ; as Av%., present stem of Au-<o ; \nr%-,
second aorist stem of AeiV-w. In the futures and the future
perfect the thematic vowel is preceded by tr. To these
prolonged tense stems the endings are added. E.g.
Auo-/x,ev, % Awe-re, Xvovvi for Xvo-vcri (78, 3) ; 2-Awro-v, e-Ai7re-s,
e-Ai7ro-/>iei/, e-AtVc-Te; e-A67re-(r0e, e-AtVo-i/TO ; Av(ro-/xi/, Avcre-re, Avcro-
vrai. For the terminations o>, ets, in the singular, see 623.
2. The subjunctive has a long thematic vowel %-, which appears
in both conjugations; as Aeyco-^iei/, \tyrj-re, Acyw-trt for Aeyo>-i/<n
(78, 3) ; 0oi/Av for ^e-o>-/xv, ^re for Ot-Trj-re.
3. The first aorist stem has a suffix <ra-, the first perfect /ca-, and
the second perfect a-.
4. The first aorist passive has a suffix Ot- (or 0-rf), and the
second aorist passive c- (or 77-) ; as AetV-w, eAet'^-^-v,
, Xv-Oe-vrwv,
The first and second passive futures have 6rja-%- and 170-%- ; as
5. The thematic vowels, and <r%-, <ra-, Ka- (a-), 0e- (^17-) or c- (77-),
6y](T%- or 170-%-, (1-4), are called tense suffixes.
562. ( Optative Suffix.) The optative inserts a TWOOC? sw^za; t- or
177- (ie-) between both the simple and the complex tense stem and
the personal endings. (See 730.)
For the subjunctive, see 718 ; 561, 2.
TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION.
563. To the two classes of tense stems correspond gener-
ally two forms of inflection, the simple form and the
common form.
665] TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION. 135
I. THE SIMPLE FORM OF INFLECTION.
564. To this form (sometimes called the /u-form) belong
all tenses which have simple tense stems (558) and also
both passive aorists, always excepting the subjunctives
(561, 2.). It has these peculiarities of inflection:
1. The first and third persons singular of the present indicative
active have the endings /u and <n (552) ; as
2. The second aorist imperative active generally retains the
ending Oi (553) ; as /?i}-0t, go. So rarely the present ; as <f>a-0i,
say. (See 752; 755.)
3. The third person plural has the active endings cun and crav (552).
4. The infinitive active has the ending vat or ei/at (554); as
TiOfrvai, te-vat (fry/xt), t-eVat (el/xt).
5. Participles with stems in O-JT have nominatives in ovs; as
StSovs, SiSo-vT-os (see 565, 5).
6. In all forms of this class except the second aorist and the
optative, the middle endings crat and (TO regularly retain o-; as
Ti0e-<rai, -Ti'0e-o-o; XeXu-o-at, e-Xc'Xv-cro. But 2 aorist 20ov (for
0e-cro) ; optative loraio (for tora-i-cro) .
7. The passive aorists, which belong here although they do not
have simple stems (558), have the inflection of the second aorist
active of the jut-form ; Xvw, e\v-6r)-v, tJMivu* (<av-), <f>dv-r)-v, <avai,
, <f>dvr)-0<., <}>avfj-vai, <f>avcL<s (for <#)av-e-vTs), inflected like
, O-TO), ^eUTV, CTTTJ-Ol, (TTTJ-VCLL, ^t? (506).
II. THE COMMON FORM OF INFLECTION.
565. To this form belong all parts of the verb in o>, ex-
cept the perfect and pluperfect middle and the passive
aorists, and also all subjunctives. It has the following
peculiarities of inflection.
1. It has the thematic vowel and the other tense suffixes men-
tioned in 561, 1-3. For the inflection of the present and imperfect
indicative, see 623 and 624.
2. The imperfect and second aorist have the ending v in the
third person plural; the pluperfect has <rav.
3. The imperative active has no ending in the second person
singular. For ov in the first aorist, see 747.
4. The infinitive active has eiv (for e-ev) in the present, future,
and second aorist ; e-vcu in the perfect ; and <r-cu (or at) in the
first aorist. See 759-764.
5. Participles with stems in OI/T have nominatives in <oi/ (564, 5).
136 INFLECTION. [566
6. The middle endings crat and <ro in the second person singular
drop <r and are contracted with the thematic vowel ; as Auecrcu,
Avecu,- Xvrj or Avei ; e'Aveo-o, eAveo, fXvov (88, 2). For Ionic uncon-
tracted forms, see 777, 2 ; 785, 2.
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE SYSTEMS.
566. To understand the inflection of the verb, we must
know the relation of each tense stem to the verb stem, and
also certain internal modifications which the verb stem
undergoes in some of the tense systems.
FORMATION OF THE PRESENT STEM FROM THE VERB
STEM. EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS.
567. When the verb stem does not appear unchanged in the
present stem, as it does in Av-o> and Aey-o> (459), it generally
appears i.n a strengthened form; as in KOTTT-W (KOTT-), cut,
pavOdv-a) (/xa#-), learn, d/oeo-K-o) (d/oe-), please. In a few very
irregular verbs no connection is to be seen between the
present stem and the stem or stems of other tenses ; as in
<f>po) (<ep-), bear, fut. oi(reo, aor. rjveyKa.
568. Verbs are divided into eight classes with reference
to the relation of the present stem to the verb stem.
569. FIRST CLASS. (Verb Stem unchanged in Present.)
Here the present stem is formed by adding the thematic
vowel %- (565, 1) to the verb stem. E.g.
Ae'yco (Acy-), say, present stem Aey%-, giving Aeyo-/xcv, Aeye-Te,
Acyo-fuu, Arye-TOi, Ae'yo-vrai, e-Aeyo-v, e-Aeye-s, e-Ae'yc-re, e-Ac'ye-o-fle,
e-Aeyo-iTo, etc. in the present and imperfect. For w, s, in the
present active, see 623.
570. N. Some verbs of this class have the stem variable in
quantity in different tenses; as 8i5o>, <f>va), @\f(3<i>, irviyto, rpffia),
rvfftw, i/ru^o). See these in the Catalogue of Verbs. For Avo>, see 471.
571. K The pure verbs of the first class which irregularly retain a
short vowel in certain tenses are given in 639 ; those which insert a- in
certain tenses, in 640. The verbs (of all classes) which add e to the
stem in some or all tenses not of the present system (as /3otfXo/u) are
given in 657 and 658. Reduplicated presents of all classes are given in
651 and 652. These and others which are peculiar in their inflection
are found in the Catalogue of Verbs. For special peculiarities, see
, TIKTU.
578] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 137
572. SECOND CLASS. (Stems with Strong Forms.) This
class includes verbs with mute steins which have strong
forms with et (ot), ev, or 17 (31) in all tenses except in the
second aorist and second passive systems, in which they have
the weak forms in i, v, and a. The present stem adds %-
to the strong form of the stem. E.g.
Aei7r-G>, leave, 2 aor. t-Awr-oi/, 2 perf . Ae-Aoi7r-a ; <evy-a>, flee, 2 aor.
e-<f>vy-ov : TT/K-O), melt, 2 aor. pass. -TCIK-^V; with present stems XUTT%-,
rr)K%-.
573. To this class belong dAei'<-<o, epetV-w, ACI'TT-CO, 7reii0-o>, crrei'/J-to,
-nj/c-to; with Ionic or poetic epetK-oo, epevy-o/mi, T/AiJy-a); all
with weak stems in i, v, or a. See also 0o,7r- or ra^>-, stem of rc^r/Tra
and era<ov, and eiKw (eoi/ca). Tpa>y-a>, gnaw, 2 aor. t-rpay-ov, irregu-
larly has <o in the present. For pT/jy-vvfja and etoo#a (^-), see 689.
For exceptions in a few of these verbs, see 642, 2. See 611.
574. Six verbs in ew with weak stems in v belong by
formation to this class. . These originally had the strong
form in cv, which became e/r (90, 2) before a vowel, and
finally dropped p, leaving e ; as TrAe-w, sail (weak stem TT\V-\
strong stem TrAeu-, 7rAe/r-, TrAe-, present stem 7rAe%-.
These verbs are Ot-(a (weak stem $v-), run, ve-w (vv-), swim, TrAe-w
(irXv-), sail, Trve'-w (TTVV-), breathe, pe-o> (pv-), yfow, X^"* (x v ~)>P our '
The poetic o-evw (crv-), wr^re, has this formation, with v retained.
(See 601.)
575. As verbs of the second class have the strong stem in
almost all forms, this stem is here called the verb stem.
576. THIRD CLASS. (Verbs in TTTW, or T Class.) Some
labial (TT, (3, <) verb stems add r%-, and thus form the
present in TTTW; as KOTTT-W (/owr-), cut (present stem KOTTT%-),
/?Aa7rr-o> ((3\ap-),.hurt, prVr-w (pl<f>-, pt<j!>-), throw (71).
577. N. Here the exact form of the verb stem cannot be deter-
mined from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the
stem is to be found in the second aorists CKOTT^V, c/SAa/fyi/, and
cppi'<j>7)v; and in KoAvrrTO) (*aAv/?-), cover, it is seen in KaA^-ry, hut.
578. The verbs of this class are obr-to (ct<-),
, Ka/XTTT-O) (Ktt/ATT-), KAeTTT-O) (KACTT-), K07TT-(0 (/C07T-),
- Or KpV<^i>-), KV7TT-CO (/ClJ^)-), pa7TT-(O
138 INFLECTION. [579
C-KWTTTOD (O-KWTT-), T?/7TT<D (rvTT-). with Homeric and poetic
, enVro) (ewir-), and fMLp-rrrai
579. FOURTH CLASS. (Iota Class.) In this class the
present stem is formed by adding i%- to the verb stem and
making the euphonic changes which this occasions. (See
84.) There are four divisions.
580. I. (Verbs in o-o-w or rro>.) Most presents in crcrw
(TTW) come from palatal stems, K or ^ and generally y with
i becoming <r<r (TT) . These have futures in o> ; as Trpdo-o-w
(TT/oay-), do, present Stem Trpdo-o-%- (for 7rpdyi%-), fut. 7rpaa) j
/u,aAdo-o-a> (/xaActK-, Seen in /xaAaKOs), soften, fut. /xaAa^w;
Tapdo-o-w (rapa^-, seen in rapa;^), confuse, fut. rapdw ;
KYjpvo-au (KTTJPVK-), proclaim, fut. K-rjpvgw. (See 84, 1.)
581. So also dioxrw (d't'/c-), dAAao-o-oo (dAAay-), dpaao-w (dpay-),
0&7X~) ^Po"crw (Spay-), eAtWo) (Xt/<-), Opd<rcr<i> (Opa\- V),
(fw.y-), /AvWcu (/xv/c-), opv(ro-a> (opv^-), TrXTycrcroj (TrArjy-,
TrXay-), TTT^O-CTOJ (TTT?;K-), Trrvfrcrw (Trruy-), O-CITTO) (cray-), rdo-crcu
(ray-), <pacr<ra> (^>pay-), ^pio-crw (^>ptK-), {frvXaacra) (<vAa/c-). See
also epic SetStVo-o/xai, Ionic and poetic d/nvo-trcu and Trpotoxro/Acu, and
poetic d^vcrcrw and vvo-o-w. 1
582. Some presents in o-o-w (TTW) are formed from lingual
stems, which have futures in oxo or aorists in <ra ; as cpeWw,
row (from stem epcr-, seen in cpen??, rower), aor. ^peo-a. So
also dp/xorro) (fut. ap/xotro)), /SAtrro) (/xeAtr-, 66), AtVo-o/xat (Atr-),
with d^do-o-cu (Hdt.), and poetic
Many presents of this kind are formed on the analogy of verbs
with real lingual stems (see 587).
583. X. IleWa), C00&, comes from an old stem TTCK- ; while the
tenses Trei^co, 7rei//a, etc. belong to the stem TTCTT-, seen in later
TreVrw and Ionic TrcVro^i of Class III.
584. II. (Fer&smo>.) Presents in <o may be formed
in two ways :
585. (1) From stems in 8, with futures in'o-w ; as
(/co/xiS-, seen in ko/uS-?j), earn/, fut. KO/UOXO; ^>pd^
stt^ fut. <#>pd(T<o (See 84, 3.)
1 The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those
of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common use.
595] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 139
586. So a e p/Aoa> (ap/Ao8-), ap7raa>, eATu^a) (e'ATrtS-), epi'a> (ept8-),
, t(o (18-) with eo/xat (e8-), /m'(u, VO/AIW, ow (08-), 7reAda>,
587. N. Many verbs in o>, especially most in ao>, with futures
in o-a), were formed on the analogy of those with actual stems in 8.
(See Meyer, Gr. Gram. 521, 522.)
588. (2) From stems in y (or yy), with futures in o> ;
as <r(/>ao> (affray-), slay (ox^aTTO) in prose), fut. <r<ao>; pea)
(pey-), do (poetic and Ionic), fut. pe|o>; KXo^w (/cAayy-),
scream (cf. clango), fut. KAdya>. (See 84, 3.)
589. So Kpaw (icpay-), craATrt'^o) ((raATTiyy-), o-rt'^co (arty-) ; with
poetic oAaAaa), /3da, /3pia>, ypv^co, eAcAti^o), Kpt'^co, /AV^OJ, grumble?
590. N. Some verbs in a> have stems both in 8 and y; as
7rai'w (770.18-, Traty-), p/ay, fut. 7rcuov/xi (666), aor. ZTTCLKTO.. See
also poetic forms of a e p7raa> and vatrcrcu. (See 587.)
591. N. Nia>, wa.s/j, fut. Wi^<o, forms its tenses from a stem
i/t/3-, seen in Homeric i/tVro/xat and later VITTTCD.
592. III. (Enlarged Liquid Stems in Present.} Of these
there are three divisions :
593. (1) Presents in AAoo are formed from verb stems in A
with i%- added, At becoming AA ; as o-reAAw, send, for o-rcA-i-oo ;
dyye'AAw, announce, for dyyeA-t-o> ; cr^aAAw, trip up, for tr<aA-i-a>;
present stems o-reAA%-, etc. (See 84, 4.)
See oAAojuiai (aA-), /?aAAa> (/8aA-), ^aAAco (^aA-), oxeAAo) (oKeA-),
TraAAo) (TraA-), TeAAw (rcA-), with poetic 8at8aAA<o, eaAAco, o-/cAAa>,
Ti'AAa).
594. (2) Presents in awo and aipw are formed from verb
stems in oV and ap- with i%- added.
Here the i is transposed and then contracted with a to at; as
<aiVw (<ai/-), show, for <av-i-<o (present stem ^>atv%-), future <ai/w ;
(x a p-)> rejoice, for ^ap-t-co. (See 84, 5.)
595. So ev<pa/co (6v<^)pav-), KepSatVco (icepSav-), /xatvoftat (/xav-),
(/xtav-), (rcu'vco (^av), ^rypaivco (^r;pav-), 7rot/txatVo> (Trot/xav-),
patVo> (pav-), (ratVo) (aav), (ny/AcuW (crr;/xav-), rerpati/o) (rerpav-),
iMJxiivw (v<av-), xpatvw (xpav-) ; with poetic KpaiVa) (Kpav), TraTTTatVw
(TraTrrav-), Trtatva) (?rtav-). Aipw (dp-), Ka^atpw (Ka0ap-), Te/c/aatpo-
fxat (rcK/xap-), with poetic evat'pw (evap-), e^^atpo) (e^ap-), (ratpw
(aap-).
140 INFLECTION. [596
596. (3) Presents in eivw, pa>, ti/w, I/aw, vv<a, and vpa> come
from stems in ev, ep, tv, ip, vi/, and up, with t%- added.
Here the added i disappears and the preceding e, t, or v is
lengthened to , Z, or v ; as reti/co (rev-), stretch, for rcv-t-w ;
Ketpw (*ep-), sAear, for Kep-i-w; Kpivco (Kpu/-), judge, for Kptv-i-to;
d/x/ui/co (dfiw-), ware? q/f, for d/xw-t-w ; oaipto ((rvp-), draw, for
597. So yeiVo/xai (yev-)> KretVo) (KTCV-), and poetic 0eivco
ayctpa) (dyep-), Setpw (8c/o-), cyetpw (eyep-), ^/xcipo) (f/xep-),
, <f>0eip<a (<f>0ep-), o-Treipa) (o-Trep-), with poetic Tretpw
(rivofjiai (atv-), atCT^wto (at(r^vi^-), 6apcrvv<a (Oapuvv-},
TrXvva) (TrXw-), fjuaprvpo/jiai (/xaprvp-), oAo^vpo/xai
OtKTtpa) (oiKrep-), joz^ (commonly written oiKretpco),
is the only verb in tp<o.
598. N. *O</>iXto (6<^>cX-), 5e obliged, owe, follows the analogy
of stems in ev, to avoid confusion with o<e'AAw (o<eA-), increase ;
but in Homer it has the regular present 6<e'AA<o. Homer has
dXofMUL, press, from stem X-.
599. N". Verbs of this division (III.) regularly have futures
and aorists active and middle of the %mW form (663). For excep-
tions (in poetry), see 668.
600. N". Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this
class ; as <$e/x,o> and Sepw in Class I. For /&uW etc. in Class V.,
see 610.
601. IV. (Stems in av.) Here belong KO.IW, burn, and
K\GLI<D, weep (Attic also /<d<o and /cAdco). The steins KO.V- and
K\av- (seen in Kavcrco and KXavo-o/xai) became Ka.pi- and
whence K<U- and /cAai- (90, 2). (See 574.)
602. N. The poets form some other presents in this way ; as
(5o/r-), burn, vaiw (W/r-), swim. So, from stems in ao--, /xat'o/zcu (/ia<r-,
jtiaa-t-, /uat-), see&, Salopou (Sao--), divide. 'Oirvlw, marry, has stem <5?rv-,
whence fut. <57rwrw.
FIFTH CLASS. (N Class.) (1) Some verb stems
are strengthened in the present by adding v before the
thematic vowel %-; as <f>0dv-a> (<f>0a-), anticipate (present
stem <f>0av%-) ; <0iV-o> (<&-)> waste; 8aKv-o> (8a/c-), 6^e;
/cap,v-o) (Ka/x-) ; 5e weary j re/av-w (re/x-), C%^.
604. So /Wi/w (^8a-, ^8av-, 610), TTWO (TTI-, see also 621),
(TI-), Svi/<o (with 8vo>), Horn, ^vvw (with ^uw), rush : for
, see 612.
612] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 141
605. (2) (a) Some consonant stems add av;
(a/xapr-), err (present Stem a/xapTcu/%-); aitrfldV-o/xat (ato-0-),
perceive; j3X.aa-Ta.v-tt> (ftXao-r-), sprout.
(6) Here, if the last vowel of the stem is short, another
nasal (/A before a labial, v before a lingual, y before a pala-
tal) is inserted after this vowel; as Aav0dV-o> (Aa0-, Aav0-),
escape notice (XavOav%-) ; Aati/?aV-a> (Aa/?-, Aa//,/?-), afce; 0ty-
ydVw (0ty-> &yy-)> touch.
606. So avaV-a> (with ca>-<o), 8ap0dV-eo (8ap$-), a7r-x#aV-o/xai
( e> X^~)> t^av-cu (with ?-a>), otSdV-eo (ot-), oAio-tfav-w (oAtcr#-), o<At-
>j-Kav-a> (o<A-, 6<j>\L(TK-, 614) ; with poetic dAiTatVo/xat (dA.tr-, 610),
dA<dV<D (aA.<^>-) epi8atV-a) (epiS-). With inserted v, y, or /A, aV8av-a>
(a8-), Kiy^avco, epic Kt^avco (KI^-), Aay^av-a> (Aa^-), /x,av^ai/-a> (/xa^-),
Trw&o'-o/ial (TTV^-), rvy^av-w (TV^-)* w ith poetic ^ai/SaV-to (x^-)
Jpvyyav-o) (^pvy-).
607. (3) A few stems add re : /fcji/e-w (with /3v-o>), stop i(p,
tKi/-o/x,at (with f/c-w), COWie, Kwe-co (KV-), kiss; also d/XTT-io-xve-
o)u,ai, ^ave on, and vTr-io-x^e-o/xat, promise, from to-^-a).
608. (4) Some stems add w or (after a vowel) i/w. These
form the second class (in I/V/AI) of verbs in /At, as Setxvif-tu
(8K-), sftow, Kcpavi/v-/At (Kcpa-), wi?'a;, and are enumerated in
797, 1. Some of these have also presents in wo>. (See 502, 2.)
609. (5) A few poetic (chiefly epic) verbs add i/a to the stem,
forming presents in vrj/jiL (or deponents in va/xat) : most of these have
presents in i/a<o ; as <$a/>tv>7/Ai (Sa/x,-/a-), also Sa/Avaoo, subdue. These
form a third class of verbs in /u, and are enumerated in 797, 2.
610. N. BaiW (/?a-, /?av-), #0, and o(r^>pa/o/>tat (o<r<p-, oa^pav-),
smell, not only add j/ or av, but lengthen av to atv on the principle
of Class IV. (594). They belong here, however, because they do not
have the inflection of liquid verbs (599) . See also Kep&xtVw, patixo,
rerpaiW, with Homeric dAtratVo/xat (dAir-, dAtrav-).
611. N. Some stems of this class lengthen a short vowel (on
the principle of Class II.) in other tenses than the present ; as
Aati/?aVa> (Aa/?-), fut. AT^OJUXH (\r)f3-) : so SaKvw, AayxaVoo, Aav-
dava>, rvyxavw. See also epvyydVto, ep^o/xat, and irvvOavofMii.
Three verbs in yu/xt (608), evyvvxu, TTTJyi/vttt, prjywtw, belong
equally to Class II. and Class V.
612. N. 'EAaww (eAa-), drive, is irregular in the present stem
(probably for cAa-w-cu). "OA-Av-tu (oA-), destroy, adds Av (by
assimilation) instead of vv to the stem oA-.
142 INFLECTION. [613
613. SIXTH CLASS. ( Verbs in ovcw.) These add <TK%- or
ivK%- to the verb stein to form the present stem ; as
yypd-o-KO) (yrjpa-), grow old (present Stem yqpa.<TK%-)\ evp-LcrK(*
(evp-),Jind (evpTK%-) ; dpe-ovcco (ape-), please, o-Tep-io-KG) (o-rep-),
deprive.
614. These verbs are, further, dX-ta-KOfJuu, d/x/SA-cb-Ko), d/ATrXaK-
tTK(o (poetic), dvdA-t'<JK(o, a.7ra.(f>-LcrKQ) (poet.), dpap-tovca> (poet.),
(3d-<TK(i> (poet.), /3i-/?pa)-0-K(D (fipo-), dvaj3na-<rKOfJML (/8to-), /?Ato-
<7/ca> (/xoA.-, /3A.O-), yeywv-io-Kco, yt-y/u>-<rKaj (yvo-), oV8pd-<JK<o (Spa-),
7ravp-i(TK(i) (poet.), iy/:?d-(rK<o, $vrf-<rKU (Ocw-, Ova-}, Opw-(TKo> (Oop-,
Opo-), iXd-aKOfjuu, fjLeOv-<TK<j), KLK\rj-(rij) (xA.^) (poet.), KV-iarKOfJuii
(KV-), fU-fwrj-o-KU) (/x,va-), Trt-Trt'-o-Kw (Ion. and Find.), 7rt-7rpd-o-Ko>,
TTKJXLV-O-KW (<^>ai)-), declare (Hoiu.), Tt-rpw-cr/co) (rpo-), ^>d-o-K<o,
Xd-o-Koo. See also the verbs in 617. 'O<A-io7cdVo> (o<j{)X-) takes KTAC
and then adds av (606).
615. N". Many presents of this classs are reduplicated (536) ;
as yi-yi/(ooTK<o (yvo-). See 652, 1. 'Ap-ap-tV/co) has a form of Attic
reduplication (529).
616. N. Final o of the verb stem becomes w, and final d sometimes
becomes a or 77; as in yiyvtba-KO} (y^o-), didpdffKw (5/>a-); dvyvKw (Qav-,
6va-}, Doric dvycrKu (for ^m-ia-Kw).
617. N. Three verbs, dXi5-<<> (dXu/c-), avoiW, 8idd-<rK<a (5i5ax-),
^ec^, and XC-O-KW (Xa/c-), speaA;, omit K or x before <r/cw. So Homeric
^CTKOJ or frncw (^i'/c- or k-), liken, and Tirtfo-Ko/wu (TV%- TU/C-), for Tt-ru/c-
0-Ko/ucu, prepare. See also pio-yw (f or /uy-ovcw) and 7r<<rxw (for 7ra0-<rKw).
618. N. These verbs, from their ending o-/cw, are called inceptive,
though few have any inceptive meaning.
619. SEVENTH CLASS. -(Presents in /u wiYfc simple stems.)
Here the verb stem, sometimes reduplicated (652), without
the thematic vowel, appears as the present stem. E.g.
Q-rj/jLi (<a-), say, <a-/Av, <a-re; TtOrjfJii (^e-)> jt>w<, TiOe-pfv,
TL@-T, T60e-fuu, TiOe-fJitOa, c-rCfa-otic, c-TiOe-vro; StSco/u (So-),
For the strong form of these stems in the singular of the
active, see 627.
620. All verbs in you, except those in vvju under 608, and the
epic forms in vyju (or va/Aai) with va added to the stem (609 ), are
of this class. They are enumerated in 794. (See 502, 1.)
621. EIGHTH CLASS. (Mixed Class.) This includes the
few irregular verbs which have any of the tense stems so
essentially different from others, or are otherwise so pecul-
624] PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143
iar in formation, that they cannot be brought under any
of the preceding classes. They are the following :
atpco (aipe-, eX-), take, fut. aip^cra), 2 aor. elXov.
e?8oi/ (/:t8-, 18-), saw, vidi, 2 aorist (no present act.) ; 2 pf. oT8a,
fcnozy (8:20). Mid. ei&>/xai (poet.). EtSoi/ is used as 2 aor. of
6pao> (see below).
etTrov (CITT-, ep-, pe-), spofce, 2 aor. (no pres.) ; fut. (epe'to) epw,
pf. et-piy-/ca. The stem ep- (pe-) is for /rep- (/rpe-), seen in Lat.
ver-bum (649). So eV-eVo).
epxo/xal (epx~> eXe:u$-, eXv#-, eX0-), #0, fut. cXevfro/Aai (poet.),
2 perl. eX^Xvfla, 2 aor. ^Aflov." The Attic future is et/u,
(808).
e<70i<t> (e<r0-, e-, <ay-), eai, fut. ISo/xat, 2 aor. !<ayoi>.
opaco (opa-, OTT-, ftS-), see, fut. oi/'o/xat, pf. eopa/ca, 2 aor. et
(see above).
TrouT^a) (?ra^-, TTCV^-), suffer, fut. Treuro/wu, 2 pf. ireTrovOa, 2 aor.
4Va0ov. (See 617.)
Trtvo) (TTI-, TTO-), drink, fut. Trtb/Aat, pf. TreTreo/ca, 2 aor. CTTIOV. (See
604.)
Tpe^co (rpe^-, Spa/x,-), rwn, fut. Spa/xou/xat, pf. SeSpa/xr/Ka (657),
2 aor. ISpa/xov.
</>epo> (<ep-, 01-, eveK-, by reduplication and syncope cVevcK,,
eveyK-), Jear, /ero; fut. oto-w, aor. ^veyKa, 2 p. cV-TJvox-a. (643; 692),
V-^vey-/Aai, aor. p. rjv^Ofjv.
For full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. See also the
irregular verbs in /xt (805-820).
622. N. Occasional Homeric or poetic irregular forms appear even
in some verbs of the first seven classes. See dKax^w, dX^w, ylyvo/j.ai,
and xai'Sdj'w in the Catalogue.
INFLECTION OP THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
623. (Common Form.) The present indicative adds the
primary endings (552) to the present tense stem in %-, ex-
cept in the singular of the active, where it has the termi-
nations w, s, et, the origin of which is uncertain. The
first person in o> is independent of that in /xt, and both the
forms in <o and in /u were probably inherited by the Greek
from the parent language. For the third person in own (for
ovo-t), see 556, 5.
624. Of the two forms of the second person singular middle
in y and et (565, 6), that in et is the true Attic form, which was
144 INFLECTION. [626
used in prose and in comedy. But the tragedians seem to have
preferred the form in y, 1 which is the regular form in the other
dialects, except Ionic, and in the later common dialect. This
applies to the future middle and passive and to the future perfect,
as well as to the present.
625. BouXo/xai, wish, and oto/xat, think, have only fiovXu and otei,
with no forms in y. So oif/opai, future of opdw, see, has only OI/KI.
626. The imperfect adds the secondary endings to the
tense stem in %-. See the paradigm of \vo>.
627. (Mi-form.) Here the final vowel of the stem is long
(with 77, w, v) in the singular of both present and imperfect
indicative active, but short (with a or e, o, v) in the dual and
plural, and also in most other forms derived from the present
stem. This change from the strong stem in the indicative
singular to the weak stem in other forms is one of the most
important: distinctions between the ^it-form and that in w.
The endings here include ju, s, <n in the singular of the present
and crav in the third person plural of the imperfect. (See 506.)
628. The third person plural of the present active has
the ending ao-t (552), which is always contracted with a
(but never with c, o, or v) of the stem ; as torao-i (for lo-ra-
d<ri), but TiOe-a<n, SiSo-a<n, SeiKvv-a<n.
629. The only verbs in fu with consonant stems are the irregu-
lar ei/xt (r-), be, and ^iai (170--), sit. (See 806 and 814.)
630. Some verbs in rjfjij. and to/u have forms which follow the
inflection of verbs in e<o and oo>. Thus the imperfect forms entfas
and eTi0ei (as if from ri0eV), and e&Sow, cSi'Sovs, eSi'Sov (as if from
<5i8oa>), are much more common than the regular forms in 775, rj and
<av, <os, <o. So rivets for TC'&JS in the present. (See also 741.)
631. Some verbs in v/u have also presents in VCD; as
632. Awafuxt, can, and iri<rra/i<u, know, often have eSwoo (or
vvu)) and $vtar0 for cSuj/curo and ^Trttrrao-o in the imperfect, and
occasionally Swot and eTriorci for Swao-ot and eTrtoracrai in the
present.
633. For the present (with the other tenses) in the dependent
moods and the participle, see the account of these (718-775).
1 Kirchhoff and Wecklein in Aeschylus, and Bergk in Sophocles,
give only the form in #,
639J MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 145
MODIFICATION" OF THE VERB STEM IN CERTAIN
TENSE SYSTEMS.
634. Before discussing the other tense systems (II.-IX.), we
must mention some modifications which the verb stem regularly
undergoes in certain forms. Mere irregularities, such as are found
only in verbs of the eighth class (621), are not noticed here.
635. (Lengthening of Vowels.) Most stems ending in a
short vowel lengthen this vowel before the tense suffix
(561, 5) in all tenses formed from them, except the present
and imperfect. A and e become 17, and o becomes o> ; but a
after e, t, or p becomes a (29). E.g.
Ti/xdw (rZ/za-), honor, Ti/x?7-cra), ertp-rj-cra,
IrlfJirj-Orjv ; <iAea) (<iAe-), love, </>iA?/(rto
fjuu, <f>i\rj@r)V ; &r)X.6a> (8r/Ao-), shoiu,
8a.Kpvo), SaKpv(T(a. But edco, a<ra>; lao/xat, tacro/xai; Spaw,
eSpdcra, Se'Spd/ca.
636. This applies also to stems which become vowel stems by
metathesis (649); as /3dAA<o (/2aA-, /3Aa-), /Arow, pf.
Ka/xvw (KCI/A-, /c/uta-), /a&yr, KfK^rj-Ka', or by adding e (657) ; as
Ao/wxi ((3ov\-, ySovAe-), M7/sA, /?ovA7y-(7o/
637. For the long stem vowel in the singular of the present
and imperfect indicative of verbs in /xt, see 627.
638. N. *A/</ooao/Acu, y^ear, has aKpodcro/xat etc. ; XP**-**** 9 e oracles,
lengthens a to >;; as xptjcrd) etc. So rp^crw and er/oiycra from stem
rpa- ; see TerpatVoj, iore.
639. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary
to the general rule (635) ; as yeAaw, laugh, yeAao-o/xai, eye-
Aacra ; apxeo), suffice, ap/ceo-co, rfpKeora J /xa^o/aat (/Lta^e-) , Jight,
/xa^ecro/nat (Ion.), e/jta^co-a/XTyv.
(a) This occurs in the following verbs : (pure verbs) aya/xai,
diceo/xat, aAew, dvvw, d/>/cea>, dpow, dpvw, yeAdtu, eA/cvw (see
cAKO)), e^u,ea), epacu, ^e<o, ^Aaw, KAdco, break, c<o, TTTVO>, o~7rdtu, reAcw,
rpew, ^>Aao>, ^aAao) ; and epic aK^Se'o), KOTCW, Aoeo>, vetKtto, and the
stems (da-) and (de-) ; (other verbs with vowel stems) dpeWw
(ape-), a-X^o/mi (dx$e-) cAawcu (e'Aa-), iXdcrKOfJuiL (?Aa-) ? fjL0veria
(/xe^v-) ; also all verbs in awu/M and evvv^t, with stems in a and e
(given in 797, 1), with oAAv/u (6Ae-) and o/xviJ/u (6/xo-).
(&) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ-
ent tenses in the following verbs : (pure verbs) aivew, atpeco, Sec^
146 INFLECTION. [640
bind, Svo* (see 8vi/co), epuu> (epic), Ov<a, sacrifice, KoAe'co, \vt, ju,vo>,
7ro0eo>, 7roi/ea>; (other verbs) fiatvw (fta-), cvpto-Kw (evp-, eupe-),
HaxpfJMi (juux^e-), 7rfj/w (TTI-, TTO-), <j>Odv(D (<}>0a-), <J>Ow<j) (</>&-).
640. (Insertion of a.) Vowel steins which retain the
short vowel (639) and some others add <r to the final vowel
before all endings not beginning with a- in the perfect and
pluperfect middle. The same verbs have o- before Be or By in
the first passive tense system. E.g.
TeXeta, finish, TTAe-o--/Aai, eTcreAeV/x^v, ereAe'c^v, TeAeo-0iJ<ro/A<u ;
ycAaw, laugh, ey\d-a--0rjv t yeAcur0}vai ; xpaw, #^ e oracles,
641. This occurs in all the verbs of 639 (a), except dpoa>, so
far as they form these tenses ; and in the following : aKovoo, 8paa>,
Opavo), KeAevo), AcAeiico (KAr/a>), Kvaw, Kvatco, KpovtD, KvXta> (or KvA.tV8a>),
Aeva>, vea>, Acajo, ^uo>, Trato), TraAat'co, 7rava>, TrAeou, Trpfw, creto>, rtvo), Uw,
^otu, xpdu), XP^ W ' an( ^ P e tic pato). Some, however, have forms both
with and without <r. See the Catalogue.
642. (Strong Form of Stem in Second Class.) 1. Verbs
of the second class have the strong form of the stem (572),
as Aeirr- or AOITT- in AeiVw, rrjK- in TT/ACW, vev- in (ve/rw) veto, in all
tenses except in the second aorist and second passive tense
systems ; as ^>vyo>, <evo/u,ai, Trec^euya, 2<{>vyov ; AetVa), Acti/'CD,
AeAotTra, cAtTroi/ j TrjKotj Trj<i), rerrjKaj CTaKrjv 5 po (for
pvo-o/xai, eppvqv.
2. Exceptions are the perfect and aorist passive of
which are regular in Ionic, and most tenses of XD (x^~) and
(CTV-). After the Attic reduplication (529) the weak form appears;
as in dAet^xo (<iAi<-), dA-^Ai^a : see also epet/i> and epetVo). The
perfects IppvrjKa (pew) and eorty&y/wu are from stems in e- (658, 2).
643. (E changed to o in Second Perfect.) In the second
perfect system, c of the verb stem is changed to o. E.g.
Srepyo), love, eoropya; Tre/wno, send, 7re7ro/A<a ; KAeTrra), stea,
KKAo<^>a (576; 692); rpe^xo, nourish, rerpo^a; rucrtf (TCK-), ftn'n^r
forth, TCTOKO,; yiyvofjuiu, (ycv-), become, yeyora, cyeyony, ycyovo/at,
yeyovws.
So eyetpw (eyep-), eypTrjyopa (532) ; KTCIVO) (KTCV), IKTOVU (in
compos.); Acya>, collect, ctAo^a ; Tracr^to (ira.6-, trevB-),
rerpo^a;
For AetTT-w, Ae-AxHTT-a, and irctia), 7re-7roi#-a, see 31 ; 642, 1.
649] MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 147
644. (A lengthened to -q or a in Second Perfect.-) In some
verbs a of the stein is lengthened to rj or d in the second perfect.
These are ayvvfjn (ay-), &tya (Ionic l^ya) ; 0aAAa> (0aA-), re'^Aa ;
Kpao> (jcpay-), /ceKpaya ; Aaovo (ActK-), Ae'AaKa ; /xatVo/xai (fjuav),
fiefjLrjva ; (rcupcu (crap-), owrypa; <au>a> (<f>av-), Trtyrjva.
645. (E changed to a.) In monosyllabic liquid stems, e
is generally changed to a in the first perfect, perfect mid-
dle, and second passive tense systems. J.gr.
SreAAo) (oreA-), senc?, eoTaA/ca, eoraA/xai, eoraA^v, oraA^cro/Mai ;
Ketpo) (/cep-), sAear, jce'icap/xat, fKapyv (Ion.) ; orTreipa) (oTrcp-), sow,
l(T7rap/xat, O"7rdpr)v. So in 8epo>, Kreti/o), /Actpo/xat, retvo), reAAw, and
646. N. The same change of e to a (after p) occurs in
lorpa/x/xai, carpa^y, oTpa^cro/xxu (but 1 aor. (TTp<f>6r]v,
rare) ; TpeVw, turn, reVpc^/urn, fTpaarrjv (but crptyOrjv, Ion. crpa-
<f>0rjv) ; Tp<o>, nourish, rt^pa/x/xat, erpa^v (but eOptyOrjv) ', also
in the second aorist passive of KAeVrw, stea, TrAcKw, weave, and
repTTtu, delight, K\a.7rr)v, fTrXaKrjv, and (epic) cTapirrjv (1 aor. e/cAe-
<0r;v, 7r\exOrjv, Ttp<j>Qrjv, rarely epic CTap<j>Or)v). It occurs, further,
in the second aorist (active or middle) of KTCI'VW, &i7/, re/xvw, cwf,
rpcTTO), and TepTrw; viz., in ZKTOVOV (poet.), lra/u.ov, eTa/xo/xiyf, Irpa-
TTOI/, TpaTr6(jw)V, TcrapTTO/A'jyv (Horn.) ; also in several Homeric and
poetic forms (see SepKOjum, 7rep0o>, and im/cnno). For Tctvw, frdOrjv,
see 711.
647. (N of stem dropped.) Eour verbs in v<o drop v of the
stem in the perfect and first passive systems, and thus have
vowel stems in these forms :
Kpwo (/cpiv-), separate, KeVpiKa, Ke/cpi/icu, fKpiOrjv, K\LV(D (K\LV-),
incline, KK\iKa, KfcAt/xat, eKAt^ryv; TrAvfto (irAw-), wash,
7r\vOrjv, TtW (TCV-), stretch, rtraKa (645), rera/xai, era^r/v,
ra^o'o/xat. So KTtVo> in some poetic forms ; as cKTa-Orjv,
See also epic stem <ev-, </>a-. For the regular Homeric
and fKpwOrjv, see 709.
648. When final i/ of a stem is not thus dropped, it becomes
nasal y before Ka (78, 1), and is generally replaced by cr before /xai
(83); as <cuVa> (<av-), 7T<ay/x, Tre'c/xur/xcu, c^xxv^r/v. (See 700.)
649. (Metathesis.) The stem sometimes suffers metathesis (64) :
(1) in the present, as Ovy&Kd) (Oav-, Ova-), die, (616) ;
(2) in other tenses, as fidXXa) ((3a\-, /?Aa-), throw, fa
and (poetic) Sep/co/mu (8cp/c-), sec, 2 aor.
646).
148 INFLECTION. [650
650. (Syncope.) Sometimes syncope (65) :
(1) in the present, as yiyvofwi (yev-), become, for yt-yev-o/iai ;
(2) in the second aorist, as i-jrro^-rjv for e-7rer-o/x?yv ;
(3) in the perfect, as Trerai/Ku/Ai (Trera-), expand, 7rrTa/>uxi for
7re-7TTa-/xat. See <epw in 621.
651. (Reduplication.) Sometimes reduplication, besides the reg-
ular reduplication of the perfect stem (520) :
(1) in the present, as yi-yi/<oo-Kw, know, yi-yvo/xxxi, TL-OrjfJLi.
(2) in the second aorist, as 7ret0o> (jnO-), persuade, ir
(epic) ; so dyw, rjyayov (Attic).
652. 1. The following are reduplicated in the present :
(a) In Class I., yi-yvofjuai (for yL-ytv-ofJuu) ; LO~XW (for
/U,I/AI/CO (for /xi-fiei/w), poetic for /xe'i/w; TTITTTW (for Trt-Trer-w) ; TIKTO)
(for Tt-TCK-O)).
(6) In Class VI., f$i-(3pto(TKto ((3po-), yi-yvwtTKw (yvo-), St-SpdaKw
(Spa-), /xt-/xvr/o-KW (/xva-), Tri-rrpao-Kw (?rpa-), Tt-rpcocrKW (rpo-), with
poetic Trt-TTto-Kto and iri-<t>avo-K(a, and d/oapto-Kw with peculiar Attic
reduplication (615).
(c) In Class VII., the verbs in jtu which are enumerated in
794, 2.
2. For reduplicated second aorists, see 534 and 535.
653. (E added to Stem.) New stems are often formed by
adding e to the verb stem.
654. (1) From this new stem in e some verbs form the
present stem (by adding %-), sometimes also other tense
stems. E.g.
AoK-o> (So/c-), seem, pres. stem (8oKC%-, fut. 8ow; ya/x,e-w (ya/u,-),
marry, fut. ya/xoi, pf. ycya/xr/Ka; w0a> (<o#-), pwsft, fut. anno (poet.
655. These verbs are, further, yeyoWw, yr^e'w, KTVTre'w,
/txaprvpetu (also /^aprvpo/xat), ptTrrea) (also ptTTTw), ^>tAew (see epic
forms) ; and poetic SOVTTCW, eiXew, eTrau/oeto, KcAaSew, Kei/rew, Trareo-
|oiat, ptyew, trrvyeco, ropew, and ^pawr/xew. See also Tre/crew (TTC/C-,
TTCKT-).
Most verbs in &> have their regular stems in e-, as TTOIC'W (TTOIC-),
make, fut. TTOI^CTW.
656. N". A fevv chiefly poetic verbs add a in the same way to
the verb stem. See f^pv-^a.ofjua.L, yoato, Sryptaw, /xry/cao/mi, fiT^ndw,
flVKOLO/JUlL.
657. (2) Generally the new stem in c does not appear in
661] PRESENT SYSTEM. 149
the present. But in some verbs it forms special tenses ; in
others it forms all the tenses except the present, imperfect,
second perfect, and the second aorists. E.g.
BovAo/xcu, (/3ovA-), wish, /JovAiyao/xcu (/JouAe-, 636) ; alaOavo/jjat
(cuo-0-), perceive, al<r6rj(ro[juii (cua0e-), rjcrOrjiJjaL] /xevw (/xev-), remain,
(/xei/e-) ; /xa;(O/xcu (xia^-)* fight, i lit. (/xa;(e-o/xai)
658. 1. The following have the stem in e in all tenses except
those mentioned (657) : ala-OdvofJuaL (alaO-), dAew, aA0o/xai (Ion.),
a/xapravw (a/xapr-), aVSai/a> (aS-), a7r-e;(0ai/o/xai (-X^') avdi/w (au-),
aX#o/xcu, /JAaoTai/w (/?Aaor-), /3ovAo/xcu, ySocr/cw, Sew, MJanJ, e0eAw and
0e'Aw, Ipo/xat and etpo/xai (Ion.), /opw, ev8a>, evpiicrKO), eJ/'w, KeAo/xat
(poet.), KL^avw (/x-)> Aa(TKO) (AaK-), jJuavOdvoj (/xa^-), [Mxpfj.a.1, /xeSo-
/ixai, iteAAw, jU,eA<o, /xv^w, oto/txat, ot^ottat, oAwr0ai/a> (oAr^-), oAAi5/x(,
o^>Ato-/cava> (o^>A-), TreVo/xcu, aropvvfu : see poetic d/XTrAaKio-KO) and
a.Tra<f)i<TKt0, and the stem 8a-. See also KepSatVw.
2. The following have the stem in c in special tenses formed from
the verb stem or the weak stem (31) : SapOdvw (SapO-), /ixeW, i/^xw,
6<r</>patvo/xac, (6<r<p-), Tratw, Trero/xat, TreiOta (TTI^-), pea> (pv-), <TTCt)8o>
3. The following form certain tenses from a stem made by add-
ing c to the present stem without the thematic vowel: SiSaovcto,
Kadt<0, K^Sw, JcAcUO), O^O), O^>t'A(0, TT/TTTW, ^aipOt.
659. N. In ofjLvvju, swear, the stem o/x- is enlarged to o/xo- in
some tenses, as in w/xo-tra ; in aAtoxo/uu, &e captured, aA- is enlarged
to dAo-, as in dA<o<ro/xai. So rpv\o> (rpv^")' exhaust, Tpv^uHrw. So
probably otxottat, &e </oni, has stem ot^o- for oi^e- in the perfect
(cf. Ion. c^
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS AND INFLECTION OF
TENSE SYSTEMS IN THE INDICATIVE.
I. PRESENT SYSTEM.
660. The formation of the present stem and the inflec-
tion of the present and imperfect indicative have been
explained in 568-622 and 623-632.
661. The eight remaining tense stems (II. IX.) are
formed from the verb stem. This is the simplest form of
the stem in all classes of verbs except the Second, where it
is the strong f orm (575; 642).
For special modifications of certain tense stems, see 634-659.
150 INFLECTION.
For the inflection of the subjunctive, optative, and imperative
in all tenses, see 718-758; for the formation of the infinitive, see
759-769 ; and for that of the participles and verbals in -ros and
reos, see 770-776.
II. FUTURE SYSTEM.
662. (Future Active and Middle.) Vowel and mute stems
(460) add cr%- to form the stem of the future active and
middle. The indicative active thus ends in o-w, and the
middle in trofuu. They are inflected like the present (see
480). E.g.
TZ/xaoj, honor, rlfj^orw (Tt/x^(r%-) ; 3paa>, do, 8pa<ra> (635) ; KOTTTOO
(KOTT-), cut, KOI/'CO; /JXdVTW (/JXa/:?-), hurt, fj\d\j/<i>, fiXauf/ofuii (74);
ypd<f>(D, write, ypdif/<a, ypai/'o/Aai; TrXeKco, twist, TrXe^w; irpdcrtrw
(n-pdy-), do, 7rpaa>, Trpd^ofiai ; Tapacnra) (rapa^-), confuse, rapa^w,
rapd^ofjuai ', <pau> (<pa-), tell, </>paorto (for <pa8-(ra>) ; Treifloo, per-
suade, TreiVw (for 7ra0-cr<o) ; XetVw, /eaye, XcA/w, Aet^opuxi (642). So
pour, (TTrewrcD (for aTrevS-crw, 79), Tpe<^>o>, nourish, Optyat,
(95, 5).
663. (Liquid Futures.) Liquid stems (460) add e%- to
form the future stem, making forms in o and eo/wu, con-
tracted to w and ovfuxi, and inflected like <iA.w and
(492). See 482. ^.^.
(<^>ai/-), sAow, fut. (^>ave-a>) <avco, (^ave-o/>tai
((rreX-), sene?, (crreXe-cu) aTeXoi), ((TreA.-o/>iat) o-
divide, (i/e/Ae-a>) ye/xw ; Kptvo) (Kpiv-), judge, (Kptve-co)
664. N. Here e%- is for an original ecr%-, the a being dropped
between two vowels (88).
665. (Attic Future) 1. The futures of KaXew, call, and rcAc'to,
/?ras^, KoXeVw and TeXeVw (639), drop o- of the future stem, and
contract /coXe- and reAe- with co and o/xat, making KoAoi, KoXov/xai,
reXoi and (poetic) reXov/Aat. These futures have thus the same
forms as the presents.
So oXXv/xt (6X-, oXc-), destroy, has future oXeoxo (Horn.), oXe'oi
(Hdt.), oXoi (Attic). So /xa^eVo/Aat, Homeric future of ^ta^o^uxi
t, becomes /xa^ov/xt in Attic. Ka^o/xat (cS-), 5zV, has
2. In like manner, futures in atrcu from verbs in awvfu, some in
caw from verbs in CVKU/U, and some in a<7o> from verbs in a^a>, drop
<r and contract aw and e<o to w. Thus ovceSoWu/u (o-/ce8a-), scatter,
fut. o-KeSacrw, (o-fceSaw) o-KcSa) ; crropemJ/At (crrope-), spread, o-ropecrto,
(aropea)) crropa> ; /&/2aw, cattse to ^o, J3ij3do-ta, (/3i/Jaa>) ^St^a>. So
869] FIRST AORIST SYSTEM. 151
eAawco (c'Aa-), drive (612), future IXcurcu, (eXaw) e'Aw. For future
eAoco, cAoam, etc. in Homer, see 784, 2 (c).
3. Futures in rco and icro/xai from verbs in ia> of more than
two syllables regularly drop o- and insert e; then te'a> and teo/xat
are contracted to itu and lov/xat ; as K<yu'a>, carry, KO/xtVco, (/co/ziea/)
Ko/xto), Ko/xto-o/zat, (KO/XICO/UH) Ko/juovfjiaL, inflected like <iAxo, <f>i\ov-
IJULI (492). See 785, 1 (end).
4. These forms of future (665, 1-3) are called ylftic, because the
purer Attic seldom uses any others in these tenses ; but they are
found also in other dialects and even in Homer.
666. (.Done Future.) 1. These verbs form the stem of the
future middle in (re%-, and contract o-e'ofiai to crov/xcu : TrAe'co, sm7,
TrXevo-ov/xal (574) ; Tirew, breathe, irvtva-ovfjuu ; veto, swim, vewoOftai ;
/cXaito, weep, KAavcrofyuu (601) ; <evya>, ./Zee, <evoi)/Aai ;. TTITTTW, /aW,
7rc<rov//ai. See also 7raia> (590) and TrvvOdvofJuai.
The Attic has these, with the regular futures TrAcw-o/xcu, TTI/CV-
ao/xat, KAxiv(ro/>uxt, ^ev^o/xai (but never Treoxyxai).
2. These are called Doric futures, because the Doric forms
futures in tre'to, <ro), and o-eo/xat, vovfjuca.
667. N. A few irregular futures drop a of the stem, which thus
has the appearance of a present stem. Such are ^ew and
fut. of ^ew, pour; ISo/xai, from eo-^tw (e8-), ea<; TTib/xai, from
(TTI-), rfrm^: (621).
668. N. A few poetic liquid stems add cr like mute stems;
Ke'AAxo (KcX-), /anrf, iccAo-w; KV/OW, meef, Kvpo-w; opvv/Ai (op-), rowse,
opcrw. So Oepofjuu, be warmed, Horn. fut. 0ep(ro/Aai ; <jf>0etpw (^>^ep-),
destroy, Horn. fut. <0epo-<o. For the corresponding aorists, see
674 (6).
III. FIRST AORIST SYSTEM.
669. (Mrs ^4ons^ ^cft've awcZ Middle.) 1. Vowel and
mute stems (460) add era to form the stem of the first
aorist active and middle. The indicative active thus ends
in <ra, which becomes <re in the third person singular ; and
the middle ends in cra^v. E.g.
Tt/x,aw, ertjitr/o-a, Tt^cra/>i7yv (635) ; Spaw, eopatra ; KOTTTW, KO\j/a.,
; ?rpa<r<7(o, CTrpa^a, 7rpd^a.[JLrjv ', Tapdaaw, Irdpa^a ',
(for e<pa8-cra) ; Tret^w, eTrewra (74) ; aTreVSc
(for <j7Ti/&^-a) ; rp^>w, Wpetya, fOptif/dfJLrjV (95, '5) ; T^KCO,
TrAe'w, sai7, iTrAevaa (574).
For the inflection, see 480.
152 INFLECTION. [670
670. Three verbs in fjn, Sc'Sw/u (So-), give, fy/u (4-), send, and
riOriiu (#-)> put, have KOL for era in the first aorist active, giving
ISco/co,, rJKa, and ZOrjKa. These forms are seldom used except in the
indicative, and are most common in the singular, where the second
aorists are not in use. (See 802.) Even the middle forms
and cfrrfKofiriv occur, the latter not in Attic Greek (810).
671. X. Xew, pour, has aorists l^ea (Horn, l^eva) and e
corresponding to the futures ^e'w and ^eo/xat (667). EITTOV, said,
has also first aorist OTTO, ; and <epu>, bear, has -fjvf.yK.-a. (from stem
evey/c-).
For Homeric aorists like tpfoeTO', ^Swrero, Ifrv, etc., see 777, 8.
672. (Liquid Aorists.) Liquid stems (460) drop <r in era,
leaving a, and lengthen their last vowel, a to rj (after t or p
to a) and e to (89). See 482. E.g.
<$>aw(o (<f>av-), <j>r)v-a (for e<avou) ; oreAAa) (crreX-), coreiA-a
(for ecrTeX-cra) (TTfi\-dp.r)v ; dyye'AAeo (dyyeA-), announce, ^yyetAa,
tyyyeiAa/^v ; Trepaivto (Trepav-), finish, eTrepava; /AiatW (/x-tav-), s^ain,
c/xtdva; ve/xcu, divide, Ivei/xa, ei/et/xa^ryi/; Kpfva), judge, K/otva; d/xvvo),
^eep q^, ij/xuva, ^/xvva/x^i/; <j>0apa> (<f>0ep-), destroy, tyQupa. Com-
pare the futures in 663, and see 664.
673. N. A few liquid stems lengthen av to av irregularly ; as
Satvw (/cepSav-), ^a^7i, cKepSdva. A few lengthen pav to p^v ; as
TerpatVo) (rerpai/-), 6ore, ercrpiyva.
674. N. (a) Atpco (ap-), rawe, has ^pa, rjpdfjirjv (augmented) :
but d in other forms, as Spco, apov, Spas, Gpw/xat, fipat)u,7yv, apa//,evos.
(&) The poetic Ke'AXw, Kvpa>, and opvvpi have aorists iKeXo-a,
Kvpcra, and wpcra. See the corresponding futures (668). But
oKe'AAa) (in prose) has wxetAxx (see 89).
IV. SECOND AORIST SYSTEM.
675. (Second Aorist Active and Middle.) The stem of
the second aorist active and middle of the common form
(565) is the verb stem (in the second class, the weak stem)
with %- affixed. These tenses are inflected in the indicative
like the imperfect (see 626). E.g.
AetTroo (572), ?A.i7rw, tXnrojjLrjv (2 aor. stem \nr%-) ; Aa/A/2ai/to
(Aa/3-), take, ?Aa/3ot/, cXa/So^v (2 aor. stem Aa/3%-)- See 481 -
676. N. A few second aorist stems change c to a; as re/tvw
(rep.-), cut, Ionic and poetic crap-ov, era/Ao/Aryv. See 646.
677. N. A few stems are syncopated (650) ; as Trero/xat (TTCT-),
fly, 2 aor. m. fTTTO^v for CTrer-o/A^v; cyctpw (^yep-)> rowse, rjyp6p.vjt
683] FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 153
for fiyep-ofjirjv ; rj\6ov, went, from stem t\vO-, for rjXvOov (Horn.) ;
cVo/Aai (<T7T-), follow, COTTO/XTJV, for eCTCTT-O/X^V J I^O) (<T^-), have,
f.<r\ov for e-o-e^-ov. So the Homeric eKe/cAd/x^i/, for -KC-KcA.-o/x^v, or
KK\6fjiir)v, from /ceAo/xai, command; (JAaA/cov, for dA-aAcK-ov, from
dAe'^o) (aAcK-), wart/ q/f: for these and other reduplicated second
aorists, see 534 ; 535. For rjyayov, 2 aor. of ayo>, see.535.
678. (Mi-form.) The stem of the second aorist of the
jtu-form is the simple verb stem with no suffix. The stem
vowel is regularly long (77, o>, or v) throughout the indicative
active, and the third person has the ending <rav. (For the long
vowel in the imperative and infinitive, see 755; 766, 2.) E.g.
*I<rr?7/u (ora-), 2 aor. eo-rryv, cW^s, IOTT;, ecmycrav, etc. For the
inflection, see 506. For St'Sco/xt, fy/&u, and TiBrffu, see 802.
For the great variety of forms in these second aorists, see the
complete enumeration (798; 799).
679. The second aorist middle of the /u-form regularly drops
<r in (TO in the second person singular (564, 6) after a short vowel,
and then contracts that vowel with o ; as #ov for c-^c-tro (e#eo) ;
2Sov for e'-So-o-o (eSoo).
680. Verbs in V/K form no Attic second aorists from the stem
in v (797, 1).
681. For second aorists middle in -jy/x^v, i/x^i/, and vfj.f]v t and
some from consonant stems, see 800.
V. FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM.
682. (First Perfect and Pluperfect Active.) The stem of
the first perfect active is formed by adding /ca- to the redu-
plicated verb stem. It has KOL, *as, KC, in the indicative
singular, and KOLO-I (for Ka-vo-i), rarely /cao-t in poetry, in the
third person plural. For the inflection, see 480. E.g.
Avo), (AeAvK-) AeAvKa ; irtiOw, persuade, TrermKa (for 7re-7r#-Ka) ;
KO/X,I'O> (Ko/xt8-), carry, Ke/co/xiKa (for K-Ko/xi8-Ka, 73).
683. 1. The pluperfect changes final a- of the perfect
stem to c-, to which are added aoristic terminations a, a?, c
(669) in the singular, ca, ca?, ce(v) being contracted to y, y<s,
ct(v) in Attic. The dual and plural add the regular sec-
ondary endings (552) to the stem in c-, with <rav in the third
person plural. E.g.
'EAeAvK?/, cAeAv/oys, eAcAvKet(v), cAeAvKe-rov, cAcAvKC-/xev, cAcAv-
KC-TC, eAeAvKC-o-av ; o-reAAa), eo-raA/ca, <rraAK>7, ecrTaAKi;?, (7TaA/cci(i/),
, eo-raAKC-o-av. For ct(v), see 58.
154 INFLECTION. [684
2. In the singular, Herodotus has the original ea. eas, cc, and
Homer has ca, 775, (v); later Attic writers, and generally the ora-
tors, have etv, eis, ei. In the dual and plural ei for e is not classic,
684. The stem may be modified before K in both perfect and
pluperfect, by lengthening its final vowel (635), by changing e to
a in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping v in a few verbs
(647), or by metathesis (649); as <iAe'<o, love, Tr<j>L\r)Ka ; <0eip<o
(<0ep-), destroy, e<0apKa; Kpiva> (/cpiv-), judge, KCKpiKa ; /2aAAa>
()SaA-), ^ >M>, ftipXrjKa (636).
685. N. Ei of the stem becomes 01 in (8e t '8a>) Se'SoiKa (31).
686. N". The first perfect (or perfect in KO) belongs especially
to vowel stems, and in Homer it is found only with these. It was
afterwards formed from many liquid stems, and from some lingual
stems, T, 8, or being dropped before *a.
VI. SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM.
687. (Second Perfect Active.) The stem of the second
perfect of the common form is the reduplicated verb stem
with a affixed ; as ypa<-<o, write, yeypa<a (stem yeypa<a-) ;
<f>evy<o, Jlee, 7re'<evya (642).
688. 1. For the change of e to o in the stem, see 643. For
\e\oiira and TreVoi&x, see 642, 1, and 31.
2. For the lengthening of a to 77 or a in some verbs, see 644.
3. For the lengthening of the stem vowel in Xayxdvat (Aa^-),
A.a/Ay8ava> (Aa/?-), Aavflava) (Aa0-), rvy^avw (TV^-), and some other
verbs, see 611.
689. N. "Epptaya from prjyyvfju. (p>yy-) and eto>0a (537, 2) from
0<o (^0-) change ^ of the stem to o> (31).
690. N. Vowel r.tems do not form second perfects ; cU^/co-a, from
aKov-w, hear (stem d/cov-, d/co/:-), is only an apparent exception.
691. N". Homer has many second perfects not found in Attic;
as Trpo-ftfjBovXa. from (3ov\ofw.L, wish ', /xe^Xa from /aeAw, concern ;
oA.7ra from IXTrw, hope ; Se'SovTra from Sovrreo) (Sovir-), resound.
692. (Aspirated Second Perfects.) Most stems ending in
TT or ft change these to <f>, and most ending in K or y change
these to x , in the second perfect, if a short vowel precedes.
Those in <j> and x make no change. E.g.
BAcLTTTO) (ftXafi-), (3e/3\a<f>ai', KOTTTW (KOTT-), KfKofa', dAAao-<ra)
(dAAay-), ^AAax a ' <vAa<7(7U) (<^>vAaK-), 7re<^vAaxa.
But 7rAi{(ro-a),7r7rAT7ya; <evyw, Tre^evya; o-repyw, Icrropya;
. In 5yw (Ay), ?x a ^ is lengthened by reduplication.
699] PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM. 155
693. The following verbs form aspirated second perfects : ayo>,
dAAa<rcrw, dvoi'yw, /^AaTrrco, SZIKVV /J.L, Kr)pv<r<rw, KXeVrw, KOTTTCO, Aa/x-
fidvw, AaTTTw, Aeyeo (collect), /xacrcra), Tre/XTrw, Trpacro-w, Trr^crcrw, racrcra^
TpeVw, Tplj3w, <ep<D, <uAacr<7(o. Of these 8ei'/cvv/K, Kr)pv(r<T<a, Aa/x.-
/3avw, Tre/ATra), and 7mj<ro-o> are exceptions to 692. 'Avotyco has both
dvea>ya and dveco^a, and 7rpd<7<ra> has both-TreTrpa^a, Aave done, and
Trefrpdya, fare (well or z7/).
694. N. The aspirated perfect is not found in Homer : only
rerpo^a (r^eVa/) occurs in tragedy, and only TreVo/jK^o. in Herodotus
and Thucydides. It is common in comedy and in the subsequent
prose.
695. The inflection of the second perfect of the common form
is the same as that of the first perfect (see 682).
696. (Second Pluperfect Active.) The stem of the second
pluperfect changes final a- of the second perfect stem to e-.
It has the same inflection as the first pluperfect (683). E.g.
etc.
697. (M.L-forms.) A few verbs have second perfects and plu-
perfects of the simple /u-form, which affix the endings directly to
the verb stem. They are never found in the singular of the
Indicative. E.g.
i/T/o-Kco (Ova-, 0av-), die, 2 perf. reOva-Tov, riOva-^fv, rtOva.<n',
2 plpf. treOvao-av. (See 508.)
These ^at-forms are enumerated in 804.
VII. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM.
698. (Perfect and Pluperfect Middle.) The stem of the
perfect and pluperfect middle is the reduplicated verb stein,
to which the endings are directly affixed. E.g.
Avco, Ae'Av-/Aai, AeAv-crai, AcAv-rat, AeAv-cr#e, AeAv-vrat; e-AeAv-
^rjv, e-AeAr^/xe^a, c-AeAv-vro; AetTrco (ActTr-), Ae'Aet/x-/xt (75), Ae'Aeu/au,
AeAetTT-rat.
For the inflection, see 480.
699. The stem may be modified (in general as in the first per-
fect active), by lengthening its final vowel (635), by changing e.to
a in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping v in a few verbs
(017), or by metathesis (649); as <tAe-w, Tre^tA-^/xai, e-7re<f>L\rj-
((f>6ep-), e<0ap-/u, e^>^ap-/xr;i/ ; Kptvw (Kpiv-), KCfcpi-/uai,
/3aAAa> ()8aA-, /8Aa-), ySe/^Ary/xat, -j3f(3\iq-fJLr)V. (See
684.)
156 INFLECTION. [700
700. When v is not dropped before /xai (647), it is generally
replaced by <r (83), and it sometimes becomes /A (78, 2) ; as <jWi/w
((ftav-), 7re<ao--/xai, e-Trc^cur-^v 5 owa> (ow-), sharpen, c5v/A-/xai.
Before endings not beginning with /z, the original v reappears ;
as 7re<av-Tai, 7re'<av-0e ; but forms in v-erai and v-tro (like 7r<j>av-o-ai,
t-Treffrav-a-o) seem not to occur.
701. In the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect
middle, consonant stems are compelled to use the perfect participle
with d<TL and rjaav (486, 2).
Here, however, the Ionic endings area and arc for vrat and I/TO
(777, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose ; as rera^-a/rat
and TTa^-aTO (Thucyd.) for reray/xe'vot etcrt and rjfrav.
702. 1. For perfects in a/x/xat of crrp<u), T/oeVoo, rpe<a), see 646.
2. For the addition of or to certain vowel stems before endings
not beginning with <r, as rcre'Aeayuu, see 640.
703. (Future Perfect.) The stem of the future perfect
is formed by adding <j%- to the stern of the perfect middle.
It ends in o-oticu, and has the inflection of the future mid-
dle (662). A short final vowel is always lengthened before
CTO/ACU. E.g.
AUG>, Xe-Au-, AeAv-oro/Aai ; ypa<-a>, ye-ypa<f>-, yeypd^ofJuiL (74) :
XetTrcu, XeXetTT-, A.eXeti//o/xai ; Sew, &mc/, 8e8e/xat (639), 8e8^-o-o/>uxt ;
7rpdcr(ro> (Trpdy-), TreTrpdy-, TreTrpd^o/iat.
704. The future perfect is generally passive in sense. .But it
has a middle meaning in jue/xv^cro/xat, s^aZ/ remember, and TTCTravo-o-
/xat, 5/m/^ Aaye ceased; and it is active in KtKT-qaofjuii, shall possess.
It is found in only a small number of verbs.
705. N". Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the
future perfect active ; ^VT/O-KCO, die, has T0i/7/co, sftaZ/ 6e deac?, formed
from the perfect stem reflv^K-; and fo-T?7/u, sef, has eo-r^w, s/ia//
s^anc?, from CO-T^K-, stem of perfect IO-T^KO,, stone?. In Homer, we
have also Ke^ap^fro) and Ke^ap^o-o/xat, from ^atptu (x a />~)' re ji ce >
and KCKaS^o-co (irreg.), from xaw (x a ^) 2/* e ^-
706. N". In most verbs the future perfect active is expressed by
the perfect participle and co-o/xat (future of et/xt, &e) ; as eyvto/cores
co-o/xe&x, we sAa^/ toe learnt. The future perfect passive may also
be expressed in this way ; as aTnyAAay/xe'voi etro/xe&x, we s^a/Z toe
been freed.
VIII. FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM.
707. (First Aorist Passive.) The stem of the first aorist
passive is formed by adding 0e to the stem as it appears in
712] SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 1&7
the perfect middle (omitting the reduplication). In the
indicative and infinitive, and in the imperative except be-
fore VT, 0e becomes Oij. It has the secondary active end-
ings (552), and is inflected (in general) like the second
aorist active in yv of the /xt-form (678). E.g.
ATJW, AeAv-/x,cu, zXvQrjv (XvOrf-) ; XeiVco, Ae'Aei/ur/Aai, \ei<f>6r)V
71) ; 7rpa(r<r<o (Trpdy-), TreTrpdy^uu, eTr/ad^^v (TT pay-Off-) ;
, 7re7rAeu(7-/u.cu, CTrAever^v (641) ; rei'i/co (rev-), TTa-/iat, era
(647) ; /3aAAto (/3aA-, /3Aa-), j3J3\r)[JMi, f^XrjOrjv', reAew, TeTeAeo--/xat
(640), ereAea^i/; d/covw, ^Kovcr/xat, rjKovaOrjv. See 480.
708, N. Tpen-o) has rerpa/A/xat (646), but erpeffrOrjv (Ion. erpa-
<f>6r)v) ; Tpe</>co has re^pa/x/xat, c&p<f>0rjv ; and <rrpe</>a> has IcrTpa/x-
/>uxt, with (rare) eo-rpe^^v (Ion. and Dor. co-rpa^^v). 4>ati/co has
7r(f>aa-fJML (700), but f<f>dvOr]V.
709, N. N is added in Homer to some vowel stems before of the
aorist passive ; as Idptw, erect, Wpvpai, iSptiv-d-riv, as if from a stem in
uv (Attic idpvdrjv). So Horn. ^K\Lv6rjv and tKpLvd-r)v (647), from original
stems in p.
For cr^77v from r^/u (0e-) and ^TI^^T?!/ from 0uw, sacrifice, see 95,3.
Eor edptydyv from rp^0o>, nourish, and other forms with interchange-
able aspirates, see 95, 5.
710, (.Firsff Future Passive.) The stem of the first future
passive adds 0-%- to the prolonged stem (in fty) of the first
aorist passive. It ends in ^CTO/MU, and is inflected like the
future middle (662). .#.#.
cXvO-rjv, XvOtjcrofJiaL (stem Xv6r)(r%-') ; AetTro), eAet^^v, A-
iraa-OyorofJuii ; Ttva>, era^r;v, ra^ryo-o/xat ; TrAeKO),
; rl/xaw, erlfJiyOyv, rt/xt;^o-o/>uxt ; rcAea),
; /cAivw, e/cAt'^v, K\iOrj<TOfJia.i.
711. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with
monosyllabic liquid stems (645). But rctVo) (TCV-)> s^e/cA (647),
has frdOrjv and Ta$^cro/xai.
IX. SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM.
712. (Second Aorist Passive.) The stem of the second
aorist passive is formed by adding e to the verb stem (in
the second class, to the weafc stem, 31). In the indicative,
infinitive, and imperative, except before vr (707), c becomes
17. The only regular modification of the stem is the change
of e to a (645). For the inflection, see 482.
158
INFLECTION.
[713
BAaTTTco (/3\af3-), hurt, IjSXdjSrjv] ypa<o> (ypa<-), write, e
piTTTO) (pi<-), throw, ppi<f>r)V, </>aiVeo (<av-), l<f>dvr)V ', <rrp<a),
coTpa<?7i/(646); repTra), amuse, IrdpTrrjv; <rTeXXa)((TTeX-),send,c(rTdX.r)V.
713. N. nXrycrtrco (jrXrjy-), strike, has 2 aor. pass. lirXrjyrjv, but
in composition f^-eTrXdyrjv and Kar-eTrXdyyv (from stem TrAay-).
714. N\ Some verbs have both passive aorists ; as fiXdirTta
(/3Xa(3-),hurt, J3Xd<f>Or)v and e{3Xd/3r]v ; crrpe<a>, ^w?-n, co-TptyOrjv (rare)
and laTpd(f>r)v (646). TpeTrw, fwrn, has all the six aorists : rpei//a,
GTptif/dfJiTrjv, trpoiTrov (epic and lyric), irpaTro^rjv, IrptffrOrjv, erpdTrrjv.
715. (Second Future Passive.) The stem of the second
future passive adds 0-%- to the prolonged stem (in ry) of
the second aorist passive. It ends in ^o-o/xat and is inflected
like the first future (710). E.g.
; ypa<w, f-ypd<f>r)v,
; crreXAco (crreX-), e
716. N. The weak stem of verbs of the second class, which
seldom appears in other tenses than the second aorists (642), is
seen especially in the second passive system ; as O-^TTOD (o-a?r-), cor-
rupt, fcrdn-rjv, (raTT^cro/xat ; T^KO> (TCIK-), melt, IrdKrjV, pew (pi>), flow,
ppw)v, pvrjao/JiaL; epeiVw (epiTr-), tfirow down, -rjpiTrrjv (poetic), but
1 aor. qpticfrOrjv (epetTr-).
717. The following table shows the nine tense stems (so
far as they exist) of Xv<a, XeiVw, Trpdo-o-co (vrpay-), </>atVa)
(<^>av-), and o-TcXXu) (o-rcA-), with their sub-divisions.
TENSE SYSTEM.
Present. Xv%- XIIT%- irpdo-o-%- <j>aiv%- <rT6XX%-
Future. Xv<r%- XeitJ/%- irpd|%- <|>av%- <rTX%-
Xii<ra- irpa|a- <j>t]va- o-TCiXa-
1 Perfect. XeXvica-
2 Per/ec?.
Per/. ( Perf .
lPass.! Aor -
(Fut.
2Pass.( Aor '
JFut.
XeXonra- t***^
XcXeiir- ireirpd'y- ir<|>av- l<rraX-
X\ei\(/%- ir6irpd|%-
X6KJ>0e(Ti)- irpdx0(Tj)- <j>av0 (])-
<|>aV(T})
n ^
724] SUBJUNCTIVE. 159
FORMATION OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS AND
THE PARTICIPLE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
718. The subjunctive has the primary endings (552) in
all its tenses. In all forms (even in verbs in pi) it has a
long thematic vowel W V (561, 2) .
719. (Common Form.) In the common form of inflec-
tion, the present and second aorist tense stems change 'Ve-
to %-, and the first aorist tense stem changes final a to "7,,-.
All have o>, 775, y in the singular, and oxn for wvo-t (78, 3) in
the third person plural, of the active. E.g.
AeiVoj, pres. subj. AecVo), AeiTroyxai, 2 aor. AtVo), AiTrw/xxu; X^co,
1 aor. A.VOXD, Awa>/xat.
720. A perfect subjunctive active is rarely formed, on the
analogy of the present, by changing final a of the tense stem to
<%,-; as Ae'Av/ca, AeAwco; d\7]<f>a, ctA.?j<a>. (See 731.) But the
more common form of the tense is the perfect active participle
with (3 (subjunctive of ei/u, be) ; as AeAv/oos w, ciA^ws tS.
721. The perfect subjunctive middle is almost always
expressed by the perfect middle participle and <o ; as AeAv-
/txevo? w, rjs, y, etc.
722. A few verbs with vowel stems form a perfect subjunc-
tive middle directly, by adding <%,- to the tense stem ; as Kra-o/xat,
acquire, pf. KCKrqfjuca, possess, subj. KCKTO>/>UH (for Kt-KTr)-**)fMLi), KtKTrj,
Ke/cTT^rat; so fU[jwycrii), remind, /xe/xviy/xat, remember (memini), subj.
/xe/Avw/xai, /Ae/Avw/Ae'fla (Hdt. /xe/xi/ew/xefla). These follow the analogy
of to-Tw/xat, -y, -^rat, etc. (724). (For a similar optative, see 734.)
723. (Mt-/orm.) In all /u-forms, including both passive
aorists (564), the final vowel of the stem is contracted with
the thematic vowel (<o or jf), so that the subjunctive ends
in o) or a)/xcu.
724. 1. Verbs in rjfJLL (with stems in e- and a-) have oi, ys, y,
w/xcu, y, rjTai, etc., in the subjunctive, as if all had stems in e. Thus
Lo-rrjfu (o-ra-) has IOTTJS, la-ry, torr/Tai, (TTy<s, crry, etc., as if the
uncontracted form were tore-co, not tcrra-o). These verbs have
Ionic stems in e- (see 788, 1).
2. The inflection is that of the subjunctives <f>i\G> and
(492).
160 INFLECTION. [725
725. For the inflection of the aorist passive subjunctive, with
e of the tense stem contracted with o> or 77, as Xv@G> (for Au0e-o>),
\vOujjLtv (for A.u0e-o>/Aev), etc., <avo> (for <ai/e-a>), etc., see 480, 3.
726. For a few subjunctives of the simple perfect of the /u-
form, as eorui (for cora-co), fit/Sum (for /?e/?a-axn), see 508.
727. Verbs in co/xi (with stem in o) have by contraction u>, <?,
a), etc., oj/zui, w, wrat, etc. (for o-a>, 0-779, 0-77, O-W/ACU, etc.) ; as 6Y3o>/u,
subj. SiSco, SiSuJs, 8iSu> ; SiSoifuu, SiSw, SiScorcu, etc.
728. Verbs in vvfu form the subjunctive (as the optative, 743)
like verbs in CD; as Set/ci/iJ/u, subj. SetKi/v-o), Set/cj/v-w/>uxi.
729. N. Awa/xat, can, eTuVra/Aai, understand, ' Kpe/xa/xat, hang,
and the second aorist eTrpta/^v, bought, accent the subjunctive (as
the optative, 742) as if there were no contraction ; thus StW/xat,
eTriOTOJfiai, Kpe/Aw/xai, 7r/)ta)/xai (compare Ti0co/xai).
OPTATIVE.
730. 1. The optative adds the secondary endings (552)
to the tense stem, preceded by the mood suffix (562) t or 177
(te)j as Avotre (for Avo-i-re), icrratVyi/ (for tcrTa-tiy-v), Av^aev
(for Av0e-ie-i/) . For the ending /u, see 731.
2. The form 177 appears only before active endings. It
is always used in the singular of /xt-forms with these end-
ings (including the aorist passive, 564, 7) and of contracted
presents in oirjv and wrjv of verbs in aw, ea>, and ow. After 117
the first person singular always has the ending v. See ex-
amples in 737 and 739.
3. Before the ending v of the third person plural ic is
always used; as Xuotev (for Avo-ie-v).
4. In the second person singular middle, <ro drops a- (564,
6); as IO-TCUO (for lo-ra-i-o-o, to-ra-t-o).
731. (Verbs in w.) Verbs in a> have the ending /u (for y)
in the first person singular in all tenses of the active voice.
In the present, future, and second aorist systems, the the-
matic vowel (always o) is contracted with i to 01, giving
oi/u, ois, 01, etc., oipyv, oio, oiro, etc. In the first aorist sys-
tem, final a of the tense stem is contracted with t, giving
tufUj ais, cu, etc. (but see 732), cu^v, aio, euro, etc. The rare
perfect active (like the subjunctive, 720) follows the anal-
ogy of the present. E.g.
737] OPTATIVE. 161
Ae'yot/u (for Aeyo-i-jut), Ae'y<MS (for Aeyo-i-s), Ae'yot (for Aeyo-t),
Aeyotre (for Aeyo-i-re), Aeyotei/ (for Aeyo-ie-i/). AeiVo), 2 aor. AITTOI/M
(for AITTO-I-/U), AiTroiei/ (for Ai7ro-ie-i/) . Aij(rat/x,t (for Avcra-t-fit),
Aucrai/xev (for Av(ra-t-/t>tev), Aucratyw^v (for Au(ra-t-/x^v), Af;craio-0e (for
Avcra-i-a^e) . Perf. ei,'Ar;^>a, opt. eiA^oi/xt, etc.
732. The Attic generally uses the so-called Aeolic terminations
etas, cie, and euxv, for ats, at, atev, in the aorist active ; as Avaeias,
Avo-ae, AiWtai/. See Ava> and <aiW in 480, 1 and 482.
733. The. perfect middle is almost always expressed by the
perfect middle participle and efyi/; as AeAv/xeVo? efyi/ (see 480, 2).
The perfect active is more frequently expressed by the perfect
active participle and etiyv than by the form in ot/xt given in the
paradigms ; as AeAvKws et'r/v. (See 720 ; 721.)
734. 1. A few verbs with vowel stems form a perfect optative
middle (like the subjunctive, 722) directly, by adding L-^V or
o-i-fjirjv to the tense stem; as Kraoyuxu, pf. Ke'/cTT^/Aat, opt. KtKrrj fjwjv,
KCKTflO, KKTrjTO (for KKTr]-L-fJLrjV, KCKTrj-L-O, KC/CT^t-To), etc. J also
oJo, KCKTWTO (for KKT^-O-t-/>l^l/, etc.) ; SO jJLLjJiVr}<TK<i),
i, opt. fjLtfwy fiiqv or /xe/Avw/A^v 5 KaAcw, KKA^/xai, opt. Ke/cAry-
tK\rj fJitOa. ; and /?oAAw, y8e/3A^/xai, opt. Sta-^eySA^cr^e.
So Horn. AeAvro or AeAvi/ro (for AeAtM-ro or AeAv-i-vro), perf. opt. of
AVOD. Compare &xtn)ro, pres. opt. of SatvvfjLi.
2. The forms in w/x^v belong to the common form of inflection
(with the thematic vowel) ; those in TflfJirjv, etc. and VTO have the
^it-form (740).
735. A few verbs have oiyv (737) in the second perfect opta
tive ; as CKTre^cvya, eKTrtfavyofyv.
The second aorist optative of l^cu, have, is (TXOLTTJV, but the regu-
lar (r^ot/At is used in composition.
736. A very few relics remain of an older active optative with v
for IML in the first person singular; as Tpt<j>oi-v for rptyoi'/ju, a/xdproi-i/
for a/id/arot-^ti (from d/j-apTdva)*).
737. (Contract Verbs.) In the present active of contract
verbs, forms in i-q-v, 117-5, % etc., contracted with the the-
matic vowel o to oLrjv, 01775, 0177, etc., are much more common
in the singular than the regular forms in oi/u, 015, ot, but
they seldom occur in the dual and plural. Both the forms
in ot77v and those in ot/xi are again contracted with an a of
the verb stem to wjv and w/xi, and with an or o to 0177? and
ot/ou. E.g.
162 INFLECTION. [738
<f>i\oirjv ;
rt//,a>/u; <iA.e-o-
i-/u, <iAe-oi/u, <f>i\.olfJLL', Srj\o-o-i-(jLL, BrjXo-oifjLL, (fyAoi/u. (See the
inflection in 492.)
It is only the second contraction which makes these contract
forms.
738. For the optative plyvrjv, from ptyoco, shiver, see 497.
739. (Mt-/orm.) 1. The present and second aorist active
of the /u-form, and both aorists passive in all -verbs, have
the suffix 07, and in the first person singular the ending v*
Here a, e, or o of the stem is contracted with it] to <ur), aiy,
or OLTJ'J as icrra-t^-i/, lo-rcuiyi/; o-Ta-Lrj-fJitv, OTOiijftCv; Avfle-i^-i/,
AvfleiT/v; SO-LTJ-V, Bofyv.
2. In the dual and plural, forms with t for t^, and tc-i/ for
tTj-o-av in the third person plural, are much more common
than the longer forms with /; as orat/Aei/, o-ratre, o-ratev
(better than crrat^fiev, crTatiyre, araoycrav). See 506.
740. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in
rjfja and CD/U, final a, e, or o of the stem is contracted with
i into at, et, or ot, to which the simple endings prjv, etc., are
added. E.g.
'lorat'/x/tyi/ (for tara-i'/x^i/), to-rato, lo-ratro; Oeifjajv (^c-i-/x^v),
^eto (^e-t-o-o, ^c-t-o), ^etro; 8ot/xr/v (So-t-^v). See the inflection in
506; and 730, 4. See also the cases of perfect optative middle
in rj^rjv and VTO in 734.
741. N". The optatives Tt&otp-qv, riOoio, TI^OITO, etc. (also
accented riOoio, TI#OITO, etc.) and (in composition) OoLfirjv, Ooio,
OOLTO, etc. (also accented vvv-OoiTo, Trpoa-Ooio-Qe, etc.), as if
formed from rifle'to (or Tt0o>), are found, as well as the regular
nOeifMiv OeLurp, etc. See also irpootro and other forms of irjfjut
(810, 2).
742. N. AiWfiai, CTrio-Tafjuca, Kpe/xa/Aai, and the second aorists
CTjyHa/wyv (505) and cov^/xryv (from ovi'vrj/At), accent the optative as
if there were no contraction ; Swat/x/^v, Swaio, Swatro ; rtoTaiTO,
CTTtb-Tata^e, Kpe/juuo, Trptato, Trptatvro, ovaicr0e. For the similar sub-
junctives, see 729.
743. Verbs in vv/u form the optative (as the subjunctive,
728) like verbs in CD; as SCI'KVV/U, opt. SKI/VOI/ ?
(inflected like Avoi/u,
IMPERATIVE. 163
744. N. Second aorists from stems in v of the ju.i-form (as
have no optative in Attic (see 506 ). But Homer has a few
forms like Svyj, Svfjitv (for BV-LTJ, 8v-t-/xev), from cSiJv.
745. A few second perfect optatives of the /u-form are made
by adding nr)-v to stems in a- ; as TtOvafyv (for Teflro-iif-v), eorafyv
(508). See the enumeration of /xt-forms, 804.
IMPERATIVE.
746. (Common Form.) The present and the second
aorist active and middle of the common form have the
thematic vowel e (o before I/TWV), to which the imperative
endings (553) are affixed. But the second person singular
in the active has no ending; in the middle it drops <r in o-o
and contracts c-o to ov. E.g.
AetTre, Aei7re-To>, AeiTre-rov, ActTre-rtov, AeiTre-re, Aei7ro-i/Tan> ; AeiVou,
Aei7re-(T0(D, Aet7T-<7$oi>, AeiTre-o^oov, AetVe-a^e, Aei7re-<r#<oi/. So AtVe
and AITTOV.
747. The first aorist active and middle are also irregular in
the second person singular, where the active has a termination ov
and the middle at for final a of the stem. In other persons they
add the regular endings to the stem in <ra- (or a-). E.g.
A.VCTOV, Avcra-Too, Avcra-rov, Avcra-ran/, Xva-a-re, Avcra-vrwv; Avtrat,
etc. ;
, .
748. The perfect active is very rare, except in a few cases of
the ^.i-form (508) with a present meaning. But Aristophanes has
Ke/c/oayere, screech, from K/3aa> (*pay-), and KCX^CTC, gape, from
749. The third person singular of the perfect passive is the
only form of perfect imperative in common use ; for this see 1274.
750. N. The second person singular of the middle occasionally
occurs as an emphatic form ; as ireTravcro, stop !
751. N". The perfect imperative in all voices can be expressed
by the perfect participle and i<r0i, <TTG>, etc. (imperative of ei/u,
be) ; as dp^ivov Icrrw, for elprjaOo), let it have been said (i.e. let what
has been said stand), TTCTrewrfteVot (rra>v, suppose them to have been
persuaded.
752. (Mi-form.) The present imperative of the /u-form retains
0i in the second person singular active only in a few primitive
164 INFLECTION. [753
verbs; as in <a-0t from <^/u (<a-), say, l-Oi from cl/xt (i-), go,
from ei/xt, 6c, and from oT8a, know. (See 806 ; 808 ; 812 ; 820.)
For Homeric forms in 61, see 790.
753. The present active commonly omits 0i in the second
person, and lengthens the preceding vowel of the stem (a,
e, o, or v) to 77, a, ov, or v ; as IO-TY), riOti, 8i'8ov, and Sei/cvv.
The other persons add the regular endings (553) to the
short stem ; as io-rot-Too, tora-re, io-ra-vra)i/. ; Ti0e-Teo ; 8i'8o-re ;
8tlKVV-VT<i)V.
754. The present middle of .verbs in TJ/JH and <o/u has the
regular form in ao, and also poetic forms in w (for euro) and ou
(for co-o and oo-o), in the second person singular ; as lorao-o or
fora), riBf-tro or riOov, StSoo-o or St'Sov. But verbs in VJJ.L always
retain wo ; as Seiicvv/u, oV/ci/vo-o. In the other persons the inflec-
tion is regular: see the paradigms (506).
755. 1. In the second aorist active the stem vowel is
regularly long (y, o>, v), except before i/rwv (553), and Qi is
retained in the second person singular. E.g.
2<Tfj-Qi (ora-), O-T^-TW, crny-re, oTa-vrwv ; /&7-06 (/3a-), /?/-TW,
firj-re, )Sa-vrwv; yvoi-^i, yvw-rw, yvoi-re, yi/o-vrcov; 8i)-^t, Su-r<o, Sv-re,
Sv-vrwv. (See 678 and 766, 2.)
2. But we have s for 0t in 0e's (from rt-^/xt), Sos (from Si'Sco/u),
cs (from oy/Ai), and <r^es (from ccr^oi/, 2 aor. of ex 00 )- These verbs
have the short vowel in all persons ; as 0e's, 0e-ro>, 0e-re, OZ-VTW ;
Sos, SO-TO), 8o-re, SO-I/TWV.
3. Sr^^t and (3fjOi have poetic forms <TTO. and y8a, used only in
composition ; as Kara-fid, come down, Trapa-crrd, stand near.
756. 1. In the second aorist middle, o-o drops o- in the
second person singular after a short vowel, and contracts
that vowel with o. E.g.
'ETr/ota/xiyv, TTpiao-o (poet.), TT/OIW (for 7r/ota-o), eOe/nrjv, 6ov (for
0e-tro, 0e-o) ; tSofjirjv, Sov (for 80-0-0, 80-0). But epic 8e'o
2. The other persons have the regular endings (553); as
757, 1. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active
endings (Oi, TO, etc.) directly to Oe- (Or)-) of the tense stem (707)
after which Oi becomes (95, 2) ; as XvOy-rt, XvOrj-Tu, etc.
2. The second aorist passive adds the same terminations
766] INFINITIVE. 165
to e- (rf-) of the tense stem (712), Oi being retained; as
</>av>7-0i, (fravrj-Td) ; crraA^-flt, o-TaA^-rw, etc.
3. Both aorists have e-vrw in the third person plural ; as
758. N. A few second perfects of the /tu-form have imperatives
in 0i : see #V>/O-KU>, TtOvaOi, and Sei'Sw, Se'8t0t, in 804.
INFINITIVE.
759. (Common Form.) The present, second aorist, and
future active add ev to the tense stem, the thematic vowel
(here always e-) being contracted with cv to etv ; as Ae'yetv
(for Aey-e-ev), tSetv (for tS-e'-ev), Ae'etv (for Ae-e-ev).
760. N. The ending ev (without preceding e) appears in Doric;
as ydpv-ev in Pindar (Attic yTypvetv).
761. N. For contract presents in av (not av) for av, and ovv
for oetv, see 39, 5.
762. N. The second aorist in elv is probably contracted from
e-ev, not from e-etv (759).
763. The first aorist active substitutes at (of uncertain
origin) for final a of the tense stem (669) ; as Avo-at, <f>f)vai.
764. The perfect active substitutes e-vat for final a of the
tense stem; as AeAv/c-e-rai, yey/oa<-e-vcu, Tre^v- e-vat, AeAotTT- e-vat.
765. 1. The infinitive middle adds o-0ai to the tense stem
in the present, future, and first and second aorists. E.g.
Ae'ye-cr&u, Ae'e-<T0at, <acve-<7#at, <avet-<r#at (for <av
<i7va-<r$at, Av<ra-<r$ai, Ai7re-cr0ai.
2. Both passive futures likewise add o-0ai. E.g.
3. For the perfect middle and the passive aorists, see 766, 1 ; 768.
766. (Wli-forms.) 1. The present, second aorist, and
second perfect active of the ^t-form, and both passive
aorists, add vat to the tense stem in the infinitive. E.g.
c l<rra-vat, Tt0e-vai, 8i8o-vai, 8et/cvv-vai, crr^-vat, yvw-vat, ST^-VOI,
Te0va-vat, Av^-vat (707), <avj;-vat (712).
2. In the second aorist active the final vowel of the stem
is regularly long (678; 755, 1); as tW^/xt (o-ra-), o-rij-vai, 1
e/fyv 03a-), PIJ-VM.
166 INFLECTION. [767
767. Some /u,i-forms have the more primitive ending evat (for
ftvai) in the infinitive active. Such are Sowcu (from old So-/revai,
8o-erai) ; Oeivan (for Oe-pevai) ; elvai, 2 aor. of Zty/Ai (for e-^rei/ai) ;
2 perf. SeSieVai (for 8e-8/rt-/:vai).
768. In all the simple forms of the middle voice (the
present and second aorist of the /u-form, and all perfects),
vowel stems add o-Oai directly to the tense stem. E.g.
I(TTa-<r@(U, TiOe-crBaL, Si8o-<70cu, Oe-aOai, 8o-cr#ai, tt-crOai. (from
fyfjiC) ; XeXv-aOaL, TeTlfJwj-vOai, SeSrfAw-cr&xi, 8t86-<rOcu, 7rTa-<rOai (from
TT^TO-fMLL, 7TTO,-).
769. Consonant stems here (768) add the more primitive
ending Oat (554). E.g.
'Eo-raA-0ai, \eXei<f>-Oa.i (71), 7re7r
So i^r-dat, pres. inf. of ^/xat (^cr-), sit.
PARTICIPLES AND VEKBALS IN TO? AND reo?.
770. All active tenses (except the perfect) and both
aorists passive add vr to their tense stem to form the stem
of the participle. Stems in ovr of the common form have
nominatives in wv ; those of the /u-f orm have nominatives
in ovs. E.g.
Ae'yw: pres. Aeyo-i/r-, nom. Ae'yon/; fut. Ae|o-vr-, nom. Ae^wv,
1 aor. Aea-ir-, nom. Ae^-as. ^>ati/a>: aor. tfryva-vT-, nom. ^yi/ds.
Aei7ra>: 2 aor. AITTO-VT-, nom. AITTIOI/; 1 aor. pass. Aei^^e-iT-, nom>
Aet^^et? (79). SreAAw (o-roA-) : 2 aor. pass. oraAe-vr-, nom. <rra
Acts. "loTTry/xt : pres. to-ra-vr-, nom. to-ras, 2 aor. <rra-i/r-, nom. o-rds.
TiOrjiAi : pres. Ti#e-vr-, nom. rt^ets; 2 aor. Ot-vr-, nom. ^et?. At'8co/u,i :
pres. SiSo-vr-, nom. SiSovs ; 2 aor. SO-VT-, nom. Sou?. Aet'Kn;//,t:
SCIKI/V-VT-, nom. SCIKVVS. AWCD : 2 aor. SV-J/T-, nom. 8us.
771. For the inflection of these participles and the formation
of the feminines, see 335-337.
772. The perfect active participle changes final a of the
tense stem to or in the stem of the participle. E.g.
-, AeAvKor-, nom. AeAv/cws ; 7rc.<f>r)va-, TTC^I/OT-, nom.
For the inflection, and for the irregular feminine in via, see
335; 337,2.
773. N. Homer has many varieties of the second perfect participle
of the /it-form; in aws, gen. aarros (sometimes a6ros), fern, aina, as
yeyads, /fe/3cns j in gc6s, gen. TJ&TOS or 1767-05, fern, tjvia, as TeOrqws, re-
777] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 0. 167
or -6ros, Tedvnvia (804). Herodotus has ec6s, ewcra, e6s, gen.
s, ew<T7;s, as careers, etc., some forms of which (e.g. etrrewra, reflvedrrt)
occur in Homer. The Attic contracts ac6s, awo-a, a6s, to ts, tD<ra, 6s
(or ws) (342), gen. WTOS, c6<r?7s, etc., but leaves redvefa (2 perfect of
OVQCTKUI} uncontracted.
774. N. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle
in Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long
one ; as aprjptbs, dpdpvia ; retfrjAws, reddXvia.
775. All tenses of the middle voice add /xei/o to the
tense stem to form the stem of the participle. E.g.
(AiJo-/xei/o-), Auo-d/xevos (Av<ro-/x.ei/o-), Avo-a/xei/os (Avcra-
(i<TTa-//,evo-) , ^'yuevos ($c-//,evo-), Tr/ota/ACvo? (7r/Ka-
//.evo-), AiTTO/xevos (Ai7ro-//,evo-), AeAiyAevos (AeAv-//,ei/o-).
For the inflection of participles in /xevo?, see 301.
776. 1. The stem of the verbals in TO? and reos is formed
by adding TO or TCO to the verb stem, which generally
has the same form as in the first aorist passive (with the
change of < and ^ to TT and K, 71) ; as AVTOS, Avreo? (stems
AU-TO-, AU-TCO-), aor. pass. eXvOrjv') rptTTTos, Treto-Teos (stems
'^/OITT-TO-, Treia-Teo-), aor. pass. eTpicftOrjv, 7reL<T@r)v ; raKTOS, TaK-
Tos, from Tao-o-w (stem ray-), aor. pass. eVax-^v; ^CTTTOS
/rom rp<f>o) (95, 5).
2. The verbal in TOS is sometimes equivalent to a perfect
passive participle, as /cpo-os, decided, TCIKTO'S, ordered; but oftener
/t expresses capability, as AVTOS, capable of being loosed, aKovo-ros,
audible; Trpa/cTos, fAai may be done.
3. The verbal in TCOS is equivalent to a future passive participle
(the Latin participle in dus} ; as AvTe'os, that must be loosed, solven-
dus; TlfJLf)Tos, to be honored, honorandus. (See 1594.)
For the impersonal use of the neuter in TCOV in the sense of Set
and the infinitive active, see 1597.
DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN ft.
777. 1. The Doric has the personal endings n for on, /ACS for
/xev, Tav for rrjv, crOdv for a&rjv, pay for fjirjv, vn for vtn. The poets
have pevOa for /xe#a.
2. When er is dropped in <rat and cro of the second person
(565, 6), Homer often keeps the uncontracted forms cat, rjai, ao, eo.
Herodotus has eat and ao (indie.), but generally y for rja.i (subj.).
In Ildt. and sometimes in Homer, eo may become ev. In Homer
,rcu and ao sometimes drop a- even in the perf. and pluperf. ; as
168 INFLECTION. [778
/u-e/myai for /xe/xv^crai, IWvo for tWvo-o. A lingual sometimes
becomes <r before <rai; as in KCKCUTOYU for KeKaS-<rai (Ke/caoyxat).
For Ionic contract forms, see 785, 2.
3. The Ionic has emu and aro for vrat and I/TO in the third
person plural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for vro in the
optative. Before these endings TT, ft, K, and y are aspirated (<, ^) ;
as KpwrTto) (Kpvj3-), KKpv<j>-aTai ; Acyw, A-cAe^-arai, A-eXe^-aro. Hdt.
shortens 17 to e before arat and aro ; as oticc-orat (pf . of oiKe'to), Att.
w/oy-vrat ; erert/jie-aro (plpf- of rt/>ia(u), Att. iTeriprj-vro. Horn.
rarely inserts 8 between the vowel of a stem and area or aro ; as
cAiyAe-S-ctTo (eAaww) ; see also /Wvto.
The forms arat and aro sometimes occur in Attic (701).
Herodotus has them also in the present and imperfect of verbs
in fu.
4. Herodotus has eo, cas, cc(i/) in the pluperfect active, as
; whence comes the older and better Attic ij, rjs, ci(v).
Homer has ea, ^s, (V), with ee in rjSee (821, 2), and rarely ov, cs, e.
5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the un contracted forms
of the future (in eo> and co/xat) of liquid stems; as /neve'w, Attic
When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs
6. The Doric has crew, crco/xai (contracted <roi, o-ov/xat or
for <ro), o-ofjuaL in the future. The Attic has o-ov/xat in the future
middle of a few verbs (666).
7. In Homer a- is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the
future and aorist; as reAeco, TeAe'croxo ; KaAew, KoAeo-(ra. In KO/XI<O,
Horn, e/co/wo-o-a, eKo/xio-cra/x^v, the stem ends in 8 (see 777, 2).
8. In Homer aorists with o- sometimes have the inflection of
second aorists ; as lov, t5, from t/cveo/xat, come ; e^trero (more com-
mon than e/^craro), from /3atVw, ^o. These are called /m'xec? aorists.
9. In the poets rjaav of the aorist passive indicative often becomes
ev; as wpfjirjOev for wp/^^trai/, from 6p/xao>, wr^re. So ay- or ci/ for
r/o-ai/ or ecrav in the active of verbs in /u (787, 4).
778. Homer and Herodotus have iterative forms in OTCOV and
crKofjirjv in the imperfect and second aorist active and middle.
Homer has them also in the first aorist. These are added to the
tense stem ; as e)(<i), impf. exe-cr/cov ; epvw, 1 aor. epTxra-ovce ; <evyo>,
2 aor. (<vy-) <f>vye-arKov ; iW^/u (ora-), ora-cnce; 8t8(o/xt (80-), 8o-or/ce.
Verbs in ca> have C-<TKOV or C-O-KOI/ in the imperfect ; as /caAcW/cov ;
TTtuAe-trKCTO (dropping one e). Verbs* in aa> have oacr/cov or ao-icov,'
as yooci-crjce, vt/ca-trKo/xev. Rarely other verbs have CUTKOV in the
imperfect j as KpvvracrKov from
781] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN fl. 169
These forms are inflected like imperfects, and are confined to
die indicative, and denote repetition ; as TrwAeV/cero, he went (regu-
larly). They generally (in Hdt. always) omit the augment.
For /xi-forms with these endings see 787, 5.
779. Some verbs have poetic stems, made by adding 0%- to
the present or the second aorist tense stem, in which a or e (rarely
v) takes the place of the thematic vowel ; as ap.vva.0%-, 86o>Ka0%-,
<A.eye0%-, from d/xvvtu, ward off, SICUKCO, pursue, <j>\ey(i>, burn. From
these special forms are derived, sometimes presents, as <Aeye0a> ;
sometimes imperfects, as eSiwKaflov; sometimes second aorists, as
((T-^0%-) ; also subjunctives and optatives, as et/ca&o,
a/JivvdOoLTO ; imperatives, as afivvdOare, a.fJLVvd@ov ; infini-
tives, as dfJivvdOav, 8icoKa0av, ei/cdflav, cr^e^eti/; and participles,
as eiKct^cov, (r^e^coi/. As few of these sterns form a present indica-
tive, many scholars consider l^i^KaOov, Zpya&ov, etc., with the
subjunctives, etc., second aorists, and accent the infinitives and
participles Sia>Ka0etv, afiwafieiv, tiKaBeiv, eiKa0a>v, etc., although the
traditional accent is on the penult.
See in the Lexicon aXKa.6eiv, d/x.wd$a>, Si(D/cd$<o, eiKa#etv, IpydOew,
780. (Subjunctive.) 1. In Homer the subjunctive (especially
in the first aor. act. and mid.) often has the short thematic vowels
and o (Attic rj and <o), yet never in the singular of the active
voice nor in the third person plural ; as cpixro-o/uev, aXyrjarere, fj.vOij-
oro/xat, eveai, SiyX^creTat, d/neM/ferai, eyeipo/xev, t/xetperat. So some-
times in Pindar.
2. In both aorist passive subjunctives Herodotus generally has
the uncontracted forms in ecu, eo>/xcv, earn, but contracts cry and e*y
to 77 and ry 5 as d<aipe$e(o (Att. -OS)), c^ai/eaxn (Att. -tucrt), but <f>a,vrj
and (f>avrjT. (as in Attic).
3. In the second aorist passive subjunctive of some verbs, Homer
has forms in eiw, rjys, 7717, eto/xev, r/ere (780, 1), as they are commonly
written ; as 8a/xeta) (from e8d/xr;v, 2 aor. pass, of 8a/xi/dw, subdue),
Sa/xr/r;?, Sa/xr;^, Sa/xr^ere ; rpaTretb/xev (from erdpTrrjV, of repTra), amuse).
It is highly probable that 77 should be written for ei in all persons.
This is more fully developed in the second aorist active of the
(see 788, 2).
4. In the subjunctive active Homer often has w/xi, yvOa, y<n;
781. (Optative.) 1. The so-called Aeolic forms of the first
aorist optative active in etas, ae, ciai/ are the common forms in
all dialects.
170 INFLECTION. [782
2. Homer sometimes has or$a (556, 1) in the second person for
ots ; as K\aLOia@a. For aro (for vro) see 777, 3.
782. (Infinitive.} 1. Homer often has /xevai and /xev for cv
(759) in the infinitive active ; as d/xvve/xevai, d/xvve/xev (Attic a/xv-
j/eii>) ; lX9i^.va.L, eA^e/xei/ (eA0etV) ; de/wvai, d^e'/xev (dv). For
the perfect (only of the /u-l'onn), see 791 : the perf. in evat does not
occur in Homer. So Horn. /ACJ/CU, Dor. juev for vat in the aorist
passive; as 6/xotco^-/xevat (o/xotw^-vac), 8ary-/xei/at (also Sa^-rai),
Horn. ; at<r;(w$7-/>iev (aior^w^-i/at), Find. (See 784, 5.)
2. The Doric has ev (760) and the Aeolic rjv for eii/ in the infin. ;
thus detSev and ydpvev (Dor.) for det'Sav and yrjpvtiv, ^epiyi/ and
^i/ (Aeol.) for <f>ipuv and e^etv; eur^i/ (Aeol.) for etTretv.
783. (Participle.) The Aeolic has ora for ovcra, and <us, ora
for as, ao-a, in the participle ; as lxot(ra,
SPECIAL DIALECTIC FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS.
784 (Verbs in aa>.) 1. In Homer verbs in a<o are often con-
tracted 0,3 in Attic. In a few cases they remain uncontracted; some-
times without change, as vaterdovcrt, vaieTaW, from vaterdw, dwell,
sometimes with a, as in iretvao), hunger, Sc^aco, thirst; sometimes with
eov for aoi/ in the imperfect, as /xevotVeov from /u.ei/oivdo>, long for.
2. (a) The Mss. of Homer often give peculiar forms of verbs in
aw, by which the two vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which
elsewhere are contracted are assimilated, so as to give a double
A or a double O sound. 1 The second syllable, if it is short by
nature or has a diphthong with a short initial vowel, is generally
prolonged ; sometimes the former syllable ; rarely both. We thus
have aa (sometimes aa) for ae or 017 (aa for act or ay), and ow
(sometimes wo or oxo) for ao or aa> (oa> for act) :
opacis for opcUis
opduj. " opdei or opdu
opdao-06 " 6pa,<r0
opdao-Oai " opdearOai.
fivdao-Oai u (JLvaeo-0ai
opddv ' 6pdiv (Dor. opdev)
6poa> for opdw
opooxri u opdovori (i.e. opaovou)
opoaxra " 6pdovo-a(ie.6paovT-ka)
opowev " opdoicv
opocovrai " opdovrai.
alriowo u alridoio
(6) The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the
word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in
1 Although these forms are found in all editions of Homer, yet most
Homeric scholars are agreed that they are not genuine, but are early
substitutes for the regular forms in aw etc. which they represent. See
Monro, Homeric Grammar (2 ed.), pp. 50-54.
785] SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 171
for ^/3aoi/res, ^/3woi/u for ^/Jaot/xi, pvaacrOcu, for ^vaeo-flai,
/XI/OJOI/TO for (e)//.i/aovTo. In this case the second vowel or diph-
thong is not lengthened. But it may be long in a final syllable,
as in fjitvoivaa (for -act), or when wcra or axrt comes from oi/ria or
oi/crt, as in ^/Joiaxra, Spwaxrt, for T//?a-ovria, Spa-ovari. The assimila-
tion never occurs unless the second vowel is long either by nature
or by position ; thus opaoptv, opaere, 6paeVa> cannot become 6poo>/x,ei/,
opaare, opaaro.
(c) These forms extend also to the so-called Attic futures in
euro, ao>, to (665, 2) ; as eAoo>, eAooxn, /cpe/xoto, Sa/ma, Sa/xocucn, for
eAacra> (eAaco), etc.
3. The Doric contracts ae and CM; to i;; as op^re for opaere,
op?}" for opaet and opcfy. A peculiar form (of contraction?) occurs
in the dual of a few imperfects in Homer, as Trpoo-avSyTrjv (from
TrpocravSaoo), (froiTrJTijv (</>otTaa>), o-vAr/T^v (<7vXaa>). So Horn, op^t
(or op^at) for opaeat (Attic opa) in the pres. ind. middle of 6paa>.
(See 785, 4.)
4. Herodotus sometimes changes aoo, ao, and aov to ca>, eo, and
cov, especially in opaco, eipwraw, and ^otraco; as ope'w, opeovres,
optovai, ctpwreov, </>otVeoi/. These forms are generally uncontracted.
In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in ao> regularly.
5. Homer sometimes forms the present infinitive active of verbs
in ao> and ecu in -j^ei/cu; as yo^uevcu (yoao>), Treivijfierat (Tretvaw),
<f>L\r)fjivaL (<tAe'<o). (See 785, 4.)
785. (Fer&s tw c<o.) 1. Verbs in ea> generally remain uncon-
tracted in both Homer and Herodotus. But Homer sometimes
contracts ee or cei to , as rdpfBa (rappee). Hdt. has generally
Set, must, and Setv, but impf. cSee. Both Homer and Herodotus
sometimes have cu as a contract form for co; as dyi/oewres, Sta-
voewro : so in the Attic futures in wra), icrofwi (665, 3), as KO[uevjj,f.Oa
(Hdt.). Forms in cv for eov, like ot^veOo-t, Trotevo-t, are of very
doubtful authority.
2. Homer sometimes drops c in ecu and co (for eacu, cao, 777, 2)
after c, thus changing e'ecu and co to eat and eo, as ftv^e'at for /Av0e'ecu
(from /Av^e'o/xat), aTroatpe'o (for aTroatpe'eo) ; and he also contracts
eectt and eeo to etat and eto, as /xv^etat, atSeto (for atSeeo). Herodotus
sometimes drops the second e in eeo ; as <o/?e'o, cureo, e^T^yeo.
3. Homer sometimes has a form in eio> for that in o; as
(vei/ce'to). So in ereAetero from reAetw (reAeo)).
4. For Homeric infinitives in >;/xei/ai, see 784, 5. $ope'a),
has <^op^/x.ei/at and (fropfjvai. Homer has a few dual imperfects like
(o/xapTe'co) and o.7retA>jT^v (aTretAe'o)). (See 784, 3.)
172 INFLECTION. [786
786. (Verbs in oo>.) 1. Verbs in oo> are always contracted in
Herodotus, and his Mss. sometimes have ev (for ov) from oo er oov,
especially in SIKCUOCD, think just.
2. They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few
cases in which they have forms in oo> or oo> resembling those of
verbs in CUD (784, 2) ; as dpooxn, (from dpoco, plough) ; SritoWi/ and
(impf.) SrjLouvTo (from 8771000).
DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI.
787. 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some doubt-
ful) in which verbs in T?/U (with stems in e) and co//,t have the
inflection of verbs in ew and oo> ; as Ti$et, SiSois, SiSot. So in com-
pounds of fiy/tt, as dvtets (or di/i'eis), /xe0iet (or -tei) in pres., and
Trpoietv, Trpoieis, dvtec, in impf. Horn, has imperat. KaO-Lcrra (Attic
-77). Hdt. has terra (for toT^cri), vTrep-eri^ea in impf., and Trpcxr-
Oeoiro (for -0etTo), etc. in opt. For eStSow, etc. and extras, en#ee
(also Attic), see 630.
2. In the Aeolic dialect most verbs in aco, ecu, and oo> take the
form in fju. ; as <f>i\rjfJiL (with <i'A.eicr0a, <t'A.et) in Sappho, for
(^tAeco, etc. ; oprjfJiL (for 6pdo>), /caA^/xt, aivrj^i.
3. A few verbs in Hoin. and Hdt. drop <r in <rat and <ro of the
second person after a vowel ; as imperat. TrapioTao (for -a<ro) and
impf. cfjidpvao (Horn.) ; e^eTmrreai (for -acrat) witli change of a to
(Hdt.). So 0eo, imperat. for 0e<ro (Att. ^ov) and ej/0eo (Horn.).
4. The Doric has rt, vrt for <ri, vert. Homer sometimes has o~0a
(556, 1) for or in 2 pers. sing., as oYoW0a (oYoW0a or &Soto-0a),
TiOrjaOa. The poets have v for o-av (with preceding vowel short)
in 3 pers. plur., as ecrrav (for crrr]<rav), lev (for ?e<rai/), TrporiQev (for
Trpoerc'&o-av) ; see 777, 9.
5. Herodotus sometimes has emu, aro for vrat, vro in the pres-
ent and imperfect of verbs in pi, with preceding a changed to e; as
TrpOTiOiarai (for -evreu), eSwearo (for -avro). For the iterative end-
ings (TKOV, a-Ko/jLrjVj see 778 ; these are added directly to the stem of
verbs in /At, as arra-o-KOi/, SO-CT/COV, a>i/vv-(rKeTO, Z-O-KOV (et/ui', 6e).
6. For poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists in ypyv, I{MIV,
vjjirjv, and from consonant stems, see 800.
788. 1. Herodotus sometimes leaves ew uncontracted in the
subjunctive of verbs in >?/AI; as Oetupev (Att. ^w/xev), Sia^ewvrai
(-0aWai), aTT-teWt (Att. d^-taio-t, from a<j>-L7)/jii). He forms the
subj. with ew in the plural also from stems in a; as aTro-o-re-oxri
(-OTWOT), 7rt(TT-ajvTat (for 7ncrra-oi/-nH, Att. eTTio-rwi/rat) . Homer
sometimes has these forms with eo> ; as 0cw//,ev, aretu/xev (724, 1).
793] DIALECTIC FORMS OF VEKBS IN ML 173
2. Generally, when the second aorist subjunctive active is
uncontracted in Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened,
t (or a) to rj or et, o to co, while the short thematic vowels e and o
are used in the dual and plural, except before <H (for v<n). Thus
we find in Homer :
(Stems in a.)
(Attic p)
0-TTJTOV
civ-fa
(Stems in o.)
/, <TT6iO|xev, crre'cop
O-nfjWCTl, CT-T6LWCTL, <^)0Ca>(ri
|, 5u>T]<riV
(Stems in e.)
06C, 6<|>-(<0 yVWOXTl, SwttCTt
The editions of Homer retain of the Mss. before o and to ; but
probably rj is the correct form in all persons (see 780, 3).
3. A few cases of the middle inflected as in 2 occur in Homer;
as jBXrj-eTai (/?oAAto), oX-erat (aAAo/xat), a,7ro-0eio/Aai,
so Kara-Offai (Hesiod) for KaraOe-rjai (Att. KaraOrj).
789. For Homeric optatives of tWi/v/xi, Sveo, Avto, and
SCUVVTO, Si;?; and Sv/xei/, AeXvro or AeAwro, <f>&tfji7]v (for
see these verbs in the Catalogue, with 734, 1 ; 744.
790. Homer sometimes retains Oi in the present imperative, as
S&uOL, opvvQi (752). Pindar often has 8t8oi.
791. Homer has /ACVCU or pcv (the latter only after a short
vowel) for vai in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is
seldom long in the present ; as i<rTa-/AVtu, te-/xevai, /u,e#i-/xev, opvv-
/aevai, opvt>/u,ev, rt^e/xev, but Tt^-/xevat. In the second aorist active
the vowel is regularly long (766, 2), as o-T^/oievat, yvco-/x,evat ; but
TiOrj/JLi, ScSto/xt, and tr;/xi have Qcpevai and 0e/u,cv, 8d/xevai and So/xev,
and (c/txev) /xe^-e/ACv. (See 802.) In the perfect of the /ux-form,
we have ecrTa-//,crai, co-Ta-/xev, T^va-/Aevat, reOvd-fJiev.
792. Homer rarely has TJ/ACVOS for e/xei/os in the participle. For
second-perfect participles in cos (acos, etos, r/ws), see 773.
ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS.
The forms with this inflection are as follows :
793. T. Presents in fit. These belong to the Seventh and
the Fifth Class of verbs (see 619 and 608).
174 INFLECTION. [794
791 Those of the Seventh Class are
1. Verbs in /xi with the simple stem in the present.
These are the irregular et/xt, be, et/xi, go, <f>Wh sa y> ^f^h sit,
and KCI/XCU, lie, which are inflected in 806-818 ; with ^/xi, say,
and the deponents aya/xai, Swa/xai, eTao-rattou, Ipa/xcu, /cpe/xa/xcu.
See these last in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly
Homeric) forms under ofy/xi, Se'a/xcu, Ste/xai (stem 8ie-), Si^/xat, eSw,
iA.?7/xi, Kt^avcu, wo/xcu, pvo/xui and epuo/xcu, <reveo, orev/xcu, <epw.
For (Ja/xny/xi and other verbs in n^u, see 797, 2.
2. Verbs in /u with reduplicated present stems (651).
These are fcm/fu, Ti&y/xi, and StlSw/xt, inflected in 506, fy/xi,
inflected in 810, Si%xi (rare for Sew), 6mc?, Ktxp^/u (xP a ~)>
fend, ovLvrjfJLL (ova-), benefit, 7u/X7rA.?7/xi (TrXa-), J^W, Tri/XTrp^/u
(7r/oa-), 6wr7i. (For the last five, see the Catalogue.)
See also tTrra/xai (late), and Horn. /?i/2ds, striding, present par-
ticiple of rare Pifirjfju.
795. N. ILifjLTrXrjfJii and mfurp^/u insert /A before TT ; but the //,
generally disappears after /* (for v) in e/i-TriTrX^/At and e/x-TrtV/aTy/oii ;
but not after v itself, as in o^eTrtfwrAao-av.
796. N. 'QvLvrjfJii (of uncertain formation) is perhaps for ov-
ovrj-fu, by reduplication from stem ova-.
797. Those of the Fifth Class are
1. Verbs in vv/u, which add w (after a vowel, wv) to the
verb stem in the present (608). These are all inflected
like SctKvv/u (506), and, except o/Jcwufu, quench (803, 1),
they have no Attic /xt-forms except in the present and
imperfect. The following belong to this class :
(Stems in a), KCpa-iW/xi, KpefML-vvvfU, Trera-i/vvfu, aKtod-vvvfJLi ;
(stems in c for e<r), 2-wv/xt, /cope-wii/xt, o-/3e-vvu/xi ; (stems in w), a>-
vvv/ut, put-wvfjii, <TTp<a-wvfJit ; (consonant stems), ay-vvfii, ap-vv/xat^
otiK-vvfJii, ctpy-vu/xi, ^cvy-vv/xt, aTro-KTiv-vvfU (KTCUW), fuy-vvui, oiy-
vv/xt (in compos.), oX-Xv/xt, o/x-vu/xt, 6/xdpy-viJ/xi, op-vvfu, Triyy-vv/xi
(Tray-), Trrap-w/xai, p^y-vv/xt (prjy-), crrop-vv/xt, ^>pay-vi>/xt. See these
in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms
under aiw/xat, a^w/xai, ydVv/xcu, 8atVv/xi, Katvv/xat, Ktj/v/xat, opey-vv/xi,
ravv/xai (see raW), rtvv/xat (see TtVto).
2. Verbs in VTJ/XI (chiefly epic), which add va to the verb stem
in the present (609). These are 8a/xv^/xi, Ki'pi/T/tu, Kp^/xny/xi, /xapva-
tiat, TrepvrjfU, TriXva/xai, Trtr/ry/xt, (TKtSv^/xt or Ki8vr)p.i- Many of these
have also forms in vow. (See the Catalogue.)
800] ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS. 175
798. II. Second Aorists of the pi-Form.' The only second
aorists formed from verbs in /u are those of %u (810), of
Tt'077/u, and Si'S<o//,t (506), of o-/3eVvv/xt (803, 1) ; with
v (505) ; also the irregular wv^rjv (later cW/x^f) , of
L, and CTrAiy/xryv (poetic) of -Trt/ATrA^/At.
See also Homeric aorist middle forms of fityi/v/u, opvv/u, and
Tnqyvvfjii, in the Catalogue.
799. The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs
in <i> are the following:
'AAc'o-KOjiuxi (dA-), be taken: edA<oi/ or ijAwv, was taken, a Aw,
, aAaii/at, aAouV (See 803, 2.)
BaiVw (/?a-), go: e/fyv, /3w, fiatrjv, (3f)0i (also /?d in comp.),
i, /3ds- Horn, pdryv for e/^Tj/v.
Btoco (/?to-), Ziue: e/3tW, /?tai, /3tw7yv (irregular), fiiiavai, fiiovs.
(Horn, imper. /?t<6reo.)
rr;/oacrKa> (yrjpa-), grow old, 2 aor. inf. y^pavai (poet.), Horn. part.
(yvo-), know: eyi/wv, yvo>, yvoirjv, yv&Bi, yvaii/ai,
(Spa-), rwn : ISpav, tSpas, eSpd, etc., subj. 8po>, Spas,
Spa, etc., opt. BpatrjVt Spavai, Spas. Hdt. ISp^v, Sprjvai, Spas. Only
in composition. (See 801.)
Ava> (8v), enter: ?Svi/, entered (506), Svw, (for opt. see 744), Sv
Swat, Sus-
Kreu/o) (KTCV-, Kra-), JKW: act. (poetic) KTav, CKTCIS, /cra,
(3 pi. eKTaV, subj. KTeco/Aci/, inf. Kra/Aevat, KTa/nev, Horn.),
Mid. (Hom.) cKra/XT/i/, was killed, KTacrOai, KTa/xevos.
Ilero/xat (Trra-, TTTC-), y?^ : act. (poetic) CTTTT/V, (TTTW, late),
(Trr^^t, TTT^vat, late), Trras. Mid. 7rTa/xryv, TrrdaOai, Trrafievos.
[TAaa>] (rAa-), endure : erA^i/, rAw, rAatryv, rA^t, rAiyvai, rAds.
^0ai/o> (</>0a-), anticipate : Z<j>0r]v, <j>0u, <j>Oair)V, ^Orfvcui, <}>&as.
&va> (^>v-), produce: Z<f>vv, was produced, am, <{>v(t), <f>vvai, ^us
(like ISuj/).
Add to these the single forms, a7ro-<TKA^vai, of dTrooWAAa), rfry
/), o^e's, imperat. of l^oo, Aaye, 7n$i, imperat. of TTIVW, r/rin/:, and
epic forms of vfi(3d\X(D (800, 1) and of Kty^dvo) (/a^oVo)).
800. 1. Some poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists of the
/u-form in rjnyv, iprjv, and vpyv are formed from stems in a, t, and
v belonging to verbs in co. E.g.
BdAAco (oA-, )8Aa-), throw, 2 aor. act. (ey3A??i/) ^v/x-^A^v
(dual) ; mid. (fj3\^fj,r)v) eftXrjTo ; <^>^iVa> (^>^t-), waste, 2 a. m. ^>^t-
^wyv; ercvw (crv-), wr^re, eaav^v (in Attic poets ICTUTO, OTV/ACI/OS) ;
176 INFLECTION. [801
See these verbs in the Catalogue. For other Homeric aorists
see aw, aTravpaw, /fc/?paKTKa>, JcA.ua>, KTIO>, Ava>, ovraw, 7reAaa>, nAaKix
7TV<0, 7TT^(T(ra).
2. Some are formed from consonant stems, with the simple
ending p^v. E.g.
"AAAo/xai (aA-), leap, 2 a. m. (aA-/?i>) aAao, 5\ro; Se^ofuu (Se^)-
receive, (eSey-^i/) SCKTOJ (eAey-/^) lAeKTO, Jaid himself to rest (see
stem Ae;(-).
Besides these, see dpapicr/cw, yeVro, grasped, TrttAAw, Trep&o.
3. For the inflection, see 803, 3.
801. N. Second aorists in 771^ or a/xryv from stems in a are inflected
like Z<TTr)V or CTrpia/xryi/ ; but tSpdv substitutes a (after p) for 77,
and KTai> is irregular.
802. 1. The second aorists active of rt^/xi, fyfu, and St'Sco/u have
the short vowel (e or o) of the stem (678 ; 755) in the indicative
(dual and plural) and imperative (etroi/, efyiev, etc., being augmented):
in the infinitive they have 0eu/cu, eli/cu, and Sowai, and in the second
person of the imperative 0's, 2s, and 805.
2. As these tenses have no forms for the indicative singular,
this is supplied by the irregular first aorists Wr)Ka, TJKOL, and ISwKci
(670) ; so that the actual aorist indicative active is as follows :
, c&y/ce, ZOerov, i&irtjv, e$ju,ei/, Were, Z0e<ra.v.
, etrov, LTrjv, el/tev, etre, etorav.
e8o>Ke, ISoTOV, eSorryv, cSo/Aev, ISorc, eSocrav.
803. 1. The two other second aorists active from stems in c are
(r(3r)v, went out (o-ySemJ/u, quench), inflected like eo-rrjv, and aaro-
(rK\rjvai, dry up (o-KeAAw). See 797, 1; 799.
2. The other second aorists, from stem in o, are inflected like
lyvwv, as follows :
Indie, lyvtov, yi/o>s, eyvco, eyixorov, eyvwTryv, lyvco/Acv, eyvwre,
lyvcocrav. SM&/. yvai (like S5>). Opf. yvoirjv (like Sotiyv). Imper. yv&Oi,
yvwToo, yvtoroi/, yvwrtor, yvoare, yi/ovrcov (755). /n/?w. yi/oivat.
Partic. yvovs (like Sovs).
3. The second aorists wny/ttyv and ^TrAiJ/x^v (798), and the poetic
aorists in ^/MTV, i/wyv, and v/xr;v (800, 1) or in fjyv from consonant
stems (800, 2), are inflected like the pluperfect middle (698).
804. III. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the fu-Form.
The following verbs have forms of this class in Attic Greek,
most of them even in prose :
"IvTrjjju. (oro,-) ; see 508 (paradigm). For Ionic forms ot thft
participle, see 773.
806] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 17J
Bati/w (/?a-), ffo; poetic 2 pf. fiefiam (Horn, ficfida.cn), subj.
inf. fiefidvai (Horn, fiefid^ev), part. /?/2ws (Horn, fiefiaus,
); 2 plup. (Horn, fitfiacrav).
EI/-, ya-), become, 2 pf. ye'yova, am ; (Horn. 2 pf. yeyad<n,
2 plup. dual yeyarryv, inf. yeya/xei/, part, yeyaws, yeyawa), Att. yeycos,
yeyaicra (poetic).
Tf.6vaiTr)v, irnper. TeOvaOi, TtOvaTta, inf. Te6vdvca (Horn, Te6vdfJ.evaL
or Tf.6vdfj.ev), part, renews (773), Te$v^uicra (Horn. Te6v^io<s, with
Aa'Seo (Set-, &-), epic in pres.,/ear, Attic 2 pf. Se'Sta, Se'Sias, Se'&e,
plur. Se'^t/xei/, Se'Stre, 8e8td(rt; 2 plup. eSeSteij/, eSe'Stcrai/; subj. Sedc'/y,
SeStcucrt, opt. SeSieny, irnper. SeSt^t, inf. SeStevat, part. 3eSews. (Horn.
2 pf. SeiSta, SetStas, Sei'Ste, pi. 8et8t/xev, imper. Sct'Siflt, 8et8trc, inf.
Sei8t/xev, part. SetSicos ; plup. eSet'St/x-ev, eSei'Stow, rarely SetSte (777, 4).
[Ei/cw] (CIK-, IK-), 2 pf. HKa, seem; also 2 pf. coiy//,ev, ei^acrt (for
eot/cdat), inf. et/ceVai, part. CIKW? (Horn. 2 pf. IIKTOV, 2 plup. e'LKTrjv),
used with the regular forms of eot/ca, cw/o; (see Catalogue).
OlSa (18-), know; see 820 (paradigm).
See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs
in the Catalogue : di/wyw, fiifipucrKCi), eyetpw, Ip^o/xat, Kpa^a), /Wojuxu,
[rAaa>], ^>vw, and stem (So.-).
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM.
805. The verbs eJ/w, &e, et/xt, ^o, fiy/xt, send, <^i?/u, sat/,
siY, Kct^tat, ^'e, and the second perfect ot8a, know, are thus
inflected.
806. 1. elfii (stem eV-, Latin es-se~), be.
PRESENT.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
1. eifJLi w tl'riv
Sing. j 2. cl -QS e^s tr0t
4<rrC ^ fo) <TTW
Io-r6v TJTOV etrov or cftyrov Icrrov
<TT6v TJTOV ttrqv or el^rqv ?<rrwv
Plur. | 2. co-re ^T ctre or fr]T6 <TT
l<rt Jio-t etcv or cHi]<rav <TTWV, ca-raxrav,
OVTttV
,.{i
u.
/n/n. ctvai. Partic. wi/, o<ra, ov, gen. OVTOS, ovo-^s, etc.
Verbal Adjective, ecrre'os
178
INFLECTION.
[807
Sing.
Dual
f
Plur. 1
{'
is.
IMPERFECT.
Indicative.
3.
TJOTOV OF TJTOV
TJCTTTJV OP TJTTJV
FUTURE.
Indicative.
rop.cu
Ira, TQ
corrai
Optative.
CO-OIO
tCTOlTO
Infinitive.
co-co-0ai
CO-60-00V
reo-0ov
CO-OUT00V
eo-oCo-0T]v
Partic.
TK-6V
Or TJ<TT
ea-eo-Gf.
cVovrai
0-010-66
TOIVTO
2. Et/xt is for eo--/xi (footnote on 556, 5), et for eor-<rt (eon), for
eort see 556, 1 ; co is for Ito (ecr-w), etiyv for ecr-irj-v), elmi for ecr-i/at,
(3i/ for eW (eo--a>i/). 3. For the accent, see 141, 3 and 144, 5. The
participle o>j> keeps its accent in composition, as Trapcov, Trapovou,
Trapovros, Qtc. ; so ecrrat (for eorerat), as TrapeVrat.
807. DIALECTS. 1. Present Indie. Aeolic e/x/u, the most primi-
tive form, nearest to eV-/u (806, 2). Horn. eWt' and ets (for et ), et/*,eV
(for eV/AeV), edo-t. Hdt. ets and et/xeV. Doric ^/xt, eWt', ei/xeV and
et/xe's (older ^/xev), ei/rt (for etat).
2. Imperfect. Horn. 5j a, eov; ZrjaOa, yev, Zrjv, y-qv, eaav (for
^orav). Hdt. ea, eas, eare. Ionic (iterative) ecr/coi/. Later jjs for
rjo-Oa. Doric 3 sing, ^s, 1 pi. ?/xes. 3. Future. Horn. eWo/xai, etc.,
with etraetTat and eo-erat; Dor. ecnnj, eo-o-etrat, ecrcrovi^rat.
4. 5w6/. Ionic ea), erys, e>y (%o-t> ]J"0' e ^ c -' W " 1 5 Horn, also eta>.
5. Ojo. Ionic lots, lot. 6. Imper. Horn. eo--o-o (a regular middle
form). 7. Infin. Horn, l/x/xevat, l/xevat, e/xev, e/x/xev; Dor. /xev or
et/xev; lyric l/x/xev. 8. Partic. Ionic and Doric ecoy.
808. 1. et//,* (stem -, Latin ^-re), ^o.
PRESENT.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative.
Sing.
l.
Plur.
trov
trov
l'|lV
l'T
tOMTl
CT,
fr)TOV
tl)TOV
toftV
tt|T
I'otfu or loCijv
t'ois
toi
fclTOV
Imperative.
trw
tTOV
trwv
t'ot|JLV
Voicv
fee
tovrwv, trwv, or trwcrav
7n/fn. 2eVot. Partic. iu>v, tovo-a, tov, gen. tovros, townys, etc.
Verbal Adit.r.tint>S- /-roc. Irene.
810]
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM.
179
IMPERFECT.
Dual. Plural.
1. rfa or xfciv fljiv
2. fl'eis or TJW9a tfrov -fr*
3. jfeiortfiMr ffrtjv jj<rav or tfeerav
Imperfect forms rja/Jiev and ijetre are rare and doubted.
2. In compounds the participle l&v keeps the accent of the
simple form ; as Trapiwv, Traptotio-a, TraptoVro?, Trapiovcri. (See 806, 3.)
3. The present et/u generally (always in Attic) has a future
sense, shall go, taking the place of a future of cp^o/xat, whose future
\varofjucu, is rarely (or never) used in Attic prose.
809. DIALECTS. 1. Present Indie. Horn. efo-0a for ?. 2. Imperf.
Horn. 1 p. rfia, rjiov, 3 p. ^te, ijc, te; dual troyi/; pi. 1 p. yo/Aev,
3 p. ^tov, rj'ia-av (jjaav), i<rav. Hdt. ^ta, iji'e, ^tcrav. 3. <Stt6/. Horn.
tyaOa, tr^crt. 4. 0/?f. Horn, teo; (for tot). 5. /w^. Horn,
or t-/>iei/ (for t-evat), rarely t/A/xevot.
6. Future, Horn. ctcro/u ; ^lorisf, Horn, etcra/x^v or
810.
1.
(stem c-),
ACTIVE.
PRESENT.
Sing.
{
Indicative.
1. fr,^
2. ftp
Subjunctive. Optative.
t teCrjv
fci
Infln.
I
3.
frja-i
||
Wt]
tT
tc'vat
Dual
j
2.
lTOV
if\rov
tctrov or te^rov
t'TOV
I
3.
ife-rov
tfJTOV
tTT]V Or tei^JTTJV
iTO)V
Partic.
r
1.
CfiV
tA|MV
tl(X6V Or tciT](JLV
ttis.
Plur.
2.
tm
tf]T6
tlT Or tlT]T
Cm
teicra, Ut
l
3.
tacrt
tw(Tl
tetev or itlr\arov
t^VTWV
Or te'rwo-av
IMPERFECT.
1.
t'lJV
Sing.
2.
t'as
3.
En
Dual
r
2.
forov
Future, rjaw, etc.,
regular.
i
3.
Urrjv
First Aorist, rjKa,
> . **
only
r
1.
?(UV
in
indie. (802).
Plur.
2.
Em
Perfect (in composition),
euca,
(
3.
fea-av
etc., regular.
180
INFLECTION.
[810
SECOND AORIST (generally in composition).
Indicative,. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
( L
Sing. 1 2.
(802) to V
Lifin.
etvai
U
if
ett]
faw
Dual | 2 ;
clrov
iyrov
elTov or ei'-rjTOv
^TOV
Partic.
61TTJV
TJTOV
ciTTjv or etfjTTjv
6TWV
el's, clcra.
(I-
eijxev
wjiev
dptv or it]H6v
iv
Plur. J 2.
ita
TJT6
lT or CITJTC
In
la
eicrav
*OGT
elev or eiT]crav
ivTtov
or tTwcrav
MIDDLE.
PRESENT.
fndicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
(1
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
1.
1'ep.at
tcojiai
tei[j.^v
Infin.
2.
uecrai
t<g
teio
t'ecro
t'ecrdai
3.'
CfTCU
tf|Tai
161TO
tea-001
2.
iCT00V
tf]CT00V
teior0ov
t'ecr0ov
3.
160-00V
t*|(r0ov
IcCo-erjv
teo-Ocov
Partic.
1.
U|ie0a
a>|j.e0a
tei}i0tt
te'jwvos
2.
UCT06
tf|o-06
tcta-Oc
t'(T0
3.
tevrai
twvrai
tekVTO
Ucr0a>v
or te'cr0w<rav
IMPERFECT.
l.
Dual
Plur
2 ' tW9ov
a
t'evTO
Future (in composition), ^o-o/wxt, etc., regular.
JPirs/ Aorist (in composition), ^/CCL/M/I/ (only in indie.), 670
Perfect (in composition), el/ouu. Imper. ctcr^co. Infin. e
Partic.
812] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 181
SECOND AORIST (generally in composition;.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
{1. l(JLT]V WJXCU eiJJLTJV
2- t<ro j Eo o Infin.
3. elro tfrat etro 2<r0w I<r0ai
Dual j 2 ' l<r00v 1 f" 00v l<rflov ^ 00V
Plur.J2. 6l<T0 lf<T0 l<T06 2<T0
I 3. CIVTO WVTCU clvTO fc(T0a>V<>l t'o-GwO-dV
Aorist Passive (in composition), eWrjv. Subj. e0a>. Partic. 0eis.
Future Passive (in composition), e^ao/xat.
Verbal Adjectives (in composition), eros, CTCOS-
2. The imperfect active of a<f>fr)fjt.i is a<f>trjv or rj<j>ir)v (544).
The optatives d^foire and d<^ioiei/, for d^Ictre and d^>teti/, and
TrpooiTO, TrpooLQ-Oe, and Trpooivro (also accented Trpootro, etc.), for
Trpoetro, TTpoelaOt, and 7rpoeti/ro, sometimes occur. For similar forms
of TiOijiu, see 741.
811. DIALECTS. 1. Horn. ?^/At (with initial t); imp. te> for
tr;v ; 1 aor. c-rjKa for ^Ka ; 2 aor. ccrav, c/onyv, crro, by omission of aug-
ment, for clcrav, et/x^i/, /TO ; infin. e/xej/ for eli/at. In aw'^/xi, Horn,
fut. dveo"<o, aor. avO"a.
2. Hdt. perf. mid. av-eWrai for di/-etvrat, and perf. pass, partic.
fit-/xT-i-/xe'vos, for /M,$-ei/Ai/os, summoned.
812. ^w7//-t (stem <a-), sa/.
PRES. IMPERP.
<{)T]v Subj. <w, <$>?)$, </>>J, etc.
or <j>T)S <{>T)(r0a or <|>T]S Oy>/'. <j>a.Lrjv, ^>at'rys, etc.
ccpii 47tiT)er. (poi(/i or (paui** Q)CITO)
4>ar6v I<f>arov etc.
<J)aT6v 44>drr|v Infin. <>avat.
^4>aucv Partic. ^>a9, <acra, <^>dv, ii)
^aTt Attic prose <do7ca>v is used.
<{>acrC e<t,ao-av
Future, ^<ra>, <fyrj(rew, ffrfo-onr.
Aorist, ?^>^(ra, <^>7^cr<
Verbal Adjectives, <UTOS,
A perfect passive imperative (3 pers.) Tre^aa^w occurs.
182 INFLECTION. [813
813. DIALECTS. 1. Present. Ind. Doric <^d/u, <aTt, $am;
Horn. <f>r)frOa for <>/$. In/in, poet. <a/>iev.
Imperfect. Horn. <j}v, ^s or (frfjaQa, <j>r) (Doric c$a and <a),
<av and <oV (for l^ao-av and <atrai/).
Aarist. Doric <ao-e for fyrjo-e.
2. Homer has some middle forms of ^/w; pres. imper. <f>do.
<j>a(r6u), <ao-0e; infin. <j>d<rOai; partic. $a;aevos; imperf. e<a/xr?i/ or
<a/x?7v, 2</>aro or ^>aro, e<ai/ro and <jxwro. Doric /M. <j!)do-o/u.
'J'hese all have an active sense.
814. i5/taf (stem ^<7-), mt.
(Chiefly poetic in simple form : in Attic prose KaO-rjfJM is
generally used.)
Present. Indie. rjfJjai, rjaai, -Jo-rat; rjvOov, ijfte^a, fjvOe, rjvrca.
Imper. ^ao, ycrOa), etc. Infin. ycr&aL. Partic. ij/xevos.
Imperfect, ^^v, 170-0, ^O~TO; ^cr^oi/, rjffOrjv', rjfJLtOa, ijo-0e, ^j^-o.
815. KdOyfua is thus inflected :
Present. Indie. KaOrjfJLat, KaO^o-ai, Ka^rat; Ka^o-^oi/; Ka0?//xe0a,
KaiOrja-Oe, KdOrjvrai. Subj. Ka^cu/xat, KaOfj, KaOfjTai, etc. Ojt??.
KaOolo, KaOoLTO, etc. Imper. KdOrjo-o (in comedy, Ka0ou),
etc. /n/m. KaOfjo-Qai. Partic. KaOrffjitvos.
Imperfect. tKaOyfjLTjv, CKd0r)(ro, tKdO-qro, etc., also Ka.OiqfA.rjv,
KaOfjo-TO and KaOfjTo, etc.
816. N". The o- of the stem is dropped except before rat and TO,
and in KaOrj-rai and (c)Ka^-ro even there. The middle endings
added directly to a consonant stem or to a long vowel or diphthong
(as in Kei/juu) give the present and imperfect the appearance of a
perfect and pluperfect (803, 3).
817. DIALECTS. Homer has efarai, rarely carat, for ^vrat; and
ctaro, rarely earo, for ^i/ro. Hdt. has Karearat and Karearo.
818. Kelfjiai (stem /eet-, /ce-), lie.
Present. Indie, fcet/xat, Ketcrai, Ketrat; /ceto-^oi/; t/xe^a,
Ke?i/rat. SM&/. and OpL These forms occur: Keryrat,
Keotro, 7rpoo--Kotrro. Imper. jcetao, KCtb-^a), etc. Infin. iceicr$ai,
Partic. Ket/^evo?.
Imperfect. eKt]u.^v, l/cetao, Ketro; Kto-^ov,
KLVTO.
Future. Ket'o-o/^at, regular.
821]
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM.
183
819. DIALECTS. Homer has Kearat, /cetarai, and Ke'ovrat, for
KCU/TCU ; KcWcro (iterative) for e/ceiro ; Kearo and Ketaro for CKCIVTO ;
subj. Ki?rat. Hdt. has Keerai, /cce'cr^w, Ke'ea&u, and CKeero, for KCI
etc. ; and always Kearai and eKearo for Keu/rca and
820. o?$a (stem t'8-),
(Oi8a is a second perfect of the stem &: see e8W in
the Catalogue, and 804.)
SECOND PERFECT.
Indicative.
1. otSa
2. oto-Oa
3. otSc
Subjunctive. Optative.
Plur.
Jnfin.
1. t<T|UV
Imperative.
Mi
F
Is.
l8fi
etc.
regular
frrdtrt
Par^c. el8<&s,
etc.
regular
l86s, gen.
<TT
t<TTwv
(335>
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
Sing. Dual Plur.
1. -gSt] or ffSeiv ^<rjwv
2. ffSucrOa or fi'Seto-Ga Tftrrov -QOT*
3. T|8t(v) -QO-TTIV -go-av or fj'Sco-av
Future, eto-o/xat etc., regular. Verbal Adjective, toreos.
821. DIALECTS. 1. The Ionic occasionally has the regular
forms oTSas, ot'Sa/uev, otSao-t ; and very often ?S/x,v for t<rftev. Ionic
fut. 18770*0) (rare and doubtful in Attic).
2. Ionic iJSea, i/See, ^'Seare, Horn. ^18775 and 778775, ^euJr;, to-av,
in pluperfect. The Attic poets rarely have rjBc^v and jJSere (like
3. Horn. ci8o/xev etc., for c?8w/xev in subj. ; tS^evat and tfyxei/ in
infin. ; iSwa for ctSvux in the participle.
4. Aeolic Boeotian ITTO> for torco in imperative.
6. For Doric i<ra/u (= oT8a), see Catalogue.
PART IIL
FORMATION OF WORDS.
822. (Simple and Compound Words.) A simple word
is formed from a single stem; as Aoyos (stem Aey-), speech,
ypd<f>a> (ypa<j>-), write. A compound word is formed by com-
bining two or more stems ; as \oyo-y pathos (Aoyo-, y/oa<-),
speech-writer; dK/oo-TroXts, citadel (upper city).
FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
823. (Primitives and Denominatives.) (a) Nouns or adjec-
tives formed directly from a root (153) or from a verb stem
are called primitives; as apxrf (stem dpxa-), beginning, from
apX') Stem of apx w j y/oa<evs (ypa<eu-), ivriter, ypac/jts (ypa<j!>iS-),
style (for writing), ypawy (ypa/A/za- for y/oa<-/*d-), line (828),
y/oa/x/aa (y/oa/x/xar-), written document, ypa<JHKOs (ypa<f>LKo-), able
to write, all from y/oa<-, stem of ypd<f><a, write; Troirj-Tys, poet
(maker), irofy-ms, poesy (making), Troirj-fw, poem,
able to make, from Trote-, stem of TTOLCW, make. So
justice, from the root &K-; KaKos, 6ad, from KO.K-.
824. Nouns, adjectives, and verbs formed from the stems
of nouns or adjectives, are called denominatives; as /focri-
A.ct'a, kingdom, from /WiA.e(v)- (263); dpxcuos, ancient, from
dpxa- (stem of apx*})', BiKaioa-vvr), justice, from StKaio-; rl/xa-a),
honor, from rt/xa-, stem of the noun rZtJ.
825. N. (1) The name verbal is often applied to primitive words,
because generally their root or stem actually occurs as a verb stem.
This, however, does not show that the noun or adjective is derived
from the verb, but merely that both have the same root or stem. Thus
the root ypa<f>- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel-
oped into a noun, adjective, or verb. By adding a it becomes 7pa<a-,
184
831] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 185
the stem of ypa.^, a writing, which stem generally appears as ypacpd-
in the plural, and is modified by case-endings to ypa<pd-i, ypa<pd-s, etc.
(See 168; 170.) By adding the thematic vowel % (561, 1), ypd<j>- is
developed into ypa.<p%-, the present stem of the verb ypdipw, write,
which is modified by personal endings to ypd<po-fju-v, we write, ypd<pe-Te,
you write, etc.
(2) Even a noun or adjective derived from the stem of a denomina-
tive verb is called primitive ; as auX^r^s, flute-player, from atfXe-, the
stem of auX<?w, play the flute ; the latter, however, is formed from the
stem of av\6-s, flute (829).
826. (Suffixes.) Koots or stems are developed into new
stems by the addition of syllables (not themselves stems)
called suffixes. Thus, in the examples in 823, final a- in
18- in cuiB- ia- in -axxa- *ar- in
-, IKO- in ypa<f>iKo- t etc. are suffixes.
827. N. Rarely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical with the
verb stem ; as in (pv\a, guard, from stem <pv\a.K-, seen also in 0uXdo-o-o>,
I guard (580) ; 0X6 (0X07-), flame, from same stem as <t>\y-u (831).
828. N. The final consonant of a stem is subject to the same eu-
phonic changes before a suffix as before an ending ; as in ypdfj.-fj.a f 01
ypa<p-/j.a, X^ts for \ey-cris, 5i/cao--T^s.for 5t/ca5-T7js. (See 71 ; 74 ; 75.)
829. N. A final vowel of the stem may be contracted with a vowel
of the suffix ; as in dpxatos, ancient, from dp^a- and to-s (850). But
such a vowel is sometimes dropped; as in ovpdv-ios, heavenly, from
ovpavo- and to-s, /3ao-tX-tK6s, kingly, from /3ao-tXe(i;)- and t/co-s; evvo-ia,
good-will, from evvoo- and ta (842).
A final stem vowel is sometimes changed ; especially from o to e in
denominatives, as in ol^-w, dwell (ol/co-s, house), otW-TTjs, house-servant,
and otKetos (o^e-tos), domestic / sometimes from a to u, as in arparni}-
TT/S, soldier (crrpana-), Zi/ceXtw-TTjs, Sicilian Greek (Zi/ceXta-); some-
times from a to 77, as in iX^-eis, woody, from "Xr? (iXd-).
830. N. (1) Many vowel stems (especially verb stems) lengthen
their final vowel before a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (635) ;
as irolr]-/j.a, iroLTj-a-is, TroiTy-riKxSs, TTOIT;-T^S, from Trote-.
(2) Many add <r before /* and r of a suffix, as in the perfect and
aorist passive (640) ; as /ceXev-<r-TiJs, commander, Kt\v-<r-jj.a, command,
from K\ev- (jceXerfw), KK^\ev-<r-fji.ai.
(3) Others add 6, as a-raO-nfc, station, from <rra- (for^t).
(4) Others drop a final consonant, as aojcppo-ff^vn, temperance, from
ffb)(f>p6v-.
831. N. In many nouns and adjectives, especially those in os and Vj,
the interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified, as
in the second perfect (643; 644). A change of e to o ( and eu to ot
and ov) is especially common (31). Thus X^, for (/etfulness, from Xa0-
(cf. \Ai?0a); y6vos, offspring, from yev- (cf. ytyova)-, Xot7r6s, remaining,
from XetTr- (cf. XAot?ra) ; a-ropy-fi, affection, from ffTepy- (cf. e<rropya) ;
irofiTT-n, sending, from ir^ir- (cf. 7r^7ro/x0a) ; 77)671-05, turn, from rpe-rr- ;
0X6, flame, gen. 0X0765, from 0Xe7- ; <nrovdri, haste, from ffirev-. So
also in adverbs; see <X-X7}j3-oV (Xa/3-): see 860, 2.
186 FORMATION OF WORDS. [832
I. FORMATION OF NOUNS.
PRIMITIVE NOUNS.
832. The simplest and most common suffixes in nouns are o-
(norn. os or ov) and d- (nom. a or tj). Nouns thus formed have
a great variety of meanings. The change of e to o (831) is here
regular. E.g.
Aoyo-s (Aoy-o-), speech, from Aey-, stem of Ae'yco (831) ; rpoTros,
turn, from rpeTr- (stem of TpeTro), turn); oroAo?, expedition, and
crToA?7, equipment, from oreA- (stem of oTeAAw, send) ; fM-X'' 1 ! (/ xa X" a ")>
6afe, from /Aa^- (stem of frnxofjuu, Jight) .
833. (Agent.} 1. The following suffixes denote the agent :
v- (nom. ews) : ypa<-ev-s, writer, from ypa</>- (ypa<oo) ; yoi/-ev-s,
parent, from yei/-.
TTjp- (nom. r?7p) : (rwnyp, saviour, from era)- (<r<6a>, <ra)a>,
rop- (uom. T<op) : pi/JT(ap, orator, from pe- (epe'o>, epw,
TO,- (nom. TTy?) : Trot^TTy?, jt?oe (maker), from TTOIC- (Trote'cu) ; op)(rj-
V-TTJS, dancer, from op^e- (op^eo/Aat, dance). (See 830, 1, 2.)
2. To these correspond the following feminine forms :
Tcipd- (nom. retpa) : trwretpa, fern, of awri/jp.
rpia- (nom. rpta) : Trot^rpia, poetess ; 6p\rj<rrpLa., dancing-girl.
rpiS- (nom. rpts) : opx^^rpts, dancing-girl, gen. -1805.
Ti8- (nom. rtg) : 7rpo<j>rjTis, prophetess ; otKm?, female servant.
3. Verbals in r^p and rpt? are oxytone : those in rwp, rpta, and
reipa have recessive accent (110, 4).
834. (,4cft'0n.) These suffixes denote a c^'on :
TI- (nom. TIS, fern.) : Trcicr-Tts, belief, from TTI^- (irei&ia, believe).
<ri- (nom. ats, fern.) : Av-crts, loosing, from Av- (A^w).
o-id- (nom. o-ta, fern.) : So/a/xa-cn'd, testing (SoKt/ota^w, tes/).
fjio- (nom. /xo?, masc.) : o8vp/*,os, wailing (o8up-o/xcu, waz7) ; o-7ra<r
/xo?, spasm (cr7ra-a), draw)\ ovOfjios (830, 3), rhythm (pea>,j#0M7, stem
pv-). (See 574.)
835. N. The suffix jtia- (nom ^77, fern.) has the same force as simple
o-(832) ; as yi>u/j,-r], knowledge (yvo-); 68^, odor (6o>, 65-).
836. N. From stems 'in eu (e/r) of verbs in euw come nouns in eta
denoting action ; as j8a<rtXcfa, kingly power, kingdom, iraiddd, education.
For feminines in eta of nouns in eus. see 841.
837. (Result.) These suffixes denote the result of an action :
H.O.T- (nom. px, neut.) : 7rpay-/>ux, thing, act, from Trpay- (Trpao-crw,
cfo) ; pTjfJM, saying (thing said), from pe- (fut. epo>) ; T/X^-/AO, section,
gen. T^/XXXTOS, from T/X.C-, re/x- (re/xi/w, cwf).
842] DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. 187
<r- (nom. os, neut.) : Xa^os (Xa^eo--), lot, from Xa^- (Xay^aj/a>,
gain by lot) ; e0os (e0eo--), custom, from e#- (eico^a, am accustomed) ;
yeVos (yei/e<r-), race, from yev- (yf-yoi/-a, 831).
In some primitives this suffix e<r- denotes quality ; as/3d0os (j3a0e<r-),
rom root /3a0-) ; /3</>os (paper-), weight (from root /Sap-); 0d\7roj
--), 7iea (0d\7r-u>, warm).
838. (Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by
rpo- (nom. rpoi/, Latin Zrww) : apo-rpov, plough, aratrum, from
dpo- (dpoto, plough) ; Xv-rpoi/, ransom, from Xv- (Xuw) ; Xov-rpov,
&a^, from Xov- (Xov'w, wash).
839. N. The feminine in r/oS sometimes denotes an instrument, as
xvrpa, earthen pot, from %u- (x^w, pour) ; |u-<r-rpa, scraper (v-w, scrape) ;
sometimes other relations, e.g. j?Zace, as iraXal-a-Tpd, place for wrestling,
from TraXai- (TraXata, wrestle, 640).
840. Some primitives are formed from stems in
avo-, as oW^-ai/o-s, crown (orrc^-w, crown) ;
ova-, as ^S-ov^, pleasure (iJS-o/xat, 6e pleased) ;
ov- or v-, as etK-ojv, image, from elK- (toixa, resemble),
, from KXvS- (/cXv<o, dash).
DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
841. (Person Concerned.) A person concerned with anything
may be denoted by the following suffixes :
6V-, masc. (nom. evs), sometimes 6id- (for c/r-ta), fern. (nom.
a) : tep-evs, priest, from tepo-s, sacred (829), fern, u'p-cta, priestess;
^ao-tX-evs, ^'^^ (derivation uncertain), fern. /JcunX-eia, queen,
Trop@fj.-evs, ferryman, from 7rop#/zo-s, ferry.
ro.-, masc. (nora. TI/S), n8-, fem. (nom. TIS) : 7ro\f-Trj<;, citizen,
from 7roXt-s, ciVy, fem. TroXt-ri?, female citizen ; OLK-rrj<s, house-servant,
from OIKO-S, fowse, fem. otKe-rts, housemaid; o-Tpartoi-Tiys, soldier,
from o-rpana, arm?/ (829).
842. (Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjec
tive stems by these suffixes :
nyr- (nom. TT^S, fem.) : veo-rry? (veoTT^r-), yow^, from veo-s young;
iao-TTjs (io-oT-rjT-), equality, from t<ro-s, equal (cf. Latin veritas, gen.
veri-tatis, and vtr/M5, gen. vir-tutis).
<rwd- (nom. O-WT/, fem.): SiKaio-crvvrj, justice, from 8t/caio-s, 7*M^ ; -
va)(j>po-(Tvvr], temperance, from aw^pwj/ (<r<*)<j)pov-), temperate.
id- (nom. ta or ia, fem.) : <ro^>-ta wisdom (<ro<j>6-s), KO.KLO., vict
(KaKo-s), dX^eta, frw^, for aXyBev-ia. (dX^^s, /rue), evi/ota, ^
ness, for ewa-ta (evyoo-s, euvov?, ^mc?).
188 FORMATION OF WORDS.
843. (Place} This is denoted by these suffixes :
1. 10- (nom. LOV, neut.) with the termination rrjp-iov:
lov, court-house, a.Kpod-Trjp-iov, place of hearing (auditorium). These
are probably from old sterns in rtjp- (Babrius has SiKacrr^pwv, from
iKa<TTr}p, for 8t/cao-To>i/, of judges). So arjpav-T'ijp-iov, seal (place of
sealing), from o-rjfjuavrijp.
eto- for e-to-: Kovpetov, barber's shop, from Kovpev-s, barber; so
\oy-eiov (A.oyo-s), speaking-place, Motxr-etov (Movcra), haunt of the
Muses.
2. wv- (nom. on/, masc.) : dvSpwv, men's apartment, from av-tjp,
gen. dvop-os, man; d/xTreXwi/, vineyard, from d/A7reA.o-s, vine.
844. (Diminutives.) These are formed from noun stems by
the following suffixes :
10- (nom. tov, neut.) : ircuiov, little child, from TTCU&- (7rcus,
child)', KrjTT-LOv, little garden (KT/TTOS). Sometimes also 1810-, apio-,
vSpio-, v\\io- (all with nom. in LOV) ; oi/c-t'Stov, little house (OIKOS) ;
TrcuS-apiov, little child ; /AeA.-uSpiov, little song (/xeAos) ; 7r-vAAtoi/, little
verse, versicle, Latin versiculus (CTTOS). Here final eo-- of the stem
is dropped.
UTKO- (nom. tir/cos, masc.) and IO-KOI- (nom. four}, fern.) : TratS-
I<TKO<S, young boy, TraiS-ib-Kiy, young girl ; so j/ednc7Kos, vedvarKr;, from
stem vcdv- (nom. veav, youth).
845. N". Diminutives sometimes express endearment, and some-
times contempt; as TraTpiSiov, /?apa (ira.rrjp, father),
846. (Patronymics.} These denote descent from a parent or
ancestor (generally a father), and are formed from proper names
by the suffixes 8d- (nom. S^s, masc. parox.) and 8- (nom. <s for 8s,
fern, oxytone) ; after a consonant i8d- and 18- (nom. tSiys and is).
1. Stems (in a-) of the first declension shorten a and add Sd-
and 8- ; as Bopea-tfys, son of Boreas, and Bopea-s, gen. Bopea-Sos.
daughter of Boreas, from Bopcds, Boreas.
2. Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add iSd-
and 18- ; as TIpta/x,-t8>;s, son of Priam, IIpca/4ri$, gen. Ilpta/xiSos,
daughter of Priam, from Hpta/xo-s. Except those in to-, which
change o to a, making nominatives in icufys and tas (as in 1) ; as
eoricwfys and ecrrtas, sow and daughter of Thestius (eWio-s).
3. Stems of the third declension add i8a- and 18-, those in ctj
dropping v before t; as KeKporr-t'S^s, son (or descendant) of Cecrops,
-ts, gen. 1805, daughter of Cecrops, from KeVpoj/f, gen.
'ArpctSr/s (Horn. 'ArpeiSrys), son o/ ^4^rews, from
gen. 'Arpe-tu? ; IlryXetS^s (Horn. II^AetS^s), son o/ Peleus,
851] ADJECTIVES. 189
from IfyAev-s, gen. IliyXe-ws, Horn, also EfyAryido^s (as if from a
form II 77X77109).
847. N. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix iov-
or iv- (nom. twv) ; as Kpovtwi/, gen. Kpovtwvos or Kpovioj/os (to
suit the metre), son of Cronos (KpoVo-s).
848. (Gentiles.) 1. These designate a person as belonging to
some country or toivn, and are formed by the following suffixes :
cv- (nom. ev?, masc.) : 'Eperpi-cvs, Eretrian ('EpeTpi'd) ; Meyap
evs, Megarian (Meyapa, pi.) ; KoAwvevs, q/ Colonos (KoAa>vo-s).
TCI- (nom. T77$, masc. parox.) : Teyea-r^s, of Tegea (Teye'a),
'H7reipto-T?7<;, of Epirus ("HTretpos), SiKeAicu-TTys, Sicilian Greek
(SticeXta). (See 829.)
2. Feminine stems in 18- (nom. /s, gen. 5os) correspond to mascu-
lines in eu- ; as WLeyapls, Megarian woman ; and feminines in n8- (nom.
TIS, gen. riSos), to masculines in rd-, as Si/ceXiw-ns, Sicilian woman.
ADJECTIVES.
849. 1. The simplest suffixes by which primitive adjectives
(like nouns) are formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom.
masc. os ; fern. 77, a, or os ; neut. ov) : o-o<-os, cro<^>^, <ro<oV, wise ;
Ka/c-09, bad ; A.ot7r-os, remaining (XeiTr-, XOLTT-, 831).
2. Some have v- (nom. vs, eta, v), added only to roots : i^S-vs,
sweet, from iy8- (iJ8o/ouxi, &e pleased) ; /fop-v?, heavy (root /Sap-, cf.
/?ap-o?, weight) ; ra^-vs, swzy/! (root ra^-, cf. rtx^o?, swiftness).
3. Some have <r- (norn. ^9, cs) : ifsevS-rjs (^evSeo--), /a/5e (^v8-
o/xat, fo'e) ; (ra.<f>-r)<s (cra^>ecr-), plain (root <ra<-).
Most adjectives in 779 are compounds (881).
4. Some expressing inclination or tendency have H.DV- (nom. /xwv,
/xov) : /xv^-/xo>v, mindful, from /xva- (/x-/xvr7-/xai) ; rX^/Awv, suffering,
from rAa- (see rXaa)) ; 7rt-X^(r-)tx(oi/, forgetful, from A.a#- (Aav^avw).
850. Adjectives signifying belonging or related in any way /o a
person or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix 10-
(nom. tos) : ovpoV-ios, heavenly (ovpavo-s), otKeio?, domestic (oLco-s,
see 829) ; St'Kaios, ./MS* (StKa-), 'A^vatos, Athenian ('A^vat, stem
'A<Vd-).
851. 1. Denominatives formed by IKO- (nom. CKO?) denote refa-
fzon, like adjectives in tos (850), sometimes fitness or ability. Stems
in t drop i before IKO-. 7i.gr.
'Apx-iKOs, fit for rule (dpx>7, rule) ; 7roA.e/x,-i/cos, warlike, of war
(7rdXc/xo-s) ; ^VCT-IKOS, natural (t^im-) ; ^ao-iA-t/cos, kingly (fio0t\-
eus); ypa<^>-iK09, capable of writing or drawing (ypa^ny).
2. Similar adjectives are formed directly from verb stems by
190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [852
TIKO- (nom. rt/cos) : TrpaK-rt/cds, Jit for action, practical, from Trpay
(7rpao-<r<o) ; CUO-^TIKOS, capable of feeling.
852. Adjectives denoting .material are formed by
ivo- (nom. u/os, proparoxytone), as XiO-wos, of stone (A/0os);
eo- (nom. cos, contr. ovs), as xpucreos, \pvaov<s, golden (xpvaos).
853. N. Adjectives in iv6s (oxytone) denote time, as eap-it>6s, vernal
(lap, spring), wKrep-ivfa, by night (vt%, night, vvKrepos, by night}.
854. Those denoting fulness (chiefly poetic) are formed by evr-
(nom. ts, eao-a, ev) ; x a piS> graceful (\api-s), gen. xapi-evros;
uA.>7-is (872), wood?/ ; cf. 829. Latin gratiosus, silvosus.
855. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by
various suffixes besides the simple o- ; as vo-, \o-, po-, 410-, \LO-, or
<rijto-, TT]pu>-, all with nom. in os: Sa-vos (Set-), terrible,
timid, (frBovt-pos, envious (<f>0ovos, envy), /xa^-t/utos, warlike,
, useful, tTTTra-ai/xos, Jit for riding (or for cavalry) (from L
, irao--Tr)pios, persuasive (7rei'0-a>). Verbals in Xos are active,
those in vos are passive; those in pos are generally active but
sometimes passive, as <o/2-pos, both frightful and afraid.
856. N. Most adjectives in i/os, Aos, and pos are oxytone.
857. All participles are primitive (verbal) adjectives: so the
verbals in TOS and TCOS.
858. Comparatives and superlatives in repos and raros are
denominatives; but those in Ion/ and IOTOS are primitives, adding
these terminations directly to the root (357, 2).
ADVERBS.
859. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives (see 365-367).
860. Adverbs may be formed also from the stems of nouns or
verbs by the following suffixes :
1. 86v (or 8d), TjSdv: ava-<}>av-56i>, openly (&va-<j>alv<>), 0a?-), poet,
also dva(j>avdd ; Kw--r)56v, like a dog (KVWV, gen. icw-fa).
2. 8i]v or aSrjv : Kpvp'Srjv, secretly (/CPUTTTW, conceal) ; <rv\\'/ift-dr}v,
collectively (av\\a^dvd), \aft-, 611); airop-A.drjv, scatteredly (atrelpu,
sow, scatter, stem a?rep-) ; dv^-drjv, profusely (dv-irjfjn, let out, stem e-).
3. T( : dvo/j.ao'-Ti, by name (^TO/xafa;) ; \\r)vi<r-Tl, in Greek (eXXrjj'/f'w).
4. See also the local endings 0t, dev, 5e, etc. (292-296).
DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
861. A verb whose stem is derived from the stem of a noun
or adjective is called a denominative (824). The following are the
principal terminations of such verbs in the present indicative
active :
870] COMPOUND WORDS. 191
1. aw (stem in a-) : rl/xaw, honor, from noun TI/A?/ (ri/>ia-), honor.
2. (e-) : dpi0/A'a>, cow/if, from dptfyxo-s, number (829).
3. ow (o-) : /u,T0oa>, let for hire, from /uo-0o-s, /?a#.
4. v (cv-) : /3axnA.eva), 6e Hn<7, from /Sao-iAev-s, &w<7 (see 863).
5. at (a8-) : 8i*d<o, Judge, from 81*77 (8iKa-), justice (862).
6. it (18-) : e'A.7u'<o, Ao/w?, from Airis (eAiriS-), o/?e (862).
7. aivw (ai/-) : cny/xaa/w, signify, from o^/xa (<n0*aT-), *i0n (865).
8. vvw (w-) : ^8v/a>, sweeten, from i/8v-s, swee* (865).
862. Verbs in a(o, t^w, atvco, and ui/w are of the fourth class :
for their formation, see 579-596. Some denominatives of this
class end in AAw, atpw, cipa>, and vpw; as dyye'AAa) (
announce, KaOaipw (Ka^apo-s), purify, fyxet'pa) (?/xepo-s),
jLtaprvpo/xat (/uuxprvs, stem /xaprvp-), ca/i /o witness.
863. Many verbs in euw are formed merely by the analogy of those
(like /Sao-tXeu-w) with stems in /: .thus /SouXeua;, ^a^e counsel, from
0ov\4; d\-rj0evu}, be -truthful, from d\r)6ris.
864. Likewise many in t^w and most in afw merely follow the
analogy of those like 4\irlfu (And-) and 0/)d^w (0/m5-), which have
actual stems in 5 (see 587).
865. The stems in av and w of verbs in a^w and vv<a come from
nominal stems without v: see the examples above.
866. Some verbs in ew come from adjectives in rjs by dropping r-
of the stem; as etfrux^w, be fortunate, from eur^x^s (euruxeo--).
867. N. Verbs formed from the same noun stem with different
endings sometimes have different meanings ; as iroXe/ulw and (poetic)
7roXe^cifw, make war, TroXe^w, wa&e hostile, both from 7r6Xe/*o-s, tear;
5ouX6w, enslave, 5ov\evw, be a slave, from 6oOXo-s, slave.
868. (Desideratives.) 1. Verbs expressing a dm're to do any-
thing are sometimes formed from other verbs and from nouns by
the ending CTCIW (stem in o-et-), sometimes aw or iaa> (a- or ia-) ; as
8pd-o-tcu, desire to do (8pa-o>) ; yeAa-oWa), desire to laugh (yeA.a-0)) ;
^>ov-aa>, 6e blood-thirsty (^>oi/os) ; KAav-a-taco, desire <o weep (/cA.atw,
stem K^av-).
2. Some verbs in tatu denote a bodily condition; as o<
/iaye diseased eyes (ophthalmia), w^ptao), 6e pale, pv0piau>, blush.
COMPOUND WOEDS.
869. In a compound word we have to consider (1) the
first part of the compound, (2) the last part, and (3) the
meaning of the whole.
870. N. The modifications which are necessary when a compound
Consists of more than two parts will suggest themselves at onqe.,
192 FORMATION OF WORDS. [871
I. FIRST PART OF A COMPOUND WORD.
871. 1. When the first part of a compound is a noun or
adjective, only its stem appears in the compound.
2. Before a consonant, stems of the first declension gen-
erally change final d to o; those of the second declension
retain o; and those of the third add o. Before a vowel,
stems of the first and second declensions drop d or o. E.g.
oAa(r<ro-KpaT(op (0aAao-cra-), ruler of the sea, xopo-SiSaaKoAos
(xopo-), chorus-teacher, TraiSo-Tpi/fys (TrcuS-), trainer of boys, K<f>a\-
aXyqs (K<aAa-), causing headache, xop-T/yos (xopo-), (orig.) chorus-
director; so ixOvo-<f>dyo<; (tx^ v ~)> fish-eater, <uo-io-Aoyos, enquiring
into nature. The analogy of the second (or o-) declension prevails
throughout.
872. N. There are many exceptions. Sometimes 77 takes the place
of o; as x oi ?-06pos (x o/ n> libation), bringer of libations, e\a</>T7-/36\os
(\a0o-s), deer-slayer. Stems in ecr (226) often change ea to o ; as
Tet-xo-fjiaxio- (7""X ea "')i wall-fighting. The stems of vaus, ship, and /Sous,
ox, generally appear without change (vav- and /Sow) ; as vav-/j.axia, sea-
fight, ftov-KbXos, herdsman. Sometimes a noun appears in one of its
cases, as if it were a distinct word ; as veuur-otKos, ship-house, i>av<ri-iropo$,
traversed by ships.
873. Compounds of which the first part is the stem of
a verb are chiefly poetic.
1. Here the verbal stem sometimes appears without change
before a vowel, and with e, i, or o added before a consonant. E.g.
IIei0-apxos, obedient to authority ; /xcv-c-TTToXe/xos, steadfast in
battle ; ap\-i-T(.KT(j)v, master-builder ; A.iTr-6-ya/xos, marriage-leaving
(adulterous).
2. Sometimes <n (before a vowel tr) is added to the verb
stem. E.g.
AU-O-I-TTOVOS, toil-relieving; orp'ei/a-StKos (orp<-), justice-twisting ;
repi/a-voos (repTr-), soul-delighting; TTA^-ITTTTOS (TrA^y-), horse-lashing.
874. 1. A preposition or an adverb may be the first part of a
compound word; as in 7rpo-/?oAAw, throw before (882, 1), det-Xoytd,
continual talking, cv-yci^s, well-born.
2. Here no change of form occurs, except when a final vowel is
elided, or when ?rpo contracts o with a following e or o into ov, as
in irpovx<*> (Trpo, ex* )' hold before; vrpovpyov (?rp6, Ipyov), forward,
<poi)8os (Trpo, 6Sov), gone (93).
3. Euphonic changes occur here as usual; as in yx<optos (c?
and ^ a : see 78.
881] COMPOUND WORDS. 193
875. The following inseparable prefixes are never used
alone :
1. av- (a- before a consonant), called alpha privative, with a
negative force, like English un-, Latin in-. It is prefixed to noun,
adjective, and verb stems, to form adjectives ; as dv-eA.ev0epos, unfree,
dv-aiS^s, shameless, di/-d/xoios, unlike, d-7rais, childless, d-ypa<os, un-
written, d-0os, godless, d-(/r)ou/os, wineless.
2. 8vo--, ill (opposed to ei!, well), denoting difficulty or trouble;
as 8vo--7ropo, hard to pass (opposed to ev-rropos) ; Sva-rvxys, unfor-
tunate (opposed to v-Tv\ri<;).
3. VTJ- (Latin ne), a poetic negative prefix; as 1/77-71-011/05, un-
avenged; vrj-iAtpTTrjs, unerring (for vr/-a/xep-n?s).
4. TJJU- (Latin semi-), half; as r}/Lw-0eos, demigod.
876. N. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry, apt-,
epi-, 8a-, a-, as dpc'-yi/wros, well-known; 8a-c/i>oii/ds, bloody.
877. N. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting union);
as in d-Xo^os, bedfellow (from
II. LAST PART OF A COMPOUND WORD.
878. At the beginning of the last part of a compound
noun or adjective, a, e, or o (unless it is long by position)
is very often lengthened to rj or w. E.g.
SxpaT-ryyos (orpaTO-s, ayco), general ; uTr-r/Koos (VTTO, d/couw),
obedient; /car-Type </>^s (/cara, epe'^xo), covered; CTT-WI/W/XOS (eVt, 6i/o/uxx),
naming or named for; Kar-r/yopos (/card, dyopa), accuser; but av-o\./3os,
unblest.
879. The last part of a compound noun or adjective
is often changed in form before the suffix. This takes
place especially in compound adjectives, and when an
abstract noun forms the last part of a compound noun.
E.g.
<I>iAo-Tt/u,os (rt/xr;), honor-loving; v-</>pwi/ ((f>prjv), joyous; tro\v-
Trpay/jnov (Trpay/txa), meddlesome; \i6o-fto\ia. (\i6os, /JoAry), stone-
throwing, vav-/xa^m (i/avs, fjLa\r}), sea-jight; ev-7rpd^t'd (Trpa^ts), success
(doing well).
880. N. An abstract noun compounded with a preposition may
retain its form ; as -rrpo-povhr), forethought.
881. Compound adjectives in 175 (849, 3) are especially
frequent.
1. The last part may be a noun, generally a neuter in os (stem
194 FORMATION OF WORDS. [882
in (T-) ; as ev-ytvrjs (ye'vos), well born, Se/ca-er^s (TOS), often years;
tv-TvxTJs (T^X?}), fortunate.
2. The last part may be formed from a verb stem ; as d-<ai/-r;s
(<ai/), unseen, ^/jn-Oav^ (0ai/-), half-dead.
882. 1. A compound verb can be formed directly only by
prefixing a preposition to a verb ; as 7rpoo--ayw, &riwgr o.
2. Indirect compounds (denominatives) are formed from
compound nouns or adjectives. E.g.
Ai$o/?oA.to, throw stones, denom. from Ai0o-/2oA.os, stone-thrower;
t/o/AO#Te<i>, make laws, from vo/xo-^eV^s, law-maker; a7rei$to, disobey,
from aTrei&ys, disobedient; Karr/yopew, accuse, from Kar-iyyopos (878),
accuser. See 543.
III. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.
883. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three classes,
distinguished by the relation of the parts of the compound
to each other and to the whole.
884. (1) Objective compounds are those composed of a
noun and a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the
noun (as first or second part) stands to the other part in
some relation (commonly that of object) which could be
expressed by an oblique case of the noun. E.g.
Aoyo-ypa<os, speech-writer (Aoyovs ypa<cov); /xKT-ai/^pwTros, man-
hating (fjiurtav avOpwTrovs) ', Ajucri-Trovos, toil-relieving; orrpar-ryyos,
general ( army-leading, arparov ayeov) ; dio-A.oyos, worthy of mention
(atos Xoyov); a/uuxpr-i'-poos (873, 1), erring in mind (a/xaprwv 1/01)) ;
t<ro-0os, godlike (i(ros &<) I rcprr-i-Kepttwos (873, 1), delighting in
thunder (repTrOjixei/os /cepawa)) ; Sto-Tpec^s, reared by Zeus (cf . <$u-
TreT^?, fallen or sent from Zeus, and Au-rpe^s, a proper name).
So with a preposition : ey-^wptos, native (ev ^wpa); e^>-t7T7rtos, belong-
ing on a horse (e<' rTTTrcp) ; <^>-(TTtos, on ^Ae hearth (<^>' O"Tta).
885. N. When the last part of an objective compound is a transitive
.verbal in os formed by the suffix o- (832), it generally accents the
penult if this is short, otherwise the last syllable. But if the last part
is intransitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. Thus
Xoyo-ypd^os, speech-writer ; Xt0o-/36Xos, thrower of stones, but \i66-po\os,
pelted with stones; fj.r)Tpo-KT6vos, matricide, matricidal ; but arpaT-yybs,
general ; Xo7o-7roi6s, story-maker.
886. (2) Determinative compounds are nouns or adjec-
tives in which the first part, generally as adjective or
adverb, qualifies (or determines) the second part. E.g,
MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 195
*A/cpo-7roAis, citadel (cucpa TrdXts); fJLev-rjfjLftpLai (/ACCT^ Ty/xe'pd, 66),
mid-day; i^evSo-jnavris, false prophet,- 6/xo-SovA.os, fellow-slave (6/x.oS
SovAevtov) ; 8v(r-/xa^s, learning with difficulty; (oKv-rrenjs, swift-flying;
irpo-fiovXy, forethought ; a^i-Oiarpov^ amphitheatre (theatre extending
all round) ; a-ypa<os, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like //,eA.i-
lySrjs (^Svs), honey-sweet, 'Apr/i'-floos, si0i/i as ^Ire.s (^4res-swi/i!).
887. N. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative,
made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of
the two things or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like
an adjective or adverb. Such are laTp6-/j.avTis, physician-prophet (a
prophet who is also a physician} ; i(t>o-/j.dxa.ipa, sword-sabre ; av8p6-irais,
man-child; y\vKv-iriicpos, sweetly bitter; Qeb-ravpos, god-bull (of Zeus
changed to a bull).
888. (3) Possessive or attributive compounds are adjec-
tives in which the first part qualifies the second (as in
determinatives), and the whole denotes a quality or attri-
bute belonging to some person or thing. E.g.
'Apyupo-roos, with silver-bow (dpyvpow TOOV \<av) ; KaKO-8at/x<ov,
ill-fated (/ca/cov Sat'/otova c^wv); TriKpo-ya/uos, wretchedly married (jriKpov
ya/xoi/ X WI/ ) ' O/U-O-VO/AOS, having the same laws; e/<aToy-/c'<aAos, hundred-
headed; 8e/<a-T7y<, of ten years (duration); dyaflo-ecSiys, having the
appearance (etSos) q/" good; tv-Oeos, inspired (having God within) ;
, swift-footed (ojKtt? TrdSas X V ) ' ^ u ^ ToS-tu/CTys (vrdSas
, foot-swift, is a determinative.
889. N. In compound verbs, the original verb remains the funda-
mental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition
prefixed. Other compounds than those here mentioned present no
difficulties in respect to meaning.
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
DEFINITIONS .
890. (Subject and Predicate.') Every sentence must
contain two parts, a subject and & predicate. The subject
is that of which something is stated. The predicate is
that which is stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence
Aapeto? /3aai\ev6i TWV Tiepcrwv, Darius is king of the
Persians, Aapeto? is the subject and fiao-iXevet, T&V
Tiepcrwv is the predicate.
891. 1. When any part of et/xt, be, connects the subject with a
following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i.e.
means of coupling), and what follows is called the predicate ; as
Aapeios O"ri /?acnXevs, Darius is king, ^dA.<oj/ eori oxx^os, Solon is
wise, where m is the copula. The copulas eori and elcrc are often
omitted, especially in proverbial sayings, as xaXeira TO, /caXa, fine
things are hard, P..R/?.435 C , with nouns like avdjKrj, necessity, wpa,
time, and with the impersonal verbal in -re'oi/. For copulative verbs,
see 908.
2. Ei///, however, can form a complete predicate, as in etcri Otoi,
Gods exist.
892. (Object.") That upon which the action of a verb
is exerted is called the object. .The object may be either
direct or indirect: thus, in eS&fce ra ^prjfiara TO> dvBpi,
he gave the money to the man, ^ptj/juara is the direct
object and dvSpl is the indirect (or remote) object.
893. Verbs which can have a direct object are called
transitive; those which cannot are called intransitive.
196
898] SUBJECT. 197
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
SUBJECT.
894. The subject of a finite verb (446) is in the
nominative ; as o dvrjp ?)\6ev, the man came.
895. 1. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusa-
tive ; as (frycrl rou? avSpa? direkOelv^ he says that the men
went away.
2. But the subject of the infinitive is generally
omitted when it is the same as the subject or the object
(direct or indirect) of the leading verb; as /SouXerat
d7re\Qelv, he wishes to go away ; (frrjo-l rypdcfreiV) he says
that he is writing ; irapaivovpev VOL fteveiv, we advise you
to remain.
3. So when it is the same with any important adjunct of the
leading verb ; as KaKovpyov eori KpiOivr aTroOavtlv, it is like a male-
factor to die by sentence of the law (928, 2), D.4,47.
896. The subject nominative of the first or second person is
omitted, except when special emphasis is required.
897. The nominative of the third person is omitted :
1. When it is expressed or implied in the context ; as 6 Kvpos
rrpatnm a {$OV\CTCU, Cyrus does what he (Cyrus) pleases ;
2. When it is a general word for persons ; as Aeyovat, they say,
it is said ;
3. When it is indefinite ; as in 6ij/e r)v, it was late ; KoXws l^i, it
is well; S^Aoi, it is evident (the case shows): so in the impersonal
construction with the verbal in reW, as in Tretcrreov (tort) TO> vofjua,
we must obey the law (1597).
4. When the verb implies its own subject, as /o/pwrcrei, the her-
ald (i<f)pv) proclaims, ecraA7rtye, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet,
KcoAvet, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like 7rapeo-/cev-
aorai' /xoi, preparation has been made by me (7 am prepared), the
subject is really the idea of preparation etc. contained in the verb.
See 1240.
5. With verbs like vet, it rains, dorpaTrm, it lightens, oretei, there
is an earthquake (it shakes), where, however, some subject like Zeus
or 0eos was originally supplied.
898. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infini-
tive or a sentence as their subject. These are called impersonal
198 SYNTAX. [899
verbs. Such are irpiiru and Trpocny/cet, it is proper, eveori and
it is possible, 8o/cet, it seems good, orv/A/?atvei, it happens, and the like ;
as 2eoTti/ vp.lv TOVTO Troteti/, it is in your power to do this (to do this
is possible for you). So also 8ci and XPW ^ * s required, we ought;
as Set ly/Aas arreXOdv, we must go away.
The name impersonal is applied with greater propriety (though
less frequently) to the verbs of 897, 3 and 4.
SUBJECT NOMINATIVE AND VERB.
899. 1. A verb agrees with its subject nominative in
number and person ; as (6700) \eyco, I say, ovros Xeyet,
this man says, ol avSpes \eyovo-iv, the men say.
2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regularly
takes a singular verb; as ravra eyevero, these things
happened', ra ol/dj/jLara eTreaev, the buildings fell. So
a^vvard earn (or dSvvardv ecm), it is impossible.
Exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting
persons. Several are found in Xenophon ; as in A. 1,7 17 .
900. A singular collective noun denoting persons may
take a plural verb; as TO TrXr^o? etyrjcfrio-avro iroKepelv,
the majority voted for war, T.I, 125.
901. N. When several subjects are connected by and, they
generally have a plural verb. But the verb may agree with one
of the subjects (generally the nearest), and be understood with
the rest. The latter generally happens when they are connected
by or or nor. E.g.
Socket eyw re /cat <ru vj^fv, you and I were wise, P. Th. 154 d ;
/Aaxov/xe0a KOivfi eyw re /cat (TV, you and I willjight together, P.Rp. 335 e ;
ov (TV (Ji6vo<s ovSe ol crot c/>t'Aoi Trpwrov Tavrrjv So^av co-xere, it was not
you alone nor your friends who first took up this notion, P. Lg. 888 b .
'E/xe ovre Katpos O\>T eXvrts ovre <f>6/3os OVT aAAo ovSev eTnypev,
neither opportunity nor hope nor fear nor anything else incited me,
D. 18, 298.
902. N. If the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in
the first person rather than the second or third, and in the second
rather than the third. (See examples under 901.)
903. N". A verb in the dual may follow two subjects in the
singular, or even a plural subject denoting two persons or things.
But even a subject in the dual may have a verb in the plural.
//. 4, 453: 5, 10, 275: 16, "
910] PKEDICATE NOtJN AND ADJECTIVE. 199
904. N. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nomina-
tive; as at Se tlvfopai KOL xppij-yiai eu&u/zovias LKOVOV ayptlov
CCTTLV, his taxes and payments for choruses are a sufficient sign of
prosperity, Ant. 2, y. 8.
905. N. Rarely a singular verb has a masculine or feminine
subject in the plural; as lori 8e CTTTO. ora&oi e 'A/3voV>v e? rrjv
OLTTCLVTIOV, and there is a distance of seven stades from Abydos to the
opposite coast, Hd. 7, 34. In such cases the plural form often seems
to have arisen from an afterthought, especially when the subject
follows the verb.
See also the phrases rav ot etc., 1029.
906. N. A preposition with a numeral may represent the sub-
ject of a verb ; as a-rrtOavov avru>v Trcpl T/aiaKoo-iaus, about three hun-
dred of them perished, X. H. 4, 6 11 .
PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE.
907. With verbs signifying to be, to become, to appear,
to be named, chosen, made, thought or regarded, and the
like, a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same
case as the subject. E.g.
Ouros ecm /JcurtAevs, this man is king ; 'AXe^avSpos 0eos a>vo/xa-
ero, Alexander was named a God; rjpeOrj errpaT^yo's, he was
chosen general; -fj TroAis <f>povpLov KareWiy, the city became a for-
tress, T. 7, 28 ; euros earn/ ei>oW/Aa>i/, this man is happy ; ff iroXts
/xeyaXr; eyei/ero, the city became great; rjv^rjTai /xeyas, he has grown
(to be) great ; vo/u^crat o-o<j>6<s, he is thought wise.
908. The verbs which are here included with the copula ei/u
(891, 1) are called copulative verbs. The predicate nominative
with the passive verbs of this class represents the predicate accusa-
tive of the active construction (1077).
909. The predicate adjective with these verbs agrees with the
subject in gender and number, as well as in case. (See 919.)
910. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusative
expressed (895, 1) is in the accusative; as /?ovA.erai TOV vlov dvai
a-o<j>6v, he wishes his son to be wise. So when the participle is
used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (1494) ; as yBeo-av
TOV Kvpov /3a<riXe'a yevo/xcvov, they knew that Cyrus had become
king.
For such a predicate with the subject omitted, see 927 and
928.
200 SYNTAX. [911
APPOSITION.
911. A noun annexed to another noun to describe it,
and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it
in case. This is called apposition, and the noun thus
used is called an appositive. E.g.
Aapetos 6 /?a(7iA.evs, Darius the king. 'A^j/at, /xcyaXiy 7roA.t?,
Athens, a great city. 'Yyaas TOV? cro</>ovs, you, the wise ones. 'H/xoiv
rwr 'A&yvcuW, of us, the Athenians. e/ju<TTOK\rj<s Ty/cco (sc. eya>)
Trapa <re, I, Themistocles, am come to you, T.I, 137. ^tXryo-tos /cat
AVKWI/ ot 'Ax<uo Philesius and Lycon, the Achaeans, X.^4.5,6 27 .
912. N. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is gen-
erally plural (or dual) ; as VTTVOS TTOVO? re, /cvpiot ui/o)/w,OTat, sleep
and toil, lordly conspirators, A. Eu. 127; Odppos /cat <f>6j3ov, a</>/>oi/e
v/z/2ouA.a), daring and fear, two senseless counsellors, P. TV. 69 d .
913. N. An adjective may have a genitive in apposition with
a genitive which it implies; as 'A^ratos <Sv, TroAews TTJ<S jueytoT^s,
being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city, P. Ap. 29 d .
For a genitive in apposition with the genitive implied in a
possessive pronoun, see 1001.
914. N. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive
(1088) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts,
especially when the latter include the whole of the former; as ot/aut
at /ACT/ TroAAai 7re7rTWK(rav, oXtyat 8e Trepttjcrav, most of the houses had
fallen, but a few remained (where we might have TO>V otKtwv), T. 1,
89. So OVTOL aAAos aAXa Aeyet, these men all say different things,
X. A. 2, 1 15 . This is called partitive apposition.
915. N. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence,
being in the nominative when it is closely connected in thought
with the subject of the sentence, elsewhere in the accusative ; as
Keti/rat Treowres, Trams ov a^u/cpa TroXet, they lie prostrate, no small
(cause of) confidence to the city, E. 7^.415. 'EAe'nyi/ Kravw/xei/,
Mei/e'Xea) XvTrrjv TriAcpaV, let us kill Helen, (which will be) a bitter grief
to Menelaus, E. Or. 1105.
916. N. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the
object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as LTTTTOI
tjyovro BV^WL TO> 'HAi'w, horses were brought as an offering to the Sun
(in active, ITTTTOVS ayetv Ov/na, to bring horses as an offering), X. C. 8,
3 12 ; e^ecrm/ VIMV i^ias Aa/?eti/ ^v/x/u,a^ovs, you can gain us as allies,
X. A. 5, 4 6 . So rvxetv rti/os <i'Aou, to gain some one as a friend;
TOVTO) <iXa>, / treat him as a friend. So TIVOS
; as teachers of what are you come f P. Eu. 287 a . See 1080.
921] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 201
917. N. Homer often adds an appositive denoting a part to a
noun or pronoun denoting a person; as '
he wounded D. in the shoulder, 77.11,420; dAA' ov/c 'Aiy>e% 'Aya-
jtxe/xi/ovt iJvoWe 0v//,a>, but he was not pleasing to the heart of Agamem-
non, son of Atreus (lit. to A., his heart), II. 1,24.
For 6 Sc in Homer followed by a noun in apposition, see 937, 1.
AGEEEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
918. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender,
number, and case. This applies also to the article and
to adjective pronouns and participles. E.g.
'O cro<f>bs dvrjp, the wise man ; TOV a-o<f>ov dvSpos, TO> <ro<a> dvSpt,
roi> cro<f>bv dvSpa, TCOV tro</>aiv dvSpeov, etc. OVTOS 6 dvtfp, this man;
rovYov TOV dvSpos, TOvVan/ TWV dvSpaiv. At Trpo TOV oropuxTos viyes
wv/xa^ovo-at, ^e sfajos engaged in battle before the mouth (of the
harbor}, T.7,23.
This includes predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case
of which has already been considered (907) ; as at apiorai SoKovcrat
etvat <v<ms, the natures which seem to be best, X. M. 4, 1 8 .
919. The adjective may be either attributive or predicate. An
attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter-
vention of any verbal form (like all the adjectives in 918, except
apwrrai). The predicate adjective may be connected with its noun
by the copula (891) or by a copulative verb (908) ; as 6 <m?p
ayaOos etrrtv, the man is good : KoAetTat dya$os, he is called good. It
may stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of
et/u'j as irryvas Stw/cets ras eATrtSas, you are pursuing hopes which are
winged (i.e. hopes being winged), E. frag. 273 ; aOdvarov rty (wr]fjw)v
KaraXet^ovo-tv, immortal is the memory they will leave behind them (i.e.
rr/v ^vrf^f]V ovaav aOdvarov), 1.9,3; Trotet TOV? M^Sov? do-^evets,
he makes the Medes (to be) weak. Every adjective which is not
attributive is classed as a predicate.
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with
respect to the article ; see 971, and the examples.
920. N. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons
may take a plural participle; as Tpot'av cAoi/Tes *ApyctW oroAos,
the Ar gives' army having taken Troy, A. A </. 577.
921. N. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the
grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person; as
dear child! 7^.22,84.
202 SYNTAX.
922. N. Avo, two, is often used with a plural noun; as evpos
Svo 7rAe'0pa>v (1085, 5), of two plethra in breadth, X. A. l^ 28 .
923. N. An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns
generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, and
is understood with the rest , as rov KaXbv KayaObv avSpa KOL yvvaiKa,
the honorable man and woman, P. G. 470 e ; mum Kat Adya> Kat ^xavy,
by every word and device.
924. N. (a) A predicate adjective (like a verb, 901) is regu-
larly plural if it belongs to several singular nouns, or dual if it
belongs to two. If the nouns are of different genders, the adjec-
tive is commonly masculine if one of the nouns denotes a male
person, and commonly neuter if all denote things. Thus, cfSe
Trarepa T6 Kat prjTtpa Kat a8c\<f>ov<s Kat rrjv eavrov yvvaiKa at^/uta-
AWTOVS yeycvrjfAcvovs, he saw that both his father and his mother, his
brothers, and his own wife had been made captives, X. C. 3, 1 7 ; Soa
8rj Kat TrfJL\ua Kat vovs Kat r^xyt] Kat VO/AOS (TK\r)pS)v Kat /AaAaKwi/
IT pore pa av efy, P.Zy.892>.
(6) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of
the nearest or most prominent noun ; as 7rpoppios avros, 17 yvvrj,
TO, TratSia, KaKior' aTroAot/xryv, may I perish most wretchedly root and
branch, myself, my wife, my children, Ar. R. 587.
925. N. A masculine or feminine noun in the singular, denot-
ing a class rather than an individual, may have a neuter predicate
adjective, which is used as a noun; as KaXov 17 aAi^eia, a beau-
tiful thing is truth, P. Lg. 663 e ; aOdvarov apa 17 fax 1 ! > * s ^e soul
then immortal (an immortal thing) ? P. Ph. 105 e .
926. N. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we
should use an adverb or adverbial phrase; as CKO'I/TCS r)\6ov, they
came willingly; opKtos 8e (rot Aeyo>, 7 say it to you on my oath,
S. .4n.305; Trpwros 8' c^epecti/e Ne'crrw/o, and first, Nestor inquired,
11. 10, 543. There is often, however, a great distinction between
the adjective and the adverb; as Trpwros avrovs etoW, I was the
first to see them; Trpcorovs avrovs et&ov, they were the first whom I
saw; irptoTov (adv.) avrovs ttSov, first (of all that I did) / saw
them.
ADJECTIVES BELONGING TO THE OMITTED SUBJECT
OF AN INFINITIVE.
927. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted because
it is the same as the subject nominative of the leading verb
(895, 2), adjective words and nouns which would agree
928] OMITTED SUBJECT OF AN INFINITIVE. 203
with the omitted subject are assimilated to the preceding
nominative. E.g.
BovAerat cro<f>b<s eii/ai, he wishes to be wise; Tlepcrrjs <f>rj emu,
he said he was a Persian, X.,4.4,4 17 . Ov^ ofwXoyrjara) a K A. 777-05
>/Kti/, / shall not admit that I am come unbidden, P.S#.174 d ; OVK
e<f>rj avros dAA* eKetvov crrpaT^yeiv, he (Cleon) said that not (he)
himself, but he (Nicias) was general; he said OVK (eyu>) avros (crrpa-
rrjyS)) oAA* e/ce/os (TTpaTTyyei, avros being adjective (989, 1) and
eKctvos substantive; T.4,28. Such adjective words or nouns may
be in the predicate with copulative verbs (907) or in other con-
structions. The assimilating nominative may be either expressed
or understood.
928. But when the subject of an infinitive is omitted
because it is the same as the object or other adjunct (895, 3)
of the leading verb,
1. If this adjunct is a dative, adjective words and nouns
may either be assimilated to the dative, or stand in the
accusative in agreement with the omitted subject of the
infinitive. E.g.
IIpeTrei (TOL elvai irpoOvfjiG) (or irpoOvfAov), it becomes you to
be zealous ; vvv eroi l^eo-m/ avopl -yeveaOai, now it is in your power
to show yourself a man, X.A.7, 1 21 ; iravrl TrpocnJKei apxovri <^povt/x<ji
etvai, it becomes every ruler to be prudent, X. Hip. 7, 1 ; <rv/x<epei avrots
<f>c\ov<s emu, it is for their interest to befriends, X.Oe. 11,23. *ESoev
avrots <rvo-Kevacra/Avois a et;((n/ Kat co7rA.i(ra/x,evoi9 TT/ooieVai,
they decided to pack up what they had and arm themselves completely,
and to advance, X.^1.2, 1 2 ; but ISo^ei/ avrois 7r/>o<vAaKas Karavrri-
<ravTas (ruy/caAetv TOVS arpartcoTas, they decided to station pickets
and to assemble the soldiers (ib. 3, 2 1 ) ; in 1, 2 1 , we find two datives
and an accusative.
2. If the adjunct is a genitive, predicate adjectives are
generally assimilated to it ; but other adjective words and
all nouns stand in the accusative. E.g.
Kvpov eSeovro w? TrpoOvfJiOTaTOV yeve<70ai, they asked Cyrus to
be as devoted to them as possible, X.#. 1, 5 2 ; but (with a noun)
"AOrjvatoiv eoerjO-rjo-av ox^urt ySo^^ovs yei/ecr^at, they asked the Athe-
nians to become their helpers, Hd. 6, 100; Kcucovpyov cart KpiOtvr
curoOaveiv, o-rpaT^you Sc //.a^o/xevov rots TroXe/xtbt?, it is like a
malefactor to die by the sentence of a court, but like a general (to die)
fighting the enemy, D.4,47; 8eo/xat vfjJ&v /xe/av^/xevov? TWI/ eip^/xe-
vwv ra 8t/cata ^ry^to-ao-^at, / beg of you to remember what has been
said, and to vote what isjust t 1.19,51.
204 SYNTAX.
929. Words in the construction of 928 which refer to a preced-
ing accusative are of course in the accusative ; as oAAovs TT^TTUKO.
crv/x/ia^T/Tas ftot <oiTav, I have induced others to go as my fellow-
pupils, Y.Eu.272.
930. N. The principles of 927 and 928 apply also to a predicate
with c3v or with the participle of a copulative verb; as rjBto-av
<ro(j>oi OVTCS, they knew that they were wise (but yBeaav TOVTOVS
<ro<ovs <Was, they knew that these men were wise).
931. N. When an infinitive depends on a participle which sup-
plies its omitted subject, predicate words take the case of the par-
ticiple ; as rjXOov *TTL TWO. TO>V SOKOWTO>V ctrat <ro<o>v, / went- to one
of those who seemed to be wise, P.Ap. 21 b ; TWV irpoo-jroiovfjitvuiv ctvat
ao^)tcrTcuv rivas, some of those who profess to be sophists, 1.15,221.
So rots OOKOVO-LV dvai cro</>ois, to those who seem to be wise.
ADJECTIVE USED AS A NOUN.
932. 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the
article, may be used as a noun. E.g.
'O SIKCUOS, the just man; 6 capo's, the enemy; </Xo?, a friend;
KaKiy, a base woman ; TO /xecro]/ or /xeo-ov, the middle; 01 KO.KOL, the bad ;
rots dya^ots, to <^e good ; r&v Kparovvrw, of those in power; Ka/ca,
cv/Zs ; TO, Qvt]Ta., mortal things ; oc y/aai/ra/xcvot 2a>Kpar^v, <^6 accusers
of Socrates.
2. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied ; as T^ vorepata
(se. T//xepa), on ^e neo:/ day; i/ Sc^ta (sc. X et P) ^ e right hand; ^
cvOua (sc. 6805), <Ae straight road ; 6 a/cparos (sc. otvos), unmixed
wine ,* ^s T^V lavraiv (<? y^v)> *wto <AetV own land.
933. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article
is often used as an abstract noun; as TO KaAoV, beauty
(= KaXAos), r6 SIKCUOV, justice (= SiKatoo-uny).
934. N. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasion-
ally thus used for the infinitive, which is a verbal noun; as TO
8e8io<s,fear (=TO SeoWvoi), T. 1,36; lv TO> fM) fieAeToWi, in the want
of practice (in the not practising) (=ev TW fjwj fJL\Tav) 9 T.I, 142,
So in Latin, opus est maturato, there is need of haste.
THE ARTICLE.
HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE.
935. In Homer the article appears generally as a demon
939] HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 205
strative or personal pronoun; sometimes (in the forms
beginning with T) as a relative. E.g.
Trjv 8* eyci ov \V<T<I>, but I ivill not free her, 7/.l,29 ; TOV 8 AcAvc
<or/3o5 'ATToAAwv, and Phoebus Apollo heard him, 77.1,43; 6 yap
rj\0e 0oas CTTI vrja<s 'A.\cuS>v, f or he came to the swift ships of the
Achaeans, 11.1,12. As relative, Trvpa TroXXa TO, KaUro, many fires
which were burning, 7 .10, 12; 8oipa rd ol e?i/os SWKC, gifts which a
stranger gave him, Od.21, 13.
936. 1ST. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as
nouns (932, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek; as ol yap
apia-Tot cv vyvfflv KearaL,for the bravest sit by the ships, 7Z.11,658; 01
wAAoi, the others ; ra T eovra ra r eo-o-o/Aera, both things that are and
things that are to be, II. 1, 70.
937. 1. When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it is
generally a pronoun (especially 6 8e), with which the noun is in
apposition ; as 6 8* e/^pa^e ^aA/ceos *Ap^s, and he, brazen Ares,
roared, II. 5, 859 ; ^ 8* deKovo-' OLJMI TOUTI y vvrj Kiev, and she, the woman,
vient with them unwilling, II. 1, 348.
2. Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these :
avrap 6 roan ytpaiv ooov ^ye/uoi/evev, but he, the old man, showed them
the way, Od. 24, 225 ; TOV 8' otav Trarep tvpov, and they found him, the
father, alone, ib. 226.
3. Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is
that found in examples like these : ore 8^ TTJV i^trov d<i/yie0', when
r.ow we came to the island, Od. 9, 543 ; TO re cr&fvos 'O/oiWos, and the
might of Orion, II. 18, 486 ; at 8e yuvaiKes i0Ta//,erai Oav(juiov, and the
women stood and wondered, II. 18, 495.
4. It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an
article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual tran-
sition, even in Homer, from .the original pronoun to the true defi-
nite article.
938. N. The examples in 937, 3, are exceptional ; and in such
cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in
Latin. Thus 8etn; 8e KXayyrj ytver apyvpcoio fiioio, and terrible
came the clang from the silver bow, 7Z.1,49, would in Attic Greek
require ^ /cAayy^ and TOV fitov.
939. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article begin-
ning with T in the place of the ordinary relative, of which he
uses only the forms os, 17, of, and af, except after prepositions.
Thus oAAos opws ipos, TO> owo/xa <I>otvi another sacred bird, whose
name is Phoenix, 2, 73. In other respects, he uses the article as it
is used in Attic prose.
206 SYttTAX. [040
940. N". The lyric poets follow the Homeric usage with respect
to the article more closely than Herodotus ; and the tragic poets,
especially in the lyric chorus, admit the Homeric use of the article
as a relative or a personal pronoun.
ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE.
941. In Attic Greek the article generally corresponds
to our article the; as 6 dvrjp, the man; rwv 7roXea>i>, of
the cities; rot? f/ E\X?70Yz>, to the Grreeks; ra Se/ca er?;,
the (well known) ten years (at Troy), T.I, 11.
942. The Greek may use the article in certain cases in
which the English omits it. Such are the following (943-
951) :
943. -Proper names may take the article; as 6 SwKpa-nys or
3i<DKpa,TY)s, Socrates.
944. Abstract nouns often take the article ; as rj dperrj, virtue,
y SLKaiocrvvr), justice ; -Yf ei>Aa/?eia, caution. But aperrj etc. are also
used in the same sense.
945. 1. Nouns qualified by a demonstrative pronoun regularly
take the article ; as OVTOS 6 avvjp, this man ; kv TcutrSe rats TrdAetnv,
in these cities. (For the position, see 974.)
2. But this article may be omitted with proper names, as ovros
NeoTrroAe/xos, this Neoptolemus, D. 18, 114; also where the demon-
strative is equivalent to here or there, as o/>to/>tei/ oAryovs TOVTOVS
di/fyxoTTOVs, we see few men here, X. .4.4, 7 5 ; so OVTOCTI avrfp, this man
here, and ouros avrjp used contemptuously; see also i/jyes tKtivai
TTL7r\ov(n, ships are sailing up yonder, T. 1, 51.
3. The tragedians often omit this article with demonstratives.
946. 1. Nouns with a possessive pronoun take the article when
they refer .to definite individuals, but not otherwise; as 6 c/xos
Trarrjp, my father, 60-6? KOIVOH/OS, your partner, D. 18, 21 ; but <ro?
KOtvwvos would mean a partner of yours. (For predicates, see 956.)
2. So also with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a per-
sonal, demonstrative, or reflexive pronoun depends; as 6 irarrip
/u-ov, my father ; 6 e/xavrov Trariyp, my own father ; 6 TOVTCOV Trarr/p,
their father; rj lavrwi/y^, their own land. But TTCUS lavrov, a child
of his own.
947. Totovros, Tocrovro?, ToioaSe, TO(rocr8e, and rryXtKovro? may
take the article; as TOV TOIOVTOV av&pa, such a man. It is always
used with Seu/a, such a one (420).
954] ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 207
948. A numeral may have the article, (a) to distinguish a part
of a number; (b) to express a round number, especially with d/u,<t,
Trept, vTrep, or eis; (c) to express merely a number in the abstract.
Thus, roil/ TTCVTC ras ovo ftotpa? ve/xovrat, *Aey #o/d *M?O o/ the Jive
parts, T. 1,10; 1/x.etvav ^/uepas d/u,<t ras rpta/covra, Aey remained
about thirty days, X.^1.4,b 22 ; OTTOJS fM) epets OTI e'cm ra 8w8e/ca Sts e,
cfon' say that twelve is twice six, P. Up. 337 b .
949. The article is often used, where we use a possessive pro-
noun, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing men-
tioned in the sentence; as Ip^erat avrrf re ij MavSdi/T/ Trpos rov
Trarepa Kat rov Kvpov rov vlov l^ovo-a, Mandane comes to her father
(lit. to the father) herself, and with her son Cyrus, X. C.1,3 1 .
950. The article may have a generic force, marking an object
as the representative of a class; as 6 ai>0po>7ros, man (in general) ;
ol yepovTes, the aged (as a class).
951. The article sometimes has a distributive force, where we
should use each or a; as {iTrtcr^veiTai owativ rpi'a ^/xi3apetKa TOV
fj.r)vb<s TO) orpanwT^, he promises to give three half-darics a month to
each soldier, X.4.1',3 21 .
952. 1. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar
expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an*
attributive adjective; as ot TOTC avOpwroL, the men of that time; rov
TroAcu, Ka8/xov, of ancient Cadmus, S. 0.7'. 1 ; ot i/ OLOT 'A&yi/cuot, the
Athenians in the city.
2. Here a noun denoting men or things is often omitted ; as ot iv
aorei, those in the city ; rot? rore, to those of that time ; ot d/x^>t IIA.a-
rwva, those about Plato (generally Plato and his school, or simply
Plato).
953. The nouns yrj, land, Trpay/xara, things or affairs, wos, son,
and sometimes other nouns which are readily suggested by the
context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjec-
tive or genitive is added ; as cts T^V eavron/ (sc. y^v), to their own
land ; e/c T}S TreptotKtSos, from the neighboring country ; ra rfjs TTO-
Aews, the affairs of the state ; ra. TOJV TrqAc/mW, what belongs to the
enemy; IIepiKAi)s 6 Eav^tTTTrov (sc. vtos), Pericles, the son of Xan-
thippus ; rrjv raxtcrrrjv (sc. 68oV), the quickest way. Expressions like
Ta (or TO) T^S Tv'xr;?, TOI rfjs opyfjs, with no definite nouns under-
stood, sometimes do not differ from Tv^> Fortune, and opyrj, wrath.
954. Instead of repeating a noun with new adjuncts in the
same sentence, it may be sufficient to repeat its article; as ot TWV
TroXiToiv TratSes /cat ot TOJV oAAwv, ^e children of the citizens and those
of the others.
208 SYNTAX. [955
955. 1. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (1516), may take a
neuter article ; as TO etSeVat, the knowing ; trot TO pr] o-tyijo-at Xourbv
rjv, it remained for you not to be silent, D. 18, 23.
2. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole clause
considered as a noun ; as TO yvoitfi cravrbv Travra^ov VTI xprjo-L-
fMv, the saying " know thyself" is everywhere useful.
956. A predicate noun or adjective seldom has the article ; as
vv i/ fl^py tytvf.ro, the day became night, Hd. 1, 103 ; KoAetTat 17
aKp07roA.i5 en VTT 'A&yvaiW TroAts, the citadel is still called " city " by
the Athenians, T.2, 15. So when it has a possessive pronoun; as
OVTOS fjio<s eratpos ty, he was my companion, P. Ap. 21 a .
But when the predicate refers definitely to distinct persons or
things, it may have the article; as curt 6 OVTOL ot etSoVes raXrjOes;
and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ? P. H. M. 284 e .
957. -N. Bao-tAevs is generally used without the article to desig-
nate the king of Persia; as TOVTOVS aTTOTre/XTrei /3aatAet, he sends
these to the King, T.I, 128. But the article is sometimes found:
compare 1.4,166 and 179. So sometimes jue'yas /3cunAevs; as /aeya-
Aov /?cunAea>s ySacrtXeta, a palace of the Great King, X. A . 1 , 2 8 .
958. N. The article is often omitted in some familiar expressions
of time and place, which are probably older than the Attic use of
the article; as a/uxx ea>, at daybreak; I/VKTOS, by night; afja rjpi, at the
opening of spring ; Iv ayopa, in the market-place ; KO.T aypov, in the ,
country ; KaTa yrjv, by land ; KaTa 0aAao-o-av, by sea ; CK Seias, from
the right; etc.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.
959. (Attributive Position.) 1. An attributive adjective
which qualifies a noun with the article commonly stands
between the article and the noun ; as o 0-0^09 dvrjp, the
wise man; TWV peyaXcov 7roXeo>z/, of the great cities.
2. The noun with the article may be followed by the
adjective with the article repeated. The first article is
sometimes omitted. In these cases the noun has greater
emphasis than in the preceding form (1). E.g.
'O dvrjp 6 <ro<p6<s, sometimes avrjp 6 <ro<os, the wise man (but not
6 avrjp o-o<os, see 971); at TrdXets at Sry/xoKpaToiJ/xevai, the states which
are under democracies ; avQp<t)7roL ot aStKWTaToi, men who are the most
unjust ; TTWS fj aVpaTOS Si/caioo-vwy Trpos dStKtav ryv aKparov e^et, (the
question) how pure justice is related to pure injustice, P. Rp. 545.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 209
960. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions
which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre-
ceded by the article (952, 1), and to dependent genitives (except
partitives and the genitive of the personal pronoun) ; as 6 /x6s
TTOLTyp, my father ; y <rtj ptJTirjp, thy mother ; 6 e/xavrov Tra.rr)p, my own
father (but 6 Trar^p /xov, my father, see 977) ; ot iv aoTet avOpuiroi
or ot av^pawrot ot ev aorei, the men in the city ; ouSeis TW rore 'EAAry-
I/CDI/, none of the Greeks of that time , TO TO> OVTI j/'evSos, the real
falsehood; ets TTJV CKetvwv 7roA.ii/, into their city; ot roii/ 7;/3atW
arparrryot, *Ae generals of the Thebans , ei/ TI; avaftdaa rrj tiera
Kvpov, in ^e upward march with Cyrus, X.,4.5,1 1 . For participles,
see 969.
961. N". Two or even three articles may thus stand together;
as TO. yap TTJ<S rtov iroAAoii/ J/f^V 5 o/x/xara, <Ae c/^s q/" <Ae sow? o/" i/*e
multitude, P.So.254.
962. An adjective in either of these positions with reference to
the article (959) is said to be in the attributive position, as opposed
to the predicate position (see 971) .
963. N. Of the three attributive positions, the first (e.g. 6 ow^os
avrjp) is the most common and the most simple and natural ; the
second (6 avjjp 6 o-o<os) is the most formal; the third (avrjp 6
OXK^OS) is the least common.
964. N. The article at the beginning of a clause may be sepa-
rated from its noun by /xeV, 8e, re', ye, yap, &J, ow, and by rts in
Herodotus.
965. The partitive genitive (1088) rarely stands in either of the
attributive positions (962), but either precedes or follows the gov-
erning noun. and its article; as ot KaKot TWV TroAtTw, or
ot Ka/cot, the bad among the citizens (rarely ot T&V TroXtrwi/ KO.KOL).
Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occasionally
have this position, as Sta rbv oXcOpov TWI/ <rvo-TpaTiwu>v opyio/xevoi,
angered by the death of their fellow soldiers, X.^i.1,2 26 .
966. 1. *O aXXos in the singular generally means the rest, seldom
the other; ot oAAot means the others: as ^ aXX-rj iroXts, the rest of the
state (but aXXff woXts, another state); ot oAXoi "EXXi/ves, the other
Greeks.
2. Both & aXAos and 5XAos (rarely Irepos) may have the mean-
ing of besides; as euSat/xoi/t^o/xevos VTTO ru>v iroXtraiv icat rwv aAAwv
&VIDV, congratulated by the citizens and the foreigners besides, P. G. 473;
ou yap rjv \opros ovSe aXXo ovSev Sei/opov, for there was no grass,
neither any tree (lit. nor any other tree}, X. ,4.1,5*.
SYNTAX. ^967
967. N. IIoAvs with the article generally (though not always)
means the greater part, especially in ot TroAAot, the multitude, the
majority, and TO TroAv, the greater part. So ot TrAeibi/es, the majority,
TO TrAetov, the greater part, ot TrAeurrot and TO TrAeto-Tov, the greatest
number or part.
968. N. When a noun has two or more qualifying words, each
of them may take an article and stand in either attributive posi-
tion (959), or all may stand between one article and its noun; as
Kara, rrjv 'ArTiKrjy rrjv TraAcuav (fxtivyv, according to the old Attic dia-
lect, P.Crat. 398 d ; TO, Tet^rj TO. eavruiv TO. /xctKpa, their own long walls,
T. 1, 108 ; 7re'/x7roj/Ts ets TO.S aAAas 'Ap/caStKas TroAets, sending to the
other Arcadian cities, X. H. 7, 4 s8 ; TT)I> VTT* 'Apery? 'Hpa/tAeovs TratSev-
(TLV, the instruction of Hercules by Virtue, X.Jf.2, 1 34 . Occasionally
one stands between the article and the noun, while another follows
the noun without an article ; as ot o.7ro TWV ev rfj 'Atrta TrdAewi/
'EAA^vt'Scoi/, those (coming} from the Greek cities in Asia, X.#.4,3 15 .
969. N. When an attributive participle (919) with dependent
words qualifies a noun with the article, either the participle or the
dependent words may follow the noun; as rbv pe'oi/Ta TTOTCL^OV
SLCL Trj<s TroAews, the river which runs through the city, X. H. 5, 2 4 ; TOV
e^ecrrrjKOTa KtVSwov rrj TroAet, the danger impending over the city,
D. 18, 176; y lv TU> 'IcrO/JuS eTrt/xon) yevo/xevay, the delay which
occurred at the Isthmus, T.2,18. But such expressions may also
take either of the attributive positions (959, 1 or 2).
970. N. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, TOV Ev-
<f>pa.Tr)v TroTa/AoV, etc., rather than the river Euphrates. So sometimes
with names of mountains (rarely with those of cities or islands).
971. (Predicate Position.') When an adjective either
precedes the article, or follows the noun without taking
an article, it is always a predicate adjective (see 919). E.g.
*O avrjp o-o<os or ao<6s 6 avrjp (sc. eo-TiV), the man is wise, or
wise is the man ; woAAot ot Travovpyoi, many are the evil-doers ; e^/te-
povs ye TO.S TiJ^as KCKT^fie^a, we possess our fortunes for a day (sc.
ovo-as), Gnom.
972. N. The predicate force of such adjectives must often be
expressed by a periphrasis; as TTT^i/as Siw/cets TOLS eA-rrtSas, the
hopes you are pursuing are winged, lit. you are pursuing hopes (being)
winged, E. frag. 273 ; ^yov/xevot aurovo/xwv Tail/ ^r/x/xa^wv, being
leaders of allies who were independent, T.I, 97; j/aArjv xwv rrjv
?/iM having his head bare, X. ^4.1, 8 6 . So TTOOW ayei TO orpa.
; how great is the army he is bringing?
979] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 211
973. The position of such an adjective (971) with reference to
the article is called the predicate position.
974. A noun qualified by a demonstrative pronoun
regularly takes the article, and the pronoun stands in
the predicate position (971). E.g.
OUTOS 6 avrjp, this man, or 6 avrjp OVTOS (never 6 OVTOS avyp).
Ilepi TOVTOH/ rwi/ TroAeon/, about these cities. (See 945, 1-3.)
975. N. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added,
the demonstrative may stand between this and its noun; as 17
OTCI/T) avrrj 6805, this narrow road, X. ^4.4,2 6 ; TO> d<tKo/xeVa> TOVTO>
ep<t>, to this stranger who has come, P.Pr. 313 b . (See 977, 2.)
976. N. "EKaoros, tKarepos, a/x^xo, and dju-^orepos have the
predicate position like a demonstrative, as cKcum; 77 *7/*epa, each
day; but with IKCUTTOS the article may be omitted. TOIOVTOS,
TOCTOVTOS, ToitwrSe, rocnwrSe and TI/AIKOVTOS, when they take the
article, have the first attributive position (959, 1).
977. 1. A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun (whether
partitive or not) has the predicate position (971), while that of
other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the first attributive
position (959, 1); as ^/xoiv 77 TroAts or 77 TroAis ^/AOJV, our city (not
17 i7/uio>v TroAi?) ; ?} Toimov TroAis, these men's city (not 17 TrdAis TOU-
T0)i/) ; fJLeT7rfMf/aTO 'AfTTvayTys T^I/ cavrov Ovyarepa. Kal TOV TralSa
avr^s, Astyages sent for his own daughter and her son, X. C.1,3 1 .
2. But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may
stand between this and the noun; as 17 SOKOVOU ^/xwi/ Trporepoi/
or(D<j>po(Tvvr], what previously seemed to be our modesty, T. 1,32. (See
975.)
978. 1. The adjectives d/cpos, /ACCTOS, and eo^o/ros, when they
are in the predicate position (971), mean the top (or extremity}, the
middle, the last, of the thing which their nouns denote ; as -YJ ayopa
fjL(rrj or pea"*) fj dyopd, the middle of the market (while 17 p-ivr) ayopa.
would mean the middle market) ; d/cpa 17 X et/ P' ^ e extremity of the
hand.
2. When no article is used, as in the older poetry, the context
must decide the meaning. Compare summus, medius, extremus, and
ultimus in Latin.
979. Has and or^Tras, all, and oAos, whole, generally have the
predicate position ; as Trou/res ot dvSpes or ot dvSpcs Trdrres, all the
men; o\rj 17 TroXis or ^ iroAt? oAry, all the city. But they can also
be used like attributive adjectives, preceded by the article ; as 17
irao-a SiKeAta, the whole of Sicily, TO oAoj/ yeVos, the entire race.
212 SYNTAX. [980
The distinction here was probably no greater than that between
all the city and the whole city in English. We find even oi TrdVres
av0pa>7rot, all mankind, X. .4.5,6'.
980. Avros as an intensive pronoun, ipse (989, 1), has the
predicate position ; as avros 6 avrjp, the man himself. But 6 avros
dVtyp, the same man (989, 2).
PRONOMINAL ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.
981. In Attic prose the article retains its original
demonstrative force chiefly in the expression o ^ev . . .
o Se, the one . . the other. 1 E.g.
Ot plv avT<av eroevov, ot 8* eo^evSovwv, some of them shot with
bows, and others used slings, X. A. 3, 3 7 . Act TOVS /u,ev eli/at Svcrrv-
Xet9, TOVS 8' 6VTV\ei<s, some must be unfortunate, and others fortunate,
E. frag. 207. Twv TrdAeoov at /x,ev TvpawovvTai, at 8c Brj/jiOKpaTovvTai,
at 8e dpio-TOKpaTovvTat, some states are governed by tyrants, others
by democracies, and others by aristocracies, P. Rp. 338 d .
982. N. The neuter TO />ieV ... TO Se may be used adverbially,
partly . . . partly. For TOVTO /ACV . . . TOVTO Se in this sense, see 1010.
983. N. (a) 'O 8e etc. sometimes mean and he, but he, etc., even
when no 6 /xev precedes ; as *Ivap<os 'AOrjvacovs 7rryyaycTo ot 8c
vj\Bov, Inaros called in Athenians; and they came, T.I, 104.
(6) With prepositions these expressions are generally inverted ;
as TToAAo, /iv ... (v Se Tots, P. Eu. 303 ; Trapo, fici/ TOV v\a, Trapa. 8c
TOV o-iSrjpos, X.jRjo. A. 2, 11.
984. A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of
the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following :
Tov /cat TOV, this man and that; TO KOL TO, this and that; TO. /cat TO",
these and those ; as ISei yap TO Kat TO Troirjo-ai, KOL TO firj Troifjo-at, for
we ought to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the
other, D. 9, 68.
IIpo TOV (or Trporov), before this, formerly.
Kat TOV or Kat TT;V, before an infinitive; as Kat TOV KeXevo-at
Sovvat (sc. AeyeTat), and (it is said) he commanded him to give it t
X.C.1,3 9 .
So occasionally TO>, therefore, which is common in Homer.
1 In this use, and in other pronominal uses of the article (as in
Homer), the forms 6, 17, oi, and ai were probably oxytone (S, 77, oi', at).
They are printed here without accents in conformity with the prevail-
ing usage in school editions of Greek authors. See 139.
989] PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 213
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
985. The nominatives of the personal pronouns are
seldom used, except for emphasis. (See 896.)
986. The forms ipjov, e/xoi', and e/ze are more emphatic than the
enclitics JJLOV, /UK, /x,e. The latter seldom occur after prepositions,
except in Trpos fte.
987. Of the personal pronouns of the third person, ov, ot,
etc. (389), only ot and the plural forms in o-<- are used in
Attic prose. There they are generally indirect reflexives,
that is, in a dependent clause (or joined with an infinitive
or participle in the leading clause) referring to the subject
of the leading verb. E.g.
*EAeav on Tre/Ai^ae o-<as 6 'Iv8wi> /?aorAevs, they said that the
king of the Indians had sent them, X. C. 2, 4 7 . 'ETrpeo-ySevovro eytfA^-
//,ara 7roiov/uej/oi, oVcos cr<iViv OTI /xeytVny irp6<t>a.(Ti<s etr; TOV TroAe-
jtxeii/, they sent embassies, making charges, that they might have the
strongest possible ground for war, T. 1, 126. 'Ei/rav0a Aeyerat 'ATro'A-
Aan/ eKSeipat Mapavav vt/c^cras ep^ovrd ot Trept o-o^>tas, ^cre Apollo
is said to have Jlayed Marsyas, having beaten him in a contest (with
himself, ol) in skill, X. ,4.1,2 s .
For the restricted use of these pronouns in Attic Greek, see
also 392.
988. In Homer and Herodotus, and when they occur in
the Attic poets, all these pronouns are generally personal
pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect) reflexives.
E.g.
'EK yap a<f>t(DV <peVa? etAero IlaAAas 'A $171/77, for Pallas Athena
bereft them of their senses, 11. 18,311; TOV KOIOV 0,770 lo (144, 4)
7re/x7re 0vpae, he sent the ram forth from himself through the door,
Orf.9,461. AVTIKO. Se ot evbovri eTreWry ovetpos, and soon a dream
came to him in his sleep, Hd.1,34; o8a//,oto-i TWV vvv <r<j>ea<s Trepiot-
KeoVrcov iVi o/ao'yAwo-o-ot, they have the same speech with none of their
present neighbors, Hd.1,57. TtVt rpmrw Qavtlv o-^>e ff>fj<s; in what
manner do you say she died f S. TV. 878.
989. ALTO? has three uses :
1. In all its cases it may be an intensive adjective pro
noun, kirn-self 9 herself, itself, themselves (like ipse). E.g.
214 SYNTAX. [990
AUTOS o or/oemjyos, the general himself ; ITT* avrois TO?S aiyta-
A.OIS, on the very coasts, T. 1,7 ; CTTIO-T^/X,^ avrrj, knowledge itself.
2. AUTO? in all its cases, when preceded by the article,
means the same (idem). E.g.
C O a VT 6s avrjp, the same man; TOV avrov TroXe/xoi/, the same war }
Toura, the same things (42).
3. The oblique cases of airro? are the ordinary personal
pronouns of the third person, him, her, it, them. E.g.
^TpaTYj-yov avrov a,7re8eie, he designated him as general. See
four other examples in X.^4. 1, 1,2&3.
It will be noticed that the nominative of avros is never a per-
sonal pronoun.
For o-cf>, o-<[>iv, viv, and JJLLV, see 394 and 395.
990. H, A pronoun with which avros intensive agrees is often
omitted ; as TCUJTO, eTroietre OLVTOL (sc. v/xets), you did this yourselves,
TrAevoWov ets ravras avrots e/A/2acni> (sc. vfuv), you must sail,
embarking on these yourselves (in person), DA, 16. So avros t<f>r)
(ipse dixit), himself (the master) said it.
991. N. AVTOS with an ordinal numeral (372) may designate
a person as the chief of a given number ; as yptOt] 7rpeo-/8evr^s
SeKaros avros, he was chosen ambassador as the chief of ten (himself
the tenth), X.T.2,2.
992. N". The oblique cases of avros are often used where the
indirect reflexives (987) might stand, and sometimes even where
the direct reflexives (993) would be allowed; as aVAois ryv eavrov
yvw/x^v a,7re<cuveTO ^wKpdrrj^ TT/OOS TOVS o/xtAowras avro), Socrates
used to declare his own opinion plainly to those who conversed with him,
X. Af.4,7 1 , where ol might have been used; but in 1,2 8 , we have
A.7riv cTroi'ei TOVS <Tvv$iaTpi/3ovTa<s eavro). The union of an inten-
sive and a personal pronoun in avrds explains this freedom of
usage.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
993. The reflexive pronouns (401) refer to the subject
of the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a de-
pendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading
verb, that is, they are indirect reflexives (987). E.g.
rVo>0i cravTov, know thyself; 7recr<aev eavrov, he slew him-
self. Ai&o/u o-ot e/xavroi/ SovXov, I give myself to you as a slave,
X. (7.4, 6 2 . Ot T/TTtu/xevoi cavrovs re /cat ra cavrwv Travra a.7ro-
/SaAAovcnv, the vanquished lose both themselves and all that belongs to
1001J POSSESSIVE PKONOUNS. 215
them, X. C. 3, 3 45 . "ETrewrev 'A&yvcuovs eavrov Ka.ra.yuv, he per-
suaded the Athenians to restore him (from exile) , T.I, 111.
994. N". Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word
which is neither the leading nor a dependent subject; as airo
cravrov 'yci <re 8i8ao>, 1 will teach you from your own case (from
yourself}, Ar. N. 385. In fact, these pronouns correspond almost
exactly in their use to the English reflexives, myself, thyself, him-
self, etc.
995. N". The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used
for the first or second; as 8ft ^/xas epe'a&u cavrovs, we must ask
ourselves, P.PA.78 b .
996. N. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal
(404) ; I//AII/ avrots 8taAeo/x,e#a, we will discourse with one another
(i.e. among ourselves"), D.48,6.
997. N. A reflexive may be strengthened by a preceding avros ;
as otos re avros ca>Ta> fiorjOeLV, able (himself) to help himself,
P. (7.483 b . To yiyvaxTKeu/ avrbv iavrov,for one (himself) to know
himself, P.C7*.165 b .
For the personal pronouns ov, ol, etc. as direct and indirect
reflexives, see 987 and 988.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
998. 1. The* possessive pronouns (406) are generally
equivalent to the possessive genitive (1085, 1) of the
personal pronouns. Thus 6 <ro? Trartfp = o irarrjp <rou,
your father.
For the article with possessives, see 946, 1.
2. For e/xds and o-os here the enclitic forms (JLOV (not e/x,ov) and
o-ov may be used; ij/x.an/ and v//xov for ^/ic'repos and v/xeVepos are
less frequent. These genitives have the predicate position as
regards the article (971).
999. The possessive is occasionally equivalent to the objective
genitive of the personal pronoun ; as -ij e/x^ ewota, which commonly
means my good-will (towards others), rarely means good-will (shown)
to me; as ewota yap epto rrj <?fj,for 1 shall speak out of good-will to
you, P. .486 * (See 1085, 3.)
1000. N. 2<erepos, their, and (poetic) os, his, her, its, are regu-
larly (directly or indirectly) reflexive.
1001. N. An adjective or an appositive in the genitive may
refer to the genitive implied in a possessive; as rd/xa
216 SYNTAX. flOOi
xaKd, the woes of me, unhappy one, S. 0. C. 344 ; TTJV v/xerepav ra>>
cro^tcTTwi/ rexvrjv, the art of you Sophists, P. H. M. 281 d . See 913.
1002. N. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive geni-
tive, the words my father can be expressed in Greek in five forms :
6 e/*,os 7rar?7p, 6 Trarrjp 6 e/w>s, iraryp 6 e/xos, 6 Trariyp /x,ov, and
(after another word) JJUQV 6 Tra-njp (as t(f>r) fj-ov 6 Tro/njp). So 6 <ros
Trarrjp, etc.
1003. N. (a) Our own, yowr own (plural), and their own are
generally expressed by i^e'repos, {yxeVepos, and o-^e'repos, with
avrwi/ (989, 1) strengthening the Ty/xoii/, {yx,a>v, or cr<an/ implied in
the possessive ; as rov ^/xerepov avruv Trare'pa, owr own father ; rrj
{yxerepa aurtov ftryrpi, to yowr own mother; TOVS (T^erepovs avrwv
TratSa?, <Aeir own children. For the third person plural eavrwv can
be used ; as TOVS eaurwv TratSas (also cr^oiv avroiv TratSas, without
the article) ; but we seldom find ^fjuuw (or v/xwv) avrwv.
(6) Expressions like TOV /xov avrov Trarepa for TOV IIJUJLVTOV
Trarepa, etc., with singular possessives, are poetic. In prose the
genitive of the reflexive (c/wxvrov, treavrov, or cavrov), in the
attributive position (959), is the regular form ; as /xereTre/x^aTO r^p
cavrov Ovyarepa, he sent for his (own) daughter, X. C.1,3 1 .
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1004. Ouro? and o8e, '^2, generally refer to what is
near in place, time, or thought; e'/mi/o?, that, refers to
what is more remote.
1005. N. The distinction between OVTOS and o8e, both of which
correspond to our this, must be learned by practice. . In the histo-
rians, OVTOS (with Totovros, TO<ro{)Tos, and ovrws) frequently refers
to a speech just made, while oSe (with roiocrSe, rocroo-Se, and wSe)
refers to one about to be made ; as raSe OTTO/, he spoke as follows,
but Tavra CITTCV, thus he spoke (said after the speech): see T.I, 72
and 79, 85, and 87. But elsewhere OVTOS (especially in the neuter)
often refers to something that follows; as paov yap TOVTCOV Trpoei-
p-ty/xei/oDV fjiaOycrei, for you will more easily understand it when this
(the following) is premised, P. Rp. 510 b .
1006. N. OUTOS is sometimes exclamatory, as ovros, ri TTOICIS ;
You there ! what are you doing ? A. R. 198.
1007. N". The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the
unemphatic demonstrative which is often used in English as the
antecedent of a relative, as / saw those who were present. Here a
participle with the article is generally used ; as etSov TOV? TrapoVra?;
1016] INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 211
if a demonstrative is used (cIoW TOVTOVS ot Trapfjcrav, I saw these men
who were present), it has special emphasis (1030). A relative with
omitted antecedent sometimes expresses the sense required ; as
cTSov ous A.a/?ev, / saw (those} whom he took (1026).
1008. N. The demonstratives, especially oSe, may call attention
to the presence or approach of an object, in the sense of here or
there; oSe yap 8rj /3curiAevs x^P as ' f or here now is the king of the
land, S. 4/1.155; for i^es Keivat (T.I, 51) see 945, 2.
1009. N. OVTOS sometimes repeats a preceding description for
emphasis in a single word; as 6 yap TO o-7re'p//,a Trapacr^wv, OVTOS
TWV <f>vvT(ov amos, for he who supplied the seed that man is respon-
sible for the harvest, D. 18, 159.
1010. N. TOVTO fj,v . . . TOVTO Se, first . . . secondly, partly . . .
partly, is used nearly in the sense of TO /xeV ... TO Se (982), espe-
cially by Herodotus.
For ovrocri, 6oY, e/ceivocri, OVTWCTI, wSt', etc., see 412.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
1011. The interrogative T/?; who? what? may be
either substantive or adjective ; as riva<$ elSov ; whom
did I see ? or rlvas avbpas elSov ; what men did I see ?
1012. T/9 may be used both in direct and in indirect
questions ; as rl /SouXerat ; what does he want? epcora ri
{3ov\6cr6e, he asks what you want.
1013. N. In indirect questions, however, the relative oWis is
more common ; as cpcoTa o TL J3ov\e<r0c (1600).
1014. N. The same principles apply to the pronominal adjec-
tives TroVos, TTOIOS, etc. (429).
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
1015. 1. The indefinite rt? (enclitic) generally means
some, any, and may be either substantive or adjective ;
as TOVTO \eyei rt9, some one says this; avOpwjro^ rt?,
some man.
2. It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a
or an ; as e2Soi> avOpwirov TLVCL, I saw a certain man, or
/ saw a man.
1016. N. Tts sometimes implies that the word to which it is
218 SYNTAX. [1017
joined is not to be taken in its strict meaning; as K\cirTr)<s TIS
avaTrefavTai, he has been shown up as a sort of thief, P. Rp. 334 a ;
/xeyas ns, rather large; rptaKoi/ra rtvas aTreKretrav, ^ey fo7/ec? some
thirty, T. 8, 73.
So with the adverbial rt (1060) ; as o^e'Soy TI, very nearly, T. 3, 68.
1017. N. Occasionally rts means everyone, like Trasrts; as cv
//,!/ rts 86pv OrjdcrO<D, let every one sharpen well his spear, 7/.2,382.
1018. N. The neuter TI may mean something important; as otorrat
TI eti/at, oi/res ov8ei/6s atot, <Ae^ ZfonA: fAe?/ are something, when they
are worth nothing, P. Ap. 41 e .
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
1019. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender
and number ; but its case depends on the construction
of the clause in which it stands. E.g.
EtSov TOI>S oVSpas ot rjXOov, 1 saw the men who came; ot avBpts
ovs etSes a,7r^X^ov, the men whom you saw went away.
1020. N. The relative follows the person of the antecedent ; as
V/ACIS ot TOVTO TroietTC, you who do this; eyo) os TOVTO 7roiv)<ra,
I who did this.
1021. N. (a) A relative referring to several antecedents follows
the rule given for predicate adjectives (924) ; as Trcpt TroAe/xov KOI
eipTyvrys, a /xeytb-rvyv t\ u Swa/miv ev rco ficv roii/ dv^pwTrwv, about war
and peace, which have the greatest power in the life of men, 1. 8, 2 ;
a7raAA.ayeVres TroAe/xwi/ KCH KivSwwj/ Kat rapa^s, is y v vvv Trpos
aAAr;Aous Ka^eo-ra/xei/, freed from wars, dangers, and confusion, in
which we are now involved with one another, 1. 8, 20.
(6) The relative may be plural if it refers to a collective noun
(900) ; as 7rAry0ei otTrep SIKCUTOUCTU', to the multitude who are to judge,
P.PMr.260 a .
(c) On the other hand, oVris, whoever, may have a plural ante-
cedent ; as TTavra o rt /SovAovrat, everything, whatsoever they want.
1022. N. A neuter relative may refer to a masculine or femi-
nine antecedent denoting a thing; as Sia T^I/ 7rAeovet'av, o Tracra
Averts 8ta>KCtv TT<f>VKv, for gain, which every nature naturally follows,
P./ty.359 c . (See 925.)
1023. 1. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes
used as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (935) ; as os yap
Sevraros yXBtv, for he came second, Od. 1,286; o yap yepas
, for this is the riqht of the dead, 7^.23,9.
1027] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 219
2. A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the
Platonic 5 8* os, said he (where ^ is imperfect of ^u, say). So KCU
os, and he, KCU ot, and they, and (in Hdt.) os KOL os, this man and
that. (Compare TOV /cat TOV, 984.) So also os /uV . . . os 6V, in the
oblique cases, are occasionally used for 6 /xeV . . . 6 Se; as TroAeis
'EAA^vi&xs, a s /xev draipuii/, eis as 8e TOVS <vydSas Karaycov, destroy-
ing some Greek cities, and restoring their exiles to others, 1). 18,71.
1024. N. (a) In the epic and lyric poets re is often appended
to relative words without affecting their meaning ; as OVK diets a
T (770-1 0ed; dosJ *^0M no* Aear what the Goddess says? 11. 15, 130.
Sometimes it seems to make the relative more indefinite, like ns
in OOTIS, whoever, quicumque.
(b) But olds T in Attic Greek means able, capable, like oWaros,
being originally elliptical for TOIOVTOS olos, such as, re having no
apparent force.
1025. {Preposition omitted.) When the relative and its ante-
cedent would properly have the same preposition, it is usually
expressed only with the antecedent; as dvro T^S avr^s dyvotas
^o-TTCp iroAAa TTpoievOt Tcov KOtvoii/, by the same want of sense by which
(for d<' rja-TTtp) you sacrifice many of your public interests, D. 18, 134.
OMISSION OF THE ANTECEDENT.
1026. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted
when it can easily be supplied from the context, espe-
cially if it is indefinite (1426). E.g.
*EA.a/3ev a /?ovA.ero, he took what he wanted; tTraOev OTTOO-OVS
eSwaro, he persuaded as many as he could. "A (M) oT8a ovSc oto/xac
etSeW, what I do not know I do not even think 1 know, P.^4jo.21 d .
'Eya> Kat (Sv eyco Kparoi /xci/ov/xcv Trapa. <TOL, I and those whom 1 com-
mand will remain with you, X. C. 5, 1 26 .
1027. N". In such cases it is a mistake to say that ravra, e/cctvot,
etc., are understood; see 1030. The relative clause here really
becomes a substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself.
Such a relative clause, as a substantive, may even have the article ;
as %xovo~a Trjv 7ro)w/u,tav rrjv TOV o f(mv, having the name of the
absolutely existent (of the " what is "), P. Ph. 92 d ; KctVov opeyerou
TOV o IcrTtv tow, they aim at that absolute equality (at the "what is
equal"), ibid.75 b ', TO> a/u-t/cpw //.epei, TO> o ^px e ^v avra), through the
small part, which was shown to be the ruling power within him (the
(t what ruled "), P. Rp. 442 C . Here it must not be thought that TOV
and TW are antecedents, or pronouns at alL
220 SYNTAX. [1028
1028. N". Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antece-
dent; as rj\6tv ore TOVTO etSev, he came when he saw this (for then,
when).
1029. N. The following expressions belong here: CO-TIV ot
(tov, ols, ovs), some (905), more common than the regular eto-tv
01, sunt qui, there are (those) who; tfortv omves (especially in ques-
tions) ; cvioi (from cVt, = cVeo-ri or cveurt, and of), some; ejuore
(In and ore), sometimes; lo-rti/ oil, somewhere; tcrny rj, in some
way; Ivnv OTTWS, somehow.
1030. N. When a clause containing a relative with omitted
antecedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a
demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted ante-
cedent ; as a ffiovXtro ravra eAa/Sev, what he wanted, that he took,
entirely different from ravra a /3ovAero eAa/?ev, he took these (definite)
things, which he wanted; a Troietv ala^pov, TO.VTO. vo/xte /xiySc Ae'yetv
etvat KaXov, what it is base to do, this believe that it is not good even to
say, 1. 1, 15 (here ravra is not the antecedent of a, which is indefinite
and is not expressed). See 1007.
ASSIMILATION AND ATTRACTION.
1031. When a relative would naturally be in the ac-
cusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimi-
lated to the case of its antecedent if this is a genitive or
dative. E.g.
'E/c TWV TToXewv wi/ cx> from 'the cities which he holds (for as
e^et); TO?S dyaflots ots lx/ >t1/ ' w ^ ^e good things which we have
(for a exo/uev). *Aioi T^S eXev^epta? ^'s KCKT^O-^C, worthy of the
freedom which you have, X. yl.1,7 3 ; ei TO> i/ye/xon Trio-revo-o/xei/ <S av
Kvpos 8i8w, zy we sAaZ/ trust the guide whom Cyrus may give us, X. A.
1, 3 16 . This assimilation is also called attraction.
1032. N. When an antecedent is omitted which (if expressed)
would have been a genitive or dative, the assimilation still takes
place ; and a preposition which would have belonged to the ante-
cedent passes over to the relative; as e&yAoxre TOVTO ots eVpaTTe,
he showed this by what he did (like eKeiVot? a) ; o~w ots /uaAio-Ta
<iA.ets, with those whom you most love (crvv CKCI'VOIS ovs), X. ^4.1,9 25 ;
a/xeA^o-as <Sv /x,c 8et Trpdrruv, having neglected what (cKeti/wv a) /
ought to do, X. C.5,1 8 ; ots cvrv^Keo-ai/ cv Aev/crpois ov /xeTpi'ws
K)(pr)VTO, they had not used moderately the successes which they had
gained at Leuctra (TOIS cvrv;(?7ftao r iv a cvrv^Kco-av, see 1054),
D.18,18.
1038] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 221
1033. N. A relative is seldom assimilated from any other con*
struction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case
than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as Trap v
jSorjOtls OVK a7ro\rji(/eL \dpLv, y u w ^ get n o thanks from those whom
(Trap' IKCLVW ots) you help, Aesch.2, 117. Even the nominative
may be assimilated; as ftXaTrreaOaL d<f> u>v yaw Trapetr/cevao-Tat,
to be injured by what has been prepared by us (like air cKeiVtov a),
T.7,67.
1034. N". A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs ;
as 8te/co/AtovTO evQvs oOev vTre&Qevro iraloas /cat y wat/cas, ' they
immediately brought over their children and women from the places in
which they had placed them for safety (where oOev,from ivhich, stands
for e/cet0ev ot, from the places whither), T. 1,89.
1035. N. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the
case of the relative, when this immediately follows ; as eXeyoi/ on
rrdvT<Dv cJv oVovrai TreTrpayores elev, they said that. they had done all
things which (jravTa an/) they needed, X. H. 1,4 2 . Trjv ovo-iav 17 v
Kare'AtTre ov TrAetoi/os d^ta eorti/ rj TCTrdpwv Kat 8eKa raXai/rtoi/, the
estate which he left is not worth more than fourteen talents, L. 19, 47.
Compare urbem quam statuo vestra est, 'Verg.Aen. 1,573. Such
expressions involve an anacoluthon.
This inverted assimilation takes place in ovSets o err is ov, every-
body, in which ouSa's follows the case of the relative; as ovSe'vt
(for ovSeis ecrni/ 6Va>), replying to everybody,
1036. N. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions
with 0105; as xapiojuev<n> ota> crot avopi, pleasing a man like you
(for TotovYa) otos o~v), X.Af. 2, 9 3 ; Trpos avSpas ToXurjpov 1 ; oiovs /cat
'A^i/atbu5, against bold men like the Athenians, T.7, 21.
1037. The antecedent is often attracted into the rela-
tive clause, and agrees with the relative. E.g.
M?) a(f>l\7)(T@f. v/iwv avrwi/ rj v OLOL Travros act TOV ^poi/ou ooav
KKT7)cr@ KaXrjv, do not take from yourselves the good reputation which
(what good reputation) you have alivays had through all time (for
TYJV KaXrjv B6av tfv KCKrrjo-Oc.), D. 20, 142: notice the omission
of the article, which regularly occurs.
The subject of a verb is rarely thus attracted ; as ol^rai <evy<ov
ov ei^es udprvpa, the witness whom you had (for 6 /xaprvs oV e?^?)
has run away, Ar. PL 933.
1038. N. This attraction may be joined with assimilation
(1031) ; as d/ta^eo-rarot' core <5v eya> ot&x 'EAAi/vwv, you are the most
222 SYNTAX. [1039
ignorant of the Greeks whom 1 know (for TWV 'EAArji/wv ovs ofSct),
T. 6,40; e rjs TO Trpwrov tcr^e ywcu/cos, yrow f*/ie w>(/e which he took
first, D. 57, 37 ; liropevero <rvv rj et^e Swa/xet, ^e marched with the
force which he had (for <rvi> TT^ 8wa/xei 17 v et^ev), X. #.4, 1 23 .
RELATIVE IN EXCLAMATIONS.
1039. Otos, oo-os, and ok are used in exclamations ; as 6Va
Trpay/xara x?, how much trouble you have ! X. C. 1, 3 4 ; <o?
do-reios, /iow witty !
RELATIVE NOT REPEATED.
1040. A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in the
same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pronoun
commonly takes its place. E.g.
'E/<eivot TOii/vv, ots OVK txapi^ovO' ol Xe'yovres ou8' e^>tXow avrov5
wcrTrCjO v/xas ovrot vvi/, ^/iose men, then, whom the orators did not try to
gratify, and whom they did not love as these now love you (lit. nor
did they love them as etc.), D. 3, 24. Here avrovs is used to avoid
repeating the relative in a new case, ovs.
1041. N". Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is
understood in the latter part of a sentence ; as 'Apicuos St, oY ^/xeTs
rjOeXofAXv /JacriAea /ca^to-rai/at, KOL eScoKa/xei/ /cat eAa/?o/xev mara., and
Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, and {to whom) we gave and
(from whom) we received pledges, etc., X. vl.3,2 5 .
THE CASES.
1042. The Greek is descended from a language which had
eight cases, an ablative, a locative, and an instrumental, besides the
five found in Greek. The functions of the ablative were absorbed
chiefly by the genitive, partly by the dative ; those of the instru-
mental and locative chiefly by the dative.
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
1043. The nominative is used chiefly as the subject
of a finite verb (894), or in the predicate after verbs
signifying to be, etc. (907).
1044. The vocative, with or without o>, is used in
addressing a person or thing; as w av$pe<;'A0r)j>aioi< men
of Athens! arcovets, AtV^tw; ; dost thou hear, Aeschines?
1051] ACCUSATIVE. 223
1045. N, The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations,
and even in other expressions, where the vocative is more com-
mon ; as CU/AOI eyw Sei/Vos, wretched me ! So f] lipOKvrj e/cySaij/e,
Procne, come out ! Ar. A v. 665.
ACCUSATIVE.
1046. The primary purpose of the accusative is to denote the
nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or
indirect object denoted by the dative (892). It thus bears the same
relation to a verb which the objective genitive (1085, 3) bears to a
noun. The object denoted by the accusative may be the external
object of the action of a transitive verb, or the internal (cognate)
object which is often implied in the meaning of even an intransi-
tive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions,
as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other
single category.
ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT (EXTERNAL) OBJECT.
1047. The direct object of the action of a transitive
verb is put in the accusative ; as TOVTO o-<wet ^a?, this
preserves us ; ravra TTOLov^e^ we do these things.
1048. N". Many verbs which are transitive in English, and
govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in
Greek. (See 1099; 1160; 1183.)
1049. N. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intran-
sitive in English ; as 6/xoi/x,at roi>s $eovs, 7 will swear by the Gods ,
Trai/ras eAa$ev, he escaped the notice of all ; aio-^werat rov Trarepa,
he feels shame before his father ; crtya (or criwTra) TI, he keeps silent
about something.
1050. N. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally
take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive
(1142; 1085, 3), as eTricrr^/xoi/e? rja-av ra Trpoo-i/KOi/ra, they were
acquainted with what was proper, X. C.3, 3 9 . So TO, /A ere top a
(f>povTi<TTi/j<s, one who ponders on the things above (like <povTt'a)i/),
P.Ap.lS*.
COGNATE ACCUSATIVE (INTERNAL OBJECT).
1051. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take
an accusative of kindred signification. This accusative
224 SYNTAX. [1052
repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may
follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. E.g.
Xlao-a? i/Sovas rj8e<r0ca, to enjoy ail pleasures, P. Phil. 63*.
EvTu'xr/o-ai/ TOVTO TO f.vTv^'n^^ they enjoyed this good fortune,
X. A . 6, 3 6 . So Treo-eiv TT T w /u a r a, to suffer (to fall) falls, A. Pr. 919.
Noow vo<retv or voaw d(r^vtv or voow Ka/xvetv, to suffer under a
disease; a/xa/orry/xa a/xaprai/etv, to commit an error (to sin a sin);
SovAeiai/ SovAeveiv, to &e subject to slavery ; a.pXf]V ap\uv, to hold an
office ; ayuii/a. ayoon^eo-^at, to undergo a contest; ypa<j>r)v ypdfacrOai,
to bring an indictment; ypa<f>r)v. SKOKCIV, to prosecute an indictment;
SIKYJV 6<f>\elv, to lose a lawsuit; vUyv VLKOV, to gain a victory; fMLxnv
VIKOV, to gain a battle; TTO/XTT^V Tre/XTretv, to form or conduct a proces-
sion; TrXriy-qv rvTrretv, to strike a blow; l&jXOov e^oSovs, they went
out on expeditions, X.H.I, 2 17 .
1052. N. It will be seen that this construction is far more
extensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusa-
tives of kindred formation and meaning, as VLKVJV VLKOV, to gain a
victory ; but also those of merely kindred meaning, as /xa^v vt/cav,
to gain a battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the
verb to one of many applications ; as 'OAv/>t7ria VLKOV, to gain an
Olympic victory, T. 1,126; <mav ya/x,ovs, to give a wedding feast,
Ar.Av. 132; i/aj<r/za vt/ca, he carries a decree (gains a victory with
a decree}, Aesch. 3, 68 ; /JoTySpd/ua Tre/xTretv, to celebrate the Boedromia
by a procession, D. 3, 31. So also (in poetry) /3atVv (or fXOe.lv)
7ro8a, to step (the foot) : see E. All 153.
For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive
verb, see 1240.
1053. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or
even nouns. E.g.
Ka/cot Tracrav KaKtav, bad with all badness, P. Rp. 490 d ; SouAos
ras /xeyiVras SovA.etas, a slave to the direst slavery, ibid. 579 d .
1054. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate
accusative, its noun being implied in the verb. E.g.
MeyctAa a/uapravetv (sc. a/xapr^/xara), to commit great faults ;
ravTCL \VTreiaOaL KOL ravra \a.ipuv, to have the same griefs and
the same joys, D. 18, 292. So ri ^/o^o-o/xat TOVTO>; (= TWO. ^peiav
Xprjcro/JML;), what use shall 1 make of this ? and ovSev ^p^cro/wxt rovrco,
/ shall make no use of this (1183). So xp^cri/xos ovSev, good for
nothing (1053). See 1060.
1055. 1. Here belongs the accusative of effect, which
1050] ACCUSATIVE. 225
expresses a result beyond the action of the verb, which is
effected by that action. E.g.
Hpeo-jStvcw TVJV dprjvrjv, to negotiate a peace (as ambassadors,
Trpeo-ySeis), D. 19, 134 ; but 7rpeo-/3eueii/ 7rpeo-/:taW, to go on an embassy.
Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a
stick.
2. So after verbs of looking (in poetry); as y Apr/ SeSopKeVat, to
look war (Ares) (see A. Se.53); 17 /3ov\rj c/2Ae^e vairv, the Senate
looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 631.
1056. N. For verbs which take a cognate accusative and an
ordinary object accusative at the same time, see 1076.
1057. N". Connected with the cognate accusative is that which
follows verbs of motion to express the ground over which the motion
passes; as bSov UVO.L (eA0eiv, Trope veo-0<u, etc.), to go (over) a road;
7r\.iv OaXaaaav, to sail the sea : opos KaTajSawtw, to descend a moun-
tain ; etc. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning.
ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFIC ATION. ADVERBIAL
ACCUSATIVE.
1058. The accusative of specification may be joined
with a verb, adjective, noun, or even a whole sentence,
to denote a part, character,, or quality to which the
expression refers. E.g.
Tu<A6s TO, o/A/xar* et, you are blind in your eyes, S. 0. T. 371 ;
KaAos TO elSos, beautiful in form; aTreipoi TO TrXrjOos, infinite in num-
ber; oV/ccuo? TOV TpOTrov, just in his character ; Seivot /xa^v, mighty in
battle ; Ka/xva> rrjv /ce<aA>;i/, 1 have a pain in my head ; ra? </>/oeVas
vyiaiWiv, to be sound in their minds ; 8ia<e'pei rrjv <j>vcnv, he differs
in nature. IIoTa/xos, KvoVos ovo/x,a, evpo? Svo TrAe^pwv, a river,
Cydnus by name, oftwoplethra in breadth (922), X. A . 1 , 2 23 . "EAArjve's
fieri TO yevos, they are Greeks by race. TwevOe TT)V Stavoiav /x-i)
v TO) Si/cao-Trypia), dAA' Iv T<O Oedrpu), imagine yourselves (become in
thought) not in court, but in the theatre, Aesch.3, 153. 'ETuo-Tao-fle
(/u,e) ov /xoVoi/ TO. /ueyaAa dAAa Kat TO, fJiiKpa. Tretpw/txevov act OLTTO
6ewv 6p/JLacrOai, you know that, not only in great but even in small
things, I try to begin with the Gods, X. C. 1, 5 14 .
1059. K". This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche,
or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part ; but
it may refer to any circumstance to which the meaning of the
expression is restricted. This construction sometimes resembles
that of 1239, with which it must not be confounded.
226 SYNTAX. [1060
1060. An accusative in certain expressions has the
force of an adverb. E.g.
Tovrov rov TpoTrov, in this way, thus; rrjv Ta^a-Trjv (sc. oBov), in
the quickest way ; (rrjv) apx^jv, at fi rst (with negative, not at all) j
TfXos, finally ; TrpoiKa, as a gift, gratis ; x^P 1 ^ f or the sake f> St/oyv,
in the manner of; TO irpwTov or Trpwrov, at first ; TO Xonrov, for the
rest; vravra, in all things; TaAAa, in other respects ; ovotv, in nothing,
not at all; TL; in what, why? TL, in any respect, at all; TOLVTO., in
respect to this, therefore. So TOVTO /x,eV . . . TOVTO oe (1010).
1061. N. Several of these (1060) are to be explained by 1058,
as TaAAa, TL; why? TavTa, TOVTO (with JAW and 8e), and sometimes
ovSeV and TI. Some are to be explained as cognate accusatives
(see 1053 and 1054), and some are of doubtful origin.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT.
1062. The accusative may denote extent of time or
space. E.g.
At oTrrov&u cviavrbv eowrai, the truce is to be for a year, T. 4, 118.
"E/Aeu/ev ly/Aepas TTCVTC, he remained five days. 'ATre^et $ nXaYaiu
Toiv 7)/3iov (TTaoiovs e/BoofjLt^KOVTa, Pltttaea is seventy stades distant
from Thebes, T. 2, 5. 'A-TT^ovTa 5vpa/cou<r(oi> OVTC TT\OVV iroAvv
OVTC 6SoV, (Megara) not a long sail or land-journey distant from
Syracuse, T.6,49.
1063. N. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes how
long since (including the date of the event); as e/?8o/Ar/i/ ly/xepav Trjs
OvyaTpos avrco TCTeAevT^KUtas, when his daughter had died six days
before (i.e. this being the seventh day), Aesch. 3, 77.
1064. N. A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like TptVov
CTOS TovTt (this the third year), i.e. two years ago; as aTrrjyyeXOrj
^tXtTTTTOS TptTOV V) Tf.TO.pTOV TOS TOVTt 'HpaiOV TCt^OS TToXtOpKWV,
two or three years ago Philip was reported to be besieging Heraion
Teichos, D.3,4.
TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE (POETIC).
1065. In poetry, the accusative without a preposition
may denote the place or object towards which motion is
directed. E.g.
Mvryo-T^pas <X<I'KCTO, she came to the suitors, Oaf. 1,332. 'Ayc/fy
ovpavov OvAv/XTrov TC, she ascended to great heaven and
1072] ACCUSATIVE. 227
Olympus, II. 1,497. To /coiAov "Apyos ftas </>vycts, going as an exile
to the hollow Argos, S. 0.C.378.
In prose a preposition would be used here.
ACCUSATIVE IN OATHS WITH vr] AND pd.
1066. The accusative follows the adverbs of swearing
vij and /jid, by.
1067. An oath introduced by vy is affirmative ; one intro-
duced by /xa (unless vat', yes,, precedes) is negative ; as vy rov
Aca, yes, by Zeus; /xa rov Aia, no, by Zeus; but vat, /xa Ac'a,
yes, by Zeus.
1068. N. Ma is sometimes omitted when a negative precedes ;
as ov, TovS' *OAv/x7rov, no, &# *Ais Olympus, S.^4n.758.
TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB.
1069. Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to teach, to
remind, to clothe or unclothe, to conceal, to deprive, and
to take away, may take two object accusatives. E.g.
Ov rovr epooTW (re, 1 am not asking you this, Ar. N". 641 ; ovoeva
r>7? (ruwucr&is apyvpiov Trpdrrti, ?/ou demand no fee for your teaching
from any one, X. M. 1, 6 11 ; TroOev -rjp^aro (re StSao-Ketv rrjv err parity LO.V ,
with what did he begin to teach you strategy ? ibid. 3, 1 5 ; TYJV v/x/xa-
XIOLV dva/xt/xvr/o-Kovres TOVS 'Aftyvawws, reminding the Athenians oj
the alliance, T. 6, 6 ; rov /xev eavrov (^trwva) ^Ketvov ^/x,<ire, Ae JOM/
^is own (tunic) on the other boy, X. Cty. 1, 3 17 ; e/cSvwv e/xe xpyo-Trjpiav
fa&rJTa, stripping me of my oracular garb, A. ^4^.1269 ; ryv Ovya.rf.pa
KpvTTT rov OdvaTov Tov avopos, he concealed from his daughter her
husband's death, L. 32, 7; rovrwv rrjv ntii)v aTrocrrepet /xe, ^e cheats
me out of the price of these, D. 28, 13 ; TOV iravra. 8' o\j3ov ^/xap cv /x*
d^>etXeTo, 6w< one c?ay deprived me of all my happiness, Yj.Hec. 285.
1070. N. In poetry some other verbs have this construction;
thus xp 00 - w er aA/xryv, Ae washed the dried spray from his skin,
Od. 6, 224 ; so Tt/xcapeio-^at Tiva al/xa, <o punish one for blood (shed} ,
seeE.^Z.733.
1071. N. Verbs of this class sometimes have other construc-
tions. For verbs of depriving and taking away, see 1118. For the
accusative and genitive with verbs of reminding, see 1106.
1072. N". The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs
is really a cognate accusative (1076).
228 SYNTAX. [1073
1073. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say any-
thing of a person or thing take two accusatives. E-g-
Tavrt /xe TTOIOVO-IV, they do these things to me ; TL ft* eipyaoxo ; what
didst thou do to me f KaKa TroAAa eopyev Tpwas, he has done mantj
evils to the Trojans, II. 16, 424. 'EKCO/OV re /cat rovs Kopty$iovs TroAAa
TC Kat KaKa eAeye, of him and the Corinthians he said much that was
bad, Hd. 8, 61; ov ^povrtcrreW ri epovaiv ot TroAAot ^/w-as, we must
not consider what the multitude will say of us, P. Cr. 48 a .
1074. These verbs often take ev or KoAcos, well, or KaKws., ill,
instead of the accusative of a thing; TOVTOVS tv Trotet, he does them
good; v/xas KaKois Trotet, he does you harm; KUKW? iy/xas Aeyet, he
speaks ill of us.
For & Trao-^etv, ev aKovetv, etc., as passives of these expressions,
see 1241.
1075. N". Ilpao-o-o), do, very seldom takes two accusatives in this
construction, Troteco being generally used. Ev Trpao-o-w and KaKcu?
Trpdcraa) are intransitive, meaning to be well off, to be badly ojf.
1076. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative
(1051) and an ordinary object accusative at the same
time. E.g.
MeA^ros yw,e cypct^aro rrjv ypa(f>r)V ravrr^v, Meletus brought this
indictment against me, P. Ap. 19 b ; MiAncutys 6 rrjv cv Mapa^ton
/xa^v TO^S /3ap/?apov5 viK^aas, Miltiades, who gained the battle at
Marathon over the barbarians, Aesch. 3, 181; wpKcoo-av TrdVras TOWS
orpaTKOTas TOV? yaeyto-Tovs opKovs, f/iey maafe a/Z f^e soldiers swear
the strongest oaths, T. 8, 75.
On this principle (1076) verbs of dividing may take two accusa-
tives ; as TO o-TpdVev/xa KareVetpc SaiSeKa /xepiy, Ae marfe twelve divis-
ions of the army, X. C. 7, 5 18 .
1077. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint,
to make, to think or regard, and the like, may take a
predicate accusative besides the object accusative. E.g.
Tt T^V TrdAtv Trpocrayopeuets ; what do you call the state ? Trjv
TOLavrrjv Swa/xtv dVSpet'av eycoye KaAw, such a power I call courage,
P. Up. 430 b . 2rpaT?7yov avrov aTreSet^e, Ae appointed him general,
X. ^4.1, 1 2 ; evtpytTrjv rov <&i\LTnrov ffyovvro, they thought Philip a
benefactor, D. 18,43 ; Trai/rwv ^cnroTrjv eavrov TreTroirjKev, he has made
himself master of all, X. C. 1, 3 18 .
1078. This is the active construction corresponding to the
passive with copulative verbs (908), in which the object accusative
1084] GENITIVE. 229
becomes the subject nominative (1234) and the predicate accusa-
tive becomes a predicate nominative (907). Like the latter, it
includes also predicate adjectives ; as TOVS <rv/u,/u,a^ovs TrpoOv/jiovs
TroLelaOaL, to make the allies eager ; ras a/Aaprta? /xeyaAas yytv, he
thought the faults great.
1079. N. With verbs of naming the infinitive etj/at may connect
the two accusatives; as cro^to-r^v oi/o/xaov(7i rov aivSpa eivcu, they
name the man (to be) a sophist, P. Pr. 311 e .
1080. N. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate
accusative in apposition with the object accusative ; as \.a/3e TOVTO
Suipov, he took this as a gift; ITTTTOVS ayeiv Ovfjua. ra> 'HAia>, to bring
horses as an offering to the Sun, X. C. 8,3 12 (see 916). Especially an
interrogative pronoun may be so used; as rivas TOVTOVS 6pu>; who
are these whom I see ? lit. / see these, being whom ? (See 919 ; 972.)
1081. N, A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the
action of the verb upon its direct object ; as TraiSevav rii/a <ro<ov
(or KaKov), to train one (to be) wise (or bad) ; TOV? weis iTTTrdras
eSt'8aev, he taught his sons to be horsemen. See 1055.
1082. N. For one of two accusatives retained with the passive,
see 1239.
For the accusative absolute, see 1569.
GENITIVE.
1083. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning
of a verb, so the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning
of a noun. When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it
seems to depend on the nominal idea which belongs to the verb :
thus 7ri0v/AO) involves TnOvjjLiav (as we can say 7ri$iy>o fotfo^uay,
1051) ; and in e7H0i>/juo TOVTOV, 1 have a desire for this, the nominal
idea preponderates over the verbal. So /focnAevei T^S x^P -* (H09)
involves the idea /3cunAevs <m Trjs ^wpa?, he is king of the country.
The Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow
either idea to preponderate in the construction, and after some verbs
it allows both the accusative and the genitive (1108). In the same
general sense the genitive follows verbal adjectives. It has also
uses which originally belonged to the ablative; for example, with
verbs of separation and to express source. (See 1042.)
GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS (ATTRIBUTIVE GENITIVE).
1084. A noun in the genitive may limit the meaning
of another noun, to express various relations, most of
230 SYNTAX. [1085
which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in
English.
1085. The genitive thus depending on a noun is called
attributive (see 919). Its most important relations are the
following :
1. POSSESSION or other close relation : as fj TOV mxi-pos
oiKia, the fathers house; ij/xwi/ 17 TOT/H'S, our country; TO TWV
av8pS>v yevos, the lineage of the men. So -YJ TOV Aid?, the daugh-
ter of Zeus; ra TWV 0eo>i/, the things of the Gods (953). The
Possessive Genitive.
2. The SUBJECT of an action or feeling : as 17 TOV SrJ/Aov
cw/oia, the good-will of the people (i.e. which the people feel).
The Subjective Genitive.
3. The OBJECT of an action or feeling : as 8ia TO Hava-a-
viov /xio-os, owing to the hatred of (i.e. felt against) Pausanias,
T. 1,96; Trpbs ras TOV xeifji&vos KapTepTyo-eis, as regards his en
durance of the winter, P. Sy. 220 a . So ot Otw o/o/cot, the oath*
(sworn) in the name of -the Gods (as we say 0eovs 6/xvwat,
1049), X.^4.2,5 7 . The Objective Genitive.
4. MATERIAL or CONTENTS, including that of which any-
thing consists : as j3ow dye'A.^, a herd of cattle ; oAo-os
SeVSpcov, a grove of cultivated trees, X.^4.5,3 12 ; Kprjvrj
vSaTos, a spring of fresh water, X.^4.6,4 4 ; 8uo
two quarts of meal Genitive of Material.
5. MEASURE, of space, time, or value : as
oSo's, a journey of three days; OKTCD o-TaoYwv TCI^OS, a ivall of
eight stades (in length) j TpiaKovTa TaAavrwi/ ovo-ia, an estate
of thirty talents; /xio-0os TeTTapwv /xryvwi/, pay for four months;
Trpay/xaTa iroXX&v TaAavrwj/, affairs of (i.e. involving) many
talents, Ai.N.472. Genitive of Measure.
6. CAUSE or ORIGIN: /xeycuW dSt/c^aTcov opy-rj, anger at
great offences; ypa<f>rj do-e^etas, an indictment for impiety.
The Causal Genitive.
7. THE WHOLE, after nouns denoting a part : as TroAAoi
TWV pvjTopMv, many of the orators; avyp TWV eXcvOepwv, a man
(i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive. (See
also 1088.)
These seven classes are not exhaustive; but they will give a gen-
eral idea of these relations, many of which it is difficult to classify.
1091] GENITIVE. 231
1086. N. Examples like TroXt? "Apyovs, the city of Argos, Ar.
Eq. 813, Tpon?s TrroXUOpov, the city of Troy, Od. 1, 2, in which the
genitive is used instead of apposition, are poetic.
1087. Two genitives denoting different relations may depend
on one noun ; as LTTTTOV Spo/x-ov i^/iepas, within a day's run for a horse,
D. 19,273; Sta TTJV rov ave/aov aTrcocriv avr&v es TO TreXayos, by the
wind's driving them (the wrecks) out into the sea, T.7, 34.
1088. (Partitive Genitive.') The partitive genitive
(1085, 7) may follow all nouns, pronouns, adjectives
(especially superlatives), participles with the article,
and adverbs, which denote a part. E.g.
Ot ayaOol TWV avOpwTrwv, the good among the men; 6 ij/xtcrvs
TOV apLOfJiov, the half of the number ; avftpa oiSo, TOV 8^/xov, / know
a man of the people; rots $pai/tVats TOJV vavrwv, to the upper benches
of the sailors, T. 6, 31; ovSetf roii/ Trcu'Swv, no one of the children',
trdvTwv TCOV prjropwv Setvoraro?, the most eloquent of all the orators ,
6 /SovAojuevos KO.L acrrtov /cat ^ev<ov, an?/ one who pleases of both citizens
and strangers, T. 2, 34; Sta yuvaiKwv, divine among women, Od.4,
305; TTOV rfj<s y^s; ubi terrarutn? where on the earth f TL<S roiv TroAt-
rwv; who of the citizens? Sts r^s ly/xepas, ^wzce a </ay; ets TOVTO
dvot'as, ^o ^zs piVc/i of folly ; ITTL /Atya Swa/xews, <o a <jrreaZ degree
i>f power, T. 1,118; ej/ TOVTW Trapatr/cev?}?, z/i this state of prepara-
tion. **A /xev 8iw/<t rot) {J/rj<f>L(T[jiaTO<; ravr* ecrrtV, ZAe jt?arfs of the
decree which he prosecutes are these (lit. w/<a parts o/ <^e decree he
prosecutes, etc.), D.18, 56. Ev^/xorar* av0pw7ra>i/, m ^e mos^
plausible way possible (most plausibly of men), D. 19,50. "Ore Setvo-
raro? o-avrov ravra rjcrOa, when you were at the height of your power
in these matters, X. M. 1, 2 46 . (See 965.)
1089. The partitive genitive has the predicate position as
regards the article (971), while other attributive genitives (except
personal pronouns, 977) have the attributive position (959).
1090. N. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender
with a dependent partitive genitive. But sometimes, especially
when it is singular, it is neuter, agreeing with ^e'pos, part, under-
stood; as TWV TroXcfwW TO TroXv (for ot TroXXoi), the greater part
of the enemy.
1091. N. A partitive genitive sometimes depends on Tts or
/otepos understood; as <curav CTn/uyvwat o-<o)v TC Trpos c/cetVovs
xat Ketva>v Trpo? lavrovs, they said that some of their own men had
mixed iviih them, and some of them with their uirn men (TII/<S being
understood with oxaij/ and cjcetyci)?), X.^4.3,5 16 .
232 SYNTAX. [1092
1092. N. Similar to such phrases as TTOV yi/s; eis TOVTO dvoi'u?,
etc., is the use of c^w and an adverb with the genitive; as mos
e^eis So^s ; in what state of opinion are you? P. Rp. 456 d ; ev
<r<o/x.aTos x etl/ ' t ^ e * n a ffd condition of body, ibid. 404 d ; <us et^e
Ta^ovs, as fast as he could (lit. m ^e condition of speed in which he
was}, T.2,90; so o>s TroSwv et^o]/, Hd. 6, 116; ev t^etv (f>ptvS>v, to be
right in his mind (see E.Hip. 462).
GENITIVE AFTER VERBS.
PREDICATE GENITIVE.
1093. As the attributive genitive (1084) stands in the
relation of an attributive adjective to its leading substan-
tive, so a genitive may stand in the relation of a predicate
adjective (907) to a verb.
1094. Verbs signifying to be or to become and other
copulative verbs may have a predicate genitive express-
ing any of the relations of the attributive genitive
(1085). E.g.
1. (Possessive.} 'O vo/xo? eortv o*ro? ApaKovros, this law is
Draco's, D. 23,51. IleWav <e'pav ov Travros, aAA.' ai/Spos <ro<o>,
/o fear poverty is not in the power of every one, but in that of a wix a
man, Men. M on. 463. TOT) #ea)i/ vo/xt^erai (6 x^/ 305 ) > ^ ^ a ' ^'^
ts ^Ae jo/ace held sacred ? S. 0. C. 38.
2. (Subjective.} Of/nai avro (TO p^/x) IleptavSpOT; etvai, 1
think it (the saying') is Periander's, P. Rp. 336 a .
3. (Objective.} Ov TWV Kaxovpyoov OIKTOS, dXXa 1-779 StKr;?,
p//y z's not for evil doers, but for justice, E. frag. 272.
4. (Material.} "Eipvfjui \i0wv TreTroi^/xeVov, a w;aW ftu<7/ of stones,
T. 4, 31. Ot @e/jL\Loi TravToi'an/ XcOwv VTro/ceivrai, the foundations
are laid (consisting} of all kinds of stones, T. 1,93.
5. (Measure.} (Ta ret;^) o-raSiW ^v 6/cra>, f^e zt'aZ/s were eight
stades (in length}, T.4,66. 'ETretSai/ eraiv ?J TI? rp.iaKovta, toAen
one is ^iriy years old, P. Z^r. 72 l a .
6. (Origin.} Totovrcov eo-re Tr/ooyovcoj/, ^row swcA ancestors are
you sprung, ~K.A. 3, 2 14 .
7. (Partitive.} Tovrwv yevov /u.ot, become one of these for my
sake, Ar.N. 107. 2oA.toi/ roiv eTrra <ro(f>i(TT<ji>v CK\rjOrj, Solon was
called one of the Seven Wise Men, 1.15,235.
1095. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint,
1099] GENITIVE. 233
to make, to think or regard, and the like, which gener-
ally take two accusatives (1077), may take a genitive
in place of the predicate accusative. E.g.
Trjv 'A<n'av eavrcoi/ Troiowrat, they make Asia their own, ^.Ag.
1,33. 'E/x,e 0es run/ 7re7ret(r/xevo>v, put me down as (one} of those
who are persuaded, P. RpA24: c . (Tovro) ri}s ^/xerepas d^eXeias
ai/ rt? tfeir; SiKai'ws, any one mit/Al yws% regard this as belonging to
our neglect, D. 1, 10.
1096. These verbs (1095) in the passive are among the copula-
tive verbs of 907, and they still retain the genitive. See the last
example under 1094, 7.
GENITIVE EXPRESSING A PART.
1097. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action
affects the object only in part. E.g.
Ile/xTret TCOV AvSwv, he sends some of the Lydians (but Tre'/xTrei
TOV? AuSovs, he sends the Lydians). IltVet TOV oti/ov, he drinks of
the wine. Trjs yrjs cre/aov, they ravaged (some) of the land, T. 1,30.
2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying
to share (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. E.g.
Meret^ov rrj<s X e to, s, they shared in the booty ; so often /xeTaTroiei-
<T0cu TIVOS, to claim a share of anything (cf. 1099) ; aTroAaw/xev TCOV
ayaOutv, we enjoy the blessings (i.e. our share of them); ourto?
ovaLcrOe TOVTOJV, thus may you enjoy these, D. 28, 20. So ov TrpocryKeL
/xot rfjs dpx^ s ' ^ have no concern in the government; /xereo-rt /xot
rovrov, 7 Aave a s/mre in this (1161).
1098. N". Many of these verbs also take an accusative, when
they refer to the whole object. Thus IXaxe TOVTOV means he
obtained a share of this by lot, but IXa^e rovro, he obtained this by lot.
Mere'xw and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like
juepos, part; as roiv KivSwcuv TrXetcrrov /xepos /u.e^e^ovo'tv, they will
have the greatest share of the dangers, 1. 6, 3 (where /xepov? would
mean that they have only a part of a share). This use of /x,e/oos
shows the nature of the genitive after these verbs.
In ortHTfHjSew TTJ<S Ke<f>a\rj<s, to bruise his head, and Kareayevat T^S
Ke<f>a\rj<s, to have his head broken, the genitive is probably partitive.
See Ar.ylc^.1180, Pa. 71; 1.18,52. These verbs take also the
accusative.
GENITIVE WITH VARIOUS VERBS.
1099. The genitive follows verbs signifying to take
234 SYNTAX. LHOO
hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, to
miss, to make trial of, to begin. E.g.
'EAa/Sero r^s x et P s avrov, he took his hand, X. H. 4, 1 88 ; TTV/OOS
ecrri OiyovTo. fjirj evOvs Kai.cr6ai, it is possible to touch fire and not
be burned immediately, X. C. 5, 1 16 ; rr}s vi/e crews /x-eraTrotetcr^at, to
lay claim to sagacity, T.I, 140; ^KKTTO. ron> aXXorpitov opeyovrai,
they are least eager for what is another's, X. #.4,42 ; ovSe /x^v dXXou
CTTO^a^d/xevos Irv^e TOVTOV, nor did he aim at another man and hit
this one, Ant. 2 a, 4; TTJ<S apexes e<iKecr0(U, to attain to virtue, 1.1,5;
6 So v evTTVpov rv^eti/, to find a passable road, X.J6T. 6, 5 52 ; TroXXwv
/ecu x a ^ 7r ^ )v X ( *Pi (i)v ^eXd/Scn/TO, they took possession of many rough
places, ibid.; ravr^s aTroo-^aXevra TT)S eXTri'Sos, disappointed in this
hope, Hd.tf,5; cr^aXets TTJS dX^^etas, having missed the truth,
P.RpAoi*; TO c^curAu TT}S dXTy^ecas, to &e cheated out of the
truth, J&&.413*; Treipacrai/res TOV ^wptbv, having made an attempt on
the place, T. 1,61; ekos apx av f 16 ^<>y v > tV is proper that I should
speak first, X. C. 6, 1 6 .
1100. N. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative,
with a genitive of the part taken hold of; as \a/3ov r^s ^wvr/s TOV
'Opovrav, they seized Orontas by his girdle, X. .4.1,6 10 .
1101. 1. The poets extend the construction of verbs of taking
hold to those of pulling, dragging, leading, and the like ; as oXXov
fjitv x^- a ^ vr l^ /ovon> aXXoi/ 8e x tT ^^5 pulling one by the cloak,
another by the tunic, 77.22, 493; jSaw dyeViyv Kepawv, <Ae <wo /ed
<^e Aez/er by the horns, Od. 3, 439.
2. So even in prose : TO. vrjTna TratSia SeViKn TOV TroSos <nrapT<j>,
they tie the infants by the foot' with a cord, Hd. 5, 16; /xrJTrore dyciv
r^s yvtas TOV LTTTTOV, never to lead the horse by the bridle, X.^.6,9.
3. Under this head is usually placed the poetic genitive with
verbs of imploring, denoting the part grasped by the suppliant;
as //, XtcrcreWeTO yovvotv, she implored me by (i.e. clasping} my
knees, II. 9,451. The explanation is less simple in XtWo/mi Zryvos
'OXv/xTu'ov, / implore by Olympian Zeus, Od. 2, 68 : compare vvv 8
o-e Trpo? Trarpos yowdo/xcu, and now I implore thee by thy father,
0</.13,324.
1102. The genitive follows verbs signifying to taste,
to smell, to h&ar, to perceive, to comprehend, to remember,
to forget, to desire, to care for, to spare, to neglect, to
wonder at, to admire, to despise. E.g.
ycvcrd/xevoi, having tasted of freedom, Hd. 6, 5;
ocr</>paiVo/ouu, 1 smell onions, Ar. 72.654;
1108] GENITIVE. 235
jnot SOKOJ, methinks 1 hear a voice, Ar. Pa. 61 ; aia-OavecrOai,
<rOai, or 7riAav$avor0(H TOVTWI/, to perceive, remember, or forget
these j oo-o6 dAA^Awv We(rav, all who comprehended each other's
speech, T. 1,3 (1104); TOVTCUV TWV jita^>y/x,aT(ov e7ri#v/Aa>, I long for
this learning, X.M".2,6 30 ; xP r ?/ jt< ^ r(01/ ^SarAu, to fe sparing oj
money, ibid.1,2 22 ', TTJS apexes d/xeAetv, to neglect virtue, 1.1,48; eft
ayaaai rot) Trarpos, Z/^OM admire your father, X. C.3, 1 15 . M^Sevos
ovv oAiycu/oetre /A^Se Kara^/oovetrc TWI/ Tr/oooTeTay/Aevw, efo noi ZAen
neglect or despise any of my injunctions, 1.3,48. Ttuv Kar^yopwv
Oavfjid^w, I am astonished at my accusers, L. 25, 1. (For a causal
genitive with verbs like 0av/Aao>, see 1126.)
1103. N. Verbs of hearing, learning, etc. may take an accusa-
tive of the thing heard etc. and a genitive of the person heard
from; as TOVTOJV TOLOVTOVS aKova) Xoyovs, / hear such sayings
from these men ; TrvOivOai TOVTO v/xwv, to learn this from you. The
genitive here belongs under 1130. A sentence may take the place
of the accusative ; as TOVTWV a/cove ri Aeyouo-tv, hear from these what
they say. See also a7ro8e^o/>tat, accept (a statement) from, in the
Lexicon.
1104. N". Verbs of understanding, as eTuora/um, have the accu-
sative. Swtiy/ut, quoted above with the genitive (1102), usually
takes the accusative of a thing.
1105. The impersonals /xeXet and /xeTa/AeXet take the geni-
tive of a thing with the dative of a person (1101) ; as fieXei [wi
TOVTOV, I care for this , /xerajLieAet o~ot TOVTOV, thou repentest of this.
n/300-ij/cei, it concerns, has the same construction, but the genitive
belongs under 1097, 2.
1106. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a
person and the genitive of a thing; as fu/j /JL dva/xvijo-?ys Ka/cwv, do
not remind me of evils (i.e. cause me to remember them}, E. 4^.1045;
TOVS TratSa? yevoreov at/xaros, we must make the children taste blood,
P.^.537 a .
But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives (1069).
1107. N. "Oo>, emit smell (smell of}, has a genitive (perhaps by
an ellipsis of oo-fjujv, odor} ; as oovo-' a/x,/8/oocrias KO.I i/e/crapos, they
smell of ambrosia and nectar, Ar.Ach.19Q. A second genitive may
be added to designate the source of the odor ; as t T^S /cc</>oA^s
o(o fjivpov, if my head smells of perfume, Ar. Eccl. 524.
1108. N. Many of the verbs of 1099 and 1102 may take also
the accusative. See the Lexicon.
236 SYNTAX. [1109
1109. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule, to
lead, or to direct. E.g.
"Epco? TWV #eojv /3ao-t/Vevei, Love is king of the Gods, P. Sy. 195 C 5
HoXv/cpar^s 2a/xov Tvpavi/wi/, Poly crates, while he was tyrant of
Samos,, T. 1,13; MtVa>s r^s vvv 'EAA^n/c^s OaXdao-rjs eKpaTTycre KOI
rS>v Kv/<AaSa)i/ v^crwv "typ^e, Minos became master of what is now
the Greek sea, and ruler of the Cyclades, T. 1,4; lySovwj/ eKparet,
he was master of pleasures, X. M. 1, 5 6 ; ^youyaevot aurovo/xooi/ rwv ^v/x-
/Aa^eoj/, leading their allies (who were) independent (972), T. 1, 97.
1110. N. This construction is sometimes connected with that
of 1120. But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or
ruler implied in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of
comparison (see 1083).
1111. "N. For other cases after many of these verbs, see the Lexi-
con. For the dative in poetry after ijyeo/xai and avaoxra), see 1164.
1112. .Verbs signifying fulness and want take the
genitive of material (1085, 4). E.g.
X.pr}fjLaTu>v evTrdpet, he had abundance of money, D.18,235;
(recray/xeVos TrXovrov Trjv i/ar^j/ ecrofjuaL, I shall have my soul loaded
with wealth, X. Sy. 4, 64. OVK av ajropol TrapaSeiy/xarcov, he would
be at no loss for examples, ~P.Rp. 557 d ; ovSei/ Severn TroAAwv ypa/x/xa-
T<OV, zAere M?I'^ be no need of many writings, 1.4,78.
1113. Verbs signifying to fill take the accusative of
the thing filled and the genitive of material. E.g.
AaKpvwv 7r\yj(Tv e^ue, he filled me with tears, E. Or. 368.
1114. N. Aeo/iat, / want, besides the ordinary genitive (as
TOVTOOI/ eSeovro, they were in want of these), may take a cognate
accusative of the thing; as SCTJO-O/ACU tyztov /xerpiav Seiytnv, / n7/
ma&e o/yow a moderate request, Aesch.3,61. (See 1076.)
1115. N. Ac? may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an
accusative) of the person besides the genitive; as Set /xot TOVTOV,
/ need this ; avrov yap ere Set Ilpo/x^ews, for thou thyself needest a
Prometheus, A.Pr.86 (cf. ov Set /xe eX^eiv).
1116. N". (a) Besides the common phrases TroXXov Set, it is
far from it, o Atyov Set, zV wants little of it, we have in Demosthenes
ovSe TroAAov Set (like TTUVTOS Set), iV t^an^s everything of it (lit.
if does no? even want much).
(0) By an ellipsis of Setv (1534), oAcyov and /AtKpov come to
mean almost; as oXtyov Travres, a/wosf aW, P.72p.552 d u
1120] GENITIVE. 237
GENITIVE OP SEPARATION AND COMPARISON.
1117. The genitive (as ablative) may denote that
from which anything is separated or distinguished. On
this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting to
remove, to restrain, to release, to cease, to fail, to differ,
to give up, and the like. E.g.
'H vfjaos ov TroXv Ste^et rfjs ^Trei'pov, the island is not far dis-
tant from the main-land. 'ETTIO-T^/U,^ x<Dpio/Ai/r/ St/ccuoo-vv^s,
knowledge separated from justice, P. Menex. 246 e ; Xvow /xe Seo-jnoiv,
release me from chains ; eTrecr^ov rrj<s ret^Tycretos, they ceased from
building the wall; TOVTOV? ov 7rav<ra> Trj<s *PX^^' ^ will not depose
these from their authority, X. C. 8, G 3 ; ov TraveaOe rrj<s fioxOrjpias,
you do not cease from your rascality ; ov/c e^evo*^ T^S eXTrt'Sos, 7*e
was not disappointed in his hope, X. .77.7, 5 24 ; ovSev Siotoreis Xcupe-
<f>a)VTo<s, you will not differ from Chaerephon, Ar.JV. 503; 7-^5 eXev-
0ept'as 7rapa^wp^o-at ^tAtTTTrcu, ^o surrender freedom to Philip, D.
18,68. So etTrov (avrw) TOV KiypvKO? ^17 XetVecr^ai, they told him
not to be left behind the herald (i.e. to follow close upon him), T. 1, 131 ;
^ 7rio-ToA/) i}V ovro? cypai^ev a7roAe6</)^ets ^/AOJV, <Ae Zefter which this
man wrote without our knowledge (lit. separated from ws), D. 19, 36.
Transitive verbs of this class may take also an accusative.
1118. Verbs of depriving may take a genitive in place of the
accusative of a thing, and those of taking away a genitive in place
of the accusative of a person (1069; 1071) ; as t/jie TWV Trarpwcov
d.7recrTep^K, he has deprived me of my paternal property, D. 29,3; roiv
aXXcov a<f>aipovfjLtvoL ^p^/xara, taking away property from the others,
X. Af.l, 5 8 ; TTOO-WV aTreo-repryo-fle, o/ Aow wucA fawe you been bereft!
D.8,63.
1119. N". The poets use this genitive with verbs of motion; as
OvXv/ATroto KaTTJX^o/xev, we descended from Olympus, 7^.20,125;
Hv^wvos Zfias, thou didst come from Pytho, S. 0. 7\152. Here a
preposition would be used in prose.
1120. The genitive follows verbs signifying to sur-
pass, to be inferior, and all others which imply com-
parison. E.g.
("Avflpowros) wret vTrepe^et TWV aXXoov, man surpasses the
others in sagacity, P. Menex. 237 d ; e7rtSeiai/Tes rrjv aptryv TOV TrXrp
Oov<s 7reptytyi/O)U.Vryv, showing that bravery proves superior to numbers,
1.4,91 ; opwv vo"Tpiovo'av T^V TroXti/ TWV Kaipcov, seeing the city too
late for its opportunities, D. 18, 102; e/xTreipt'a TroXv 7rpoe^T rail
238 SYNTAX. [1121
a A AG> i/, in experience you far excel the others, X.77.7, 1 4 ;
7rAry#t ye -ty/xcoj/ Aet<$evTes, wAew ^Aey were not at all inferior to
(left behind by) us in numbers, X. A . 7, 7 31 . So T<OV l\6p^v w/cao-flai
(or iy<ro-acr0ai), to 6e overcome by one's enemies ; but these two verbs
take also the genitive with viro (1234). So rtuv e^OpS>v Kpareu/, to
prevail over one's enemies, and T^S Oa.Xd<ra"r)<s Kparelv, to be master oj
the sea. Compare the examples under 1109, and see 1110.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF ACCUSING ETC.
1121. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prosecute, to con-
vict, to acquit, and to condemn take a genitive denoting
the crime, with an accusative of the person. E.g.
Amuijoutt avrov TOV <j>6vov, I accuse him of the murder ; eypai/'aro
O.VTOV Trapai/o/Awi/, he indicted, him for an illegal proposition ; SIOJKCI
/>te Swpeoi/, he prosecutes me for bribery (for gifts}. KAeWa Scopwv
eAwres /cat K\OTrrj<s, having convicted Cleon of bribery and theft,
Ar.N. 591. *E<evye 7rpo8oo-xs, 7e was brought to trial for treachery,
but a,7T<uy Tr/ooSocrtas, ^e was acquitted of treachery. ^evSo-
/txaprvpitov aXwcrecr^at TrpocrSoKon/, expecting to be convicted of false-
witness, D.39,18.
1122. *O<^Xio-/cava>, /ose a sitiV, has the construction of a passive
of this class (1239) ; as ox^Ae /cA.o7n}s, ^e was convicted of theft. It
may also have a cognate accusative ; as <3<A.e AcAoTnys Stioyv, Ae was
convicted of theft (1051). For other accusatives with o<ArKava>, as
, folly, at<r^wr;v, shame, ^prj/xara, money (fine), see the Lexicon.
1123. Compounds of Kara of this class, including jca-n;-
w (882, 2), commonly take a genitive of the person,
which depends on the Kara. They may take also an object
accusative denoting the crime or punishment. E.g.
OvSets avros avrov Karrjyoprjcre TrwTrore, no man ever himself
accused himself , D. 38,26; Kare^oan/ TWV 'A 77 vat to v, they decried
the Athenians, T.I, 67; Odvarov Kareyvtoo-av avrov, they condemned
him to death, T. 6, 61; v/uon/ Seo/wu /x>/ Karayvwvat SwpoSoKiW lp.ov,
1 beg you not to declare me guilty of taking bribes, L. 21, 21 ; ra
r-Aeto-ra Kareif/evcraTO JJLOV, he told the most lies against me, D. 18,9;
Aeyw Trpo? TOV? e/w,ov KaTa^r/^>i(ra/AeVov5 ^avarov, / speak to those
who voted to condemn me to death, P. Ap. 38 d .
1124. N. Verbs of condemning which are compounds of Kara
may take three cases; as TroAAwv 01 Trarepe? T/^WV /u,778ta-/xov
Oa.va.Tov Kareyvaxrav, our fathers condemned many to death for
Medism,IA,157.
For a genitive (of value) denoting the penalty, see 1133.
1130] GENITIVE. 239
1125. N. The verbs of 1121 often take a cognate accusative
(1051) on which the genitive depends ; as ypatfr-rjv ypdfao-Oan
vftpcios, to bring an indictment for outrage; ypa<f>r)v (or BLK-TJV) i>7re-
X f w> <evyav, <z7ro<evyiv, 6</>Aeiv, aAuii/ai, etc. The force of this
accusative seems to be felt in the construction of 1121.
GENITIVE OF CAUSE AND SOURCE.
1126. The genitive often denotes a cause, especially
with verbs expressing emotions, as admiration, wonder,
affection, hatred, pity, anger, envy, or revenge. E.g.
(Tourovs) rfjs JJLCV roA/x,^? ov 0av/Aaco, rr/s Se avvecria<s, 1
wonder not at their boldness, but at their folly, T. 6, 36; TroAAaKi? trt
ev&u/x.ovto'a TOV T/OOTTOV, / often counted you happy for your char-
acter, P. CV.43 b ; ^Aai ere TOV vov, rfjs Se SeiAias orvyco, I envy
you for your mind, but loathe you for your cowardice, S.El. 1027;
fjirj fjioi <j>OovTJ<rrj<; TOV //,a0?J/x,aTos, don't grudge me the knowledge,
P. #w.297 b ; o-vyycyvajo-Keiv avTois XPV rf* eTTi^v/xtas, we must for-
give them for their desire, ibid. 306 C ; /cat (r<eas Tt/xwpijo-o/xat T^S
ei/^aSe aTrt'^tos, and 1 shall punish them for coming hither, Hd.3, 145.
TovVov? oi/cTt'po) r7s vovov, I pity these for their disease, X. SyA 81 ;
ran/ a8tK?7/AaT(Dv opyL^aOaL, to be angry at the offences, L.31,11.
Most of these verbs may take also an accusative or dative of the
person.
1127. N. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive
(where eve/cot is generally expressed) ; as r}s TWV 'EAAiji/w eA.ev0e-
pia^for the liberty of the Greeks, D. 18, 100 ; so 19,76. (See 1548.)
1128. N. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive ; as 01
/?a<nA.ei avTi7ro6ov/ze$a TYJS o-PXV 5 ' we ao n t dispute with the King
about his dominion, X. A. 2, 3 23 ; Ev/xoATros ^/x^to-^r^o-ev 'Ep^e<
TJ/S TToAews, Eumolpus disputed with Erechtheus for the city (i.e.
disputed its possession with him), 1. 12, 193.
1129. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, to
give the cause of the astonishment. E.g.
*O Iloo-eioW, TT/S re' xv 77$, O Poseidon, what a trade! Ar. Eq. 144.
*O Zev /foorAev, r^s ACTTTOT^TOS TWV <J>pevwv ! King Zeus I
what subtlety of intellect I Ar. N. 153.
1130. 1. The genitive sometimes denotes the source. E.g.
TOVTO CTV^OV crou, 7 obtained this from you. Ma0e /AOV raSe,
Zearn this from me, X. C. 1,6 44 . Add the examples under 1103.
2. So with ytyvo/xat, in the sense to be born; as Aapetov KCU
Tlapvo-anSo? yiyvovrai TrcuSes 8vo, q/" Darius and Pary satis are born
240 SYNTAX. [1131
1131. In poetry, the genitive occasionally denotes the
agent after a passive verb, or is used like the instrumental
dative (1181). E.g.
'Ev "AiSo. 877 Kt<rai, a as dAd^ov o-<ayeis Atyto-0ou re, thou,
liest now in Hades, slain by thy wife and Aegisthus, E. El. 122.
n^crat Trvpos 8771010 Ovperpa, to burn the gates with destructive
fire, 77.2,415.
These constructions would not be allowed in prose.
GENITIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS.
1132. The genitive often depends on a preposition
included in a compound verb. E.g.
n/ao/cetrat TT^S ^aipa? ?;//,oiv 0/377 /xeyaAa, /iz'^A mountains lie in
front of our land, X. Af. 3, 5 25 ; vwepe^oLvrjaav rov \6<f>ov, they ap-
peared above th'e hill, T. 4, 93; OUTWS v/xwv vTrepaAyto, / grieve so
for you, Ar. .4v. 466; a7roT/o7rei yu,e TOVTOU, z turns me from this,
P. ^4j0. 31 d ; T<3 eTrt/JaVrt Trptorw TOT) rei'^ovs, /o /ii'wi w^o should first
mount the wall, T.4, 116; OUK avOpwTrwv virepttfrpovu, he did not
despise men, X.Ag. 11,2.
For the genitive after verbs of accusing and condemning, com-
pounds of /caret, see 1123.
GENITIVE OF PRICE OR VALUE.
1133. The genitive may denote the price or value of
a thing. E.g.
armor for bronze, armor worth a hundred oxen for that
worth nine oxen, 11. 6, 235. Aoa xprjfJidTwv OVK (01/77x77 (sc.
(7/ory is noi ^o 6e bought with money, 1.2, 32. Tldo-ov 8ioacr/<ei;
fjiviov. For what price does he teach ? For Jive minae. P. Ap.20 b . OVK
av cbreSo/w/^v TroXXov ras eXTrt'Sas, 7 would not have sold my hopes for
a great deal, P. Ph. 98 b ; ju,eiovos aura n/xaWai, Ae# uaZwe ^em
more, X. C. 2, 1 18 . (But with verbs of valuing irf.pl. with the geni-
tive is more common.)
In judicial language, rt/xav rtvi TWOS is said of the court's judg-
ment in estimating the penalty, ri^ao-Oat nvi TIVOS of either party
to the suit in proposing a penalty; as dAAa 877 <f>vyvj<s Tt/x-77o-w/>uxt ;
taws yap av /xot rovrov Ti/xT^o-atre, but now shall 1 propose exile as
my punishment? you (the court) might perhaps fix my penalty at
this, V.Ap. 37 C . So Ti/xarat 8' ow /xot 6 dv77p Oavdrov,-so the man
estimates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes death as my punish-
1138] GENITIVE. 241
mew/), P. Ap. 36 b . So also 2<oSpt'av inrfj-yov Oavdrov, they im-
peached Sphodrias on a capital charge (cf. 1124), X.//. 5,4 24 .
1134. The thing bought sometimes stands in the genitive,
either by analogy to the genitive of price, or in a causal sense
(1126); as rov SwSe/ca /xi/as Ilao-ia (sc. o<ei'Aa>) ; for what (do 1
owe) twelve minae to Pasiax? Ar. N. 22; ouSe'ra r^s crvrova ia?
apyvpiov TrpaTTtL, you ask no money of anybody for your teaching,
X.lf.l,6 u .
1135. The genitive depending on aiog, ivorth, worthy, and its
compounds, or on dtoo), think worthy, is the genitive of price or
value ; as atos COTI Oavdrov, he is worthy of death ; ov e/ucrroKAca
raii/ yU.eyi'0-Ttoi/ Stopeaiv ^ta>crai/; efoW ^Ae?/ no Zfo'n& Themistocles
worthy of the highest gifts? 1.4,154. So sometimes art/Acs and
ari/xaw take the genitive. (See 1140.)
GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.
1136. The genitive may denote the time within which
anything takes place. E.g.
Hoiov x/oovou Sc Kat TreiropOrjrai TroAts ; well, how long since
(within what time) was the city really taken f A.Ag.278. Tov eTriyi-
yvo/aeVov ^et/xoivo?, during the following winter, T. 8, 29. Tavra
rfjs ly/xepa? eyevero, /us happened during the day, X. ^4.7, 4 14
would mean through the whole day, 1062). Ae'/caercoi/
, they icill not come within ten years, P. Lg. 642 e . So
r^s ^/xe/oas, Ae received a drachma a day (951).
1137. A similar genitive of the place within which or at
which is found in poetry. E.g.
T H OVK "Apyeos rjev 'A^cut/cot); was Ae nof in Achaean Argos?
Od. 3, 251; Qirj vvv OVK eart yw?) KO.T 'A^att'Sa yatav, oure IIvAov
te/o^s ov r' * A p y e o s OVTC M.vKrjvr)<;, a woman, whose like there is not
in the Achaean land, not at sacred Pylos, nor at Argos, nor at
Mycenae, Od. 21, 107. So in the Homeric TreStoic (^e'eiv, to run on
the plain (i.e. within its limits), II. 22, 23, Aovecr#at KOTO. polo, to bathe
in the river, II. 6, 508, and similar expressions. So d/oitrrep^? X 1 P S '
on the left hand, even in Hdt. (5,77).
1138. N. A genitive denoting place occurs in Attic prose in a
few such expressions as teVai TOV -Trpdfrco, to go forward, X. ^d.1,3 1 ,
and eTrera^wov rrjs oSov TOVS o-^oAacVepov Tr/oocrtoi/ras, they hurried
over the r<xi<l those, trho came up more slowly, T. 4, 47. These genitives
are variously explained.
242 SYNTAX. [1139
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
1139. The objective genitive follows many verbal
adjectives.
1140. These adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning
or derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g.
<ro<xs, partaking of wisdom, 1?iLg. 689 d ; uro/xoipoi TWV
, sharing equally their father's estate, Isae. 6,25. (1097,2.)
having attained knowledge, P. J5w.289 b ;
c/ATreipoYa/roi, most experienced in the sea (in naviga-
tion), T.1,SO. (1099.)
'YTJT/KOOS TWV yov<av, obedient (hearkening) to his parents, P. Rp.
463 d ; apvrjiJuw T<m/ K t v 8 v v <o v, unmindful of the dangers, Ant. 2 a, 7 ;
ayevoTos KO.KOJV, without a taste of evils, S. _4n. 582; CTri/AcX?)? dya-
$aiv, a/Ji\rj<s Ka/ov, caring for the good, neglectful of the bad,'
<ei8<oXoi xp>7/AaT(Dv, sparing of money, P. .Rp. 548 b . (1102.)
TOJV ^&ovo)v Trao-coi/ ey/cpaTeo-raros, most perfect master of all pleas-
ures, X.AT. 1,2 14 ; vea>s dpx 1 ^?* ^ f o command a ship, P.Rp. 488 d ;
eavrov <uv d/cparwp, no/ &etn^ master of himself, ibid.579 c . (1109.)
Mecrros Ka/coov, y^ q/" evils ; eTrtcrT^/xr/s KCVOS, wnd q/" knowl-
edge, P. .ftp. 486 C ; Ary^s wy TrAetos, being full of forgetfulness, ibid.;
7r\ei<TT(av evSeeoraros, most wanting in most things, ibid. 579 e ; 17
*A V X^ yvfjiv-r) TOV (Tw/xaro?, ^e sow/ s^njo< of the body, P. Crai. 403 b ;
KaOapa TravTMV TWV Trcpt TO (TWfjua KdKwv, /ree (pure) from all the
evils that belong to the body, ibid. 403 e ; TOIOVTWV dvSpwv 6p^>av>y,
6ere/if o/ SMC^ men, L. 2, 60 ; eTTKmjjary eTrto-T^p:?;? 8ia^>opos, knowl-
edge distinct from knowledge, P. Pfo7. 61 d ; erepov TO ^8v TOV dya#ov,
^e pleasant (is) distinct from the good, P. . 500 d . (1112 ; 1117.)
v Ej/oxos SetXtas, chargeable with cowardice, L. 14, 5; TOVT<DV
amos, responsible for this, P. .447*. (1121.)
v A^tos TToXXwv, worth much, genitive of vaZwe (1135).
1141. Compounds of alpha privative (875, 1) sometimes take a
genitive of kindred meaning, which depends on the idea of sepa-
ration implied in them; as aTrcus appeVan/ muoW, destitute (child-
less) of male children, X. C.4, 6' 2 ; Ti/xr/? OLTI/AO? Traces, destitute of
all honor, P. Lg. 774 b ; xpWa-TW dSwporaTo?, raos /ree /rom taking
bribes, T.2,65; d7r>yve/xov TTCIVTWV xeLfjuavwv, free from the blasts of
all storms, S.O. C. 677; di^o^^Tos o^ewv KcoKvyuaTtuv, without the
sound of shrill wailings, S. ^4y. 321.
1142. Some of these adjectives (1139) are kindred to
verbs which take the accusative. E.g.
, understanding the art, P. <2.448 b (1104) ;
1147] GENITIVE. 243
Tro'Aews dvarpeTrTiKov, a practice subversive of a state t
P. Rp. 389 d ; .Ka/coupyos TWV aAAwv, eavrov 8e TroAv KaKoupyorepo?,
doing evil to the others, but far greater evil to himself, X. M. 1, 5 8 ;
<ruyyvu)/AU)i> rcSv dv$p<*>7rij/a)v ajaapTiy/xaTtoi/, considerate of human
faults, X. C. 6, 1 87 ; <rv/Ai/07<ds (rot a/At TOVTOU TOV i/o/xov, / yote w^A
you /or <Ais /aw, P.#/>.380 C .
1143. The possessive genitive sometimes follows adjec-
tives denoting possession. j&.^.
Ol KiVoWot TWV e^co-T^KOToov iStoi, ^e dangers belong to the
commanders, D.2,28; lepos 6 x%> T *7? 'Aprc/xtSos, the place is
sacred to Artemis, X. .4.5, 3 13 ; KOU/OV Trai/rcav, common to all,
For the dative with such adjectives, see 1174.
1144. 1. Such a genitive sometimes denotes mere connection ;
as o-vyycv^s avrov, a relative of his, X. C.4,1 22 ; StoKparovs
6/xww/xos, a namesake of Socrates, P. /So. 218 b .
The adjective is here really used as a substantive. Such adjec-
tives naturally take the dative (1175).
2. Here probably belongs crayr)? TOV 'A7roAA.<ovos, accursed
(one) of Apollo, Aesch. 3, 110; also evayets Kat dAmypioi -n/s Otov,
accursed of the Goddess, T. 1, 126, and e/c TWV dAtr^ptW TCOV r^5 ^eov,
Ar. J</.445; evayrj? etc. being really substantives.
1145. After some adjectives the genitive can be best explained
as depending on the substantive implied in them ; as rrj<s dpx>7-s
v-rrevOvvos, responsible for the office, i.e. liable to cvOvvaifor it, D. 18,
117 (see Se'SwKct ye evOvvas CKCLVMV, in the same section) ; TrapOivoi
ya/xwv wpatat, maidens ripe for marriage, i.e. having reached the age
(wpa) for marriage, Hd. 1,196 (see cs ya/xov topr/v aTrt/co/xeVryi/,
Hd. 6, 61) ; <f>6pov vrroreAets, subject to the payment (rcAos) o/"
fn'ftMte, T. 1, 19.
1146. N. Some adjectives of place, like cvavrfos, opposite, may
take the genitive instead of the regular dative (1174), but chiefly in
poetry; as evavrtot eorav 'A^ataii/, f^ey s^oorf opposite the Achaeans,
7/.17,343.
See also TOV IIovTov 7rtKap(7tat, a^ an angle with the Pontus,
Hd.7,36.
GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS.
1147. The genitive follows adverbs derived from ad-
jectives which take the genitive. E.g.
Oi e/xTret'poDs avrov IXOVTCS, those who are acquainted with Tiim,
avai<t)<s TTJS TToAcws, in a manner unworthy of the state. Toiv aAAcon
244 SYNTAX. [1148
a.7rdvT<i)v oia<epovTu>s, beyond all the other Athenians,
P. Cr. 52 b . 'E/xaxovro dittos Aoyov, they (the Athenians at Mara-
thon) fought in a manner worthy of note, lid. 6, 112. So evai/rtW (1146).
1148. The genitive follows many adverbs of place. E.g.
E? (TOO rov fpv/JUJLTos, within the fortress ; l^w rov ret'xovs, outside
of the wall; CKTOS TWI/ opwi/, without the boundaries ; x<opis TOV
crw/xaros, apart from the body ; iripav rov Trorafjiov, beyond the river,
T. 6, 101; TrpoarOev rov oTparoTreSou, in front of the camp, X. //.
4, 1 22 ; d/A<oTep<o$ev r^s oSoS, on 5o/A szV/es of the road, ibid.5,2 6 ',
vOv TTJS <l>aor^At8os, straight towards Phaselis, T. 8,88.
1149. N. Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly
eVros, within; 8t)( a apart from', eyyus, ayx^? TreAa?, and TrAryo-tov,
near ; Troppw (Tiyxwro)), far from; OTncrOev and KaroTrtv, behind; and
a few others of similar meaning. The genitive after most of them
can be explained as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separa-
tion; that after tvOv resembles that after verbs of aiming at (1099).
1150. N. A.dOpa(Iomc \dOpy) and Kpv<a, without the knowledge
of, sometimes take the genitive ; as XdOpy Aao/xe'Soi/ros, without the
knowledge of Laomedon, 7^.5,269; Kpv<f>a TWI/ 'A^r/vatW, T. 1,101.
1151. N. *Avi; and arep, without, aXP 1 an d /xe'xpt? ww^7, IveKa
(oweKa), on account of, /xera^v, between, and TrAijv, except, take the
genitive like prepositions. See 1220.
GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.
1152. A noun and a participle not grammatically con-
nected with the main construction of the sentence may
stand by themselves in the genitive. This is called the
genitive absolute. E.g.
Tairr' 7rpax$7 Koveoi/os o-TpaT^yovvros, this was done when
Conon was general, 1.9,56. OuSev ran/ Sedvrcov TTOIOVI/TCOV VJJLWV
KCXKOJS ra Trpay/xara X et ' ^ff a ^ r8 ^re in a bad state ivhile you do nothing
which you ought to do, D. 4, 2. ewv SiSovroov OVK av fK<f>vyoi
KOLKO., if the Gods should grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils,
A. Se. 719. *Oi/Tos ye j^evSovs CCTTIV aTrar^, wAen f^ere s false-
hood, there is deceit, P. So. 260 C .
See 1568 and 1563.
GENITIVE WITH COMPARATIVES.
1153. Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative de-
gree take the genitive (without ^ 3 than). E.g.
1159] DATIVE. 245
KpeiTTon/ cert TOVT col/, ^ e * s better than these. Neois TO cnyav
KpeiTTdV eon TOV A. a A. e 1 1/, for youth silence is better than pratiny.
Men. Mow. 387. (Iloi/r/pia) Oarrov Oavdrov 0et, wickedness runs
faster than death, P. Ap. 39 a .
1154. N. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison
mav take a genitive : as erepot TOVTMV, others than these; vo-Tepoi T^S
^ e y^ r (l ater than) the battle; rfj vorepata Trjs /xax^s? 0ft
day after the battle. So TpnrXd&iov fjfjiCiv, thrice as much as we.
1155. N. The genitive is less common than % when, if ^ were
used, it would be followed by any other case than the nominative
or the accusative without a preposition. Thus for escort 8' fj/uuv
(j.a\\ov erepo)j/, and we can (do this) better than others (T.I, 85),
/xaAAov rj erepots would be more common.
1156. N. After irXew (irXctv), more, or tXao-crov (/xetov), less, rj
is occasionally omitted before a numeral without affecting the case;
as TTC/U^Q) opvts CTT* avTov, TrXctv c^a/coo-tovs TOV dpifyioV, / Wttt
senc? 6i'rrfs against him, more than six hundred in number t Av.Av. 1251.
DATIVE.
1157. The primary use of the dative case is to denote that to or
for which anything is or is done : this includes the dative of the
remote or indirect object, and the dative of advantage or disadvan-
tage. It also denotes that by which or with which, and the time
(sometimes the place) in which, anything takes place, i.e. it is not
merely a dative, but also an instrumental and a locative case. (See
1042.) The object of motion after to is not regularly expressed by
the Greek dative, but by the accusative with a preposition. (See
1065.)
DATIVE EXPRESSING TO OR FOR.
DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT.
1158. The indirect object of the actioa of a transitive
verb is put in the dative. This object is generally in-
troduced in English by to. E.g.
fuaObv TO> crTpaTev/xart, he cfiveK pay to the army; VTTICT-
(rot SeKa TaAai/Ta, he promises ten talents to you (or he prom-
ises you ten talents); fiorjOeuiv Tre/xi/'o/xev TOIS crv fj.fjia.xois, we will
send aid to our allies; eAeyov TW /? a OH Act TO. yeyen^e'va, ttey tnld
the king what had happened.
1159. Certain intransitive verbs take the dative, mairj
246 SYNTAX. [1160
of which in English may have a direct object with
out to. E.g.
Tots 6 eots evxo/xat, I pray (to) the Gods, D. 18,1; AvorreAow TO
%XOVTI, advantageous to the one having it, P.Rp.392 c ; et/covo-' di/dyK/y
n/Se, yielding to this necessity, A. A g. 1071, rots i/o/xots 7rei0oi/Tcu,
are obedient to the laws (they obey the laws), X. .M. 4, 4 15 ; fiorjOelv
y, to a,<?.sZ justice, P.RpA27 e . Et rots TrAeoo-tv dpe-
, TotcrS' av /xovots ot>/c op$ais aTrapecrKOt/Aev, (/* we are
pleasing to the majority, it cannot be right that we should be displeasing
to these alone, T. 1,38. 'ETrto-Tevov avraJ at TroAets, ^e cities trusted
him, X. ^4.1,9 8 . Tots 'A^ryvatots Trap-rjvei, he used to advise the
Athenians, T. 1,93. Tov /xaAto-ra eTrm/x-aii/Ta rots 7re7rpay/x,e'i/ots
tySews av epOLfJirjv, I should like to ask the man who censures most
severely what has been done, D. 18, 64. Tt eyKaXwi/ rf^l v CTrtxetpets
ly/xas aTToAAwat; what fault do youjind with us that you try to destroy
us? P. Cr. 50 d . Tovrot? //,e/A<ei rt; Aaue ^ow anything to blame
these for '$ ibid. 'ETrr/pea^oucrtv dAA^Aocs /cat <f>0ovovo~w cauroti;
/AaAAov ? rots aAAots dv^pwTroi?, they revile one another, and are
more malicious to themselves than to other men, X. M. 3, 5 16 . 'E^aAe
urawov rots orrparr/yots, iAe?/ were angry with the generals, X..4.1.
4 12 ; e/xot opyi^oi/rat, fAe^ are am?r# toi/A me, P.^4j9. 23 C . So TrpeVet
/w,ot Acyetv, i< zs becoming (to) me to speak; Trpotnj/cei /AOI, t< belongs
to me; 8o/cet ju,ot, if seems to me; OKU> /xot, methinks.
1160. The verbs of this class which are not translated
with to in English are chiefly those signifying to benefit
serve, obey, defend, assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort,
or any of their opposites ; also those expressing friendli-
ness, hostility, blame, abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats.
1161. N. The impersonals Set, /Ae'reo-Ti, /AC Act, /^erafieAci,
and TTpoor^Ket take the dative of a person with the genitive of a
thing ; as Set JJLOI rovrov, / have need of this ; /xereort' /xot TOVTOV, 1
have a share in this ; /xeAet //.ot TOVTOV, 1 am interested in this; Trpo-
(n/jKU fjiOL TOVTOV, I am concerned in this. (For the genitive, see
1097, 2 ; 1105; 1115.) "Ee(m, it is possible, takes the dative alone.
1162. N. Act and xptf * a ke the accusative when an infinitive
follows. For Set (in poetry) with the accusative and the genitive,
see 1115.
1163. N. Some verbs of this class (1160) may take the accusa-
tive; as ovSets avrovs c/At/x^ero, no one blamed them, X. A. 2, 6 30 .
Others, whose meaning would place them here (as /uo-e'w, hate),
take only the accusative. AotSope'co, reviVe, has the accusative, but
1167] DATIVE. 247
Aoi8ope'o/#u (middle) has the dative. 'OvetSt^w, reproach, and ITTITL-
/AW, censure, have the accusative as well as the dative ; we have also
ovtSi'eiv (cTTtrt/xav) ri nvi, to cast any reproach (or censure) on any
one. Tt/xtupetv rti/i means regularly to avenge some one (to take ven-
geance for him) ; n/u.copeio'&xi (rarely Ti/Awpeii/) nva, to punish some
one (to avenge oneself on him) : see X. C. 4, 6 8 , Ti/Aa>p77<reiv aot TOTJ
TrcuSos TOV <f>ovea vTrto^xvov/xat, J promise to avenge you on the mur-
derer of your son (or for your son, 1126).
1164. 1. Verbs of ruling (as di/acrcrw), which take the genitive
in prose (1109), have the dative in poetry, especially in Homer; as
7ro\\.rj<TLV VI/CTOIOH K<U "Apye'i iravri dvaoxreiv, to rule over many
islands and all Argos, II. 2, 108; Sapov OVK apffii fleets, he will not
rule the Gods long, A.Pr. 940. KeA.va), to command, which in Attic
Greek has only the accusative (generally with the infinitive), has
the dative in Homer ; see //. 2, 50.
2. 'Hyeojouxt, in the sense of guide or direct, takes the dative
even in prose; as OVKCTI TJ/XIV iyy7y(reTatj he will no longer be our
guide, X.^l.3,2 20 .
DATIVE OP ADVANTAGE OR DISADVANTAGE.
1165. The person or thing for whose advantage or dis-
advantage anything is or is done is put in the dative
(dativus commodi et incommodi). This dative is gener-
ally introduced in English by for. E.g.
Has dvr/p avT<5 Trovet, every man labors for himself , S.Aj. 1366.
2oX(ov 'A Brjvaiois vo/txovs l&y/cc, Solon made laws for the Athenians.
Katpot Trpoctvrat rrj TroAet, lit. opportunities have been sacrificed for
the state (for its disadvantage), D. 19, 8. 'Hyetro avrwv eKaoros ov^t
T<p Trarpt /cat rfj fJLrjrpl povov yeyev^o-^at, dAAa Kat rfj TrarptSt,
each of them believed that he was born not merely for his father and
mother, but for his country also, D. 18,205.
1166. N". A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements
of time ; as TW 77877 8vo yeveat e<#iaTO, two generations had already
passed away for him (i.e. he had seen them pass away), 21. 1,250.
'H/xepat /AaAierra rjcrav rr} ^/LvTiXrivrf eaAwKUi'a Trra,for Mitylene
captured (i.e. since its capture) there had been about seven days, T. 3, 29.
Hv 77/xepa ir^irrf] emTrXeovcn rots 'A^vcuots, it was the fifth day
for the Athenians sailing out (i.e. it was the fifth day since they began
1167. N. Here belong such Homeric expressions as roto-t S*
, and he rose up for them (i.e. to address them), II. 1, 68 ; roan
.v6(w 5pxev, he began to speak before them (for them), Od. 1, 28.
248 SYNTAX. [1168
1168. N". In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an
accusative of the thing and a dative of the person ; as Aavaotcrt
Xoiyov aifJivvQV, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danai),
11. 1, 456. Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Aavaouri
means to defend the Danai. For other constructions of
), see the Lexicon.
1169. N". Ae'xo/xcu, receive, takes a dative in Homer by a
similar idiom ; as Se'^aro ot crK^Trrpov, he took his sceptre from him
(lit. for him), IL2,ISQ.
1170. N. Sometimes this dative has a force which seems to
approach that of the possessive genitive; as ..yXtocrcra 8e ot Se'oYrcu,
and his tongue is tied (lit. for him), Theog. 178'; ot tTTTrot avrots
SeSevToi, they have their horses tied (lit. the horses are tied for them),
X.^4.3,4 35 . The dative here is the dativus incommodi (1165).
1171. N. Here belongs the so-called ethical dative, in which the
personal pronouns have the force of for my sake etc., and some-
times ca*nnot easily be translated; as rt o~ot fjMOija-ofjiai ; ivhat am
I to learn for you ? Ar. JV. Ill ; TOVTCO TTCU/V /xot Trpoo-e'xere rov vow,
to this, I beg you, give your close attention, D. 18, 178.
For a dative with the dative of /fovAo/xevos etc., see 1584.
DATIVE OF RELATION.
1172. 1. The dative may denote a person to whose case
a statement is limited, often belonging to the whole sen-
tence rather than to any special word. E.g.
" KiravTo. TO) (fcofiov /xevw i/'o^et, everything sounds to one wlw
is afraid, S. frag. 58. 12<wv /xev IvroXr) Atos cx et TtXos, as regards
you two, the order of Zeus is fully executed, A.Pr. 12. 'Y7roAa/x/^a-
vetv Set raJ TotouTO), on tvrjOr) 1 ; TIS av^pwTro?, with regard to such a
one we must suppose that he is a simple person, F.Rp.59S d . TeQvrjX
vplv TraAttt, 1 have long been dead to you, S. PA. 1030.
2. So in such expressions as these : lv 8eia eo-TrXeovrt, on the
right as you sail in (with respect to one sailing in), T. 1,24; o-vve-
XOVTL, or ws (TvvtXovTi eiTretv, concisely, or to speak concisely (lit.
for one having made the matter concise). So tus c/W, in my opinion.
DATIVE OF POSSESSION.
1173. The dative with et/tu, yiyvopai,, and similar verbs
may denote the possessor. E.g.
Eio-tv e/utot Ket e'vot, / have (sunt mihi ) friends there, P. Cr.45 c ;
rts ^v^juaxos yevT/o-erat /x o t ; what ally shall 1 Jindf Ar.lity.222;
aXXoL<s fjitv xprj/MLTa. eo"rt TToAXa, Ty/xtv 8e ^vfjifjuac^oi a.yoi6oi., others
have plenty of money, but we have good allies, T. 1, 86.
1175] DATIVE. 249
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
1174. The dative follows many adjectives and ad-
verbs and some verbal nouns of kindred meaning with
the verbs of 1160 and 1165. E.g.
Avcr/xei/^s <i'Aois, hostile to friends, E. Me. 1151; VTTOXO? TOIS
1/o/u.ots, subject to the laws; ITTLKLVO'VVOV rrj TrdAei, dangerous to the
state; /2Aa/?epov TO> (rw/zart, hurtful to the body; evi/ovs eavraJ,
kind to himself; evavrt'os avr<S, opposed to him (cf. 1146) ; roarS'
aTracrt KOIVOV, common to all these, A.Ag. 523. 2v/x</>epdvro)s
avTo>, profitably to himself; e/x7roSa>v e/W, tn my way.
( TFiYA Nouns.) To. Trap' ^//.an/ Swpa rot? $eots, /Ae <7i/2s (given) by
us to the Gods, ~P.Euthyph.15*. So with an objective genitive arid
a dative ; as ITTL /co/raSovAwo-ei ran/ 'EAA^vwv 'A&yvcuots, /or ^e
subjugation of the Greeks to Athenians, T.3, 10.
DATIVE OF RESEMBLANCE AND UNION.
1175. The dative is used with all words implying
likeness or unlikeness, agreement or disagreement, union
or approach. This includes verbs, adjectives, adverbs,
and nouns. E.g.
2*iats eoiKore?, like shadows; TO 6/xotow ecurrov aAAa>, to wiae
himself like to another, P. jRp. 393 C ; TOVTOIS 6/xoiorarov, most like
these, P. 6r. 51 3 b ; cuTrAwr/xevot rots avrot? Kvpa> oTrAot?, armed with
the same arms as Cyrus, X. C. 7, 1 2 ; ^ 6/xotov oi/ros rovrot? ^
dvo/xotbv, &eV?,^ either like or unlike these, P. PA. 74 C ; 6//.oia>s StKacov
dSt'/ccp /^Aai/'etv, <Aa^ Ae wz7/ punish a just and an unjust man alike,
P. 7?p. 364 C ; icvat dAA^Aot? dvo/Wa>5, to moye unlike one another,
P. TV. 36 d ; TOI/ 6/xwvv/x.ov e/x,avra>, my namesake, D. 3.21. Oirre
eavrots o^re dAAT/Aots o/xoAoyoGo-tv, ^Aey a^ree neither with them-
selves nor with one another, P. Phdr. 237 C ; d/>t^)iCT fiyrovcri ol </>t'Aot
rot? ^>iAot5, piov(TL 8e ot i\9pol dAA^Aot?, friends dispute with
friends, but enemies quarrel with one another, P. Pr. 337 b ; rots
Trovr/potg 8ia.<epo-#ai, to &e a^ variance with the bad, "K.M. 2, 9 8 ;
^v avraJ o/aoyvw/Awj/, Ae was o/* ^Ae same mina 7 wzV/i Azm, T. 8, 92.
Ktt/cots 6/u.tAwi/, associating with bad men, Men. Afon. 274 ; rots
^/oovi/xwrarot? TrX-qfTLOL^, draw near to the wisest, H.2,\^; \l/6<j>oi<s
7rAr7<ndeti/ (rov TTTTTOV), to &r/n^ 7m near to noises, X. .Z?a. 2, 5;
a A Acts Kotvtovetv, to sAare ?ozVA others, P. .Rp.369 e ; TO eavroi; e/oyov
ttTracrt KOIVOV /caTaTi^eVat, to ma^e 7'.s o?#n i<;or^: common to all, ibid.;
Seo/xevoi TGI;? <j>tvyovTas vvaXXdai cr<f>t<n, asking to bring the exiles
250 SYNTAX. [1176
to terms with them, T. 1.24; j8ovAo/W 0-e avru StaAeyeo-0at, / warn
you to converse with him, P. Lys. 211 C .
(With Nouns.) *ATOTTOS 77 6/xotor^s TOVTCOV CKCI'VOIS, /*e likeness
of these to those is strange, P. Th. 158 C ; cx /cou/omav
they have something in common with each other, P. S0.257 a ;
Trotov/xevoi TO> Tet'xet, ma king attacks upon the wall, CTnSpo/x^v ra>
Tetxto-/x,aTt, an assault on the wall, T.4,23; Atos /^povraicriv as
cptv, m rivalry with the thunderings of Zeus, E. Cyc.328; eVavaaracns
/xe'povs TIVOS TO> oAw T7s V V X^, a rebellion of one part of the soul
against the whole, P./2p.444 b .
1176. The dative thus depends on adverbs of place and time ;
as afJM rfj fjfj.epa, of daybreak, X. .4.2, 1 2 ; u8<op 6/xov ro> Tr-^Ao)
rj[jijaT<j)(A,vov, water stained with blood together with the mud, T. 7, 84 ;
T<X TOVTOIS e<e^?, ^af comes next to this, P. Ti. 30 C ; rotaS' eyyvs,
near these, TZ.Her.37 (cyyvs generally has the genitive, 1149).
1177. To this class belong fiaxo/Acu, TroAe/Aew, and others
signifying to contend or quarrel with; as ndxe<rOai rots ry^atois,
to Jight with the Thebans; TroAe/xovcrtv ^/xtv, ^Ae?/ are a w;ar u;tVA ws.
So es x 6 '/ 3 * 1 ? cA^eiv rii/t, or es Aoyov^ cA^etv rtvt, ^o come to a conflict
(or to words) with any one ; also Sia <iAias icvat TIVI, <o 6e friendly
(to go through friendship) with one : see T. 7, 44 : 8, 48 ; X. A . 3, 2 8 .
1178. N. After adjectives of likeness an abridged form of
expression may be used; as Ko/xat Xaptrecrcrtv 6/xotat, ^atr Zt'&e
(f^a^ of) the Graces, 77.17,51; ras io-as Tr\rjya<s c/xot, <Ae same
number of blows with me, Ar. R. 636.
DATIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS.
1179. The dative follows many verbs compounded
with ei/, <ruz/, or eTrt; and some compounded with TT/>O?,
Trapd, Trept, and UTTO. -S'-^.
Tots op /cots e/A/xevet 6 8^/xos, ^e people abide by the oaths, X.-fiT.
2,4 43 ; at ... ^Sovat ^v\y fTno-Tifjfj.rjv ouSe/u'av e/XTrotovcrti/, (such)
pleasures produce no knowledge in the soul, X. M. 2, 1 20 ; ej/e/cetj/ro raJ
IleptKAct, ^Aey pressed hard on Pericles, T. 2, 59; /zauTa> o-vvrj$r)
ov8cv eTTto-Ta/xevo), / was conscious to myself that I knew nothing (lit.
i0#A myself), P. ^4jt>. 22 d ; 77877 TTOTC o-ot 7r7}A^ev; did it ever occur to
you? X.3/.4, 3*; 7rpoo-e/3aAAov rw retxtV/uart, ^ey attacked the
fortification, T.4, 11 ; aSeA<os dvSpt TrapetVy, /e^ a brother stand by a
man (i.e. /e< a man's brother stand by him), P. 72p. 362 d ; rots Kaxots
7rept7rt7rTovo-tv. <^ey are involved in evils, X. Af. 4, 2 s7 ; viroKCtrat TO
r<p tepw, <Ae jo^am Zi'es Je/ow <^e temple, Aesch. 3, 118.
1184] DATIVE. 251
1180. N". This dative sometimes depends strictly on the prepo-
sition, and sometimes on the idea of the compound as a whole.
CAUSAL AND INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE.
1181. The dative is used to denote cause, manner, and.
means or instrument. E.g.
CAUSE: Nocrw 6jro6avuv, having died of disease, T. 8, 84; ov
yap KOLKOVOLO. TOVTO Trotet, dAA' ayvoia,for he does not do this from
ill-will, but from ignorance, X. (7.3, 1 88 ; /2taop;ei/oi TOV TrietV e7rt0v/x,t'a,
forced by a desire to drink, T. 7, 84 ; ato-xvVo/W rot rats irporepov
a/xapTtats, I am ashamed of {because of) my f owner faults, Ar. AT.
1355. MANNER : Apo/za) tei/ro es TOVS j3ap/3dpovs, they rushed against
the barbarians on the run, Hd. 6, 112 ; Kpavyrj TroXXrj eTrtWtv, they will
advance with a loud shout, X. A. 1,7 4 . Trj a\r)0eia, in truth ; TO> ovn,
in reality ; (3 [a, forcibly ; ravrr}, in this manner, thus; Aoya>, in word;
epya), in deed; rfj i^.rj yvta^y, in my judgment; i6Ya, privately,
&Y][jLocria, publicly; KOIVY), in common. MEANS or INSTRUMENT:
'Opw/zev rot? 6<f>6a\(jLo2<s, we see with our eyes; yvcoo-fle'vTe? rrj
(TKvr) TWV oTrAwi/, recognized by the fashion of their arms, T. 1,8;
Ka/cots iao~Oa.L KaKoi, to cure evils by evils, S. frag. 75; ovSet? cTratvov
rf 80 vats eKT^craro, no one gains praise by pleasures, Stob.29,31.
1182. N. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of man-
ner; as rots (Tw/xacrtv dSwaroi, . . . rats ^v^a?s avorjroi, incapable
in their bodies, . . . senseless in their minds, X. M. 2, 1 31 ; v&repov ov
TTQ ra^et, Trporepov rrj Svva/x-et Kat Kpetrroi/ ecrrtv, although it is
later in order, it is prior and superior in power, D.3, 15. So TroAts,
GU/KXKOS ovo/xari, a city, Thapsacus by name, X.^4.1,4 11 .
This dative often is equivalent to the accusative of specification
(1058).
1183. Xpao/xat, to use {to serve one's self by), takes the dative
of means ; as.^pwi/rat dpyvpta), they use money. A neuter pronoun
{e.g. TL, TL, o rt, or TOVTO) may be added as a cognate accusative
(1051) ; as TL xprjo-tTai TTOT avTw ,* what will he do with him f (lit.
what use will he make of him f), Ar.Jc^.935. No/>u<o has sometimes
the same meaning and construction as ^pao/xat.
1184. The dative of manner is used with comparatives
to denote the degree of difference. E.g.
HoAXo) /cpetTTov fo-TLv, it is much better (better by much) ; eav TYJ
K(f>aXy /zet^ova nva. <f>rjs clvat Kat eXaTTw, if you say that anyone is
a head taller or shorter (lit. by the head), P.PA.IOK IIoAt Aoyt/xw
y 'EAAas yeyove ao-^cveoTepry, Greece has become weaker by one
252 SYNTAX. [1185
illustrious city, Hd. 6, 106. TooWro) i^Sioi/ eo, / live so much the more
happily, X. C.8,3 40 ; rexv-rj 8' dvay/oys do-flei/eorepa /xaKpa>, anrf art
ts weaker than necessity by far, A.Pr.514.
1185. So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other
expressions which imply comparison ; as opOorara px/cpa), most
correctly by far, P.Lg.7QS c ; o-^cSov Sc'/ca Irecri irpo r^s ev SaXa/xivt
vav/>ta^ta?, a&0u tew years before the sea-Jight at Salamis, ibid. 698.
DATIVE OF AGENT.
1186. The dative sometimes denotes the agent with the
perfect and pluperfect passive, rarely with other passive
tenses. E.g.
'E^erao-ai TL TreTrpaKrai rots a A A. 019, to ask i>:hat has been done by
the others, D. 2, 27 ; CTreiSr) avrois Trapecr/ceworo, w/ien preparation had
been made by them (when they had their preparation made), T.I, 46;
TroAAat OepaTreuLi rots tar/oots evprivrat, many cures have been dis-
covered by physicians, 1. 8, 39.
1187. N". Here there seems to be a reference to the agent's
interest in the result of the completed action expressed by the
perfect and pluperfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly
expressed by VTTO etc. and the genitive (1234) ; only rarely by the
dative, except in poetry.
1188. With the verbal adjective in -re'os, in its personal
construction (1595), the agent is expressed by the dative;
in its impersonal construction (1597), by the dative or the
accusative.
DATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT.
1189. The dative is used to denote that by which any
person or thing is accompanied. E.g.
'EA^ovTwv Ilepo-w Tra/ATrA^ei (rroAa), when the Persians came
with an army in full force, X.,4.3,2 11 ; i//xets /cat LTTTTOIS rots Swarw-
Tarois Kat avS/oaq-i Tropevw/xe&x, let us march both with the strongest
horses and with men, X. C. 5, 3 85 ; ot Aa/ceSat/xonot rw re Kara yrfv
(TTparw 7rpocr^3aAAov T<5 Txtcr/AaTt Kat rat? vavo-t'v, the Lacedae-
monians attacked the wall both with their land army and with their
ships, T. 4, 11.
1190. This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces,
and is originally connected with the dative of means. The last
example might be placed equally well under 1181.
1196] DATIVE. 253
1191. This dative sometimes takes the dative of avros for
emphasis; as fiiav (raw) avrots avopda-Lv eTAov, they took one
(ship) men and all, T.2, 90. Here no instrumental force is seen,
and the dative may refer to any class of persons or things ; as
Xafjuai (3dXe SevSpea //.a/cpa -avrfjcrLv pi 770-1 Kat avrois avOevi
/u-r/Acov, he threw to the ground tall trees, with their very roots and their
fruit-blossoms, II. 9, 541.
DATIVE OF TIME.
1192. The dative without a preposition often denotes
time when. This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting
day, night, month, or year, and to names si festivals. E.g.
T?J avrrj "^^po- o-TTf.Oa.vfv, he died on the same day ; ('Ep/xai) /w.ia
VVKTL ol TrAetoTot TrepieKOTrrjo-av, the most of the Hermae were muti-
lated in one night, T. 6, 27; ot ^a/atot e^eTroAio/o/o^^ouv evarw
(JirjVL, the Samians were taken by siege in the ninth month, T. 1,117;
ScKaro) Iret vv(3r)<rav, they came to terms in the tenth year, T.I,
103; wcTTrepei ecrp:o<opiois vr/crrevo/Aev, we fast as if it were
(on) the Thesmophoria, Ar. Av. 1519. So rJ vorepaia (sc. ly/xcpa), on
the following day, and Sevrepa, Tpiry, on the second, third, etc., in
giving the day of the month.
1193. N. Even the words mentioned, except names of fes-
tivals, generally take cv when no adjective word is joined with
them. Thus *v WKTL, at night (rarely, in poetry, WKTI), but fua
WKTI, in one night.
1194. N. A few expressions occur like vcrrepo) xpovw, in after
time ; XCI/AWVOS o>pa, in the winter season ; vov/x^vta (new-moon day),
on the first of the month; and others in poetry.
1195. N. With other datives expressing time ev is regularly
used ; as ev TO> avrw x^vt, in the same winter, T. 2, 34. But it is
occasionally omitted.
DATIVE OF PLACE.
1196. In poetry, the dative without a preposition
often denotes the place where. E.g.
*EA.A.a8i otKta raiW, inhabiting dwellings in Hellas, /Z. 16, 595;
atfle'pi ratW, dwelling in heaven, II. 4, 166; ovpeo-i, on the moun-
tains, 7Z.13,390; TO* a>/u,oi(riv e\<w, having his bow on his shoulders,
77.1,45; /At/Avei dypw, he remains in the country, Od. 11,188. *H<r0cu
SO/AOIS, to sit at home, A. ^1^.862. Nvv dypoto-i Tvyx* va ( sc< wv )>
now he happens to be in the country, S. EL 313.
254 SYNTAX. [1197
1197. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the
names of Attic denies; as y Mapa0t3i/t /zax?7> the battle at Mara-
thon (but v 'A^iyvats) : see /xa TOUS Mapa#wvi Trpo/avSuvev-
roSv Trpoyovw Kal TOV<S ei/ IIAaratats TrapaTa^a/aevous /cat
ev 2aXa/xtvt vav/^x^o'avTas, no, oy fAo.se of our ancestors who
stood in the front of danger at Marathon, and those who arrayed them-
selves atPlataea, and those who fought the sea-fight at Salamis, D. 18,208.
Still some exceptions occur.
1198. N. Some adverbs of place are really local datives; as
Tavrr), r^Se, here; OLKOL, at home. So Ku/<A.a>, in a circle, all around.
(See 436.)
PEEPOSITIONS.
1199. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and as
such they appear in composition with verbs (see 882, 1).
They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns
with other parts of the sentence.
1200. Besides the prepositions properly so called, there are
certain adverbs used in the same way, which cannot be com-
pounded with verbs. These are called improper prepositions. For
these see 1220.
1201. 1. Four prepositions take the genitive only: dirt', airo,
c (e/c), Trpo, with the improper prepositions avev, arep, axpt>
/Aexpi, /xerav, IvcKa, TrAiyv.
2. Two take the dative only : ev and arvv.
3. Two take the accusative only : dva and eis or es, with the
improper preposition (us. For ova in poetry with the dative, see
1203.
4. Four take the genitive and accusative: Sia, Kara, /xera, and
vTrep. For /ACTa with the dative in Homer, see 1212, 2.
5. Six take the genitive, dative, and accusative : d/x<i' (rare with
genitive), 7rt, Trapd, Trept, Trpos, and VTTO.
USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 1
1202. dn<f> (Lat. amb-, compare an<j>, both"), originally on both
sides of; hence about. Chiefly poetic and Ionic. In Attic
prose irepl is generally used in most senses of d/i0/.
1. with the GENITIVE (very rare in prose), about, concerning:
d/x0l yvvaiKos, about a woman, A.Ag.62.
1 Only a general statement of the various uses of the prepositions
is given here. For the details the Lexicon must be consulted.
1206] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 255
2. with the DATIVE (only^poetic and Ionic), about, concerning,
on account of: d^fi WJUOKTI, about his shoulders, II. 11, 527;
d/x0i T$ vow Toijry, concerning this law, Hd. 1,140; dfj.<j>l
<j>op<{), through fear, E. Or. 825.
3. with the ACCUSATIVE, about, near, of place, time, number,
etc.: d/jL<f> &\a, by the sea, II. 1,409; d/j.<j>i 5ei\r}v, near even-
ing, X.0. 5, 4 16 ; d/j.<t>l liXetdduv dvfftv, about (the time of)
the Pleiads 1 setting, A.Ag.826. So d/x0i detirvov eixep, fa
was at supper, X. C. 5, 5 44 . 01 d^L TWO. (as ol dfjt,<pi nxdrwi/a)
means a man with his followers.
In COMP. : about, on both sides.
1203. dvd (cf. adv. avw, above), originally up (opposed to Kara).
1. with the DATIVE (only epic and lyric), up on: dvd ffK-ffirrp^
on a staff, II. 1, 15.
2. with the ACCUSATIVE, up along ; and of motion over, through,
among (cf. /card):
(a) of PLACE: dvd rbv Trora^v, up the river, Hd.2,96; dvd
<TTparov, through the army, Il.l, 10; olKciv dvd rd 6pi], to
dwell on the tops of the hills, X. A. 3, 5 16 .
(6) of TIME : dvd rbv TroXe/iov, through the war, Hd.8, 123 ; dvd
xpovov, in course of time, Hd. 5, 27.
(c) In DISTRIBUTIVE expressions : dvd eKarov, by hundreds,
X.A. 5, 4 12 ; dvd ira<rav ij^prjv, every day, Hd.2, 37 (so X. C.
*' 2 ) In COMP.: up, back, again.
1204. avrf, with GENITIVE only, instead of, for: dvrl iroK^ov elp^-
vyv e\c6^a, in place of war let us choose peace, T. 4, 20 ;
dv(f <Sv, wherefore, A. Pr. 31 ; dvr d5eX0oO, for a brother's
sake, S. El. 537. Original meaning, over against, against.
In COMP. : against, in opposition, in return, instead.
1205. d-ir6 (Lat. ab), with GENITIVE only, from, off from, away
from ; originally (as opposed to ^/c) denoting separation or
departure from something :
(a) of PLACE : d<j> tTrirwv aXro, he leaped from the car (horses),
II. 16, 733 ; dirb 0a\d(r<rv, at a distance from the sea, T. 1, 7.
(6) of TIME : dirb rotrov rov xpoVou, from this time, X. A. 7, 5 8 .
(c) of CAUSE or ORIGIN: d-n-b TOVTOV rov roX/A^/uaros
for this bold act he was praised, T.2, 25 ; rb tfv d-n-b
to live by war, Hd. 5, 6 ; dir ov rj^eis yeyovapev, from whom
we are sprung, Hd.1, 150; sometimes the agent (as source):
tirpdxQT) dTr' O.&TWV ovdtv, nothing was done by them, T. 1,17.
In COMP. : from, away, off, in return.
1206. 8id, through (Lat. di-, dis-).
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE: Sid d<nri5os IjXde, it went through the shield^
/i.7,251.
256 SYNTAX. [1207
(6) of TIME : 5tA VVKTO s, through the night, X. A 4, 6 22 .
(c) of INTERVALS of time or place : 5to Ti-oXXoD %po you, a/ter a
Jon# rtme, Ar. PZ. 1045 ; 5id T/S^TT;? ^/JT/S, evert/ oMer da?/,
Hd.2,37.
(d) of MEANS : e\eye 5i* epnyvews, #,e spoke through an inter-
preter, X.A.2,3^.
(e) in various phrases like di O(KTOV ex^v, to pity ; 5i& <pi\las
levat, to be in friendship (with one). See 1177.
2. with the ACCUSATIVE :
(a) of AGENCY, on account of, by help of, by reason of: 8id
TOVTO, on this account; 8i 'Ad-^vrjv, by help of Athena, Od.
8, 520 ; oi> 81 fat, not owing to me, D. 18, 18.
(6) of PLACE or TIME, through, during (poetic) : 5ta Su^ara,
through the halls, II. 1, 600 ; Sia VVKTOL, through the night.
Od. 19, 66.
In COMP. : through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-).
1207. els or 4s, with ACCUSATIVE only, into, to, originally (as op-
posed to Ac) to within (Lat. in with the accusative) : els
always in Attic prose, except in Thucydides, who has es.
Both ete and ts are for tvs ; see also tv.
(a) of PLACE : ditp-rjffav ts SiKeXfaj', they crossed over into
Sicily, T. 6, 2 ; ds Il^/xras ^Tropevero, he departed for Persia
(the Persians}, X.O.8, 5 20 ; rb t? HaXX^^i' re< X os, the wall
towards (looking to} Pallene, T. 1, 56.
(6) of TIME: ts 170), until dawn, Od.11,375; so of a time
looked forward to : irpoeiTre rots eavrov els TpLrtjv i)/j,pav
irapeivai, he gave notice to his men to be present the next day
but one, X. C. 3, 1 42 . So eros els eros, from year to year,
S. An. 340. So cs 8, until; els rbv Airavra xP^vov, for all
time.
(c) of NUMBER and MEASURE: els 8ia.Ko<rLovs, (amounting} to
two hundred; els dvvafjiiv, up to one's power.
(d) of PURPOSE or REFERENCE : Traideveiv els TTJV apery v, to
train for virtue, P. 6r.519 e ; et's irdvTa. irpurov elvai, to be first
for everything, P. Ch. 158 a ; xpfawo* ef* TI, useful for anything.
In COMP. : into, in, to.
1208. 4v, with DATIVE only, in (Horn. evL}, equivalent to Lat. in
with the ablative :
(a) of PLACE : ev ^Trdprrj, in Sparta ; with words implying
a number of people, among : ev ywai^l dX/a/tos, brave among
women, E. Or. 754 ; ev Trao-t, in the presence of all ; ev Siica-
a-Tais, before (coram) a court.
(6) of TIME : ev TOUT y ry ^ret, in this year ; ev xei/iom, in
winter ; ev <re<n irevr^Kovra, within fifty years, T. 1, 118.
(c) of other relations : rbv HepiK\ea ev 6pyrj eixov, they were
angry with P. (held him in anger), T.2,21 ; ev r<? dey rb
TOVTOV rAos ^v, OVK ev e^ol, the issue of this was with (in the
1210] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 257
power of) God, not with me, D. 18, 193 ; tv Tro\\y
fjvav, they were in great perplexity, X.^4.3, 1 2 .
As tv (like els and &) comes from evs (see els), it originally allowed
the accusative (like Latin in), and in Aeolic tv may be used like els ;
as tv Ka\M<TTav, to Calliste, Pind. Py. 4, 258.
In COMP. : in, on, at.
1209, e| or IK, with GENITIVE only (Lat. ex, e), from, out of;
originally (as opposed to diro) from within (compare els) .
(a) of PLACE : eK STrdpnjs <f>evyei, he is banished from Sparta.
(b) of TIME : eK ira.\aLordrov,from the most ancient time,T. 1,18.
(c) of ORIGIN : 8vap tit Ato's forty, the dream comes from Zeus,
II. 1, 63. So also with passive verbs (instead of VTTO with gen.) :
IK 4W/3ou 8a.fji.els, destroyed by Phoebus, S. Ph. 335 (the agent
viewed as the source), seldom in Attic prose. (See 1205.)
(d) of GROUND for a judgment : epov\evovro IK TWV irapovTwv,
they took counsel with a view to (starting from) the present
state of things, T.3, 29.
In COMP. : out, from, away, off.
1210. eir, on, upon.
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : eirl irvpyov eery, he stood on a tower, H. 16, 700 ;
sometimes towards: irXe^a-avres ewl "Ld^ov, having sailed
towards Samos, T. 1,116; SO eirl rrjs rotatTrjs yevfoecu yv&-
A"?s, to adopt (go over to} such an opinion, D. 4, 6.
(6) of TIME : ^0' i]ij.Q>v, in our time / tir etp^vrjs, in time of
peace, II 2, 797.
(c) of RELATION or REFERENCE to an object : TOI>S tirl T&V
irpayndrav, those in charge of (public) affairs, D. 18, 247; tirl
At/Si;??? exetv rb 8voya, to be named for Libya, Hd.4, 45 ; eirt
TWOS \4yuv, speaking with reference to some one, see P. Oh.
155 d ; so tirl <rxo\^s, at leisure; tir faas (sc.]ji,olpa,s),in equal
measure, S.El.IQGl.
2. with the DATIVE :
(a) of PLACE : yvT twl irtipyy, they sat on a tower, II. 3', 153 ;
TTO'XIS tirl ry eaXdrrj} OIKOV^VT], a city situated upon (by) the
sea, X.^.1,4 1 .
(6) of TIME (of immediate succession) : tirl roorots, thereupon,
X. (7. 5, 5 21 .
(c) of CAUSE, PURPOSE, CONDITIONS, etc. : ^Tri TTatSejJcrei fjitya
<ppovovvTs, proud of their education, P. Pr. 342 d ; eTr' e^a-
7^7^ for exportation, Hd. 7, 156 ; twl roia-Se, on these con-
ditions, Ar. Av. 1602 ; tirl ry fay xal bpolq., on fair and equal
terms, T. 1, 27. So 1$ $ and <?0' $ re (1460).
(d) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, in the power of; and
in many other relations : see the Lexicon.
8. with the ACCUSATIVE:
(ft) of PLACE : to, up to, towards, against : di/a^is M rb*
268 SYNTAX. [1211
v, mounting his horse, X. A. 1, 8 3 ; M Se, to the right,
on the right hand, X. A. 6, 4 1 ; tirl /3a<riX<?a ttvai, to march
against the King, X..A. 1, 3 1 .
(6) of TIME or SPACE, denoting extension : tirl f, KO. err}, for
ten years, T. 3, 68 ; tir twta. KCITO irtXedpa, he covered (lay
over) nine plethra, Od. 11,577 ; so ftri -rrbXv, widely; rb M
iro\v,for the most part ; K TOV tirl TT\I<TTOV, from the remot-
est period, T. 1,2.
(c) of an OBJECT aimed at : KarrjXBov irl ironriT'fjv, I came down
here for a poet, Ar. It. 1418.
In COMP. : upon, over, after, toward, to, for, at, against, besides.
1211. Kard (cf. adverb Karw, below), originally down (opposed to
<xv<x).
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) down from: a'XXoV"ot KaT ^ T ^ s ^^ T p as leaping down from
the rock, X.AA,2".
(6) down upon : ptpov /card rijs Ke0a\^s /carax&ij'Tes, pouring
. perfumes on his head, P. Up. 398 a .
(c) beneath: KO.T& x^ v ^ fKpv^e, he buried beneath the earth,
S.^lw.24; ot /card xOovbs deal, the Gods below, A.Pe.689.
(d) against : \tyuv Ka.0' rjfj.u>v, saying against me (ws), S. Ph. 65.
2. with the ACCUSATIVE, down along ; of motion over, through,
among, into, against ; also according to, concerning.
(a) of PLACE: KCIT& povv, down Stream; /card yrjv /cal Kara
8a\aTTav, by land and by sea, X.A.3, 2 13 ; :ar<i StvcoTnjj/
irdXtv, opposite the city Sinope, Hd. 1, 76.
(6) of TIME : /card rbv iroXepov, during (at the time o/) the
war, Hd.7,137.
(c) DISTRIBUTIVELY : rarA Tp*is, by threes, three by three; Ka6'
i)/j.{pav, day by day, daily.
($) according to, concerning: /card TOI>S VQ/J.OVS, according to law,
D. 8, 2 ; r6 /car' ^, as regards myself, I). 18, 247 ; so /card
irdvra, in all respects ; rd /card TTO\/JI.OV, military matters.
In COMP. : down, against.
1212. fiTa, with, amid, among. See <rvv.
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) with, in company with : /xer* &\\<av \{%o tralpwv, lie down
with the rest of thy companions, Od. 10, 320 ; /xerd
among the living, S. Ph. 1312.
(6) in union with, with the cooperation of: /*erd
%vvTro\4iwvv, they fought in alliance with the Mantineans,
T.6, 105 ; oidc /xer' aurou fjffav, these were on his side, T. 3, 56 ;
'TTT^p/SoXov airoKTelvovvi /xerd Xapplvov, they 'put Hyperbolus
to death by the aid of Charminus, T. 8, 73.
2. with the DATIVE (poetic, chiefly epic), among : /xerd 8t rpird-
Touriv dvaa-ffev, and he was reigning in the third generation,
H. 1,252.
1214] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 259
3. with the ACCUSATIVE :
(a) into (the midst of), after (in quest of), for (poetic) :
fj.Ta (rrparbv 17X0,0-' 'Axeuwv, he drove into the army of the
Achaeans, II. 5, 589 ; ir\wv /ACT a xaX/coV, sailing after (in
quest of) copper, Od. 1, 184.
(6) generally after, next to: /(AerA, rbv irdXcjwv, after the war;
u^YtcTTos juerd, "IffTpof. the largest (river) next to the Ister,
Hd.4,53.
In COMP. : with (of sharing), among, after (in quest of) : it also de-
notes change, as hi per ante*, change one's mind, repent.
1213. irapd (Horn, also irapal), by, near, alongside of (see 1221, 2).
1. with the GENITIVE, from beside, from : irapd vyuv dTrovoar^-
ffeiv, to return from the ships, II. 12. 114; Va/j' iinuv dird'y-
7e\Xe rdde, take this message from us, X. A. 2, 1 20 .
2. with the DATIVE, with, beside, near: 7ra/>d. ILpidfwio dtp-go-iv,
at Priam's gates, II. 7, 346 ; irapa, <rol /car AUOP, they lodged
with you (were your guests), D.18,82.
3. with the ACCUSATIVE, to (a place) near, to; also by the side
of, beyond or beside, except, along with, because of.
(a) of PLACE : r/^as ir&p iroTa.iJ.6v, turning to the (bank of
the) river, II. 21,603; fodvres irapa, TOJ>S 0Xovs, going in to
(visit) their friends, T.2,51.
(b) of TIME : irapa irdvra rbv xP^ vov i throughout the whole
time, D.18,10.
(c) of CAUSE : irapd TTJV yfjieTtpav d/xAeia^, on account of our
neglect, D.4,11.
(d) of COMPARISON : irapa r&\\a $a, compared with (by the
side of) other animals, X.M. 1,4 14 .
(e) with idea of beyond or beside, and except : of>K etrrt irapd
TO.VT &\\a, there are no others besides these, Ar. JV. 698 ;
Trapa rbv v6[j,ov, contrary to the law (properly beyond it).
In COMP. : beside, along by, hitherward, wrongly (beside the mark), over
(as in overstep).
1214. irepC, around (on all sides), about (compare d^<j>C).
1. with the GENITIVE, about, concerning (Lat. de) : irepl irarpbs
tpt<r0at, to inquire about his father, Od.3, 77; 8e5i<i>s wepl
atfroO, fearing concerning him, P. Pr. 320 a . Poetic (chiefly
epic) above, surpassing : Kparepos irepl irdvTuv, mighty above
all, II. 21, 566.
2. with the DATIVE, about, around, concerning, of PLACE or
CAUSE (chiefly poetic) : evdvve irepl 0"r^0e<r<rt XITUVO., he put
on his tunic about his breast, 72.10,21 ; eddeurev irepl
, he feared for Menelaus, II. 10, 240 ; dflo-avres irepl
fea
, through fear for our land, T. 1,74.
3. with the ACCUSATIVE (nearly the same as dfj.<f)l ) , about, near :
fordfjievai -rrepl roixov, to stand around the wall, II. 18, 374 ;
7re/>i 'EXXiJo-TTOj/roj', about (near) the Hellespont, D.8,3 ; trctf
260 SYNTAX. [1215
xpt> v vs, about these times, T.3, 89; uv irepl
raOra, being about (engaged in) this, T.7, 31.
In COMP. : around, about, exceedingly.
1215. irpd (Lat. pro), with the GENITIVE only, before:
(a) of PLACE : Trpb 6vp(av, before the door, S..E7.109.
(&) of TIME : irpb detTrvov, before supper, X. (7.5, 5 39 .
(c) of DEFENCE : /j.dx<r6cu Trpb Traldwv, to fight for their chil-
dren, II. 8, 57 ; diaKivdvveveiv irpb /3a<riX&>s, to run risk in
behalf of the king, X.C.8,8*.
(d) Of CHOICE or PREFERENCE : ictpdos alvTjffai -rrpb dlitas, to
approve craft before justice, Find. Py. 4, 140 ; Trpb rotirov
&v 2Xoiro, before this he would prefer death,
In COMP. : before, in defence of, forward.
1216. irpds (Horn, also irporl or irorl), at or by (in front of).
1. with the GENITIVE :
() in front of, looking towards : /cerrcu irpbs Qp^s, it lies
over against Thrace, D. 23, 182. In swearing: -n-pbs Sew,
before (by) the Gods. Sometimes pertaining to (as char-
acter) : % Kdpra irpbs yvvaucfa, surely it is very like a woman,
A.Ag.592.
(6) from (on the part o/) : TL^TJV rrpbs Zyvbs exoires, having
honor from Zeus, 0^.11,302. Sometimes with passive verbs
(like i7r6), especially Ionic : dn/jid^effdai Trpbs Heia-ia-rpdrov,
to be dishonored by Pisistratus, Hd. 1,61; ddo^ovvrai irpbs
ruv Tr6\<i)j>, they are held in contempt by states, X.Oec.4, 2.
2. with the DATIVE :
(a) at: eirel 7rp6s BajSuXtDw T)V b Kvpos, when Cyrus was at
Babylon, X.O.7,5 1 .
(6) in addition to: irpbs TOIJTOLS, besides this; rrpbs rots AXXois,
besides all the rest, T. 2, 61.
3. with the ACCUSATIVE :
(a) to : el/* CLVTT) ?r/)6s "0\v/jLwov, I am going myself to Olym-
pus, II. 1, 420.
(6) towards : Trpbs ~Boppav, towards the North, T. 6, 2 ; (of
persons) irpbs dXX^Xous ^v^lav el^ov, they kept the peace
towards one another, 1.7,51.
(c) with a mew to, according to: Trpbs rl pe ravr e/>wrs, (to
what end) for what do you ask me this ? X. M. 3, 7 2 ; Trpbs
rijv Trapovo-av d6va/nii>, according to their power at the time,
D.15,28.
In COMP. : to, towards, against, besides.
1217. <r*v, older Attic |tiv (Lat. cum), with DATIVE only, with,
in company with, or by aid of. ^vv is chiefly poetic ; it
seldom occurs in Attic prose except in Xenophon,
with the genitive taking its place.
1219] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 261
(a) in company with : -ijXvde o-vv MeveXdy, he came with Mene-
laus, II. 3, 206.
(6) by aid of: <rvv de$, with God's help, II. 9, 49.
(c) in accordance with: <rvv diKg., with justice, Pind. Py.9, 96.
(d) sometimes instrumental (like simple dative) : ptyav TT\OV-
TOV KT-ri<rw &v aixw, thou didst gain great wealth by (with}
thy spear, A.Pe. 755.
In COMP. : with, together, altogether.
1218. vir^p (Horn, also foreJp), over (Lat. super).
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : a-?-?} forty /ce^aX^s, it stood over (his} head,
/Z.2,20; of motion over : forty 0a\d(r<Tr)s Kal xtfoj/ds TTOTW/^-
VOLS (sc. yfjtiv), as we Jlit over sea and land, A.Ag.576.
(6) for, in behalf of (opposed to /card) : dvo^va forty r?}y
7r6Xea>s, sacrificed in behalf of the city, X. M. 2, 2 13 ; forty
TT&VTWV ay&v, a struggle for our all, A.Pe. 405. Some-
times with TOV and infin., like tva with subj. : forty TOV rd
<rvv/i6t] [AT] ylyvea-Oai, to prevent what is customary from
being done, Aesch.3, 1.
(c) chiefly in the orators, concerning (like wept) : TTJV virtp
TOV iro\fwv yvtbfjirjv exo^ras, having such an opinion about
the war, D. 2, 1.
2. with the ACCUSATIVE, over, beyond, exceeding : virkp ov8bi>
tfi*f)ffTo 86/j.aTos, he stepped over the threshold of the house,
Od.l, 135 ; virelp #Aa, over the sea, Od. 3, 73 ; forty TO pt\n-
<TTOV, beyond what is best, A.Ag.378 ; vir^p ovva^iv, beyond
its power, T.6,16.
In COMP. : over, above, beyond, in defence of, for the sake of.
1219. vir6 (Horn, also foraQ, under (Lat. sub), by.
1. with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : rd ford 777$, things under the earth, P. Ap. 18 b .
Sometimes from under (chiefly poetic) : ovs for6 -^dovb^ ^/ce
06wo-5e, whom he sent to light from beneath the earth,
Hes. Th. 669.
(6) to denote the AGENT with passive verbs : ef TIS ^rijuaro for6
TOV d-^fjMv, if any one was honored by the people, X. H. 2, 3 15 .
(c) of CAUSE: ford oovs, through fear; v(f> ijdov^s, through
pleasure; for' d?rXo/as, by detention in port, T. 2,85.
2. with the DATIVE (especially poetic) : T&V v-n-b troa-a-L, beneath
their feet, 77.2,784; T&V QO.VOVTWV for' 'IX/y, of those who
fell under (the walls of) Ilium, E. Hec. 764 ; for6 TTJ d/cpo-
7r6Xi, under the acropolis, Hd. 6, 105 ; oi ford /3acriXe?
those who are under the king, X. C7.8,l 6 .
3. with the ACCUSATIVE :
(a) of PLACE, under, properly to (a placed) under: ford
, he drives (drove} the sheep into (under") a cave,
262 SYNTAX. [1220
77.4,279; ^f\0e0' M Ipol-rjv, you came to Troy (i.e. to
besiege it), 0^.4,146; rdde wdvTa virb <r0a$ Troteurflai, to
bring all these under their sway, T. 4, 60.
(6) of TIME, towards (entering into) : virb VVKTO., at nightfall
(Lat. sub noctem), T. 1, 115. Sometimes at the time of,
during : dirb rbv ffei.a-fj.6v, at the time of the earthquake,
T.2,27.
In COMP. : under (in place or rank), underhand, slightly, gradually
(like sub).
1220. (Improper Prepositions.) These are avev, arep, XP 1 '
/Ae'xpi, /xerav, eVe/ca, TrXrfv, and <os (see 1200). All take the geni-
tive except cos, which takes the accusative. They are never used
in composition.
1. avev, -without, except, apart from : Avev &Ko\ovdov, without an
attendant, P.Sy.217*", &vev TOV Ka\rjv 56%av tveyicelv, apart from (be-
sides) bringing good reputation, D.18, 89.
2. arep, without, apart from (poetic) : <Xre/> Zijv6s, without (the
help of) Zeus, II. 15, 292.
3. a\pi, until j as far as: &XP I r V reXeur^s, until the end, D.18,
179.
4. fxe'xpi, until, as far as : ^XP 1 - T^S 7r6\ews, as far as the city,
T.6,96.
5. }iTav, between: /*era^i> cro0as xal d/ta^as, &e^toeew wisdom and
ignorance, P.Sy.2Q2*.
6. ?vKa or vKv (Ionic etVe/ca, e'^eKei/), ow account of, for the sake
of (generally after its noun) : vfipios e'tVexa rrjcrde, on account of this
outrage, II. 1,214; pyStva KoXaKeveiv 2vKa fuvdov, to flatter no one for a
reward, X.H.5,1 17 . Also olWa (ou ^j/e/ca) for ZveKa, chiefly in the
dramatists.
7. irX/rfjv, except: TT\^V y' e^ou icai a-ov, except myself and you,
8.J7.909.
8. s, to, used with the accusative like els, but only with personal
. objects : d^iVero cJs HepdiKKav Kal ts rrjv Xa\Ki5iK^v, he came to Per-
diccas and into Chalcidice, T.4, 79.
1221. 1. In general, the accusative is the case used with prepo-
sitions to denote that towards which, over which, along which, or
upon which motion takes place ; the genitive, to denote that from
which anything proceeds ; the dative, to denote that in which any-
thing takes place.
2. It will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case
often modifies the expression by which we translate a given prepo-
sition : thus Trapa means near, by the side of; and we have trapa TOV
/?o,(7iA.ea>s, from the neighborhood of the king; Trapa TW /3a<riAet,
in the neighborhood of the king: irapd TOV ^ao-iXea, into the neigh
fyorfaod of the king.
1226] USES OF THE PKEPOSITIONS. 263
1222. 1. The original adverbial use of the prepositions some-
times appears when they are used without a noun ; this occurs
especially in the older Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus Trepi,
round about or exceedingly, in Homer; and Trpos Se or KCU Trpd?,
and besides ; ej/ 8e, and among them; CTTI Se, and upon this; ^terd 8e,
and next; in Herodotus.
2. The preposition of a compound verb may also stand sepa-
rately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears; as TTI
KV(j>a<; rfXdev (Ki/e'<as e7n}A$ev), darkness came on, II. 1,475 ; fj/juv O.TTO
Aoiyov OL/JLVVOLL (dva/uwat), to ware? off' destruction from us, 11. 1, 67.
This is called tmesis, and is found chiefly in Homer aRd the
early poets.
1223. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to
which it belongs ; as vewv OLTTO, TrcuSos Trepi ; oAecra? OLTTO (for aTroAe-
o-as), #/. 9, 534. For the change of accent (anastrophe}, see 116, 1.
1224. N". A few prepositions are used adverbially, with a verb
(generally eon') understood ; as Trapa for Trapecrri, CTTI and /xcra
(in Homer) for eTrecm and /AeVeem. So evi for evecrn, and poetic
oVa, tip / for draara (dvacm^t). For the accent, see 116, 2.
1225. 1. Sometimes eis with the accusative, and e/c or d,7ro with
the genitive, are used in expressions which themselves imply no
motion, with reference to some motion implied or expressed in the
context; as at vvo$oi cs TO tepoi/ iylyvavTO, the synods were held
in the temple (lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the
temple to hold the synods), T. 1, 96 ; rots CK. IIvAov XrjffrOelori
(eotKores), like those captured (in Pylos, and brought home) from
Pylos, i.e. the captives from Pylos, AY. N. 186 ; BLrjpTrao-ro KOL avra
TO, OTTO roiv otKicov vAa, even the very timbers in the houses (lit.
from the houses') had been stolen, X. A . 2, 2 16 .
2. So ei/ with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion,
referring to rest which follows the motion ; as lv TW Trora/xw
they fell (into and remained) in the river, ~K.Ag. 1, 32: ev
TriTrre Ataivry?, she fell on Dione's knees, II. 5,370 : see S.El. 1476.
These (1 and 2) are instances of the so-called constructio praegnans.
1226. N. Adverbs of place are sometimes interchanged in the
same way (1225) ; as OTTOI Ka0eWap;ev, where we are standing, lit.
whither having come we are standing, S. O. C. 23 ; rts dyvoet TOV
e'/cetflei/ TroAe/Aoi/ 8epo rj^ovra; who does not know that the war that
is there will come hither? D. 1,15.
So <iv6f.v KOL cv#ev, on this side and on that, like CK Se^ta? (a dextra),
on the right.
264 SYNTAX. [1227
1227. A preposition is often followed by its own case
when it is part of a compound verb. E.g.
TLaptKOfMiovTo TTjv 'IroAtav, they sailed along the coast of Italy,
T. 6, 44 ; icrffXOe. /AC, it occurred to me, Hd. 7, 46 ; e^eAfoVo) TIS Soo/xa-
TO>I/, let some one come forth from the house, A. Ch. 663 ; w7rpcunrov
aura) ' A/A<roT7s, Amphisseans assisted him, T. 3, 101. For other
examples of the genitive, see 1132; for those of the dative, see
1179.
ADVEKBS.
1228. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs. E.g.
etTrei/, thus he spoke; cos Swa/xai, as I am able; TT/DCOTOV
he first went away, TO dXry^ws KO.KOV, that which is truly
evil ; avrat cr' oS^yrycrovcn. /cat /xaX* dcr/xeVo)?, fAese Mn7 guide you even
most gladly, A. Pr. 728.
1229. N. For adjectives used as adverbs, see 926. For adverbs
preceded by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see 952.
For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see 1088; 1092; 1148 ; 1174 ;
1175. For adverbs used as prepositions, see 1220.
THE VERB.
VOICES.
ACTIVE.
1230. In the active voice the subject is represented
as acting ; as rpeiro) rou9 o</>#aX/4ou?, I turn my eyes ;
6 irarrjp <f>i\ei rov TratSa, the father loves the child ; 6
ITTTTOS Tjoe^et, the horse runs.
1231. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive
verbs ; as rpe'^w, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle
or passive voice includes many deponent verbs which are active
and transitive in meaning ; as /?ovA.o/xai TOVTO, I want this. Some
transitive verbs have certain intransitive tenses, which generally
have the meaning of the middle voice, as Icmy/ca, / stand, lorr/v,
/ stood, from fcmy/u, place ; others have a passive force, as oVe'o-TT^
crav VTT* avrov, they were driven out by him, T. 1, 8.
1232. The same verb may be both transitive and intransitive;
1239] THE VERB. VOICES. 266
as \avvti>, drive (trans, or intrans.) or march; e^w, have, sometimes
hold or stay (as l^e 8?y, stay now, P.Pr. 349 d ) ; with adverbs, be, as
ev e^et, it is well, bene se habet. So TrpdrTO), do, cv (or Ka/ctos)
Tr/oaTTou, / am well (or badly) off, I do well (or badly). The intransi-
tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object ;
as iXavvuv (ITTTTOV or ap/xa), to drive, reAevrav (rov /3tov), to end
(life) or to die. Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, in-
crease, etc.
PASSIVE.
1233. In the passive voice the subject is represented
as acted upon; as o Trals VTTO rov Trarpos ^tXemw, the
child is loved by the father.
1234. The object of the active becomes the subject
of the passive. The subject of the active, the personal
agent, is generally expressed by VTTO with the genitive
in the passive construction.
1235. The dative here, as elsewhere, generally expresses
the inanimate instrument ; as /JoAAovrai XiOois, they are pelted
by stones.
1236. Even a genitive or dative depending on a verb in the
active voice can become the subject of the passive ; as Ka.Ta<j>povetTai
VTT e/xov, he is despised by me (active, Ka.Ta<J>povft> avrov, 1102) ;
TrwTTeverai VTTO rwv a/3^o/x,va)i/, he is trusted by his subjects (active,
Trto-revovcnv aura>, 1160) ; ap^ovrat VTTO (3a.ai\ewv, they are ruled by
kings (active, /3a<nAeis apxavaiv avrwi/). 'YTTO aX\o<f>vX<Dv /AaAAov
7re/3ovAevovTo, they were more plotted against by men of other races,
T. 1, 2 (active, IrrtftovXcvov avrois).
1237. N. Other prepositions than VTTO with the genitive. of the
agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic prose : such
are rrapa., TT/OOS, ex, and OLTTO. (See 1209, c.)
1238. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive may have
the dative of the agent.
2. The personal verbal in -reos takes the dative (1596),
the impersonal in -TH/ the dative or accusative, of the
agent (1597).
1239. When the active is followed by two accusatives,
or by an accusative of a thing and a dative of a person,
the case denoting a person is generally made the subject of
266 SYNTAX. [1240
the passive, and the other (an accusative) remains un-
changed. E.g.
OvSev aXAo SiSaovcerai aV0pa>7ros, a man is taught nothing else
(in the active, ovSei/ oAAo SiSourKovcn avOpwTrov), P. Men. 87 C . "AAAo
TL /xeiov 7rtra^^(reo-^e, you will have some other greater command
imposed on you (active, aXAo rt //.eiov V/LUV e7riTaov<nv, they will
impose some other greater command on you), T. 1, 140. Ot eTrtrerpa/A-
jneVot rrjv cfrvXaK-qv, those to whom the guard has been intrusted
(active, 7riT/o7retv ryv <f>v\a.Kr)v TOUTOIS), T. 1, 126. Ai<$epav
tvrjfJLfJitvos, clad in a leathern jerkin (active, ei/ctTrretv TL TLVL, to Jit a
thing on one), Ar.-ZV. 72. So eKKOTrrecr&H TOI> o<$aA/x.ov, to have his
eye cut out, and aTrore'fivecr&u r>)i/ /ce^aA^v, to Aave fo's Aeacf cw 0/T>
etc., from possible active constructions IKKOTTTUV rt Tin, and aTrore-
(Mvetv rt rtvt. This construction has nothing to do with that of 1058.
The first two examples are cases of the cognate accusative (1051)
of the thing retained with the passive, while the accusative or dative
of the pernon is made the subject.
1240. 1. A cognate accusative (1051) of the active form, or a
neuter pronoun or adjective representing such an accusative, may
become the subject of the passive. E.g.
*O KivSvvos KivSweverat, the risk is run (active, TOV KiVSvvov /av8v-
vevet, he runs the risk) : see P.Lach. 187 b . Ei ouSev Ty/Aaprv/rai /xot, if
no fault has been committed by me (active, ov&v ^/xaprr/Ka), And. 1,33.
2. The passive may also be used impersonally, the cognate sub-
ject being implied in the verb itself; as CTreiSi) cdrrot? 7ra/oe<rKv-
acTTO, when preparation had been made, T. 1, 46 ; ovre ^o-e'/^rai ovrt
cu/xoXoyryTat (sc. CJJLOL), no sacrilege has been done and no confession
has been made (by me), And. 1,71.
3. This occurs chiefly in such neuter participial expressions as
TO. (rot KO/AOI /2e/3i<o)u,eva, the lives passed by you and by me, D. 18,
265; at TOH> TreTroXtrev/xei/wi/ ev$urai, the accounts of their public
acts, D. 1, 28: so ra ^o-e/^/Ae'va, the impious acts which have been
done ; TO. KivSwe-u^evra, the risks which were run; ra ~YJ [JLaprrf
fJi^va, the errors which have been committed, etc. Even an intransitive
verb may thus have a passive voice.
1241. N. Some intransitive active forms are used as passives
of other verbs. Thus ev Trotetv, to benejit, ev 7rao-;(eiv, to be benefited;
cv Xeyetv, to praise, ev a/coveti/ (poet. K\VCLV), to be praised ; atpeiv, to
capture, aXwvat, to be captured ; aTroKreiwv, to kill, aTroOvrjcrKtw, to
be killed; CK^aXXetv, to cast out, e/cTUTrreiv, to be cast out;
to prosecute, <evyeiv, to be prosecuted (to be a defendant) ; aT
to acquit, a7ro<evya>, to be acquitted.
1246] VOICES.
MIDDLE.
1242. In the middle voice the subject is represented
as acting upon himself, or in some manner which con-
cerns himself.
1. As acting on himself. E.g.
'ErpaTTOi/ro TT/OOS A^crretav, they turned themselves to piracy, T. 1,5.
So Travo/xat, cease (stop one's self), 7ret0eo-0ai, trust (persuade one's
self), <cuVo/xai, appear (show one's self). This most natural use of
the middle is the least common.
2. As acting for himself or with reference to him-
self. E.g.
'O 8^/xos TiOerai vo/xous, the people make laws for themselves,
whereas TtOrjo-i i/o/nov? would properly be said of a lawgiver ; TOVTOV
tieraTre/xTTO/xai, 1 send for him (to come to me) ; aTreTre/XTrero avrovs,
he dismissed them; 7rpo/3aAAerat rrjv do"7rc'8a, he holds his shield to
protect himself.
3. As acting on an object belonging to himself. E.g.
*HA.$e Avcro/xevo? Ovyarpa, he came to ransom his (own) daughter,
11 1, 13.
1243. N. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in
the last example.
1244. N. Often the middle expresses no more than is implied
in the active; thus rpoiraLov icrracrOaL, to raise a trophy for them-
selves, generally adds nothing but the expression to what is implied
in rpoTraiov to-ravou, to raise a trophy; and either form can be
used. The middle sometimes appears not to differ at all from the
active in meaning ; as the poetic tSeV&u, to see, and iSetv.
1245. N. The middle sometimes has a causative meaning; as
eSiSaa/x?7v o~e, I had you taught, Ar.N. 1338; but e&Sa^a/x^v
means, also I learned.
' This gives rise to some special uses of the middle ; as in Sava'a>,
lend, Savei^o/xai, borrow (cause somebody to lend to one's self) ; fjuo-OOi),
let, fjLia-OovfjML, hire (cause to be let to one's self) ; / let myself for pay
is e/xa/uTov fuaOio. So rcVw, pay a penalty, rtVo/xat, punish (make
another pay a penalty).
1246. N". The middle of certain verbs is peculiar in its meaning.
Thus, at/aw, take, atpovjuai, choose ; dbroSc'Sto/u, give back, d,7ro8i'8o/xai,
sell; a?rTa), fasten, aTnro/xai, cling to (fasten myself to), so e^o/nai, hold
to, both with genitive ; -ya/xw rtva, marry (said of a man),
268 SYNTAX. [1247
TWI, marry (said of a woman) ; ypa^xo, write or propose a vote, ypd<j>o-
fjuii, indict; rt/xw/oco nvi, / avenge a person, Ti/xwpov/W nva, 1 avenge
myself on a person or / punish a person ; <vAaTTa> nva, / guard
some one, <vAarro/Aat nva, / am on my guard against some one.
1247. N". The passive of some of these verbs is used as a pas-
sive to both active and middle; thus ypac^vcu can mean either
to be written or to be indicted, aipeOfjvai either to be taken or to be
chosen.
1248. N. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense ; .
as uSiKto, / wrong, dSt/oycro/Aai, 1 shall be wronged.
TENSES.
1249. The tenses may express two relations. They may desig-
nate the time of an action as present, past, or future ; and also its
character .as going on, as simply taking place, or as finished. The
latter relation appears in all the moods and in the infinitive and
participle ; the former appears always in the indicative, and to a
certain extent (hereafter to be explained) in some of the dependent
moods and in the participle.
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
1250. The tenses of the indicative express action as
follows :
1. PRESENT, action going on in present time :
am writing.
2. IMPERFECT, action going on in past time :
I was writing.
3. PERFECT, action finished in present time : yi
have written.
4. PLUPERFECT, action finished in past time:
Iliad written.
5. AORIST, action simply taking place in past time:
typai/fa, I wrote.
6. FUTURE, future action (either in its progress or in
its mere occurrence) : ypdif/(o, I shall write or / shall be
writing.
7. FUTURE PERFECT, action to be finished in future time :
it will have been written.
1257] TENSES.
1251. This is shown in the following table :
269
Present Time.
Past Time.
Future Time.
Action going \
on /
PRESENT
IMPERFECT
FUTURE
Action simply \
taking place j
AORIST
FUTURE
Action 1
finished /
PERFECT
PLUPERFECT
FUT. PERFECT
For the present and the aorist expressing a general truth
(gnomic), see 1292.
1252. In narration, the present is sometimes used vividly
for the aorist. E.g.
KeXevei Tre/zi^cti aVSpa?' aTrocrrcAXovcrtv ovv, /cat Trept avrwv 6
e/ntoTo/cXr/s Kpv(f>a Tre/XTret, he bids them send men: accordingly they
dispatch them, and Themistocles sends secretly about them, T. 1, 91.
This is called the Historic Present.
1253. 1. The present often expresses a customary or repeated
action in present time; as ovros fj.lv v&op, eyw Se olvov TTIVO*, he
drinks water, and I drink wine, D. 19, 46. (See 1292.)
2. The imperfect likewise may express customary or repeated
past action; as ^w/cpdYr;? wcrTrep eyi'y VCDO-KCV ovrws eXeye, as
Socrates thought, so he used to speak, X. M. 1, 1 4 .
1254. The present /xe'XXa), with the present or future (seldom
the aorist) infinitive, forms a periphrastic future, which sometimes
denotes intention or expectation ; as /x-e'XXet TOVTO Trotetv (or ^007-
aruv), he is about to do this; et /xe'XXci 17 TroXtTeia o-a>'c<r0a(,, if the
constitution is to be saved, P. JSp.412 a .
1255. The present and especially the imperfect often express
an attempted action; as Tret Poverty v/txas, they are trying to persuade
you, Isae. 1,26; *AXovvr;o-ov eSc'Sov, he offered (tried to give) Halon~
nesus, Aesch. 3, 83; a eVpaoxreTo OVK eyevero, what was attempted
did not happen, T. 6, 74.
1256. The presents T^KCU, 1 am come, and otxo/xat, / am gone,
have the force of perfects; the imperfects having the force of
pluperfects.
1257. The present et/x,t, 1 am going, with its compounds, has a
future sense, and is used as a future of cp^o/xat, eXeixro/Acu not being
in good use in Attic prose. In Homer et/u is also present in sense.
270 SYNTAX. [1258
1258. The present with TroAai or any other expression of past
time has the force of a present and perfect combined ; as TraAcu
TOVTO Aeyw, / have long been telling this (which I now tell).
1259. 1. The aorist takes its name (do/ato-ro?, unlimited, unquali-
fied) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none of the
limitations (opot) as to completion, continuance, repetition, etc., which
belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds to the ordinary
preterite in English, whereas the Greek imperfect corresponds to.
the forms / was doing, etc. Thus, ITTOL^L TOVTO is he was doing this
or he did this habitually; TrcTrot'^Ke TOVTO is he has already done
this; eTreTroi^Ket TOVTO is he had already (at. some past time) done
this; but fTroirjo-e TOVTO is simply he did this, without qualification
of any kind. The aorist is therefore commonly used in rapid nar-
ration, the imperfect in detailed description. The aorist is more
common in negative sentences.
2. As it is not always important to distinguish between the
progress of an action and its mere occurrence, it is occasionally
indifferent whether the imperfect or the aorist is used ; compare
cAeyov in T. 1,72 (end) with etTroi/, cAe^av, and [Aee in 1,79. The
two tenses show different views (both natural views) of the same
act of speaking.
1260. The aorist of verbs which denote a state or condition may
express the entrance into that state or condition ; as 7rAouTu>, / am
rich; iirXovrovv, 1 was rich; 7r\ovrr)o~a, I became rich. So e/itao-t-
Aeuo-e, he became king ; l?pe, he took office (also he held office).
1261. After 7ret and eTrei&y, after that, the aorist is generally to
be translated by our pluperfect ; as 7rei&) aTnjXOov, after they had
departed. Compare postquam venit.
1262. N. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with
X<o may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry ; as
flav/xao-as ex w T< ^ e ' I have wondered at this, S. Ph. 1362. In prose,
e^w with a participle generally has its common force ; as TTJV TrpoiKa
f.\u Aa/?wi/, he has received and has the dowry (not simply he hots
taken it), D.27,17.
1263. N. Some perfects have a present meaning ; as Ovya-Ktw,
to die, TtQvrjKevcLL, to be dead ; ytyvecrda.1, to be'come, yeyovevai,
to be; [Ufwrjo-KeLv, to remind,. fj.fj.v rjo~0 a i, to remember; KaActv, to
call, Kf.K\rf<r6ai, to be called* So otSa, / know, novi, and many
others. This is usually explained by the meaning of the verb.
In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as
1 knew.
1270] TENSES. 271
1264. N. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future ;
as ct fjie alaflijcrtTai, o A. to A a, if he shall perceive me, I am ruined
(perii), S. Ph. 75. So sometimes the present, as aTroAAv/xat, / perish!
(for/ shall perish), L.12, 14; and even the aorist, as aTrwAo/Aiyv
et fji. Aeti/reis, I perish if you leave me, E..4/.386.
1265. N. The second person of the future may express a per-
mission, or even a command ; as 7r/oaets olov av tfeA^s, you may
act as you please, S. 0. (7.956 ; Travrtos Se TOVTO 8pa<reis, and by ail
means do this (you shall do this), Ar. N. 1352. So in imprecations ;
as <x7roAet(T$e, to destruction with you ! (lit. you shall perish).
For the periphrastic future with /xeAAou and the infinitive, see
1254.
1266. N. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic
future, denoting that a future act will be immediate or decisive ; as
<f>pd^, KOL 7re7r/oaeTcu, speak, and it shall be (no sooner said than)
done, AT. PL 1027. Compare the similar use of the perfect infini-
tive, 1275.
1267. 1. The division of the tenses of the indicative
into primary (or principal) and secondary (or historical)
is explained in 448.
2. In dependent clauses, when the construction allows
both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and
optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly fol-
lows primary tenses, and the optative follows second-
ary tenses. E.g.
a av flovXwvTai, they do whatever they please;
a fiovXoiv TO, they did whatever they pleased. Ae'yov<riv
on TOVTO fiov\ovrat, they say that they wish for this; !Aeav on
TOVTO fiovXoLvro, they said that they wished for this.
These constructions will be explained hereafter (1431 ; 1487).
1268. N". The gnomic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to
present time (1292) ; and the historic present is secondary, as it
refers to past time (1252).
1269. The only exception to this principle (1267, 2) occurs in
indirect discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always
be retained, even after secondary tenses. (See 1481, 2).
1270. 1. The distinction of primary and secondary tenses ex-
tends to the dependent moods only where the tenses there keep the
same distinction of time which they have in the indicative, as in
the optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (1280).
272 SYNTAX.
2. An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent
conditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might
otherwise be in the subjunctive : thus we should generally have
TTpaTTOiev av a /JovAoivTO, they would do whatever they might please.
See 1439. Such an optative seldom assimilates the subjunctive or
indicative of a final or object clause (1362) in prose ; but oftener in
poetry. It very rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse,
although it may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (1358).
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
A. NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1271. In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in
the optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect
discourse (1279), the tenses chiefly used are the. present
and aorist.
1272. 1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the
present expresses an action in its duration, that is, as
going on or repeated, while the aorist expresses simply its
occurrence, the time of both being otherwise precisely the
same. E.g.
*Eav TTOLYJ TOVTO, if he shall be doing this, or if he shall do this
(habitually), eav 71-0117 0-77 TOVTO, (simply) if he shall do this; ci
iroioirj TOVTO, if he should be doing this, or if he should do this
(habitually), ei TTOI^O-CIC TOVTO, (simply) if he should do this ; TTOICI
TOVTO, do this (habitually), TTOI'I/O-OV TOVTO, (simply) do this. OVTCD
i/CK-tyo-at/At T* ya> /cat vofj.ioifJLr)v <ro<f>6<s, on this condition may
I gain the victory (aor.) and be thought (pres.) wise, Ar.N. 520.
BovAeTai TOVTO Trot civ, he wishes to be doing this or to do this (habit-
ually), /JovAeTat TOVTO Troifj&ai, (simply) he wishes to do this.
2. This is a distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has
(for example) only one form, si faciat, corresponding to ei irotoirj
and ei Troiiyo-eeev.
1273. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these con-
structions, represents an action as finished at the time at
which the present would represent it as going on. E.g.
Ae'SoiKa fMj XrjOrjv TreTroi^Ki;, I fear lest it may prove to have
caused forgetfulness (pr) iroirj would mean lest it may cause), D. 19,3.
MTydevt ftorjOew os av pr) TrpoVepos ftefloiqO'rjKws vfuv ij, to help no
one who shall not previously have helped you (os av fM) . . (3or)0rj
would mean who shall not previously help you), D. 19, 16. OVK av Sid
1279] TENSES. 273
TOVTO y etei/ OVK evOvs SeSwKores, they would not (on enquiry)
prove to have failed to pay immediately on this account (with SiSotev
this would mean they would not Jail to pay), D. 30, 10. Ov ySovAev-
eo-0 a i en wpa, oAAd fiefiovXevvOai, it is no longer 'time to be
deliberating, but (it is time) to have finished deliberating, P. O.46 a .
1274. N. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command
that something shall be decisive and permanent; as ravra eip-qa-Oo),
let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this
(which follows) be said once for all; ^XP L r v& wptVtfu) v/Aon/ rj
PpaSvTrjs, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed, T. 1, 71.
This is confined to the third person singular passive ; the rare
second person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active
is used only when the perfect has a present meaning (1263).
1?75. N". The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or
permanence (like the imperative, 1274), and sometimes it is merely
more emphatic than the present; as CITTOV rrjv Ovpav K.K\tl(r6ai,
they ordered the gate to be shut (and kept so), X. H. 5, 4 7 . *HA,awei>
?rt TOVS Mevwvos, WOT' e/cetVovs K7re7rA?7;)(0cu Kc " rpe\f.iv cm ra
oVAa, so that they were (once for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to
arms, X.^l.1,5 18 . The regular meaning of this tense, when it is
not in indirect discourse, is that given in 1273.
1276. The future infinitive is regularly used only to
represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (1280).
1277. It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in
place of the regular present or aorist, to make more
emphatic a future idea which the infinitive receives from
the context. E.g.
'ESerJ^trai/ TOH/ McyapeW vavvl ox^as ^v/ATTpOTre/Ai/retv, they
asked the Megarians to escort them with ships, T. 1,27. OVK aTro/coo-
Avcreiv Swaroi ovre?, not being able to prevent, T.3,28. In all such
cases the future is strictly exceptional (see 1271).
1278. One regular exception to the principle just stated is
found in the periphrastic future (1254).
B. IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1279. The term indirect discourse includes all clauses depending
on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts or words
of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the general
structure of the sentence. It includes of course all indirect quota-
tions and questions.
274 SYNTAX. [1280
1280. When the optative and infinitive stand in indirect
discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of
the same verb in the direct discourse. E.g.
*EAeyei/ on ypa<ot, he said that he was writing (he said ypa^xo,
1 am writing} ; eAeyej/ on ypauj/oi, he said that he would write (he
said ypai/fo), 1 will write} ; eAeyev on ypai/fetev, he said that he had
written (he said Zypaaj/a) ; eAeyei/ on yeypa<o>? efy, A? senW ^ai
he had already written (he said yeypa<a). "Hpero et ns e/xov et^
O"o<a>Tepos, Ae asked whether any one was wiser than I (he asked ecrn
-t ypd<f>eiv, he says that he is writing (he says ypa<o>) ;
ypdij/ttv, Ae says iAa Ae wrc7Z write (ypcu/Aw) ; <r;o-t ypdij/ai, Ae says
<Aa^ Ae wro^e (eypai/'a) ; c^ryo-i yeypa^e'vat, Ae sa?/s /Aa ^e Aas
written (ye'ypa^a). For the participle, see 1288.
EtTrei/ on avSpa ayot oV elp^at Seot, Ae sazrf fAa< Ae ?s bringing a
man whom it was necessary to confine (he said av8pa. ay<o 6V e?pai
Set), X.^T. 5,4 8 . 'EAoyt'^oj/ro tos, et /x,^ /xa^oivro, aTroo-ri/o-otvTO
at TroAets, <A^ considered that, if they should notjight, the cities would
revolt (they thought eav fjaj fj^ax^^-^Oa, aTroo-T^o-ovrat, f/"we rfo
notjight, they will revolt}, ibid. 6, 4 6 .
1281. N. These constructions are explained in 1487, 1494, and
1497. Here they merely show the force of the tenses in indirect
discourse. Compare especially the difference between ^o-t ypa-
<etv and ^o-t ypai/'ai above with that between /?ovAerai Troietv
and /JovAerot Trot^o-ai under 1272. Notice also the same distinc-
tion in the present and aorist optative.
1282. N". The construction of 1280 is the strictly proper use of
the future infinitive (1276 ; 1277).
1283. N". The future perfect infinitive is occasionally used
here, to express future completion ; as vo/u^erc eV -n/Se rrj ^/xepa
e/ue KaraKeico^eo-^at, believe that on that day 1 shall have been
already (i.e. shall be the same as) cut in pieces, X.-4.1, 5 16 .
1284. N". The future perfect participle very rarely occurs in a
similar sense (see T.7,25).
1285. 1. The present infinitive may represent the imperfect as
well as the present indicative; as rtvas evicts vTroAa/x^ai/er' cvx e ~
o-0cu TOV ^iAiTTTTOv or* O-7rev8ev ,* what prayers do you suppose Philip
made when he was pouring libations? (i.e. TWOS rjv'xtTo;), D. 19, 130.
The perfect infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluper-
fect. In such cases the time of the infinitive must always be
shown by the context (as above by or* eWei/Sep). See 1289.
2. For the present optative representing the imperfect, see 1488,
1289] TENSES. 275
1286. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, swearing, and a few
others, form an intermediate class between verbs which take the
infinitive in indirect discourse and those which do not (see 1279) ;
and though they regularly have the future infinitive (1280), the
present and aorist are allowed. E.g.
"HA.7riov fJ-a-x^v e ere a Oat, they expected that there would be a
battle, T.4,71 ; but a OVTTOTC ri\.Tn<T.v TraOelv, what he never expected
to suffer, E. H. F. 746. Xenophon has VTreV^ero /^r)\avr]v TT a p e e t v,
C.6,1 21 , and also vTricr^ro /2ovA.vo-ao-0cu, J.2,3 20 . 'O/xoorai/res
Tavrcus e/u. fjLf.vf.lv, having sworn to abide by these, X. H. 5, 3 26 ; but
o/zoo-ai et vat JJLZV rrjv a.px] v K L W] V > Tai/ras 8' vfuv aTroSovvai rrjv
X^pai/, to swear that the government should be common, but that all
should give up the land to you, D.23, 170.
In English we can say 1 hope {expect or promise} to do this, like
Trotetv or TroLrjcraL ; or 1 hope I shall do this, like TTOM^IV.
1287. 'N. The future optative is never used except as the
representative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse
(see 1280), or in the construction of 1372 (which is governed by
the principles of indirect discourse). Even in these the future
indicative is generally retained. See also 1503.
III. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE.
1288. The tenses of the participle generally express the,
same time as those of the indicative ; but they are present,
past, or future relatively to the time of the verb with which
they are connected. E.g.
'A/xapTavei TOVTO TTOICOI/, he errs in doing this ; Ty/xaprave TOVTO
TTOUOV, he erred in doing this; a/AapT^trcrai TOVTO TTOICOV, he will
err in doing this. (Here TTOIWV is first present, then past, then
future, absolutely; but always present to the verb of the sentence.)
So in indirect discourse: otSa. TOVTOV ypd<f>ovTa (ypanj/avra,
ypanf/ovra, or yeypacjSoTa), / know that he is writing {that he
wrote, will write, or has written). Ov TroAAot <ai'voimu eAfloi/Tes,
not many appear to have gone {on the expedition), T.I, 10. (For
other examples, see 1588.)
TaCHra etTTOVTes, O.TT^A.&H', having said this, they departed. 'ETH/-
veouv TOVS eipryKOTas, they praised those who had {already) spoken.
TOVTO 7roir;crtov ep^Tat, he is coming to do this; TOVTO Trotr/crwv
rj\0ev, he came to do this. "A7reA.0e TavYa A.a/2<ov, take this and be off
(A.a/?wv being past to a7reA.0e, but absolutely future).
1289. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as
276 SYNTAX. [1290
0*80. KOKiv<o <r<D<f>povovvT, core SooKpaYei avvq<TTr)v, I knoiv that
they both were temperate as long as they associated with Socrates (i.e.
eVa><povem7v), X. M. 1, 2 18 . (See 1285.)
1290. N. The aorist participle in certain constructions (gen-
erally with a verb in the aorist) does not denote time past with
reference to the leading verb, but expresses time coincident with
that of the verb. See examples in 1563, 8 ; 1585 ; 1586. See Greek
Moods, 144-150.
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
1291. The present is the tense commonly used in
Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an
habitual action. E.g.
TI'KTCI TOI Kopos vfipiv, oVttv Ko,KO) oX/8os 7r7Tai, satiety begets
insolence, whenever prosperity follows the wicked, Theog. 153.
1292.' In animated language the aorist is used in this
sense. This is called the gnomic aorist^ and is generally
translated by the English present. E.g.
*Hv rts TOVTW TL Tra.pafta.Lvri, ?7/uay avrols fTreOecrav, i.e. they
impose a penalty on all who transgress, X. C. 1,2 2 . Mi" Tj/xepa rov
/nev Ka.0ciA.cv inj/oOtv, rov 8* r)p aveo, one day (often} brings down
one man from a height and raises another high, E. frag. 424.
1293. N. Here one case in past time is vividly used to repre-
sent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as
TToAAa/as, often, 77877, already, OVTT<D, never yet, illustrate the construc-
tion ; as aOvjJiovvT<s avSpcs OVTTO) rpOTraioj/ ecrr^o-av, disheartened
men never yet raised (i.e. never raise) a trophy, P. Critias, 10S C .
1294. N. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric
similes; as rjpLTre 8' <us ore TIS 8pi)s rjpnrev, and he fell, as when
some oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell), II. 13, 389.
1295. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist.
jty.
To 8e IMJ /x/7ro8o>i/ avavTayawoTO) ewoia TerifJwjTai, but those who
are not before men's eyes are honored with a good will which has no
rivalry, T.2,45.
1296. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used with
the adverb av to denote a customary action. E.g.
Ai77po>TG>v av avrovs TL Xeyoiev, / used to ask them (I would
often ask them) what they said, P.^4p.22 b . HoAAaKis
av v/Aas, we used often to hear you, Ar. Lys.511.
1303] THE PARTICLE "AN. 277
1297. X. This iterative construction must be distinguished
from that of the potential indicative with av (1335). It is equiva-
lent to our phrase he would often do this for he used to do this.
1298. X. The Ionic has iterative forms in -CTKOV and -OTKO/A^V
in both imperfect and aorist. (See 778.) Herodotus uses these
also with av, as above (1296).
THE PARTICLE "AN.
1299. The adverb av (epic /ee, Doric /ca) has two
distinct uses.
1. It may be joined to all the secondary tenses of the
indicative (in Homer also to the future indicative),
and to the optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote
that the action of the verb is dependent on some cir-
cumstances or condition, expressed or implied. Here
it belongs strictly to the verb.
. 2. It is joined regularly to et, ^y, to all relative and
temporal words, and sometimes to the final particles &>?,
OTTO)?, and typa, when these are followed by the sub-
junctive. Here, although as an adverb it qualifies the
verb, it is always closely attached to the particle or
relative, with which it often forms one word, as in eai>,
orav, 7T6iSdv.
1300. X. There is no English word which can translate av.
In its first use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb
(/fouAoiro av, he would wish; eXot/xryv av, / should choose). In its
second use it generally has no force which can be made apparent
in English.
1301. X. The following sections (1302-1309) enumerate the
various uses of av : when these are explained more fully elsewhere,
reference is made to the proper sections.
1302. The present and perfect indicative never take av.
1303. The future indicative sometimes takes av (or KC)
in the early poets, especially Homer ; very rarely in Attic
Greek. E.g.
Kat' Ke Tis a>8' epeet, and some one will (or may) thus speak, II. 4,
176 j aAAot 01 KC /AC Tifjirjvovari, others who will (perchance) honor me,
278 SYNTAX. [1304
//. 1, 174. The future with av seems to be an intermediate form
between the simple future, will honor, and the optative with av,
would honor. One of the few examples in Attic prose is in
P.Ap.2Q c .
1304. 1. The past tenses of the indicative (generally
the imperfect or aorist) are used with av in a potential
sense (1335), or in the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition
(1397). E.g.
OvSev av KO.KOV CTrocr/crav, they could (or would) have done no
harm ; rjXOev av et e/ce'A.ev<7a, he would have come if 1 had commanded
him.
2. The imperfect and aorist indicative with av may also
have an iterative sense. (See 1296.)
1305. 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with av
only in t the dependent constructions mentioned in 1299, 2,
where av is attached to the introductory particle or relative
word.
See 1367; 1376; 1382; 1428, 2.
2. In epic poetry, where the independent subjunctive
often has the sense of the future indicative (1355), it may
take KC or av, like the future (1303). E.g.
Ei 8e KC JMYJ Su7<nv, eyo> Se /cev avros cAw/xai, and if he does not
give her up, 1 will take her myself, II. 1, 324.
1306. The optative with av has a potential sense
(1327), and it often forms the apodosis of a condition
expressed by the optative with et, denoting what would
happen if the condition should be fulfilled (1408).
1307. N. The future optative is never used with av (1287).
1308. 1. The present and aorist (rarely the perfect)
infinitive and participle with av represent the indicative
or optative with av; each tense being equivalent to the
corresponding tense of one of these moods with av, the
present representing also the imperfect, and the perfect also
the pluperfect (1285; 1289).
2. Thus the present infinitive or participle with av may
represent either an imperfect indicative or a present opta-
tive with av; the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an
1311] THE PARTICLE *Att. 279
aorist optative with av; the perfect, either a pluperfect
indicative or a perfect optative with av. E.g.
(Pres.) 3?r](riv avrovs eXev0e'povs av etvat, ei TOVTO 7rpaav, he
says that they would (now) be free (rjaav av), if they had done this ;
<f>r](Tiv avTOvs eXev^epovs av el vat, ei TOVTO ?rpaetav, he says that
they would (hereafter} be free (etev av), if they should do this. Oioa
avTovs eXevflepovs av ovTas, et TOVTO 7rpaav, / know that they
would (now) be free (rjvav av), if they had done this; otSa avTovs
eXevflepovs av ovras, et Tav>a 7rpaetav, / know that they would
(hereafter) be free (etev av), if they should do this. IIoXX' av e^wv
erep' etTretv, although I might (= exot/u av) say many other things,
D. 18, 258.
(Aor.) <ao-tv avTov iX6f.lv av (or ot&x avTov eX0ovTa av), ei
TOVTO eyeveTo, they say (or 1 know) that he would have come (rj\@ev
av), if this had happened; <ao~tv avTov eA.#etv av (or ot8a avTov
eA.0ovTa av), et TOVTO yevotTO, they say (or / know) that he would
come (fXOoi av), if this should happen. 'PaoYws av d<^>e^eis, Trpoet-
XCTO a,7ro0avetv, whereas he might easily have been acquitted (a^>eti^ry
av), he preferred to die, X.3f.4, 4 4 .
(Perf.) Et /z>) Tas dpeTas eicetva? Trapeo-^ovTO, TraVTa rav^' VTTO TWV
jSapySapwv av laXto/cevat (c/>^o-etev av Tts), had they not exhibited
those exploits of valor, we might say that all this would have been cap-
tured by the barbarians (eaXoWt av), D. 19, 312. OVK av fiyov/juu
avTOvs BLKTTJV d^t'av SeSwKeVat, et avTwv KaTa^</)icrato-^e, / do not think
they would (then, in the future, prove to) have suffered proper punish-
ment (SeStoKoVes av elev), if you should condemn them, L. 27, 9.
The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva-
lent of the indicative or of the optative with av. In the examples
given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question.
1309. The infinitive with av is used chiefly in indirect dis-
course (1494) ; but the participle with av is more common in other
constructions (see examples above).
As the early poets who use the future indicative with av (1303)
seldom use this construction, the future infinitive and participle
with av are very rare.
1310. When av is used with the subjunctive (as in
1299, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory
word only by monosyllabic particles like /xe'v, Se, TC, yap, etc.
1311. When av is used with the indicative or optative, or in
any other potential construction, it may either be placed next to
its verb, or be attached to some other emphatic word (as a nega-
280 SYNTAX. [1312
tive or interrogative, or an important adverb); as TayivT av re
TroAiv ol roLovroL ere/oovs TreiicravTes aTroAecreiav, such men, if they
should get others to follow them, would very soon destroy a state,
T.2,63.
1312. In a long apodosis av may be used twice or even
three times with the same verb. E.g.
OVK av YiytlvO' avrov Kav fTriopapelv ; do you not think that he
would even have rushed thither? D. 27, 56. In T. 2,41, av is used
three times with Trapt^ecrOai.
1313. "Av may be used elliptically with a verb under-
stood. E.g.
Ot oi/cerat peyKOiwnv aAA' OVK av Trpb TOV (sc. eppeyKov), the
slaves are snoring ; but in old times they would n't have done so,
Ar. N. 5. So in </>o/8ou/xevos wcrTrep av ct Trais, fearing like a child
(woTrep av e^o/^eiro ct Trats rjv), P. 6r. 479*.
1314; When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate
verbs, av generally stands only with the first. E.g.
OvStv av 8id(f>opov TOV erepov Trotoi, dAA* eVi ravrbv totev afJi<f>o-
re/ooi, he would do nothing different from the other, but both would aim
at the same object (av belongs also to totev), P.Rp. 360.
1315. "Av never begins a sentence or a clause.
1316. N. The adverb ra^a, quickly, soon, readily, is often pre-
fixed to av, in which case Ta\ av is nearly equivalent to urws,
perhaps. The av here always belongs in its regular sense (1299,1)
to the verb of the sentence ; as rax' av e\0oi. perhaps he would
come ; ra^' av ^A0ev, perhaps he would (or might) have come.
THE MOODS.
1317. The indicative is used in simple, absolute asser-
tions, and in questions which include or concern such
assertions; as ypdfai, he writes; fypatyeV) he wrote;
he will write; ryeypafav, he has written; ri
e ; what did you write ? eypatye TOVTO ; did he
write this?
1318. The indicative has a tense to express every variety
of time which is recognized by the Greek verb, and thus
it can state a supposition as well as make an assertion
in the past, present, or future. It also expresses certain
1322] THE MOODS. 281
other relations which, in other languages (as in Latin) are
generally expressed by a different mood. The following
examples will illustrate these uses :
Ei TOVTO aXr)6es <TTL, x at/ / w > tf this is true, I rejoice (1390); ei
typaij/v,rjXOov a.v, if he had written, I should have come (1397) ;
et y pallet, yi/axro/xai, if he shall write (or if he writes), 1 shall know
(1405). 'ETTi/xeXetrat OTTOS TOVTO y e 1/17 ere TCU, he takes care that this
shall happen (1372). Aeyet OTI TOVTO Troiei, he says that he is doing
this ; sometimes, etTrev OTI TOVTO Troiei, he said that he was doing this (he
said Troioi)). (1487.) Ei#e yw,e eKTeivas, ws /A^Trore TOVTO c Trot 170- a,
that thou hadst killed me, that 2 might never have done this! (1511;
1371). Ei0e TOVTO aXrjOts rjv, that this were true I (1511).
1319. N. These constructions are explained in the sections
referred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of including
all the actual uses even of the indicative under any single funda-
mental idea.
1320. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown
by the following examples :
*Io)/x,ev, let us go (1344). Mi) OavfA(i<rr)TC, do not wonder
(1346). Tt eiVco ; what shall I say ? (1358). Ov [MJ TOVTO ye vrjrai,
this (surely) will not happen (1360). OvSe tSw/uat (Homeric), nor '
shall I see (1355).
*EpxeTat tva TOVTO 1877, he is coming that he may see this (1365) ;
<f>o(3elT(u fjirj TOVTO ycvrjrai, he fears lest this may happen (1378).
'Eav 1X9 y, TOVTO iroLrjo-o), if he comes (or if he shall come), I shall do
this (1403) ; eav TIS e\0r}, TOVTO TTOIW, if any one (ever) comes, 1
(always} do this (1393,1). "Orai/ ZXOrj, TOVTO Trotrjcrw, when he comes
(or when he shall come), I shall do this (1434); oYav TIS eXOy,
TOVTO Troiai, when any one comes, I (always) do this (1431, 1).
1321. N. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most
primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative ;
this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, I&O/MU, /
shall see ; ctTnyo-t TIS, one will say. Then, in exhortations and pro-
hibitions it is still future ; as tw/xev, let us go ; p,r) TroL^a-rjTe TOVTO,
do not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future
purpose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional
relative sentences it expresses a future supposition ; except in
general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly pres-
ent) in its time.
1322. The various uses of the optative are shown by
the following examples :
282 SYNTAX. [1323
may you be fortunate; pr] ytvoiro, may it not be
done; uOe. /AT) aTroAoivTo, O that they may not perish (1507).
v EA.0oi av, he may go, or he might go (1327).
*HA0ev iva TOVTO 'ioo i) he came that he might see this (1365);
c<f>oj3ttTo fjur) TOVTO ye'votTo, he feared lest this should happen (1378).
Ei2A0ot, TOVT' av 7roi^crat/xt, if he should come, 1 should do this
(1408); ei TIS IA0oi, TOVT' CTTOIOVV, if any one (ever) came, I
(always) did this (1393,2). "Ore 2A0oi, TOVT' av Trot^o-at/xi,
whenever he should come (at any time when he should come), I should
do this (1436) ; ore TIS 2A0oi, TOVT' eVoibvv, whenever any one came,
I (always) did this (1431, 2). 'ETre/xeAeiTO 6Va>s TOVTO ycvrJcroiTo,
he took care that this should happen (1372). EITTCV OTI TOVTO TTOIOIT;
(n- 01770-0 1 or Troi^o-eie), he said that he was doing (would do or had
done) this (1487).
1323. N. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and-
less distinct form of expression than the subjunctive, indicative,
or imperative, in constructions of the same general charactei.
This appears especially in its independent uses; as in the Homeric
'EAevr/v ayoiTo, he may take Helen away, IIA,IQ (see yvvai/ca
ay eVtfw, 11.3,72, referring to the same thing, and KOI irarc TIS
etTTT/o-iv, and sometime one will say, 1303, above); tot/xev, may we
go (cf . io)/x,ev, let us go) ; /AT) ycvoiTo, may it not happen (cf. /U,T)
ycV^Tai, let it not happen) ; eAotTo av (Horn, sometimes IA.OITO alone),
he would take (cf. Horn. cXrjTca sometimes with KC, he will take).
So in future conditions; as et ye'voiTo, if it should happen (cf. eav
ycv^rai, if it shall happen). In other dependent clauses it is gen-
erally a correlative of the subjunctive, sometimes of the indicative;
here it represents a dependent subjunctive or indicative in its
changed relation when the verb on which it depends is changed
from present or future to past time. The same change in relation
is expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, is,
etc. to should, would, might, did, was, etc. To illustrate these last
relations, compare Ip^eTat tva 1877, ^o^SeiTat pr) yevr/Tat, eav TIS eA.#7i
TOVTO TTOtw, eVtyteAeiTai 6Va>s TOVTO yevryo-eTai, and Aeyet OTI TOVTO
Trotct, with the corresponding forms after past leading verbs given
in 1322.
For a discussion of the whole relation of the optative to the
subjunctive and the other moods, and of the original meaning of
the subjunctive and optative, see Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-389.
1324. The imperative is used to express commands
and prohibitions; as TOVTO iroiei, do this; fi
do not fly.
1327] THE MOODS. 283
1325. The infinitive, which is a verbal noun, and the
participle and the verbal in -re'os, which are verbal adjec-
tives, are closely connected with the moods of the verb in
many constructions.
1326. The following sections (1327-1515) treat of all
constructions which require any other form of the finite
verb than the indicative in simple assertions and questions
(1317). The infinitive and participle are included here
so far as either of them is used in indirect discourse, in
protasis or apodosis, or after wore (ws, e<' <S or e</>' wre) and
7r/oiV. These constructions are divided as follows :
I. Potential Optative and Indicative with av.
II. Imperative and Subjunctive in commands, exhorta-
tions, and prohibitions. Subjunctive and Indica-
tive with pr) or fir) ov in cautious Assertions. "OTTWS
and OTTWS firj with the independent Future Indicative.
III. Independent Homeric Subjunctive, like Future In-
dicative. Interrogative Subjunctive.
IV. Ov ju,77 with Subjunctive and Future Indicative.
V. Final and Object Clauses with fm, MS, OTTWS, o</>a,
and fji-^.
VI. Conditional Sentences.
VII. Relative and Temporal Sentences, including consecu-
tive sentences with wore etc.
VIII. Indirect Discourse or Oratio Obliqua.
IX. Causal Sentences.
X. Expressions of a Wish.
I. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE AND INDICATIVE WITH av.
POTENTIAL OPTATIVE.
1327. The optative with av expresses a future action as
dependent on circumstances or conditions. Thus ZXOoi av
is he may go, he might (could or would) go, or he would be
likely to go, as opposed to an absolute statement like he will
go. E.g.
v Ert yap KCV aXv^aifiev KaKov rj/Jjap, for (perhaps) we may still
escape the evil day, Orf.10,269. Hav yap av TrvOoio pov, for you
284 SYNTAX. [1328
can learn anything you please from me, A.Pr. 617. Tt rovS' av
eiTrois a'AAo; what else could you say of this man? S..4n.646. OVK
av AeK^flctrjv, / would not be left behind (in any case), Hd. 4,97.
Ats 5 TOV avrov Trora/xov OVK av e/x/iJcu^s, you cannot (could not)
step twice into the same river, P. CratAQ2*. 'HSecos av epoi/Aryv
AeTTTi'vrjv, / would gladly ask (I should like to ask) Leptines, D. 20,
129. IToi ovv Tpa7roi/>ie0' av en; in what other direction can we
(could we) possibly turn? P. Eu.290 & . So ftovXoLfJirjv av, velim, I
should like: cf. ffiovXofjirjv av, vellem (1339).
1328. The optative thus used is called potential, and corre-
sponds generally to the English potential forms with may, can,
might, could, would, etc. It is equivalent to the Latin potential
subjunctive, as dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc., you may say, believe,
perceive, think, etc. The limiting condition is generally too indefi-
nite to be distinctly present to the mind, and can be expressed
only by words like perhaps, possibly, or probably, or by such vague
forms as if he pleased, if he should try, if he could, if there should be
an opportunity, etc. Sometimes a general condition, like in any
possible case, is felt to be implied, so that the optative with av
hardly differs from an absolute future; as in OVK av fjitOeLurjv
TOV Opovov, 1 will not (would never) give up the throne, Ar. 72.830.
See the examples in 1330.
1329. The potential optative can express every degree
of potentiality from the almost absolute future of the last
example to the apodosis of a future condition expressed by
the optative with d (1408), where the form of the condi-
tion is assimilated to that of the conclusion. The inter-
mediate steps may be seen in the following examples :
OVK av SiKaiio? es /ca/cov ireaot/xt rt, / could not justly fall into
any trouble, S. yln.240, where SiKattos points to the condition if jus-
tice should be done. Ovre crOiovo~i TrAeuo ^ Svvavrat <epeiv Stap-
payetev yap av, nor do they eat more than they can carry, for (if
they did) they would burst, X. C. 8, 2 21 , where d ecr&oiev is implied
by the former clause.
1330. N. The potential optative of the second person may
express a mild command or exhortation ; as ^wpots av eicr<o, you
may go in, or gain, S.P^.674; /cAvois av vjor}, hear me now, S.ELQ37.
See 1328.
1331. N". The potential optative may express what may here-
after prove to be true or to have been true; as 17 fj.rj (cro^ta)
<j>av\y TIS av eivj, my wisdom may turn out to be of a mean kind*
1337] THE MOODS. 285
P. Sy. 175 e ; TTOV S^T' av e?ev 01 &voi', where may the strangers bef
(i.e. where is it likely to prove that they are) f S. El. 1450; et^crav 8'
av OVTOI KptyTes, and these would probably prove to be (or to have been)
Cretans, Hd. 1,2; avrat 8e OVK av TroAAat etrycrav, and these (the
islands) would not prove to be many, T.I, 9.
1332. N, Occasionally av is omitted with the potential optative,
chiefly in Homer; as ov rt KctKwrepov aXXo irdOoipi, I could suffer
nothing else that is worse, II. 19,321.
1333. N. The Attic poets sometimes omit av after such indefi-
nite expressions as ea-rw OOTCS, &TTIV OTTOS, eortv OTTOI, etc. ; as ctrr
ovv OTTWS "AXKr)<TTi<; es yiypas ju.oA.oi; is it possible then that Alcestis
can come to old age f TZ.AL 52 ; so 113, and A. Pr.292.
1334. N. For the potential optative in Homer referring to
past time, see 1399.
POTENTIAL, INDICATIVE.
1335. The past tenses of the indicative with av express
a past action as dependent on past circumstances or condi-
tions. Thus, while y\0ev means he went, tfXOtv av means he
would have gone (under some past circumstances) .
1336. This is called the potential indicative; and it probably
arose as a past form of the potential optative, so that, while l\6oi
av meant originally he may go or he would be likely to go, rjXOev av
meant he may have gone or he would have been likely to go. It is the
equivalent of the Latin forms like diceres, you would have said,
crederes, you would have believed, cerneres, putares, etc., which are
past potential forms corresponding to dicas, credas, cernas, putes,
etc. (1328). Thus putet and putaret are equivalent to ototro av,
he would be likely to think, and <uero av, he would have been likely to
think.
1337. The potential indicative sometimes expresses (in its
original force) what would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have
happened (and perhaps did happen) with no reference to any
definite condition. E.g.
'YTTO KCV TaXacrfypovd ircp Scos el\ev,fear might have seized (i.e.
would have been likely to seize) even a man of stout heart, 7/.4,421.
*HA0 TOVTO rovveiSos rax* av opyrj /?iao-0e'v, this disgrace may per-
haps have come from violence of wrath, S. 0. T. 523. 'Ev ravrrj rrj
tyAi/a'a Aeyovres irpo? v/u.a? cv 17 av fJuaXurra 7rt<TTvcraT, talking
to you at that age at which you would have been most likely to put
trust in them, P.Ap.l&.
286 SYNTAX. [1338
1338. Generally, however, the potential indicative implies a
reference to some circumstances different from the real ones, so
that rj\0ev av commonly means he would have gone (if something had
not been as it was). The unreal past condition here may be as
vague and indefinite as the future condition to which the potential
optative refers (1328). E.g.
Ov yap KV Qvvdp..(jua (impf.) Ovpduiv a.Trtticra.d'Oai \i6ov, for
we could not have moved the stone from the doorway, Od. 9, 304. Com-
pare ovSev av KOLKOV Troirjauav, they could do no harm (if they should
try), with ouSev av /ca/cov CTroi'^crav, they could have done no harm
(if they had tried). Tovrov rts av (rot rdvSpos aueLVWv evpcOrj;
who could have been found better than this man? S.Aj. 119. 'O// rjv,
KOL rag ^etpas OVK av Ka^ewpoov, it was late, and they would not have
seen the show of hands, X. H. 1.7 7 . IlotW av epywv aTrecrrrjaav;
from what labors would they have shrunk? 1.4.83.
1339. When no definite condition is understood with the poten-
tial indicative, the imperfect with av is regularly past, as it always
is in Homer (1398). See the examples in 1338.
The imperfect with av referring to present time, which is com-
mon in apodosis after Homer (1397), appears seldom in purely
potential expression, chiefly in eftovXo/jLrjv av, vellem, / should wish,
I should like (which can mean also 1 should have wished) ; as
e/?ovAo/x,?7V av avrovs a\r)0rj Ae'yav, I should like it if they spoke
the truth, L.12,22.
1340. The potential indicative may express every degree
of potentiality from that seen in 1337 to that of the apodosis
of an unfulfilled condition actually expressed. (Compare
the potential optative, 1329.) Here, after Homer, the im-
perfect with av my express present time (see 1397). The
intermediate steps to the complete apodosis may be seen in
the following examples :
"Hyere .rrjv dp-tjvr)V O/AWS* o yap rjv o n av eTroteire, you still
kept the peace; for there was nothing which you could have done
(if you had not), D. 18, 43. HoAAov yap av ra opyava yv ata,
for the tools would be worth much (if they had this power), P.Rp.
374".
For the full conditional sentences, see 1397.
1341. N. For a peculiar potential expression formed by imper-
fects denoting obligation etc., like I8et, XPV V ' e ^ c< > w ^ n the infinitive
see 1400.
1348] THE MOODS. 28?
II. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EX-
HORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. -SUBJUNCTIVE AND
INDICATIVE WITH ^ OR fit] ov IN CAUTIOUS ASSER-
TIONS. -"Oirws AND i>iro>s rf WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE
IN COMMANDS AND PROHIBITIONS.
1342. The imperative expresses a command, exhorta-
tion, or entreaty; as Xeye, speak thou; <e>ye, begone!
e'X#eV&>, let him come ; ^atpoWow, let them rejoice,
1343. N. A combination of a command and a question is found
in such phrases as oto-0' o Spoiarov; dost thou know what to do?
A.Y.AV. 54, where the imperative is the verb of the relative clause.
So ol(rOa vvv a /AOI yei/o-0<oj do you know what must be done for mel
E. I. T. 1203.
1344. The first person of the subjunctive (generally
plural) is used in exhortations. Its negative is /-tr;. E.g.
*Ia>/xev, let us go; iSwftei/, let us see; /xr) TOVTO Trotoi/jtcv, let us
not do this. This supplies the want of a first person of the imperative.
1345. N. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by
aye (ayere), <e/>e, or lOi, come! These words are used without
regard to the number or person of the verb which follows ; as aye
/uu'/AVTe TroWes, 7/.2,331.
1346. In prohibitions, in the second and third per-
sons, the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive is
used with ^ and its compounds. E.g.
Mr) Trocet TOVTO, do not do this (habitually), or do not go on doing
this; fjuY] 77-01170-775 TOVTO, (simply) do not do this. Mr) Kara TOUS
I/O/AOVS 8tKao-r7T' fjirj ftoirjO'qcrrjTe r<3 TreTrovOori Sen/a* /u,r) evop-
KetTe, "do not judge according to the laws; do not help him who has
suffered outrages; do not abide by your oaths" D. 21, 211.
The two forms here differ merely as present and aorist (1272).
1347. N. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes
occurs in prohibitions ; the second person very rarely.
1348. In Homer the independent subjunctive with ^
(generally in the third person) may express fear or anxiety,
with a desire to avert the object of the fear. E.g.
Mr) 8r) v^as lXwo-t, may they not seize the ships (as I fear they may),
11. 16, 128. Mr7 Tt ^oXtoo-a/aevo? p cr) Ka/cov via? *A^aio>v, may he
not (as I fear he may) in his wrath do any harm to the sons of the
Achaeans, 11.2,195,
288 SYNTAX. [1349
1349. N". This usage occurs also in Euripides and Plato.
See Moods and Tenses, 261-264.
1350. An independent subjunctive with it?/ may express
a cautious assertion, or a suspicion that something may be
true ; and with /AT) ov a cautious negation, or a suspicion that
something may not be true. This is a favorite usage with
Plato. E.g.
M.rj aypoiKorepov rj TO aXrjOes CITTCII/, / suspect that the truth may
be too rude a thing to tell, P. G. 462 e . 'AAAA ^M] ov rovr rj yaXtTrov
but I rather think that this may not be a difficult thing, P. Ap. 39 a .
1351. The indicative may be thus used (1350) with py or fj-rj
ov, referring to present or past time. E.g.
'AAAa fM) TOVTO ov KoAws (o/AoA-o-y^o-a/Acv, but perhaps we did
not do well in assenting to this, P.Men.89 c . (Compare <f>oJ3ovfjuu /AT)
ttraOev, I fear that he suffered, 1380.)
1352. In Attic Greek oVws and oVws /ooj are used collo-
quially with the future indicative in commands and prohi-
bitions. E.g.
Nw ovv OTTOS cro>cr6s /AC, so now save me, Ar. N. 1177. Karaflov
TO, aKevrj, ^WTTODS epets IvravOa ftrjoev i/^evSos, put down the packs,
and tell no lies here, Ar. 72.627. "OTTOJS ovv iicreo~0 aioi T^S cXcv-
^eptas, (.see <Aa< you) prove yourselves worthy of freedom, X. .4.1,7 8 .
^OTTWS /xot tti) cpets ort lort TO, SooSexa Si? e, see ^af you do not tell
me that twelve is twice six, P. Rp. 337 b .
1353. X. The construction of 1352 is often explained by an
ellipsis of o-KoVet or ovcorreiTe (see 1372).
1354. N. The subjunctive occasionally occurs here with oVa>s
y^, but not with OTTWS alone.
III. HOMERIC SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE.
-INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
1355. In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen-
tences sometimes has the force of a future indicative. E.g.
Ov yap TTco Totovs iSov dvepas, ovoe tSw/xat, for 1 never yet saw
nor shall I ever see such men, 11. 1,262. Kat TTOTC TIS etTrryo-iv, and
one will (or may) some time say, 7Z.6,459.
1356. X. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take
K< or dv in a potential sense. (See 1305, 2.)
1361] THE MOODS. 289
1357 N. The question TL TrdOu ; what will become of me f or
what harm will it do me f (literally, what shall 1 undergo ?) carries
this' use even into Attic Greek. E.g.
*O fjiou eyco, TL irdOd); Od. 5,465. Tt TrdOtD T\rjfi<Dv; ivhat will
become of me, wretched one? A. P. 912. To /xeAAov, ei XPV> Tcicrofjuu'-
Ti yap TrdOa) ; 1 shall suffer what is to come, if it must be ; for what
harm can it do me? E. Ph. 895.
1358. The first person of the subjunctive may be
used in questions of appeal, where a person asks him-
self or another what he is to do. The negative is //,??.
It is often introduced by ftovXei or fiov\ecr0e (in poetry
tfe'Xet? or 'tfe'Xere). E.g.
EITTCD ravra; shall 1 say this? or fiovXei e?7ro> ravra; do you
wish that I should say this? Hot Tpa7reo/x,cu; TTOL iroptvOG);
whither shall I turn? whither shall I go? E.Hec.lQQQ. liov 89
)8ovA iax0to/Aevoi dj/ayi/to/Aevj where noio wilt thou that we sit
down and read? P.Phdr.22S e .
1359. N. The third person is sometimes found in these ques-
tions, chiefly when rts has the force of we; as Tt TIS eTrai TOVTO
<f)rg ; what shall we say this is ? D. 19, 88.
IV. 0* rf WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE.
1360. The subjunctive (generally the aorist) and
sometimes the future indicative are used with the
double negative ov prj in the sense of an emphatic
future indicative with ov. E.g.
Ov /M) TTiOrjrai, he will not obey, S.Ph. 103. Ovre yap ytyverai
ovrc yeyoi/ev, ovSc ovv fir] yevrjrai, for there is not, nor has there
been, nor will there ever be, etc., P. J Rp.492 e . Ov TTOT* e e/xov ye firj
Trd@r)<; roSe, you never shall suffer this at my hands, S. El. 1029. Ov
rot /AT/TTore o-e . . . OLKOVTCI TIS a^ei, no one shall ever take you against
your will, etc., S. 0. C. 176.
1361. In the dramatic poets, the second person singular
of the future indicative (occasionally of the aorist subjunc-
tive) with ov /xrj may express a strong prohibition. E.g.
Ov fJLrj Kara^r^(reL, don't come down (you shall not come down),
Ar.F.397. Ov firj raSe yrjpvVei, do not speak out in this way,
E./7i>.213. Ov JUT) o-/c<o^s, do not jeer, Ar.AT.296.
This construction is not interrogative.
290 SYNTAX. [1362
V. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER Xva, s, oirws, o<j>pa,
AND jiVj.
1362. The final particles are tm, o>?, OTTO)?, and (epic
and lyric) o<j>pa, that, in order that. To these must be
added pr), lest or that, which became in use a negative
final particle. The clauses which are introduced by
these particles may be divided into three classes :
1. Pure final clauses, expressing a purpose or motive;
as epxerai i'va TOVTO HSy, he is coming that he may see
this. Here all the final particles are used (see 1368).
2. Object clauses with oVo)? after verbs signifying to-
strive for, to care for, to effect ; as o-KOTrei OTTCOS TOVTG
yevrjcrerai, see to it that this is done.
3. Clauses with ^ after verbs of fear or caution ; as
(frofteirai, /JLTJ TOVTO ryevrjTai, he fears that (or lest) thit>
may happen.
1363. The first two classes are to be specially distinguished.
The object clauses in 2 are the direct object of the leading verb v
and can even stand in apposition to an object accusative like
TOVTO] as ovcoVei TOVTO, OTTCOS pff o* oif/trou, see to this, namely, that
he does not see you. But a final clause could stand in apposition
only to TOVTOV eveKa,for the sake of this, or Sia TOVTO, to this end; as
epx erat TOVTOV li/e/ca, iva ^ftas tSft, he is coming for this purpose,
namely, that he may see us.
For the origin of the clauses in 3, and the development of final
clauses, see Moods and Tenses, 307-316.
1364. The negative in all these clauses is /XT}; except
after ptf, lest, where ov is used.
I. PURE FINAL CLAUSES.
1365. Final clauses take the subjunctive after primary
tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. E.g.
AOKC? fioi KaraKavcrai TO.? aju,dtas, tva fjurj TO. &vyr) ?;/u,a>v o~rpa.-
Tfjyy, I think we should burn our wagons, that our cattle may not be
our commanders, X. A . 3, 2 27 . EITTO) TI orjra KaAA', LV 6 p y ivy irXeov ;
shall I speak still further, that you may be the more angry f S. 0. T.
364. UapaKaXeis tarpons, OTTOO? /JLYJ airoOavr), you call in physicians,
that he may not die, X. M.2,10 Z . AvcrtTeXei eacrat h TO> Tra/ooVn, /M)
1370] THE MOODS. 291
KOL TOVTOV TroXtfjuov KpovO co/xc Oo, it is expedient to allow it for
a time, lest we add him to the number of our enemies, X. C.2,4 12 .
<J>t'Aos e/SovAero eivat rots ^uytcrra Svva/xei/ots, tva dSt/ccov /x^ Si 80119
SIKIJV, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he might do
wrong and not be punished, X. A. 2, 6 21 . TOVTOV Ive/ca c/>tAcov coero
8eicr$ai, cos crvve/oyovs tx ol > ^ e thought he needed friends for this pur-
pose, namely, that he might have helpers, X.^l.1,9 21 . 'A^tKo/x^v, OTTCOS
trov TT/OOS So/xovs eA#ovTos ev 7r/3aai/xt rt, / came Aa / might gain
some good by your return home, S. O. T. 1005.
KecaA?7 Karavevcro/xat, 6<f>pa. irtTTOLOrjs, I will nod my assent, that
you may trust me, 11.1,522. "EvOa /car eerier', o<p* crapov OOLTTTOI,
he tarried there, that he might bury his companion, O</.3,284.
1366. N". The future indicative is rarely found in final clauses
after OTTCDS, o<j>pa, cos, and ^. This is almost entirely confined to
poetry. See Od. 1,56, 4, 163; 11. 20, 301; Ar.M.495.
1367. N. The adverb av (/ce) is sometimes joined with cos,
OTTCOS, and 6<j>pa before the subjunctive in final clauses; as cos av
;, dvra/covcrov, hear the other side, that you may learn, X. A . 2, 5 16 .
For this use, see Moods and Tenses, 325-28. The final opta-
tive with av is probably always potential (1327).
1368. N". "O<f>pa is the most common final particle in Homer,
cos in tragedy, and Iva in comedy and prose. But OTTCOS exceeds tva
in Thucydides and Xenophon. *Os was never in good use in prose,
except in Xenophon.
1369. As final clauses express the purpose or motive of
some person, they admit the double construction of indirect
discourse (1481,2; 1503). Hence, instead of the optative
after past tenses, we can have the mood and tense which
would be used when a person conceived the purpose;
that is, we can say either ijA0ev tva 1801, he came that he
might see (1365), or rjXOev tva iSy, because the person
himself would have said e/o^o/xat tva tSco, I come that I may
see. E.g.
Evve/?ovAev rots aAAots e/CTrAevcrai, OTTCOS CTU TrAeov 6 crtros
dvTtcrx27> he advised the rest to sail away, that the provisions might
hold out longer, T. 1, 65. Ta TrAota KareKavcrev, Tva /xr) Kvpos 8ta/3?7>
he burned the vessels, that Cyrus might not pass over, X.^4.1,4 18 .
1370. N. The subjunctive is even more common than the
optative after past tenses in certain authors, as Thucydides and
Herodotus ; but much less so in others, as Homer and Xenophon.
292 SYNTAX. [1371
1371. The past tenses of the indicative are used in final
clauses with Iva, sometimes with OTTWS or os, to denote that
the purpose is dependent on some act which does not or
did not take place (as on some unfulfilled condition or
some unaccomplished wish), and therefore is not or was
not attained. E.g.
Ti fM ov Xa/3vv eKTCivas evOvs, ws eSet^a /X^TTOTC, /c.r.X. ; why did
you not take me. and kill me at once, that I might never have shown
(as I have done), etc.? S. O. T.1391. <l>e{5, <ev, TO /XT) ra Trpay/Aar'
dv0pa>7TOis Xv <f>d>V7]v, iv rjvav /x^Sei/ ot Setvot Aoyot, A las! alas!
that the facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence might
be as nothing, E. frag. 442.
II. OBJECT CLAUSES WITH OTTft)? AFTER VERBS OF
STRIVING, ETC.
1372. "Object clauses depending on verbs signifying
to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the
future indicative with OTTO*? or OTTO)? /jutf after both pri-
mary and secondary tenses.
The future optative may be used after secondary
tenses, as the correlative of the future indicative, but
commonly the indicative is retained on the principle of
1369. Kg.
&povri OTTCOS py&v avdiov rfjs rt/^s Tavrrjs TT panels, take heed
that you do nothing unworthy of this honor, 1.2,37. 'ETre/xeXetro OTTO?
p) acriTOL TTOTC lcroivro,he took care that they should never be without
food, X. C.S, I 43 (here eowrai would be more common). "ETrpatr-
crov OTTO)? rts /3t7#eia rj ^ei, they were trying to effect (this), that some
assistance should come, T. 3, 4.
For OTTWS and OTTWS f} with the future indicative in com-
mands and prohibitions, often explained by an ellipsis of O-KOTTCI
or o-KorretTe in this construction, see 1352.
1373. The future indicative with OTTWS sometimes follows verbs
of exhorting, entreating, commanding, and forbidding, which com-
monly take an infinitive of the object; as Sta/ceXevovrat OTTWS
Ti/Atop^o-ercu Travras TOI>S TOLOVTOVS, they exhort him to take ven-
geance on all such, P. Rp. 549 e . (See 1377.)
1374. 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive
and optative is used here, as in final clauses. E.g.
1379] THE MOODS. 293
"AAAov TOV Tri(A.e\r](TU rj OTTOOS o rt /?A.TiOTOi TroXirat to/xei/;
will you care for anything except that we may be the best possible citi-
zens? P. <7.515 b . 'ETre/AeAero avrw, OTTWS ad avopoL-jrooa Stare-
Aoiei/, Ae toofc care that they should always remain slaves, X. C. 8, 1 44 .
2. Xenophon allows <o? with the subjunctive or optative here.
1375. N". MT?, lest, may be used for OTTWS /x>j with the subjunctive.
1376. N. "Av or Ke can be used here, as in final clauses (1367),
with OTTCOS or ws and the subjunctive.
1377. In Homer the construction of 1372 with cm-cos and
the future is not found j but verbs signifying to plan, con-
sider, and try take OTTWS or w? and the subjunctive or opta-
tive. E.g.
3>/oauyu0' OTTQJS ox' apicrra yevrjrai, let us consider how the very
best may be done, Od.13,365. 3>pa<rcreTai <o? /ce v rj rat, e will plan
for his return, Od. 1,205. BovAevov OTTOJS o^' aptcrra yevotro, <Aey
deliberated that the very best might be done, 0d.9,420. So rarely with
AiWo/xat, entreat (see 1373).
III. CLAUSES WITH ^77 AFTER VERBS OF FEARING, ETC.
1378. After verbs denoting fear, caution, or danger,
p;, Aa or Zes, takes the subjunctive after primary
tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. The
subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain
the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the
mind. The negative form is fif) ov (1364). E.g.
oj3ovfMi fjir) TOVTO yevT/rai (vereor ne accidat), I fear that this
may happen; (froftovfjuu [MJ ov TOVTO yevr/rcu (vereor ut accidat),'
I fear that this may not happen (1364). 3>poi/Tta> fjwj KpaTio-Tov y
pot criyav, / am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent, X. M.
4,2 s9 . OuKert e7reTi$evro, SeSiores fjurj aTroTfirjOeirj&av, they no
longer made attacks, fearing lest they should be cut off", X. A . 3, 4 2ft .
'E<j!>o/3owTo fjL-q TL TrdOr), they feared lest he should suffer anything
(1369), X.Sy.2,11.
1379. N". The future indicative is very rarely used after py in
this construction. But oVoos /x,ry is sometimes used here, as in the
object clauses of 1372, with both future indicative and subjunc-
tive ; as 8e'8oi/ca era-cos //.^ avdyKrj yevr/(rerat, 1 fear that there may
come a necessity, D. 9, 75. "OTTCOS yuti; here is the equivalent of ^xw,
that or lest, in the ordinary construction.
294 SYNTAX. [1380
1380. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear which
are present or past. Here ^ takes the present and past
tenses of the indicative. E.g.
AeSoiKa JM] irXvrywv Sect, I fear that you need blows, Ar. N". 493.
3>o/3ovfJitOa fj.rj d/A</>OTpa)v a/ua Ty/xapr^Ka/xev, we fear that we have
missed both at once, T. 3, 53. Aei8a> /JUT) Sr) TTOVTCL Ota v^/xeprea etTrev,
/ fear that all which the Goddess said was true, Od. 5, 300. "Opa /xi)
7rai<oi/ eAeyev, beware lest he was speaking in jest, P. Th. 145 b .
VI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1381. In conditional sentences the clause containing
the condition is called the protasis, and that containing
the conclusion is called the apodosis. The protasis is
introduced by some form of et, if.
Ai for.ei is sometimes used in Homer.
1382. The adverb av (epic KG or Kev) is regularly
joined to el in the protasis when the verb is in the
subjunctive; el with av forming eaz/, av, or ijv. (See
1299, 2.) The simple el is used with the indicative
and optative. The same adverb av is used in the
apodosis with the optative, and also with the past tenses
of the indicative when it is implied that the condition
is not fulfilled.
1383. 1. The negative adverb of the protasis is regu-
larly arj, that of the apodosis is ov.
2. When ov stands in a protasis, it generally belongs to some
particular word (as in ov 7roXXoi,few, ov <f>r)[u, I deny), and not. to
the protasis as a whole; as eav re <ru /cat *Avuros ov (f>fJTe lav TC
<f>fjTe t both if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it, P.Ap.25 b .
1384. 1. The supposition contained in a protasis may
be either particular or general. A particular supposition
refers to a definite act or to several definite acts, supposed
to occur at some definite time or times ; as if he (noiv) has
this, he will give it; if he had it, he gave it; if he had had
the power, he would have helped me ; if he shall receive it (or
if he receives it), he will give it; if he should receive it, he
would give it. A general supposition refers indefinitely to
any act or acts of a given class, which may be supposed to
1387] THE MOODS. 295
occur or to have occurred at any time ; as if ever he receives
anything, he (always) gives it; if ever he received anything,
he (always) gave it; if (on any occasion) he had had the power,
fie would (always) have helped me; if ever any one shall (or
should) wish to go, he will (or would) always be permitted.
2. Although this distinction is seen in all classes of conditions
(as the examples show), it is only in the present and past conditions
which do not imply non-fulfilment, i.e. in those of class I. (below),
that thb distinction affects the construction. Here, however, we have
two classes of conditions which contain only general suppositions.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1385. The classification of conditional sentences is based partly
on the time to which the supposition refers, partly on what is
implied with regard to the fulfilment of the condition, and partly
on the distinction between particular and general suppositions
explained in 1384.
1386. Conditional sentences have four classes, two (I.
and II.) containing present and past suppositions, and two
(III. and IV.) containing future suppositions. Class I.
has two forms, one (a) with chiefly particular suppositions
(present and past), the other (b) with only general suppo-
sitions (1. present, 2. past).
1387. We have thus the following forms :
I. Present and past suppositions implying nothing as to
fulfilment of condition :
((protasis) c? with indicative ; (apodosis) any
form of the verb. Et Trpacrorei TOVTO,
x, if he is doing this, it is well. Ei Z-
TOVTO, /caXw? x a > */ ne did Mis, it is welt. (See
1390.) In Latin : si hocfacit, bene est.
1. (prot.) lai/with subjunctive; (apod.) pres-
ent indicative. *Eav TIS /cXcTrrr/, KoXa^erai,
if any one (ever) steals, he is (always) pun-
( iera l
' 2. (prot.) ei with optative ; (apod) imperfect
indicative. Et TIS xXcVrot, cKo\deTo,ifa,ny
one ever stole, he was (always) punished.
(See 1393, 2.) For the Latin, see 1388.
296 SYNTAX. [1388
II. Present and past suppositions implying that the
condition is not fulfilled :
(protasis) d with past tense of indicative ; (apodosis)
past tense of indicative with av. Ei 7rpac TOVTO,
/caA-w? av ecr^ev, if he had done this, it would have been
well. Et eTTpao-o-e TOVTO, /caAws av et^ev, if he were doing
this, it would (now) be well, or if he had done this, it
would have been well. (See 1397.)
In Latin : si hoc faceret, bene esset (present) ; si hoc
fecisset, bene fuisset (past).
III. Future suppositions in more vivid form:
(prot.) edv with subjunctive (sometimes ei with future
indicative) ; (apod.) any future form. 'Eav up a 0-0-77
(or Trpa^r?) TOVTO, KaAws 2a, if he shall do this (or if
he does this), it ivill be well (sometimes also a 7rpaei
TOVTO, etc.). (See 1403 and 1405.)
In Latin: si hoc faciet (orfecerit), bene erit.
IV. Future suppositions in less vivid form :
(prot.) ei with optative ; (apod.) optative with av.
Et TT pa (TO- 01 (or TT pa| etc) TOVTO, /caAws av ej(oi, if he
should do this, it would be well. (See 1408.)
In Latin : si hoc faciat, bene sit.
1388. N. The Latin commonly agrees with the English in not
marking the distinction between the general and the particular
present and past conditions by different forms, and uses the indica-
tive in both alike. Occasionally even the Greek does the same (1395).
1389. N". In external form (Idv with the subjunctive) the gen-
eral present condition agrees with the more vivid future condition.
But in sense there ig a much closer connection between the general
and the particular present condition, which in most languages (and
sometimes even in Greek) coincide also in form (1388). On the
other hand, lav with the subjunctive in a future condition agrees
generally in sense with et and the future indicative (1405), and is
never interchangeable with ct and the present indicative.
I. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH NOTHING
IMPLIED,
(a) SIMPLE SUPPOSITIONS, CHIEFLY PARTICULAR.
1390. When the protasis simply states a present or
1393] THE MOODS. 297
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the
fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with el.
Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis. E.g.
Ei rjav^iav ^i'AiTTTros ayei, ou/ceVi 8et Aeyeiv, if Philip is keeping
peace (with us), we need talk no Longer, 1). 8, 5. Ei ya> &al8pov
ay vow, Kal e/juavrov eTriAeArjoyxcu dAAa yap ovoerepa eon TOVTWV,
if I do not know Phaedrus, 1 have forgotten myself; but neither of these
is so, P. Phdr. 228*. Ei Otov TJV, OVK rjv cucrxpo/cepS^s, if he was the
son of a God, he was not avaricious, P.Rp. 408 C . 'AAA' ci So/cei,
TrAew/xei/, but if it pleases you, let us sail, S. PA. 526. KaKioT 1 airoXoi-
fjirjv, HavOtav ei /ar) <puXS), may 1 die most wretchedly, if I do not love
Xanthias, Ar. R. 579.
1391. N". Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of
this class if it expresses merely a present intention or necessity that
something shall hereafter be done ; as alpe TrXfj Krpov, et /aa^et,
raise your spur, if you are going to Jight, Ar. Av. 759. Here ei /AeAAei?
/u,axeo-0cu would be the more common expression in prose. It is
important to notice that a future of this kind could never be changed
to the subjunctive, like the ordinary future in protasis (1405).
1392. N. For present or past conditions containing a potential
indicative or optative (with av), see 1421, 3.
(6) PRESENT AND PAST GENERAL, SUPPOSITIONS.
1393. In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses
a customary or repeated action or a general truth in
present or past time, and the protasis refers in a general
way to any of a class of acts.
1. Present general suppositions have edv with the
subjunctive in the protasis, and the present indicative
(or some other present form denoting repetition) in the
apodosis. E.g.
*Hv e'yyvs I A Oy Qavaros, ovSets fiovXtrai Ovfl<TKW, if death
comes near, no one is (ever) willing to die, E. ALG71. "ATras Aoyos,
av a7rrj ra Trpay/xara, /uaratov n <cu'verai Kal KCVOV, all speech, if
deeds are wanting, appears a vain and empty thing, D. 2, 12.
2. Past general suppositions have el with the opta-
tive in the protasis, and the imperfect indicative (or
some other form denoting past repetition) in the
apodosis. E.g.
298 SYNTAX. [1394
Ei rims OopvfiovfjLtvovs cu 0-001 TO, Karaorfievvvvai rrjv rapa^jv
CTreipaTO, if he saw any falling into disorder (or whenever he saw,
etc.), he (always) tried to quiet the confusion, X. C. 5, 3 55 . Et TIS
avTetVoi, vOv<s TtOvrJKei, if any one refused, he was immediately
put to death, T. 8, 66. This construction occurs only once in Homer.
1394, N. The gnomic aorist, which is a primary tense (1268),
can always be used here in the apodosis with a dependent sub-
junctive; as rfv rts Trapaj3aivr), tflplav avrois e7re0co-av, if any
one transgresses, they (always) impose a penalty on him, X. C. 1, 2 2 .
1395. N. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the
subjunctive or optative in general suppositions ; that is, these sen-
tences may follow the construction of ordinary present and past
suppositions (1390), as in Latin and English; as ct TIS Bvo f) /ecu
TrAeovs Tt? 77/xepas A,oyicTcu, /xaratos etrrtv, if any one counts on
two or even more days, he is a fool, S. 7V. 944.
1396.* N. Here, as in future conditions (1406), ci (without av)
is sometimes used with the subjunctive in poetry. In Homer this
is the more frequent form in general conditions.
H. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPOSI-
TION CONTEAEY TO FACT.
1397. When the protasis states a present or past sup-
position, implying that the condition is not or was not
fulfilled, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used
in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis has the
adverb av.
The imperfect here refers to present time or to an
act as going on or repeated in past time, the aorist to
a simple occurrence in past time, and the (rare) pluper-
fect to an act completed in past or present time. E.g.
. Tavra OVK av iBvvavro Trotetv, a fjJrj Statrry /nerpia e^pwvro,
they would not be able (as they are} to do this, if they did not lead an
abstemious life, X. C. 1 , 2 16 . IIoAv av ^av/xatrroTCpov rjv, el ert/xoivTO,
it would be far more wonderful, if they were honored, P. Rp. 489 b .
Et -tycrai/ avSpes ayaOol, w? crv <>}s, OVK av TTOTC ravra 7rao-^ov,
if they had been good men, as you say, they would never have suffered
these things (referring to several cases), P. <?.516 e . Kat ra>? av
aTTtOavov, L fM) ff apxq KareXvOrj, and perhaps I should have
perished, if the government had not been put down, P.Ap. 32 d . Et
1401] THE MOODS. 299
d,7reKptv<o, tKavws av 17877 eue/^aOt^Kr), if you had answered, 1
should already have learned enough (which now I have not done),
P.Euthyph.ll c . Et /AT) tyms rjXOcre, 7ropevo/x,e0a av eVt TOV
(3ao~i\ca, if you had not come (aor.), we should now be on our way
(impf.) to the King, X.4.2, 1 4 .
1398. N. In Homer the imperfect in this class of sentences is
always past (see 77.7,273 ; 8, 130) ; and the present optative is used
where the Attic would have the imperfect referring to present time ;
as ei JAW TL<S TOV ovet/oov oAAo? eVto-Trev, i/'eOSos /cev </>at/xev /cat
yoo"<tot'/x,e$a /AaAAov, if any other had told this dream (1397), we
should call it a lie and rather turn away from it, 11 2, 80 : see 24, 222.
1399. N. In Homer the optative with KC is occasionally past in
apodosis ; as /cat 7 vu /cev ev0' aTroAotro Atvetas, et /XT) vo^cre 'A<f>po-
StVry, and now Aeneas would there have perished, had not Aphrodite
perceived him, II. 5, 311. (Here aTrwAero would be the regular form
in Homer, as in other Greek.)
Homer has also a past potential optative : see 72. 5, 85.
1400. 1. The imperfects eSet, XP*1 V or *XPV V > *v v > *s
T;V, and others denoting obligation, propriety, possibility, and
the like, are often used with the infinitive to form an
apodosis implying the non-fulfilment of a condition. "Av
is not used here, as these phrases simply express in other
words what is usually expressed by the indicative with av.
Thus, eSet <re TOVTOV <tAeti>, you ought to love him (but do not),
or you ought to have loved him (but did not}, is substantially equiva-
lent to you would love him, or would have loved him (e^>tAeis av
TOVTOV}, if you did your duty (TO. Seovra). So e^v (rot TOVTO
TTOIT; (rat, you might have done this (but you did not do it} ; etxos fjv
o~e. TOVTO 7rot^o-at, you would properly (et/coTw?) have done this.
The actual apodosis is here always in the infinitive, and the reality
of the action of the infinitive is generally denied.
2. When the present infinitive is used, the construction
refers to the present or to continued or repeated action in
the past ; when the aorist is used, it refers to the past. E.g.
Tovo-8e fjw) f)v eSet, these ought not to be living (as they are},
S. Ph. 418. M eve iv yap crjv, for he might have stood his ground
(but did not}, D. 3, 17. avetv ere xpfy irdpos TC'KVWV, you ought to
have died before your children, E. And. 1208. Et e^ovAero oYtfatos
etvai, ff)v avraJ /xio-floio-ai TOV OLKOV, he might have let the house, if
he had wished to be just, L.32,23.
1401. N. When the actual apodosis is in the verb of obligation,
300 SYNTAX. [1402
etc., cSei av can be used ; as ct TO. Se'oi/ro, OVTOL (rvve/3ovXc.vcrav, ovotv
av v/xas vw I Set fiovXtvtvQai, if these men had given you the advice
you needed, there would now be no need of your deliberating, D. 4. 1.
1402. 1. Other imperfects, especially efiovXopyv, sometimes
take the infinitive without av on the same principle with ISei etc. ;
as eftovXo/jL-rjV OVK e/oieiv evOdSe, I would I were not contending
here (as I am), or / would not be contending here, A.Y.R. 866.
2. So <o<eAoi/ or ox^eAAov, ought, aorist and imperfect of 6<f>eXXa>,
owe (epic for o<etAo)), in Homer ; whence comes the use of <o<eA.ov
in wishes (1512) ; as c5<eAe Kvpo? Zfiv, would that Cyrus were alive,
X.^.2,1 4 .
3. So /xeAAoi/ with the infinitive; as <0reo-0at c/xeXXov, ei /A?)
eewre?, 7 should have perished (was about to perish}, if thou hadst not
spoken, Od. 13, 383. So D. 19, 159.
III. FUTURE CONDITIONS, MORE VIVID FORM.
SUBJUNCTIVE IN PROTASIS WITH FUTURE APODOSIS.
1403. When a supposed future case is stated dis-
tinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if 1
go), the protasis has the subjunctive with edv (epic el
KG), arid the apodosis has the future indicative or some
other form of future time. E.g.
Ei /xei> Kv MeveXaov 'AAeavSpos /caraTre^v^, avros CTTCI^
EAevr^v e^erw Kat KTT^uaTa Travra, /" Alexander shall slay Menelaus,
then let him have Helen and all the goods himself, II. 3, 281. "Av TIS
av0i(TT77Tcu, TTLpacr6fji.Oa -^eLpovaOaL, if any one shall stand opposed
to us, we shall try to overcome him, X. A. 7, 3 11 . 'Eav ow tys vvv,
TTOTC tr otKot ; z/ therefore you go now, when will you be at home *
X.C.5,3 27 .
1404. K The older English forms if he shall go and if he go
both express the force of the Greek subjunctive and future indica-
tive in protasis ; but the ordinary modern English uses if he goes
even when the time is clearly future.
1405. The future indicative with ei is very often used
for the subjunctive in future conditions, as a still more
vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feel-
ings, and in threats and warnings. E.g.
Ei fMj Ka0eei,s yAwcrcrav, ecrrat crot /coxa, if you do not (shall
not) restrain your tongue, you -will have trouble, E. frag. 5. This com-
mon use of the future must not be confounded with that of 1391.
1413] THE MOODS. 301
1406. N". In Homer ei (without av or KC) is sometimes used
with the subjunctive in future conditions, apparently in the same
sense as ct KC or rjv, as ei Se vff IQeXr) oXecrat, but if he shall wish to
destroy our ship, Od. 12, 348. This is more common in general con-
ditions in Homer (see 1396). The same use of ei for eav is found
occasionally even in Attic poetry.
1407. N. For the Homeric subjunctive with KC in the apodosis
of a future condition, see 1305, 2.
IV. FUTURE CONDITIONS, LESS VIVID FORM.
OPTATIVE IN BOTH PROTASIS AND APODOSIS.
1408. When a supposed future case is stated in a less
distinct and vivid form (as in English, if I should #0),
the protasis has the optative with et, and the apodosis
has the optative with av. E.g.
Et^5 <f>opr)To<s OVK av, ei Trpacro-ois /caAoi?, you would not be
endurable, if you should be in prosperity, A. Pr. 979. Ov iroXXrj av
aXoyca eir), ei (frojBolro rov Odvarov 6 TOIOVTOS ; would it not be a
great absurdity, if such a man should fear death ? P. Ph. 68 b . Ot/cos
8' avrbs, .1 <j>6oyy-i]v X.dj3oL, o-a^eWar' av A.eetev, but the house
itself, if it should find a voice, would speak most plainly, A.Ag.37.
1409. The optative with av in apodosis is the potential opta-
tive : see 1329.
1410. N. The future optative cannot be used in protasis or
apodosis, except in indirect discourse representing the future in-
dicative after a past tense (see the second example under 1497,2).
1411. N". Et K is sometimes found with the optative in Homer,
in place of the simple et (1408) ; as el Se* KCV Apyos tKot//,e#', . . .
ya/ji(3p6<s Kfv fJLOi eoi, and if we should ever come to ^rgos, he would be
my son-in-law, 11. 9, 141.
1412. N. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of
the indicative in unreal conditions, see 1398 and 1399.
PECULIAR FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
ELLIPSIS AND SUBSTITUTION IN PROTASIS OR APODOSIS.
1413. The protasis sometimes is not expressed in its
regular form with et or 6az/, but is contained in a parti-
ciple, or implied in an adverb or some other part of the
sentence. When a participle represents the protasis,
302 SYNTAX. [1414
its tense is always that in which the verb itself would
have stood in the indicative, subjunctive, or optative,
the present (as usual) including the imperfect. E.g.
Iltos 81/07? ovcrrjs 6 Zevs OVK oTroAcoAev; how is it that Zeus has
not been destroyed, if Justice exists? (ei Si'/o; eortv), Ar. JV.904. 2v
8e /cAvoov ei'crei ra\a, but you will soon know, if you listen ( = eav
K\VT)<S), Ar. Av. 1390. 'ArroAov/xat /AT) TOVTO /Aa$<ov, I shall be ruined
unless I learn this (eav /AT) /Aa$w). ToicaJTa Tav yuvait (rvvvaiaiv
exots, swcA Am#s wowW you have to endure if you should dwell among
women (i.e. ei <ruwaiois), A.<Sf.l95. 'HTuo-TTio-ev av TIS aKovtra?,
any one would have disbelieved (such a thing} if he had heard it (i.e. ct
T7/covo-ev), T. 7,28. Ma/A/Aav 8* av atrr/cravTos (sc. oxn)) T/KOV O-QI
<ep<ov av aprov, anrf /" you (ever) crfec? /br yboG? (et airr/creta?,
1393, 2), / Msec? fo come to you with bread (1296), Ar.N. 1383.
Ala ye v/Aasavrovs TraAat av aTroXcoXetre, ^y^V Aarf depended on
yourselves, you would long ago have been ruined, D. 18,49. OiTra>
yap ovKeVi rov X.OLTTOV Tracr^oi/xev av Ka/cws, for in that case we should
no longer suffer harm (the protasis being in oiTro)), X. ^4.1, 1 10 .
CXu8* av St/catcos es /caKov TreVot/At' n, nor should I justly (i.e. {/* / Aac?
justice) fall into any trouble, S.An. 240.
1414. 1. There is a (probably unconscious) suppression of the
verb of the protasis in several phrases introduced by ct /xr;, except. E.g.
Tts rot aAAos 6/xotos, et //.T) ITarpoKAos ; w/^o eZ.se is like you, except
Patroclus (i.e. unless it is P.)? 11.17,475. Ei p.rj 8ta rov Trpvraviv,
eveVeo-ev av, Aac? lY no been for the Prytanis (except for the P.), he
would have been thrown in (to the Pit), P. G.516 6 .
2. The protasis or the apodosis, or both, may be suppressed
with the Homeric <os et or ws ei re ,* as rtov ve'es wKetat <us et Trrepov
^e vorjfJM, their ships are swift as a wing or thought (as they would be
if they were, etc.), OoJ.7,36.
For the double ellipsis in wo-Trep av ct, see 1313.
1415. N. In neither of the cases of 1414 is it probable that any
definite verb was in the speaker's mind.
1416. N". The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for
rhetorical effect ; as et /xev Swo-ovcrt yepas, if they shall give me a
prize, very well, 11. 1, 135 ; cf. 1, 580.
1417. N. Et Se py without a verb often has the meaning o^er-
wise, even where the clause would not be negative if completed, or
where the verb if supplied would be a subjunctive ; as /AT) 770117077$
ravra et 8e /AT), atrtav eets, do not do this ; otherwise (if you do not
do what I say) you will be blamed, X.^4n.7, 1 8 .
1421] THE MOODS. 303
1418. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or
participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its
own tenses of the indicative or optative (1280; 1285). If
the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av, this
particle is used with the infinitive or participle. E.g.
Hyov/xai, a rovro Troteire, Trdvra /caAcos l^etv, / believe that, if
you are doing this, all is well; ^yov/xat, lav TOVTO TTOO/TC, Travra
/caAws 2etv, / believe that, if you (shall') do this, all will be well', of&x
v/xas, lav ravra yevrjTat, ev 7r/oaoi/Tas, / know that you will prosper if
this is (shall be) done. For examples of the infinitive and participle
with av, see 1308.
1419. The apodosis may be expressed in an infinitive
not in indirect discourse (1271), especially one depending
on a verb of wishing, commanding, advising, etc., from which
the infinitive receives a future meaning. E.g.
BovAcTat IXOetv lav TOVTO yevr)Tai,he wishes to go if this (shall)
be done; KeAevto v/xas lav $vvr)(r@e a7reA$ii/, / command you to
depart if you can. For the principle of indirect discourse which
appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see 1502,1.
1420. N. Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in
the context, and in such cases ei or lav is often to be
translated supposing that, in case that, if perchance, or if
haply. E.g.
"AKOWOV Kal Ipov, lav <TOI ravra SOKTT), hear me also, in case the
same shall please you (i.e. that then you may assent to it), P..Rp.358 b .
So Trpos rrjv 7roA.iv, et 7T i j3 orjO OL v, l^wpovv, they marched towards
the city, in case they (the citizens) should rush out (i.e. to meet them
if they should rush out), T. 6, 100. On this principle we must
explain at KCV TTWS /^ovAeTat, if haply he may wish (i.e. in hope that
he may wish), 77.1,66; at K* lOeXrjcrOa, 0^.3,92; and similar pas-
sages. For this construction, both in Homer and elsewhere, see
Moods and Tenses, 486-491.
MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS. A<? IN APODOSIS.
1421. The protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to
different forms.
1. Especially any tense of the indicative with d in the
protasis may be followed by a potential optative with oV in
the apodosis. E.g.
Et KaT* ovpavov etArjAov^as, OVK av Ocolvi payot/tnvt if you
304 SYNTAX. [1422
have come down from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods,
11. Q, 128. Ei vvv ye 8v<TTVXviJ<cv, Trtos rdvavri" av TrpaYrovres ou
o-eooi')u,e#' av ; if we are now unfortunate, how could we help being
saved if we should do the opposite ? Ar. R. 1449 (here TrpaTTovTes = et
TrpdVroi/Aev) . Ei ovroi op0ws aTrccrTrjcrav, lyxeis av ou ;(pea>v ap^oire,
{/* ^ese Aaa 7 a n'^A/ to secede, you cannot (could not) possibly hold your
power rightfully, T.3,40.
2. Sometimes a subjunctive or a future indicative in the
protasis has a potential optative in the apodosis. E.g.
*Hv <f>rjs /xoi, Xe^at/x' av, if you (will) permit me, I would fain
speak, S. El. 554; ouSe yap av TroAAai ye<vpai waiv, c^oi/x.ev av
oTrot <uydvres cra>0<o/xev, ybr no even i/" ^ere s^a/Z fee many bridges,
could we find a place to fly to and be saved, X. ^4 . 2, 4 19 ; d 8 1 K o Li] JJL t v
av, a /x^ aTToSwo-a), 7 should be guilty of wrong, should I (shall 7)
not restore her, E.Hel.lOlQ.
3. A potential optative (with av) may express a present condi-
tion, and a potential indicative (with av) may express a present or
past condition; as eiVep aAAo) rco TrtLOoL/Jirjv av, /cat aot Tretftyuu,
zy* f^ere is an?/ wan whom 1 would trust, 1 trust you, P. Pr. 329 b , ei
TOVTO Icr^ypov ^v av TOVTW re/c/xr^piov, /cd/xot yeveor^a) TeKjjirjpiov, if this
would have been a strong proof for him, so let it be also a proof for
me, D.49,58.
1422. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by Se, dAAa,
or avrap, which cannot be translated in English. E.g.
Ei Se KC ft^ SWUKTIV, eyw 8e KCV avros lAxtf/uu, &M^ i/" <Aey rfo no/ ^i'ye
^er Mp, <Aen / will take her myself, 11. 1, 137.
Ei' AFTER VERBS OF WONDERING, ETC.
1423. Some verbs expressing wonder, delight, contentment,
disappointment, indignation, etc. are followed by a protasis
with where a causal sentence would often seem more
natural. E.g.
av/x,aco 8' eywye ei /xrySeis v/xaiv //,>/T' ev^v/xeirat ft^r* opyi^crai,
ana 7 7 wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry (lit. if
no one of you is, etc., 7 wonder), D. 4, 43 ; dyavaKToi ei a vow //,r) olds
T* ci/xi eiTreiv, 7 am indignant that (or i/") 7 am not able to say what I
mean, P.ZacA.194*. See also 1502, 2, for the principle of indirect
discourse applied to these sentences.
1424. N". Such verbs are especially $av^ato, aio^wofuu, dya-
7rao>, and dyavaKrew, with Setvdv CO-TIV. They sometimes take on,
because, and a causal sentence (1505).
1428] THE MOODS. 305
VII. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
1425. The principles of construction of relative clauses include
all temporal clauses. Those introduced by ews, Trpiv, and other
particles meaning until, have special peculiarities, and are there-
fore treated separately (1463-1474).
Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pronouns or
adverbs.
1426. The antecedent of a relative is either definite
or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to
a definite person or thing, or to some definite time,
place, or manner ; it is indefinite when no such definite
person, thing, time, place, or ^manner is referred to.
Both definite and indefinite antecedents may be either
expressed or understood. E.g.
(Definite.} Tavra a l^w opa<s, you see these things which I have ;
-or a e;(a> opas. "Ore e/?ovA.ero yXOtv, (once) when he wished, he came.
(Indefinite.} Havra a av /3ovA.a>i/rai eov<riv, they will have every-
thing which they may want ; or a av j3ov\<avTai t^ovcriv, they will have
whatever they may want. "Orav ZXOri, rovro 7rpaa>, when he shall come
(or when he comes), I will do this. "Ore (3ovXoiTO, TOVTO eTrpcuro-ev,
whenever he wished, he (always) did this. 'Os av eiTrto, Trotcu/xev, as /
shall direct, let us act. *A e^ei /3ovAo/xai Aa/3e<V, 1 want to take what-
ever he has.
DEFINITE ANTECEDENT.
1427. A relative as such has no effect on the mood
of the following verb. A relative with a definite ante-
cedent therefore may take the indicative (with ov for
its negative) or any other construction which could
occur in an independent sentence. E.g.
Tis eo-0' 6 x<*>Ps &7 T> e'v w /3e/3iJKa/Aev ; what is the place to which
we have come? S. 0. (7.52. "Ews earl Katpos, di/TiAa/?ecr0e rtuv
Trpay/xarwv, (now) while there is an opportunity, take hold of the busi-
ness, D. 1,20. TOVTO OVK CTTOIT/O-CV, ev cS TOV ST}/XOV eri/UTycrcv av, he did
not do this, in which he might have honored the people, D. 21, 69. So
o fjirj yevotro, and may this not happen, D. 27, 67.
INDEFINITE ANTECEDENT. CONDITIONAL RELATIVE.
1428. 1. A relative clause with an indefinite antece-
dent has a conditional force, and is called a conditional
relative clause. Its negative is always fj,ij.
306 SYNTAX. [1429
2. Relative words, like , if, take av before the subjunc-
tive. (See 1299,2.) With ore, oTrore, 7m, and rei&}, av
forms 6Vav, OTTorav, CTTCIV or e?n;v (Ionic CTredV), and CTretSdV.
"A with av may form dV. In Homer we generally find ore
K etc. (like v /ce, 1403), or 6Ve etc. alone (1437).
1429. Conditional relative sentences have four classes,
two (I. II.) containing present and past, and two (III.
IV.) containing future conditions, which correspond to
those of ordinary protasis (1386). Class I. has two
forms, one (a) with chiefly particular suppositions, the
other (5) with only general suppositions.
1430. I. (a) Present or past condition simply stated,
with the indicative, chiefly in particular suppositions
(1390). E.g.
"O TL fiovXerai Soo<ra>, / will give him whatever he (now) wishes
(like ei TL j3ov\Tai, Scocrco, if he now wishes anything, I will give it).
A A [M] ol$a, ovSf. oto/mi eiSevai, what I do not know, I do not even think
1 know (like ei rtva fjir] olBa, if there are any things which I do not
know), P. Ap. 21 d ; ovs /x?) evpto-Kov, /cevora^tov carets CTrofyaav,
for any whom they did not find (= et TWXS fjirj evpicrKov), they raised
a cenotaph, X. 6, 4 9 .
1431. (5) 1. Present general condition, depending on
a present form denoting repetition, with subjunctive
(1393, 1).
2. Past general condition, depending on a past form
denoting repetition, with optative (1393, 2). E.g.
"O TL av fiovXyrai oY8o>/u, I (always) give him whatever he wants
(like eav TL (3ov\r)Tai, if he ever wants anything)', o TL POV\OLTO
eoYSow, 1 (always) gave him whatever he wanted (like et TL /^ouAoiro).
2v/x/xa^eti/ TOVTOIS iOiXovaw aTravres, ovs av 6p<oo*t 7rapcovceuao7/,e-
vovs, a^ wisj ^o be allies of those whom they see prepared, D. 4, 6.
HviV av otKot yevwvrat, Spwo-iv OVK dvao-^era, w^en they get home,
they do things unbearable, Ar. Pa. 1179. Ous /xev t'Sot evraKrws
tovras, nVes re elev ^pwra, Kat CTTCI TrvOoiTO CTTT/VCC, ^e (ahvays)
asked those whom he saw (at any time) marching in good order, who
they were; and when he learned, he praised them, X. (7.5, 3 55 . 'ETTCIO^
8e avoLxOeirj, cto-r/ei/aev Trapa TOV SwAcparT/, anc? (eac7! morning)
when the prison was opened, we went in to Socrates, P. Ph. 50 d ,
1437] THE MOODS. 307
1432. N. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the sub-
junctive or optative here, as in other general suppositions (1395).
This occurs especially with ocrrts, which itself expresses the same
idea of indefiniteness which os with the subjunctive or optative
usually expresses; as OCTTIS pr) TOOI/ dpwmov aTrrerat fiovXevfjid-
T<t)v, Ka/acrTos tlvat, So/cet, whoever does not cling to the best counsels
seems to be most base, S.An.l7S. (Here os av ///) aTrrryrat would be
the common expression.)
1433. II. Present or past condition stated so as to
imply that the condition is not or was not fulfilled
(supposition contrary to fact), with the secondary tenses
of indicative (1397). E.g.
*A (M) ej3ov\CTO Sowat, OVK av e8a>/cev, he would not have given
what he had not wished to give (like et riva /AT; ejBovXero Sowat, OVK
av ISw/cev, if he had not wished to give certain things, he would not
have given them). OVK av 7re;(eipo{5/x,ev Trpdrrcw a fM] -qTrio-TaueOa,
we should not (then) be undertaking to do {as we now are) things which
we did not understand (like ct TWO. (MJ ^Trio-rafietfa, if there were any
things which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a suppo-
sition not realized), P. Ch. 171 e . So 6V yr/pas ereTftev, Od. 1, 218.
This case occurs much less frequently than the others.
1434. III. Future condition in the more vivid form,
with av and the subjunctive (1403). E.g.
"O rt av j3ov\r)Tai, Sd>cro>, I will give him whatever he may wish
(like eav n flovXrjTai, Swo-w, if he shall wish anything, 1 will give it).
"Orav /) (rOeva), 7re7ravcro/xat, when I (shall) have no more strength,
I shall cease, S. An.Q\. 'AXo^ov? /cat vrjTna rcKva a^o/xej/ ej/ vytvcriv,
tTrrjv TTToXUOpov cAto/xev, we will bear off their wives and young chil-
dren in our ships, when we (shall) have taken the city, 11. 4, 238.
1435. N. The future indicative cannot be substituted for the
subjunctive here, as it can in common protasis (1405).
1436. IV. Future condition in the less vivid form,
with the optative (1408). E.g.
"O TI J3ov\oiro, Soirjv av, 1 should give him whatever he might
wish (like et TI ftovXoiro Sofyv av, if he should wish anything, I should
give it). Iletvtov <j>dyoi av OTTOTC fiovXoiTO, if lie were hungry, he
would eat whenever he might wish (like et TTOTC jSovXoiro, if he should
ever wish), X.Jf.2,lw
1437. Conditional relative sentences have most of the peculi-
arities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the protasis
308 SYNTAX. [1438
and apodosis may have different forms (1421) ; the relative with-
out av or /ce is sometimes found in poetry with the subjunctive
(like ei for e'av or d /ce, 1396; 1406), especially in general condi-
tions in Homer; the relative (like ei, 1411) in Homer may take KC
or av with the optative ; the relative clause may depend on an
infinitive, participle, or other construction (1418; 1419); and the
conjunction Be may connect the relative clause to the antecedent
clause (1422).
1438. 'Homeric similes often have the subjunctive with tos ore
(occasionally ws or av)-, sometimes with <us or a>s re ; as cos ore
KLvrjcrr) Ze'<vpos J3a0v A^tov, as (happens) when the west wind moves
a deep grain-field, II. 2, 147 ; o>s yvvrj KXatyvL . . . a>s 'OoWevs Sa/cpvov
ef/?ev, as a wife weeps, etc., so did Ulysses shed tears, Od. 8, 523.
ASSIMILATION IN CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES.
1439. When a conditional relative clause expressing
either a future or a general supposition depends on a sub-
junctive or optative, it regularly takes the same mood by
assimilation. E.g.
'Eav Ttve? ot avSvva>vTat TOVTO iroi&cri, KaAws eet, if any who
maybe able shall do this, it will be well; ei rives ot SvvatvTO TOVTO
Trototev, /caAws av e^ot, tf an y w ^ s ^ lou ^ a be (or were} able should
do this, it would be well. Ei'0e Travres ot SvvatvTO TOVTO Trototev
O that all who may be (or were) able would do this. (Here the opta-
tive Trototei/ [1507] makes ot ovvaiVTo preferable to ot av
which would express the same idea.) 'ETreiSav <Sv av
Kvptos yev^rat, when (in any case) he becomes master of what he has
bought, D. 18, 47. 'Os aTroXotro Kat aAXos, o rts rotavra ye pe'ot,
that any other might likewise perish who should do the like, Od. 1, 47.
Te^vai'^v ore /txot p.r)KtTL TavTa /jte'Xot, may I die whenever 1 shall
no longer care for these (orav yw-t'A.^ would express the same idea),
Mimn. 1, 2. So in Latin: Injurias quas ferre nequeas defugiendo
relinquas.
1440. Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence
depends on a secondary tense of the indicative implying
the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes by assimilation
a similar form. E.g.
Et rtves ot eS^vavro TOVTO e Trpaav, KaAws av d\<ev, if any who
had been able had. done this, it would have been well. Et ev cKetvr) Ty
(fxavrj Te Kat TO) TpOTTtp eAeyov ev ols eTe^pa/x/x>;v, if I were speak-
ing to you in the dialect and in the manner in which I had been
1447] THE MOODS. 309
brought up (all introduced by et evos Irvy^avov on/, if I happened to
be a foreigner^ P. Ap. 17 d . So in Latin : Si solos eos diceres miseros
quibus moriendum esset, ntiminem tu quidern eorum qui viverent
exciperes.
1441. N. All clauses which come under this principle of assimila-
tion belong (as conditional forms) equally under 1434, 1436, 1431, or
1433. This principle often decides which form shall be used in future
conditions (1270, 2).
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING PURPOSE.
1442. -The relative with, the future indicative may ex-
press a purpose. E.g.
Upeafitiav Tre'/XTretv 77x15 TOMT e/oet KOL Trape'crrou rots Trpay/xcum',
to send an embassy to say this, and to be present at the transactions,
D. 1,2. Ov yap earn fjioc xp^/zara, OTTO^CV e K T t cr <o, for 1 have no
money to pay thejine with, P. Ap.37 c .
The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite; but the
negative particle is always /xrj, as in final clauses (1364).
1443. N. Homer generally has the subjunctive (with KC joined
to the rela'tive) in this construction after primary tenses, and the
optative (without KC) after secondary tenses. The optative is
sometimes found even in Attic prose. The earlier Greek here
agrees with the Latin.
1444. N. In this construction the future indicative is very
rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses.
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING RESULT.
1445. The relative with any tense of the indicative, or
with a potential optative, may express a result. The nega-
tive is ov. E.g.
Tc's OVTCD /Wverat oo-ns ov /SovXcrai O~OL <f>i\os elvat; who is so
mad that he does not wish to be your friend? X. ^4.2,'5 12 . (Here
ov (3ov\eTai would have the same meaning.) OvSets av yeVotro
a8a)U,ai/Tivo9, o? av /xetVetev cv rrj 8iKaio(rvv^, no one would ever
become so like adamant that he would remain jirm in his justice
(= wo-re /xetVaev 5 V ), P.Rp.SQQ*.
1446. N. This is equivalent to the use of wore with the finite
moods (1450; 1454). It occurs chiefly after negative leading
clauses or interrogatives implying a negative.
1447. The relative with a future (sometimes a present)
310 SYNTAX. [1448
indicative may express a result which is aimed at. The
negative here is py. E.g.
//.T/Se/uav ot <JVVTV\L-^V yei/e'cr&u, 77 /ui/ TrauVei /caTaorpt-
rrjv EivpwTrrjv, he prayed that no such chance might befall him
as to prevent him from subjugating Europe (= wore JJLLV Trcuxrai), Hd.
7,54. H$ov\r)0el<s TOLOVTOV /JLvrj^elov /caraAiTreti/ o JJUYJ Trjs dvflpooTri'nys
<ixre<6s eo-Ttv, wAen he wished to leave such a memorial as might be
beyond human nature ( = wore fir) etrai), 1. 4, 89.
1448. N. This construction (1447) is generally equivalent to
that of wore with the infinitive (1450).
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES WITH THE INFINITIVE AND
THE FINITE MOODS.
1449. f/ flcrTe (sometimes eo?), so as, so that, is used
with the infinitive and with the indicative to express
a result.
1450. With the infinitive (the negative being ^17), the
result is stated as one which the action of the leading verb
tends to produce; with the indicative (the negative being
ov), as one which that action actually does produce. E.g.
Tlav TTOLOVQ-LV wore OLKYJV fJirj SiSovcu, they do everything so as
(i.e. in such a way as) not to be punished, i.e. they aim at not being
punished, not implying that they actually escape ; P. (7.479. (But
TTO.V Troiovmv WOTTC Si'/oyv ov SiSoacrii/ would mean they do everything
so that they are not punished.) Ouroos dyvo>/x,oi/a>s ex ere > wore e A.TTI-
eT avra xp>7" r a yev^creo-flcu, are you so senseless that you expect
them to become good? D.2,26. (But with wore eA.7rieiv the mean-
ing would be so senseless as to expect, i.e. senseless enough to expect,
without implying necessarily that you do expect.)
1451. N. These two constructions are essentially distinct in
their nature,, even when it is indifferent to the general sense
which is used in a given case ; as in ovrws eo-rt Setvos wore SIK^V
JAY) StSovai, he is so skilful as not to be punished, and OVTWS larl
Scivos wcrre St'/c^v o StSoxriv, he is so skilful that he is not punished.
The use of ^r] with the infinitive and of ov with the indicative
shows that the distinction was really felt. When the infinitive
with ware has ov, it generally represents, in indirect discourse, an
indicative with ov of the direct form (see Moods and Tenses,
594-598).
1452. The infinitive wilh wore may express a purpose like a
1460] THE MOODS. 311
final clause : see (Sore SiKrjv py SiSorai (= era py SiSuio-i), quoted in
1450. It may also be equivalent to an object clause with OTTWS
(1372) ; as in jjLrjxavas evp^cro/xei/, WOT' e? TO irav ere roivS' cbraAAa^ai
iraiHov, we will find devices to wholly free you from these troubles
(= OTTO)? ae a,7raAAao/)iej/) , A.Eu.82.
1453. The infinitive after wore sometimes expresses a
condition, like that after e<* w or e<' <2re (1460).
'Eo> avrois run/ A.OITTCOV apx ai/ 'EAA^vouv, (oa"r' avrov?
/Sao-tXet, if fern*? m $ez'r power to rule the rest of the Greeks, on condi-
tion that they should themselves obey the King, D. 6, 11.
1454. As wore with the indicative has no effect on the form
of the verb, it may be used in the same way with any verbal form
which can stand in an independent sentence ; as WOT' OVK av avrov
yv cop to- at //.t, so that 1 should 'not know him, E. Or. 379; wore //,>)
Ai'av (rreve, so do not lament overmuch, S.El. 1172.
1455o N". "O? re (never wore) in Homer has the infinitive only
twice ; elsewhere it means simply as, like wcrTrcp.
1456. Os is sometimes used like cWe with the infinitive
and the finite moods, but chiefly in Aeschylus, Sophocles,
Herodotus, and Xenophon.
1457. N. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which commonly take
the simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with wore or
QJS ; as ^^>t(ra/xej/ot wore d/xweiv, having voted to defend them, T. 6,
88 ; Trei'&nxnv wore mxtipfj<rai, they persuade them to make an
attempt, T. 3, 102 ; <f>povLfjnt)repoL wore /xa0etv, wiser in learning,
X. CA, 3 11 ; oAt'yoi w? eyK/oarets efvcu, too /ew <o Aave the power,
X. C. 4, 5 15 ; avdyK-r) cS(rr KtvSvi/evetv, a necessity of incurring risk,
1.6,51.
1458. N. In the same way (1457) wore or o>s with the infinitive
may follow the comparative with 17 (1531) ; as eXaxTw l^ovra
Svra/uv ^ wcrre TOVS <f>i\ov<5 (o<eAeu/, having too little power to aid his
friends, X.HA,S.
1459. N. "flare or ws is occasionally followed by a participle ;
as wore trntyaff6o* Se'ov, so that we must consider, D.3,1.
1460. 'E^>' w or (f> wre, ow condition that, is followed by
the infinitive, and occasionally by the future indicative. E.g.
'A^ie/AeV (re, CTTI TOVTW /xeVrot, e^>' wre JU^KCTI <^tXo(ro^>etv, we
release you, but on this condition, that you shall no longer be a philoso-
pher, P. ^4jo. 29 C ; eVt TOVTO> VTre^io-ra/xat, e<' wre VTT' o^Sevos v/u.e'a>v
a/oo/xai, I withdraw on this condition, that I shall be ruled by none
of you, Hd.3,83.
312 SYNTAX. [1461
CAUSAL RELATIVE.
1461. A relative clause may express a cause. The verb
is in the indicative, as in causal sentences (1505), and the
negative is generally ov. E.g.
av/Acurrov Troieis, os rjfuv ovBev 8 i 8 cos, you do a strange thing in
giving us nothing (like on av ovSev oYSws), X.Jf.2,7 18 ; So'as d/xaflea
eti/at, os eKc'Aeve, believing him to be unlearned, because he
commanded, etc., Hd. 1, 33.
Compare causal relative sentences in Latin.
1462. N". When the negative is /x^, the sentence is conditional
as well as causal ; as roXatTrtopos ef, a> /x^re 0eot Trar/oaJot' eto-t p^ff
tepa, you are wretched, since you have neither ancestral gods nor tem-
ples (implying also if you really have none}, P.Jw.302 b . Compare
the use of siquidem in La'tin.
TEMPORAL PARTICLES SIGNIFYING UNTIL AND
BEFORE.
*Ea>s, co-re, axpt, H^XP l > AND S^pa-
1463. When Iws, eo-re, a^/ot, /^expi, an{ ^ ^^ e e P^ c o^)/oa mean
while, so long as, they are not distinguished in their use
from other relatives. But when they mean until, they have
many peculiarities. Homer has etos or etws for Itus.
1464. When eo)?, eVre, a^pi, ^XP 1 " 1 an( ^ o^>pa 9 until,
refer to a definite past action they take the indicative,
usually the aorist. E.g.
Nr/xov 7ToA.iv, etos tirijXOov ets 7rora/x,ov, I swam on again, until
I came into a river, Oc?.7,280. Tavra CTTOIOW, /x-e^/ot O-KOTOS cy-
i/ero, <7ii5 they did until darkness came on, X. .4.4, 2 4 .
This is the construction of the relative with a definite antece-
dent (1427).
1465. These particles follow the construction of con-
ditional relatives in both forms of future conditions, in
unfulfilled conditions, and in present and past general
suppositions. E.g.
'ETTtb-^es, ZCTT av KOI ra Xonra Trpoo'/xa^T/s, wait until you (shall")
learn the rest besides (1434), A.Pr.697. EITTOI/X' av . . . ecus Trapa-
TCi'i/ai/xi TOVTOV, 1 should tell him, etc., until I put him to torture
(1436), X.C. 1, 3 11 . HSetos av rovra) ert SteXeyo/A^v, eco? avru) . . .
, I should (in that case) gladly have continued to talk with
1471] THE MOODS. 313
him until I had given him back, etc. (1433), P. G. 506 . "A 8' v
dcrwra/cra y, dvay/o; ravra det 7rpdy/>taTa Trape^ei!/, ecus av ^aipav
\dj3r), whatever things are in disorder, these must always make trouble
until they are put in order (1431, 1), X.C*. 4, 5 37 . Hepte/xeVo/xev
eKaorore, ea>s avoi\0.irj TO SeoyxtoTT/ptov, we waited each day until
the prison was opened (1431, 2), P.PA.59 d .
1466. N. The omission of dV after these particles, when the
verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after et or
ordinary relatives (1406), occurring sometimes in Attic prose ; as
fJi^XP 1 ' T^-OUS yeVr/rat, until the ship sails, T. 1, 137.
1467. Clauses introduced by Ito? etc. frequently imply a pur-
pose; see the examples under 1465. When such clauses depend
upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of indirect
discourse (1502, 3), like final clauses (1369).
1468. 1ST. Homer uses eis 6 KC, until, like loos KC ; and Herodotus
uses es o and 5 ou like eo>s.
UpCv, before, until.
1469. Hplv is followed by the infinitive, and also
(like 09) by the finite moods.
1470. In Homer TrptV generally has the infinitive without
reference to its meaning or to the nature of the leading
verb. But in other Greek it has the infinitive chiefly when
it means simply before and when the leading clause is
affirmative; it has the finite moods only when it means
until (as well as before), and chiefly when the leading verb
is negative or implies a negative. It has the subjunctive
and optative only after negatives.
1471. 1. Examples of irpw with the infinitive :
Nate Se H^Satov Trptv IXOtlv mas 'A^atoii/, and he dwelt in
Pedaeum before the coming of the sons of the Achaeans, II. 13, 172
(here irplv e\6cw Trpo TOV eA.$eu/). Ou fjC aTrorpt'i/'eis TT/OIV \a\Kw
fj,a^(racrOai, you shall not turn me away before (i.e. until) we have
fought together, 7^.20,257 (here the Attic would prefer irplv av
/-ta^ecrw/xe^a) . 'A7ro7re/A7rov<ni/ avrov irpiv a, K ova at, they send him
away before hearing him, T. 2, 12. Mecro-^v^v etAo/xev irplv Hepcra?
Aa/?etv T^V /JacrtAetav, toe took Messene before the Persians obtained
their kingdom, 1.6,26. Hptv w? "Ac^o/Jov eA0etv fuav ^/x-epav OVK
c^pevcrev, she was not a widow a single day before she went to Apho-
bus, D. 30, 33 (here the infinitive is required, as Trptv does not mean
until).
314 SYNTAX. [1472
2. Examples of irpiv, until, with the indicative (generally
after negatives), and with the subjunctive and optative
(always after negatives), the constructions being the same
as those with ecus (1464-1467) :
OVK fjv dAe'^/x,' ovScv, Trpiv y eyw <r<tcriv ISeia, etc., there ivas
no relief, until I showed them, etc. (1464), A.Pr.479. Ov xpy /xe
ev0vSe aTreA0etv, Trpiv av &o StK^v, 1 must not depart hence until I am
punished (1434), X.^lw. 5,7 6 . OVK av etSet'rys Trpiv Tretp^flet^s, you
cannot know until you have tried it (1436), Theog. 125. 'E^p^v /x^
Trporepov (ru/A/fovAeveiv, Trpiv i//Aas eSt8aav, etc., they ought not to
have given advice until they had instructed us, etc. (1433), 1.4,19.
"Opwo-i rov<s Trpf.cr(3vTpov<s ov TrpocrOtv aTrtovras, Trpiv av d<a>criv 01
ap^ovTes, Ae# see Aa ^Ae elders never go away until the authorities
dismiss them (1431, 1), "K.Cy. 1, 2 8 . 'ATnyyopeve /x>y8ei/a /3aAAv, Trpiv
Kvpos efjLTrXrjcrOeL'ir) Orjp&v, he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus
should be sated with the hunt (1467; 1502, 3), X.C. 1,4 14 .
1472. N. In Homer Trptv y ore (never the simple irpiv) is used
with the indicative, and irpiv y or av (sometimes Trptv, without
av) with the subjunctive.
1473. N. Ilptv, like Icos etc. (1466), sometimes has the subjunc-
tive without av, even in Attic Greek ; as py crTe'vae Trpiv fuiOys, do
not lament before you know, S. Ph. 917.
1474. EEpiv 17 (a developed form for Trptv) is used by Herodotus
(rarely by Homer), and Trpdrepov vj, sooner than, before, by Herodo-
tus and Thucydides, in most of the constructions of Trptv. So
Trapoe, before, in Homer with the infinitive. Even vorepov vj, later
than, once takes the infinitive by analogy. E.g.
Ilpiv yap rj oTrtbxo ox^eas dvaTrXworat, y\<o 6 Kpo?tro?,ybr beforf
they had sailed back, Croesus was taken, Hd. 1,78. Ov8c ^Seo-av
Trpdrcpov rj irep eirvOovTO Tp^vtW, they did not even know of it
until they heard from the Trachinians, Hd.7, 175. M) aTravtb-Taa^ai
aTro r^s TrdXtos Trpdrepov ^ e^eXaxri, not to withdraw from the city
until they capture it, Hd.9,86. Xlporepov ^ alcrOea-Oai avrovs, be-
fore they perceived them, T. 6, 58. See T. 1, 69 ; 2, 65. Te'/cva e^etXovTO
Trapos TrcTeryva yeve<r0ai, they took away the nestlings before they
were fledged, Od. 16,218. So also ereo-iv vorrepov cKarov rj avrovy
oliaja-ai, a hundred years after their oivn settlement, T. 6,4.
VIII. INDIRECT DISCOURSE OR ORATIO OBLIQUA.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
1475. A direct quotation or question gives the exact
14S1] THE MOODS. 315
words of the original speaker or writer (i.e. of the oratio
recta). In an indirect quotation or question (oratio
olliqua) the original words conform to the construction
of the sentence in which they are quoted.
Thus the words ravra j3ov\ofjia.i may be quoted either
directly, Acyet ns "ravra /3ovAo/x,cu," or indirectly, Aeya TL<S ort
TavTa /fouAcToi or <f>r}ai TL<S ravra (3ov\t(r6ai, some one says that he
wishes for this. So epcora " TL /3ovAei ,* " he asks, " what do you want?"
but indirectly epwTa TL ySovAcrai, he asks what he wants.
1476. Indirect quotations may be introduced by on
or &>9, that, with a finite verb, or by the infinitive (as
in the above example) ; sometimes also by the participle.
1477. N. "On, that, may introduce even a direct quotation ; as
LTTOV on IKO.VOL eoy/.ei/, they said, "we are able," X. ^4.5,4 10 .
1478. 1. "OTTO)? is sometimes used like <o?, that, especially in
poetry; as TOVTO py /xot <J3pd, oVcos OVK el Ka/cos, S.O.T. 548.
2. Homer rarely has o (neuter of os) for on, that; as AcwnrcT*
yap TO ye Travres, o /x-oi yepas epxerat aAATy, /or you all see this, that
my prize goes another way, IL 1, 120 ; so 5, 433.
3. OVI/CKO, and oOovvtKa, that, sometimes introduce indirect quo-
tations in poetry.
1479. Indirect questions follow the same principles as
indirect quotations with 6ri or o>9, in regard to their
moods and tenses.
For the words used to introduce indirect questions, see 1605
and 1606.
1480. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even
single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indi-
rectly express the words or thought of any person, even those of
the speaker himself (see 1502).
1481. Indirect quotations after on and eo? and indirect
questions follow these general rules :
1. After primary tenses, each verb retains both the mood
and the tense of the direct discourse.
2. After past tenses, each indicative or subjunctive of the
direct discourse may be either changed to the same tense
of the optative or retained in its original mood and tense.
But all secondary tenses of the indicative in unreal condi-
tions (1397 ; 1433) and all optatives remain unchanged.
316 SYNTAX. [1482
1482. N. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in
the optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sen-
tences (but see 1488). The aorist indicative likewise remains
unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause of the direct
discourse (1497, 2). (See 1499.)
1483. When the quotation depends on a verb which
takes the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed
to the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle (av
being retained when there is one), and its dependent verbs
follow the preceding rule (1481).
1484. "Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative
in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form ; but
when a particle or a relative word has av with the subjunc-
tive in the direct form, as in lav, orav, os av, etc. (1299, 2),
the av is dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the
optative after a past tense in indirect discourse.
1485. N. "Av is never added in indirect discourse when it was
not used in the direct form.
1486. The negative particle of the direct discourse is
regularly retained in the indirect form. (But see 1496.)
SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE AFTER 8ri AND <as, AND IN INDIRECT
QUESTIONS.
1487. After primary tenses an indicative (without av)
retains both its mood and its tense in indirect discourse.
After past tenses it is either changed to the same tense
of the optative or retained in the original mood and
tense. E.g.
Aeyei on ypa<ei, he says that he is writing; Aeyei on eypa<ev,
he Kays that he was writing ; Aeyct on eypai/'ev, he says that he wrote ;
A.eei on yypa<ev, he will say that he has written. 'Eptora rl
flovXovrai, he asks what they want; ayvooi TL 7ronq(rov<Tiv, / do
not know what they will do.
Er?rei/ on ypd<f>oi or on ypa<ei, he said that he was writing (he
said ypa<o)). EITTCV on ypdif/oL or on ypa^ei, he said that he
would write (he said ypauj/io). EITTCV on ypdif/eiev or on ?ypaj//ev,
he said that he had written (he said tfypai/ttx, / wrote). ElTrev on
yeypa<u>s eiry or on ye'ypa<ev, he said that he had written (he
said yeypa^a, / have written}.
1490] THE MOODS. 317
(OPT.) 'ETretpio/x^v aural 8aKi/vvat, on o tot TO /xcv efrat o~o</>os, 117
8' oif, / tried to show him 'that he believed himself to be wise, but was
not so (i.e. oterat /xev . . . <m 8' aw), F.Ap.21 c . 'YTretTrwv on avros
TaKet 7rpaot, WXCTO, hinting that he would himself attend to things
there, he departed (he said drros raKet 7rpaa>), T.I, 90. 'EA.cav O7i
Tre/Ai/rete o-<as o 'Iv8wi/ /fao-tAevs, KeAeiW eparrav e OTOV 6 TrdXe/xos
117, ^ e # sai " d ' Aa * ^ e ** n ^ ^ the Indians had sent them > command-
ing them to ask on what account there was war (they said 7T/xj//ev
>//zas, and the question was CK TtVos eo-rtv 6 TrdXe/AOs;), X. C.2.4 7 .
"Hpero et rts e/xov et>; o-o<coTepos, Ae asArerf whether there was any one
wiser than I (i.e. cart rt? o-o^xorepos ;), P.^4jt>.21 a .
(!NDIC.) "EXeyov ort eA7riovo-t o~ Kat T-^V TrdXtv e^ctv JJLOL
yaptv, ^Aey sairf that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to
me, 1.5,23. *H/ce 8' dyyeAAan/ rts <o? 'EAareta KarctA^Trrat, some
one was come icifA a report that Elatea had been taken (here the per-
fect optative might have been used), D. 18, 169. 'ATro/cpiva/xevoi 6Vt
'irfjnl/ov(TL TrpeV/Sets, evOvs aTTTJXXa^av, having replied that they
would send ambassadors, they dismissed them at once, T. 1, 90. 'HTTO-
povv rt TTOTC Xeyet, / was uncertain what he meant (rt TTOTC Xeyet;),
P. Ap. 21 b . 'E^SovXevovTo rtv' a^rov KaraXeti/'ovo-tv, ^e^ were
considering (the question) whom they should leave here, D. 19, 122.
1488. N. Occasionally the present optative represents the im-
perfect indicative in this construction; as aTreKptVavro 6Vt ov8ets
jtxaprvs Trap e 117, they replied that there had been no witness present
(ov8ets Trap^v), D.30,20 (here the context makes it clear that Trapeirj
does not stand for Trapeori).
1489. 1. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative
to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in indirect discourse,
instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as ev aTropta
rj(Ta.v, ewoov/ACi/ot on 7rt rats ^cwTiAews Ovpais r)<rav, 7rpov8e8o>-
Keo-av 8c avrovs ot /8ap^8apot, they were in despair, considering that
they were at the King's gates, and that the barbarians had betrayed
them, X.^L.3.1 2 . (See the whole passage.) This is also the Eng-
lish usage.
2. In Homer this is the ordinary construction : see Orf.3,166.
SUBJUNCTIVE OR OPTATIVE REPRESENTING THE INTERROGATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1490. An interrogative subjunctive (1358), after a
primary tense, retains its mood and tense in an indirect
question ; after a past tense, it may be either changed
318 SYNTAX. [1491
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub-
junctive. E.g.
BouAew/xai OTTOOS ere aTroSpoi, / am trying to think how I shall
escape you (TTWS ere cbroSpcu;), X. C. 1,4 18 . OVK ot8' et Xpvo-avra
Tovrcp 8cu, / do not know whether I shall give (them) to Chrysantas
here, ibid. 8, 4 16 . OVK e^co rt etTrco, / e?o no &WOM? what I shall say
(rt etTrco,'), D. 9, 54. Cf. Non habeo quid dicam. 'ETnypoi/ro ei
TrapaSoiev T?)V 7ToA.iv, Aey asked whether they should give up the city
(TrapaSw/xev TT)V 7rdA.iv; shall we give up the city?), T. 1,25. 'HTrdpet
o TI xprja-atTO TCU Tr/oay/xart, he was at a loss how to deal with the
matter (TI ^p^crtu/xai ,*), X. H. 7, 4 89 . 'EySovAevovro etre Kara/^av-
crttxrtv etre rt aAAo ^pTycrtoi/Tat, ^Aey ^e?*e deliberating whether
they should burn them or dispose of them in some other way, T. 2, 4.
1491. N. In these questions et (not eat/) is used for whether.
with both subjunctive and optative (see the second example in
1490).
1492. N. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the
optative when the leading verb is optative, contrary to the general
usage of indirect discourse (1270, 2) ; as OVK av l^ois o rt xptf <raio
cravrw, you would not know what to do with yourself, P. G. 486 b .
INDICATIVE OR OPTATIVE WITH av.
1493. An indicative or optative with av retains its mood
and tense (with oV) unchanged in indirect discourse after
ort or ok and in indirect questions. E.g.
Aeyet (or eAeyev) ort TOVTO av eye'vero, he says (or said) that
this would have happened; eAeyev ort ovros St/cat'tos av aTro^avot, he
said that this man would justly die. 'Hpcorcov et Sotev av ra Trtcrra,
they asked whether they would give the pledges (Son/re av;), X.^l.4,8 7 .
INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1494. Each tense of the infinitive or participle in in-
direct discourse represents the tense of the finite verb
which would be used in the direct form, the present
and perfect including the imperfect and pluperfect.
Each tense with av can represent the corresponding
tenses of either indicative or optative with av. E.g.
'AppwtTTetv 7rpocacneTai, he pretends that he is sick, e'^w/xcxrev
dpptoerretv TOVTOVI, he took an oath that this man was sick, D. 19, 124.
Karaoke tv ^7/crt TOVTOVS, he says that he detained them, ibid. 39.
1497] THE MOODS. 319
w TOVS Tf]j3aiovs e7TLK.Krjpv^vaL, he said that
the Thebans had offered a reward for him, ibid. 21. 'ETrayyeAAeTcu, ra
oYkaia TTOirja-eiv, he promises to do what is right, ibid. 48.
*HyyeiA.e TOVTOVS epX/ AVOVS > he announced that these were
coming (ourot ep^oi/rai) ; dyye'AAei TOVTOVS l\OovTa<s,he announces
that these came (ovrot rj\6ov) ; dyye'AAet TOTJTO yeviy<ro/u,evov, ^e
announces that this will be done; TjyyetAe rovro yev^cro /xevov,
Ae announced that this would be done ; rjyyaXe TOVTO yeyev^/xeVov,
Ae announced that this had been done (TOVTO yeyeV^Tai).
See examples of av with infinitive and participle in 1308. For
the present infinitive and participle as imperfect, see 1285 and 1289.
1495. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse, and
its tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends
on a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when
also the thought, as originally conceited, would have been expressed
by some tense of the indicative (with or without av) or optative
(with av), so that it can be transferred without change of tense to
the infinitive. Thus in (3ov\Tai t \6elv, he wishes to go, IXOelv
represents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative,
and is not in indirect discourse. But in <J>r)aiv eXOeiv, he says that
he went, IXOelv represents yXOov of the direct discourse. (See Greek
Moods and Tenses, 684.)
1496. The regular negative of the infinitive and participle in
indirect discourse is ov, but exceptions occur. Especially the
infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, and swearing (see 1286)
regularly has fj,rj for its negative ; as <o/xvve /x^Sev etp^KeVat, he swore
that he had said nothing, D. 21, 119.
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES.
1497. 1. When a complex sentence is indirectly
quoted, its leading verb follows the rule for simple
sentences (1487-1494).
2. After primary tenses the dependent verbs retain
the same mood and tense. After past tenses, dependent
primary tenses of the indicative and all dependent sub-
junctives may either be changed to the same tense of
the optative or retain their original mood and tense.
When a subjunctive becomes optative, av is dropped, tdv,
ftrav, etc. becoming et, #re, etc. But dependent second-
ary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged. E.g.
320 SYNTAX. [1498
1. *Av v/xets Aey^re, iroiricre.iv (^i/cnv) o ^T aia^vvrjv p^r
aSo&av avro) <epet, if you (sAaZZ) say so, Ae says ^e wnZZ 0*0 whatever
does not bring shame or discredit to him, D. 19, 41. Here no change
is made, except in Troir]crt.w (1494).
2. 'ATrcKpiVaro on ju.av0ai/otei/ a OVK CTrtcrTaiVTO, Ae replied,
that they were learning what they did not understand (he said fj^avOd-
vovo-iv a OVK eVto-ravrat, which might have been retained), P.Eu.
276 e . Et riva (frevyovra Xrf\l/oiro, Trporjyoptvev on cos TroAe/xto)
Xpr)o~oiTo, he announced that, if he should catch any one running
away, he should treat him as an enemy (he said et TWO. A^t/ro/xat, XP 1 ?"
ao/xat), X. C. 3, 1 3 (1405). No/x,t'an/, oera T^S iroXecos 7rpoAa/3oi,
TTavra ravra ySe/fcaos c^ttv, believing that he should hold all those
places securely which he should take from the city beforehand (oo-' av
TrpoAa^a), ea>), D. 18, 26. 'ESo/cet /u,ot ravrrj irapao-Qai oxo^j/cu, eV^v-
/u,ov/x,ev<u ort, e'av /zei/ Aa^w, trw^iyo-o/Aat, zV seemed best to me to try
to gain safety in this way, thinking that, if I should escape notice,
1 should be saved (we might have had ct XdOoi/Jit, o-t
L. 12, 15. *fj<f>ao-av TOVS avSpas a7TOKTi/eti> ovs e^ovtrt
<^ey safe? ^a^ they should kill the men whom they had alive
VOV/ACV ors e^o/>tv, which might have been changed to
ovs e^otei/), T.2, 5. IIpoSryAov ^v (TOVTO) o~o/>ivoi/, ei /x,-^ KcuAv
trere, it was plain that this would be so unless you should prevent
(ecrrat, ct pr] KwAixreTe, which might have become et fjJr) KcoAvcrotre),
Aesch.3,90.
"HATTi^ov rovg ^tKcAovs Tavry, ovs jU,CT7T/x^avro, aTravTiy-
o-eo-^at, ^ey ^ojoea 1 ^Ae Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them
here, T. 7, 80.
1498. One verb may be changed to the optative while another
is retained; as or)\u>o~a<s on eroi/Aot ctcrt /ta^ecr^ai, ct TIS c^ep^otro,
having shown that they were ready to fight if any one should come
forth (Tot/x,ot cayxev, eav rts e^cp^rat), X. C. 4, 1 1 . This sometimes
causes a variety of constructions in the same sentence.
1499. The aorist indicative is not changed to the aorist opta-
tive in dependent clauses, because in these the aorist optative gen-
erally represents the aorist subjunctive.
The present indicative is seldom changed to the present optative
in dependent clauses, for a similar reason.
For the imperfect and pluperfect, see 1482.
1500. N. A dependent optative of the direct form of course
remains unchanged in all indirect discourse (1481, 2).
1501. N. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indica,-
tive is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading
clause (1489;.
1502] THE MOODS. 321
1502. The principles of 1497 apply also to all depen-
dent clauses after past tenses, which express indirectly
the past thought of any person. This applies especially
to the following constructions :
1. Clauses depending on an infinitive after verbs of wish-
ing, commanding, advising, and others which imply thought
but do not take the infinitive in indirect discourse (1495).
2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied
in the context (1420), or with the apodosis expressed in a
verb like 0av/u2a> (1423).
3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention, purpose,
or expectation, especially those introduced by Iws or Trpiv.
4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regu-
larly take the indicative.
(1) 'E/JovAovro eA0eti/, el TOVTO ye'votro, they wished to go if this
should happen. (We might have iav TOVTO yivrjTai, expressing
the form, if this shall happen, in which the wish would be conceived).
Here eA0etv is not in indirect discourse (1495). 'EKe'Aevcrev o TL
Svvatvro Aa/2ovras ju,eTa8ta)Kiv, he commanded them to take what
they could and pursue (we might have o TL av Swooi/rat, represent-
ing o TL av 8vvr)O~Oe), X. C*.7, 3 7 . UpoelTrov avrots /AT; vav/xa^eii/
Kopti/0tots, rjv pr] eVt Kep/cvpav TrAecocri /cat /AeAAtocriv aTroftaivf.lv,
they instructed them not to engage in a sea-jight with Corinthians,
unless these should be sailing against Corcyra and should be on the
point of landing (we might have el /AT) TrAeotev /cat /xe'AAoiev),
T.I, 45.
(2) <$vAa/cas crv/A7re/A7rei, OTTCOS ^>vAarrotei/ avTov, Kat et TWV dyptW
TI (fraveirj OrjpLMv, he sends (sewf) guards, to guard him and (to be
ready) in case any of the savage beasts should appear (the thought
being lav TL fawfj), X. C. 1,4 7 . TaAAa, rjv ert vav/xa^etv ot 'AO-rj-
vatot ToXftrjo-oHTL, Trapeo-Kcva^ovro, they made the other preparations,
(to be ready) in case the Athenians should still venture a naval battle,
T.7, 59. "hiKxeipov, et a'A<o<roti/TO, they pitied them, if they were
to be captured (the thought being we pity them if they are to be
captured, ei aAwtrovrat, which might be retained), X.^4.1,4 7 .
*E^atpov dyaTrtov et rts a(rot, / rejoiced, being content if any one
would let it pass (the thought was dyaTroi et rts edo-ct), P.RpA5Q\
*E^av/>ia^ev et rt? apyvpiov TrpaTTOiro, he wondered that any one
demanded money, X. Af. 1, 2 7 ; but in the same book (1, 1 18 ) we find
lOavfjua^e 8' et /XT) fyavepov avrot? ecrrir, he wondered that it was nol
plain.
322 SYNTAX. [1503
(3) S7roi/8as CTTOtrjo-avro !a>s airayyeXOeir) ra Ae^evra cts Aa/ce-
SaifMova, /Aey wiacfe a truce, (to continue) until what had been said
should be reported at Sparta (their thought was ecus av a7rayyt\0r)),
X. 17. 3, 2 20 . Ov yap 817 crc/>eas cwrtei 6 0eos T^S airoiKL-qs, irplv 8rj
aTTt/ctovTat <s dVTrjv Aifivrjv, for the God did not mean to release
them from the colony until they should actually come to Libya (we
might have OTTLKOLVTO)) Hd.4, 157. MeVovre? eoracrav OTTTTOTC TTV/O-
yo? TpaW opp-qo-eLe, they stood waiting until (for the time zt'Aen)
a column should rush upon the Trojans, II. 4, 334.
(4) Kat rjree vrjfw. tSeV^at, OTTL pa ot ya/x^poto ?rapa ITpotroto
^epotro, Ae asA:ec? to see <^e token, which he was bringing (as he
said) from Proetus, 11. 6, 176. Ko/nyyopeoi/ TWI/ AtyinyreW ra TTC-
Tron/KOtev 7rpo8oi/Tcs T^V 'EAAa&x, they accused the Aeginetans for
what (as they said) *Ae# Aac? done in betraying Greece, Hd. 6, 49.
For the same principle in causal sentences, see 1506.
1503. N. On this principle, clauses introduced by Iva, OTHOS, ws,
6<f>pa, an'd prf admit the double construction of indirect discourse,
and allow the subjunctive or future indicative to stand unchanged
after past tenses (see 1369). The same principle extends to all
conditional and all conditional relative and temporal sentences
depending on clauses with fra, etc., as these too belong to the in-
direct discourse.
Ov\ <> Tl > o^X oiro>s> |iT) on, H
1504. These expressions, by the ellipsis of a verb of
saying, often mean / do not speak of, or not to speak of.
With ovx an indicative (e.g. Ae'yw) was originally under-
stood, and with ^ an imperative or subjunctive (e.g. Ae'ye
or eunys). E.g.
Qv\ OTTWS ra (TKvrj aTTeSocT^e, dXAa /cat at ^vpat a<l>r)pTrd<T6r)<rav,
not to mention selling the furniture (i.e. not only did you sell none
nf the furniture), even the doors were carried off, Lys. 19, 31. M^
on 0eos, aAAa /cat avOpanrol . . . ov <f>iXovart. TOVS aTTto-TOvvras, not only
God (not to speak of God), but also men fail to love those who distrust
them, X. C*. 7, 2 17 . IIe7ravfie0' T^/xeis, ov\ OTTOOS (re Travaofiev, we have
been stopped ourselves ; there is no talk of stopping you, S. EL 796.
When these forms were thus used, the original ellipsis was prob-
ably never present to the mind.
IX. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
1505. Causal sentences express a cause, and are intro-
duced by OTA, 0)9, because, eVet, eTretS^, oVe, oTrore, since,
1509] THE MOODS. 323
and by other particles of similar meaning. They have
the indicative after both primary and secondary tenses.
The negative particle is ov. E.g.
K^Sero yap Aavacoi/, on pa Ovrja-Kovras 6 pa TO, for she pitied the
Danai, because she saw them dying, 11 1, 56. "Ore rovff OVTCOS
poOvpw iOiXtiv d/covetv, since this is so, it is becoming that
you should be willing to hear eagerly, D. 1, 1.
A potential optative or indicative may stand in a causal sen-
tence: see D.18,49 and 79.
1506. N. On the principle of indirect discourse (1502), a
causal sentence after a past tense may have the optative, to imply
that the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person
than the writer; as TOV IlepiKAea e/ca/aov, on o-rparryyos wj/ OVK
eVe^ayot, they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general
he did not lead them out, T.2,21. (This assigns the Athenians'
reason for abusing Pericles, but does not show the historian's
opinion.)
X. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
1507. When a wish refers to the future, it is expressed
by the optative, either with or without eWe or el <ydp
(Homeric also aWe, at <ydp), that, if. The nega-
tive is //,>?', which can stand alone with the optative. E.g.
'Y/xTv Oeol Sotev e/cTrepo-at IIpia/AOio TroAtv, may the Gods grant to
you to destroy Priam's city, 11. 1,18. At yap e/xot Tooxr^vSe $eot Swa-
/xti/ 7rept#etev, that the Gods would clothe me with so much strength,
Od.3,205.' To fjiv vvv TcumxTrp^cro-ois raVep ev X e P"' ^X ei ^f or
the present may you continue to do these things which you have now in
hand, Hd. 7, 5. Et0e <J>i\o<s fjiuv yevoto, that you may become
our friend, X. 77. 4, 1 88 . M^Kert ^wrjv eyoi, may I no longer live,
Ar. N. 1255. TeOvairjv, ore (JLOL jU/^Ken ravra /oteAot, may I die
when I shall no longer care for these things (1439), Mimn.1,2.
The force of the tenses here is the same as in protasis (see 1272).
1508. In poetry et alone is sometimes used with the optative in
wishes ; as et /x,ot y e votro <f>66yyo<s *v fipaxiocriv, O that I might jind
a voice in my arms, E. Hec. 836.
1509. N". The poets, especially Homer, sometimes prefix <os
(probably exclamatory) to the optative in wishes ; as tog aTroXotrc
cat aAAos 6Vt? Totavra ye pe'oi, likewise let any other perish whq
may do the like, 0cM ? 47.
324 SYNTAX. [1510
1510. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone some
times expresses a concession or permission, sometimes a command 01
exhortation; as avVts 'Apyeuyv 'EAeV^v Mei/e'Xaos ayotTO, Menelaus
may take lack Argive Helen, II. 4, 19. Teflvat^s, w Hpon-', ^ /<a-
KTai/ BeXXe/oo^oVrryv, either die, or kill Bellerophontes, II. 6,164.
Here, and in wishes without ei, ei yap, etc., we probably have an
original independent use of the optative ; while wishes introduced
by any form of et are probably elliptical protases.
(See Appendix I. in-Greek Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-389.)
1511. When a wish refers to the present or the ' past,
and it is implied that its object is not or was not at-
tained, it is expressed in Attic Greek by a secondary
tense of the indicative with eWe or el yap, which here
cannot be omitted. The negative is /JLTJ. The imper-
fect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis
(1397).' Kg.
Et#e TOVTO lirotct, that he were doing this, or O that he had
done this. Ei'0e TOVTO CTronyo-cv, that he had done this; ei yap ^
eye'i/eTO TOVTO, O that this had not happened. Et'0* et^es /SeAn'ovs
<f>pva<s, that thou hadst a better understanding, E..E/. 1061. Ei yap
Toaavrrjv 8vvajj.iv e*^ov, that I had so great power, E..4/. 1072.
Et0e o-ot TOTE crvi/eyevo/x^v, O that I had then met with you,
X.Af.l.2.
1512. The aorist o><eAoi/, ought, of 6<etA<o, debeo, owe, and
in Homer sometimes the imperfect <o<eAAov, are used with
the infinitive, chiefly in poetry, to express a present or past
unattained wish (1402, 2). E.g.
v O<eA. TOVTO Trotetv, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought
to be doing this), or would that he had done this (habitually) ; o><eAe
TOVTO 7rot^o~at, would that he had done this. (For the distinction
made by the different tenses of the infinitive, see 1400, 2). Trjv
o<eA.' eV v^eom KaTaKTa/x,ev *ApTe/xis, would that Artemis had
slain her at the ships, 11. 19, 59.
1513. N. "l<f>e\ov with the infinitive is negatived by pj (not
ov), and it may even be preceded by et0e, et yap, or oS? ; as py TTOT'
wceA.oi> AiTretv rrjv S/cvpov, that I had never left Scyros, S. PA. 969;
et yap a><eAov otot TC eli/at, that they were able, P. O.44 d ;
ws w<eAes oAeVftu, would that you had perished, 7/.3,428.
1514. In Homer the present optative (generally with et'$e or el
yap) may express an unattained wish in present time ; as et0* o>s
1517] THE INFINITIVE. 325
Yj (3wo L/JU J3ir) Se pal /A7reSos ecr}, O that I were again as young and
my strength were firm, II. 11, 670.
This corresponds to the Homeric use of the optative in unreal
conditions and their apodoses (1398). In both constructions the
present optative is commonly future in Homer, as in other Greek.
1515. Homer never uses the indicative (1511) in wishes. He
always expresses a past wish by the construction with ow^eAov
(1512), and a present wish sometimes by w^eAov and sometimes
by the present optative (1514).
THE INFINITIVE.
1516. 1. The infinitive is originally a neuter verbal
noun, with many attributes of a verb. Thus, like a
verb, it has voices and tenses ; it may have a subject or
object ; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives.
2. When the definite article came into use with other
nouns (see 937, 4), it was used also with the infinitive,
which thus became more distinctly a noun with four cases.
For the subject of the infinitive, see 895. For the case of predi-
cate nouns and adjectives when the subject is omitted, see 927
and 928.
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE.
As SUBJECT, PREDICATE, OBJECT, OR APPOSITIVE.
1517. The infinitive may be the subject nominative
of a finite verb (especially of an impersonal verb, 898,
or of eo-r/), or the subject accusative of another infini-
tive. It may be a predicate nominative (907), and it
may stand in apposition to a noun (911). E.g.
3tvve(3r) avT(S t\0f.lv, it happened to him to go; e^v/xcvetv, it
was possible to remain; ySv TroAAovs ^0pov<s ex etv > ** *'* P^ easant to
have many enemies? tfrrjolv eeivai TOVTOIS /ueveiv, he says it is possi'
blefor these to remain (/xevetj/ being subject of eewxt). To yveovai
7rto-Tiy/xr;v Aa/?etv eorti/, to learn is to acquire knowledge, P. 7X209 e .
To yap Qa.va.TQv SeStevcu ovSev aAAo eo-rtv rj So/ceti/ cro<f>ov ctvat
/XT; 6Vra, for to fear death (the fear of death) is nothing else than to
seem to be wise without being so, P.^4p.29 a . Els OIOH/OS apioTos,
a/Avi>o-0at TTf.pl TraTprjs, one omen is best, to fight for our country,
7/.12,243. For the subject infinitives .with the article, see 1542.
326 SYNTAX. [1518
1518. The infinitive may be the object of a verb. It
generally has the force of an object accusative, some-
times that of an accusative of kindred signification
(1051), and sometimes that of an object genitive.
1519. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse
(1495) follows verbs whose action naturally implies another
action as its object, especially those expressing wish, com-
mand, advice, cause, attempt, intention, prevention, ability, Jit-
ness, necessity, or their opposites. Such verbs are in general
the same in Greek as in English, and others will be learned
by practice. The negative is prj. E.g.
BovXcTou e \0elv, he wishes to go; /JovXerat TOV? TroXiras iroXe-
[AiKovs eli/at, he wishes the citizens to be warlike; 7rapati/ov/>tev <roi
yuei/eiv, we advise you to remain; irpoeiXero TroXe/x 170-0,1, he pre-
ferred tamake war; Kf.Xf.vu <re /XT) a7reX0eiv, he commands you not
to depart; a^Loixnv a/o^etv, they claim the right to rule; a^Lovrai
Oaviv, he is thought to deserve to die; oVoyouu vp&v vvyyvwfjwjv JJLOL
\iv, I ask you to have consideration for me. So KwXva (re /3aSi'-
eiv, he prevents you from marching; ov Tre^v/ce SovXevciv, he is
not born to be a slave'; dVaySaXXeTai TOVTO iroif.lv, he postpones doing
this ; Kiv^vvf.vf.1 Oa.vc.lv, he is in danger of death.
1520. N. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and
aorist, and these do not differ in their time (1272). In this con-
struction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any
other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of the verb gener-
ally gives it a reference to the future ; as in d&ovrai Oavflv (above)
Oavflv expresses time only so far as Oa.va.rov would do so in its
place.
1521. The infinitive may depend on a noun and a verb
(generally co-rt) which together are equivalent to a verb
which takes an object infinitive (1519). E.g.
'AvdyKrj ecrrt Travras aTreX^eiv, there is a necessity that all
should withdraw ; KivSvvos r\v avra> ira.Qf.1v ri, he was in danger of
suffering something; eX/juSus l^et rovro TT 0177 era i, he has hopes of
doing this. "Opa aTrtevat, it is time to go away, Y.Ap. 42 a . Tots
orpaTiomxis opfjJrj ei/eVco'e eKTCt^t'crat TO ^wptov, an impulse to
fortify the place fell upon the soldiers, T.4,4.
For the infinitive witli rov depending on a noun, see 1547.
. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse (1495) is
1525] THE INFINITIVE. 327
generally the object of a verb of saying or thinking or some
equivalent expression. Here each tense of the infinitive
corresponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood.
See 1494, with the examples.
2. Many verbs of this class (especially the passive of
Aeyw) allow both a personal and an impersonal construction.
Thus we can say Acyerae, 6 Kfy>os cXOetv, Cyrus is said to have
gone, or Ae'yerai TOV Kvpov eA0etV, it is said that Cyrus went.
AoKe'co, seem, is generally used personally ; as Soxa tlvan erodes,
he seems to be wise.
1523. 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say,
(a) <f>r)f*,i regularly takes the infinitive in indirect dis-
course ;
(b) C67roi/ regularly takes on or ok with the indicative or
optative ;
(c) Aeyco allows either construction, but in the active
voice it generally takes on or ok.
Other verbs which regularly take the infinitive in indirect
discourse are OIO/ACU, vjyeofuu, vo/>uu>, and So/cew, meaning to
believe, or to think.
2. Exceptional cases of CITTOV with the infinitive are more com-
mon than those of <f>rj[u with on or ok (which are very rare).
EITTOI/, commanded, takes the infinitive regularly (1$19).
For the two constructions allowed after verbs of hoping, expect-
ing, etc., see 1286.
1524. N". A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indi-
rect discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation; as
tTreiOY) Se yeve<r0ai CTTI rrj OIKLO, (e^ry) dvc<uy/xev7;v KaTaAa/A/Jami/
rrjv Ovpav, and when they came to the house, (he said) they found the
door open, P. Sy. 174 d . Herodotus allows this assimilation even
after et, if, and SIOTI, because.
1525. In narration, the infinitive often seems to stand
for the indicative, when it depends on some word like
Xeyerat, it is said, expressed or even implied in what pre-
cedes. E.g.
'ATTiKO/xevovs Se e? TO *Apyos, SiaT^0e(T0cu rbv <oprov, and
having come to Argos, they were (it is said) setting out their cargo for
sale, Hd.1,1. Atart^eo-^at is an imperfect infinitive (1285, 1) : see
also Hd. 1, 24, and X. C. 1, 3*.
328 SYNTAX. [1526
INFINITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
1526. The infinitive may depend on adjectives cor-
responding in meaning to verbs which take an object
infinitive (151 9), -especially those expressing ability*
fitness, desert, willingness, and their opposites. E.g.
AvvaTos TTQif.1v TOVTO, able to do this; 8eii/6s Xe'yeiv, skilled in
speaking; <xtos TOVTO Xaftelv, worthy to receive this : TrpoOvfJios Xe-
yf.iv, eager to speak. MaXa/coi KapTepeti/, (too) effeminate to
endure, f.Rp. 556 b ; eTramy/xan/ Xe'ycivTe /cat eriyav, knowing how
both to speak and to be silent, P. Phdr.27G*.
So TOIOVTOI otot Trovrjpov TIVOS epyov c^ieadai, capable of aiming
(such as to aim) at any vicious act, X. C. 1,2 3 ; also with olos alone,
olos det 7TOT /ACTa/JaXXccrflai, one likely to be always changing,
X.#.2,3 45 .
1527. N. AIJCCUOS, just, and some other adjectives may thus be
used personally with the infinitive; as 6Y/cai6s eo-Ti TOVTO Troif.1v,
he has a right to do, this (equivalent to SticatoV COTIV avrov TOVTO
TTOtCtl/).
LIMITING INFINITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, AND NOUNS.
1528. Any adjective or adverb may take an infinitive
to limit its meaning to a particular action. E.g.
ala-^pbv opav, a sight disgraceful to behold; Aoyot v/xiv
O.KOVO-CU, words most useful for you to hear ; TO. ^aXe-
evpeiv, the things hardest tojind. HoAtTCta 17 KIOTO, ^a.\Tnj
f)v, a government least hard to live under, P.P0/.302 b . Oi'/aa
ao-^ai, a house most pleasant to live in, X.Af. 3, 8 8 .
KaAAioTa (adv.) I8f.lv, in a manner most delightful to behold,
X. C.8,3 5 .
1529. N. This infinitive (1528) is generally active rather than
passive; as Tr/oay/xa xaXcTrbv Troif.1v, a thing hard to do, rather than
^aXcTrov Troiela-Qai, hard to be done.
1530. N. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive as a
limiting accusative (1058); as 0av/xa tSccr^cu, a wonder to behold,
Od. 8, 366. 'Apioreveo-Ke /xa^ecr^at, he was the Jirst in Jighting
(like ^jud^v), II. 6,460. Ao/ccts 8ta<j!>epeti/ <XVTOVS iotlv; do you think
they differ in appearance (to look at) ? P.-Rp.495 e .
1531. N. Here belongs the infinitive after a comparative with
77, than ; as vdo^/xa /xei^ov rj <f>ptLv, a disease too heavy to bear,
S. O. T. 1293.
For COO-TC with this infinitive, see 1458.
1536] THE INFINITIVE. 329
INFINITIVE OP PURPOSE.
1532. 1. The infinitive may express a purpose. E.g.
Ot ap;(ovTes, ovs etXecr^e ap^eti/ /x,ov, the rulers, whom you chose
to rule me, P. 4jt>.28 e . Trjv TroXtv ^vXarrctv avTots Trapc'Sco/cav,
iAey delivered the city to them to guard, ^T.4,4 15 . ea(ra,cr#ai Trapfjv
Tas yui/aticas Trteti/ c/>epoixras, ^e women were to be seen bringing
them (something) to drink, X. If. 7, 2*.
2. Here, as with adjectives (1529), the infinitive is active rather
than passive; as Kravelv e/xot vw ISotrav, they gave her to me to
kill (to be killed), E. 7V0.874.
1533. N. In Homer, where COOTC only rarely has the sense of so as
(1455), the simple infinitive may express a result; as Tts tr<coe ^WC^KC
; w^o brought them into conflict so as to contend? 11.1,8.
ABSOLUTE INFINITIVE.
1534. The infinitive may stand absolutely in parentheti-
cal phrases, generally with cos or oa-ov. E.g.
The most common of these is cos CTTOS CITTC Iv or cos eiTretv, so to
apeak. Others are cos OWTO/AO>S (or crvveXovrt, 1172, 2) etTretv, to spea/:
concisely ; TO ^vfjmav etTretv, on ^e whole ; cos aTret/cacrai, to judge
(i.e. as far as we can judge) ; oow ye JM,* eiSevai, as far as I know ;
ws e/xot So/cetv, or c/xot 8o/ccti/, as zV seems to me ; cos OVTCO y* O,KOV-
crat, at Jirst hearing (or without cos). So oXtyov 8etv and /u/cpov
8e tv, to wanf to/te, i.e. a?mos (see 1116, b).
Herodotus has cos Aoyco ctTrctv and ov TroAAco A.oyco CITTCII/, not
to make a long story, in short.
1535. N". In certain cases cii/at seems to be superfluous ; espe-
cially in CKCOV etvai, willing or willingly, which generally stands in
a negative sentence. So in TO vvv etvcu, at present; TO Tyjj.pov
etvat, to-day; TO ITT KtWs elvat and similar phrases, as far as
depends on them; rrjv irp^rrjv etvai, at Jirst, Hd. 1,153; Kara TOVTO
ctvai, so far as concerns this, P.Pr.317 a ; cos TroXata elvat, consider-
ing their age, T. 1,21 ; and some other phrases.
INFINITIVE IN COMMANDS, WISHES, LAWS, ETC.
1536. The infinitive with a subject nominative is some-
times used like the second person of the imperative, espe-
cially in Homer. E.g.
M?y TTOTC /cat crv ywcu/a ?rep T^TTIOS clvai, be thou never indulgent
to thy wife, 0rf.il, 441. Ots ///) ireAae/, do not approach these
(= ^7re'Aae), A.Pr.712.
For the third person, with a subject accusative^ see 1537.
330 SYNTAX. [1637
1537. The infinitive with a subject accusative sometimes
expresses a wish, like the optative (1507) ; and sometimes
a command, like the third person of the imperative. E.g.
Zev Trdrep, rj Aiaira A-a^eiy rj TvSeos viov, Father Zeus, may the
lot fall either on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus (=Atas Aa^oi, etc.),
11.7,179 ; $eot TroXirat, py /AC oVuAei'as rv^etv, O ye Gods who hold
our city, may slavery not be my lot, A. Se. 253. Tptoas e7m0' 'EXe'v^v
aTTOOovvai, let the Trojans then surrender Helen ( = a7roo\>rei/),/Z. 3,285.
1538. N. This construction (1537) has been explained by sup-
plying a verb like 809, grant (see Sos TLO-avOai, grant that I may take
vengeance, 77.3,351), or yei/oiro, may it be.
1539. N. For the infinitive in exclamations, which generally
has the article, see 1554.
1540. In laws, treaties, and proclamations, the infinitive
often depends on Soe or oVSo/crcu, be it enacted, or /ceAeverai,
it is commanded; which may be expressed in a previous
sentence or understood. E.g.
At/caetv 8 rrjv ev 'Apeta> Trayw <oVou, and (be it enacted} that
the Senate on the Areopagus shall have jurisdiction in cases of murder,
D.23,22. ^Eriy Sc etvat ras (nrovSas TrtvTrjKovTa, and that the treaty
shall continue jifty years, T. 5, 18. 'AKOVCTC Xew' TOVS oTrXtras
aTTtevat TraXiv ot/caSe, hear ye people! let the heavy armed go back
again home, Ar. ^.v.448.
INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE.
1541. When the infinitive has the article, its character
as a neuter noun becomes more distinct, while it loses none
of its attributes as a- verb. The addition of the article ex-
tends its use to many new constructions, especially to those
with prepositions ; and the article is sometimes allowed
even in many of the older constructions in which the infin-
itive regularly stands alone.
INFINITIVE WITH r6 AS SUBJECT OR OBJECT.
1542. The subject infinitive (1517) may take the article
to make it more distinctly a noun. E.g.
To yvwyat CTriorr//^!/ A.a/?etv CCTTLV, to learn is to acquire knowl-
edge, P.Th.2Q9 e . TOVTO eori TO aoiKelv, this is to commit injustice,
P.G.483 . To yap 6a.va.rov SeStevat ovocv aXXo early rj SOKCIV
c?vat /AT; 6vra,for to fear death (the fear of death) is nothing
1547] THE INFINITIVE. 331
else than to seem to be wise without being so, P. Ap. 29*. The predi-
cate infinitives here omit the article (1517). See 956.
1543. The object infinitive takes the article chiefly after
verbs which do not regularly take the simple infinitive (see
1519), or when the relation of the infinitive to the verb is
less close than it usually is. E.g.
To reAevT^crat iravruv fj TreTrpotfJievrj Karc/cpivev, Fate adjudged
death to all (like Oo.va.rov TTOLVTWV KaTe/cpivev) , 1. 1,43 ; ci TO K <oAvo-cu
rrjv TWV e EA.A/>7i/(oj/ Kotvwnav 7re7r/oaKav eya> <I?iA.i7r7ra>, if I had sold to
Philip the prevention of the unity of the Greeks (i.e. had prevented this
as Philip' 's hireling), D. 18, 23. To ^VVOLKCIV rrjft 6/xov Ti's av yvvrj
SvVaiTO ; to live with her what woman could do it ? S. TV. 545.
1544. N. Sometimes in poetry the distinction between the
object infinitive with and without TO is hardly perceptible ; as in
rXrja-ofJMi TO Ko.r6a.vdv, I shall endure to die, A.Ag. 1290; TO 8pav
OVK f]0\r)<Tav, they were unwilling to act, S. 0. C. 442.
INFINITIVE WITH rd WITH ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS.
1545. N. The infinitive with TO is sometimes used with
the adjectives and nouns which regularly take the simple
infinitive (1526). E.g.
To /?ta TroAiTtov Spav. e<f>vv a/xrj^avos, / am helpless to act in defi-
ance of the citizens, S.^4n.79. To s ryv yfjv ^/xwv eo-ySaXAetv...
IKOVOL ei<n, they have the power to invade our land, T. 6, 17.
INFINITIVE WITH TOV, rep, OR r<5 IN VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS.
1546. The genitive, dative, or accusative of the in-
finitive with the article may depend on a preposi-
tion. E.g.
IIpo TOV TOV? O/OKOVS aTToSovi/cu, before taking the oaths, D. 18,26 ;
TT/DOS TO> /A>y8ei/ K T^s Trpecr^etas \a(3elv, besides receiving nothing by
the embassy, D. 19, 229; Sta TO eVo? cti/at OVK av otet aSi/o^rai ;
do you think you would not be wronged on account of your being a
stranger f X. M. 2, 1 16 . 'YTrcp TOV TOL /xeVpta ///>) yiyve<rOai, that
moderate counsels may not prevail (= a/a pr) yLjvrrrai), Aesch.3, 1.
1547. The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with
the article, can stand in most of the constructions be-
longing to those cases ; as in that of the attributive
genitive, the genitive after a comparative or after verbs
332 SYNTAX. [1548
and adjectives, the dative of cause, manner, or means,
and the dative after verbs and adjectives. E.g.
Tov Trie tv eVtdv/ua, a desire to drink, T.7, 84; veois TO oryav
/cpetTToV eort TOV A. a A. e tv, for youth silence is better than prating,
Men. Mon. 387; eWo-xo/xev TOV SaKpvetv, we ceasecl our weeping^
P.P^. 117 e ; a^ets TOV xaraKovetv TIVO? ei<jtv, they are unused to
obeying any one, D. 1,23. Ta> <avepos elvat TOIOVTO? a>v, by having it
evident that he was such a man, X.Jf. 1,2 8 ; rw KOO-/X/WS 77 v mo-rev-.
eiv, to ZrusZ in an orderly life, 1.15,24; i'o-ov TO> 7rpoo~Tevetv, e</wa
to lamenting beforehand, A. A g. 253.
1548. The infinitive with TOV may express a purpose,
generally a negative purpose, where with ordinary genitives
eW/ca is regularly used (see 1127). E.g.
'ETet^iicr^T; 'AToAavryy, TOV fjJr) A^oras KaKOVpyelv rrjv Ev/^otav,
Atalante was fortified, that pirates might not ravage Euboea, T. 2, 32.
MtVcos Tp Xrj<TTLKov KaOrjpu, TOV TOSS Trpoo-oSovs /xaXXoi/ icvat avTaJ,
Minos put down piracy, that his revenues might come in more abun-
dantly, T.I, 4.
1549. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or free-
dom from anything allow either the infinitive with TOV
(1547) or the simple infinitive (1519). As the infinitive
after such verbs can take the negative py without affecting
the sense (1615), we have a third and fourth form, still
with the same meaning. (See 1551.) E.g.
Eipyei o-e TOVTO Troietv, etpyci o~c TOV TOVTO Troieti/, t/oy o*e /A?)
TovTOTroieti/, eipyct o-e TOV (JLrj TOVTO Trotetv, all meaning he pre-
vents you from doing this. Tov <&i\nnrov TrapeXOtw OVK eSvvavTO
K<i)\vo-ai, they could not hinder Philip from passing through, D. 5, 20.
Tov opaTTCTeveiv o.7retpyovo-t ; do they restrain them from running
away? X. M.2, 1 16 . "Orrep co^e pr) Trjv HeXoTrowyo-ov irop6f.1v,
which prevented (him) from ravaging Peloponnesus, T. 1, 73. Avo
e^et TOV jjirj fcarafivraiy it will keep two men from sinking,
1550. N. When the leading verb is negatived (or is interrogative
implying a negative), the double negative fjurj ov is generally used
with the infinitive rather than the simple px] (1616), so that we
can say OVK etpyei o-e /x^ ov TOVTO Trotetv, he does not prevent you
from doing this. Tov py ov Troteti/ is rarely (if ever) used.
1551. The infinitive with TO ^ may be used after expres-
sions denoting hindrance, and also after all which even imply
1555] THE INFINITIVE. 333
prevention, omission, or denial. This infinitive with TO is
less closely connected with the leading verb than are the
forms before mentioned (1549), and it may often be con-
sidered an accusative of specification (1058), and sometimes
(as after verbs of denial) an object accusative. Sometimes
it expresses merely a result. E.g.
Tov ofuXov efpyov TO fj.rj ra eyyvs T^S TroXetos Ka.Kovpyf.lv, they
prevented the crowd from injuring the neighboring parts of the city,
T. 3,1. Kt]u,a>va Trapa Tpets ax^earav i/o^ovs TO [M] Oava.ru> >y/>u w-
crai, they allowed Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of
death (they let him off* from the punishment of death), 1). 23, 205.
<5>6/3o<s avff VTTVOV Trapao-TaTei, TO fjir) /3Ae<apa o~u/x,/3aAeiv, fear stands
by me instead of sleep, preventing me from closing my eyelids, A.Ag.15.
Thus we have a Jifth form, eipyei o-e TO pr) TOVTO TTOICIV, added
to those given in 1549, as equivalents of the English he prevents
you from doing this.
1552. K". Here, as above (1550), jurj ov is generally used when
the leading verb is negatived ; as ovSev yap avTa> TavV 7rap/<m TO
fj.r) ov Treo-etv, for this will not at all suffice to prevent him from
falling, A.Pr.918.
1553. N. The infinitive with TOT) ^ and with TO fur) may also
be used in the ordinary negative sense ; as ovSe/ua 7rpd</>cwns TOIJ
I*}) opav TavTa, no ground for not doing this, P. Ti. 20 C .
1554. 1. The infinitive with TO may be used in exclama-
tions, to express surprise or indignation. E.g.
T^s fMupttis* TO Ata vofAi^eiv, ovra TrjXiKovTovL, what folly ! to
believe in Zeus, now you are so big ! Ar.N. 819. So in Latin : Mene
incepto desistere victam !
2. The article here is sometimes omitted; as Toioimw Tpe^etv
icwa, to keep a dog like that ! Ar. V. 835.
1555. The infinitive with its subject, object, or other
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent clauses) may be
preceded by TO, the whole standing as a single noun in any
ordinary construction. E.g.
T6 8 ILYjTf. TToAat TOVTO 7T C7TO V 6 f. VCLL, TT < If) V6I/CU T TtVtt ^fJLLV
o~u/x/za^tav TOVTWV di/TtppO7rov, av jSovXtopeOa xpfjcrOai, T^S Trap* eKtc-
vtav cvvotas evepyeTr;//,' av cycoye Otfyv, but the fact that we have not
suffered this long ago, and that an alliance has appeared to us to
balance these, if we (shall) wish to use it, this I should ascribe as a
benefaction to their good-will, D.I, 10. (Here the whole sentence
TO ... X/M}~&U is the object accusative of 6cfyv.)
334 SYNTAX. [1656
1556. 1. For the infinitive as well as the finite moods with
wore, <os, e<' o> and e<' wre, see 1449-1460.
2. For the infinitive and finite moods with Trpt'v, see 1469-1474.
3. For the infinitive with av, see 1308.
THE PARTICIPLE.
1557. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three
"~ uses. First, it may express an attribute, qualifying a noun
like an ordinary adjective (1559-1562) ; secondly, it may
define the circumstances under which an action takes place
(1563-1577) ; thirdly, it may be joined to certain verbs to
supplement their meaning, often having a force resembling
that of the infinitive (1578-1593).
1558. N. These distinctions are not always exact, and the
same participle may belong to more than one class. Thus, in 6 fw)
8 a pets av0p<i>7ro<s, the unflogged man, Sapet's is both attributive and
conditional (1563, 5).
ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE.
1559. The participle may qualify a noun, like an
' attributive adjective. Here it may often be translated
by a relative and a finite verb, especially when it has
the article. E.g.
'O Trapcov Katpos, the present occasion, D. 3, 3; Ocol atev eovres,
immortal Gods, IL 21,518; iroAts KaAAei 8ta<epovo-a, a city excel-
ling in beauty; avrjp /caAws 7re7ratSev//,evos, a man who has been
well educated (or a well educated man) ; ot 7rpr/3ets ot VTTO <f>i\i7nrov
7refji<t> 061/res, the ambassadors who were sent by Philip; avSpe? ot
TOVTO TTOtrycrovre?, men who are to do this.
1560. 1. The participle with the article may be used
subs tan tively, like any adjective. It is then equivalent
to he who or those who with a finite verb. E.g.
Ot Kparowres, the conquerors; ot TreTrcio-^e'voi, those who have
been convinced; Vapa rots dptVrots SOKOVVIV etvat. among those who
seem to be best, X. M. 4, 2 6 ; 6 TVJV yv&nyv ravrrjv c ITT civ, the one who
gave this opinion, T. 8, 68; rot? 'Ap/axoW o-c^erepot? ov<rt ^v/x/xa^ots
wpoetTTov, they proclaimed to those who were their allies among the
Arcadians, T.5,64.
1563] THE PARTICIPLE. 335
2. The article is sometimes omitted; as TroXe/xowrcov TroAzs, a
city of belligerents, X. C. 7, 5 73 .
1561. N. Sometimes a participle becomes so completely a
noun that it takes an object genitive instead of an object accusa-
tive ; as 6 e/ceu/ou TCKWV, his father (for 6 c/ceu/ov TCKWV), E. J/.335.
1562. N. The neuter participle with the article is sometimes
used as an abstract noun, like the infinitive ; as TO SeSios, fear, and
TO Oapaovv, courage, for TO SeSieW and TO Oapa-eiv, T. 1, 36. Com-
pare TO KoAoV for TO KoAXos, beauty. In both cases the adjective is
used for the noun.
CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
1563. The participle may define the circumstances of
an action. It may express the following relations :
1. Time; the tenses denoting various points of time, which
is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (1288). E.g.
TavTa eTrpaTTe <rr paTrjywv, he did this while he was general:
ravra 7rpaei (TTpaTrjy&v, he will do this while he is general.
Tvpavveuo-as 8e err) rpia 'InrMXS e^wpet es 2tyetov, and when he
had been tyrant three years, Hippias withdrew to Sigeum, T. 6, 59.
2. Cause. E.g.
Aeyw 8e TovS' ei/ciax, j8ovAo/u,evo? So^at o-ot oVep e/x,ot, and 1
speak for this reason, because I wish that to seem good to you which
seems so to me, P. Ph. 102 d .
3. Means, manner, and similar relations, including man-
ner of employment. E.g.
ITpoetXeTO />toAAov Tots vo/xot? C/A/ACVWV cforo&xi/ctv 77 irapavo-
ju,wv ^v, ^e preferred to die abiding by the laws rather than to live
transgressing them, X. M. 4, 4 4 . TOVTO CTrot^o-e Xa^wv, Ae c?zW ^Afs
secretly. 'ATreo^/u-ei Tptr/papxwv, Ae was absent on duty as trierarch.
A^^Ojuevoi ^wo-iv, ^ey Ziwe by plunder, X. (7. 3, 2 25 .
4. Purpose or intention; generally expressed by the /w-
wre participle. l.ijr.
*HX^e Xvo-o/xcvo? Ovyarpa, he came to ransom his daughter, II. 1, 13.
IIe/A7retv Trpecr^ei? TavTa cpovvTa? Kat Avo-avSpov atTiyo-ovTas,
<o senc? ambassadors to say this and to ask for Lysander, X. H. 2, 1 6 .
5. Condition; the tenses of the participle representing
the corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, 01
optative, in all classes of protasis.
See 1413, where examples will be found.
336 SYNTAX. [1564
6. Opposition, limitation, or concession; where the par-
ticiple is generally to be translated by although arid a
verb. E.g.
'OAi'yct 8vi/ct/jtcvot irpoopav TToXXa lTn\<E.ipoviJi.v Trpa.rrf.Lv, although
we are able to foresee few things, we try to do many things, X. C. 3, 2 16 .
7. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being
merely descriptive. This is one of the most common re-
lations of this participle. E.g.
J "Epx erat T OV vlbv X<>v<ra, she comes bringing her son, X. C. 1,3*.
Iiapa\aj3ovre<s BOICOTOUS corrpdrevo-av CTTI QdpvaXov, they took
Boeotians with them and marched against Pharsalus, T.I, 111.
The participle here can often be best translated by a verb, as
in the last example.
8. That in which the action of the verb consists. E.g. '
To8' etTre <o)vooi/, thus he spake saying, A.Ag.2Q5. Ev y fTTOLrj-
<ras ava'fjLvr](ra<s fj., you did well in reminding me, P.Ph.QQ c .
For the time of the aorist participle hare, see 1290.
1564. N". Certain participles of time and manner have almost
the force of adverbs by idiomatic usage. Such are apxo^vo<s, at
first; TeAevrwi/, at last, finally ; faaXwriav xpovov, after a while; <f>epa)v,
hastily; <epo//,ei/os, with a rush ; KararetVas, earnestly; <f)0d<ra<s, sooner
(anticipating); A.a0<oi>, secretly; lx wv > continually; dvwras, quickly
(hastening) ; icAcuW, to one's sorrow ; xaipuv, to one's joy, with im-
punity. E.g.
dpx/ jtci/os CITTOV, as / said at Jirst, T.4,64. 'Eo-fVeo-ov
l<s TOVS ""EXXryvas, they fell upon the Greeks with a rush,
Hd. 7,210. Tt KVTTTCI^CIS l^wv; why do you keep poking about?
Ar.JV. 509. KA.ai'a>y oh/rct rtui/Se, you will lay hands on them to your
sorrow, E.#er.270.
1565. N. '"EXW <j>fptov, aytw, Xa/3u>v, and xpoof^vos may often
be translated with. E.g.
Mia cpxeTO Trpecr^Sets ayovara, one (ship) was gone with ambassa-
dors, T.7,25. See X.C.1,3 1 , in 1563,7. Boy xfl^f^ ev0 ^ with a
shout, T.2,84.
1566. N", TtTra^wv; having suffered what f or what has happened
to him ? and TL fw.0<av ; what has he taken into his head f are used in
the general sense of why ? E.g.
Tt' TOVTO fjiaOwv Trpoat-ypaif/tv ,* with what idea did he add this
clause f D.20,127. Ti TrnOova-ai OvrjTats ct^ao-t yvva&v ; what
makes them look like mortal women f Ar. N. 340.
1571] THE PARTICIPLE. 337
1567. N. The same participle may sometimes be placed under
more than one of these heads (1558).
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE.
1568. When a circumstantial participle belongs to a
noun which is not grammatically connected with the
main construction of the sentence, they stand together
in the genitive absolute. E.g.
'Ai/e'/fy ov8ei/os KwAvWros, he made the ascent with no one inter-
fering, X.^4.1,2 22 . See 1152, and the examples there given.
Sometimes a participle stands alone in the genitive absolute,
when a subject can easily be supplied from the context, or when
some general subject, like avOpuTrwv or Trpay/xarwv, is understood ;
as ot TroAe/Atoi, TrpocrtoVrtoi/, re'ws ^\v ^av^a^ov, but the enemy, as they
(men before mentioned) came on, kept quiet for a time, X. A . 5, 4 16 .
OI>T<O 8' C^OVTODV, ei/cos (eoTtf), K.T.A., and this being the case (sc. irpay-
PO.TW), it is likely, etc. X. A. 3, 2 10 . So with verbs like vet (897, 5) ;
as voi/ros TToAAo), when it was raining heavily (where originally Aids
was understood), X. H. 1, 1 16 .
1569. The participles of impersonal verbs stand in the
accusative absolute, in the neuter singular, when others
would be in the genitive absolute. So passive partici-
ples and 6V, when they are used impersonally. E.g.
Tt S>), v/xas eov a7roA.rat, OVK eVt TOVTO rjXOo/jitv ; why now, when
we might have destroyed you, did we not proceed to do it? X.^4.2, 5 22 .
Ot 8' ov j3or)Or)<ravTs 8eov vytets aTrfjXOov ; and did those who
brought no aid when it was needed escape safe and sound ? P. Ale. i.
115 b . So ev 8c Trapao-^ov, and when a good opportunity offers,
T. 1,120; ov Trpo&vjKov, improperly (it being not becoming}, T.4, 95;
TVXOV, by chance (it having happened)', irpoo-raxOev /JLOL, when 1
had been commanded; etp^//,evov, ivhen it has been said ; dSwarov
ov ev VVKTL o"r)fJirjva.L, it being impossible to signal by night, T.7,44.
1570. N". The participles of personal verbs sometimes stand
with their nouns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom
unless they are preceded by ws or wa-n-ep. E.g.
2<L<j)Trrj eSetVvovv, wcnrcp TOVTO TrpocrTtTayfjLtvov avrots, they were
supping in silence, as if this had been the command given to them,
X.%1,11.
1571. N. "Civ as a circumstantial participle is seldom omitted,
except with the adjectives CKWV, willing, and UKWV, unwilling, and
338 SYNTAX. [1572
after are, ola, us, or KatVep. See e/w,ov ov\ CKOI/TOS, against my will,
S..4/.455; Zeus, KaiVe/o av^aS^s <j>pevu>v, Zeus, although stubborn in
mind, A. Pr. 907 ; also airopprfrov iroXu, wAen tf z's forbidden to the
state, S.AnAl. See 1612.
ADVERBS WITH CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
1572. N. The adverbs afia, /xera^v, ev0us, avrtica, apri,
and ecu'<i>i7S are often connected (in position and in sense)
with the temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify
the leading verb; as a/Aa /caraA.a^Soi'Tes Trpoo-eKeard cr<t, as soon
as they overtook them, they pressed hard upon them, Hd. 9, 57. Ne/aos
/xcra^v opucrcrwv eTravcraro, Necho stopped while digging (the
canal), Hd.2,158.
1573. N. The participle denoting opposition is often strength-
ened by jou'or KatVep, even (Homeric also KCU. . . Trep), and in nega-
tive sentences by ovSe or /x^Se ; also by /cat ravra, and that too ; as
eTTOiKTtpjw vt>, KcuTrcp ovTa 8v(r/xev^, 7 jozty Aim, eyen though he is
an enemy, S. Aj. 122. OVK av TrpoBotrjv, ov8e Trep Trpacro-wi/ /caKa>9, /
wow/a 1 no^ be faithless, even though I am in a wretched state, E. Ph. 1624.
1574. Circumstantial participles, especially those denot-
ing cause or purpose, are often preceded by ws. This shows
that they express the idea or the assertion of the subject of
the leading verb or that of some other person prominent in
the sentence, without implying that it is also the idea of the
speaker or writer. E.g.
T6v Ilcpt/cXea iv curia e?^ov tos Trcuravra cr<as TroAe/ACiv, they
found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded them to
engage in war, T. 2, 59. 'Ayai/a/CTOwnv <os /xeyaAan/ nvwv a,7re<TT-
prjfAtvoi, they are indignant, because (as they say) they have been
deprived of some great blessings, P. Ep.329 a .
1575. The causal participle is often emphasized by are and
otov or ota, as, inasmuch as; but these particles have no such force
as ws (1574) ; as are Trats wv, rjScTo, inasmuch as he was a child, he
was pleased, X. C. 1, 3 8 .
1576. "fio-Trep, as, as it were, with the participle expresses
a comparison between the action of the verb and that of
the participle. E.g.
'&PXOVVTO wo-Trep oAAot? CTT iSetKvvfJitvoi, they danced as if they
were showing off to others (i.e. they danced, apparently showing ojf),
X. A. 5, 4 84 . Tt TOVTO Xeyets, <o<T7rep OVK CTTI crot ov o TI av (3ov\rj
Ae'yeiv; why do you say this, as if it were not in your power to say what
1581] THE PARTICIPLE. 339
you please 1 ? X.Af.2, 6 86 . Although we find as if a convenient
translation, there is really no condition, as appears from the nega-
tive ov (not prf). See 1612.
1577. N. "Oo-Trep, like other words meaning as, may be fol-
lowed by a protasis ; as wo-Trep d TrapecrraTeis, as (it would be) if
you had lived near, A. A g. 1201. For a><r7rep av ei, see 1313.
SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
1578. The supplementary participle completes the
idea expressed by the verb, by showing to what its
action relates. It may belong to either the subject or
the object of the verb, and agree with it in case. E.g.
Ilavo/xeV <re Aeyoi/Ta, we stop you from speaking ; Trav6fj.0a
Aeywres, we cease speaking.
1579. This participle has many points of resemblance to the
infinitive in similar constructions. In the use of the participle (as
in that of the infinitive) we must distinguish between indirect
discourse (where each tense preserves its force) and other con-
structions.
PARTICIPLE NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1580. In this sense the participle is used with verbs sig-
nifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease,
to repent, to be weary, to be pleased, displeased, or ashamed;
and with the object of verbs signifying to permit or to cause
to cease. E.g.
xaAeircuVoy, 1 was the first to be angry, 77.2,378; OVK
a>o-a, / shall not endure my life, E. Hip. 354 ; rra ijfiepas
Siere'Aecrav, they continued fighting seven days, X. A. 4, 3 2 ;
y(aipov<nv, they delight in being honored, E.//ip. 8; eAey-
fyOovro, they were displeased at being tested, X.Jfcf. 1,2**;
TOVTO OVK alfT^vvofMLL Aey tuv, / say this without shame (see 1581), X.
C. 5, 1 21 ; rrjv <iAo(ro<tav TTOVO-OV ravra Aeyovtrav, make Philosophy
stop talking in this style, P. 6r.482 a ; iravcrat Aeycov, he stops talking.
1581. Some of these verbs also take the infinitive, but gener-
ally with some difference of meaning; thus, aicr^werat TOVTO X-
yeiv,he is ashamed to say this (and does not say it), see 1580;
aTTOKa/Avet TOVTO Trotetv, he ceases to do this, through weariness (but
aTTOKafj-vu TOVTO TTOtwv, he is weary of doing this). So apteral \e-
yctv, he begins to speak (but apteral A.y<oi/, he begins by speaking
or he is at the beginning of his speech)', 7rava> ere /xa^ecrtfcu, / pre*
340 SYNTAX. [1582
vent you from fighting (but Travw <rc /u,a^o/xevov, 7 stop you while
fighting).
1582. The participle may be used with verbs signifying
to perceive (in any way), to find, or to represent, denoting an
act or state in which the object is perceived, found, or rep-
resented. E.g.
'Opui <T KpvTTTOvra xetpa, I see you hiding your hand, E. Hec. 342 ;
rJKOva-d aov Aeyovros, / heard you speak; evpe Kpovi&rjv arep
rjfjivov aAAan>, he found the son of Cronos sitting apart from the
others, II. 1, 498 ; j&x(riA.eas TreTrot^KC TOVS ei/^AtSov Tt/Atopov/Atvovs,
Ae Aas represented kings in Hades as suffering punishment, P. G. 52 5 d .
1583. N". This must not be confounded with indirect discourse,
in which opai <re KpvTrTovra, would mean / see that you are hiding ;
O.KOVO) o-c Aeyoi/ro, / Aear that you say (d/covw taking the accusative).
See 1588.
1584. The participles j8ovAo/Aei>os, wishing, ^So^tcvos, pleased,
Trpoo-Se^o/xcvos, expecting, and some others, may agree in case with
a dative which depends on ei/xt' yt'yvofiai, or some similar verb. 1.<7.
Tw TrX^et ov j3ovXojJicv<i> ty, it was not pleasing to the majority (it
was not to them wishing i/), T.2,3; 7rpo<rSc^o/xi/<i) /JLOL TO, T^S
opy^s v/xoiv es /A yeyenyrat, 7 Aavc &een expecting the manifestations
of your wrath against me, T.2,60.
1585. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the
sense of to allow or let happen (Trepiopw and e<opw, with
TreptetSov and cTreiSov, sometimes eTSoi/), the participle is used
in a sense which approaches that of the object infinitive,
the present and aorist participles differing merely as the
present and aorist infinitives would differ in similar con-
structions. E.g.
MTJ TrepitSw/xei/ v/?pt<r0e?<rav TTJV AaKe8at/xova /cat /cara^povT/-
0i<rav, let us not see Lacedaemon insulted and despised, 1.6,108.
MT} //,' tSetv ^avov^' VTT* do-rw, no^ <o see me killed by citizens,
E. Or. 746. HepuSeiv T^V y^v TprjOe Icrav, to let the land be ravaged,
i.e. to look on and see it ravaged, T. 2, 18; but in 2,20 we have
TrepttSeiv TTJV yqv TfJLrjOijvai, to permit the land to be ravaged, refer-
ring to the same thing from another point of view, Tp.v)6f}vai being
strictly future to irepuSeu/, while TfjirjOtiaav is coincident with it.
1586. The participle with XavOdvoi, escape the notice of,
Tv'yxai/o), happen, and <0av<o, anticipate, contains the leading
idea of the expression and is usually translated by a verb.
1688] THE PARTICIPLE. 341
The aorist participle here coincides in time with the verb
(unless tliis expresses duration) and does not denote past
time in itself. (See 1290.) E.g.
<I>oi/ea TOV TratSos cXdvOavc j36<TKtav, he was unconsciously support-
ing the slayer of his son, Hd. 1,44; ITV^OV Ka^iy/xevos ivraWa., 1
happened to be sitting, there (= Tvxfl fKaO^rjv evravOa), P..Ew.272 e ;
avTol (frOrjaovrai TOVTO Spao-ai/res, they will do this themselves Jirst
(=TOVTO Spcurovcri Trporepot), T?.Rp. 375 C ; TOI>? S* cAa.0' elcreXOwv,
and he entered unnoticed by them (= da^XOe Aa0pa), II. 24, 477;
ii<f>0i)(rav TToAAco rovs Hepou? aTrt/co/xevot, /e# arrived long before
the Persians, Hd. 4, 136; TOV? av^panrous A-^o-o/xev eTriTreaoi/Tes, we
shall rush in unnoticed by the men, X. A. 7, 3 43 .
The perfect participle here has its ordinary force.
1587. N". The participle with StareAew, continue (1580), otx-
/M.CU, 6e gone (1256), 0a/xia>, fee wonf or be frequent, and some
others, expresses the leading idea ; but the aorist participle with
these has no peculiar force; as oi^erac <f>evy<ov, he has taken flight,
Ar. P/.933 ; ov $a/uei? KaraySat'i/wv cis TOV Ileipata, you don't come
down to the Peiraeus very often, P. Rp. 328 C .
So with the Homeric fifj and /?av or fidv from )8atVa>; as /ft}
</>evyo>v, Ae took flight, //.2,665; so 2,167.
PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
1588. With many verbs the participle stands in indi-
rect discourse, each tense representing the corresponding
tense of a finite mood.
Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to hear
or learn, to perceive, to know, to be ignorant of, to remem-
ber, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge,
and a<yye\\co, announce. E.g.
*Opa> Se fjL pyov Seiv6i> e^etpyaor/xevryv, but I see that I have
done a dreadful deed, S. Tr. 706; rJKovcre Kvpov Iv KiAiKia ovra, he
heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (cf. 1583), X.^4.1,4 5 ; 'orav K\vy
>Joi/T* 'OpeoT^i/, when she hears that Orestes ivill come, S.El.29%.
OtSa ovSev 7rtarra/xevos, / know that I understand nothing; OVK
jJSecrav avrbv TeOvrjKora, they did not know that he was dead,
X.^4.1,10 16 ; 7r8av yvwo-iv aTrto-rov/Aevot, after they find out thai
they are distrusted, X. C. 7, 2 17 ; //.e/xvrypiat \0u>v, I remember that
1 went; ju,ejUi/7/xai airrov IXOovra, I remember that he ivent ; 8eiaj
ovra, I shall show that this man is an enemy (passive
342 SYNTAX. [1589
OVTOS 8ei;(0>7<reTat c^Opo? a>v). Avra> Kvpov
7rpa)Tos ijiyyeiA.a, I Jirst announced to him that Cyrus was on his march
against him, X. A. 2, 3 19 .
See 1494; and 1308 for examples of the participle with av
representing both indicative and optative with av.
1589. 1ST. Ai}Xos ei'/u,i and <avepos e2/utake the participle
in indirect discourse, where we use an impersonal construc-
tion ; as $7X05 rjv oiofiei/os, it was evident that he thought (like
8fj\ov rjv OTL ototro).
1590. N. With o-vvotSa or crvyyiyvwcrKO) and a dative of
the reflexive, a participle may be in either the nominative or the
dative; as owoiSa />iavTft> ^8(K^^eva> (or ^StK^^teVo?), 7 am
conscious to myself that 1 have been wronged.
1591. Most of the verbs included in 1588 may also take
a clause with on or as in indirect discourse.
1592. 1. Some of these verbs have the infinitive of indirect
discourse in nearly or quite the same sense as the participle.
Others have the infinitive in a different sense : thus <a/Tai ero<os
aV generally means he is manifestly wise, and <cu'i/eT<u credos elvai,
he seems to be wise ; but sometimes this distinction is not observed.
2. Others, again, may be used in a peculiar sense, in which they
have the infinitive not in indirect discourse. Thus oloa and TTL-
<rroLfWJL regularly have this infinitive when they mean know how ; as
oloa TOVTO TT 0177 era t, 1 know how to do this (but oloa TOVTO 71-0117-
o*as, I know that 1 did this). Mai/0aVa>, fte/xv^juat, and 7n\avOd-
vo/mi, in the sense of learn, remember, or forget to do anything, take
the regular object infinitive. See also the uses of ytyi/wo-KO), Sct-
KWfu, Si/Axo, <jxuvofjM, and efy>tb-Ka> in the Lexicon.
1593. 1. C O? may be used with the participle of indirect
discourse in the sense explained in 1574. E.g.
*(2s /wj/ceV WTO. KLVOV cv <jbaet you, think of him as no longer living,
S. Ph. 415. See 1614.
2. The genitive absolute with <us is sometimes found where we
should expect the participle to agree with the object of the verb ;
as cos Tro\fiov OI/TOS Trap* v/uaV aTrayyeAxo ; shall I announce from
you that there is war? (lit. assuming that there is war, shall I announce
it from you ?), X. A . 2, 1 21 , where we might have TroAcfiov 6Vra with
less emphasis and in closer connection with the verb. So ws olS'
CXV T( V Ttoi/8* CTrt'o-Tcwr&u ere \P^ y u must understand that this
is so (lit. believing this to be so, you must understand it), S. Aj. 281.
1590] VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 343
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -T&S AND -rfov.
1594. The verbal in -reo? has both a personal and an
impersonal construction, of which the latter is more
common.
1595. In the personal construction it is passive in
sense, and expresses necessity, like the Latin participle
in -dus, agreeing with the subject. E.g.
'Q^eXiyrea crot ^ TroXis Icrriv, the city must be benefited by you,
X. M. 3, Q 3 . "A XXas p e T a TT e/A TT T ea s clwu ($77), Ae said JAaJ of Aer
(s^ps) mws< 6e sent for, T.6,25.
1596. N. The noun denoting the agent is here in the dative
(1188). This construction is of course confined to transitive verbs.
1597. In the impersonal construction the verbal is
in the neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes
plural), with ear I expressed or understood. The ex-
pression is equivalent to Set, (one) must, with the in-
finitive. It is practically active in sense, and allows
transitive verbals to have an object like their verbs.
The agent is generally expressed by the dative* some-
times by the accusative. E.g.
Tavra fffuv (or ly/xas) TTOI^TCOV <TTIV, we must do this (equiva-
lent to Tavra ly/nas Sei Trooyo-ai). Oitrreov Ta8e, we must bear these
things (sc. ^/uv), E. Or. 769. Tt'av avra> Trot^reov elrj ; what would
he be obliged to do? (= TL Scot &v avrov TTQO/O-CU), X. Jf.1,7 2 (1598).
'Ei^ry^>6(ravro TroXe^aryTea e?vat, they voted that they must go to war
(= Sctv TroXefietv), T. 1,88. Hv/x/xaxot, ovg ov TrapaSorea TOIS
'A-O-qvaiois ctrnV, allies, whom we must not abandon to the Athenians,
T.I, 86.
1598. N". Though the verbal in -re'ov allows both the dative
and the accusative of the agent (1188), the equivalent Set with the
infinitive allows only the accusative (1162).
1599. N". The Latin has this construction (1597), but generally
only with verbs which do not take an object accusative ; as Eun-
dum est tibi (tre'oi/ co-rt o-ot), Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello
utendum est nobis (TO> TroXe/xw xP r ?" r/ov ^" r tv ^tv), we must go to
war. The earlier Latin occasionally has the exact equivalent of
the Greek impersonal construction; as Aeternas poenas timendum
est, Lucr. 1,112. (See Madvig's Latin Grammar, 421.)
344 SYNTAX. [1600
INTEEEOGATIVE SENTENCES.
1600. All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjectives,
and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect ques-
tions. The relative oWts (rarely 05) and the relative pro
nominal adjectives (429) may be used in indirect questions.
E.g.
Tt Acyet ; what does he say f Ilorc rj\6f.v ; when did he come f
IToau et8e?; how many did you see? "ttpovro Tt Atyot (or o Tt
Xeyot), they asked what he said. "Hpovro TTOTC (or OTTOTC) TjXOev, they
asked when he came. 'Opas fjfMis, o<rot eoyxeV ,* do you see how many
of us there are? P.Rp.327 c .
1601. N. The Greek, unlike the English, freely uses two
or more interrogatives with the same verb. E.g.
C H rtcrt Tt aTToStSovcra rexvrj SiKaioo-vvr} av KaXoiro; the art lohich
renders m wh at to what would be called Justice f P. .ftp. 332 d . Seethe
five interrogatives (used for comic effect) in D. 4, 36 : TrpooiSev
CKaoTOS Tts X/'?y s > ' ' ' I*" ore Ka ' Tapa TOV Kat Tt XafiovTa. Tt Set
Trotetj/, meaning everybody knows who the \opr)y6s is to be, what he is
to get, when and from whom he is to get it, and what he is to do with it.
1602. N. An interrogative sometimes stands as a predicate
with a demonstrative ; as Tt TOVTO eAeas ; what is this that you said f
.(= eXe^as TOVTO, Tt' ovf lit. you said this, being what?) ; TtVas TovtrS*
eio-opw , who are these that 1 see ? E. Or. 1347.
Such expressions cannot be literally translated.
1603. The principal direct interrogative particles are apa
and (chiefly poetic) 77. These imply nothing as to the
answer expected ; but apa ov implies an affirmative and apa
prf a negative answer. Ov and ^ are used alone with the
same force as with apa. So /xwv (for /AT) ow) implies a nega-
tive answer, and OVKOVV, therefore (with no negative force),
implies an affirmative answer. E.g.
*H (TXoXrj lo-Tat ; will there be leisure ? *Ap* ci<rt Ttves a^tot ; are
there any deserving ones f "Ap* ov fiovXecrOe eXOew ; or ov (3ov\eo-&e
eXOelvy do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not) ? *Apa /AT)
(3ov\.e<rOe e\0eiv; or /AT) (or /AWJ/) J3ov\ecr0e eX^etv; do you wish to go
(you don't wish to go, do you) ? OVK'OVV o-ot SOKCI o-v/A<^opov ctvat;
does it not seem to you to be of advantage ? X. C. 2, 4 16 . This distinc-
tion between ov and /AT; does not apply to questions with the inter-
rogative subjunctive (1358), which allow only /xr;.
1609] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. NEGATIVES. 345
1604. 'AAAo n rj; is it anything else than? or (more fre-
quently) oAAo TI; is it not? is sometimes used as a direct
interrogative. E.g.
"AAAo rt rj o/AoAoyov/xei/ ; do we not agree 1 ? (do we do anything
else than agree?), P. 6r.470 b . "AAAo ri ovV Bvo ravra IXeyes ,' did
you not call these two 1 ibid. 495 C .
1605. Indirect questions may be introduced by ei, whether;
and in Homer by rj or d. E.g.
'HpwTr/o-a ei jSovAotro i\6dv, / asked whether he wished to go.
"QiXCTo Trevo-dfievos rj TTOV T' 079, he was gone to inquire whether you
were still living, Od. 13,415. To. eKTrw/Aara OVK otSa ei TOVTO> 8to
(1490), I do not know whether 1 shall give him the cups, X. C. 8,4 16 .
(Here d is used even with the subjunctive: see 1491.)
1606. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect)
may be introduced by TroVepov (irortpa) ... 17, whether ... or.
Indirect alternative questions can also be introduced by d
... ^f or ctrc . . . ctrc, whether . . . or. Homer has ^ (?e) . . .
rj (rjt) in direct, and rj (^e) ... (?e) in indirect, alterna-
tives, never Trorepov. E.g.
Tlorepov eas a.px uv 5 aXAov Ka.6i<TTir)<s ; do you allow him to rule,
or do you appoint another ? X. C. 3, 1 12 . 'EySovXcvcro et Tre/wrou'i/
Ttvas ^ Trai/rcs toiev, Ae was deliberating whether they should send some
or should all go, X.A.I, 10 5 .
NEGATIVES.
1607. The Greek has two negative adverbs, ov and firj.
What is said of each of these generally applies to its com-
pounds, ovSei's, oiuSe, OTJTC, etc., and //^Sei's, ft^Se, /u,ijre, etc.
1608. Ov is used with the indicative and optative in all
independent sentences, except wishes; also in indirect dis-
course after on and ws, and in causal sentences.
1609. N. In indirect questions, introduced by d, whether, firj
can be used as well as ov; as /?ovA.o//,evos epeo-Oai ci fjua.0u>v T/S TI
/u,)U.v>7/AeVos /x^ oTSev, wishing to ask whether one who has learnt a
thing and remembers it does not know it f P. Th. 163 d . Also, in the
second part of an indirect alternative question (1606), both ov and
JUTJ are allowed; as O-KOTTW/XCV et rjfjuv irpcret j} ov, let us look and see
whether it suits us or not, P..Rp.451 d ; d 8 a\rjO<s fj p rj, Trctpcwro/xcu
tlv, but I will try to learn whether it is true or not, ibid. 339 a .
346 SYNTAX. [1610
1610. Mi} is used with, the subjunctive and imperative
in all constructions, except with the Homeric subjunctive
(1355), which has the force of a future indicative. MT? is
used in all final and object clauses after tva, oVws, etc., with
the subjunctive, optative, and indicative; except after /XT},
lest, which takes ov. It is used in all conditional and con-
ditional relative clauses, and in the corresponding temporal
sentences after os, irpiv, etc., in relative sentences express-
ing a purpose (1442), and- in all expressions of a wish with
both indicative and optative (1507; 1511).
For causal relative clauses with /XT; (also conditional), see 1462.
For et ov occasionally used in protasis, see 1383, 2.
1611. MTJ is used with .the infinitive in all constructions,
both with and without the article, except in indirect dis-
course. The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has
ov, to retain the negative of the direct discourse ; but some
exceptions occur (1496).
For o>o-T ov with the infinitive, see 1451. For /XT; with the
infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, swearing, etc., see 1496.
1612. When a participle expresses a condition (1563, 5),
it takes /XT;; so when it is equivalent to a conditional rela-
tive clause ; as ot /XT) /3ovAo/xei/ot, any who do not wish. Other-
wise it takes ov. In indirect discourse it sometimes, like
the infinitive, takes /XT; irregularly (1496).
1613. Adjectives follow the same principle with partici-
ples, taking /XT; only when they do not refer to definite per-
sons or things (i.e. when they can be expressed by a rela-
tive clause with an indefinite antecedent) ; as ot /XT; ayaOol
TroXiTca, {any) citizens who are not good, but ot OVK dya0ot TroXt-
rat means special citizens who are not good.
1614. Participles or adjectives connected with a protasis, a
command, or an infinitive which would be negatived by firj, gener-
ally take /XT}, even if they would otherwise have ov.
1615. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as
those of hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and dis-
trusting) take the infinitive, /XT; can be added to the infini-
tive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative cannot
be translated in English, and can always be omitted in
Greek. For examples, see 1549-1551.
1619] NEGATIVES. 347
1616. An infinitive which would regularly be negatived,
by /AT}, either in the ordinary way (1611) or to strengthen a
preceding negation (1615), generally takes the double nega-
. tive /AT) ov if the verb on which it depends itself has a negative.
Thus oY/ccuov e<m /AT) TOVTOV o,<eu>ai, it is just not to acquit him, if
we negative the leading verb, generally becomes ov Si'/ccudv eWi /AT)
ov TOVTOV a</>etvai, it is not just not to acquit him. So w? ov;( oo-tov
aot ov /AT) ov fiorjOelv SiKaiocrvvr; , since {as you said) it was a failure
in piety for you not to assist justice, P. Tip. 427 e . Again, etpyei ere /AT)
TOVTO TTOteiv (1550), he prevents you from doing this, becomes, with
eipyet negatived, ov/c etpyet o~c /AT) ov TOVTO Troieiv, he does not pre-
vent you from doing this.
1617. N". (a) MT) ov is used also when the leading verb is
interrogative implying a negative; as TL e/A7ro8o>v /AT) ov^t v/?pio-
/Ae'vovs aTToOavelv; what is there to prevent (us) from being insulted
and perishing ? X.An. 3, 1 13 .
(b) It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to
express an exception to a negative (or implied negative) statement ;
as TroAeis ^aXeTrat A.a/3etv, /AT) ov 7roA.io/)/aa, cities hard (i.e. not easy)
to capture, except by siege, D. 19, 123.
1618. When a negative is followed by a simple negative
(ov or /AT/) in the same clause, each retains its own force.
If they belong to the same word or expression, they make
an affirmative; but if they belong to different words, each
is independent of the other. E.g.
Ov8e TOV <l>op/AiWa ov^ opa, nor does he not see Phormio (i.e.
he sees Phormio well enough), D. 36, 46. Ov oV airupiav ye ov <f>rjo~ti<s
f-X^iv o Tt CITTT/S, it is not surely through inexperience that you will
deny that you have anything to say, D. 19,120. Et /AT) IIpoevov ov^
VTreSe^avTo, if they had not refused to receive Proxenus (had not not-
received him), D.19,74. So /AT) ovv . . . Sta Tavra /AT) SOTW OLKTJV, do
not then on this account let him escape punishment (do not let him not
be punished), D.19,77.
1619. But when a negative is followed by a compound
negative (or by several compound negatives) in the same
clause, the negation is strengthened. E.g.
OvSets 19 ovSev ovSevos av T//AWV ovSeTTOTe yeVoiTO a^to?,
no one of us (in that case) would ever come to be of any value for
anything, P. Ph. 19 b .
For the double negative ov /AT;, see 1360 and 1361. For ov^ OTI,
/AT; OTI, ov^ orrws, /AT) OTTWS, see 1504.
PART V.
VERSIFICATION.
RHYTHM AND METRE.
1620. Every verse is composed of definite portions called
feet. Thus we have four feet in each of these verses :
^(TO\fJiV 7T/30S I TOVS <TTpCL\Tr]yOV<S. \
Far from j mortal | cares recreating. |
1621. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls
a special stress of voice called ictus (stroke), and another
part on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot
on which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of
the foot is called the thesis. 1 The regular alternation of arsis
and thesis in successive feet produces the rhythm (harmonious
movement) of the verse.
1622. In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the
rhythm depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words,
with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, how-
ever, the ictus is entirely independent of the word-accent ;
and the feet (with the ictus marked by dots) are <foyo-o,
p,ev Trpos, rov<s crTpa, Ti/yovs. In Greek poetry a foot
consists of a regular combination of syllables of a certain
1 The term <fy><m (raising} and 6fois (placing), as they were used by
nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and
putting down of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that
Qfots denoted the part of the foot on which the ictus fell, and Apcris the
lighter part. Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use,
and referred arsis to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering
of the voice in reading. The prevailing modern use of these terms
unfortunately follows that of the Roman writers, and attempts to
reverse the settled usage of language are apt to end in confusion.
348
1624] RHYTHM AND VERSE. 349
length ; and the place of the ictus here depends on the
quantity (i.e. the length or shortness) of the syllables
which compose the foot, the ictus naturally falling upon a
long syllable (1629). The regular alternation of long and
short syllables in successive feet makes the verse metrical,
i.e. measured in its time. The rhythm of a. Greek verse
thus depends closely on its metre, i.e. on the measure or
quantity of its syllables.
1623. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most
modern poetry is simply this, that in modern poetry the verse con-
sists of a regular combination of accented and unaccented syllables,
while in ancient poetry it consists of a regular combination of long
and short syllables. The rhythm is the one essential requisite in the
external form of all poetry, ancient and modern ; but in ancient
poetry, rhythm depends on metre and not on accent; in modern
poetry it depends on accent, and the quantity of the syllables (i.e.
the metre) is generally no more regarded than it is in prose. Both
are equally rhythmical ; but the ancient is also metrical, and its metre
is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English poetry
is strictly only rhythm.
1624. The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best
be seen in modern Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of
the ancient language are retained, the rhythm is generally accentual
and the metre is no more regarded than it is in English poetry.
These are the first two verses in a modern translation of the
Odyssey :
^dXXe TOV | avSpa, 0|d, TOV iro|XvTpoirov, [ oo-ris TO|<TOVTOVS
Tdirovs 81 i}X8e, irop|0T]cras rfjs | TpoCas TT|V j evSogov | ir6Xiv.
The original verses are : -
" AvSpa (JLOL | ewe-ire, | Movo-a, iro]Xvrpoirov, | as |xd\a | iroXXd
nXd<yx0ib cjirel Tpo(|r)s U|pov irToXC[c0pov 4' irtpcrev.
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through
force of acquired habit ; for these verses have much more of the
nature of modern poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm
is precisely what we are accustomed to in English verse, where
Still stands the | forest prijmeval; but | under the | shade of its | branches
is dactylic, and
And the ol)ive of peace | spreads its braneh|es abroad
is anapaestic.
350 VERSIFICATION. [1625
1625. It is very difficult for us to appreciate the ease with which
the Greeks distinguished and reconciled the stress of voice which
constituted the ictus and the raising of tone which constituted the
word-accent (107, 1). Any combination of the two is now very
difficult, and for most persons impossible, because we have only
stress of voice to represent both accent and ictus. In reading
Greek poetry we usually mark the ictus by our accent, and either
neglect the word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care
should always be taken in reading to distinguish the words, not
the feet.
FEET.
1626. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the short
syllable (w), which has the value of ^ or an -J note in music.
This is called a time or mora. The long syllable (_) has
generally twice the length of a short one, and has the value
of a note or J in music.
2. But a long syllable sometimes has the length of three shorts,
and is called a triseme (i_), and sometimes that of four shorts, and
is called a tetraseme (L_I) . The triseme has the value of J. in music,
and the tetraseme that of !.
1627. Feet are distinguished according to the number of
times which they contain. The most common feet are the
following :
1. Of Three Times (in f time}.
Trochee _ w <au/e J ^
Iambus w _ l^v ^ J
Tribrach w w w Aeyere j s i s ^
2. Of Four Times (in f or f time).
Dactyl w w <aivTe J J"j
Anapaest ^ w o-e/3o//m JH
Spondee Vd>v J J
3. Of Five Times (in f time).
Cretic w _ <aivra> J h J
Paeon primus _ w w w eKT/oeTrere J f J"^
Paeon quartus w w w _ /caraAeyw J^ ^ \
Bacchius w <x<eyyifc J* J J
Antibacchlus w $aivqri J J ^
1631] FEET, ETC. 351
4. Of Six Times (in f or f time).
Ionic a maiore __ w w CKA-eiVere J J F1
Ionic a minore w w __ 7rpo<nSr#ai
Choriambus _ w w _ tKrpeVo/xat
Molossus (rare) ___ /JovAeixov
5. A foot of four shorts (wwww) is called a proceleusmatic,
and one of two shorts (ww) a pyrrhic.
For the dochmius, w __ w _ , see 1691. For the epitrite, see
1684.
1628. The feet in f time (1), in which the arsis is twice as long
as the thesis, form the double class (ye'vo? SiTrAacrioi/), as opposed
to those in f time (2), in which the arsis and thesis are of equal
length, and which form the equal class (yeVos tow). The more
complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of five and six
times are not considered here.
1629. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The
first syllable of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last
syllable of the iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form
the arsis, the remainder of the foot being the thesis; as
\Ji ^- \J \Ji W i \J \J .
1630. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two
short syllables (1631), the ictus properly belongs on the two taken
together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. Thus a
tribrach used for a trochee (^L w) is \j w \j ; one used for an
iambus (w JL~) is \j 6 w. Likewise a spondee used for a dactyl is
_ _ ; one used for an anapaest is __ /. So a dactyl used for an
anapaest (_ w w f or __ for w w _ ) is __ w w. The only use
of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are (as above) to
represent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a
long syllable.
RESOLUTION AND CONTRACTION. IRRATIONAL
TIME. ANACRUSIS. SYLL ABA ANCEPS.
1631. A long syllable, being naturally the metrical equiv-
alent of two short ones (1626), is often resolved into these;
as when a tribrach w w w stands for a trochee w or an
iambus w On the other hand, two short syllables are
often contracted into one long syllable ; as when a spondee
352 VERSIFICATION. [1G3<
___ stands for a dactyl w w or an anapaest ^ w The
mark for a long resolved into two shorts is ^^j that for
two shorts contracted into one long is c/o.
1632. 1. When a long syllable has the measure of three
or four short syllables (1626, 2), it may represent a whole
foot : this is called syncope. Thus a triseme (i_ = J.) may
represent a trochee ( _ w), and a tetraseme (11 = ^) may rep-
resent a dactyl (_ w w).
2. An apparent trochee (i_ w), consisting of a triseme (i_)
and a short syllable, may be the equivalent of a dactyl or a
spondee, that is, a foot of /owr times. This is called a long
trochee, or a Doric trochee (see 1684).
1633. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain
cases be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable.
Such a "Syllable is called irrational, and is marked >. The
foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (TTOVS oAoyos).
Thus, in dXA' our f^Opwy (J-\j-L>), the apparent spondee
which takes the place of the second trochee is called an
irrational trochee ; in SoOrai SLK?JV (> w ) that which
takes the place of the first iambus is called an irrational
iambus.
1634. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic
dactyl (marked -ww) and cyclic anapaest (marked w w ),
which have the time of only three short syllables instead of
four. The cyclic dactyl takes" the place of a trochee _ w,
especially in logaoedic verses (1679). The cyclic anapaest
takes the place of an iambus w _ , and is found especially in
the iambic trimeter of comedy (1658).
1635. An anacrusis (dra/cpouo-ts, upward beat) consists of
a single syllable (which may be long, short, or irrational)
or of two short syllables, prefixed to a verse which begins
with an arsis.
1636. The last syllable of every verse is common, and
it may be made long or short to suit the metre, without
regard to its usual quantity. It is called syllaba anceps.
But the continuous systems described in 1654, 1666, and
1677 allow this only at the end of the system,
1642] RHYTHMICAL SERIES, ETC. 353
RHYTHMICAL SERIES. VERSE. CATALEXIS.
PAUSE.
1637. A rhythmical series is a continuous succession of
feet of the same measure. A verse may consist of one such
series, or of several such united.
Thus the verse
iroAAa TO. Scii/a, /covSev av\\0pa>7rov Setvorepov
consists of a First Glyconic (1682, 4), -^ w I _ w I _ w I L_ (at the
end of a verse, -w w I w I _ w I _ A)> followed by a Second
Glyconic, _ dl-^wl _ wl _ /\. Each part forms a series, the
former ending with the first syllable of avOpuTrov (see above) ; and
either series might have formed a distinct verse.
1638. The verse must close in such a way as to be dis-
tinctly marked off from what follows.
1. It must end with the end of a word.
2. It allows the last syllable (syllaba anceps) to be either
long or short (1636).
3. It allows hiatus (34) before a vowel in the next verse.
1639. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close
is called catalectic (KaraA^/criKo?, stopped short). A complete
verse is called acatalectic.
1640. 1. If the omitted syllable or syllables in a catalectic
verse are the thesis of the foot (as in trochaic and dactylic verses),
their place is filled by a pause. A pause of one time, equivalent to
a short syllable (w), is marked A (for A, the initial of Xet/x/xa);
a pause of two times (__) is marked A~.
2. But in catalectic iambic and anapaestic verses, the thesis of
the last foot is lost, and the place is filled by prolonging the pre-
ceding arsis : thus we have \j \^JL (not \j JL \j A) as the catalectic
form of \j _ w _ ; and \j \j ^ JL (not \j \j _ w \j ~K ) as that of
w w _ w w _ (See 1664 and 1665.)
1641. A verse measured by dipodies (1646) is called brachy-
catalectic if it wants a complete foot at the end, and hypercatalectic
if it has a single syllable beyond its last complete dipody.
CAESURA AND DIAERESIS.
, 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs whenever
354 VERSIFICATION. [1643
a word ends before a foot is finished ; as in three cases in
the following verse :
8'
2. This becomes important only when it coincides with
the caesura of the verse (as after i<0t/*ovs). This caesura is
a pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more
melodious or to aid in its recital. In some verses, as in
the iambic trimeter acatalectic (1658) and the heroic hexa-
meter (1669), it follows definite principles.
1643. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a
foot, the double division is called diaeresis (Stai'peo-is, division) ;
as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis
becomes important only when it coincides with a natural
pause produced by the ending of a rhythmic series ; as in
the trochaic tetrameter (1651) and the dactylic pentameter
(1670).
1644. The following verse of Aristophanes (Nub. 519), in tro-
chaic (|) rhythm, shows the irrational long (1633) in the first,
second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (1634) in the third; syn-
cope (1632) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis and pause
(1639 ; 1640), with syllaba anceps (1636).
Ta\rj\0f) VTJ | TOV Aio|vu||crov TOV I K0pe I if/avra \ /AC.
_>l_>|-v,wlL_ll_wl_>l_wi_A
A rhythmical series (1637) ends with the penult of Atovvcrov. This
is a logaoedic verse, called Eupolidean (1682, 7).
VERSES.
1645. Verses are called Trochaic, Iambic, Dactylic, etc.,
from their fundamental foot.
1646. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of
one foot, a dimeter of .two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, penta-
meter, or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in
trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured
by dfpodies (i.e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one
dipody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of
six feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet.
1651J TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 355
1647. When trochaic or iambic verses are measured by single
feet, they are called tripodies, tetrapodies, hexapodies, etc. (as having
three, four, six, etc. feet). Here irrational syllables (1633) seldom
occur. (See 1656.)
1648. Rhythms are divided into rising and falling rhythms.
In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iambus
and anapaest ; in falling rhythms the thesis follows the arsis, as in
the trochee and the dactyl.
1649. In Greek poetry, the same kind of verse may be
used by the line (Kara O-TC'XOI/), that is, repeated continuously,
as in the heroic hexameter and the iambic trimeter of the
drama. Secondly, similar verses may be combined into
distichs (1670) or into simple systems (1654). Verses of
both these classes were composed for recitation or for simple
chanting. Thirdly, in lyric poetry, which was composed to
be sung to music, verses may be combined into strophes of
complex rhythmical and metrical structure, with anti-
strophes corresponding to them in form. A strophe and
antistrophe may be followed by an epode (after-song) in
a different metre, as in most of the odes of Pindar.
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS.
1650. Trochaic verses are generally measured by dipodies
(1646). The irrational trochee -L > (1633) in the form of
a spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic
dipody except the last, that is, in the even feet (second,
fourth, etc.), so that the dipody has the form _^w_^lw.
An apparent anapaest ( \j w > for >) is sometimes used
as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic
dactyl A^w (1634) sometimes stands for the trochee in
proper names in both parts of the dipody, except at the end
of the verse.
The tribrach (^ w w) may stand for the trochee (1631)
in every foot except the last.
1651. The chief trochaic verse which is used by the line
(1649) is the TETRAMETER CATALECTIC, consisting of seven
feet and a syllable, divided into two rhythmical series (1637)
by a diaeresis (1643) after the second dipody. E.g.
356
(1)
VERSIFICATION.
[1652
(2) Kara
(3)
ws ayety
re
TOV VOVV
TOV piov Tas
TOV TttSe
v^
^ A
/aot.
Notice the tribrach in the first place of (2), and the cyclic
dactyl in the third place of (3).
This verse is familiar in English poetry, as
Tell me not in mournful numbers, life is but an empty dream.
1652. The lame tetrameter (o-;(a(oj/), called Hipponactean from
Hipponax (see 1663), is the preceding verse with the last syllable
but one long. E.g.
o/x</>t3etos yap ei/xt KOV% a//,apTaVa> KOTrrcov. 4
I I I
1653. The following are some of the more important
lyric trochaic verses :
1. Tripody acatalectic (the Ithyphallic) :
/X^TTOT* KTa.K.ir). 5
2. Tripody catalectic :
os ye o-av AtTraiv. 6
3. Tetrapody or dimeter acatalectic :
TOVTO TOV /xev ^pos act
4. Tetrapody or dimeter catalectic :
Setva
__ w _ w w (1647)
5. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic:
apTrayat 8ta8po/xav
iAr.JV.575.
2 i&id. 626.
E. Or. 1536.
4 Hippon. 83.
5 A. Pr. 535.
e 8. ^%. 1216.
Ar. 40. 1478, 1479.
ibid. 1472.
ibid- 1481.
10 A. ^e. 351
1658] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 357
1654. A stanza consisting of a series of dimeters acata-
lectic (1653, 3), rarely with an occasional monometer
(__ w _ w), and ending in a dimeter catalectic (1653, 4) ;
is called a trochaic system. E.g.
7T/30S CU//3OS (TTl W_W W - W
vovv l^ovros KCU <t>pva.s KOI w > I w >
rroAAa TTfi/oiTreTrAev/coTOS. 1 wwwwl w A
For iambic and anapaestic systems, formed on the same prin-
ciple, see 1666 and 1677. See also 1636.
1655. The following contain examples of syncopated
trochaic verses (1632, 1) :
vvv Kara(TTpo(f>al veiov w w I w_/\
ci Kpariyaet St'/cd re KOJ. /3\dj3a
w i I w i_ I __ w _ w I w _ A
(JLYjTpOKTOVOV
* - W l I V> -
dvarpOTras, orav^Ap^s Tt^aaos wv <j>t\ov e\J/ 8
C/Vsywi Iv^/wwl lwwwl__lwww _ /\
1656. In lyric trochaic and iambic verses, the irrational syllable
is found chiefly in comedy, and is avoided in tragedy.
IAMBIC RHYTHMS.
1657. Iambic verses are generally measured by dipodies
(1646). The irrational iambus > -^ (1633) in the form of
a spondee can stand in the first place of each iambic dipody,
that is, in the odd places (first, third, etc.), so that the
dipody has the form w - w -. An apparent dactyl (> w w
for > ) is sometimes used as the equivalent of the irra-
tional iambus ; and the cyclic anapaest w w^ (1634) is used
for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, except in the
last foot, especially by the Attic comedians (1658). The
tribrach (w 6 w) may stand for the iambus in every foot
except the last.
1658. The most common of all iambic verses is the
TRIMETER AC AT A LECTIO, in which most of the dialogue of
* Ar. # 534 ff, A. Eu. 490 ff. iW 354 ff.
358 VERSIFICATION. f!659
the Attic drama is composed. It never allows any substi-
tution in the last foot. With this exception it may have
the tribrach in any place. The irrational iambus > in
the form of a spondee can stand in the first place of every
dipody. The tragedians allow the (apparent) dactyl > w w
only in the first and third places, and the cyclic anapaest
only in the first place ; but in proper names they allow the
anapaest in every place except the last. The comedians
allow the dactyl > w w in all the odd places, and the cyclic
anapaest in every place except the last (1657). The most
common caesura is that after the thesis of the third foot.
1659. The following scheme shows the tragic and the?
comic iambic trimeter compared, the forms peculiar to
comedy being enclosed in [ ].
W_W_
w- w_
^/ ^^ Vrf/
WWW WWW
WWW W W W
WWW
> w w
> w w
Oww]
w w^ L^ ^~~J
[ww-][ww-]
[ww-]
1660. When the tragic trimeter ends in a word forming a cretic
(_ ^ _ ), this is regularly preceded by a short syllable or by a
monosyllable. 1 In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three
syllables, even where they are allowed.
1661. The following are examples of both the tragic and
the comic form of the iambic trimeter :
(Tragic) ^oi/os /xcv ets | rrjXovpov ^(
? ol\fjLOv, a/Barov cis
<roi | 8e xpij fjt.fXf.Lv \ 7rrroAos. A. Pr. 1-3.
(Comic) to Zev J3a<n\tv \ TO ^p^/uta raV | WKTWI/ ocrov
', | co 7rdXc/>tc, 7roA|XaJv ovvcKa. Ar. N. 2, 3, 6.
1 This is known as "Person's rule." "Nempe hanc regulam ple-
rumque in senariis observabant Tragici, ut, si voce quae Creticum
pedem efficeret terminaretur versus, eamque vocem hypermonosyl-
labon praecederet, quintus pes iambus vel tribrachys esse deberet."
ad Praef. ad Hecubam-
1665] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 35S
1662. The Iambic Trimeter appears in English as the
Alexandrine, which is seldom used except at the end of a
stanza :
And hope to mer|it Heaven by mak|ing Earth a Hell.
1663. The lame trimeter (cr;(aw), called the Choliambus and the
Hipponactean (see 1652), is the preceding verse with the last syl-
lable but one long. It is said to have been invented by Hipponax
(about 540 B.C.), and it is used in the newly discovered mimes of
Herondas. E.g.
'iTTTrwi/aKTOS * ou yap dAA* i^Ka). 1
rt o~ot 8oir)o~av at <i'Aai Mo9o~at. 2
w_^w I w w I w
1664. The TETRAMETER CATALECTIC, consisting of seven
ieet and a syllable, is .common in Attic comedy. There is
&, regular diaeresis (1643) after the second dipody, where
the first rhythmical series ends (1637).
ClTTC/t) TOV
\L (1640,2)
In English poetry we have
A captain bold | of Halifax, || who lived in coun|try quarters.
1665. The following are some of the more important
lyric iambic verses :
1. Dipody or monometer :
TL&jffopfc;* u_w_
2. Tripody (acatalectic and catalectic) :
TL Twi/8* oVev Ka/coiv/* w w _ w _
3. Dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
^ rj\u> o-e Tys \
Kat TOV \6yov } TOV yjTT<a. 9 > w _ I w I __ (1640, 2)
Hipp. 47. * ibid. 1098. ' A. <7fc. 22.
Herond. 3, 1. A. ^gr. 211. Ar. Ach. 1008.
360 VERSIFICATION. [1666
4. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic :
irperrei Trapes <J>oivioi<s d/Avy/xots. 1
w _ w _ l^> _ w __ I w L_
1666. Iambic systems are formed on the same principle as
trochaic systems (1654), of acatalectic dimeters with an occasional
monometer, ending with a catalectic dimeter. E.g.
qrTiqfJLeO' ' co /Jtvov/xevoi, > w I > w
Trpos roil/ 0eoV 8ea(70 /xov > w l> w
OolfJLaTiov, <os > w w w
e^avro/aoAo) Trpos v/xa?. > w w I w I --
These verses end a long iambic system in Ar. Nub. 1090-1104:
see also Nub. 1446-1452, and Eq. 911-940.
1667. For the irrational syllable in lyric verse, see 1656.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS.
1668. The only regular substitute for the dactyl is the
spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short syl-
lables of the dactyl ( from ^- w w).
1669. The most common of all Greek verses is the HEROIC
HEXAMETER, the Homeric verse. It always has a spondee
in the last place, often in the first four places, seldom in the
fifth (the verse being then called spondaic). There is com-
monly a caesura in the third foot, either after the arsis or
(rather more frequently) dividing the thesis. There is
sometimes a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot, and
rarely one in the thesis. The caesura after the arsis is
called masculine, that in the thesis feminine or trochaic. A
diaeresis after the fourth foot, common in bucolic poetry, is
called bucolic. E.g.
flOL W7T, MovCTO, TToXvTpOTTOV, OS ftttXtt TToAAtt
W I W^ I Wwl - WW I _ W VS I _ M
lepdv 7rroAie0pov
I ___ I __ - w wl ww I ww I
1672] DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 361
TtW avr', alyioxpio Atos TCKOS, fJXrjXovOas ;
_ _ I _ W W I - WW I - WWj I __ _l
CITTC //.ot, w KopvScuv, TtVos at )8oes/ ^
ww I \j\j I _ ww I _ \j\j\
1670. The ELEGIAC DISTICH consists of an heroic hexam-
eter followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This
last verse consists really of two dactylic trimeters with
syncope (1632, 1) or catalexis in the last measure ; as
v\irepOev |x et ' 8
At the end of the pentameter verse the pause (70 takes the
place of syncope (i_i) in the middle. The verse probably arose
from a repetition of the first penthemim (7rev0->7/At-/xepe's, Jive half-
feet) of th*e hexameter. But syllaba anceps and hiatus are not
allowed after the first trimeter, but only at the end of the verse
(1638). The last two complete feet are always dactyls. A diaeresis
(1643) divides the two parts of the verse. The pentameter is
never used by itself.
1671. The following is an Elegiac Distich :
Tts Se /?t|os TI 8c I Ttpirvov
TOva\rjV OT I fJiOl Jl fJ.Tf)KCTl \ TCLVTa
1672. In the Homeric verse a long vowel or a diphthong in the
thesis (not in the arsis) is often shortened at the end of a word
when the next word begins with a vowel. This sometimes occurs
in the middle of a word. E.g.
<3 TTOTrot, | rj jMjXa | 8r) fteTe|/?ovA.cv|<rai/ $eoi | aAAtos. 5
Xpvtrea) d|va OToyJTTTpa), /cat J Ato-(rero | TraVras *A|^atovs (see 47, 1)/
j3fftXrja.i, ovo aXtov )8cAos e/c^vyev? ws 6<f>\ov rot. 7
But ^/xerepa) en otKa> <
i 72. 1, 202. * Mimn. 1, 1 and 2. 7Z. 11, 380.
2Theoc.4,l. * 0(2.5,286. 8 -R. 1,30.
s Solon, 4, 4. 77. 1, 15.
362 VERSIFICATION. [1673
1673. When a short vowel stands in Homer where a long one
is required by the verse, it may be explained in various ways.
1. By supposing A, /*, v, p, or a- to be doubled at the beginning
of certain words ; as TroAAa A.io-<ro/x,eVco ( ___ w w __), II. 22, 91
(we have eAAiWcro in //. 6, 45).
2. By the original presence of f making position (see 3 ; 90 ; 91) ;
as roiov poi Trvp ( ____ ), II. 5, 7. So before Sei'Sw, fear, and
other derivatives of the stem 8f -, and before Si}v (for 8frjv)*
3. By a pause in the verse (1642, 2) prolonging the time; as in
<evyo)//,v ' en yap KCV dAvai/Aev KO.KOV
1674. The following are some of the chief lyric dactylic
verses :
1. Dimeter:
//,v<TTo8o|/<os SO/ACS* _ w w I _ w w
fJLOlpa 8t[(UK 8 __ W W I _i_
2. Trimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
7ra/x,7r/o7TTOis eV 2Spanv. 4 -- I w w I __
7ra/o0eVoi | 6/x,/fy>o<o|poi 5 wwl wwl A
With anacrusis (1635) :
lyf.iva.ro /xei/ popov avrw w : ww _ <^w_.
TTOLTpOKTOVOV OlStTToSttl/. 6 W ! - W W - V/ W 7\
3. Tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic) :
TTtfJLTTU ^VV Sopl KOL ^Cpt TTpaKTOpl} _ I _ WW 1 _ ^ W l .WV^
ovpav{\oi<s re ^e|o
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS.
1675. Anapaestic verses are generally measured by dipo-
dies (1646). The spondee and the dactyl (_ -^ and v^w)
may stand for the anapaest.
The long syllable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two
short, making w w ^ w for w w .
i Od. 10, 269. * A. Ag. 117. A. Ag. 111.
2 Ar.^V.303. * Ar. AT. 299. Ar.^V.305.
8 E. Her. 612. A. Se. 751, 752. Ar. fl. 879.
1677] ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS. 363
1676. The following are the most common anapaestic
verses :
1. The monometer :
TpOTTOV <u|yV7ri<OV.* W W _ I W W _
Kal 0e/us I aiveiv. 2 __ w w I ...
2. The dimeter acatalectic :
| aXyem \ TraioW. 5 -- I ww I ww I --
And the <5|live of peace | sends its branches abroad.
3. The dimeter catalectic, or paroemiac :
Tjpav | <TTpa.TiG)\Tiv ap<o|yi}i>. -- Iww I w w i_i I (1640, 2)
Qvrot | 7rAovn}|o-eT 7rav|Ts. 7 -- I -- I wwi_il
The Lord | is adv^nc|ing. Prepare | ye I
4. The TETRAMETER CATALECTIC, consisting of seven feet
and a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined.
There is a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. This
verse is frequently used by the line (1649) in long passages
of Aristophanes.
Trpoar^ere TOV vovv TO?? aflavaTois \\ fffjuv, TOIS at|ev covo~t,
rots aiflepibis, | TOLCTLV dy^pws, || rots ajfyOiTo. /x>y|8o/>ti/otcrlv.
_ "^^ CvO _ I _ 00 ^^ _ || __ OO I w W L_J
1677. An ANAPAESTIC SYSTEM consists of a series of
anapaestic dimeters acatalectic, with occasionally a mono-
meter, ending always with the paroemiac (or dimeter
catalectic). These are very frequently employed in both
tragedy and comedy. E.g.
SeKttTOV {JLV TOS ToS* CTTCt IIpla/
/u-eyas avTi'St/cos,
MeveAdos ava^ -^8* 'Aya/xe/wwv,
SiOpovov Ato^cv Kat Sto-K^Trrpov
Tt/xr/s oxvpov ^cvyos 'ArpctSav,
erroAov 'ApyetW X^to^av
aTTo ^as
* A. ^4gr. 49. 8 Ar. 4r. 221. 5 z&M. 50. 7 Ar. Av. 736. A. ^r. 40-47
* ibid. 98. *A.^.48.
364 VERSIFICATION. [1678
1678. Anapaestic systems are especially common in march
movements in tragedy, where they were probably chanted by the
leader of the chorus, as in the
LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS.
1679. Logaoedic rhythm is a rhythm in -| time, having
the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom
of construction. Besides the trochee __ w, it admits the
irrational trochee __ >, the tribrach w w w, the cyclic dactyl
w w, and the triseme (1632, 1) or syncopated trochee i __
These are all equivalent feet, of three times (= w w w).
1680. The first foot of a logaoedic verse allows special freedom.
It may be a trochee or an irrational trochee _ >, and sometimes
a tribrach w w w. An apparent iambus (probably with ictus
<$ __) sometimes occurs (1682, 7). Great license is here per-
mitted in using different forms in strophe and antistrophe, even
in verses which otherwise correspond precisely : see 1682, 7.
When a logaoedic verse has more than one rhythmical series
(1637), the first foot of each series has this freedom of form (see
1682, 7).
1681. An anacrusis (1635) may introduce any logaoedic verse.
1682. The following are some of the most important
logaoedic verses which have special names :
1. Adonic: (rvfJifJLa\o<s lo-cro. 1 ^ w I _ w This is the final
verse of the Sapphic stanza (6).
2. First Pherecratic : CTrraTrvAowri >y/3ai5. 2 w w I _ w I _ w
Catal. as rpe/AO/Acy Atyeiv. 8 w w I _ w I _ /\
3. Second Pherecratic: -rrcuSos 8v(r<f>opov aVaV. 4 _ > I >^w I _ w
Catal. e/c pjkv 8rj 7roA.e)u,a>v. 5 _ > I ww I _ /\
4. Gly conic : (Three forms) :
(a) LTTTTL ava Iloo-eiSoi/, <S. 6 vy
(c) <wTa /3dvTa iravo'aytia. 8 _
1 Sapph. 1, 28. *S.4J.643. 7 S. An. 101.
2 Pind. Py. 11, 11. S. An. 150. 8 tMZ. 107.
8 8. O.0. 129. Ar.Jg^.651.
1683] LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 365
5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza (a, a, 6, c) :
(a) dowerr/iu TWJ/ aW/xa>v oracriv '
w : w I w I w w I w I A
(a) TO /xev yap ZvOev Kv/xa KvA.tV8eTat
wi_wl_>l-ww|_wl_A
(6) TO 8' ZvOev ' a/x/xes 8' av TO /xrow
w:_wl_>l_wl_w
(c) i/a't <f>op^fjie0a <rvv /xeAdtVa. 1
i I I
Compare in Horace (Od. 1, 9) :
Vides ut alta stet nive candidum
Soracte, nee iam sustineant onus
Silvae laborantes, geluque
Flumina constiterint acuto.
6. Sapphic: 7roi/a[A.o#pov' | dOdvaT* | i A<^>po[8tTa. 2
I _>
Three Sapphics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza.
7. Eupolidean: o> ^e|o>t(,e|i/ot, KaTepw || irpos |/xas |Xev^|ptus. 8
l-ll _w _wl_w|_
(See 1644.)
The Eupolidean verse is used by the line in comedy ; as in Ar.
Nub. 518-562.
1683. The first strophe of the first Olympic ode of
Pindar is given as an example of the free use of logaoedics
in lyric poetry.
apurrov /xci/ u8wp, 6 8e || ^pDo-os al06p.vov irvp
w : L_ I w w I w I i_ II w I w w I _ w
oVe 8ia7rpC7Tt || i/VKTt /xeyavopo? e^o^a TT\OVTOV '
WWW I W I I II W W I -J^ W 1 W W I __. W
ci 8* ae$A.a yapvev
w I w 1 w I A
i Alcae. 18, 1-4. 2 Sapph. 1, 1. Ar. N. 618.
VERSIFICATION. [1684
<f>[\ov rjrop,
_ w I -w w I W
(MqKcr* deXiov oxOTra
_ w I w I _ w I /\
S\Xo 9a.XirvoTf.pov fv a/Ae'||pa ^aevi/oi/ avrpov epiyU^as Si* aiflepos,
_ w I w I www I w II w I w I ww 1 1 _ II w I _ w I _ A
_ w I _ w I _ w I _ w II w w 1 1 _ I _ w I _
6 7roA.v<aros v/xvos d//-^>iy8aXXrat
I www I w I w I __ w I A
I _ w ll_l wwwl _
Kpovou TratS', s d</
w : i _ I w I w i i Iwww I A
fjuoKatpuv 'lepwvos eo-rtav.
w : I I www I _ w I _ w I A
DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS.
1684, 1. About half of the odes of Pindar are com-
posed in a measure called dactylo-epitritic, which consists
of dactyls, with their equivalent spondees and syncopated
forms (i_ i), and epitrites. The epitrite (L_^ __ ) is com-
posed of a long (or Doric) trochee (L_ w, see 1632, 2) and
a spondee. The dactylic parts of the verse generally have
the form _lww-nww_l__or (catalectic) -^.w w -?- w w ^- A".
The epitrite also may be catalectic, i_ w _ 7\ . The verse
may have an anacrusis.
2. It will be noticed that in this verse the long trochee (i_ w)
has the same length as the dactyl and the dactyl has its full time,
while in logaoedic verse the trochee has its ordinary time and the
dactyl is cyclic (equivalent in time to the trochee).
1685. The first strophe of Pindar's third Olympic ode
is an example of this measure :
TwSapiScu? re <iA.oeivot? dSeiv KaA.||Xt7rXo/cdjU,a) & 'EXei/a
w w I _ wwl __ I i _ w __ II _ wwl _ wwl _ A"
K\ivav 'AKpayai/ra ycpat/owv ev^o/x-ai,
I wwl wwl _ I L_ w _ A"
1688] FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 367
97/30)1/0? 'OAvfuriovtKav || vfjivov op$uVais, a
: ww| wwl -- II I w -- | ww | ww| A
tTTTTO)!/ a<l)TOI>. || MottTtt OUTO) /AOt 7TapCCTTd||KO6 VCOfTiyaAoi/ CVpOVTl TpOTTOV
_ :L-W __ lli_w -- 1 1 w __ I! ww I _ w^l . I L_W A"
L_ w -- l_
EHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
1686. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of
five or six times (1627, 3 and 4) are the following :
1687. 1. Choriambic rhythms, with the choriambus
w w _ as the fundamental foot :
fjikv avjras Trcwnv av|ra
Seiva fjikv ovvj Sctva Tapaaact <ro^>os
ww | ww I w w __ |
2. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most verses formerly
called choriambic are here explained as logaoedic (1682).
1688. 1. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore w w __
as the fundamental foot, admitting also the equivalent
WWLJ (1626, 2):
TTcrrcpa/cci'l/xei/ 6 7rep<7e|7TToAis rj&q
/?acrtA.eios | o-rparos ets a.v\Tiiropov yct'|rova
HriSos "EAAas. 3
x
2. A double trochee _ w _ w often takes the place of the two
long syllables and the two following shorts. This is called anaclasis
(avaKA.ao-is, breaking up), as it breaks up the feet. E.g.
Tts 6 KpaiTTvco | TToSt
I V^/W __ I
iA./^e.929. 2S.O.T.484. A. Pe. 65-70.
368 VERSIFICATION. [1689
1689. Oretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolu-
tion of long syllables (_ www or w w w _ for _ w _) :
OVK dva|o'x>7O"o/A<u * | jUT/Sc A. eye j /xot &v Aoyov *
tos /u,e/xt|(r^Ka (re KAe'jan/os Irt | /AaAAoi/, ov
KaraTe/AO) j TOLCTLV i-Tr\irev<n Karlrv/ouxTa. 1
w | w | www | www
w I www I www | w _
WWW - | - W - | - W - | - W _
1690. Bacchic rhythms, with the bacchlus w __ as the
fundamental foot :
Ti's a^o), | TI'S oS/Aa I TT/DOtreTTTa I /w, 1 d<eyy)} / 2
W -- I W -- I W -- I W __
oreva^a) / | TI' pe^to / | yeVcu/aat | Svo-oiVra | TroXtrats / 3
v/ -- I w -- I w _| w -- | w --
DOCHMIACS.
1691. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in tragedy
to express great excitement, are based upon a foot called
the dochmius, compounded of an iambus and a cretic (or a
bacchius and an iambus) w _ I _ w _. (or w -- I w _). This
peculiar foot appears in nineteen different forms, by re-
solving the long syllables and admitting irrational longs
in place of the two shorts. Its most common forms are
w _ | _ w _ and w w w | __ w As examples may be given
SixraAyet Tv^a. 4 w -- w
TTTfpo<j>6pov Se/mas. 5 www w _
lU&oOeov /Av ow. 6 > w w _ w (for > __ w _ )
/xeyaAa jU,cyaA.a /cat. w w w w w w (for w __ w _ )
(TKOTO> Oaviov 6 rXa^wv. 8 w __ w _ |w __ > _
erT/oaT05,
1 Ar. Ach. 299-301. * A. Ag. 1165. 7 E.^a. 1198.
2 A. Pr. 115. e ibidm 114 7. 8 E. Hip. 837.
A.w.788. t&id. 1090. A.Se.79.
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF VEEBS.
APPENDIX.
1692. CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
NOTE. This catalogue professes to contain all verbs in ordinary
use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present
difficulties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur
in some form before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not
found in writers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except some-
times the present indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses,
and occasionally a form which is given for completeness and marked
as later. Tenses which are not used by Attic writers, in either prose
or poetry, or which occur only in lyrical parts of the drama, are
enclosed in [ ], except occasionally the present indicative of a verb
which is Attic in other tenses.
The verb stem, with any other important forms of the stem, is
given in ( ) directly after the present indicative, unless the verb
belongs to the first class (569). The class of each verb in a is given
by an Arabic numeral in ( ) at the end, unless it is of the first class.
Verbs in fu of the Seventh Class (619), enumerated in 794, are marked
with (I.) ; those of the Fifth Class in vlfu (608), enumerated in 797, 1,
with (II.) ; and the poetic verbs in jnjfu or vapou (609), enumerated in
797, 2, which add va to the stem in the present, with (III.)- A few
epic peculiarities are sometimes disregarded in the classification.
The modification of the stem made by adding in certain tenses
(653) is marked by prefixing (*-) to the first form in which this
occurs, unless this is the present. Presents in ew thus formed have
a reference to 654. A hyphen prefixed to a form (as -e'5/>aj>) indicates
that it is found only in composition. This is omitted, however, if the
simple form occurs even in later Greek ; and it is often omitted when
the occurrence of cognate forms, or any other reason, makes it prob-
able that the simple form was in use. It would be extremely difficult
to point out an example of every tense of even the best English verbs
in a writer of established authority within a fixed period.
The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present
or perfect is given. Second perfects which are given among the prin-
cipal parts of a verb (462, 1) are not specially designated (see /SXdTrrw).
371
372 APPENDIX. [1692
A.
[(da-), injure, infatuate, stem, with aor. dour a (tfao-a), aVa ; a. p.
ddffd-rjv ; pr. mid. darcu, aor. aa.crdfji.rjv, erred. Vb. aaros, Av-dros.
Epic.]
"A-yajtai, admire, [epic fut. dydvonai, rare,] ^ydcrdrfv, ^ya<rdfji.rjv. (I.)
(d77eX-), announce, dyye\& [dyy\t<i)~], yyyetXa, Tjyye\i<a,,
i, ijyy^Xdrjv, fut. p. dyye\6^a-ofj,ai ; a. m. rjyyeiXdfj.vjv. Second
aorists with X are doubtful. (4.)
'A-yetpu (dyep-), collect, a. yyeipa ; [ep. plpf. p. dyrjy^paro ; a. p. ^y^pdrjv,
a. m. (i^eipd/iTjj') avv-ayeiparo, 2 a. m. ayepbuyv with part. dyp6fj,evos.
See i)7ep<tfo/icu.] (4.)
"A-yviiiu (fa7-), in comp. also d7vi5w, &rea&, A^w, eaa (537, 1) [rarely
epic ^ifa], 2 p. ea7a [Ion. 1770], 2 a. p. ^777 v [ep. IdY^y or A7r;j/].
(II.)
"A-yw, lead, d^w, ^^a (rare), ^x a > ^7Mat ? 17%^"? d^d^ofMi ; 2 a. ^70-
701*, rtyay6fj,r]v ; fut. m. a&twi (as pass.), [Horn. a. m. dl-d(j.rii>, 2 a.
act^imper. d^ere, inf. d^/^vat (777, 8).]
saied, stem with aor. opt. adja-eiey, pf. part, a
Epic.]
-), res^, stem with aor. <3te<ra, acra. Epic.]
"Ai8w, sing, <ro/u (^<rw, rare), ^<ra, rj<r6rjv. Ion. and poet.
delvofjiai, Tjeiffa.
: Horn, for av|w.]
(ae-), blow, &TJTOV, &ei<ri, inf. dijvai, d^fjLevat, part, defs ; imp.
&TJV. Mid.&7]TaiB,ndaijTo, part, d^/xevos. Poetic, chiefly epic.] (I.)
AlS&pai, poet. af5o/tat, respect, ai5^(ro/xat, rjdea-fjLcu, rjdfoOriv (as mid.),
riSeo-dwv (chiefly poet.), [Horn, imperat. a5eioj. 639 ; 640.
Alva>, praise, alvfou [a^^a-w] , ^ve<ra [^V7?(ra], ^veica, rivrj^at, -gv^d-qv, 639.
[Atw|xai, iaA;e, imp. alvu^v. Epic.] (11.^
ALpa) (atpe-, \-~), take,, aip-^crw, yprjKa, /yp^/wai [Hdt. dpalpr}Ka, dpalprj-
/*ai], -Qptdtiv, aipedri<ro/j.cu ; fut. pf. ^p-fjffo^aL (rare) ; 2 a. eiXov, ^Xw,
etc. ; el\6fji,ir)v, ^Xw/tai, etc. (8.)
(ap-), a^e MJ9, apw, ^pa (674), ^p/ca, ^/3/*at, ^^v, ap0r)<ro/j.cu ;
(674). Ion. and poet. dcCpw (dep-), ^eipa, rifyQrjv, [^ep/ucu
(late), Horn. plpf. tiupro for ijepro ; a. m. detpd/i^j'.] Fut. dpou/iai
and 2 a. -fipd^v (with Apw/xat (a) etc.) belong to &pvv/j.at (dp-). (4.)
AUrOdvopai (aiV^-) , perceive, (e-) alffd^cronai, ^o-^/xat ; -gcrdb^v. Pres.
afo6ofj.ai (rare). (5.)
'Ato-o-w (dtVc-), rws^, dt^w, ^a, iftyQt]v, ^dfj.r}v. Also ao-<ro> or 4 TTW
(also #0-<rw or drrw), ^w, ^a. Both rare in prose. (4.)
, disgrace, alcrxwu, Tj<rxvj>a, [p. p. part. ep.
v, felt ashamed, at^xvyG^ffofMt ; fut. m.
(40
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 373
'At, hear, imp. Z'Cov, [aor. -^tVa.] Ionic and poetic.
['Atft>, breathe out, only imp. al'ov. Epic. See d^/xt.]
['Aicaxtft> (dx-, see 587), afflict, redupl. pres., with ayjia) and
be grieved (only in pr. part, dx^w, axeita?), and axojicu, be grieved ;
fut. aKax'^o'w, aor. dtfdx'tyo'a ; p.p. d/cd%7;/4ot (aKTjx^Sarcu), d/cdx^flcu,
dKaxil/Aevos or d/c77x^evos ; 2 aor. TJKO.XOV, d.Kax6fj,r)v. See Axvu/iai
and AXO/XCU. Epic.] (4.)
['AKaxH-cvos, sharpened, epic perl part, with no present in use.]
'AK0|iai, fteaZ, aor. Ty/ceo-d/AT/i/.
^W, neglect, [aor. dioJ5e<ra epic]. Poetic.
VCJ (d/cov- for d/co/>), Aear, dicoiJo-o/Aat, rjKovffa. [Dor. pf. tf/cou/ca], 2
pf. d/ojKoa (for d/c-7//co/ra, 690), 2 plpf. 17*77x677 or &KijK6ij\
(dXaXa7-), raise war-cry, dXaXd^o/xai, t)XdXa^a. (4.)
'AXdojiai, wander, [pf. dXdXTj/wu (as pres.), w. inf. dXdXT/o-flcu, part.
dXaX7)/xews], a. akifjQ^v. Chiefly poetic.
'AXSaCvco (dXSaj/-), nourish, [ep. 2 aor. ^XSayoi/.] Pres. also dX5^<r/ca;.
Poetic. (4.)
'AXi<J>u> (dXei0-), anoint, dXe/^w, T^Xet^a, dXr)Xt0a, dX7)Xi/*/*ai, 7i\eL<f>0if}v,
(rare), 2 a. p. 77X^77 v (rare). Mid. f. dXetyo/u, a.
. 529. (2.)
-, dXeic-). ware? ojf, fut. drX^oAtat [ep. (e-) dXe^o-w, Hd.
; aor. (e-) rJX^aa (r^Xe^a, rare), TjXe^d^v ; [ep. 2 a.
d\a\Kov for dX-aXeK-oj*.] 657.
avoid, epic ; aor. TjXed/iT;!/.]
XeiJo-w, T^Xeutra. Mid. dXei5o/*at, avoid, aor. r}\evd/Ji-rjv,
with subj. ^-aXei5<rw/iat. Poetic.
'AXe'w, grn'Tia', T^Xeo-a, dX7jXe<r/xai or dX^Xe^iai. 639 ; 640.
["AX9op.ai, 6e healed, (e-) dX0T;o-o//,cu.] Ionic and poetic.
AXCo-KOfiat (a'X-, aXo-), &e captured, aXc6(ro/>tai, r/XwKa or ^aXw/ca, 2 aor.
77X0;^ or ^Xwv, aXw [epic a'Xi6w], dXolrjv, dX&vcu, aXoi/s (799) ; all
passive in meanuig. 659. No active aXJo-xw, but see dv-aX(o-Kw.
(6.)
fAXiraivofiai (dXir-, dXtrai/-), with epic pres. act. dXirpaivw, sin; 2
aor. ^XITOJ/, d\Lr6fjiijv, pf. part. dXir^/iej/os, sinning, ep.]. Poetic,
chiefly epic. (4. 5.)
'AXXdtrcrco (dXX<ry-), change, dXXdfw, ^XXafa, r^XXaxa, T^XXa^/xat, 7)XXd-
and ^XKdyirjv, dXXax^i70"o/iai and dXXa7r)cro^tai. Mid. fut. dXXd-
, a. ^\\a^d/j.ijv. (4.)
(a'X-), Zeap, a'XoO/Acu, ij\&^v ; 2 a. T^/AT/P (rare). [Epic 2 a.
dXao, dXro, AXyuews, by syncope.] 800, 2. (4.)
and dXvKre'w, &e excited, imp. dXi/Krafov Hdt. pf. dXaXu-
Horn. Ionic.]
374 APPENDIX. [1692
(dXvfc-), avoid, dXtfw [and dXtfo/uat], ^Xu|a (rarely -
Poetic. 'AX&r/cw is for aXuK-<rjew (617). (6.)
'AX4>dvw (dX0-), ./ma", acquire, [epic 2 aor. ^X^o?.] (5.)
vw (a/xa/or-), err, (e-) dfj.aprria-oiJ.ai, ^/-tdpr^Ka, ^dpTTj/zcu,
, 2 aor. yiMpTov [ep. Tj/j.ppoTov']. (5.)
Kw (d/t/3X-), d/*/3X6a> in compos., miscarry, [d/Aj3X<4(rw, late,]
a, ^/A/SXw/Acu, 7)^\<i}df)v. (6.)
(dfj.ep-) and dfiepSw, deprive, ^epcra, -fi^pdrjv. Poetic. (1. 4.)
w and ci(i.Tr-Co-xw (d/t0/ and e^w), torop a&owi, clothe, dju0<w,
', [epic impf. #/*7rexoi'.] Mid. d/XTr^xo/Aat, dfj.irl<rxo/J.ai,
; imp. int.Trei-x.b^v ; f. d/A0^|o/xai ; 2 a. ^/A7rt-o > x6/iT7' and
, 544. See c'xw and t<rx&>.
(d/x,7rXa/c-), err, m/ss, ^TrXdKTj/iai ; 2 a. #/rXaKOj>, part
d/JiTr\aK(S}v or dTrXa/cciv. Poetic. (6.)
, a^irvvvdfjv, &/J.TTVVTO, all epic: see dyaTrv^w.]
(d / uu'-), ward ojf,* fut. &nvvu>, afj.vvovfj.ai', aor. yfjivva,
-), scratch, [d/At$o>, ^u|a (Theoc.), ^/iv^d/Ai;!']. Poetic
and Ionic. (4.)
doubt, ^/J.(t>tyv6eov and JiiJ.(peyv6eoj>, rnjL<j>eyv()i)ffa ; aor. pass.
part. a^Lyvo-rjOeLs. 544.
Ajj.<|>i-evvv(jLi (see ^wv^C), clothe, fut. [ep. d/*0i^o-w] Att. d/x0t<3 ; ^fj.(pLf.aa,
rj/j,(j>i(riJi,ai', afj.<f)i{<ro/j.ai, afj.(j>i<rd/j,r)v (poet.). 544. (II.)
An<|>i<rpT)T'a>, dispute, augmented ^/i0r- and ^^0e<r- (544) ; otherwise
regular.
Avcuvofjicu (d^ay-), refuse, imp. ^vaivofnjv, aor. ^vrjv&^v, dv/iva<r6ai. (4.)
AvdXCo-KO) (a'X-, aXo-, 659), and dvdXow, expend, dva\ib<ru, dvdXuva,
and di'iJXwa'a (KaT-Tyi'aXaxra), dmXw/ca and d^Xw/ca, dvd\b)fj.ai and
dv^Xw/xai (KaT-ir)vd\(i)fJ.ai), dvdXddrjv and dvyXdOyv, dvd\wdri<ro(ji.at.
See d\to-KO}iai. (6.)
'Avairv^w, aA:e breath; see TTJ/^W (TT^U-). [Epic 2 aor. imperat. a/wi-we,
a. p. dfATrvvvdr)?, 2 a. m. afnrvvTO (for d/MrptfeTo).]]
"AvSdvw (fad-, a5-), please [impf. Horn, yvdavov and e-f/vdavov, Hdt.
^rdawp and e-^vdavov ; fut. (-) aS^o-w, Hdt. ; 2 pf. &ia, epic] ;
2 aor. tfSoi' [Ion. loSov, epic euaSov for ^/:/ra5oj/.] Ionic and poetic.
See a<r-fj,t>os, pleased, as adj. (5.)
'Avex, AoZo* wp; see 'x, and 544.
[*AW|vo06, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung ; in J7. 11, 266 as 2 plpf.
(777,4). Epic.]
Av-ol-yvvfu and dvoC-yca (see otyvvfiC), open, imp. dvtyyov
rare) [epic dj'<?7o']; dvo^w, dvtyfc (rtvoga, rare) [Hdt.
d^vx a dvtif>yfj.ai, dve(xQ'n v ( su t>j. dvotx^<S, etc.) ; fut. pf.
(2 pf. dj^yya late, very rare in Attic). (II.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 375
'Av-op06o>, set upright, augment dvup- and Tjvwp-. 544.
'Avvw, Attic also OLVVTW, accomplish; fat. avfou [Horn, dptfw], avfoo-
/j.ai ] aor. Tjvva-a, Tjvva-dfj.Tjv ; pf. TjvvKa, Tjvvo'fj.ai. 639. Poetic also av(a.
"Avuya, 2 perf. as pres., command [w. 1 pi. avwy^jxv, sub. dixtyw, opt.
dvc67oi/], imper. avuye (rare), also di/u>x0i (with d^xtfw, #j/u>x0e),
[inf. dj/ory^u.e;'] ; 2 plpf- Tjvuyea', rjvtbyei (or d^w^ei), [also rjvuyov
(or d>/w7oj'), see 777, 4]. [Present forms av&yei and dv^eroj'
(as if from at>6yw) occur ; also fut. d>(6w, a. ^w^a.] Poetic and
Ionic.
['Air-avpdw, take away, not found in present ; imp. airtj^pwv (as aor.) ;
kindred forms are epic fut. dirovpfow, and aor. part, airovpas, &TTOV-
pdjuevos.] Poetic.
)'Aira<j)i<rKa> (a7r-a0-), deceive, jjirdtfirjcra. (rare), 2 a. rfira^ov, m. opt.
dira<pol/j.'r)v']. Poetic. (6.)
'AirexOdvojJiat (^x^-), be hated, (-) dwexd^ffofjuii, o.ir'i]-xjd'(]^o.i ; 2 a.
dTTTjx #6/477 v. Late pres. d7r<?x0o/u. (5.)
['Airoepo-e, swep^ o^", subj. diro^pffy, opt. dirotpffeie (only in 3 pers.).
Epic.]
'AiroKTvvvp,i and -vw, forms of diroKrelvw. See KreCvu.
i, ti suffices, impersonal. See xp-f\.
(a0-), touch, fut. a^w, \j/ofj.at ', aor. ^a, ij^d^v ', pf. Tjfj.fji.ai;
a. p. 1700771' (see edfpdri'). (3.)
Apdojiai, pray, dpd<ro/j.ai, ypdo-dfj.'rjv, Tjpa.fj.ai. [Ion. apr}<rofj.ai,
MV. Ep. act. inf. ap^/xevat, to j9my.]
Apapio-Kw (dp-}, fit, Tjpffa, TjpdTjv; 2 p. apdpa, [Ion. ap-rjpa, plpf .
and rjpijpei(v) ;] 2 a. ijpapov ; 2 a. m. part, appevos (as adj.),
With form of Attic redupl. in pres. (615). Poetic. (6.)
"Apdcro-tt or dpdTTW (d/acry-), strike, dpdu>, ypat-a, ^pdx^v. (4.)
'Ape'o-Kw (dpe-), please, dpfow, ypeaa, rjpfodrjv ; dpt<ro/j,ai, rjpeffdfj.Tjv.
639. (6.)
['Aprju^vos, oppressed, perf. pass. part. Epic.]
'ApKw, assist, dpKfou, TjpKe<ra. 639.
*Ap|i,6TTW, poet. dp|x6<i> (dpfj.oS-'), fit, dpubvu, ypfjioo-a (ffwdp^a. Find.),
Tjp/j.oKa (Aristot.), Tjpfj.oa-fj.ai, TJp/j.6<rdr)v, fut. p. dpfj.oadTja-ofj.ai] a. m.
(4.)
(dp-), roiw, secure, fut. dpou/xai, 2 a. rjp6fj.Tjv (dp6fj.Tjv'). Chiefly
poetic. See afyoj. (II.)
"Apoat, plough, Tjpoa-a, [p. p. Ion. dp7jpo/*ai], fipb6-t)v. 639.
"Apird (dpTray-), seize, dpirdvu and dpTrda-ofj.ai [ep. dpTrd^w], TjpTraa-a
[77p7ra^a], TjpiraKa, TjpTrao'fj.ai (late Tjptrayp.aC), Tjpirda'dTjv [Hdt. ?)p7rd.-
X077J/], dpTraa-6^<ro/j,ai. For the Attic forms, see 587. (4.)
"Apvto and dpvrw, drato water, aor. ypwa, Jipvo-dfj.Tjv, TJPV&TJV
^7/v, Ion.]. 639.
376 APPENDIX. [1692
"Apxj begin, rule, apw, 77/>a, (ypx a ) ypypai (mid.), 77;
(ro/icu (Aristot.), dp^ofj.at, rip^d/Jirjv.
"Aio-<rw and oVrw : see dfoffw.
['AnraXXw (drtraX-), tend; aor. drlTijXa. Epic and lyric.] (4.)
Avaivw (aiiay-) or avaivai ; fut. atfavw ; aor. rjvtjva, rjvdvQyv or avdvdrjv,
avavd^ffo/jiai ; fut. m. <u)a>oO/icu (as pass.). Augment 771*- or au-
(519). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.)
Avgdvco or avo> (av|-), increase, (e-) a^o-w, af>^ffo/j.ai, 77^770-0, 77^77x0,
rjv^Tj/JiaL, rjv^6r}v, a^^d^ffofjuii.. [Also Ion. pres. d^w, impf. aeov ]
(5-)
. ['A4>d<r<r (see 582 and 587), /eeZ, handle, aor. 770aa-a; used by Hdt.
for d0dw or a0dw.] (4.)
'A<j>-tTj|u, Ze ^o, impf. d0i77v or 770177? (544) ; fut. d^au, etc. See the
inflection of fyfju, 810. (I.)
[*A<|)ver(rw (d0vy-), draw, pour, d0v^w. Poetic, chiefly epic. See
d0tfa;.] (4.)
['A<|>iJw, draw, fovffa, 7)<t>v<rdn'tiv. Poetic, chiefly epic.]
K Ax9o|iai, be displeased, (-) dx^fo/xai, "fjx^^^^i dxdfo~d^crofw.i.
["Axwjxat (d%-), &e troubled, impf. dxriw. Poetic. (II.) Also
epic pres. dxofiai.] See aKax^-
["Aw, satiate, a<ra>, daa ; 2 aor. subj. ew/iev (or ^w/iev), pr. inf. #/*ej>cu,
<o satiate one's seZ/. Mid. (ao/Acu) aarai as fut. ; f. d<ro/j.ai, a. a<rd-
/KTJV. Epic.]
Bdt (j3a7-), speaA:, wer, ^d$w, [ep. pf. pass. ptpa.Kra.L~]. Poetic. (4.)
BaCvw (j8a-, /Sav-), gro, /37^<rojuai, ptpirjKa, /3^/3a/Aat, tpd0r)v (rare) ; 2 a.
e/377' (799) ; 2 pf., see 804 ; [a. m. epic tp-rjadwv (rare) and tp-qabii.'qv,
777, 8.] In active sense, cause to go, poet. /ST^O-W, 6/3770-0. See 610.
The simple form is used in Attic prose only in the pres. and perfi
active. (5. 4.)
BdXXw (jSaX-, /3Xa-), throw, f. [j8aX<(w] /SaXw, rarely (-)
ptp\r)ica, /3^j8X77/iat, opt. 5ta-ej3X77<r0e (734), [epic )3e/36X77/tat] ,
#771', f3\T)dT?icrofj.a.i ; 2 a. c/SaXov, tfia.\6nyv ; fut. m. /3aXou/icu ; f. p.
/SejSXT^a-o/iot. [Epic, 2 a. dual ^v/j.-^Trjv ; 2 a. m. tpX^wv, with
subj. /SXT^erai, opt. /SXTjo or /SXetb, inf. p\i)<r0ai, pt. /SXr^fieyos ; fut. ^V/A-
)3X77<reat, pf. p. ptpXriai.'] (4.)
Bdirrw (/3a0-)> dip, ^di/'w, ^/3at//o, ptpawai, tpd<f>i)v and (poet.) tpd<t>er)v]
fut. m. pd\f/o(jt,ai. (3.)
Bdo-KtD (j3a-), poetic form of palvw, go. (6.)
Bao-rdtw (see 587), carry, /Saa-rdo-w, ^do-racra. (Later forms from
stem paarray-.') Poetic. (4.)
(j377x-) Att. jST^rrw, cow^/t, jST)*^, /377a. (4.)
(j3a-), gro, pr. part. /3t#*s. Epic.] (I.)
1692] CATALOGUE or VERBS. 377
03/W-), eat, p. ptppwica, ptppw/JLai, [tppM-rjv ', 2 a. IjSpwv ; fut.
pf. /3e/3/>c<ro/Acu] ; 2 p. part. pi. /Secures (804). [Horn. opt. e/3p<4-
0ois.] (6.)
BuSw, Zwe, /Sitio-ojucu, ^Sfowra (rare), peplwica, pep[ufw.i ; 2 a. ^/Sfwv (799).
, see |3ic6<rKo/Acu.)
OSio-), revive, ^iwad^v, restored to life. (6.)
BXdirrw (|8Xaj3-), wjwre, p\dif/a}, 2/3Xa^a, jW/3Xa0a, ptpX
2 a. p. tpxdpyv, 2 f. pXapfaoiMi ; fut. m. /3Xetyo/u ; [fut. pf.
^o/icu Ion.]. (3.)
BXao-rdvo) (^SXao-r-), sprout, (e-) /3Xa(mJ<rw, /SejSXdo-r^
(524) ; 2 a. HpXaffrov. (5.)
BXe'irw, see, pXtyopai [Hdt. dw-j8X^w], ^jSXe^a.
BXiTTo or pXto-o-w (/*eXir-, jSXir-, 66), aA;e honey, aor. e/SXttra. (4.)
BXwo-Ko) (juoX-, /iXo-, )3Xo-, 66), gro, f. /x,oXou/>icu, p. /A^/*j3Xa;Ka, 2 a. e/xoXov
Poetic. (6.)
Bodw, shout, Po-fiffofjiai, tp6t]<ra. [Ion. (stem /3o-), j8c6<ro/Ltat, /3w<ra,
BOO-KW, /eed, (-)
BovXo|iai, w?i7Z, tozs/i, (augm. tpov\- or ^jSouX-) ; (e-) /3ovX^<ro/Acu,
XT/ynat, tpovXtdiiv ', [2 p. Trpo-ptpov\a, prefer,'] [Epic also /96Xo/Mu.l
517.
[(Ppa\-)j stem, with only 2 aor. ^jSpa^e and ppdxe, resounded. Epic.]
BpC^w (see 587), fee drowsy, aor. e/3/H|a. Poetic. (4.)
Bpt0a>, 6e heavy, ppi<rw, eppl<ra, ptppWa. Kare in Attic prose.
[(PpX-) stem, swallow, aor. ej3/>oa (opt. -pp6eie), 2 aor. p. dva-
/3poxfi ; 2 pf. dva-ptppoxev, /Z.17,54. Epic.]
Bpixdojiat (/Spux-, 656), roar, 2 p.ptppvx* I ippfyiiffdpi)'' ', ppitx^els.
Bvv^w or pvw (jSw-), *op wp. /3uo-w, ejSuaa, ptpvfffuu. 607. Chiefly
poetic. (5.)
r.
Fa|jLci> (70/4-), marry (said of a man), f. yafiQ, a. ^yij/j.a, p
p. p. yydfj.T)fjLai (of a woman). Mid. marry (of a woman), f.
. 654.
Favvjiai, rejoice, [epic fut. 7avtyo-<ro^at.] Chiefly poetic. (II.)
WV-), 2 pert as pres., s7iow?, sub. yeytivw, imper. ytywve,
[ep. inf. yeyuvt/u-v, part, yeywvfa ; 2 plpf. iyey&vet, with tytywve
and 1 sing, tyey&vew for -eo^ (777, 4).] Derived pres. yeywi'&o,
w. fut. yeyuv^ffu, a. tycy&vrja-a. Chiefly poetic. Present also 7eyw-
. (6.)
e^-), 6e 6orn; a. tyeivdwv, begat. (4.)
FeXdo), laugh, ye\d<rofj.ai, yt\a<ra., tyeXdffSrjv. 639.
[F^vTo, sefeed, epic 2 aor., 77. 18, 476.1
378 APPENDIX. T1692
(77?0-)> rejoice, (/y^o-w, tyt0r)<ra. ;] 2 p. ytyrjea (as pres.;. 654.
r-tipdo-Kw and yTjpdco (ynpa-), grow oZcZ, yrjpdffw and yr)pd<ro/jiai, ey/ipd<ra,
yeyripaKa (am old) ; 2 a. (799), inf. yrjpdvai, [Horn. pt. yrjpds]. (6.)
rtyvo|j.(u and -ytvofiai (yev-), become (651), yevrjffonai, yeytvynai,
[tyevfjOriv Dor. and Ion.], yevrjd^a-ofMii. (rare); 2 a. ^yevb^v [epic
7&ro for ^7^vero] ; 2 p. ytyova, am (for 7e7dd(ri, 767(6$, and other
/xi-forms, see 804).
(7^0-), nosco, know, yvitxro/j-cu, [Hdt. d^-^yi/wo-a, ] eyvuKa,
yvdffdrjv; 2 a. eyvuv, perceived (799). Ionic and late
Attic ylv(j)(TK(i}. (6.)
r\v<f>a>, CM, grave, [^-<fyXvfa, Hdt., tyXvif/dwv, Theoc.,] yty\vfjifj.ai
and 7\u/iyu,at (524).
rvdnirrw (yva.fji.ir~), bend, yvdp^w, [^eyva^a, tyvdfj,<pdi)v.'] Poetic,
chiefly epic. (3.)
[Toaw (70-, 656), bewail, 2 a. 760^, only epic in active. Mid. yodofjiui,
poetic, epic f. yo^o/j.ai.']
rpd<j>w, write, ypdifsw, sypa^a, yypa<pa, y^ypa/jifj.at, 2 a. p. ypd<f>r)v
(lypd(t>6t)v is not classic) ; 2 f. p. 7/>a0iJao/wu ; f ut. pf. yeypd^o/jiai,
a. m. ^ypa^d/j.rjv.
w (ypvy-), gritnt, yptfa and ypt&nai, iypv&. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
[(8a-), stem, teach, learn, no pres., (-) Saifa-o/wu, deddrjica,
2 a. m. (?) inf. 5e5da<r0cu ; 2 pf. pt. 5e5ac6s (804); 2 a. cSaop or
dtdaov, taught; 2 a. p. ^Sd^, learned. Horn. 5ijw, s^aZZ j^nd.]
Poetic, chiefly epic.
[Aai8d\\w (5at5a\-), deck out, ornament, epic and lyric. Pindar has
pf. p. part. 5e5aida\iJ.tvos, a. pt. 5ai8a\6els ; also f. inf. ScuSaXwo^/xej',
from stem in o- (see 659).] (4.)
[Aata> (5ai'7-), rend, 5a?|w, ^5dt'a, 5e5dt'7^at, ^Saix^^v. Epic and
lyric.] (4.)
AaCviifu (Sat-), entertain, dalo-a, edaia-a, (tfalcrOrjv) daurdeis. [Epic
dalvv, impf. and pr. imperat.] Mid. 8atw/ji.ai, feast, dal(rofji.ai, tdai-
ffdfj,r]v: [epic pr. opt. datvvro for daivvt-ro, dcuvtiar for daivvi-aro
(777, 3) : see 734.] (II.)
Aaio|iai (Sao--, Sacri-, 5ai-, 602), divide, [epic f. Sdcro^cu,] a. tSaffdMv,
pf. p. 5^5ao-/iat [epic 5<?5cu/u]. (4.) See also So/re'cpai.
Aa (5a/r-, 5a/ri-, 5ai-, 602), kindle, [epic 2 p. Std-rja, 2 plpf. 3 pers.
; 2 a. (^5a6^j/) subj. Sd^rot.] Poetic. (4.)
?7/c-, 5a/c-), &^e, 5^o/xai, S^S^yuat, ^x^i 8r)xd^ffOfji.at ; 2 a.
. (5. 2.)
dd|unr||u (609) and Sajivdw (5a/i-, Sytta-, 5a/xa-), also pres. 8and
(587) , tame, subdue, [fut. Sa/xdo-w, 5a/*dw. 5a/u,w fwith Horn. 5a>cd,
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 379
dafj.6w(ri), a. ^ddfj-aaa, p. p. 5^/i?7/u, a. p. eS/m.^drfv'] and e8afj.d<r6r]t> ;
[2 a. p. eddfj.rjv (with Sct/ae?) ; fut. pf. ded/JL^ffofMai. ; fut. m. 5a/u,d<ro/u,cu, ]
a. edafj.affdfji.rjv. In Attic prose only da/j.dfa, edafj.da'0rjv, eda/Aavd/AT)?,
665, 2. (5. 4.)
AapOdvw (5ap0-), sZeep, 2 a. edapdov, poet, edpadov ; (c-) p. Kara-Sedap-
OTJKUS. Only in comp. (usually Kara-dapddvw, except 2 aor.). (5.)
Aareop-at, divide, w. irreg. dareaffdai (?). See dalopai.
[Ac'a|uu, appear, only in impf. 5<?aro, Od.6, 242.]
Ae'Sia, /ear . see dedoiKa.
Ae'Soiica, perf. as pres. (5/rei-, 5/rot-, 5p-, 31), [epic SeiSotxa,] fear.
[Epic fut. 5e<ro/u,] a. eSeuro, ; 2 pf. 5^5ta [epic 5e5ia,] for full
forms see 804. See 522 (6). [From stem 5/rt- Homer forms impf.
diov, die, feared, fled.] [Epic present 8e8, /ear.] See also
. (2.)
(5eiK-), show: for synopsis and inflection, see 504, 506, and
509. [Ion. (Sex-), 5^w, edea, deSeypai, edexQw tde&Mv.'] Epic
pf. m. dddeyfj.ai. (for dedeypai), greet, probably comes from another
stem 5e/c-. (II.)
^i-, 5/ie-), build, eSet/xa, S^S^/xat, e'deifj.d/j.rjv.'] Chiefly Ionic.
see, e5{px0*nv ; 2 a. edpaicov, (edpdicrjv) SpaKeLs (649, 2; 646);
2 p. dedopKa (643). Poetic.
Acpo>, J?ay, 5e/3tD, cSei/m, 5^5ap/*at ; 2 a. e'ddp-rjv. Ionic and poetic also
receive, de%ofj.ai, dedey/j.ai [Horn. Sexarai for
X^v, eded/j.riv ; [2 a. m., chiefly epic, eSeywv, SCKTO, imper. 5^o
(756, 1), inf. 5^x^ at ? part, dtyjjievos (sometimes as pres.).]
A&i), 6ino', 5^<ro), eS^o-a, dtdeKa (rarely 5^5??Ka), 5^5e/xcu, tdedyv, dedr}-
<rofj.ai ; fut. pf. SeS^ao/Acu, a. m. drj(rd/ji.r)v.
Aew, want, need, (-) 5e^(rw, e8eri<Ta [ep. 5770-0,] Sed^Ka, de8^tjfj.ai,
^Se^drjv. Mid. Seopai., ask, SeT/Vo/wu. From epic stem 5eu- (e-) come
[^5ei^r/<ra, Od. 9, 540, and Setfo/xcu, Seu^o-o/iai.] Impersonal Set, debet,
/iere is weed, (owe) ought, der/a-ei, eSe-qve.
act. rare (STjpi-, 656), contend, aor. tdjplffa (Theoc.), aor. p.
as middle (Horn.). Mid. ST/pido/xat and 8t)ptofj.ai, as act.,
(Theoc.), tdriplffd/ji.'riv (Horn.).] Epic and lyric.
[A-fjw, epic present with future meaning, shall find.] See (8a-).
AiaiTcui), arbitrate, w. double augment in perf. and plpf. and in com-
pounds (543 and 544); Stair^tro;, StT/rr/o-a (dTr-eSiT/rr/cra),
dedirJT-rjfj.ai, dtrjr^Brjv ^-edijjT^O'rjv, late); Siatr^o-o/ia
AiaKovta), minister, eSiaKhvovv ; Std/cov^o-a; (aor. inf. Sia/co^irat), 5e5ta-
K6vr)fj.ai, edidKov/idriv. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with
augment 8177- or dedn)-. See 543.
Ai8d(TK (5t5a X -) for SiSax-crKw (617), ieac^i, StSdfa;, ^/3aa [epic
380 APPENDIX. [1692
de8i5ayfji.ai, ^SiSdxd'rjv ; 5t5cio/,cu,
See stem 8a-. (6.)
A(Si)|u, bind, chiefly poetic form for 5<?w. (I.)
AiSpao-Kw (5/aa-), only in comp., run away, -8pd<ro/j.ai, -StSpdKa ; 2 a.
-eSpdv [Ion. -e8pr)v], -Spit), -Spairfv, -Spavai, -Spas (799). (6.)
Ai6|u (5o-), give, 5c6<rw, eSw/ca, 5<?5w/ca, etc. ; see synopsis and inflec-
tion in 504, 506, and 509. [Ep. 86/j.evai or 56/iev for dovvai, fut.
5t5c6<rw for 5c6<rw.] (I.)
Ai[xai (5te-), be frightened, flee (794, 1), inf. 8ie<r6at, to flee or to dn've
(chase) ; Stu/j-at and SioL^-rjv (cf. Suvw/xat 729, and TLOol^v 741),
cftase, part. 5i6/*evos, chasing. Impf. act. ^v-5/e<ra', sei on (of dogs),
7Z.18, 584. (I.)
[Ai^T]|iai, see&, with 17 for e in present; di^a-0/j.ai, tdii)<rdij.r]v. Ionic
and poetic.] (I.)
[(Sue-), stem, with 2 aor. Zdticov, threw, cast. In Pindar and the
tragedians.]
Aixjrdw, thirst, 5t^^<rw, t8ty-rj(ra. See 496.
AOK&D '(5o/c-), seem, iMwA:, 56o>, eSo^a, dt8oy/j.ai, ^x^v (rare). Poetic
SoK^trw, tdbicrja'a, 5e56/CT//ca, 5e56K7;/xai, edoKrjdrjv. Impersonal, SOKCI,
z? seems, etc. 654.
Aouir&0 (SOVTT-), sound heavily, tdoviryva [epic SovTTTjo-a and (in tmesis)
^TTi-ydoijffr^ffa, 2 pf. 8t8ovTra, 8e8ovir6s, fallen.] Chiefly poetic. 654.
Apd<nro|iai or Spdrrofxai (Spay-), grasp, aor. 8paa/j.'rit>, pf. St8pa-
7/icu. (4.)
Apdw, do, Spdffw, eSpaffa, 88paica, 8Spdfj.ai, (rarely 88pa<rfji.ai), (eSpd-
<fQT]v) 8pa<r0ets. 640.
Avvajxai, be able, augm. ^5vv- and jSw- (517) ; 2 p. sing. pres. (poet.)
Stva [Ion. Stvrj], impf. tUvaao or eSi^^w (632) ; Su^cro/xat, 5e5iJi/7//xai,
(tSvvda-dyv, chiefly Ionic), [epic ^Su^a-d/iTjj'.] (I.)
ewier or cause to enter, and Stfyco (5w-), enter" Svtru, e5v<ra,
StSvica, StSvpai, eSMyv, f. p. 8vB^<roiJ.ai ; 2 a. e5w, inflected 506 : see
504 and 799 ; f. m. 5wro/*cu, a. m. tSv<rdfj.T)t> [ep. eSvab^v (777, 8)].
(5.)
E.
[ c Ed<j>0T] (7Z.13, 543; 14,419), aor. pass, commonly referred to airrw :
also to ^TTO/MU and to i'dTrrw.]
'Edw [epic ct'dw], permit, tdvu, etava [ep. eaera], efa/ca, efci/xai, elddijv;
td<rofjt.ai (as pass.). For augment, see 537.
'E^-yvdw, pledge, betroth, augm. 9)771;- or ^^70- (^77671;-), see 543 ; 544.
'E-ycipw (^7ep-), raise, rowse, e7epw, yyetpa, tyriyep/j.ai, ^^Qt\v ; 2 p.
typyyopa, am awake [Horn, typyydpdacri (for -6pa<ri), imper. ^y/aij-
(for -6pare), inf. typriyopdai or -6p^at] ; 2 a. m. ^yp6n'nv [ep
(4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 381
"E8, eat, (poetic, chiefly epic, present) : see 4<r9(o>.
, (e5- for o-e5- ; cf. sed-eo), sit, [fut. inf. <ty-6r<re<r0cu (Horn.) ;]
aor. eiffdfj,r)i> [epic eo'ffdfj.rjv and ee0"(rd/r>7j>]. [Active aor. efcra and
tffffa (Horn.).] 86. Chiefly poetic. (4.) See !iw and
'E0\ and 0&., wish, imp. ij0e\ov ; (e-) e"0eXiJ<rw or 0eXi^
fj0t\-r)Ka. 'E0<?Xw is the more common form except in the tragic
trimeter. Impf. always Tj6e\ov ; aor. (probably) always rj0t\'r}<ra,
but subj. etc. ^eXiJo-w and 0eX^crw, tde\Tj(rat. and deXyvcu, etc.
'E0Ca> (see 587), accustom, tdlvw, t0i<ra, ef0i*a, dtftovuat, l0l<r0tjy.
The root is cr/:e0- (see 537). (4.)
["E0v, Horn pres. part.] : see efa0a.
EtSov (id-, p td-), vid-i, 2 aor., sato, no present (see 539) : f5w, TSoi/xt,
fe or t'5^, Z5et>', /Sc^. Mid. (chiefly poet.) eCSofxai, seem, [ep. fta-d-
MV and ^er- ;] 2 a. l86/j.rjv (in prose rare and only in comp.), saw,
= elSov. Ot8a (2 pf. as pres.), know, pip. yS-r), knew, f. ef<ro/>wu;
see 820. (8.)
Elicd<i> (see 587), make like, etKafrv or yKafov, elicdffu, ef/catra
ef/ca<r/x,at or ^Ka<r/iai, iKd<r0riv, etKa<r0'/i<roiJiai. (4.)
(EtKw) not used ui pres. (eiV-, t/c-), resemfeZe, appear, imp. el/cop, f.
(rare), 2 p. eoiica [Ion. ofKa] (with eoiynev, ^IKTOV,'] et%a<ri,
et/ccis, chiefly poetic) ; 2 pip. e^Ki} [with ^KT^V]. Impersonal
it seems, etc. For eoi/ca, see 537, 2. (2.)
[El\&o (<?X-, et'X-), j^ress, roW (654), aor. eXtro, pf. p. eeX/xoi, 2 aor. p.
^dXr/i/ or AXrjv w. inf. dXiJ/iemi. Pres. pass. efXo^cu. Epic. Hdt.
has (in comp.) -et^cra, -efXr/^ai, -ei\^0r}v. Find, has plpf. <?6Xei.]
The Attic has eiX<?o/*ai, and e^XXw or el'XXo;. 598. See t\Xw (4.)
EljjiC, 6e, and Etjti, go. See 806-809.
Etirov (etV-), said, [epic eei??], 2 aor., no present ; etirw, etwotfu, elirt,
eiTreTv, elir&v, 1 aor. ebra [poet. eetTra,] (opt. etirai/M, imper. etirov or
elirbv, inf. eiTrai, pt. eZ'Tras), [Hdt. aTr-enrd/XT;*']. Other tenses are
supplied by a stem tp-, pe- (for /rep-, fpe-) : [Horn. pres. (rare)
efpw], f. ^/o^w, ^pw ; p. elptjKa, etprjfjiai. (522); a. p. tpp-fidyv, rarely
tppMirjv [Ion. elptdTjv] ; fut. pass, p^^^cro/xai ; fut. pf. e/p^cro/Aat. See
Iv&rco. (8.)
and elp-yvvw, also el'p7oj (elpy-), shut in j f'tpfa, elpa, ftpy/j.a.1,
v. Also ip^yci), ?/3^w, ?/)^a, [Hom. (epypaij 3 pi. epxarai W.
plpf. epxaro, p X ^"]- (H.)
Elp-yw, S/m owi, efp^w, elp^a, elpypai, ctp-^O^v ; etpj-o/j.ai. Also [cp-yw,
-ep|a, -tpynai, Ionic] ; ep^o/iat (Soph.). [Epic also ^p7&>.]
[Etpojiai (Ion.), ask, fut. (-) etp^ffo/mi. See epopai.]
[Etpw (^p-), say, epic in present.] See ctirov. (4.)
Etpo> (^p-), sero, join, a. -eipa [Ion. -epo-A], p. -e?p*a, e?p/Aat [epic
Rare except in compos. (4.)
382 APPENDIX. [1692
(<?tVc-), liken, compare, (617) ; poetic, chiefly epic : pres. also
fo/cw.] 617. npo<r-fyai, art like, [and epic TJ'IKTO or eiVcro], some-
times referred to ef/cw. See ef/cw. (6.)
Etw0a [Ionic ew0a] (i)0- for (r/ri;^-, 537, 2, and 689), 2 perf., am accws-
tomed, 2 plpf. d^d-rj. [Horn, has pres. act. part. e0wi>.] (2.)
'EicK\T]<ridJ;a>, call an assembly ; augm. ^KKXTJ- and ^K\TJ- (543).
"EXavvw, for Aa-w-w (612), poetic Adw (Aa-), drive, march, fut.
(Ado-w) Aw (665, 2) [epic A<<r<rw, A6a> ;] 7;Xa<ra, A^Xa/ca, AiJ-
Xa/u [Ion. and late A-^Xaa/xat, Horn. plup. A^X^Saro], ^Xddrjv,
(5.)
confute, A<fy|, TjXry&i, ^Xey^at (487, 2), ^\4yx^i Ae?-
c E\(or<rw and elXCo-o-w (Ai/c-), roZZ, A^w and elX^w, el'Xi^a, ei'Xi7ju,
eiX/x^ 7 ?". [Epic aor. mid. Ai</i?;'.] (4.)
"E\K (late e\K6ui), pull, Aw (Ion. and late Att. A/5<rw), ej:X/ci;<ra,
, ei\KVff fj.a.1, ei\Ktio'd'r)v, 537.
(A?ri5-), /lope, aor. 77X71- to-a ; aor. p. part. t\Tri(r6{v. (4.)
["E\7rw, cawse to Tiope, 2 p. eoXTra, hope / 2 plpf. t&\Treiv (3 pers. sing.).
643. Mid. \irofj.at, hope, like Attic ATT^W. Epic.]
'EH&>, vomif, fut. ^w (rare), ^u>C/icu ; aor. 7;/u,e<ra. 639.
'Evatpa) (^j/ap-), A;i7Z, 2 a. yvapov. [Horn. a.m. tv/iparo.'] Poetic. (4.)
'Eveirw (iv and stem O-CTT-) or Ivvtirw, say, teM, [ep. f. tvi-ffirfota (O-CTT-)
and ^i/^w;] 2 a. evi-ffirov, W. imper. ei/to-Tre [ep. ^^o-Tres], 2 pi.
(for ^^-o-TreTe), inf. tvi<nreTt> [ep. -^ev]. Poetic. See elTrov.
'EvCirTw (^WTT-), c^^e, [epic also M(r<r<a, 2 a. tvtvlirov and ^
(535). (3.)
"Evvvfii (k- for fe<r-), ves-tio, clothe, pres. act. only in comp.; [f. ftrerw,
a. ?<7<7a, <Tffdfju]j> or ^eo-o-- ; pf. ?(r/Ltai or efyuu,] d/j.tvos in trag. In
comp. -&TOJ, -?(ra, -<rdfj.i)v. Chiefly epic : d^i-evvvfjn is the common
form in prose. (II.)
'Evox\'a>, harass, w. double augment (544) ;
EoiKa, seem, 2 perfect : see efow.
EopTd<i> (see 587), Ion. oprdfa, keep festival ; impf. MpTafrv (538).
(4.)
'Eir-avpe'w and iir-avpCo-KO) (aOp-), both rare, ew/oy, [2 a. Dor. and ep.
tiravpov ; f. m. ^Trau/arjo-o/tat,] a. tTnjvpd/jt.-rjv, 2 a. ^Trr}vp6fj.'ijv. Chiefly
poetic. 654. (6.)
['Eir-cWjvoGe, defect. 2 pf., s& on, ^'e on ; also as 2 plpf. (777, 4). Epic.]
See avfivoBe.
'EirCo-Ta|jLai, understand, 2 p. sing, (poet.) eiriffrq. [Ion. eTrfareat,] imp.
rfm<TTdfji.-rjv, 2 p. sing. T}7r/<rraa-o or ^irta-Td) (632); f. ^TrKrrTjtro/uai, a.
(Not to be confounded with forms of tylo-T-rjiu.) (I.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 363
["Eire* (<re7r-), be after or busy with, imp. eltrov (poet, tirov) ; f. -^w,
2. a. -ea-irov (for ^(reTT-ov), a. p. irepi-t<t>6-r}v (Hdt.) : active chiefly
Ionic or poetic, and in compos.] Mid. eirofiai [poet. &nro/u],/oZ-
low, f. 2\l/ofjLai' t 2 a. effird^v, rarely poetic -tvirbinjV) o-Trw/tcu, etc.,
w. imp. [0-Treio (for <T7reo),] ffirov. 86; 537, 2.
'Epdco, Zove, ^pd<r0T}v, fyao^o-o/xcu, ^paffd^v (epic)]. Poetic pres.
epap.ai, imp. ^pdfj,r]v. (I.)
'Ep-ydtop-ai, wor&, do, augm. e*p- (537) ; fyycLao/ww, etpyaa-fM^ elpyd-
o-6-rjv, eipyaa-dfjLrjv, tpyaffOtfffofji.ai, 587. (4.)
"Ep-yco and k'p-yw : see eipyvv/j.1 (ei/ryw) and etpyu.
"Ep8w and 2p8w, ioor&, <^o, probably for ^pf-w = ptfa (by metathesis) :
the stem is pepy- (see 539), whence fpey-, pey- ; fut. epfw,
[Ion. 2 pf. eo/rya, 2 plpf. tipyea.'] Ionic and poetic. See pt
/ Epi8w, prop, ^pe/o-w (later), ^p<ra, [^pet/ca, ^^pet(r/iat, with
Sarcu and -aTO, 777, 3,] rtpflffd-qv; epekro/icu (Aristot.), ^peiffd^v.
'EpeiKw (^pet/c-, pi*-), ear, &wrs?, ^pet^a, ^p^pi7/*at, 2 a. ypiicov. lonio
and poetic. (2.)
*Epiiro) (^petTr-, ^piTr-), taroto doiow, tpetyw, [^pet^a, 2 pf.
fallen, p. p. tp-fipiwai (plpf. tptpurro, Horn.), 2 a. ypurov,
a. m. dvripeuf/dwv (Horn.)], a. p. ypdfyQw (2.)
'Epeo-o-w (^per-), sn'A;e, row?, [ep. aor. ^peo-a.] 582. (4.)
['EpiSaivw, contend, for ^p^w ; aor. m. inf. tpl5-/i<ra(rdcu. Epic.]
'Ept&> (^ptS-), contend, ypura, [ripi<rd/j.'r]v epic.] (4.)
"Epojtai (rare or ?), [Ion. etpofiai, ep. eplw or Ip4o|i.ai], for the Attic
asA;, fut. (e-) ^pija-o/xai [Ion. e/p^<ro/xai], 2 a. fjpbfi.tjv. See
"Epirw, creep, imp. efpTroi' ; fut. ?p^w. Poetic. 539.
'Eppco, go to destruction, (e~) ^pp^a-w, yppyo-a, e
Epxryyavcfr (tpvy-), eruct, 2 a. ypvyov. (5.) [Ion. tpevyofMi, tpetifrfuu.
(2-)]
'EpvKw, /ioM 6acA:, [ep. f. fyj5w] ^pv^a, [ep. 2 a. ^pfeoxo**]
['Eptiw and etpvco, draw, fut. ^pi5o>, aor. etpvva and epva-a, pf. p. efpD/xat
and efpu<rp.cu. Mid. Ipvofiai (U) and elpvojjiai, ^a^e wnder owe's pro-
tection, pvcro/j.a.i. and eiptiffofjiai, tpvffd/j.'rjv and elpvo'dfjuqv ; with Horn.
pit-forms of pres. and impf. eiptiarcu (3 pl.) epv<ro, Zpvro and efpuro,
etpvvTo, epvcrdai and etpvtrdai. Epic.] 639. See pvofiai.
"Epxofiai (^px-? &evd-, t\vd-, ^X^-), ^o, come, f. t\v<ro/j.ai (Ion. and
poet.), 2 pf. t\-/i\v0a [ep. t\7}\ov0a and e/X^Xou^a], 2 a. ijXfloi' (poet
17X^^01') : see 31. In Attic prose, eT/u is used for Aeftro/Mu (1257). (8.)
E<r0Co), also poetic lo-Ow and cSu (^o-^-, ^5-, <f>a.y-}, edo, ea, fut. e5o/xat f
p. tdJiSoKa, tS-?ide<r/j.ai, [ep. ^S^So/iat], -r)$t<rd-r)v ; 2 a.0a7ov; [epic pres
inf. eS/xerat ; 2 perf. part. <?5?75 c6s.] (8.)
'Eo-Tidw, /eas, augment eio-rt- (537).
384 APPENDIX. [1692
EvSco, sleep, impf. evdov or -rjvdov (519), (e-) eyST/Vw, [-evfi^o-a]. Com-
monly in Ka0-vSa>. 658, 1.
Evep-yTa>, do #ood, evepyer-fio-w, etc., regular: sometimes augmented
6^7- (545, 1).
Evpio-Ku (evp-},find, (e-) eu/o^trw, y'vprjica, yvprjfjiai, yvptd'rjv, evped^ffofiai ;
2 a. 7717)0 v, -rivpbMv. 639 (6). Often found with augment ei>- (519).
,
Ev4>pcuva> (eixppav-*), cheer, f. eixppavw ; a. rjixfrpdva, [Ion. also eixfrpyva ;]
a. p. TjiKppdvdtjv, f. p. ev<t>pavQ'/)<roiJ.ai ; f. m. evcppavov/j-at. 519. (4.)
(*X.O a P-)i hate, f. 4x0ojfo0/uu, a. ^x^/ 3 *- (4.)
^ave, imp. elxov (539) ; 2a> or (rxr)<rw (crxe-) ^X^a,
foxMy (chiefly Ion.) ; 2 a. eo-xov (for ^-o-ex-ov), crx^,
and -<rxot/*t, <TX&, o'X"*'* o'X'^'' j poet. evxeQov etc. (779).
[Horn. pf. part. <rvv~oxoKds for 6/c-ox-ws (643; 529), plpf. <h--c6xaTo,
toere s^?t, 7Z. 12, 340.] Mid. exopai, cling to, 2o/xcu and
*Ex|/tt," cook, (e-) f. tyofji.ai and tyfaofjiai, ty^u (rare), a. 77^770-0,
[^i7/uw, ^^ij^v.] 658, 1.
Z.
Zow, ?we, w. f5s, ft, etc. (496), impf. ^wv and efrv;
, Zftica, later). Ion. fciw.
(ei>7-, ^7-, cf. jug-um), yoke, fevw, efeu^a,
X0r>v ; 2 a. p. <tfi5777j/. (2. II.)
Z&, &oiZ (poet. SeCw), ^o-oj, efcra, [-e^eo-^at Ion.]. 639.
ZWVVVJJLI (w-) ^ird, efaxra, ef&xr/xat and efw/wu, ^uffd^v. (II.)
(7;/3a-) , come o manhood, with T|f3da>, oe ai manhood :
IP-quo.. (4.)
"H*ype9o)j.ai, oe collected, poetic passive form of dyeLpw (ayep-) : see
779. Found only in 3 pi. iiyeptdovrai, with the subj., and infin.,
and yyepteovro.
"H8o|iai, be pleased; aor. p. ^<r^v, f. p. ^6^0^0.1, [aor. m. T/o-aro, 0d.
9, 353.] The act. -q8w w. impf. 7;5o', aor fjcra, occurs very rarely.
'Hepc0o|j.ai, be raised, poetic passive of aelpu (dep-) : see 779. Found
only in 3 pi. -f/epteovTai (impf. faptdovTo is late).
*Hjiai, sit : see 814.
'HfiC, say, chiefly in imperf. ?; v 8* fy<i, said I, and 7} 5' 3s, said he
(1023, 2). [Epic % (alone), he said.] *H^, I say, is colloquial.
'H|iva>, 6010, sink, aor. y/jivo-a, [pf. f>Tr-fj,v-^iJi.vK (for fyi-Tj/Au/ce, 529)
Horn.] Poetic, chiefly epic.
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 385
0.
0dXXft> (0aX-), bloom, [2 perf. r^Xa (as present)]. (4.)
[0do[icu, gaze at, admire, Doric for 0edo/xcu, Ion. 07^o^ai ; 0a<ro/xcu and
0d<rov/j.ai, cda.a-dfj.Tjv (Horn. opt. fl^o-a/ar').]
[dojiai, milk, inf. 077<r0cu, aor. t0-r)<rdfj,T]i>. Epic.]
0air- or rcuf*-, stem : see dy-ir-.
0dirra> (ra^>- for 0a<-), bury, 0cty/a>, e0cuj/a, Tc0a/*/j.ai, [Ion. f0d<j>0riv, rare ;]
2 a. p. eVa^Tji/ ; 2 fut. ra^ffo/j-ai ; fut. pf. Tc0dtyofj.ai. 95, 5. (3.)
0av|j.da> (see 587), wonder, 0av/j,d<ro/uLai (0av,uci<ra>?), e'0av/ta<7a, rc0ou-
jta/ca, 46avjmda-0r)v, 6avfj,aadi](rofj.aL. (4.)
0vw (0ev-), smiie, 0ej/w, [e06tva Horn.], 2 a. edevov. (4.)
0e\<*>, toM, (-) 6f\-(](rco : see IGeXco.
0po|xai, warm one's self, [fut. Oep<ro/j.ai, 2 a. p. (edtp-nv) subj. 0epe'w.]
Chiefly epic.
0, (06U-, 0e/r-, 0u-), rwn, fut. 0v<ro/j.ai. 574. (2.)
(0iyir-, 0a7r-, or TO^>-), astonish, stem with [2 perf. T^d-rjira, am aston-
ished, epic plpf. <hre0^7rea ; 2 a. era^ov, also intransitive]. 31 ; 95, 5.
0iyydvo> (0t7-), owc^, eion<u, 2 a. iQ^ov. Chiefly poetic. (5.)
[0\dw, bruise, e0\a<ra, re^Aoo-^at (Theoc.), te\dffQ'nv (Hippoc.). Ionic
and poetic. See <j>\d<a.~]
0\tp (e\l&-, 0At/8-), squeeze, OXf^w, e0Ai^a, r^Xi^ai, td\i<i>6r)v ; f8\i-
$T\V ; fut. m. 6\tyo/jLai, Horn.
0v/j<rKtt, earlier form OvrfcrKw [Doric and Aeolic Qva<rK<a~\ (6av-, 0/a-),
C^ie, eavov/J.ai, re6vr)Ka ; fut. pf. T0>7ja> (705), later re0^|o/iot; 2 a.
cQavov ; 2 perf. see 804 and 773. In Attic prose always airo-6ai>ov/j.ai
and air-edavov, but T60i/77/ca. 616. (6.)
pdo-o-a) and epdrrw (jpax~-> ^ a X") disturb, aor. e0/)ofo, f6pdx0r]v (rare) ;
[2 pf. rerpTJxa? &6 disturbed, Horn.] See rapdff<rca. (4.)
0pavo>, bruise, dpuixrw, fdpavva, rfdpaw/jiai and rfdpavpai, tdpavydiiv
(641). Chiefly poetic.
0pvirra> (rpv(p- for 6pv(f>-^), crush [edpvtya HippOC.], Te0pv/j.iJ.ai, t0pv<p0r)t>
[ep. 2 a. p. erp^r/j/], 0pv\}/o/j.ai. 95, 5. (3.)
PWO-KW and 0pwo-Kft) (0op-, 0po-), Zeop, fut. dopov/j.at, 2 a. eQopov. Chiefly
poetic. (6.)
0vw (0v), sacrifice, imp. ^Do?; 0uo-&>, 0i/(ro, TC^UKO, rfOvfj,ai, erv0r]v;
0v<TOfj,ai, f0vffd/j.rtv. 95, 1 and 3.
0v or 0tiv, ra^e, rws^. Poetic : classic only in present and imperfect.
I.
'IdXXu (m\-), send, fut. -la\a>, [ep. aor. frjAa.] Poetic. (4.)
[*Idx and lax&>, shout, [2 pf. (Jfoxa) a/j.<p-iaxv:a}. Poetic, chieflj
epic.]
386 APPENDIX. [1692
C 16p6o>, sweat, ISpcaau, ?5/>axra : for irregular contraction ISp&ai etc., see
497.
'ISpvw, place, ipu<ru, Upvffa, tSpvKa, t8pv/j.ai, ipv6r)v [or i5pvv6i)i> (709),
chiefly epic] ; i8pv(To/j.ai, l8pva-a.fj.viv.
0'5-)? seat or sit, mid. i'o|icu, sit; used chiefly in KaO-iC<a, which
see. See also -qp-at. (4.) Also Ifcavw. (5.)
(e-), send: for inflection see 810. (I.)
(t/c-), poet. IKO), come, '{o/u.at, 1yp.au ; 2 a. iKtfyoji/. In prose
usually a<p-iKt>fo/j.ai. From frco>, [ep. imp. TKOV, aor. T|OJ/, 777, 8.J Also
IKCLVCI>, epic and tragic. (5.)
^IXourKOpai [epic i\dofjiai] (i'Ao-), propitiate, Ihaaopai, i\aadi]v, i\a.ffafj.-i]v.
(6.)
["I\T]Hi (/Aa-), be propitious, pres. only imper. l\r)6t or l\adi ; pf. subj.
and opt. l\-f)K(a, I\^KOI/J.I (Horn.). Mid. YAa^uaj, propitiate, epic.
Poetic, chiefly epic.] (I.)
"IXXtt and tXXo|uu, roll, for clfAAw. See elX^w.
['Ijid<r<ra> (see 582), lash, aor. 7/i<m-] (4.)
^Ijieipw (t/iep-), long for, [ipeipdnriv (epic), i/jLepBrjv (Ion.)]. Poetic and
Ionic. (4.)
"Iirrajiai (TTTO-) , /y, late present: see ir^Tojiai. (I.)
["I<rd|Jti, Doric for oT5a, know, with fcras, Ivan, 1<ra[j.ev, fffavri.]
[ W I<TKW : see it<TKO).~]
"I<TTti|jLt (ffTo-), set, place: for synopsis and inflection, see 504, 506,
509. (I.)
*I<rxvatv (Z^x^ov-), make lean or dry, fut. iVx^a"^, aor.
(673) \iff\vi}va. Ion.], a. p. Itrxv&vB-nv ; fut. m. Icrxvavov^ai. (4.)
"I<rx (for <n-<rex ^'O'X*)? ^^e, AoZd, redupl. for ex
See x w -
K.
Ka0cup<o (/ca^ap-), purify, KadapSj, eKaOrjpa and eKdOdpa,
v ; Ka6apov/mai, 4Kadr)pap.i}v. (4.)
(45-), si doWJW, imp. ficade&nriv, f. Ka.6f8ovp.ai..
Ka06v8w, sZeep, imp. ^/ca0ew5oj/ and /ca^OSov [epic KafleCSov], see 544 ;
fut. (c-) KadevS-fiffo) (658, 1). See iJ8&>.
Ka6C|o>, sei, SlY, f. Ka0 (for Ka,Qia<a), Ka0i-f)<ro/j.ai } a. ttcdtfiffa Or Kadlffa
[Horn. /ca0e?<ra, Hdt. *caTe?o-o] fKaeiad^v. See l'. For inflection
of KdOrjfj.a.1, see 815.
Kaivvfiai, perhaps for Ka8-vv/j.ai (/ca8-), eojceZ, p. Ke/cao-^at [Dor. /ce/ca5-
Mevos]. Poetic. (II.)
KaCvcu (a^-), fci'ZZ, f. KavS), 2 a. eKavov, 2 p. (we'/fo^a) Kara-KeKov6rS
(Xen.). Chiefly poetic. (4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 387
Ka (av-, Kap-, /cafj-, /cat-, 601), in Attic prose generally ao> (not
contracted), burn; Kavaoi; fKawa, poet. part, /teas, [epic e/cr/a] ;
KeKavKa, Ke/cai/yiicu, (KavQt]v, Kavdrjaouai, [2 a. e/car/j/ ;] fut. mid. Ka.vffop.at
(rare), [dv-e/cawo-a^i', Hdt.]. (4.)
KaXe'w (/caAe-, Ae-), caZZ, fut. /caAw (rare and doubtful in Attic
/caAeVo)) ; ^/caAeo-a, /ce/cATj/ca, K^K\i}fJLai (opt. /ce/cA^o, KfK\rjfji.eda),
^v, /cAT70T7<roywai ; fut. m. KaAov/ucu, a. e/caAeo'cfyirjj' J fut. pf.
639 (6) ; 734.
KaXviTTft) (/coAujS-), Cover, KaAttyco, ^/coAu^o, /ce/caAu/ijuat,
Ka\v<pe-f)<ro/j.ai ; aor. m. ^Ka\v^dnriv. In prose chiefly in compounds.
(3.)
Kdjivto (/ca^u-), labor, Ka^uoCyuat, /ce/c/iTj/ca [ep. part. K/c/i77e6s] ; 2 a.
', [ep. eKa J u(^ / uT7i'.]] (5.)
/ca^uTr-), 6end, /cafii|/oj, e(cayui//a, KKa/J.fJ.cu. (77), ilcdfJl$$1}V. (3.)
, accuse, regular except in augment, KarrjySpow etc. (543).
[(Ka<j>-), jraft^, stem with Horn. perf. part. Ke/co^rjcis ; cf. re^^ws.]
epic for ffKetidwviJu, scatter, tKeda<r<ra, iKedfofhiv.'] (II.)
i, Zie, Kei<To/j.ai ; inflected in 818.
Keipco (-ef>-), shear, f. /cepai, a. e/cetpa [poet, e/cc/wra], /ce/cap/uat, [(^/cep^i/)
Kfpde'is ; 2 a. p. eKapr)v ;] f. m. Kepov/u.ai, a. m. ^Kipdp.-nv [w. poet. part.
[KcKaSov, 2 aor. deprived of, caused to leave, KKaS6/j.riv, retired,
S^o-w, s/iaZZ deprive, reduplicated Horn, forms of xC-] See xo-t w -
[KeXaScw, shout, roar, fut. weAaSTjo-w, /ceAoStjo-o/^at, aor. ^/ceAciSrjaa ; Horn.
pres. part. /ceA.ctSai'. Epic and lyric.]
KeXevw, Command, KreAeutroj, e/ceAeuo'a, /ce/ceAeu/ca, KKt\evff p.a.i, ^weAev-
o-^r/j.- (641). Mid. (chiefly in compounds) KeAewro^cu, eKeAeuo-a^rji'.
Ke'XXw (/ceA-), Zaw^, /ceAo-&>, e/ceAaa. 668; 674 (&). Poetic : the prose
form is oK&Xw. (4.)
Ke'Xojxai, order, [epic (-) tceX-fio-opai, 4Ke\titrd(ji-nv ; 2 a. m. e/ce/cA(fyiT)>
(534 ; 677).] Poetic, chiefly epic.
KVTC (/fevT-, j/T6-), prick, Kcvriiaa), ^Kevrr)(ra, [/ceK^Trjjuat Ion.,
t>cVTT]6r}v later, ffvyKevTTid'fiffOfjiai Hdt.]. [Horn. aor. inf. Kej/crai,
from stem /CCJ/T-. 654.] Chiefly Ionic and poetic.
Kpdvvv|U (/cepa-, /fpa-), WICC, e/cepcwa [Ion. e/cprjo-a], KfKpa.fj.ai [Ion.
-T^UCU] , ^Kpddrjv [Ion. "fjQ'nv'] an( i tKepd<r0r)v ; f. pass. Kpad-f)<ro(j.ai ; a. m.
(H.)
(cep8-, wepSov), gra*w (595 ; 610), f. :p5oi/fti, a. eWpSaj/a (673),
[Ion. Kep8t]va]. From stem /cep5- (e-) [fut. Kep&Vo/xai and aor,
(Hdt.)] ; pf. irpo<r-K6tcep8'fiKci(n (Dem.). (5. 4.)
^-, /cu^-), AMe, /cey<r&>, [eKreurra ;] 2 p. KeKev8a (
[ep. 2 a. Kufloi/, subj. /cy0.] Epic and tragic. (2.)
388 APPENDIX. [1692
(/o?8-, o5-), vex, (e-) [ttTjS^o-w, -tK-fiS-riffa ; 2 p. /ce/fTjSa] : active only
epic. Mid. /c^So/xat, sorrow, ^Seo-ojuTj*', [epic fut. pf. KeKaSiijo-o/xai.J
(2.)
Kt]pv(rora> (KT/^WK-), proclaim, K?jpua>, eichpva, KfK-fipvxa, Kffcfipvy/u.ai,
A iat > /C7jpuoyucu, fK^pv^d/j.r)v. (4.)
, epic Kixavw (/x-)> ^ w ^ (-) /"xVoyueu, [epic
2 a. e/ax "* [Epic forms as if from pres. KfxW"? 2 aor
Kix^r-nv, Kixetw, Kixelvj, Kix'nvai and
Poetic. (5.)
[KCSvi]}u (xiS-vo-), spread, Ion. and poetic for o-Ke8dvvv|xi.] See
[Ktvv|jtai, wove, pres. and imp. ; as mid. of trivia. Epic.] (II.)
(III.) and Kipvcuo : forms (in pres. and impf.) for iecpdvvv|i.i.
wd! ' [xpV w Hdt.], exprjo-a, K e'xp T?/iai ; expW^*'- (I.)
(/cA.077-, /cAay-), clang, K\dy(a, fK\ay^a' } 2 p. K(K\ayya [epic
KK\r)ya, part. KK\^yovrfs ;] 2 a. K\ayov ; fut. pf. KeK\dy^ofjLai.
Chiefly poetic. (4.)
KXeuw (/cAou-, fcA.a/r-, icX/:i-, /cAat-, 601), in Attic prose generally K\CU*
(not contracted), weep, K\a^>ffo/nai (rarely K\av<rovfj.ai, sometimes
K\afl)<T<a Or /cAairjo'w), e/cAaucro and eK\avad/j.7{v, KfK\av/u.ai ; fut. pf-
(impers.) Ke/cAauo-erai. (4.)
KX.dw, break, e/cAa<ro, /ce/cAoa/iot, ^K\dard^v ; [2 a. pt. /cA(ty.]
KXe'irTo) (/cAeTT-), S^eaZ, K\^W (rarely AcAe^Ojuat), KAe^a, KK\o<f>a (643 ;
692), KK\efj.fjLai, (<&K\4QOiiv) K\e$6f(s', 2 a. p. eK\diri)i>. (3.)
KXrfw, later Attic KXcCco, S^Mf, K\^<ru, K\r)<ra, KeKXyica, je&Ap/icu, ^KA?J-
(T07j/ ; K\r)ff6-f)<ro/Ji.ai, /ceA?/(ro^ot, $K\pffd/J.riv (also later /cAetVw, ewAeKro,
etC.). [Ion. /fATjfw, K\^lffa, K6/fA^iyUCU, ^/cATjf<T0T7l'.J
KXtvw (^Ati/-), 6ew(i, incline, /cAti/w, e/cAtvo, Ke/cAi/tat, ^K\idT}v [epic
e'KAii/077i>, 709], K\ie-fiffOfj.ai ; 2 a. p. tic\tviiv, 2 f. K\ivfi<ro/*ai ', fut. m.
KAicoDjuat, a. fK\Lvd/LL7]v. 647. (4.)
KXvw, Aear, imp. e/cAuoj/ (as aor.) ; 2 a. imper. /rAufc, /cASre .[ep. KK\v6t,
KcKAvre]. [Part. /cAu/xevos, renowned] Poetic.
KvaCw, scrape (in compos.), -Kval<r<a, -e/cyaiera, -KCKvaiKa, -KfKvai(Tfj.a.i,
-IttvaivQiiv, -Kvaiaefoofjiai. Also Kvdw, with oe, ar? contracted to 77,
and oei, 077 to 77 (496).
Ko|i(<a (/co/*i8-), care /or, carry, /co/xtw, ^/c^yuto-o, KK6/u.iKa, Kew^yuia-yuai,
txoiJiiffQrjv ; KoiJLicrQ^ffofjLai ; f. m. Ko/u.iov/j.ai (665, 3), a. ^Ko/j.Krd/j.r)v. (4.)
KOTTTW (KOTT-), CM^, K^W, e*oJ/a, jc^K00ef, 693 [Ke/coTrcis Horn.], IKKOJU/MU ;
2 aor. p. lK6in)v, 2 fut. p. Koir-fio-ouai ; fut. pf. *e/t<tyo,u<u ; aor. m.
. (3.)
(op6-), satiate, [f. Koptvto (Hdt.), Kope'ew (Horn.), a. /c^pe<ra
(poet.)], KK6pf(T/mai [Ion. -Tjyuot]* tKop08rii> ; [epic 2 p. part.
a. m. e'KOpeou/u.Tji'.] (II.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 389
Kop&nrc* (opu0-), arm, [Horn. a. part. Kopvavdncvos, pf. pt.
/teW] Poetic, chiefly epic. (4. )
[KoWw, be angry, aor. eWreffa, e/coreo-a/xTji', 2 pf. part. KCKOTIJ^S, angry,
epic.]
Kpdi> (Kpa-y), cry OM, fut. pf. KKpd^o/ji.ai (rare) ; 2 pf. KfKpaya
(imper. KficpaxOi and /ce/cpcfyere, Ar.), 2 plpf. tKCKpdyere (Dem.) ;
2 a. &pa-yo>. (4.)
KpaCvca (/cpav-), accomplish, Kpavw, eKpdva [Ion. f/cp7ji/a],
KpavB-ftao/jiai ; p. p. 3 sing. KeKpavrai (cf. irfQavraC), [f. m. inf.
ffdat, Horn.]. Ionic and poetic. [Epic Kpaiaivw, aor. ^K^rjva, pf.
and pip. KCKpaavrat and Kettpdavro ; fKpddvQrjv (Theoc.).] (4.)
Kpc|xa|iai, hang, (intrans.), irpf/t^ao/icu. See KpTj|ivT]|u and Kpe)idvvv)xi.
(I-)
Kp|idvvv|&i (/cpc^ua-), suspend, /cpc/iw (for p6jiia<rw), e/cp^uaaa,
suspend, (KP^-VO. for Kpepa-va, perhaps through
suspend; very rare in act., pr. part. Kp^/jLvdvTcav (Find.). Mid.
pvajiai = Kp/j.afj.ai. Poetic: used only in pres. and impf. (HI.)
Kptci> (wpty-), creaA;, squeak, [2 a. (eKpiicov) 3 sing, /cpfoe ;] 2 p.
(KfKplya) KeKplydres, squeaking (Ar.). (4.)
Kptvw (/cptv-), judge, f. Kpivw, eicplva, /ce/cpt/co, e/cpt/*ot, ti<pl0i)v [ep.
^KP^^I/], Kpi6^ffo/j.at ; fut. m. Kpivovpai, a. m. [epic eKpivdpiiv.'] 647.
(40
Kpovco, 6ea^, K/JOI/O-W, e/cpourra, KfKpovKa, KfKpov/j.ai and KfKpovfffJiai,
(/fpu</>-), conceal, Acpt5^o>, e/cpu^a, K/cpu/*/xot,
(rare), 2 f. *rpu<p^(ro/ia. or /cpujS^jo-o/iai. (3.)
acquire, /cr^jo-o/xat, eKTtjffd/j.r}v, KfKrrjfiai (rarely eKToj/tat), pos-
sess (subj. KeKr&/j.ai, opt. KCKTT/^urji/ Or KeKTtpfjnjv, 734), ^KT^I\V (as
pass.) ; KfKT-fiffofiai (rarely eKT^o-o/iat), sAaZZ possess.
KreCvw (KT6/-, icra-), M?, f. KTCI/W [Ion. Krevetw, ep. also /erenow], a.
fKTeiva, 2 pf. oTT-eVroca, [ep. a. p. iitrdQ-nv ;] 2 a. fKravov (for poetic
^KTOII/ and fKrdfjLrjv, see 799) ; [ep. fut. m. Kroyeo/iat.] In Attio
prose oTro-KTefveu is generally used. 645 ; 647. (4.)
(see 587), found, KTIO-U, ^/crto-o, eTio-/tai, ^Kriad-nVj [aor. m.
(rare)]. (4.)
KrCwv|u and KTIWVW, in compos., only pres. and impf. See
(II.)
KTVIT&I) (KTVTT-), sound, cause to sound, ^TJirj(ra, [2
Chiefly poetic. 654.
KvXtu or KvXCvSca and icvXivSta, roW, fKi>\i<ra,
390 APPENDIX. [1692
Kwe'w (ACU-), ffiss, %Kv<ra. Poetic. IIpoor-Kvvew, do homage, f. irporKv-
v^<ru, a. irpoaeKvvrjffa (poet. irpoafKvffa), is common in prose and
poetry. (5.)
Kvm-tt (/cvej>-), stoop, itfyw and /cjtyo^eu, aor. eltya,2 p.ice/cD^a. (3.)
Kvpw (/>-), meet, chance, KU/XJ-W, fcu/xra (663 674 6). (4.)
is regular.
A.
-) obtain by lot, f. m. A^{o/ieu [Ion. A<|o/tai], 2 pf.
[Ion. and poet. \e\oyx a t] P- m - (efAT^ai) etA^y/tews, a. p.
" ; 2 a. eAax" [ep. AeAc*xa>, 634]. (5.)
(AajS-), ta&e, A^o/iat, ?A.T?4>a, ef^/j.p.at, (poet. AeArjjit/toi), e'A^-
4>07/j>. ki]^e^aop.a.i ; 2 a. Aaj8oi/, t\a&6fj.riv [ep. inf. AcAaj8eV0at (534).]
[Ion. AeJ/t^o/toi, AeAc)8ij/ca, AeAa)U/*a<, i\dfjt<f)d-nv ; Dor. fut. Aa^ov-
/.] (5.)
Aajiira), S^me, \dfjL$(a, ?Aa/4a, 2 pf. AeAo/tTra J [flit. m. -Aa^o^tat Hdt.].
AavOava) (Aa0-), Zze Ai(?, escape the notice of (some one), \V, [eAr?<ra],
2 p. \e\-n6a [Dor. Xe'Aafla,] 2 a. ^0001; [ep. Ae'Aaflov.] Mid. forget,
Arjcro^uai, AeATjff/iai [Hom. -atr^ai], flit. pf. AeA^jtro/toi, 2 a. f\a.d6/j.r)i'
[ep. AeAa^rji/.] (5.) Poetic AV?0w. (2.)
AAirrw (Aa#- Or Ao^>-), Zap, Zt'cA;, Actyw, eAa^a, 2 pf. AAa^)a(693) J f. m.
Aoil/o^uai, e\afydiu.7)v. (3.)
Ado-Kco for \a.K'(TKci> (AOK-), speak, (-) Aa/c^o-o/iat, lA(fCTj<ro, 2 p. AeAaa
[ep. AeArj/ca w. fem. part. AeAa/cu?a :] 2 a. eAo/cov [AeAo/c^i/]. Poetic.
617. (6.)
[Adco, AW, roi's^, Af s, AT;, etc. ; infin. A^J/. 496. Doric.]
^ xg'io,, &e!a, \4\fjfiai (dt-ei\cynai), ^exdrjv ; fut. Acx^J-
o-o^iat, A|o/ioj, AeAe'lo/tai, all passive. For pf. act. 6?/)7j/ca is used
(see etirov).
gather, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), A^a, eAe^a,
ff \eyfiai or \f\eyiji.ai 9 ^Ae'x^j/ (rare); a. m. e'Aelc^j/, 2 a. p.
t\cyir]i>, f. \eyf)<rofJtat. [Ep. 2 a. m. (&y/Mfi') Aexro, COWW^ed] See
stem Xex-.
AeCirco (Aetw-, Aonr-, Awr-), ?e^e, Ae/^w, X^A/t/tot, i\el$Qi]v ; 2 p.
AeAotTra ; 2 a. e\nroi>, t\nr6fji-r)v. See synopsis in 476, and inflection
of 2 aor., 2 peri, and 2 plpf. in 481. (2.)
[AcXfrqucu, part, \e\irnuifvos, eager (Horn.).]
Aevco, stowe, generally Karo-Aeuw ; -Aevo-w, -?Afu(ra, t\ctar0i)v (641),
stem (cf. Ae^-os), whence 2 a. m.
res, with imper. Ae|o (also Ae|6o), inf. wora-Aex^oi, pt. /rara-
\eyfjLevos (800, 2). Also eAe|a, Zatfc? io res?, with mid. Aefo^az, to/ZZ
gro fo res?, and fXe^rjv, went to rest, same forms with tenses of
Ae^w, sa^, and Ae^w, gather. Only epic.]
1602] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 39J
, poetic : see XavOdvu.
Af|ta (ATji'5-), plunder -, act. rare, only impf. t\j]'iov. Mid. Xtitgo|j.ai
(as act.), [fut, \T)iffOfj,at, aor. tWad/j.-nv, Ion.]. Eurip. has e'Apo-a-
M^, and pf. p. \f\rjo-fj.ai. (4.)
or (rare) XCrojiau (AIT-), supplicate [epic AwdViTj*/, 2 a. e'At
(4.)
[ Aot'eo, epic for Aot5o> ; Aofo-o-o/zot, A<W<ro, ^AoeoW/*??!'.]
Aovw or X6, w?asA, regular. In Attic writers and Hdt. the pres.
and imperf. generally have contracted forms of A<ta, as eAov, e'AoG-
pey, AoSrcu, \ov<rdai, Aot5/tei/os (497).
Avw, Zoose, see synopsis and full inflection in 474 and 480. Horn, also
\v(o (o) (471). [Epic 2 a. m. ^At^ (as pass.), Ai5ro and AVTO, AI}J/TO j
pf. opt. AeAvro or \e\vvro (734).]
M.
MaCvco (/iaj'-), madden, a. e/irji/o, 2 pf. jue/iij^a, am mat?, 2 a. p. tydvyv.
Mid. (Jtatvojitti, 6e mad [/iavou/taj, (^TjJ/aM^ /te/*(i^Aiat.] (4.)
(yua<r-, /xao-i-, /tat-, 602), desire, seek, [/tcto-o/tat, fycurd/jLviv] 2 pf .
/-), desire eagerly, in sing., with /^-forms fj.e/j.arov, /ie/ta-
^tev, jue/tare, jj.efj.dd (rt, ^e/taTa>, /ie^uacos, plpf. /j.fj.aaav. Also (/iao,uat)
Doric contract iorms /twrat, ^uwi/rai, /AWO-O, ^(rOat, n&fjLfvos.'] Poetic,
chiefly epic. (4.)
MavOavw (^ua^-), Zearw, (-) fiaff^ffofuiij fj.efj.d0ijKa ; 2 a. Zpadov. (5.)
Mopvajiai (nap~va-), fight (subj. /xapi/w^at, imp. jucfyji/ao); a.
Poetic, (in.)
Mdpirrw (ywapTr-), efoe, /*<{p^a>, e/iop^o [epic 2 pf. ^6/tapTra, 2 aor.
TTOV (534), with opt. pe/jLairoifv, fjunrc'iv.'] Poetic. (3.)
Mouro-o) (/*a7-), knead, ^a|aj, etc., regular ; 2 a. p. 4/j.dynv. (4.)
Max.ojiai [Ion. fji.axfOfj.at], Jight, f. fA.axuvfj.ai [Hdt. fj.axfffofj.ai, Hom. /ta-
X*ofj.ai or /iox^(TO/xot], p. fj,f flaxy pai, a> V a X e(re fy ir 7' / [ep. also ^/xox>j-
ao.\j.i]v \ ep. pres. part. p.o.x fl ofj.fvos or ^ua^eou/tevos].
[M^SofAai, ^Mn% o/, p?an, (-) /ieS^o-o^at (rare). Epic.]
Me0-fT]|u, send away ; see f^i (810). [Hdt. pf. pt. ^e/ieri/*6i/os.]
MeOvo-Kw (^00-), aA:e drunk, ^Qwa. Pass. /0i5<rKo,uai, 6e made
drunk, a. p. e>e0u<r0r7i', became drunk. See (xedvo). (6.)
, 6e drunk, only pres. and impf.
(,up-), obtain, epic, 2 pf. 3 sing, fypopf ;] impers. eT/ioyrat (
it is fated, flfj.apfj.fvri (as subst.), J^aJe. (4.)
MeXXw, intend, augm. e'/i- or ^/t- (517) ; (-) /AeAA^o-w, ifj.e\\i]a<..
MeXco, concern, care for, (-) ^eA-^o-w [ep. fj,f\-f}ffOfj,at, 2 p.
fjLffj.f \rnnat [ep. fj.ffj.0\Tai, nf/u^AeTO, for fj.f/j.XfTat, fj.ffj,\fro (66,
nf\r)8els. Poetic. M'\i, rt concerns, impers.;
392 APPENDIX. [1692
fat \-nffc, /te/ie'ATj/ce, used in Attic prose, with &n/i&o/iou and eVi/ut
Xfop.au
Me'|xova (/iev-), desire, 2 perf. with no present. See p,aojiai.
MVO>, remain, f. /xej/w [Ion. yuepew], f/j.fiva (-) fj.f/j.vriKa.
Mep(jLT]pitw (see 687 and 590), ponder, [p.pp.rtpi&, e>e/j/*^pj{a], iir-
fp.fpp,ripiaa (Ar.). Poetic. (4.)
M^Sopai, devise, fj.-fiffOfj.ai, fp,rtadp,rtv. Poetic.
MT]Kao|j.<u durjK-, /*a-, 656), 6Zea, [Horn. 2 a. part. /j.aK<6v ; 2 p. part.
p,fp,riK(i>s, u.ffMKv?a ; 2 pip. ififfoiKov (777, 4).] Chiefly epic. (2.)
[M-qTidco (JUTJTI-, 650),_pZaw. Mid. HTJTICLOJJLCU, jji-qTiojiat (Pind.), /*7jTf(ro-
/iaz, ^fj.r}Tiffd/j.T]v. Epic and lyric.]
MiaCvo) (^ttav), Stain, IJ.LO.VU>, fjj.ia.va [loll, l/tfofi/a], /j.e/j.iaa/j.aL, t/j.idvOr]v,
i. (4.)
Ionic (iicr-yw, m#, ^"'j ^A 1 *! ? /t^ui7/iot, e^ufx^rji/, /*fx^'
<ro/iat ; 2 a. p. fyiyyv, [ep. fut. /it-y^o-o/tcu ; 2 a. m. e/tlKTo and /OKTO ;
fut. pf. /*eyufo/iaj.] (II.)
and (older) (unvrfo-Kw (fivo-), remind; mid. remember;
jLvvjffa, p.tp.vrnj.a.1, remember, f/j.vfiffQ-rjv (as mid.) ; ^.vt\aQi\a -o/j.ai,
fj.vfia-0/j.ai, fj.ffjLvf)<ToiJ.ai' t tp.vriffap.rtv (poet.). Mcjivtifiai (memini) has
subj. fj.efj.vuij.ai, (722), opt. p.fp.v^p.'nv or /te/ivr/jur?!/ (734), imp. /ie/xi/Tjo-o
[Hdt. p.ep.veo'], inf. p,ep,vrjadai, pt. p,fp.vrtp.fvos. 616. (6.)
[From epic pvdonat come f/j-vtaovro, /ii/coo>e/os, (?) etc. (784, 2).]
MCji-vw for fj.i-jj.evw (652, 1), remain, poetic form of /ieW
MCo~yo> for p.iy-ffK(a (617), mix, pres. and impf. See ptyvviu. (6.)
MV^CD, suck, [Ion. fj.ve(i), aor. -e/xu^o-a (Horn.)].
Mva> (^7-), grumble, mutter, aor. yui|a. Poetic. (4.)
MvKaojxai OUUK-, yui/K-, 656), bellow, [ep. 2 pf. fj.ffj.vKa; 2 a. /ijfoovjj
fp.vxriffdp.-riv. Chiefly poetic. (2.)
Mv<r<rw or JXVTTW (/UUK-), WJtpe, aTro-/j.v^dfJ,evos (Ar.). Generally OTTO-
s or eyes), aor. ^/xutra, pf. jj.ffj.vKa.
NaCa> (^a/:-, va/n-, i/at-, 602), swim, be full, impf. ^o?o>/, Od9,222.
NaCw (I'ao--, j/a-, 602), dwell, [e^airo-a, caused to dwell, fvaffffdp.rtv, came
to dwell,] fvdffdriv, was settled, dwelt. Poetic. (4.)
Ndo-o-w (va8-, vay-}, Stuff, [fvaa,] vevaffpat or vfvay/j.ai. 682 J 590.
(40
[NeiK^w and vciKeiw, chide, veiKfffu, tvfiKfffa. Ionic, chiefly epic.]
, distribute, f. ve/jiu, fvfip.a, (e-) vfVfp.r\Ka, vfvfp.rtp.ai, fvf/j.ri6riv\
vfp.ovp.ai, tvfip.dp.riv.
i, go, come, also in future sense. Chiefly poetic. See vCo-o-opcu.
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 393
L N&d (j/ei-, J>6/>, vw) sw >i, fvevffa, v^vevKa J f. m.
vfva-ov/ji.evos. 674. (2.)
2. N&o, &eop wp, fvijffa, vevqfiat OT v4vi}<rp.ai. [Epic and Ion.
3. N^w and vrjOw, spre, nfio-w, ^rjtra, fv^drjv ; [ep. a. m.
N"Co>, later vtTrrw, Hom. viTrro/nai (yt#-)i wash, vityo), e>n//a, vfvifji.p.a.1,
[-^i/i^flrjf ;] vtyopai, fvi\l/dfj.rjv. 591. (3. 4.)
Nio-<ro(j.ai or vta-opai, ^o, fut. w<ro/iat. Nfo-o^uai, probably the correct
form of the present, is, ace. to Meyer ( 500), for i/i-i/o-j-o/iat, from
a stem /e<r- with reduplication. (See pres. wo-era/, Find. OZ.3, 34.)
Poetic. (4.)
No&o, think, perceive, vo-fiyu, etc., regular in Attic. [Ion. e/a><ra,
(see 587), believe, fut. /oyut< [i/o/t^w late], aor. tvtuiaa, pf.
vfv6/Mff/J.ai, aor. p. fvo^ffd-riv, fut. p. vo/J.iffd-fjaro/j.ai, [f. m.
vof4.iovfji.ai (Hippoc.).] (4.)
s-
, scrape, [aor. geo-o and I^Vo-o, chiefly epic], Qe<rjAat. 639, 640.
, dry, frpavw, ftfpdva [Ion. -rji/a], f^pafffjLai and e^-
frpdvOiiv. 700. (4.)
, eJ<ra, [e|i}(rAtot,] 3 |w(rarji/ ; aor. m. ^vffd^v. 640.
0.
, make a way, regular ; but pf. part. a>5o7r67rot?;/ieVos occurs.
So sometimes with oSonropfw, travel.
(68v-), be angry, stem with only [Hom. wdv<rd/u.r)v, oS^Sutr/iat].
*Ot (oS-), sweZZ, (-) oCVw, fi'C'JO'a [Jon- o^* &Co-a, late 2 pf. tfSeoSa,
Hom. pip. oSciSciC^)]. 658, 3. (4.)
Ofyw, open, poetic ofa> and oJ|a [epic also &rga], a. p. part. o?x^f's.
OE-yvv|xi, simple form late in active, [imp. p. duyi/v/irjj/ Horn.], com-
mon in composition : see av-oiyvv/ni. (II.)
OlSe'u, swell, u>8-n<ra, cpSijita. Also otSdvu. (5.)
w (ot/fTi/3-), commonly written olKTtlpv, pity (597), aor. cpKripa
(4.)
totwe, olvoxo-fiffca, [otVoxo^o-ot (epic and lyric)]. [Impf.
ep. 3 pers. oivox<$i, (fvo^ei, eyvo^Jet.]
Ol'ojiai, think (625), in prose generally o1/j.ai and cp^v in 1 per. sing. ;
(-) oiyao/jLai, (f^Qi]v. [Ep. act. ofo (only 1 sing.), often oiu ; o
Oi'xop,ai, be gone, (-) o?x^<ro/tc, olxwfa or <px uKa (669); [Ion.
or ^x^Ma'i doubtful in Attic].
KeA-), run ashore^ aor. &itci\a. Prose form of Kf\\w. (4.)
394 APPENDIX. [1692
'OXwrOAvw, rarely o\tffBatvw (oAiertf-), slip, [Ion. a>A/<r0ij<ra, a>AiV0rj/ca] ;
2 a. BtKurBov (poetic). (5.)
"OXXvjju (probably for OA-I/U-/U, 612), rarely oAAuw (6A-), destroy, lose,
f. oAoj [oAeVw, oAeV], #Ae<ra, -oAa>Ae:a ; 2 p. oAa>Aa, perish, 2 plpf.
-wAc6Ar? (533). Mid. oAAu/tot, perish, o\ov/j.at, 2 a. WA^UTJJ/ [w. ep.
part. ouA^uei/os]. In prose dir-oXXvju. (II.)
'OAo4>tipo|ACU (oAoipup-), bewail, f. oAo<pi/>oy/tat, a)\o<pvpdfji-r}v 9 part. oAo-
0vp0fe (Thuc.). (4.)
"O|ivvfii and OJJLVVW (o/i-, O/AO-, 659), swear, f. o^uoC/xcu, &poffa, b^^oKa,
6fJt(iafJioff/j.ai (with o/ici/iorai) , wfj.6drjv and
(II. )
(0^0/37-), ?/7Zpe, 0[j.6po[jiai, ia^op^a,
Chiefly poetic : only epic in pres. and impf. (II.)
"OvCvT)(it (oi/a-, 796), benefit, 6vfi<rco, tavrjo-a, wvt]Qt]v ; 6vf)<rofj.ai ; 2 a. m.
tav^t\v (late Mvafj.^, bvaifjifiv, ovaffdai (798; 803, 3), [Horn, imper.
8t>r)(ro, pt. oj/Tj/tevos]. (I.)
["Ovoi&'ai, insult, inflected like dtio/uai, with opt. oi/otro (Horn.), f.
6v6ffaofj.ai, a. wvoffdfJiTjv {&varo, H. 17, 25), a. p. /caT-oi/oorflTjs (Hdt.).
Ionic and poetic.] (I.)
'Of-vvw (o|fJ'-), sharpen, -bvvG>, %uva, -&^v^ai^ wvvdv)v, [-o|u^07jcro/iat,
Hippoc.] 700. In Attic prose only in compos. (4.)
'Oirviw (OTTU-, OTTU*-, 602), ta&e io tOi/e, fut. oirvau (Ar.). (4.)
'Opdw (^pa-, OTT-), see, imperf. eeipcoj' [Ion. &pcai>], tyo/uai, ebpdita or
ec6jod/ca, U.JU/XCU or ewpd^iai, &<pOi)v, 6<pd'l]ffop.ai' t 2 p. oircaira. (Ion. and
poet.). For 2 a. e?5oi' etc., see ctSov. [Horn. pres. mid. 2 sing.
8/iai, 784, 3.] (8.)
'Op-yaCvw (dpyav-}, be angry, aor. iapyava, enraged. Only in Tragedy.
'Opy, reac/i, op-'o>, J5pe^a, [Ion. pf. n. #pe7/*a/, Horn. 3 plur.
Xarai, p\p. dpoapf xo.ro,'] wpex^rji/ J J/>e|ojua(, oape^d/jujv. [Epic dpeyvv/M,
pr. part. o>e7vds. (II.)]
"Opviiju (>-), ra^se, roise, o/>o-o>, fy<ra, 2 p. opwpo (as inid.) ; [ep. 2 a.
&popov.~] Mid. ?'ise, rifs^, [f. 6pov/u,ai, p. opcope/iaj,] 2 a. w/ooVrji/ [with
J/)TO, imper. o/xro, opo-fo^ opaev, inf. op0at, part, op/j.evos']. Poetic. (II.)
Opvoro-w or opvTTw (opvy-*), dig, opvfa, pva, opdcpvxa (rare), bp&
pvypat (rarely &pvy/jt.a.i), upvxOriv; f. p. Kar-bpvx^ffOfj.a.1, 2 f. fear-
6pux-fi<ronai ; [<ty> vlo^r? y, caused to dig, Hdt.] (4.)
*Oar<|>paCvO|xai (ocr^p-, bo-Qpav-, 610), smell, (e-) oo-0p^o-o/iot, w(r<ppdv6rjit
(rare), 2 a. m. oxrfpp^/j.-nv, [Hdt. &<r<t>pat>To.'] (5. 4.)
Ovpeco, impf. tovpeov, f. ovp-^ffop.a.1, a. fovprja'a, pf. ovpi]Ka. [Ionic has
oup- for Attic e'ovp-.]
[Ovrd^w (587), wound, ovrdffto, ovracra, ouracr/tat. Chiefly epic.] (4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 395
[Ourdw, wound, OUTTJO-O, ovT-ndrjv ; 2 a. 3 sing, oura, inf. ovrdfj-evai and
ovTa/iev ; 2 a. mid. ovrdjufvos as pass. Epic.]
'O<|>Aa> (o<pe\-, 598), [epic reg. o(j>eAA&>], owe, (-) 6<f>i\^au, wQcix-wa,
(a>0eiAr7/ca ?) a. p. pt. o^eiArjflcfs (658, 3) ; 2 a. &<pe\ov, used in wishes
(1512), Otfm*. (4.)
'O4>6\\a> (o<peA-), increase, [aor. opt. o^eAAete Horn.] Poetic, espe-
cially epic. (4.)
'O4>\uncdvtt (o</>A-, 6</>Aw/c-), 6e guilty, incur (a penalty), (e-) o^A^o-w,
&q>Xt)<ra (?), &0A7?/ca, #0Ai7/tat ; 2 a. w<p\oi> (o<p\tv and o<p\uv are
said by grammarians to be Attic forms of inf. and part.). (6. 5.)
n.
-, 7rot7-), sport, ?rat|oG/xat (666), eTroiao, ire7TCKa, 7T7ra/(r/*at.
590. (4.)
Ilaiw, Strike, iraicrci), poetic (-) irai-fjffo), fwaura, ireTratKa, firaiaOrjv (640).
TlaXaiw, wrestle, [7raAcuVa>,] 7roAara, ira\ai(T0i)v (640).
IldXXco (TTOA-), brandish, eirri\a, TreTraA^at; [Hom. 2 a. d/t-TreffaAeiv, as
if from TTfira\oi> ; 2 a. m. CTTOATO and TraAro.] (4.)
IIapavo|i4a>, transgress law, augm. Trapev6/j.ovi> and
(543).
), insult (as a drunken maw), imp. Trap^vow t
jra.p<pv4)6't}v (544).
IIdcro|iai, fut. shall acquire (no pres.), pf. TreVa/tat, ^irdcdfji.^. Poetic.
Not to be confounded with Trao-oyuai, ^-jravafjujv, etc. (with d) of
Tra.rfOfj.ai.
ndo-o-w or irdrrw (582 ; 587), sprinkle, irdffto, eTratra, ^o.aQi\v. Chiefly
poetic. (4.)
Ildo-xw (TTO.Q-, irei'0-), for ira6-<rK(a (617), SW#er, Trel<ro/j.at (for ireve-ffonat,
79), 2 pf. TTirov8a [Hom. TreWfle for irf^vBare, and ir7ro0i/ro] ; 2 a.
^Tra^oy. (8.)
ITaTeojJtai (fl-ar-), ea^, f. irdcrovrat (?), eTratra^rji/ ; . [ep. pip.
655. Ionic and poetic. See irao-opai.
Havci), stoj), Cause to cease, iravau, tiravcra., TreiravKa, irfirav/j.ai,
[fTraiJ a Qi\v Hdt.], Trau^ffo/xat, TreiravffOfJiai. Mid. iravOftai, cease,
iravffofj.a.1, eiravffdiJ.rjv.
(?ret0-, 7rt0-)? persuade, irelffoo, fircura, irciretKa, irfireurnai, tirel-
<jQt\v (71), irL<r6T}ffOfj.ai', fut. m. Trcfo-o/iai; 2 p. irfiroiBa, trust, W.
imper. ireireiffGi (perhaps for 7reW0t)i -A.- ^ M - 699, [Hom. pip. tirf-
iri6/j.fv for tirfjroieenev ;] poet. 2 a. eTrteoy and emflo/xrji'. [Epic (-)
iri0r)ff(t), ireiTidT)<Ta), Tri^aas.] (2.)
w, epic pres. = TreKTw, comb.']
, hunger, regular, except in 77 for a in contract forms, inf.
fepic iretj'rj/xei'ai], etc. See 496.
396 APPENDIX. [1692
(TTC/>-), pierce, epic in pres.; oreipa, ireirapnai, [brdpiiv Hdt.]
Ionic and poetic. (4.)
IlKTw (ire*-, 7re/cT-, 655), [Dor. f. ire^oa, a. e7rea (Theoc.), ep. <?7rea-
; a. p. eVex^. See epic TTC(KO>. Poetic.
(cf. WAas, near; see 587), [poet. ireXdu (TreAa-, irAa-),]
wear, approach, f. TreAcwrw, Att. TreAw (665, 2), ^TreAao-a,
7reAao-0r?i/ and ^7rAa07ji/ ; [eVAa<ra/i7jj> ; 2. a. m. tir^Mv, approached.]
[Also poetic presents 7reAct0a>, ir\dd<a, 7rtA/a^ai.] (4.)
Ile'Xw and ireXofJicu, 6e, imp. eTreAoj', ^TreA^rji/ [syncop. eTrAe, en-Aeo
(eTrAeu), eirAero, for eireAe etc. J SO eirt-TrA^/ieyos and Tre/Di-TrA^/iei/os].
Poetic.
, S6W(?, ireyu^co, ftrepifro, itf-iro^a. (643 ; 693), tr&rcpfuu (77 ; 490,1),
Ile-iraLvco (TTCTTOI/-), make Soft, e7T7rai/a(673), tTreirdvOirjv, ireira.vQiiffOfji.ai. (4.)
[Ifcirapeiv, s/ioto, 2 aor. inf. in Pind. Py. 2, 57.]
n&rporai, ^ is fated: see stem (irop-, irpo-).
IIcpSo(xai, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) wapS^o-o/xa*, 2 p. irfvopSa, 2 a. faapSov.
See 643 and 646.
IIc'pOu, destroy, sack, irep<ra> [ir^pvofMi (as pass.) Horn.], e-n-fpo-a, [ep. 2
a. firpa6ov (646), m. ^rpafl^wTji/ (as pass.) with inf. Wpdcu for ?r6p0-0ai.]
Poetic.
IIepvT])jii (Trep-vo-), seZZ, mid. ircpva/j-ai : poetic for TrnrpdffKu. 609. (HI.)
Il<r<r or ireTTW, later ireirrw (TTCW-), COOA;, Tre^w, ^Treifa, irfirc/j./j.ai (75;
490, 1), IW001II'. See 683. (4.)
IIeTdvvv(jLi (Trera-), expawtf, (Trcrckrw) Trera, lireraffa, ireirra.iJ.aiy [
, 67rera<r^r;i/. See irTVT](JLi. (H.)
(TTCT-, in-}, fly (-), 7rrij(ro/iai (poet. Trer^o-o/tat) ; 2 a. m.
/MJJ/. To tirra^ai (rare) belong [2 a. eTrrrji' (poet.)] and
(799). The forms irt-ir6T-nna.i and ^iror^e-nv [Dor. -a/xot, -a^v] belong
tO TTOTaO/MU.
(iru6-) : see iruvOdvopai. (2.)
(7T7J7-, iray-), fasten, Trrj|a>, 7rr;$a, ^ir-fix^ 7 !" ( rare an d poet.) ;
2 a. p. eVcfyrji/, 2 f. p. irayfooiuLai ; 2 p. fl-eV^a, 6e ^xec?; [ep. 2 a. m.
;] 7TTJ7vi/To (Plat.) pr. opt. for irriyvv-i-ro (734) j [TT^|O-
(2. II.)
IliaCvw (ir<ai'-), fatten, iriavoo, tiridva, ireiria<r/j.ai, [eiridvBrjv']. Chiefly
poetic and Ionic. (4.)
[ncXvajxai (irtA-j/a-)i approach, only in pres. and impf. 609. Epic.]
See ire\dw. (III.)
(?rAa-), JH1 S TrAr/o-co, '<iir\ri<Ta, TreTrArj/fa, TreTrArjo-yuaj, eVAr/o'^rji',
a. m. ^irX^adfj.'nv (trans.) ; 2 a. m. cVArf/trji' (798),
Chiefly epic, With ^i/-rArjTo, opt. i/j.-irXrf/j.riv, ^u-irA??TO, imp. ^H'lrXifffO
pt. ^Tr\^vos, in Aristoph. 795. ()
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 397
II(}iirpT]|U (717)0-), burn, irp?f<ra>, 717)170-0, TreTrpT^uat and [WTrpTjoytot Hdt.],
tTrpfaQ-nv ; [Ion. f. wpiiffopai, fut. pf. ire7r/7/<r/taj.] 795. Cf. irpijfo,
Wow. (I.)
HIVVCTKW (raw), *a&e wise, [Horn. aor. fofwo-a]. Poetic. See
irvfo. (6.)
Iltvw (TTI-, TTO-), drink, fut. ir^Ojuai (iriov/iot rate) ; TreVw/ca, V fir opai,
ir6Qi\v, irodijoofj.at J 2 a. CTTIOJ/. (5. 8.)
[IIiirC<ric 0"-), grwe to drink, m<r, etV.] Ionic and poetic. See
irfvw. (6.)
Ilnrpdo-KW (irepa-, Trpa-), sell, [ep. TrepdVw, ^repatra,] ireirpaKa, ireirpd/j.ai
[Horn, irewepriufvos] , irpa.6t)v [Ion. -Tj/iot, -rjflrji/] ; f Ut. pf .
The Attic uses etTroScSo-o/iat and oTreS^j/ in fut. and aor. (6.)
Iltirrw (TCT-, TTT-O-, 659) for Trt-Trer-o), /aW, f. irco-ovpai [Ion. Treire
p. ireTTTw/ca, 2 p. part. 7TirTt6s [ep. irem-ricas, or -ecjs] ; 2 a.
[Dor. tirerov, reg.].
[IICTVT|(u (wtr-j/a-), spread, pres. and impf. act. and mid. 609. Epic
and lyric. See ireTavvvjii. ] (III.)
ntrvw, poetic for irtirrw.
f n\dtoj (7rAa77-), cawse ^o wander, *Tr\aya. Pass, and mid. irXd^o^ai,
wander, Tr\dyo/j.ai, will wander, tTrKayx^i wandered.] Ionic and
poetic. (4.)
TIXdo-<rw (see 582 ; 587), form, [irAcurw Ion.], 67rA.o<ra,
tir\d(rd'ni' J ^TrAao-ctjiir?!/. (4. )
JlXlica, .pZaft, &nft, CA^{w,] 7rA6|a, [ircirAcxa or ireV\oxa Ion.],
p.a.1, Tr\ex6'nv, TrAex^tro^ot ; 2 a. p. eVAa/CTji/ ; a. m. fir\^dpt]v
y-, TrAe/:-, irAu-), ai7, TrAejJo-o^toi or irAev<rou/nai,
Tr\VKa, TTeiT\vffpai, fa\efo(hiv (later). 574, 641. [Ion. and poet,
, ir\(a(ro/j.at, 7rAara, iteirXoiKa, ep. 2 aor. 67rAo>v.] (2.)
or irX^TTW (TrArjy-, 7rAo7-, 31), Strike, 7rA^, irATj|o, irfir\riy-
pai, TT\"fiX G 'n t ' (rare) ; 2 p. ireir\T\ya ; 2 a. .p. eVA^i/, in comp.
-ev\dyriv (713) ; 2 f. pass. ir\i}y}\ffop.a.i and -7rAo7^<ro^uot ; fut. pf.
vfjr\^op.a.i ; [ep. 2 a. irev\riyov (or eTreTrA-), irfir\-ny6ptiv ; Ion. a. m.
7rAr;|c/xrj'.] (2. 4.)
n\vva> (TTAVJ/-), lOOsA, TrAui/w, tTrAufa, TTfirXv/j-ai, firX^v ; [fut. m. (as
pass.) K-7rAwoG/iot, a. ^TrAvvcfyiTji'.] 647. (4.)
IIXww, Ionic and poetic : see -rrXew.
IIvw (Trrev-, irj/6/r-, irru-), breathe, blow, Trv^aopai and
eTTj/eiKra, TTfirvevKa, [epic ireVvu/xat, 6e Wtt'se, pt. -Tren-i/i/^efo
plpf . -jrfirvvffo ; late eVj/cuo-^j', Horn. o.p-irvvvQ-nv.'] For epic
etc., see ava-irv&* and a)i-irw. See irivvo-Ku. (2.)
^-, TT^-), choke, irvifa [later 7rvf|o/iat, Dor. im{ot//u] $
ll-a, Tffirvly/j.ai, i-jrviyiiv, irviyfjffofjiai,.
, desire, voO-fiffw, 7roflV}<ro/i(u, ^ir6dtjffa; and
639 C6X
398 APPENDIX. [1692
labor, TTOI/VW etc., regular. [Ionic iroveyw and Mvca*
(Hippoc.).] 639 (6).
(irop-, irpo-), give, allot, stem whence 2 a. tiropov (poet.), p. p. 7r?7rpw-
fjuu, chiefly impers., Tarpon- at, it is fated (with ircirpw^vrj, Fate}.
See ire-rrapeiv. Compare juCpopcu. Poetic except in perf. part.
Ilpcurcrio or irpaTTW (717)017-), do, 7rpaw, 7rpaa, Tr&rpaxa, Tr
tirpdx6r]V, 7rpdx^^(ro/iat , fut. pf. 7re7rpao/iai ; 2 p. irtirpa
fared (well or i7Z) ; mid. f. 7rpaojuai, a. ^rpalcC/M/p. [Ionic
(7TP777-), 7rp^w, eirprfa, irtirpijxa, ir^Trpr)yfj.ai
irpij^o/iat, tirpridfj.irjv.'] (4.)
(irpia-), &%?/, stem, with only 2 aor. ^TrptcC/x^i', inflected throughout in
506 ; see synopsis hi 504.
Ilptci), saw?, espied, 7r^7rpt<r/*ai, tirpiffdtiv. 640.
IIpot<r<roftai (Trpot/c-), 6egr, once in Archil, (compare irpoiKa, gratis) ;
fut. only in /cara-7rpo^oyu,at (Ar.) [Ion. /cara-7rpoif|o/*at]. (4.)
(Trrap-), sneeze; [f. Trrapu) ;] 2 aor. firrapov, [e7rrap6/AT7J'],
') TTTapels. (II.)
(TTTTJK-, TrraK-), COWer, eirr^a, ZirT-nw From stem TTTCIKS,
poet. 2 a. (eTrTafcov) KaTa.TTTa.iuav. [From stem TTTCI-, ep. 2 a.
, dual ; 2 pf. pt. TreTm^s.] Poetic also irr(&<r<rw. (4.2.)
, pound, [e7rri<ra], 7TTt(r/tai, late ^TrTlffdrjv. (4.)
(7TTU7-), /OZ(Z, TTTU^W, 7TTua, TTTVyfJI,
(4.)
Hrvco, sp^Y, [7rru(rw, Trrucro/xat, tirrv<r6'r)v, Hippoc.], a.
IIvv0dvo(iai (7TV0-), ftear, enquire, fut. Trevo-0/j.at [Dor. Treuo-oO/iat], pf.
; 2 a. fTrveb^v [w. Horn. opt. TreTrutfoiTo]. (5.) Poetic
(Trev0-, irv0-). (2.)
P.
'PaCvw (pa-, pav-*), sprinkle, pavQ, Zppava, (tppdvdyv) pavfals. [From
Stem pa- (cf. /Sa^w), ep. aor. epa<r<ra, pf. p. (eppacr/xai) eppai/rai
Aeschyl., ep. ^ppdSarat, plpf. ^ppdSaro, 777, 3.] See 610. Ionic
and poetic. (5. 4.)
['Pafco, sZn'&e, pa^crw, eppatcra,] tppaiffdyv ; [fut. m. (as pass.) pa(ro/wii.]
Poetic, chiefly epic.
'Pairrw (pa0-), stitch, pd^w, ^ppa^a, %ppa/j./j.ai ; 2 a. p. tppdcpyj' ; a. m.
tppcul/dwv. (3.)
'Pdo-o-w (pay-'), = dpd<r<rw, ^roio (foWW, pd^w, ep/>aa, tppdx6i)v. See
dpacrcrctf. (4.)
- for f cp7-, 649), do, p^w, fpc^a ; [Ion. a. p. to^,
(4.)
-, pu-),/ow?, pevtrofjiai, eppevra (rare in Attic), (c-)
2 a. p. typv-rjv, pv^ffofjui. 574. (2.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 399
(pV), Stem of efprjKa, etprjfMi, ^pp^e-rjv (tppt6viv),
See ctirov.
'Prfj-yvvju (fpTX-, pa7-) break; pjfr, epprfa, [epp777/*eu rare,
rare ;] 2 a. p. tppdyyv ; pay/i<rofj.a<. ; 2 p. eppoyya, be broken (689) ;
?pp7?d/A77f. (2. II.)
(pi7-)> shudder, [ep. f. p^o-w,] a. tpptyij<ra t [2 p. ^170, (as
pres.)] Poetic, chiefly epic. 655.
Tl-yow, shiver, ply dew, tppiyuaa ; pres. subj. /fryy for p"t7ot, opt. ply^v,
inf. plyuv and /^youi/ : see 497.
'Ptirrw (pt0-, pt0-), throw, ptyw, fppfya (poet, fpl^a), %ppl<pa, eppt/iyucu,
eppi<t>dT)v, pr0^<ro/*at ; 2 a. p. tppL^v. Pres. also piirr&> (655). (3.)
*Pvo|iai [epic also pvop.ai], defend, pwro/Aat, tppvff&wv. [Epic ju-forms :
inf. pvffdai for pueo-0cu ; impf. 3 pers. eppuro and pi. ^6aro.] Chiefly
poetic. See Ipvw.
'Puirdw, befoul, [epic pvirow ; Ion. pf. pt. pepvirwp.tvos].
iw-), strengthen, eppwcra, eppw/xai (imper. fypuffo, farewell),
(II.)
S.
(<rav~*), fawn on, aor. co-r/m [Dor. e<rava]. Poetic. 595. (4.)
(o-ap-), sweep, aor. (co^pa) pt. o-ijpas ; 2 p. fft<rr}pa, grin, esp. in
part, ffea-rjpds [Dor. o-e<rap(6s.] (4.)
2a\ma> ((ra\7rt77-) , sound a trumpet, aor. ^<rd\7rt7^a. (4.)
[2aow, save, pres. rare and poet., o-ac&rw, cra^o-o/iai, ^o-daxra, taa.&Qi)v\
2 aor. 3 sing. <rdw (for &(<), imperat. o-dw, as if from Aeol. <rciw/xt.
For epic crdys, o-dy, see <rw^a>. Epic.]
SaTTw (<ra7-),pacA:, Zoa(?, [Ion. o-do-trw, aor. <raa,] p. p. <rt<rayfji.ai. (4.)
2pevvvfu (cr/3e-), extinguish, fffifow, ea-jSeaa, ea/S^Ka, [e(r/3(r)Ltai,] ^<7j3^-
0-6*771' ; 2 a. <r/3?7i> (803, 1), ioew owi, w. inf. <rpi)vai, [pt. airo-a-fieis
Hippoc.] ; f. m. ff^ffo/jiai. (H.)
Sepw, revere, aor. p. lai<t>Qi\v, w. part. o-e00efc, awe-struck.
2eiw, shake, <re/<rw, %ffi<ra, o-^crei/ca, o-^cret<r/iai, foelffOyv (640) ; a. m.
a.
(Soph.) or t<rv6r]v; 2 a. m. taabwv (with ^<TVTO, <rJro,
The Attic poets have [o-eurcu], o-ouj/rai, o-oO<r^e (ind. and imper.),
<roO, ffofoQw. 674. Poetic. (2.)
2t|[j.aivw (<r?;/iai'-), show, <nt]/j.avQ, ^a-^fj.r)va (sometimes ^o-jj/taya), <re<r^-
foT}fjuiv0riv, ff-rip.a.vd'fjffOfJLai ; mid. ff-rjfJLavovfjuu, to-rj/J.'rii'dfjnjv. (4.)
-, <rair-), ro, o-^t^w, 2 p. fffo-rjira (as pres.) ; fffowiuu
(Aristot.), 2 a. p. tffdiriiv, f. (rcwnJcro/Acu. (2.)
Stvojxai (a-tj'-), injure, [aor. tvlvdwv Ion.]. 597. (4.)
iltcdirra) (a-Ka^-), diy, end^u, e<r/cai^a, eV/ca^a, IcrKa/i^uai, tffKd<j>i}v. (3.)
400 APPENDIX. [1692
-), scatter, f. <7/ce5w [<r/ce5ci<rw,] &rK^a(ra, Itrjcldacr/ticu
W. part. ^ffKedaff/Ji^vos, <rKe5da0r)V ) ^ffKedaffd/Jirjv. (XI.)
(0-/ceX-, <r:Xe-), dry wp, [Horn. a. etr/c^Xa, Ion. pf. etrxX^Ka] ; 2
a. (fffKXrjv) diro-<rK\7)vcu (799), Ar. (4.)
2icnTO|X(u ((TKeTr-), w'ew, aKtyopai, tffKe\f/d/ji.T)v, effKefj.fj.at, fut. pf. &7K^-
\f/o/j.ai, [t<rKt<t>6-qv, Ion.]. For pres. and impf. the better Attic
writers use ffKoirw, <TK07roC/u, etc. (see O-KOIT&O). (3.)
, prop, ffK^w, ecr/c^a, eo-K^yucu, tcK^fyQ-qv ; (TKT^cytai,
v. (3.)
, mid. (m'Si/a^at, scatter, also /ciSi/rj/xi : chiefly poetic
for (TKeSdvvvjii. (III. )
, ??ieto, in better Attic writers only pres. and impf. act. and rnid.
For the Other tenses <r/ce'i//0yuai, ea/cei^ctyUTji/, and eV/ceyUjUou of <TKfirTOp.a.i
are used. See orKeirTOfiai.
2KWTTTO) (o-KWTT-), jeCr, (TKCO^O/Hai, ^(TKCO^a, l<JK&$Ql\V. (3.)
SH&M,. swear, with T; for o in contracted forms (496), 0707 for <r/i<,
etc.; [a. m. eV/irjo-^j' Hdt.]. [Ion. (r/tew and (r/i^x w ]> aor - P- 8t -
(T^urjx 06 ^ (Aristoph.).
2irdo), draw, ffirdaca (o), (T7ra<ra, ilariraKa, fffiraff/J-ai, IffTrdaQyv, ffvaffB'fjffO'
p.a.1 ; ffirdao/jLai, o"ira<rd(jir)v. 639 J 640.
SircCpo) (o-Trep-), SOIO, o-TTCpw, effTTfipct, (T7rop/tat J 2 a. p. tcrirdptiv. (4.)
Hire'vSco, powr libation, <rirtt<TOi> (for (TTrevS-ercD, 79), fffireura, 6<r7reir/ioj,
(see 490, 3) ; o-TreiVo^at, eo-Treio-ci/irji/.
((rTcry-), drop, [<TTci|aj,] ffTa|a, [e<TTa7^at, i<rrdx9"nv.~\ (4.)
(o-Tet)9-, <rrtj8-), Zread, etrret^a, (e-) i<rrl0iituu (642, 2 ; 658, 2).
Poetic. (2.)
X')* fl' * [iWeifa, 2 a. eo-TiX'"'.] Poetic and
Ionic. (2.)
(<rreA-), S6W(?, (TTeXw [(rreAew], e<7retAo, fffra\Ka, f(TTa\/j.ai ;
2 a. p. tffTd\Tiv ; ffra^ffo/jLai ; a. m. i<rrfi\dfjLi\v. 645. (4.)
groan, arevdfr, ^flrreVala. (4.)
w, fffTfpa ; 2 pf. e<rropya (643).
), deprive, a-rep-fivco, fffTfptJffa [epic ^<TTpe(ra], ^aW/jTj/fa, eVreprj/tot,
i/, <yTpf]di]ffOfjia.i ; 2 aor. p. (^oWprji/) part. (TTcpeis, 2 fut.
(pass, or mid.) <TT ^00^.0.1. Also pres. crrepCo-Kw. (6.) Pres.
pojxai, 6e I'TI want.
[(ST6V|i.(u), pledge one's seZ/; 3 pers. pres. ffrevrat, impf.
Poetic, chiefly epic.] (I.)
STW (a-Ti7-), pncA, O-T^W, [^<rrt|a Hdt.], formal. (4.)
Sropvvjii ((TTop-), (c-) -TO|)ii
(H,)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 401
, turn, ffTpe^/<a, fVTpetya, f(rTpa/j.fji.ai, fffrpe<p9rjv (rare in prose,
[Ion. eVTpa<0rjj/] ; 2 pf. e<TTpo<pa (late) ; 2 a. p. tffrpd<priv, f. ffrpa^rj
J mid. <rrpe'J/o/4ai, earpf^d/j-rfv. 646.
, same as <rr<Spvv|u; trrpdxrw, eo-rpoxra, e<rT/w/tat,
(IL)
-, 654), dread, hate, fut. arvy^oofiat (as pass.), a. oru
[ep. ea"|a, made terrible, Ion. pf. eVrlfyrjKa], a. p. eVri^flrjf j
[ep. 2 a. e<rru7oi'.] Ionic and poetic.
(<rru<peA.t7-), (ZosAi aor. eVrv^eAtlo. Ionic, chiefly epic.] (4.)
? draw, aor. 6<rupo, tavpa.^. (4.)
S<j>di; (<r0a7-), s^ay, Att. prose gen. <T<J>&TT; <r^>a|aj, ?<r^o^a, ^07-
ji*ai, [ifftya-x.Q'nv (rare)] ; 2 aor. p. tff<pdyr]v, fut. 0-^07^0-0/401; aor. mid.
(ffcpaj-dfjnjv. (4.)
So>d\\ (<r</>aA.-) **(P deceive, ff<pa\w, eff^Xa, eo-0a\juat J 2 a. p. '
Arji/, f. p. <r<pa\-f)(ro/ji.ai J fut. in. <r<pa\ovfjLai (rare). (4.)
(see 687), o-xcfo-w, ?(rxao-a, I(rxa<rc{/i7?i' ; [Ion. ^(rx^o"^".] From
pres. (rxaco, imp. ro-xwi' (Ar.). (4.)
S, later o-w^w, epic usually crww (<ro)-, 0-^8-), sar?e, [ep. pr. subj.
crdys (ffdtfs, a6ys'), a6ri ((ray, ff6(p), ffdcaori] ; <rci(rw, %ffw<ra, oreVco/ca,
(reffwfjiai Or aeaaxTfjiai, la&Qt\v, ffwd-fjffOfiai ; tf^o-o/tai, tyuffa.^. Sea
o-aow. (4.)
T.
(TO.-), ?aA:e, stem with Horn, imperat. T^.
[(ra-y-), set>e, stem with Horn. 2 a. pt. rera?^.] Cf. Lat. tango.
[Tavvw, stretch, ravixra) (u), Tc{j/i;(ra, reTaVu0>u, travvo Qt\v ; aor. m,
lTa.vvyad.Mv. Pres. pass. ((Ut-form) raVi/rci. Epic form of TCVW.]
Tapdo*o*a> (rapax-) disturb, rapd^ca, erdpaj-a, rerdpa-ynat, ^TapdxSr]v ;
f. m. rapd^o/jiai ; [ep. 2 p. (reV/j^x ) rtrprfx^s, disturbed; pip. re-
^Mx.] (4.)
Tacnrw (ra7-), arrange, TC|O>, eraja, T/TOX, rerayfj-ai, frdx^Vi TaxO'fl'
o-o/uat; Tdo/j.ai, era^d/jLrjv J 2 a. p. lr&yi\v\ f Ut. pf . rera^o/idt. (4.)
(rao>-), stem with 2 aor. fra^oj' : see (etjir-).
TcCva> (rev), Stretch, Ti>>, itreiva, reroKa, Terafiat, frddrjv,
Tfvovna.1, eretj'a/tTjj'. 645 ; 647. See ravvu and riraCvoi. (4.)
TKfxapO|iat (rer^ap.) judge, infer, f. TCK/j.apovfj.at, a.
Act. TKfxapw, rare and poetic, a. ^rtK^-npa. (4.)
TeX^w, finish, (TeAco-w) reAeD, trcXeffa, rercAe/co, TeTe'Aeoyiai,
fut. m. (rcAlo/icu) reAoG/xai, a. m. ereAeo-a/xTji/. 639 J 640.
Te'XXw (rfA-), cawse o rise, me, aor. ?T6Aa ; [plpf. p. eVfToAro.] In
COmpOS. ^-reraAjuat, tv-eTei\dw 645. (4.)
[(T6|*-) ^wd, stem with Horn, redupl. 2 a. reV/tov or IT^T^OV (534).]
402 APPENDIX. [1692
[Ion. and Dor. rajivw, Horn, once rc/i], CM, f.
re/xa), rer/xrj/ca, reV/iTj/xat, T/J.-r)&r]v, T/iTj^cro/xat ; 2 a. ere/xof,
[poet, and Ion. era/toc, eTa/t^Tj*/] ; flit. ni. re/j-ovfjiai j fut. pf.
See T|jdj-y w ' ( 5
amuse, reptyca, fTfptya, ^Tep00Tji> [ep. traptyd-riv, 2 a. p. erdpir^v
(with SUbj. TpOTretco), 2 a. m. (T)eTap?rJ/i7jj/], (534) ; fut. m. re/j-
(poet.), [a. ereptyawv epic.] 646.
t, become dry, 2 a. p. ^T^OI\V. Chiefly epic. Fut. act. re'/xrw
inTheoc.]
TTa-y&v, having seized: see stem (ra-y-)-
[TcTh||uu, Horn. perf. aw troubled, in dual rtri-naeov and part. TTI-
r)fjLi>os ; also reriTjcis, troubled. ]
[Tr|v or ereTjiov (Horn.), found, for re-rcn-ov (534).] See (T6ji-)-
Terpaivw (rerpav, rpa-), 6ore, late pres. rirpaivw and Tirpdoa ; [Ion.
fut. rerpovecj, aor. treT/JTjvo], ^TTpr)i>dju.r)v (673). From Stem (rpo-),
aor. ^T^TJO-O, pf. p. reV^/iai. 610. (5. 4.)
Tcvx w (T*"X- TWX-), prepare, make, reu^w, reua, [ep. rereux^s as
pass.,] TfTvypai [ep. TereuxciTai, ^TeTeuxaTo] , [^TI/X^' / Horn., erev-
X^TJI' Hippoc., f. pf. TeT6u|o/iai Horn.]; f. m. Teuo/icu, [ep. a. eVcy-
IOJUTJV, 2 a. (TVK-) TeTu/cer^, TeTi/K^/xrjj/.] Poetic. (2.)
TTJKW (TT//C-), me?, [Dor. ra/cw], TT(J^, errj|a, ^TTJX^" (rare) ; 2 a. p.
Tdicr)v; 2 p. TeVr?a, aw melted. (2.)
T0T]|i.i (^e-), J)M(; see synopsis and inflection in 504, 506, and 509. (I.)
TIKTW (re-), for Tt-reK-w (652, 1 a), 6egre, fen'/i^r /or<^,
also Te|o), [rarely re/cou/xcu], *Tex Qi nv (rare) ; 2 p. reVo/co; 2 a.
TiXXw (TJA-), pZwcA;, T*AW, I'nAa, rental, eri\eiiv. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
Tiva> (rt-), Hom. Tt/w, pay, rf(rw, lrt<ra, reriKa, rTt(T/j.ai, tv(aQt}v,
Mid. TivofMt [ep. rfw/iat], riffofiai, erlffd^v. The futures, aorists,
and perfects are .more correctly written re/o-w, eretcra, etc., but
these forms seldom appear in our editions. See rCw. (5.)
[TireUvw (TITO?-), stretch, aor. (^rtrajva) rtr-rjvas. Epic for reti/w.] (4.)
[Tirpaw, Sore, late present.] See rcrpaCvw.
Tirpw<TKW (T/JO-), WOUnd, rpdxTfa, frpoxra, Terpw/tot, frp<&6r)v, rp<i>d-f)ffOfj.aii
[fut. m. Tpfoonai Horn.] [Rarely epic T/OWW.] (6.)
Tw, honor, [Horn. fut. rfoca, aor. ITIO-O, p. p. rert/iat.] After Homer
chiefly in pres. and impf. Attic rta-w, Irto-a, etc., belong to rivu
(except irpo-riffas, S. An. 22). See rCvw.
(r\a-, sync, for raAa-), endure, r \-fjffofjiai, rerAT/Ko, 2 aor. crAT?? (see
799). [Epic /u-forms of 2 pf. re'rAc^ei/, TfT\alr)v, TT\a6t, TCTAo-
and rer\dfj.V, TerArj(>s (804). From (roAa-), Horn. aor.
Poetic.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 403
[T(jLTJ-y (17*777-, -77*017-), cut, poet, for re/ivw; T^ICO (rare),
2 a. T/j.ayov, T/udyr)v (j/Jidyev for ^TjUc&yTjtraf).] (2.)
Topeo) (r op-}, pierce, [pres. only in ep. ai/Ti-ropeCj/Ta]; [ep. fut. rostra],
TfToprjffca (Ar.), [ep. a. eroprjcrci, 2 a. eropoi'.] 655.
Tpeirw [Ion. rpciTro;], wn, rpfya), expend, rerpo<pa sometimes Tfrpa<pa,
Tfrpaju.fJ.ai, eTpf<f)Or)v [Ion. crpa<p#7ji'] ; f . m. rpe\l/o/j.ai, a. m. e'rpevJ/ayUTji' ;
2 a. [erpairov epic and lyric], trpdmiv, frpa.Tr6p.-nv. This verb has all
the six aorists (714). 643 ; 646.
Tp<j>co (rpf<p- for 6pe<f>; 95, 5), nourish, dptyw, fdpetya, TTpO(paj T^Bpap.-
fjiai W. inf. Tedpd<p0aii e6p(pOr)v W. inf. 0pe(p6r}i>ai (rare) ; 2 a. p. erpo-
^rjv; [ep. 2 a. erpatpov as pass.]; f. m. tfpetyo/xcu, a. m. tdpttydwv.
643; 646.
Tpe'xw (Tpex- for fyex-, ^^ ^ 5 5p a A*') **wn, f. Spa/j.ov/j.ai (^-Qp4^op.ai only
in comedy), !fy>ea (rare), Se5pd/j.r]Ka, (e-) 5eSpdfjt,-n/j.ai ; [2 p. Se'Spo/ia
(poet.)], 2 a. cSpafjLov. (8.)
Tpc'w (tremble}, aor. Irpeaa. Chiefly poetic.
Tpi(3a> (jpl&-, rptQ-'), rub, rptyta, erpi^a, rerpupa, TTpi/j.fj.ai (487 ; 489),
iTpt<pd-nv ; 2 a. p. fTpi/3-r]^ 2 fut. p. T/M^O-O/XCU ; fut. pf.
f . m. rptyo/jLai, a. m. ^rpi^a/irji'.
Tpt^w (rpiy-}, squeak, 2 p. r4rpiya. as present [w. ep. part. T
Ionic and poetic. (4.)
Tpvx> exhaust, fut. [ep. rpu|o>] rpvx&av (T/OUXO-, 659), a.
p. part. TeTpuxctf/ieVos, [a. p. Tpvxd>Qi)v Ion.].
Tpu>-yo>, (rpo7-, 673), gnaw, Tpuj-o/jiai [T/)0)|a,] r4rp<ayp.o.i' t 2 a.
70^. (2.)
U X~) ^ happen, revo/j.ai, (-) [ep. Twxw a ] pf-
2 pf. reVeir^a ; 2 a. TV%OV. (5. 2.)
TV-TTTO) (TUTT-), Strike, (-) Tvirr-fjo-ca, eTvirTri<ra (Aristot.), 2 a. p. eVuTrrji/,
fut. PC TviTT^aop.a.1 or Tvir-fio-0/j.ou. [Ionic and lyric a. trw^a, p.p.
Tfrvfji/natj 2 a. tTvirov ; a.Tro-Ti>\l/ci>vTai (Hdt.).] 658, 3. (3.)
Tv<j>w (ri7^>- or TM^)-, for ^-), raise smoke, smoke, T46vp.p.ai, 2 a. p.
2 f. p. rvtyfooiJicH (Men.). 95, 5.
Y.
t, Ion. and poet. far<rx<>|Mu (strengthened from
promise, U7ro<r^^<rofiat, vTTfffx r lf J - at J 2 a. m. vTrtff\6p.Yiv. See t<rx<* and
? X . (5.)
'Y<|>a(vci> (u^ai/-), weave, ixpavu, 8<pv)va 9 fyaa-nat (648), iHpdvOrtv, aor. m,
v<prii'dfjLTr)v. (4.)
i Y, mm, *(ra>, Sera, wff/*at, u<r^i/. [Hdt. tcro^uat OS pass.]
(pafv-), appear, shine, aor. pass, ftpadvfrn* (ao- tor a-),
pearcd. See ^a(vw. (4.)
404 APPENDIX. [1692
$a(vci> (<aj/-), show, f. Qavw [Qaveto], a. etprfva, irecpayKa, ire<pafffj.ai (648),
f(pdv6r]v (rare in prose) : 2 a. p. tydv-rjv, 2 f . (pavfjffofjLai ; 2 p. w4<fn}va ;
f. m. <pavovp.ai, a. m. e<pr)i>d/j.-r)i> (rare and poet.), showed, but dTr-
f<j>T)vanf)v, declared; [ep. iter. 2 aor. (paver Ke, appeared.] For full
synopsis, see 478 ; for inflection of certain tenses, see 482. From
stem 0a- (cf. jStttVw, 610), [Horn. impf. <pdt, appeared, f. pf. Tre^rj-
creTcu, iw7Z appear.] For $adv6viv, see ^aeCvw. (4.)
4>curKw (^>a-) say, only pres. and impf. See <|>TIJI. (6.)
4>i6o[j.cu (<ptiS-, 4>i5-), spare, <pei<ro/j.ai, e^eurcijuTji', [Horn. 2 a. m. 7re<i-
S^/iiji', f. 7re0i5Tj(To/icu.] (2.)
(<}>v-, <}>a-), &i7Z, stems whence [Horn. irf^ap.a.1, iretyfoo/jiai; 2 a.
redupl. iretyvov or ttrftpvov (for Tre-<pev-ov) W. part. Ka.Ta-Tr4(pv(av
(or -wi/).]
tveyic- for ^/-ereK-), 6ear, f. ofera), a. ^^7x0, 2 p.
a. p. ^vfx^v ; f. p. eVex^Vo/uo" an( i olffdfoofjLat \
2 a. vcy/coi/ ; f. m. ofcro^cu (sometimes as pass.) ; a. m. T)i>
2 a. m. imper. eveyKov (So.). 671. [Ion. ^*/ei:a and -a.fj.yv,
evflvfiy/Liai, f/^e/x^r/j' ; Hdt. aor. inf. ov-o?(rat (or av-qv
imper. olo-e for oTo-oi/ (777, 8), pres. imper. <j>e/>Te for ^eperc.] (8.)
ee, <eufo/iai and ^euloC^uai (666), 2 p. irffyevyi'
(642), 2 a. tyvyov, [Horn. p. part, iretyvynevos and Tre^v^rcs.] (2.)
say, <f>-f)o-(0, e(j)Ti<ra; p. p. imper. -s^A.aQu> (Tre^aa/teVos be
longs to </>cuW). Mid. [Dor. fut. ^ao-o/xaj]. For the full inflection,
see 812 and 813. (I.)
$0dvo> (<0a-), anticipate, ^^o-o/xat (or </>0a<ra>), %<j>6a(ra ; 2 a. act
e</>0i7i/ (like eo-TTji/), [ep. 2 a. m. <?>0a/*ei/os.] (5.)
<&6c(pa> (00ep-), corrupt, f. <t>Qfpw [Ion. <1>0fpu, ep. <^>0/o(ra>], a. fyQeipa,
p. f(f>0apKa, (p6aptJ.ai ; 2 a. p. <pQdpriv, 2 f. p. <f>6apr)(ro/jiai ; 2 p. 5t-
00opa ; f. m. $6epovnai. 643 ; 645. (4.)
4>0ivw [epic also <f>0ta], ^as^e, (?ecay, 00tVo>, e<0i(ra, %<t>dina.i, [ep. a. p.
tfydie-nv ; fut. m. <peiffOfiai ;] 2 a. m. e<peifj.-nv, perished, [subj. (p0i(a/u.ai,
opt. <t)6ifji.-nv for <pei-i-n-rn> (734) imper. 3 sing. ^eiffOw, inf. </>0iV0ai],
part, (peifievos. [Epic ^^tvw, ^0t<r&>, 00to-a.] Chiefly poetic. Pres-
ent generally intransitive ; future and aorist active transitive. (5.)
4>i\w (4\-), Zo0e, <t>i\if<r(a, etc. r regular. [Ep. a. m. t<pi\d/jLriv, inf.
pres. 0iA.7?' j u6j'ai (784, 5). 655.]
l\da>, bruise, [fut. <Acura> (Dor. 0Ao(r<rw), aor. e^Aao-a, e^Aotr/io*, e>Aa-
<r0T?v.] See 0\dw.
4>pd-yvvp.i (^07-), /ewce, mid. 4>pd-yvujiai ; only in pres. and impf.
See <|>pdo-o-w. (II.)
(ppdcro), etypaffa., Trf<ppa.Ka, 7Tf</)pa(r/ioi [ep. part. TrecppaS-
(as mid.) ; [^pao-o^uot epic], e<J>pcurd/j.-nv (chiefly
epic). [Ep. 2 a. ircfpatiov or tirtypaSov. ] (4.)
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 405
, fence, 4'<pa|ct, TT<ppayfjLai, typdxQ'n 1 ' j f(f>pa^dfj.if]v. See
(4.)
or <j>ptTT (0plK-), shudder, e</>pia, irf<pplKa. (4.)
a) (<ppvy-*), roast, <ppvca, (f>pva, irfypvyfuti, [t<pptyr)v~].
v\d<r<r<o (01/Aa/c-), guard, <pv\dt-oo, e<pv\aa, ire^uAaxa? ire<pv\ayfj.ai,
tyvKaxQilv ', 4>uAa|(tyicu, e<J>vAa|a/x77i/. (4.)
$vpa>, mfo, [e^upo-o,] 7T<vp/u, [^v/oflrji'] ; [f. pf. ire<v/0(r<tyicu Pind.].
^vpdio, mice, is regular, <pvpdff<a, etc.
-), with u in Homer and rarely in Attic, produce, (pvcrca, %<f>v(ra,
ire<pvita, be (by nature), [with 2 pf. jut-forms, ep. Tre^udo-i, fj.-jre<t>vr),
irf<pv6s ; plpf. fTTftyvKov (777, 4)] ; 2 a. e0u>, 6e, 6e 6orw (799) ;
2 a. p. f(pvijv (subj. ^uw) ; fut. m.
Xdjw (xoS-), /orce 6ac&, yieZd?, (pres. only in ava-xdC<S) , [f.
a. -exao-o-a (Find.), a. m. ^x< r A t? ? 1 ' 5 from stem K S - (different from
stem of /crfSw), 2 a. m. /ce/caS^ur?!/ ; f. pf. e:a8rfo-a>, ioz7/ deprive (705),
2 a. KfKofiov, deprived.'] Poetic, chiefly epic; except &i>axd(ovTs
and Stoxacroo-^at in Xenophon. (4. )
Xaipco (x/>-) rejoice, (e-) xupil ( 65 ^, 3), /cex^/"75 Kexdpr)/j.ai and
Kxap/j.ai, 2 a. p. exdprjv, [epic a. m. xrfp aT i 2 a. m. Kex a P^M-'n v 5 2 p.
pt.' Kfxapt](as ', fut. pf. /cexap77<ra>, /cexa/ojjVo/icu (705).] (4.)
XaXdu, loosen, [xoAao-w Ion.,] ^x Aa o"a [-! Pind.], tya&faQiiv. 639 ;
640.
[XavSdvw (xo5-, xe*' 5 ')? ^^ 2 a - exaSoi/ ; fut. x*Wai (79), 2 pf.
Ke'xai/Sa (646).] Poetic (chiefly epic) and Ionic. (5.)
Xdo-Kw, later xo-ivw (xo-, x oi/ -) S'^pe, f. xa^o^at, 2 p. K^VO. as pres.
(644), 2 a. exovov. Ionic and poetic. (6. 4.)
xS-), fut. x 6 ^ ^" 4 (rarely x^o/toi), ex e<ra 5 2 P- ex 5a (643),
2 a. x ffov (rare) ; a. m. only in xcVatro, Ar. ^g. 1057 ; p. p. part.
f- 5 Xw) e P ic X^ ( 785 ? 3 ) P<>Mr, f. x> [ep.
[ep. xewo], Kfx vKa i Kfxv/J.ai, ex^d-m/, ^vtfif CTO/MU J a. m.
[ep. ^x*"^"]) E 2 a. m. e'x'W (800, 1).] 574. (2.)
-), stem of 2 pf. part. Kex^aSus, swelling (Pind.), w. ace. pi.
as, and inf. /cex^.^Seti'.]
heap up, x^ffWi x aj<ra Kfx aj/ca > Kex ci>ff f JLal (641), ex^o'^iji',
(xpata/x-), averf, ^eZp, late in present; [Horn.
2 a. ex/oatcryuov]. 654.
Xpdofjtai, wse, xpfivo/jiai, exp^o-a/irji/, KexP^l^h fXP"n ff ^ v > [fut. pf. /f
(ro/jLai Theoc.]. For xpyrai, xp^) ff ^ al [Hdt.
see 496.
406 APPENDIX. [1692
Xpdw, give oracles, (Attic xPV s -> XPVi etc -> 496); xpV, exp-n<ra,
Hdt.], expi?<T0T?j/. Mid. consult an oracle,
For xpi?s and xpy = x/"/C 6ts and xp?/C<'> see
(impers.), probably orig. a noun meaning need (cf. xpefo), with
rt understood, there is need, (one) ought, must, subj. xpy-> pt.
eoj, inf. xpT7"<> (poet. X f"7") J imperf. xpy (prob. = xp^h ^i/) or
'A-' ir oXP T l ^ suffices, inf. aTroxpTyv, imperf. airexp'ni [Ion.
airoxpav, airexpa ;] a.woxp'n^f^ aTrexpTlffe*
(587), Ion. xp^tw* toawJ, asfc, xp^ w [Ion. xpw<"] 5 ^XPV ^
[Ion. e'x^to-o]. Xpfjs and xpf? (as if from xp^i occasionally have
the meaning of xpjfris, xpyfa- (* )
Xptw, anoint, sting, xp^ (rw ? *XP' lffa i Kexplp-o-t or Kexp*a/*ai, expi<rQr)v ;
[xpt<ro/iai Horn.], e'xpi(ra/tr;i'.
Xp<&Jw, poet, also xP o t w ( 58 7), coZor, stain, Kexp^ff^h ^xp^^- ( 4
, with r; for a in contracted forms (496), i//'f), ^TJV, C^TJ, etc. ;
generally in composition.
, deceive, tyeva-w, e^/cuo-a, tyevfffJiai, tyeva6r)i>, ^eu<r^(TO/tat ; ^etxro-
ei//ei(Tci/i77J/. 71 ; 74.
(^wX") Cool, |/v|w, ^u|o, ttyv-yiueu, e^vx^fl^ [_^x^ aro f jial Ion.] j
2 a. p. eifyx^J' or (generally later) tyvynv (stem //i/7-).
a
^-), push, impf. gen. t&Qow (537, 1) ; #o-o> [poet. w^<r
[Ion. 5<ra], eaxr/uot [Ion. dja/iai], e<t>(Tdr]v J ucr6Ji(TOfAai J f. m.
a. m. <i)ad/jnr)v [Ion. axra/iTji/]. 654.
y, imp. fcavov/uLrjv (537, 1) Or WVQV^V ; wvfitro/jLat, (t>i>7]/u.ai,
Classic writers use firpdp.^ (504-506) for later uvn<rawv.
INDEXES.
N'. B. In these Indexes the references are made to the
SECTIONS of the Grammar, except occasionally to pages 3-6 of
the Introduction. The verbs which are found in the Catalogue,
and the Irregular Nouns of 291, are generally not included in
the Greek Index, except when some special form is mentioned
in the text of the Grammar.
GEEEK INDEX.
A 1 ; open vowel 5, 6 ; pronuncia-
tion of 28 1 ; in contraction 38 ;
becomes 77 in temp, augment 515 ;
a changed to 77 at end of vowel
verb stems 635; added to verb
stems (like e) 656; changed to
77 in 2d perf . 644 ; e changed to
a in liquid stems 645, 646 ; Aeol.
and Dor. a for 7; 147 ; as suffix
832, 8491.
f\- or av- privative 875 1 ; copula-
tive 877.
a, improper diphth. 7, 10 ; by con-
traction 38 4 .
rvy a06s compared 361.
<vya[xai 794 1 ; w. gen. 1102.
/vyavaKT&> w. dat. 1159, 1160 ; w.
ei 1423 ; w. partic. 1580.
'vyairdw w. dat. 1159, 1160 ; w. el
1423 ; w. partic. 1580.
d-yy&Xw, pf. and plpf. mid. 490 6 ;
w. partic. 1588.
a-y and a-ycre w. subj. and imperat.
1345.
a-yewrros etc. w. gen. 1141 (1102).
cryr)pa>s, declension of 306.
d-yvws, adj. of one ending 343.
a-yx.1 w - g en - 1149.
a-yw, augm. of tfyayov 535 ; Aywv,
with 1565.
d<ywva 1051.
, adv. ending 860 2 .
d8iic&>, fut. mid. as pass. 1248.
dSvvard <TTIV etc. 899 2 .
dScopdraros XP T 1H- >TWV H41-
deicoav : see aicwv.
&Tds, epicene noun 158.
-d?, verbs in 861 6 , 862 ; fut. of
665 2 .
dT,8c&v, decl. of 248.
'A0^vat, -Tj0v, -TJO-I 292, 293, 296.
d0\la>, tieX^o-a 516.
d0p6os, decl. of 298 2 .
"A0ws, accus. of 199.
at, diphthong 7 ; augmented 518 ;
sometimes elided in poetry 51 ;
short in accentuation (but not in
opt.) 113.
at, Homeric for d 1381.
Afcxs, voc. of 221 1 .
al8(6s, decl. of 238, 239.
at0 or at -yap, Homeric for et0e
etc. 1507.
-afvw, denom. verbs in 861 7 , 862.
-aios (a-tos), adj. in 850, 829.
etf p 594 ; aor. 674 ; pf. and plpf.
mid. 490 8 .
-cus, -aura, -oura, in aor. partic.
(Aeol.) 783.
-ais, -awrt(v), in dat. plur. 167, 188 6
-ais in ace. plur. (Aeol.) 188 7 .
at<T0dvo|iai w. gen. 1102 ; w. partic.
1582, 1588.
aur\p6s compared 357, 362.
alarxvvopai w. partic. 1580 ; w.
infin. 1581.
-airepos, -airaros, comp. and sup.
in 352.
alWw w. two accus. 1069.
al'nos w. gen. 1140.
aCo>, aiov 516.
, 2 perf. 529, 690; w. ace.
and gen. 1103 ; plpf. 533 ; e8 or
KO.KUS O.KOVU 1241.
409
410
GREEK INDEX.
dicpodo|u 638 ; w. gen. 1102.
atcpos w. article 978.
aKcov (d^cwi/) 333 ; without &v 1571.
572, 642 2 .
1 ; redupl. 2 aor. &\a\Kov
535, 677.
dXT]0rf) S declined 813; tfXi^es, in-
deed! 314.
dX<rKojiai 659 ; 2 aor. 779.
dXiTT|pios w. gen. 1144 2 .
dXXd in apodesis 1422.
dXXdoro-co, pf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487 2 , 489 3 .
dXX^Xwv declined 404.
aXXoOi 2921.
aXXonai, 2 aor. mid. 800 2 .
aXXos, decl. of 419 ; w. art. 966.
aXXoo* 294.
aXXo TI t] ; or aXXo TI J 1604.
aXo-yos declined 306.
dXvo-Kw, formation of 617.
&Xs declined 225.
aXwirrjl, epicene noun 158; voc.210 1 .
&(xa w. dat. 1176 ; w. partic. 1572;
ctfxa u> 958.
ajidproiv, opt. 736.
ajipporos (/aop) 66.
w. gen. 1133.
jjL^, etc., Dor. for ^/AC?S, etc.
398.
d^Twp 316.
d>6s and djxds for -fi^repos for
407.
and 6.nrlxr<o 95 4 .
djjivvw 596 ; w. ace. and dat.
(Horn.) 1168 ; d/iwdflw 779.
dp,<j>C w. gen., dat., and accus. 1202.
d|i<j>ivvuiu, augment of 544 ; w.
two ace. 1069.
d|j.<(>io-(3T)T&i>, augment of 544; w.
gen. and dat. 1128, 1175.
dpxjxn-lpcoOev w. gen. 1148.
a|i<j><i> and d}i<j>6Tpos 379 ; w. art.
976.
av (epic *(?), adv. 1299-1316: see
Contents. Two uses 1299 ; with
secondary tenses of indie. 1304,
1335, 1336, 1387, 1397, 1433 ; w.
optative 1306, 1327, 1408, 1409,
1436, never w. fut. opt. 1307 ;
w. fut. indie. (Horn.) 1303; w.
subj. used as fut. (Horn.) 1305 2 ,
1356 ; w. infin. and partic. 1308,
1494. In conditions w. subj.
1299 2 , 1306, 1382, 1387, 1393 1 ,
1403 ; dropped when subj. be-
comes opt. 1497 2 . In final clauses
w. cJs, STTWS, and &<f>pa 1367.
Omitted w. subj. in protasis (in
poetry) 1396, 1406, 1437, w.
potential opt. or in apod. 1332,
1333 ; not used w. e5et, xP i n v '> e tc.
1400; repeated in long apod.
1312 ; ellipsis of verb 1313; used
only w. first of several coord,
vbs. 1314 ; never begins sentence
1315. See edv, -fjv, dv(d), andrdxa.
&v (5) for l&v (d &v) 1299 2 , 1382.
av for &vd (Horn.) 53.
av- privative : see a- privative.
av (# &v), by crasis 44, 1428 2 .
-dv for -duv in gen. plur. 188 5 .
dvd w. dat. and ace. 1203.
&va, up/ 116 2 , 1224.
ava, poet. voc. of &va,% 291.
avd-yio) w. infin. 1521; w. fori om.
891i.
dvaXio-KO) and dvaXow, augment of
516, 526 (end).
avaXKis, adj. of one ending 343.
dvapC|i.W)<rK<i> w. two accus. 1069.
dvdgios w. gen. 1135.
dvdo-o-w w. gen. 1109; w. dat.
(Horn.) 1164.
dvSdvw, augment of (Horn.) 538.
dv&Tjv 860 2 .
avev w, gen. 1220.
augment of 644 ; w. partic.
1580.
GKEEK INDEX.
411
dv^p declined 278 (see 67) ; Horn.
dat. pi. 279. dv-np 44.
dvOpwiros declined 192.
dvotyto, augment of 538 ; 2 pf.
and avtyxa- 693.
w. dat. 1175.
-avos, nouns in 840.
dvrC w. gen. 1204 ; &vff wv, where-
fore 1204.
dvTiuWonai w. gen. 1128.
dvvo-as, aor. part., hastily 1564.
dvttf, dvwrepos, dvc&Taros 363.
agios declined 299. fytos and di6o>
w. gen. 1135.
fcircus, adj. of one ending 343 ; w.
gen. 1141.
4virdTp, decl. of 316.
cvrmpos w. gen. 1141.
curicTTe'w w. dat. 1160.
virX.6os, cwrXovs declined 310 ; irreg.
coirtr. 39 1 .
6-iro w. gen. 1205 ; for tv w. dat.
1225 1 .
&Tro8'xo|iai w. gen. 1103.
airoSiScopi and diroStSopai 1246.
cWoXavw w. gen. 1097 2 .
cvTroXeiirofiai w. gen. 1117.
airoXis, decl. of 316.
diroXXvju, augm. of plpf . 533.
'Air6XXv, accus. of 217 ; voc. of
122*, 22 1 2 .
ftiroXoyfoiuu, augment 543.
diroo-Tp&i> w. two accus. 1069 ; w.
ace. and gen. 1118.
diroo-<f>dXXo|jLai w. gen. 1099.
diro<j>6v-yw w. gen. 1121.
airTa> and &irro|iai 1246.
dp (Horn, for &/>a) 53.
dpa, dpa ov, and opa JA^, interrog.
1603.
dpapio-Kw, 613; Att. redupl. 531,
615, 652.
dp-yvpeos, dp-yvpovs, declined 310 ;
irreg. contr. 39 1 ; accent 311.
, compar. of dyadbs 361.
, dpdpvia 774.
dpi-, intensive prefix 876.
-apiov, dimin. in 844.
dp<rt]v or dpprjv 327.
, at first, adv. ace. 1060.
dpx<i>, dpxopai, w. partic. 1580 ;
w. infin. 1581 ; dp^yue^os, at
first 1564.
dpco-yos 31.
-ds, -as, case-endings of ace. pi. 167.
-curi and tjo-i, locat. and dat. 296.
do-iris w. f*vpia 383 1 .
do-o-a or drra 416 2 .
ao-o-a or arra 425, 426.
, declension of 275.
irrei without subject 897 5 .
ao-rv, declined 250, 253; gen. pi.
of 253.
-arai, -aro (for -vrcu, -VTO) in 3
pers. plur. 777 s , 701, (Hdt.) 787 5 .
are w. partic. 1575.
drep w. gen. 1220.
arcpos 46.
CITLJI.OS and driixd^co w. gen. 1135.
-aro (for -VTO) : see -arai.
drpairds, fern. 194.
drra and drra: see doro-a and
av, diphthong 7.
avaivw, augment of 519.
avrdp in apodosis 1422.
avrdpK^s, avrapKcs, accent 122 C ,
314.
avre'cov for avruv (Hdt.) 397.
avros personal pron. in obi. cases
389, 989 3 ; intensive adj. pron.
391, 989 1 ; position w. art. 980 ;
w. subst. pron. omitted 990 ; for
reflexive 992 ; w. ordinals (Sha-
res aOr6s) 991 ; joined w. reflex-
ive 997 ; compared (aur6raros)
364. 6 arfr6s, the same, 399,
989 2 , 980 ; in crasis 400, 44.
O.VTOV, etc., for eaurou 401.
d<|>aipew w. acc. and gen. 1118.
412
GREEK INDEX.
d<j>Tj|ti, augment of 544 ; opt. forms
810 2 .
|, gen. pi. &<t>vwv 126.
w. dat. 1160 ; w. partic.
1580 ; axOofttvv nvl clvai 1584.
i, as prepos. w. gen. 1220 ; as
conj. 1463.
-aw, denom. verbs in 861 1 ; desid-
eratives in 868; contract forms
inflected 492 ; dialectic forms
784.
dwv, gen. pi. (Horn.) 188 5 .
B, middle mute 21, labial 16, 22,
and sonant 24 ; euph. changes :
see Labials ; inserted between /i
and X or /> 66 ; changed to in
2 perf . act. 692.
-Pd, imperat. (in comp.) 755 3 .
paCvo>, formation of, 604, 610; 2
aor. of /w-form 799 ; 2 pf. of /u-
form 804 ; palveiv 7r65a 1052.
pdK X os (it*) 681.
pdXXco 593 ; perf. opt. 734.
pcuHXeia 175 C , 841 ; /Sa<riXe*a 836.
pao-iXevs, declined 263, 264 ; com-
pared 364 ; used without article,
957.
pcuriXcvu, denom. 861* ; w. gen.
1109; w. dat. (Horn.) 1164;
aor. of 1260.
pepcuorlpus 370 2 .
pXr6pos, peXraros, and ffeXrCwv,
P&TUTTOS 361 1 .
Pipdt, future of 665.
Pip& 7942.
pCpXos, fern. 194.
297.
2d aor. of /if-form, 799.
PX-, how reduplicated 624 2 .
pXdirr<i>, aor. pass. 714.
pXiTxco (/AeXiT-), by syncope 66.
PO^J 176.
pop'a s , poppas declined 186.
augment of 517 ;
in indie, (never /3ouXfl) 625 ; /3ov
XolfjLfjv dv and tpovXbwv &v 1327,
1339: see povX6nt]v; pov\et or
w. interrog. subj. 1358 ;
(p rivi <TTIV, etc. 1584.
povs, declined 268 ; formation of
269 ; Horn, forms of 271 ; com-
pounds of 872 ; stem in compos.
872.
PpeVas, declension of 236.
by syncope 66 6 .
-w- 607.
F, middle mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
and sonant 24 ; nasal (w. sound
of v} before /c, 7, x or | 17 ;
euph. changes : see Palatals.
ya^w and -yafxoviJLai 1246.
yao-T^p, declension of 274 2 .
yyi* changed to 7;* 77.
yfyova as pres. 1263.
ycXao-tCco, desiderative verb 868.
yevvdSas, adj. of one ending 345.
ye'vos, declined 228.
y^vro, grasped 800 2 : see also
y^pas declined 228.
yva> w. ace. and gen. 1106; 7eu-
ofMi w. gen. 1102.
yfj, declension of 185; omitted
after article 953.
yT]pd<rKa> 613; 2 aor. of ju-fcTm
799.
^C-yas declined 225.
yCyvojiai 636, 652 1 ; 2 perf. of /u-
form 804; copul. vb. 908; w.
gen. 1130 2 ; w. poss. dat. 1173.
yyv<&<rK 614; redupl. in pres.
636, 652 1 ; w for o 616 ; 2 aor.
of jut-form 799 ; inflect, of
803 2 .
yX-, how reduplicated 624 2 .
yXvKvs declined 320.
yv-, how reduplicated 624 2
. fern. 194.
GREEK INDEX.
413
yvwpCfX augment of 524 2 .
Ypavs, declined 268 ; formation of
269 ; Horn, forms of 271.
Ypd4>o> and ypd^opcu 1246 ; iyp&-
<j>-nv 1247; 7pd0o/icu w. cogn.
accus. 1051, 1125.
yptps, YP^vs, Horn, for ypavs 271.
\vjtv6s w. gen. 1140.
A, middle mute 21, lingual 16, 22,
and sonant 24 ; euph. changes :
see Linguals ; inserted in dvdpfc
(dvTjp) 67 ; before -areu and -arc
(in Horn.) 777 8 .
8a-, intens. prefix 876.
8a^jp, voc. 5aep 122*.
SaCopat (5a<r-), divide 602.
8a(vt>|u, pres. opt. mid. 734.
8a (5a/r-), burn 602.
8dp.ap, nom. of 210. 1
SajjLvcuo (da/A-) and Sdp-vtijit 609.
8av(t and 8aveCtofJLai 1245.
8<s, accent of gen. du. and pi. 128.
84, in 6 j*4v . . . 6 84 981-983 ; in
apodosis 1422.
-8, local ending 293 ; enclit. 14 1 4 .
SeSie'vai 767, 804.
S&oiica 685.
8t, impers. : see 84, want.
8ei8-yn.a.i, SeCSoiKa, and
redupl. of (Horn.) 522 & ;
804.
8cKW|u, synopsis 504, 505, 609;
inflection of /u-forms 506. Synt.
w. partic. 1588 ; partic.
declined 335.
Sctva, pron., declined 420 j always
w. art. 947.
8civ6v IO-TIV ct 1424.
(5eX0iv-) 210 2 , 282 2 .
w. gen. or w. gen. and ace.
1114.
/rr?) 176.
SlpKopcu 646, 649 2 ; "Aprj
1055 2 .
(-<r-) 830 2 ; heterog. 288.
... voc. of 182.
8e'xaT<u (Horn.) as perl 550.
Xopcu, 2 aor. mid. of 800 2 ; w.
ace. and dat. (Horn.) 1169.
w, bind, contraction of 495 2 .
w, want, contraction of 495 2 ;
in Hdt. 785 1 . Impers. 8et 898 ;
w. gen. and dat. (rarely ace.)
1115, 1161 ; TroXXoO Set, 6\lyov
Set 1116 ; 6\lyov for 6\lyov deiv,
almost 1116 & ; dtov (ace. abs.)
1569 ; eV6s etc. w. Sevres 382 3 ;
eSet in apod, without &v 1400.
See Sco)j.ai.
8tjXot without subject 897 8 .
8f)X6s eljxi w. partic. 1589.
Sr)X6o>, inflect, of contract forms 492 ;
synopsis of 494 ; infin. 39 5 , 761 ;
pres. partic. dij\u>v declined 340.
AT]|I^TI]P, declined 277 2 , 278 ; ac-
cent of voc. 122<*.
AT]^.o(r0VT)s, ace. of 230 ; voc. of
122 C .
-8riv or -dSTjv, adverbs in 860.
-Srjs, patronym. in 846.
Sid w. gen. and ace. 1206.
>, augm. 543.
>, augm. 543.
w. partic. 1587.
Sid<j>opos w. gen. 1117.
SiSdo-icco, formation of 617 ; w. two
accus. 1069; causative in mid.
1245.
8i8pdo-Kw 613 ; 2 aor. of /tit-form,
799, 801.
synopsis 604, 609 ; infl. of
/u-forms 506; redupl. hi pres.
661, T94 2 ; imperf. 630; cona-
tive use of 1255 ; aor. in KO.
670, 802 2 ; floCvcu 767; imper.
Sldwei, Sidoi 790.
8iKcuos, person, constr. w. infin.
1527.
414
GREEK INDEX.
, adverbial accus. 1060.
Siopvo-o-w, augm. of plpf. 533.
SIOTI, because, w. inf. (Hdt.) 1524.
SiirXdcrios etc. (as compar.) w.
gen. 1154.
8x a w. gen. 1149.
8u|/d<o, contraction of 496.
779.
w. gen. and ace. 1121 ; w.
1051.
8n.ws, accent of gen. dual and plur.
128.
8ouu, Soiot (Horn.) 377.
8oKw (5o/c-) 654 ; impers. Soicei
898 (1522 2 ) ; 25oe or dtdoKrai in
decrees etc. 1540; (cJ$) fyol doKeiv
1534*
SOKOS, fern. 194.
-Sov (-<) or -ydbv, adverbs in 860.
SouXevw and SouXow 867.
Spcurettt, desiderative verb 868.
8pd, Spd 635, 641.
8p6o-os, fern. 194.
SvvajAcu, 794 1 ; augm. of 517 ; ac-
cent, of subj. and opt. 729, 742 ;
dvvg. and tdvvu 632.
8vo declined 375; indeclinable
376 ; w. plur. noun 922.
8v<r-, inseparable prefix 875 2 ;
augm. of vbs. cpmp. with 545.
Suo-apeo-Tew, augment of 545 1 .
Sow 570, 799 : see cSiiv.
8pov declined 192.
E, open short vowel 6, 6; name
of 4 ; pronunciation of 28 1 ; in
contraction 38; as syll. augm.
511, 513; before a vowel 537;
becomes 77 in temp. augm. 515 ;
length, to 77 at end of vowel verb
stems 635 ; length, to et, when
cons, are dropped bef. a- 30, 78 3 ,
79, in aor. of liq. stems 672, in
2 a. p. subj. (Horn.) 780 3 , in 2 a.
act. subj. of /ui-forms (Horn)
788 2 ; changed to a in liq. stems
645 ; ch. to o in 2 pf. 643, also in
nouns 831 ; e added to stem, in
pres. 654, in other tenses 657,
658; dropped by syncope 65, 273;
dropped in eeo (Hdt.) and eecu
and eeo (Horn.) 785 2 ; thematic
vowel 56 1 1 , in Horn. subj. 780 1 .
i, pron. 389 ; use in Attic 987, 988.
-sat for eo-cu in verbal endings,
contr. to 77 or ei 39 3 , 565 6 , 624,
777 2 : see -eo.
edv for e^ &v 1299 2 , 1382.
iavrov declined 401 -, synt. 993.
c(3ov\6|j.T]v without &v (potential)
1402 1 ; tpov\l>Mv <*" 1339.
adv. w. gen. 1149 ; w. dat.
1176.
6pw 597 ; pf . and plpf. mid. 490 6 ;
aor. m. 677. Att. redupl. 532.
, decl. of 261.
fy declined 389, Horn, and Hdt.
393 ; generally omitted 896.
8ei etc. without do in apod. 1400.
K8vv (of 5uo>) 505, 799; synopsis
504; inflected 506; Horn. opt.
744.
- in dual of nouns in ts, is 252.
14 for ?, Horn. pron. 393 1 .
<(0ev for ol 393 1 .
0, pf. and plpf. mid. 490 3 .
ei, diphthong 7 ; genuine and spu-
rious ei 8 ; pronunc. of 28' 2 (see
Preface) ; augment of 519 ; as
augm. or redupl. (for ee) 537.
-i for -ecrcu, -eat in 2d pers. sing.,
true Attic form 624.
t, (f 1381, 1423; whether 1605, 1606,
1491 ; in wishes, O if 1508.
-id, nouns in, denoting action 836.
Nouns in em 841.
-ias, -i, -tav in aor. opt. act. 781 1 ,
etSov w. partic. 1585.
, lKa9oi(jii, etc. 779.
, decl. of 248.
GREEK INDEX.
415
(Horn.) 598.
cfpaprai, augm. of 522.
clpC 629 ; inflection of 806 ; dialec-
tic forms of 807 ; as copula 891 ;
w. pred. nom. 907 ; w. poss. or
part. gen. 1094 ; w. poss. dat.
1173 ; fffTLV 01, ffTlV OV, <TTiV rj
or oVws 1029, w. opt. without
&v 1333 ; eK(av eivai, rb vvv elrai,
Kara TOVTO elwu, 1535; accent
(enclitic) 141 3 , 144 5 ; accent of
dvj &VTOS 129.
etjii, inflection of 808 ; dial, forms
of 809 ; pres. as fut. 1257.
etc for ov 393 1 .
-eiov, nouns of place in 843 1 .
clos, Horn, for &os 1463.
etira, first aorist 671.
elirov w. or i or ws 1523 ; oJs (eTros)
d-rreiv 1534.
6l'p-y&>, etc. w. gen. 1117 ; w. infin.
or infin. w. TOV and ^ (5 forms)
1549, 1551.
ctpt|ica, augment of 522.
-is, -eoro-a, -ev, adj. in 854; decl.
329, 331 ; compar. 355.
-6ts in ace. pi. of 3d decl. (for eas)
208 3 ; late in nouns in eus 266.
ets w. accus. 1207 ; for tv w. dat.
1225 1 .
els, |iCa, Iv declined 375 ; com-
pounds of 378.
el'o-o), adv. w. gen. 1148.
6l'T6 . . . 6l'T6 1606.
-eCw, Horn. pres. in, for w 785 8 .
6ta>9a, 2 pf. 637 2 , 689.
ctws, Horn, for ^w$ 1463.
IK : see i.
^K6t06v for ticeT 1226.
iKaa-ros, 6KaT6pos, etc. W. article
976.
iKetvos 409, 411, 1004 ; t K eivo<rl 412.
Ki and Ki0ev 436.
4K6to-6 294, 436.
, neut. pi.
adv. w. gen. 1148.
!KO>V etvat 1535.
IKCOV declined 333.
\acr<ra>v 361 5 .
eXavvw, form of pres. 612 ; fut.
665 2 (see 4X6w) ; Att. redupl. 529 ;
sense 1232.
IXcufnj-poXos 872.
(Horn.), tXdxurros 361 5 .
P^ and plpf inflected 487 2 ,
4893, 4902, 533.
2XXa\ov, etc. (Horn.) for
514.
4X6, Horn. fut. of t\avvu 784 2 .
etc., w. fut. infin. or pres.
and aor. 1286.
irCs declined 225, 209 1 ; accus.
sing. 214 3 .
avrov declined 401 ; syntax of
993.
, 4fi6to, Ifjieo, 4>6V 391.
6J16WDTOV (Hdt.) 403, 993.
>v (Dor. for ^oQ 398.
fi|jLv or jxp,vai, 6|i6v or (j.vat,
Horn, infin. for elmi 807 7 .
V<Ss 406, 998.
6* nirfrirXTiju and 6jjfirirpT](jLi 795.
'p/irpo<r0ev w. gen. 1148.
-ev for -Tjffav (aor. p.) 777 9 .
e'v w. dat. 1208 ; as adv. 12221 ; w.
dat. for els w. ace. 1225 2 ; in
expr. of time 1193 ; euphon. ch.
before liquid 78 2 , but not before
p or a- 81.
t'vavrfos w. gen. 1146; w. dat. 1174,
IvScrjs w. gen. 1140.
<[v6Ka w. gen. 1220.
eVviirov and -nvtirairov 535.
, impers. 898.
, 6V06V 436, 438.
6v0a86 436.
6*v0avra, 6V06VT6V (Ion.) 439*
6V06V Kttl 6V06V 1226.
Ivt for HWTI 1224.
416
GREEK INDEX.
evict and cvirfrc 1029.
6voxos w. gen. 1140.
'vT<xv0a 436.
6VT6V06V 436.
6*vr6s w. gen. 1149.
eg or eic, form 63; K in IK un-
changed in compos. 72 ; e in ^/c
long before liquid 102 ; proclitic
137; accented 138 2 ; w. gen.
1209 ; for lv w. dat. 1225 1 .
la<|>vt]s w. partic. 1572.
^eerri, impers. 898 ; w. dat. 1161 ;
Qfjv in apod, without &v 1400.
.e'6v, ace. abs. 1569.
e|a> w. gen. 1148.
-eo for -eo-o 565 6 , 777*.
lo for <5 3931.
lot for of 393 1 .
5ioiKa (ete-) 5372, 573; plpf. 528;
/u-forms 804 ; w. dat. 1175.
-os, adj. of material in 852.
los for 8s (poss.) 407.
eirav and eVedv (tirel &v^ 1428 2 .
e'ireC and e'lreiSrfj 1428, 1505; w.
infin. in or. obi. 1524.
e'imSdv and e'lHjv 1299 2 , 1428 2 .
e'lrijpoXos w. gen. 1140.
ftrl w. gen. dat. and accus. 1210 ;
as adverb 1222 1 .
cm for ^Treo-ri 116 2 , 1224.
6-in.0u(jiea> w. gen. 1102.
ciriKapcrios w. gen. 1146.
iri\av0avo|iat w. gen. 1102.
TTL|i\TJs w. gen. 1140.
4irio-Tap.ai 794 1 ; tirlvrq. and $irt-
<TTU 632 ; accent of subj. and
opt. 729, 742; w. accus. 1104;
w. partic. 1158.
lirio-Hjuwv w. gen. 1142 ; w. accus.
1050.
liriTi}i,<ui> w. ace. and dat. 1163.
lirpict|AT]v (irpto-) 505 ; synopsis
504; inflected 506; accent of
subj. and opt. 729, 742.
Iploxru, stem ^>er- 582,
Ipi,-, intens. prefix 876.
IptSatvw 606.
w. dat. 1175, 1177.
, accus. of 214 3 .
eppwya, 2 pf. of p^vv^i 689.
, EpjjLf]s, declined 184.
176.
epx)9picuo 80S 2 .
ipvKoo, rjpvKaKOv 535.
w. two accus. 1069.
<r-, stems of 3 decl. in 227.
w. accus. 1207 : see els.
<r0w 621 ; future 667.
-<ri in dat. plur. (Horn.) 286 2 .
(Horn.) 514.
-co-o-i in dat. plur. (Horn.) 286 2 .
lo-<r (Horn.) 556 1 , 807 1 .
^o-o-cov 361 2 .
2o-T, until 1463.
-(TT6pOS, -^O-TttTOS 353, 354.
eVK w. ending n 556 1 ; accented
&TTI 144 5 ; takes v movable 57.
eo-Tiv ol (ou, 17, STTWS) 905, 1029;
<TTI.V So-ris etc. with opt. with-
out &v 1333.
l<rT(&s (for ^crratis), l<rT<ra, IO-TOS
(Ion. ^rreris) 342, 508, 773, 804.
eVxaTos w. article 978.
<rw w. gen. 1148 : see cftrw.
T40tjv for tdtdiiv 95 3 .
Tpos 429 ; w. gen. 1154 : see fa-e-
pos.
TT]<r(ai, l-rqcrCwv 126.
MQi\v for e0vdr)v 95 8 .
ev, diphthong 7.
ev contr. to e (through /:) 90 2 - 3 .
ev, augm. of verbs compounded w
545 1 ; W. TTOI^W, Trdcrxw, d/coi7a>,
etc., 1074, 1241 ; w. irpdff<rw
1075 ; w. e^w and gen. 1092.
ev, pron. for o5 393 1 .
6v8ana>v declined 313; accent
122 6 .
6V6\ms 316 ; accus. 214 8 .
, augm. 545 1 .
GREEK INDEX.
417
w. gen. 1148.
v0iis w. partic. 1572.
CVK\IT)S, contr. of 315.
cuvoos, cvvovs, compared 353.
6vp<TK w. partic. 1582, 1588.
eupos, accus. of specif. 1058.
cvpvs, wide, Horn. ace. of 322.
-evs, nouns in 263, 833 1 , 841, 848 ;
Horn, forms of 264 ; original
forms of 265 ; contracted forms
of 267.
, contr. of 315.
, decl. of 316.
-cv, denom. vbs. in 861 4 , 863.
<}>opaci> w. partic. 1585.
!<|>' tp or 4<j>' ciJT6 w. infin. and fut.
ind. 1460.
Ixpfjv or XP^ V i 11 a Pd. without &v
1400.
X, for <rex-w, 95 4 ; w. partic. for
perf . 1262 ; exo/xcu 1246, w. gen.
1099; w. adv. and part. gen.
1092 ; ?xw with, 1565.
IxOpos compared 357.
-(>, denom. verbs in 861 2 , 866,
867 ; inflection of contract forms
492.
-&> for -<w in vbs. (Hdt.) 784 4 .
~ie> in fut. of liquid stems 663.
e and -v, Ion. gen. of 1st decl.
188 3 - 5 .
iip'ici|, plpf. 528.
-CMS, Att. 2d decl. in 196.
ifws, dawn, accus. of 199 (see 240).
teas, conj. 1463; while 1425-1429;
until 1463-1467, expr. purpose
1467, in indir. disc. 1502 3 .
IWVTOV, for &IUTOU (Hdt.) 403.
Z, double cons. 18; origin of 18,
28 3 ; probable pronunciation of
28 3 ; makes position 99 1 ; e for
redupl. before 523.
{a-, intens. prefix 876.
Jaw, contr. form of 496.
-t, adv. in 293.
-, verbs in 684 ; fut. of vbs. in
afw and iw 665.
H, open long vowel 5, 6 ; orig.
aspirate 13 ; in Ion. for Dor. a
147 ; a and e length, to rj 29, 515,
635 ; as thematic vowel in subj.
56P ; fern, nouns and adj. in
832, 849.
fl, improper diphthong 7.
-II for eo-cu or ficrai in 2 pers. sing.
39 3 , 565 6 , 624. See -ci.
fj, whether (Horn.), or, interrog.
1605, 1606 ; than 1155, om. 1156.
rj, uiterrogative 1603, 1606.
Tj^eofiat w. gen. 1109; w. dat.
(Horn.) 1164.
TJ8op.at w. cogn. accus. 1051.
rjSo^vw o-oC IO-TIV, etc. 1584.
fjSvs compared 357 ; ijSiwv declined
358.
T T|, interrog. (Horn.) 1606.
T^Srjs etc. (oI8o) 8212.
-tfjeis, adj. in, contracted in Horn.
332.
(superl.) 361 2 .
as perf. 1256.
629 ; inflection of 814 ; dial.
forms of 817.
f|lis or ifjjias 396.
-T]p.vos for -e/^evos in part. (Horn.)
792.
, 998 ; w. avr&v 1003.
, insepar. particle 875 4 , 86.
v, iffxiv 396.
for i&v (el &v} 1382.
rel. adv. 436.
f|vtirairov 535.
ifirap declined 225 ; form of nom.
211.
fern. 194 2 .
231.
Ijpws declined 243, 244.
418
GKEEK INDEX.
-TJS, adj. in 849 s , 881 ; inflection of
312.
Us (for ^es), in nom. pi. of nouns
in -evs (older Attic) 266.
fl<ri or us, in dat. pi. 1 decl. (Ion.)
1885.
ii<r<rv (comp.) 361 2 .
TJV, diphthong 7 ; augm. of ev 519.
TJX" decl. 245.
T|t&s (Ion.) decl. 240.
6, rough mute 21 ; lingual 16, 22 ;
and surd 24 ; euph. changes, see
Linguals.
-0a, ending (see -<r0a) 556 1 .
GaXao-o-a decl. 172.
OafiCtw w. partic. 1587.
0dirr (ra0-), aspirates in 95 6 .
Oaporos and Opouros 64 1 .
Oao-orwv 357 ; aspirate in 95 5 .
Oarcpov etc. 46.
Savjjia w. infin. 1530.
Oaupatw w. gen. 1102, 1126; 6av-
Hdfr el 1423 ;>0av(ji(ifr 6Vi 1424.
0&.61S or 0c\T6 w. interrog. subj.
1358.
-Oev, local ending 292 2 , 295.
06s, vocative 195.
(0v-), 2d class 574.
6lpo|tai, fut. of 668.
0rfjpdc 293.
0fj\vs 323.
0rfjp declined 225.
0rfjs declined 225.
-0T]-Ti for -077-01 in 1st aor. pass.
imper. 95 2 , 757 1 .
-0i, local ending 292 1 , 295, 860.
8vri<rK (0a>-) 613 ; metath. (6av-,
6va-} 649 ; 77 for a 616 ; fut. pf.
act. redv-fifa 705; perf. as pres.
1263; 2 perf. of /u-fonn 804;
part, redvetis 773 ; Horn.
773.
0%-, poetic stems in 779.
(by crasis) 44.
0pCg, Tpi\<Js, aspirates in 95 5 ; de
clension of 225.
0pV1TT (T/JU0-) 95 5 .
6vyan|p declined 274 ; Horn, forms
276.
0vpac 293.
Otipouri 296.
I, close vowel 5, 6 ; rarely contr.
w. foil, vowel 40 1 ; length, to t
29, 30 ; interchanged w. et and
01 31 ; t added to demons tr.
412 ; mood suffix in opt. 562,
730 ; in redupl. of pres. stem
651, 652, 794 2 ; representing j
84, euphon. changes caused by
84!-e, 509-602 ; subscript 10.
-i, local ending 296.
-ia, fern, nouns in 842.
ta for ula (Horn.) 377.
taofxai 635.
-iaw, desideratives in 868.
ISctv, accent of 759, 762.
-t8t)s and -108^5 (fern, -tds), patro-
nym. in 846 2 , 846 8 .
-iSiov, diminutive in 844.
flues w. pass. gen. 1143.
tSpis declined (one ending) 344.
ISpo'o), contraction of 497.
iSpvv0T]v (iSpvw), Horn. aor. p. 709.
t- or ITJ- as mood suifix in opt. 562,
730.
Upo's w. poss. gen. 1143.
-(, denominat. vbs. in 861 6 , 862,
864.
, inflection of 810 ; dial, forms
of 811 ; aor. in /ca 670 ; opt.
Trp6oiro etc. 741, 810 2 ; efrai 767.
t0i, come! w. subj. and imperat,
1345.
^ofxai 607.
-IKOS, adjectives in 851.
, adj. declined 306, 197.
*IXo0i Trp6 295.
-iv in ace. sing. 214 8 .
GREEK INDEX.
419
lv, Doric for oJf 398.
i'va, final conj. 1362, 1365, 1368,
1371.
-ivos, adj. of material in 852 ; adj.
of time in /6s 853.
-i%, pres. stem in 579.
-u>v, diminutives in 844.
-ios, adj. in 850.
Kirn-os, fern., cavalry, w. sing, num-
erals 383 1 .
tiriroTd, nom. (Horn.) 188 2 .
-is, feminines in 848 2 .
uri, dat. case ending 167.
-UTK%-, pres. stems in 613.
-IO-KOS, -l<rKr), dimin. in 844.
fcros w. dat. 1175.
frrTT)|u, synopsis 504, 505, 509;
inflect, of /xt-forms 506 ; redupl.
of pres. 651, 652, 794 2 ; 'fut.
perf. act. 705 ; partic. icrrds de-
clined 335.
l x evs declined 257-260; ace. pi.
of 259.
I, accus. 'low (Hdt.) 247.
-iwv, patronym. in 847.
-iwv, -MTTOS, comp. and superl. in
357.
liS for M 377.
K, smooth mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
surd 24; euphon.ch., see Palatals;
ch. to x in 2 perf. stem 692.
K in OVK 26.
-Ka in aor. of three vbs. 670.
KctppoXe (/cor^aXe) 53.
Kcry for Kara 53.
KaOapos w. gen. 1140.
Ka0fl;op.u, augment 544 ; fut. 665 1 .
KaOcvSco, augment 544.
ica0T]|uu, inflection of 815, 816.
Ka0ico, augment 544.
Ka0Co-Ti]p.i as copul. vb. 908.
Kd(, in crasis 43 2 , 44 ; connecting
two subjects 901 ; w. part, (see
1573; Kal #s, Kal 01, os
K al os 1023 2 ; Kal ws 138 3 ; Kal
ravra 1573 ; Kal rdv w. infin.
984 ; r& Kal ra, rb Kal TO 984.
w. partic. 1573.
KCUW (Att. xaw) 601.
KCLK (Horn.) for /card 53.
KO.KOS compared 361.
KtiKxave (/caT^/craj/e) 53.
KaKcos iroieiv (X^et^) 1074.
KaXe'w, fut. in (-^w) w 665; perf.
opt. in TftiMj v 734 ; perf. as pres,
1263.
KaXo's compared 361.
and KaXvirrw 577.
, perf. mid. 77, 490 1 .
Kav (/cai eV), Kav (/cal av) 44.
Kaveov, Kavovv 202.
KCMT (Horn.) for Kara 53.
KapTicrros, superl. 361 1 .
-Kd<ri (poet, also -KCUTI) in 3 pers,
pi. perf. 682.
K<T (Horn.) for Kara 53.
Kara, preposition with gen. and
accus. 1211; in compos. 1123;
Kara yijv 958.
Kara-pd for Kard-^Bi 756 3 .
Kara (xai elra) 44.
Karapoaa) W. gen. 1123.
w. gen. 1123.
w. gen. 1098.
KaTcuj/v8oficu w. gen. 1123.
KaTax|/T]<|)tto(i.ai w. gen. 1123.
KaTT]-yopa}, augment of 543 ; w,
gen. and ace. 1123.
KO.T0aviv (KaraOaveiv') 53.
Karoiriv w. gen. 1149.
Kara), Karwrepos, KaTcoraros 363.
K* or K*V ( = &v} 59, 1299.
K10V, Kl8t 439 1 .
Kctjiai, inflection of 818, 819.
Ketvos 411.
Kl<T 439 1 .
KKa8r|crw, fut. pf . act. of x&fa 705
, perf. imper. 748.
420
GREEK INDEX.
KKT-t]fjtai and KTt]|iai 525.
KeXevOos, fern. 194 1 .
KeXcvco w. ace. and inf. 1164.
K'XXo>, fut. 668 ; aor. 674 6 .
Ke'Xojicu, redupl. 2 aor. 534, 677.
K'pas declined 237 1 .
icep8avtt 610 ; aor. 673.
KxapT|<rw, fut. pf. act. of
705.
Kews, aecus. of 199.
1
KT)pvo-(T6i without subject 897 4 .
Ki|3a>Tos, fern. 194 1 .
7942.
(Attic /cXaw) 601 ; fut. 666 ;
1564.
, desiderative verb 868.
-icX6]s, proper nouns in, decl. 231.
icXefe (Ion. /fXTjis), accus. of 215.
KXrm]s compared 364.
KXtvw, drops v 647; pf. mid. 488,
490 5 ; aor. p. 709.
KVOW, contraction of 496.
KojiCJ;, future 665 8 .
KOpT) (KO/O/TTJ) 176.
KOpO-TJ, KOppt] 176.
Kparcw w. gen. 1109.
Kpc'as, nomin. 211. *
Kp<r<ra>v, Kpario-ros 361 1 .
Kpe'najiai 794 1 ; accent of subj.
and opt. 729, 742.
KpCvw, drops v 647.
KpovCwv 847.
w. two accus. 1069.
Kpv<J>a w. gen. 1150.
KTaopai, augm. of perf . 525 ; perf.
subj. and opt. 722, 734.
KT6v 596, 646, 647, 799; 2 aor.
of /it-form, 799, 801.
Krets, KTCV-OS, nom. 210 2 .
KvSpo's compared 357.
KVKX<P, all round 1198.
(KU-) 607.
, fut. 668 ; aor. 674*.
KVCDV, KVVTCpOS, KVVTaTOS 364.
accent of certain forms
485 ; icwXfet as impers. 897*.
, accusative of 199.
A, liquid and semivowel 20; so-
nant 24 ; XX after syllabic augm.
(Horn.) 514.
, with 1565.
and Xajipavw, redupl. of
522 ; formation 605, 611.
Xa-yws, accusative of 199.
Xa6p<jw. gen. 1150.
Xa0v, secretly 1564.
Xajiirds declined 225.
XavOavw (Xa^-) 605, 611; w. par-
tic. 1586.
Xdo-Kw (Xa-), formation of 617.
Xy, collect, redupl. of 522.
Xyo>, say, constr. of 1523 ; \tyov<ri
897 2 ; X^yercu or X^yovo-t omitted
1525.
Xetirw, synopsis of 476; meaning
of certain tenses 477 ; second
aor., perf. and plpf. inflected
481 ; form of XAoira 31, 6421.
X4o, imper. 756 1 .
X&DV declined 225.
XiOopoXos and Xi06poXos 885.
Xio-crofjiai w. us or STTWS 1377.
XoiSopca) w. ace. and XoiSopcojuu
w. dat. 1163.
Xovw, contraction of 497.
Xvw, synopsis 469, 474; conjug.
480 ; Horn. perf. opt. 734 ; \tuv
and XeXvKcis declined 335 ; quan-
tity of V 471.
Xco'wv, XWO-TOS 361 1 .
M, liquid and semivowel 20;
nasal 20, and sonant 24; /u0>
and /J.&P for /*X and tip 66.
-(ia, neut. nouns in 837.
pa, in oaths, w. ace. 1066-1068.
GREEK INDEX.
421
w.
fj.aCopcu (/uao--) 602.
jiaKpo's, decl. of 300;
comp. 1184.
jjwxXa comp. (/uaXXov, /idXio-ra) 371.
-Hav, Dor. ending for -^p 777 1 .
(tavOavw 605 ; w. gen. of source
1130 1 ; w. infin. 1592 2 ; rl /m66v
1566.
MapaOwvi, dat. of place 1197.
596.
fut. -e<ro/icu, -OU/ACU 665 1 ;
w. dat. 1177.
MfyapaSe 293.
pfyas declined 346 ; compared 361 4 .
(itv for fjxlfav 361 4 , 84 8 .
in first person dual 656 2 .
361 4 .
i, redupl. of perf. 522.
|Aev, fiio-Tos 361 5 .
l\as declined 325 ; fern, of 326 ;
nom. 210 2 .
fieXei w. dat. and gen. 1105, 1161.
|i\\w, augment of 517; w. infin.,
as periph. fut. 1254.
pc|j.vT||j.<u, perf. subj. and opt. 722,
734; as pres. 1263; w. gen.
1102 ; w. partic. 1588.
H'n<f>ofj.cu w. dat. 1160; w. ace.
1163.
-jtes, -}M<r0a for -/*ev, -/*e0a 556 4 ,
7771.
|Uv, in 6 rfv ... 6 5<? 981.
-|xvcu, -|iv, in infin. (Horn.) 782 1 ,
7845, 785 4 ? 791.
Mev&ews and Mev^Xdos 33, 200;
accent 114.
|iVTav (by crasis) 44.
|io-T]}if3pCa 66.
(jt(Tos, compar. 352 ; w. art. 978.
w. gen. 1140.
w. gen., dat., and accus.
1212; as adv. 1222 1 ; ^ra
(Horn.) for ^reffn 1224.
rapAc!. w. gen. and dat. 1105,
1161.
w. gen. 1220; w. partic.
1572.
|iTairoiop.(u w. gen. 1099.
w. gen. and dat. 1097 2 ,
1161.
. gen. 1097 2 , 1098.
w. gen. 1140.
fiev 393 1 ; enclitic 141 1 .
(jLc'xpi, as prep. w. gen. 1220 ; as
conj. 1463-1467; with subj. with-
out &v 1466.
jjdj, adv., not, 1607-1619 ; see Con-
tents, p. xxiv. ; w. ?ra, &TWS,
etc., in final clauses 1364 ; after
vbs. of fearing, w. subj. and opt.
1378, w. indie. 1380 ; in prota-
sis 1383; in rel. cond. sent.
1428; in wishes 1507, 1511,
1610 ; w. imperat. and subj. in
prohibitions 1346, 1347 ; w. subj.
expressing fear 1348, 1349; w.
subj. (also pi) ofl) in cautious
assertions 1350, w. indie. 1351 ;
w. dubitative subj. 1358 ; w.
infin. 1611 ; w. infin. and WO-TC
1451 ; w. infin. after negative
verb 1615. See ov |i4j and JXTJ ov.
(IT! on, (it) oirws 1504.
-jit], fern, nouns in 835.
1607; wM & 378.
, 1607; mSives etc. 378.
435.
656.
62.
declined 274.
(poet.) 435; accent 146.
JJLTJ oi 1616, 1617 ; one syllable in
poetry 47 2 ; ^ . . . otf in final
cl. 1364 ; w. subj. or indie, in
cautious negations 1350, 1351.
jrfT 1607.
i in 1st pers. sing. 552, 556 1 ,
731, 793-797; Aeol. vbs. in, fol
-aw, -ew, -oa> 787 2 .
422
GKEEK INDEX.
juKpo's compared 361 5 .
lun-vflVictt, augment of perf. 525 ;
7] for a 616, 614. See ji^xvijpai.
fitv and vtv 393, 395.
Mivws, accus. of 199.
fjtio"yo) for (uy-(rK(i) 617.
fiio-eo) w. accus. 1163.
Hio-0o', middle of 1245.
HH|i changed to /*/* 77.
|ivoa, ftva, declined 184.
(w>\- in pf. of jSXcia-Kw 66, 614.
pop- in /3/>oT6s 66 6 .
-(ios, nouns in 834 ; adj. in 866.
P.OVVOS (A^VOS) 148.
Movcra declined 171.
(ivia 175 C .
pvpids 373.
(jivpioi and pvpCoi 383 2 .
(xvpios. fxvpia 383 2 .
P.VS, JJUIQS, declined 260.
|iwv (/^ o5v), interrog. 1603.
-JJLWV, adjectives in 849*.
N, liquid and semivowel 20 ; nasal
20 ; sonant 24 ; can end word 25;
movable 56-61 ; euph. changes
before labial and palatal 78 1 ,
before liquid 78 2 , before <r 78 8 ;
yr, j>5, vd, dropped before a 79; in
tv and <rvv 81 ; dropped in some
vbs. in vu 647 ; changed to <r
before /uu 83, 489 2 , 648, 700;
dropped before a- in dat. plur.
80 ; inserted in aor. pass. 709 ;
in 5th class of verbs 603-612.
va- added to verb stem 609, 797 2 .
-vai, infin. in 654, 764, 766, 767.
See -fievai.
vaCxi, accent 141*, 146.
vaCw (va/r) 602.
vd6s, vt)6s, and v<&s 200, 196.
vavs declined 268; Dor. & Ion.
decl. of 270 ; formation of 269 ;
Compounds of (yau/tax^a, vavvl-
Tropos, vecio-ot/cos, etc.) 872 ; va00i
297.
v8 dropped before a 79.
ve added to verb stem 607.
viK(w (Horn.) 785 3 .
W (w-), 2d class 574 ; fut. 666.
v<&s declined 196.
v^i, in oaths, w. accus. 1066, 1067.
VTJ-, insep. neg. prefix 875 3 .
vfjo-os declined 192.
vt]vs (for vavs) 270.
v0 dropped before a- 79.
vU> (yf)3-) 591.
viKaw w. cogn. accus. 1052 j pass.
w. gen. 1120.
vtv and jjttv 395.
v(<j>a (accus.) 289.
. infin. 1523 ; w. dat. like
1183.
v6os, vovs declined 201 2 .
-vos, adject, in 856.
voo-os, fern. 194 1 .
vovjjL-qvia 1194.
-vs in accus. plur. 167, 169, 190,
208 4 .
-vo-i and -vri in 3d pers. plur. 552,
5565, 78 3, 7771.
VT- dropped before & 79.
-VTO in 3d pers. plur. 552.
-VTWV in 3d pers. pi. imper. 553,
746.
w- added to vowel stems 608, 797 1 .
wKr6s 958 ; vvicrl and iv vvicrt 1193.
-vvjii, verbs in 608, 502 2 , 797 1 .
v-bv or vv (epic) 59 ; enclit. 141 4 .
vwi, vwiv 393 1 .
vwircpos 407.
g, double consonant 18 ; surd 24 ;
compos, of 18 ; how written in
early Attic 27, 28 3 ; can end word
26 ; redupl. before 523.
fjeivos, Ion. for ?w>s 148.
vv for o-iJi', w. dative 1217.
GREEK INDEX.
423
0, open short vowel 5, 6; name
of 4 ; in contraction 38 ; length,
to o> 29 ; to ov 30 ; interchanged
w. d and e 32 ; for e in 2 pf . 643,
also in nouns 831 ; as thematic
vowel 561 1 , in Horn. subj. 780 1 ;
as suffix 832, 849 ; at end of first
part of compounds 871.
'O for -<ro in 2d pers. sing. 565 6 .
6, T), TO, article, decl. of 386 ; syn-
tax of 935-984 : in Horn. 935-
938 ; in Hdt. 939 ; in lyr. and
trag. poets 940, in Attic 941-
984 ; 6 tfv . . . 6 8t 981-983 ;
proclitic forms 137 ; when ac-
cented 139. See Article.
6, rel. (neut. of 6's), for 5rt (Horn.)
1478 2 .
o\86aTos 374.
o-ySwKovra (Ion.) 374.
oSe, rjSe, rdSe, demonstr. pronoun
430 (see oSros) ; decl. 409 ; syn-
tax 1004, 1005, 1008 ; w. article
945 1 , 974 ; 65f 412.
686s declined 192 ; odbv Itvai 1057.
oSovs, 68v, oSovros, nom. 210 3 .
oe and oo contracted to ov 38 2 ; 8.
06i contr. to ov 39 5 ; to 01 (in vbs.
in oo>) 39 4 .
66is, adj. in, contracted 332.
6t w. two gen. 1107.
otj contr. to o> 38 2 ; to 17 39 1 , 310,
811.
ofl and oei contr. to 01 (in vbs. in
6w) 39*.
80v 436 ; by assimilation 1034.
o0i 439 3 .
60otiv6Ka 1478 s .
01, diphthong 7 ; pronunciation of
28 2 ; interchanged w. ei and t
31 ; augmented to v 518 ; rarely
elided 51 ; short hi accent 113 ;
ot in voc. sing. 246.
o, pron. 389 ; use in Attic 987, 988.
at, adv. 436.
ola w. partic. 1575.
olSa, inflection of 820 ; dial, forms
of 821 ; w. partic. 1588 ; w. infin.
1592 2 ; oiffff o dpaffov 1343.
OlSCirovs, gen. and ace. of 287 1 .
-oir]v, etc. in opt. act. of contract
vbs. 737 ; in 2 perf . opt. 735 ;
o-xo^v 735.
-ouv (ep.) for -oiv in dual 286 1 .
, otKoOev, otficoi, otic6v86 292-
296; otKoi 1198.
, form. 850 ; w. gen. 1144 ;
w. dat. 1175.
olicCa declined 171.
olKxtpw and otKreipw 597.
-oio in gen. sing, of 2d decl. 204 1 .
ol'noi elided 51 ; accent of 146.
olvos and vinum 91.
olvoxoe'w, augment of 538.
ofo|xcu or ot|iai, only otei in ^pers.
sing. 625 ; w. infin. 1523.
olov or ola w. partic. 1575.
-oiv, rare for -ot/u in opt. act. 736.
olos 429 ; oiV <rot, etc. 1036 ; ofts
re, able, in Att. 1024 6 . See oto
and olov.
-oura for -ov<ra in partic^) (Aeol.)
783.
-oio-i in dat. pi. of 2 decl. 204 3 .
ol'xojiai, perf. of 659 ; in pres. as
pf. 1256 ; w. partic. 1587.
oXtyos compared 361 ; oXfyou (5e)
1116, 1534.
6'X\v|u (6A-), form of pres. 612;
fut. 665 ; perf. and plpf . 529, 533,
6Xos w. article 979.
(rd) 289 ; w. vwav 1052.
w. dat. 1175.
6>vvjii (o^c-, 6/xo-) 659 ; plpf. 633 ;
6nw0i 790 (752) ; w. accus. 1049.
<J|ioios and 6poi6a> w. dat. 1176.
w. dative 1176.
w. dative 1176.
w. gen. 1144 1 ; w. dat
1175.
424
GREEK INDEX.
ova-, stems in 840.
ovap 289.
ov6iS(ci> w. dat. or ace. 1163.
-OVTJ, nouns in 840.
ovfvrjiu (6i/a-) 796, 798 ; accent of
2 aor. opt. 742 ; inflect, of wv-fi-
pi\v 803 3 .
ovofia, by name 1058 ; 6v6/j.aTi 1182.
6vofidco w. two ace. 1077 ; in pass.
w. pred. nom. 907, 1078.
OVOfWUTTC 860 8 .
OVT-, partic. stems in 564 6 , 565 5 ,
770.
6vvo>, perf. and plpf. pass. 700.
oo contracted to ov 38 1 , 8.
-oos, nouns in 201 ; adj. in 310 ;
compared 353 ; compounds in,
accent of 203 2 .
oov for ov 424.
Girt], oirqvCica, 6ir60cv, oiroi 436.
oirur06v w. gen. 1149.
6ir69v 436 ; rel. of purpose 1442.
oiroi, of place where 1226.
oiroios, 6ir6<ros 429.
6ir6T6, relat. 436, 1425; causal 1505;
oirdrav w. subj. 1428 2 , 1299 2 .
oirorepos 429, 432 2 .
oirov 436.
6irvCa> (^TTI;-), birvffw 602.
oirws, rel. adv. 436; as indir. in-
terrog. w. subj. or opt. 1600,
1490; as final particle 1362,
1365, 1368 ; sometimes w. &v or
K 1367; w. past. t. of indie.
1371; rarely w. fut. ind. 1366;
in obj. cl. w. fut. ind. 1372 ;
sometimes w. &v 1376 ; in obj.
cl. in Horn. 1377; onus p-fi after
vbs. of fearing 1379; &rws and
STTWS p/i w. fut. in commands
and prohib. 1352 ; threw for d>s
in indir. quot. 1478. M^ Sirw
and ovx oVws 1504.
6pou 621; augm. and redupl. of
538 ; w. &rws 1372 ; w. pi 1378 ;
w. suppl. partic. 1582 ; w. part
in indir. disc. 1588 (1583).
ope-yofjLcu w. gen. 1099.
op vis declined 225; ace. sing, of
214 3 , 216. See 291 2 e.
opvvfii, fut. 668 ; aor. 674 6 .
-os, -ov, nouns in 832, 189; adj.
in 849 1 , 855, 298 ; neuters in -05
(stems in eo--) 837, 227.
os, rel. pron. 421, 430 ; fern, dual
rare 422; Horn, forms of 424;
as demonstr. 1023.
os, his, poss. pron. (poet.) 406,
408.
oo-os, oiroVos 429.
6o-Tov, OO-TOVV, declined 201.
oo-Tis declined 425-427; Horn, form
428; as indir. interrog. 1013,
1600; sing. w. plur. antec.
1021 C .
6<r<J>paivo|Acu, formation 610; w.
gen. 1102.
ore, rel. 436 ; causal 1505 ; 8rav w.
subj. 1428 2 .
&TV Or <&TTU, 8T<0, OTCO)V, 6TOlO*l
428.
8-ri, that, in indir. quot. 1476,
1487; in direct quot. 1477; cau-
sal (because} 1505; not elided 50.
o TI (neut. of dJo-ns) 425, 426.
OTIS, OTlVtt, OTIVOS, OTTCO, &TTI 428.
ov, diphthong 7; genuine and spu-
rious ov 8 ; pronunc. of 27, 28 2 ;
length, from o 30 ; f or o in Ion.
148 ; not augmented 519.
-ov in gen. sing. 170, 191; for -eo-o
in 2 pers. mid. 565, 679.
ov, OVK, ov\ 62 ; proclitic 137; ac-
cented 1381; uses of 1608-1613;
ot>K efftf dVojs etc. w. opt. (with-
out &v) 1333 ; of>x 57rws and ^X
8n 1504. See ov n^ and HT] ov.
ov, ot, 2, etc. 389, 392 ; syntax of
987, 988.
otf, rel. adverb 436.
GREEK INDEX.
425
ov8efe 378, 1607;
ovdels offTts ot> 1035.
ovScrepos 435.
OVK : see ov.
236.
1607; oW eh and otdels 378;
' ws 138 3 ; ovdt iro\\ov Set
, etc. 378;
OVK (6 e/c) 44.
OVKOVV (interrog.) 1603.
ov [i.i\ w. fut. ind. or subj. as strong
fut. 1360 ; in prohib. 1361.
-ovv in ace. sing. (Hdt.) 247.
ovv6Ka for eW/ca 1220 6 .
ovirt (6 eVQ 44.
ovpavoSev, ovpavodi 292.
-ovs in acc. pi. 190, 167.
-ovs (for -eos, -oos), adj. in 852, 829,
310 ; partic. in ovs 564 5 .
ovs, ear, accent of gen. dual and
pi. 128.
-ovo-i for -ovffi 556 5 , 78 3 .
OV> 1607.
OVTIS (poetic) 435 ; accent 146.
ovros declined 409, 413 ; use of
430, 1004; disting. from ticeivos
and ode 1005 ; TCLVTO. and ravraiv
(dual) rare 410; w. article 945 1 - 3 ;
position w. art. 974 ; in exclam.
1006; ref. to preceding rel.
1030; TOUTO tfv... TOVTO dt 1010;
Taura and TOVTO as adv. accus.
1060; oi/roo-412.
OVTWS and OVTW 63, 436.
ovx : see ov.
6<J>(Xw ((50eA-), owe, 698; w<f>e\ov
in wishes 1402 2 , 1512.
6<(>\\&>, increase, 598.
6<j>&.\, owe (Horn. = o0e/Xw) 593,
598; impf. w0e\Xov in wishes
1512.
868 2 .
6<t>Xio-Koiva> w. gen. 1122.
6\}>pa, as final part. 1362, 1365,
1366, 1368 ; sometimes w. K or
flj/1367, 1299 2 ; until 1463.
(6pdw), 6'4/t625.
-ow, denom. verbs in 861 3 ; infl. of
contr. forms 492.
-ow, etc., supposed Horn, form of
vbs. in aw 784 2 ; Horn. fut. in
6a> (for dVw, <a>, w) 784 2 .
II, smooth mute 21; labial 16;
surd 24; euphon. changes, see
Labials; w. <r forms ^ 74; ch.
to in 2 perf. 692.
iraCSw, double stem 590.
irats, nom. of 209 1 ; voc. sing. 221 1 ;
accent of gen., du., and pi. 128.
iroXai w. pres., incl. perf. 1258.
iraXiv, before o~ in compos. 82.
iraXXo), ire'iraXov 534.
irav before o- in compos. 82.
iravT00v 292 2 .
irctp (Horn.) for -jrapd 53.
irapa w. gen., dat., and acc. 1213 ;
as adv. 1221 2 ; in compos., w.
acc. 1227; w. dat. 1179.
iropa for Trdpetrrt 116 2 , 1224.
irapavon&), augment of 543.
irapao-Keva^o), impers. irapeo-icev-
ao-rai, Trapeo-KevaffTO 897 4 , 1240 2 ;
TrapeffKevddarcu 777 3 .
irapa-o-Ta 755 3 .
irapei|u w. dat. 1179.
iropos w. infin. 1474.
iras declined 329; w. article 979;
acc. of gen. and dat. pi. 128,
331 1 .
ird<rx 617, 621; T* 7rd0o>; 1357;
Tl TTO.Q&V ; 1566.
irar^p declinea 274.
iravo) and iravofxai w. partic. 1580.
572 ; pf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487 1 , 489 1 ; wtineov 534;
31, 642 1 .
426
GREEK INDEX.
i, obey, w. dat. 1160.
irie<& declined 243 ; only sing. 289.
imvcto), contraction of 496.
Ilcipauvs decl. 267.
iTipou>|xai and ireipouo w. gen. 1099;
w. Virus and obj.cl. (Horn.) 1377.
irepo>, pf. and plpf. mid. 490 6 .
WXas w. gen. 1149.
ir6|xir<o, pf. pass. 77, 490 1 ; Trfaireiv
1051.
compar. 361.
, pf. imper. 750.
583 : see ireVcrw.
Wp, enclit. 141* ; w. partic. 1573.
Trc'pav w. gen. 1148.
ire'pas declined 225, 237 2 .
ire'p0a>,.irpa0ov 646, 649.
irepC w. gen., dat., and ace. 1214 ;
as adv. 1222 1 ; in compos, w.
dat. 1179; w. numerals as sub-
ject 906 ; not elided in Attic 50 ;
TTept 116 1 .
i w. gen. 1120.
, IIcpiKXfjs, declined 231.
irepiopouo w. partic. 1585.
ireptirCirrw w. dat. 1179.
V&ro-tt (TTCTT-) 583; pf. pass, of
f 490 1 .
( rcTO|jLai, 2 aor. mid. 677; 2 a. act.
of /it-form 799.
-rfj 436.
ITT), indef . 436 ; enclitic 141 2 .
n^XciS^s (Horn, -etdrjs) 846 3 .
JTTjXtKOS 429.
declined 250, 256.
ir|jnr\T](xi (TrXa-), redupl. 794 2 ; w.
inserted /* 795; inflection of
, redupl. 794 2 ; w.
inserted fj. 795.
irCvw 621 ; fut. 667; irWi 799, 755 1 ;
w. gen. 1097 1 .
(irra> 652i; fut. 666; pert mid.
4901.
w. dative 1160.
(Horn.) for rfoaapes 377.
ir\aicovs, contraction ot
332.
irXeiv (for TrX^ov) 1156.
irXeiwv or irXe'wv, irXeio-Tos 361 8 .
arXlicco, pf. and plpf. mid. inflected
487i, 4891.
without TJ 1156.
^w (TrXv-), 2d class 574 ; con-
traction of 495 1 ; fut. 666; TrXet?
0d\a.(r<rat> 1057.
, declension of 309.
w. gen. 1220.
w. dat. 1175.
irXtjo-fov w. gen. 1149.
irX^o-o-o), ^Tr\dyr]v (in comp.) 713.
irXvvw 647.
irvlat (TTZ/U-), 2d class 574 ; fut. 666.
ir606v 436.
iroee'v 436 ; enclitic 141 2 .
ir60i and iroec 439 3 , 141 2 .
iroi 436.
iro, indef. 436 ; enclitic 141 2 .
iroicco w. two accus. 1073 ; w. partic.
1563 8 ; e5 and /caKws TTOIW 1074.
iroios, iroids 429.
Xeixeco, iroXcu^w w. dat. 1177 ;
disting. from 7roXe/x6o> 867.
iroXis declined 250 ; Ion. forms 255.
iroXXos, Ion. = Tro\ts 347.
iroXvs declined 346 ; Ion. forms 347 ;
compared 361 ; ol iro\\oi and r6
TToXri 967; TroXiJ and iro\\d as
adv. 367 ; TroXXy w. comp. 1184 ;
TroXXoO Set and oy5e TroXXoO Set
1210 3 .
1051.
iroppw or irp6<ro> w. gen. 1149.
Iloo-eiSdwv, IIo<rei8wv, accus. 217 ;
voc. 122 d , 221 2 .
TTOO-OS, iroo-os 429.
iroTo.|j.6s after proper noun 970o
1TOT6 436.
GREEK INDEX.
42?
mm, indef . 436 ; enclitic 141*.
iroTpos, irorepos (or -/j6s) 429.
ir6Tpov or -irorepa, interrog. 1606.
irov 436 ; w. part. gen. 1092.
irov, indef. 436 ; enclitic 141 2 .
TTOVS, nom. sing. 210 1 ; compounds
of 349.
irpd-yK-aTa, omitted after article
953.
irpaos declined 346 ; two stems of
348 ; irpavs and irp-^vs 348.
irpd<r<r (71-^7-), 2d perf. 692, 693 ;
seldom w. two accus. 1076; w.
and obj. cl. 1372 ; e& and
daffo) 1075.
, impers. 898.
irpo-pvrtfjs, irpco-pvTTjs, irp&rpvs
291.
etitt, denom. verb 861 4 ; wpe-
eiv dp'fivrjv 1055 1 .
(epic) 348.
trptv w. infin. and indie. 1469 ; w.
infin. 1470, 1471 1 ; w. indie.,
subj., and opt. 1471 2 ; w. subj.
without &v 1473 ; irplv % 1474.
irpCwjicu and irpiaCpriv, accent of
729, 742.
irpo w. gen. 1215; not elided 50;
compared 363; contracted w.
augment 541, or w. foil, e or o
874' 2 ; (ppovdos and 0poup6s 93.
irpo TOV or irporov 984.
irpoiica, gratis, as adv. 1060.
irp6ip.ai w. gen. 1132.
irp6oiTo, etc. 741, 810 2 . See fr||u.
irp6s w. gen., dat., and ace. 1216 ;
as adv., besides 1222 1 .
irpoo-SexojJieva) fioi <TTIV 1584.
irpoo-TJKi, impers. 898 ; w. gen. and
dat. 1097 2 , 1161 ; wpoffrjKov, ace.
abs. 1562.
Tfp6<r9v w. gen. 1148.
TrpocrraxOe'v (ace. abs.) 1569.
7rp6o"w w. gen. 1149 ; itvai rov irp6a'<a
1138.
107 1 .
irpdrepos 363 ; irpfoepov $ (like irpli
^) 1474.
irpOTOv 984.
irpoflp-yov and arpovxa> 874 2 .
irpc&Tio-TOs 363.
Trpcoros 363 ; r6 irp&rov or -n-p&rov,
at first 1060.
IIv0ot 296.
irvv6dvo|iai w. ace. and gen. 1103 ;
w. partie. 1588.
trvp, gen. -jrvp-os 211; plur. 291.
ir<&, indef. 436 ; enclitic 141 2 .
irws 436.
indef. 436 ; enclitic 141*.
P, liquid and semivowel 20; sonant
24 ; p at beginning of word 15 ;
can end a word 25; pp after
syll. augm. and in comp. after
vowel 69, 513 ; upp for ///> 66.
pa, enclitic 141*.
p<8ios compared 361 9 .
paCvo> 610.
Tajivovs 332.
p<jwv, pao-ros 361*.
pew (pv-) 574.
(^7-), 2 pf. tppuya 689.
, pTjCrepos, etc. 361 9 .
pi-yow, infin. and opt. of 497, 738.
p(s, wose, declined 225.
-poos, adject, in, decl. of'298 2 .
-pos, adject, in 855.
S, two forms 2 ; spirant or sibi-
lant 20, semivowel 20, and surd
24, can end word 25 ; after mutes
found only in and \f/ 74 ; v be-
fore <r 78 3 , 80 ; linguals changed
to ff before a lingual 71 ; orig. s
changed to aspirate 86; dropped
before a vowel, in stems in e<r
and aa- 88 1 , 226, 227, in <rcu and
o-o 88 2 , 565 6 , 777 2 , 785 2 ; dropped
in liquid aor. 89, 672 ; added to
428
GREEK INDEX.
some vowel stems 640, 830 2 ;
doubled, after syll. augm. (Horn.)
614, in fut. and aor. (Horn.) 777 7 ;
movable in OUTWS and t 63 ;
dropped in x w an( i fo"X w (f r
(re%w and ffurtxu) 539 (see Cat.
of Verbs).
-s as ending of nom. sing. 167, 209.
-<ra-, tense suffix of 1 aor. 561 3 .
-<ra in fem. of adj. and partic. 78 3 ,
84 2 .
-<rai and -<ro in 2d pers. sing. 552,
drop ff in vbs. in w 565 6 , not in
most fit-forms 564 6 ; -<rat elided
51.
<rdXiriY declined 225.
-o-av, 3d pers. plur. 552, 564 3 , 565*.
Sainco declined 245.
v 401, 993.
, 2d aor. *(rpT]i> 803 1 .
<rt 389, 393 1 .
-0-6, local ending 294.
<r<um>v 401, 993.
orefci without subject 897 5 .
o-6io, o-ftev 393 1 .
-o-ic0, desideratives in 868.
o-|jLv6s compared 350.
o-6>, o-cv 393 1 .
o-v (cri/-), 2d class 574 ; 2 aor. m.
800.
-o-c'w, o-w, Doric future in 777 6 .
erewvTov (Hdt.) 403.
-o-Ga, chiefly Horn, ending 556 1 ;
in 2 pers. sing. subj. act. 780 4 ;
in indie, of vbs. in / 787 4 .
-o-0ai (-flat) 554 ; elided 51.
-o-0dv, Dor. ending for -<rdr)v 777 1 .
-0-00V and -<r0t]v in 2 and 3 p. dual
652 ; -<?dov for -ffOyv in 3 pers.
556 3 .
o-i in 2 p. sing, (in &r<r/) 556 1 ; in
3 pers. 552, 564 1 .
-<ri in dat. pi. 167, 224, 286 2 ; -
167, 169, 190.
-01 as locative ending 296.
-<rt (for -JTI, -wt) in 3 p. pi. 556 6 ,
78 3 .
-o-id, fem. nouns in 834.
-o-ijios, adject, in 855.
-o-is, fem. nouns in 834.
O-ITOS and o-ira 288.
o-K8dvwjii, fut. of (-d<rw, -w) 665 2 .
o-K^XXw, diro-<TK\fivai 803 1 .
-CTKOV, -o-KOfjLT]v, Ion. iterative end-
ings 778 ; w. 6,v 1298.
w. STTWS and fut. ind. 1362 2 ,
1372.
, declension of 287 1 .
, contraction of 496.
-o-o in 2 pers. sing. 552, 565 6 , 564 ;
see -o-cu.
-0-%-, tense suffix in future and
fut. pf. 661 1 .
o-oos : see o-s.
o-opds, fem. 194 1 .
0-65, poss. pron. 406, 998.
o-o<|>6s declined 299.
o-ir^vSw, o-ireio-w 79 ; euph. changes
in pf . and plpf . mid. 490 3 .
o-irv8 and o-irov8^ 31.
o-iro86s, fem. 194 1 .
o-irov8^ and o-irev8o> 31.
o-o- = TT 68 3 , 580-582.
-o-rd (in comp.) for ffrrjBi 755 8 .
o-Tcpa> 572 ; pf . mid. 642 2 .
o-T\Xw 593 ; pf . and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487 1 .
: Kara o-rCxov 1649.
w. gen. 1099.
w. gen. 1109.
w 646, 708, 714.
o-v declined 389; Horn, and Hdt.
393 1 ; gen. omitted 896.
o-vyyev^s w.gen. 1144 ; w. dat. 1175.
" t 'YY l 'Y v< ">o" Ka) w. partic. (nom. or
dat.) 1590 ; w. gen. 1126.
o-vupcuvei, impers. 898.
o-vv or |vv, w. dat. 1217; in compos.
1179; becomes <n/<r- or <ru- ID
compos. 81.
GREEK INDEX.
429
(or ws ffvve\6vri) ctirciv
11722.
-o-vvi], nouns in 842.
<rvvii\\i\. w. ace. 1104 ; w. gen. 1102.
orvvoiSa w. partic. (nom. or dat.)
1590.
o-vvrpipw w. gen. 1098.
<r<t> 393i, 394 ; enclit. 141 1 .
<r<j>a 393' 2 ; <r(/><?as, <r<f>tuv 393 1 ; en-
clit. 141 1 .
<r<t>^rcpos 406.
<r<j>v or r<j>C 393, 394; <r<plv (not
<T<pty in Trag. 392.
<r<J>i<ri, not enclitic in Attic prose
144*.
<r<f>6s for <r0<?repos 407.
i, etc., <r4>6, <r4tv 393 1 .
407.
<r<j>wv avTwv etc. 401.
<rxs and o-xoCtjv (of ?x w ) 755 2 ,
799, 735.
SwKpdTt]?, decl. of 228; ace. 230 ;
voc. 122 C , 228.
o-wpa declined 225; nom. formed
209*; dat. pi. 224.
<rs (Horn. 0-60$) 309.
<rT^p, voc. o-wrep 122*, 221 2 .
cr<f>po>v compared 354.
T, smooth mute 21; lingual 16, 22 ;
surd 24; euphon. changes: see
Linguals; vr dropped before <r
79.
rd (Horn.) for -TIJS in nom. of
first decl. 188 2 .
rd and raiv (dual of 6), rare 388.
-TCU in 3 pers. sing. 552 ; elided 51.
rdXas, adj., decl. of 324 ; nom. of
210 2 .
riiXXa (rd AXXa) 43 2 , 119.
-rdv, Doric ending for -T-rjv 111 1 .
rdv (roi &v) 44.
ravSpC 44.
rapa 44.
rapdo-a-w, pf. mid. 490 2 .
-raros, superl. in 350.
ravrd, ravro, ravr6v, TO.VTOV 400.
ravTtj, adv. 436, 1198.
TCM|>- for 6>a0- (^dirrw) 95 5 .
rd X a w. &v (rd* *") 1316.
ra\vs compared 357, 95 5 ; rijv
ro.-)(l<fTt\v 1060.
TO.COV (= TWJ') 388.
T^ (enclitic), Doric for <rt 398.
T, and, enclitic 141 4 ; w. relatives
1024 ; w. ofos 1024.
95 5 .
773.
, fut. pf. act. of 0vv<rKu 705.
T60pd<t>0ai 95 d .
rrfv (Ion. = <rol) 393.
Ti\op.axia 872.
reCvw, drops v 647, 711.
-rcipa, fern, nouns hi 833 2 .
T6Kwv as noun 1561.
reXevTwv, finally, 1564.
reXe'w, future in w, ou/tai 665 1 ; pf.
and plpf. mid. inflected 487 2 ,
489 2 .
re'Xos, finally, adv. ace. 1060.
WJJLVW 603 ; 2 aor. 646, 676.
rfo, TCV, T^OS, T6VS, T60V ( = (ToC)
398.
T^O, rev (= TOU for rlvos or rt^s),
-riov, verbal adj. in 776 ; impers.,
w. subj. in dat. or ace. 1597;
sometimes plural 1597 ; Latin
equivalent of 1599.
-T&S, verbal adj. in 776; passive
1595 ; Lat. equiv. 1599.
reds, Doric and Aeolic (= <r6$)
407.
declined 237*.
, decl. of 325 ; fern, of 326.
-repos, comparative in 350.
Te'pireo, 2 aor. w. stem rapir- 646 ;
redupl. 534.
T&r<rapS (or rerr-), Ion.
etc., declined 375.
430
GREEK INDEX.
TcrpaCvw 610 ; aor. 673.
T^rpdo-i (dat.) 377.
Tvx 572, 642 2 .
Tews, accus. of 199.
TO, TTjSe 436, 1198.
TTI\CKOS, TTI\IKOVTOS, etc. 429.
-TTJV in 3 pers. dual 552 ; for -TOV
in 2 pers. 556 3 . See -o-6ov and
-<T0T|V.
TT)viK<x8e, T-qviKavra 436.
, masc. nouns in 833 1 ; syncop.
273.
-nfjpiov, nouns of place in 843 1 ;
adj. in 855.
-TT)s, masc. nouns in 833 1 , 841 ;
fern, (denom.) in 842.
TTJO-I and rfjs (= rats) 388.
re for ee 68 1 .
-TI, adverbs in 860.
-TI, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric)
552, 556 1 , 777 1 ; in tori 556 1 .
TC0T](u, synopsis 504, 509; inflec-
tion of /u-forms 506 ; redupl. in
pres. 651, 794 2 ; imperf. 630;
aor. in KO. and K&WV 670, 802 2 ;
opt. mid. in -olwv and accent
741; Beivai 767,802!; partic. ritfefs
declined 335.
-TIKOS, adj. in 851 2 .
TiKTW (T6K-) 652 1 .
Tijxdw, denom. verb 861 1 ; stem
and root of 153 ; inflect, of contr.
forms 492 ; synopsis of 494 ;
infin. 39 5 , 761; partic. ri^dcov,
TifAuv declined 340; w. gen. of
value 1133 ; ripav rivt TLVOS and
Ti/j.a<r0at TWOS 1133.
Ti[i/fj declined 171.
ififis, contraction of 332.
and Tijjtwpe'ojjLai 1246 ; w.
ace. and dat. 1163.
TV, Doric (= <ro) 398.
TS, interrog. 430 ; declined 415,
416; accent 129, 418 1 ; Ion.
forms 418 2 ; subst. or adj. 1011;
in direct and ind. questions
1012, 1600.
rls, indef. 430 ; declined 415, 416 ;
accent 141 2 , 418 1 ; Ion. forms
418 2 ; subst. or adj. 1015 1 ; like
Tras rts 1017.
-TIS, fern, nouns in 834, 841, 848 2 .
TO>, stem and root of 153.
-r%-, verb suffix 576.
rdOev 436.
roC, enclitic 141 4 .
TO, raC, art. = oZ, a.1 388.
rot, Ion. and Dor. (=<roi) 393, 398.
TOIOS, Toi6<r8, TOIOVTOS 429.
Toto"8<r<ri or TOurSecri (= ro?(r8e)
388.
TOIOVTOS, TOO-OVTOS, etc., w. article
947; position 976.
T6Xfia 174.
T&V Kal r6v etc. 984.
-TOV, in 2 and 3 p. dual 552 ; for
-Tt)v in 3 pers. (Horn.) 556 3 . See
-TT)V.
-TOS, verb. adj. in 776.
rdcros, TO(r6<r8, TOO-OVTOS 429 ; TO-
w. compar. 1184.
436 ; w. art. 952.
TOW for r/i/os, TOV for riwSs 416.
TovvavTCov (by crasis) 44.
Tovvofxa 44.
-Tpcl, fern, nouns in 839.
TOVT^WV (Hdt.), fern. 413.
TovTo8 412.
ts, Tpta, declined 375.
Tp7ra), e ch. to a 646 ; aor. pass.
708 ; six aorists of 714.
Tp<j>oiv, opt. 736.
Tpe'4>&>, Tpe'xw, aspirates in 95 5 ,
708.
Tpid, fern, nouns in 833 2 .
perf. and plpf. mid. in-
flected 487 1 , 489 1 .
(Ion.) 374.
Tpi^jpT)s, declined 234, 235 ; accent
235, 122 C .
GREEK INDEX.
431
TpwrXao-ios w. gen. 1164.
-rpis, fern, nouns in 833 2 .
TpCraros 374.
rpCrov TOS TOVT, etc. 1064.
rpix-os, gen. of Bpl 225, 95 5 .
-rpov, neut. nouns in 838.
rpoirov, adv. accus. 1060.
o 659.
-) 573.
Tps, accent 128.
TT, later Attic for <r<r 68 3 .
TV, Dor. for <rv and <r<* 398.
nryx avw (TVX-) 605, 611 ; w. gen.
1099; w. partic. 1586; TVX&V
(ace. abs.) 1669.
TvvTj, Ion. (= 0-ri) 393 1 .
Tvirrw w. cogn. accus. 1051.
Tvpawt'w w. gen. 1109.
rep for Tlvi, and TW for nvl 416.
TW, therefore (Horn.) 984.
-rp, masc. nouns in 833 1 .
TC&S for OVTWS 436, 438.
Y, close vowel 5, 6 ; name of 4 ;
initial v always v in Att. 14 ;
rarely contr. w. foil. vow. 40 1 ;
length, to v 29, 30 ; interch. w.
ev (sometimes ov) 31.
vryi^s, contraction of 315.
-vSpiov, diminutives in 844.
vS<op, declension of 291.
vi, impers. 897 5 ; vorros (gen. abs.)
1568 (end).
ui, diphthong 7.
-via in pf. part. fern. 337 2 .
vlds, decl. 291 ; om. after art. 953.
v>as, vjiiv, v|ids, vpCv 396.
V, Vs 398.
, etc. (Aeol.) 393.
for vfj.4rfpos 407.
vvw, denom. verbs in 861 8 , 862,
596.
farlp w. gen. and ace. 1218; in
compos, w. gen. 1132.
" w. gen. 1120.
VITTJKOOS w. gen. 1140.
viro w. gen., dat., and ace. 1219 j
in comp. w. dat. 1179.
virdKinai w. dative 1179.
viroirrevw, augment of 543.
viroxos w. dative 1174.
-vs, adjectives in 849' 2 .
(sc. ^Atfyp) 1192.
a) w. gen. 1120.
vo-rcpov T] (once) w. infin. 1474.
vo-repos w. gen. 1154 ; wr^py xp6 v( t
1194.
vifrafvw, pf. and plpf. mid. 648, 700.
*, rough mute 21, labial 16, 22,
surd 24 ; not doubled 68 1 ; eu-
phonic changes : see Labials.
tjmivco, synopsis of 478 ; meaning
of certain tenses 479 ; fut. and
1 aor. act. and mid. and 2 aor.
and 2 fut. pass, inflected 482 ;
perf. mid. infl. 487 2 , 489 2 ; for-
mation of pres. 594 ; of fut. act.
663; of aor. act. 672; of pf. act.
and mid. 648, 700, 83 ; of 2 perf.
644; copul. vb. 907, 908; w.
partic. 1588.
4>avp6s 6 l(i.t w. partic. 1589.
<|>dos (0ws) 211.
<}>ei8ofiai, ir6<f>iS&r0<u 534 ; w. gen.
1102.
<j>p, come, w. imper. and subj.
1345.
<j>6pTpOS, <f>lpTO,TOS, 4>pl(TTOS 361 1 .
<j>^>o> 621 ; aor. in -a 671 ; 0fya>i>,
<}>ep6/j*vos 1564, 1565. See <|>e'p.
<j>6v-ya> 572 ; fut. 666 ; 2 perf. 31,
687.
<j>T]ftC, inflected 812 ; dial, forma
813; w. infln. of indir. disc,
1523 ; ou 0^" 1383 2 .
<j>0dva> 603 ; fydtiv 799 ; w. partic.
1586.
<j>0fpo> 596 ; fut. 663, 668 ; aor. 672.
<|>0ov&> w. gen. and dat. 1126, 1160,
432
GREEK INDEX.
w.
|>0va> 603; 2 aor. tyOlmv 800 1 ;
(t>Qiwv (opt.) 789.
-<|>i or -^>iv, epic ending 297.
4>i\afT P os, (friXaCraTOS 361 10 .
tjuXtw, <|nX, inflect, of contr.
forms 492 ; synopsis of 494 ;
part. ^iX^wv, <t>C\Qv) declined
340.
<{>CXos compared 361 10 .
declined 225.
779.
<|>o|3a> and <|>6pos (
1378-1380.
<fotvig 210.
<f>ovd, desiderative verb 868.
4>opeco, inf. 0op^ucpcu and
785*.
<j>pdt 585 ; pf . and plpf . mid. 490 s ;
irtypadov 534.
<Jp^)v, accent of compounds of (in
-0pw>) 122*.
<j>povrij;u> w. forws and obj. cl. 1372 ;
w. /A?; and subj*. or opt. 1378.
<j>povTto"His w. obj. accus. 1050.
<j>povSos and <j>povp6s 874-, 93.
<|>vyds, adj. of one ending 343.
<j>vXa declined 225.
4>vXdcr<ra> or <{>vXdTTci> 580; act. and
mid. 1246.
<j>v, 2 aor. I0w 799, 504-506.
<j>s (06ws), nom. of 211; accent
of gen. du. and pi. 128.
X, rough mute 21, palatal 16, 22,
surd 24 ; not doubled 68 1 ; eu-
phonic changes : see Palatals.
\al (/cai ai) and x<>l (/ccii o?) 44.
XaCpu, fut. perf. (Horn.) 705; w.
partic. 1 580 ; x^P^ 1564.
w. dative 1159, 1160.
declined 329, 331 ; com-
pared 355 ; dat. pi. 74.
XapCopcu w. dative 1160.
X.dpii, nom. sing. 209 1 ; ace. sing.
214 8 ; x&P"> (adv.) 1060.
Xi|ivos, gen. of time 1136.
declined 291.
(xe/>eo>>), \fif>i<rros 361 2 .
, declension of 248.
o (x-) P res - 574; fut. 667 j
aor. 671 ; 2 a. m. 800 1 .
t (/cal oi) 44.
declension of 272.
w. dat. 1183 ; w. dat. and
cogn. ace. 1183; x/^/iepos, with
1565.
Xpdw, contraction of 496 ; length.
a to 7) 638.
Xp^j 898 ; w. infin. as subject 898.
Xpfjv or 4xP*l v > potential without
&v 1400.
XpT)cri|Aos w. dative 1174.
s, accent of gen. pi. 126.
, xP vcro *s declined 310 ;
irreg. contr. 39 1 ; accent 311.
X<&pa declined 171 ; gen. sing. 173.
X<0pts w. gen. 1148.
^, double consonant 18, surd 24 ;
can end word 26 ; redupl. before
523.
\}/d|jLfios, fern. 194 1 .
xj/dw, contraction of 496.
i|r for 0-0^ 398.
\j/v8o)j.ai w^ gen. 1117.
vj/Ti^io-fJia viKav 1052.
>Hj<|>os, fern. 194.
ft, open long vowel 5, 6 ; name of
4; length, from o 29; interch.
w. 77 and a 31 ; for o in stem of
Att. 2 decl. 196 ; nouns in 6 of
3 decl. 242 ; voc. sing, of in ol
246.
-w or -v in ace. sing. 199.
-w, verbs in 467.
o>, improper diphthong 7, 10 ; by
augm. for oi 518 ; in dat. sing,
190, 167 ; in nom. sing. 246.
, interjection w. voc. 1044.
GREEK INDEX.
433
,& 48(5, 1005.
<%,-, thematic vowel of subj. 561 2 .
-w|u, verbs in 502 1 .
-wv, masc. denom. in 843 2 ; primi-
tives in 840 ; nouns of place in
843 ; adj. in, compared 354.
-wv in gen. plur. 167 ; -G>v for -twv
in 1 decl. 169, 124.
wv, partic. of el/jJ, 806 ; accent of
129.
wvrjTds w. gen. of price 1133.
wpa (^a-rQ w. infin. 1521 ; wpy, w.
gen., as dat. of time 1194.
-ws, nouns in (Att. 2 decl.) 196;
nouns of 3 decl. in 238-241, 243 ;
in gen. sing. 249, 265, 269; in
ace. pi. (Dor.) 204 4 ; adj. in 305 ;
pf. part, in 335 ; adverbs in 365.
ws, proclitic 137 ; accented (ws)
138 ; rel. adv. 436 ; w. partic.
1674, 1593; in wishes w. opt.
1509; in indir. quot. 1476;
causal 1505 ; as final particle
1362, 1365, 1368, sometimes w.
&v or K 1367; rarely w fut.
indie. 1366; w. past tenses of
indie. 1371; like wVre w. infin.
1456 ; w. absol. infin. 1534.
ws, as prepos. (to) w. accus. 1220.
ws, thus 436 ; accent 138 3 .
-w<ri for -aw 561 2 , 78 3 .
wVirep w. partic. in comparisons
1576 ; w. ace. absol. of personal
vbs. 1570', uxnrep to ei 1313;
accent 146.
WO-T6 w. infin. and indie. 1449,
1450 ; two constr. disting. 1450,
1451 ; negative 1451 ; w. othei
constructions 1454 ; accent 146
wv, Ionic diphthong 7.
wvT6s, WVT<SS, TWVT<S, Ionic 397.
868 2 .
ENGLISH INDEX.
N.B. See note on p. 408.
Ability or fitness, verbal adj.
denoting 851.
Ablative, functions of in Greek
1042.
Absolute case: gen.. 1152, 1568;
accus. 1569.
Abstract nouns, in compos. 879,
880 ; w. art. 944 ; neut. adj. or
partic. w. art. for 933, 934.
Abuse,* vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160.
Acatalectic verses 1639.
Accent, gen. principles of 106-
115 ; nature of 107; kinds of
106 ; recessive 110 4 ; of nouns
and adj. 121-129; of gen. and
dat. sing., of oxytones 123 ; of
Att. 2 decl. 125 ; of gen. and
dat. of monosyll. of 3 decl. 127;
of gen. pi. (in Cov) of 1 decl.
124 ; of verbs 180-135 ; of par-
tic. 134 ; of opt. in at and ot
113 ; of contracted syll. (incl.
crasis and elision) 117-120 ; en-
clitics 142 ; proclitics 136, 143*.
Accent and ictus in verse 1625.
Accompaniment, dat. of 1189;
w. dat. of aMs 1191.
Accusative case 160-163; sing, of
3d decl. 214-218; contracted ace.
and nom. pi. alike in 3d decl.
208 3 ; subj. of infin. 895; after
prepos. 1201 ff., in compos. 1227;
ace. absol. 1569 ; rarely w. par-
tic, of personal verbs 1570 ; in
appos. w. sentence 915 ; infln.
as accus. .1518 ; accus. of object
retained w. passive 1239. Other
434
syntax of accus. 1047-1082 : see
Contents, p. xv.
Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1121;
coinp. of /card w. ace. and gen.
1123.
Achaeans, p. 3.
Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w.
partic. 1588.
Action, suffixes denoting 834, 835.
Active voice 441, 1230 ; persona 1
endings of 552-554; form of
incl. most intrans. vbs. 1231;
object of, as subj. of pass. 1234.
Acute accent 106 ; of oxytont
changed to grave 115.
Addressing, voc. in 1044 ; nom,
in 1045.
Adjectives, formation of 849-858 ;
inflection 298-349 : see Contents,
p. xi; comparison of 350-364;
agreement w. nouns 918 ; at-
tributive and pred. 919 ; pred.
adj. w. copulative verb 907; re-
ferring to omitted subj. of infin.
927, 928 ; used as noun 932,
933 ; verbal, w. gen. 1139-1146,
w. accus. 1050 ; verbal in TOS
776, in rtos and rtov 776, 1594-
1599 ; used for adverb 926.
Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102 ; w. causal gen. 1126.
Adonic verse 1682 1 .
Advantage or disadv., dat. of 1165.
Adverbial accus. 1060.
Adverbs, how formed from adj.
365-367, 859 ; from stems of
nouns or verbs 860 ; from par-
ENGLISH INDEX.
435
tic: 366; comparison of 369-
371; relative 436; local, from
nouns or pron. -292-297; nume-
ral 372 ; qualify verbs, etc.
1228; w. gen. 1147-1151; w.
dat. 1174, 1175; assim. of rel.
adv. to antec. 1034; w. article
for adj. 952.
Advising, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Aeolic race, p. 3 ; dialect, p. 4, has
a for Attic 17 147; Aeolic forms
of aor. opt. in Attic 732, 781;
forms of infin. and partic. 781,
782, 783 ; forms in /AI 787 2 .
Aeolian Greeks, p. 3.
Age, pronom. adj. denoting 429.
Aeschylus, language of, p. 4.
Agent, nouns denoting 833 ; expr.
after pass, by gen. w. prep.
1234 ; in poetry without prepos.
1131; by dat. (esp. after pf.
pass.) 1186; w. verbals in r^os by
dat. 1188, 1596; w. verbal in rtov
by dat. or accus. 1188, 1597.
Agreement, of verb. w. subj. nom.
899; of pred. w. subj. 907; of
adj. etc. w. noun 918 ; of adj. w.
nouns of diff. gender or number
923, 924.
Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1099.
Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 1682 5 .
Alexandrian period, p. 5.
Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 1662.
Alpha (see a) privative 875 1 ; cop-
ulative 877.
Alphabet 1 ; obsolete letters of 3 ;
used as numerals 3, 372, 384.
Anaclasis in Ionic verse 1688 2 .
Anacrusis 1635.
Anapaest 1627 2 ; cyclic 1634; in
trochaic verse (apparent) 1650 ;
in iambic verse 1657.
Anapaestic rhythms 1675, 1676;
systems 1677.
Anastrophe 116.
Anceps, syllaba 1636, 1638 2 .
Anger, vbs. expressing, w. causal
gen. 1126 ; w. dat. 1160.
Antecedent, agreement of rel. w.
1019; omitted 1026; assim. of
rel. to 1031; of antec. to rel.
1035 ; attraction 1037, w. assim.
1038 ; def. and indef . antec. 1426.
Antepenult 96.
Antibacchius 162 7 3 .
Antistrophe 1649.
Aorist 447; secondary tense 448;
pers. endings 552-554 ; augment
of 513, 515 ; iter. endings -<TKOV
and -vKowv (Ion.) 778. First
aor. act. and mid., tense system
of 456 ; formation of tense stem
669 ; of liquid vbs. 672 ; in -KO.
(or -Ka^tjv) in three vbs. 670 ;
Horn, e and o (for 77 and w) in
subj. 780 1 ; accent of infin. 131*.
Second aor. act. and mid. , tense
system of 456 ; formation of
tense system 675, 678 ; redupl.
(Horn.) 534; Att. redupl. 535;
Homeric mixed aor. w. a 777 8 ;
fu-forms 678, 679, 798, 799;
Ion. subj. of 788 ; accent of im-
perat., infin., and part. 131. Aor.
pass, (first and second) w. active
endings 564 7 ; tense systems of
456 ; formation of tense stems
707, 712 ; accent of infin. and
part. 131.
Syntax of aorist. Ind. 1250 5 ;
disting. from impf. 1259 ; of
vbs. denoting a state 1260 ; as
vivid future 1264 ; gnomic 1292 ;
iterative 1296. In dependent
words 1271; how disting. from
pres. (not in indir. disc.) 1272 ;
opt. and infin. in indir. disc.
1280 ; infin. w. vbs. of hoping,
etc. 1286 ; in partic. 1288 ; not
436
ENGLISH INDEX.
past in certain cases 1290. See
Indicative, Subjunctive, etc., for
special constructions.
Aphaeresis 55.
Apocope 53.
Apodosis 1381; negative of (ou)
1383 1 ; w. past tenses of indie.
w. &t> 1397j various forms in
cond. sent. 1387; w. protasis
omitted 1329, 1340; re'pres. by
infin. or partic. 1418, 1419 ; im-
plied in context 1420 ; sup-
pressed for effect 1416 ; introd.
by 8t 1422.
Apostrophe (in elision) 48.
Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588.
Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two
ace. 1077; w. ace. and part. gen.
1095, 10947.
Apposition 911 ; gen. in appos. w.
possessive 1001, 913 ; nom. or
ace. in app. w. sentence 915 ;
infin. in appos. 1517 ; partitive
appos. 914.
Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat.
1175.
Argives, p. 3.
Aristophanes, language of, p. 4.
Aristotle, language of, p. 4.
Arsis and thesis 1621 ; in Latin
(not Greek) sense 1621 (foot-
note).
Article, definite, declined 386 ; r6
and TOIV as fern. 388; roL and
rat (epic and Doric) 388 ; pro-
clitic in some forms 137 ; in
crasis 43 2 ; 6 aJr6s 399, 989 2 .
Article as pronoun in Horn. 935,
w. adj. or part. 936 ; in Herod.
939; in lyric and tragic poets
940 ; Attic prose use 941 ; posi-
tion w. attrib. adj. 959, w. pred.
adj. 971, w. demonstr. 974; as
pronoun in Attic 981-984. Arti-
cle w. proper names 943 ; w. de-
monstratives 945 1 , 947, omitted
in trag. 945 3 ; w. possess. 946 ;
w. numerals 948 ; in possess,
sense 949 ; w. adv. etc. used like
adj. 952 ; w. 777, Trp6.yna.Ta, ut6s,
etc. understood 953 ; w. infin.
955i, 15162; w. a clause 955*,
1555.
Ashamed, vbs. signif. to be, w.
partic. 1580.
Asking, vbs. of, w. two accus. 1069.
Aspirate, w. vowels 11 ; w. mutes
21, 92-95 ; avoided in successive
syll. 95 ; transferred in r/><?0w,
dptyw, etc. 95 5 .
Assimilation of rel. to case of
antec. 1031 ; w. antec. omitted
1032 ; in rel. adv. 1034 ; antec.
rarely assim. to rel. 1035. As-
sim. of cond. rel. cl. to mood of
antec. clause 1439, 1440.
Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099.
Attic dialect, p. 4 ; why basis of
Greek Grammar, p. 4. Old Attic
alphabet 27.
Attic 2 decl. 196-200, reduplica-
tion 529, future 665.
Attraction in rel. sent. 1037, joined
w. assim. 1038.
Attributive adjective (opp. to pred-
icate) 919 ; position of article w.
959. Attributive or possessive
compounds 888.
Augment 466, 510-519, 527, 537-
649 : see Contents, p. xii.
Bacchius 1627 8 ; Bacchic rhythms
1690.
Barytones 110 s .
Be or become, vbs. signif. to, w.
partit. gen. 1094 7 .
Begin, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099
w. partic. 1580.
ENGLISH INDEX.
437
Belonging to, adj. signif. 850.
Benefit, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
1160.
Blame, vbs. expressing, w. dat.
1160.
Boeotia, Aeolians in, p. 3.
Brachycatalectic verses 1641.
Breathings 11-15; form of 13;
place of 12.
Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam.
1669.
Caesura 1642.
Call : see Name.
Cardinal numbers 372-374; decl.
of 375-381.
Care for, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1102.
Cases 160 ; meaning of 162 ; ob-
lique 163. Case endings of
nouns 167. Syntax 1042-1198:
see Nominative, Genitive, Da-
tive,- etc., and Contents, pp.
xv-xvii.
Catalexis and catalectic verses
1639.
Causal sentences, w. indie. 1505 ;
w. opt. (ind. disc.) 1506 ; w.
relat. 1461, 1462.
Cause, expr. by gen. 1126 ; by dat.
1181 ; by partic. 1563 2 .
Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. /^
and subj. or opt. 1378.
Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif.
to, w. partic. 1580.
Choosing, vbs. of, w. two ace.
1077, w. ace. and gen. 1095,
1094L
Choriambus, 162 7 4 ; choriambic
rhythms 1687.
Circumflex accent 106 ; origin of
107 2 ; on contr. syll. 117.
Circumstantial participle 1563.
Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099,
1097 2 .
Classes of verbs, eight 568 : 1. 569,
II. 572, 574, III. 576, IV. 579-
602, V. 603-612, VI. 613, VH
619, VIII. 621.
Close vowels 6; stems ending in 206.
Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus,
1069.
Cognate mutes 23 ; cognate accus.
1051.
Collective noun, w. plur. verb 900,
w. pi. partic. 920 ; foil, by pi.
relat. 102P.
Collision of vowels, how avoided 34.
Commands or exhortations 1342-
1345, 1352, 1265, 1510 ; verbs of
commanding w. gen. 1109, w.
dat. (Horn.) 1164.
Common Dialect of Greek, p. 5.
Comparative degree 350-371 ; w.
gen. 1153; w. dat. (difference)
1184.
Comparison of adjectives 350-360 ;
irreg. 361, 362 ; of adverbs 365-
371 ; of some nouns and pro-
nouns 364.
Comparison, verbs denot., w. gen.
1120.
Compensative lengthening 30, 78 8 ,
79.
Compound words 822, 869-889 ;
first part of 871-877 ; second
part of 878-882 ; meaning of
(three classes) 883-888. Com-
pound verbs 882, 889 ; augment
and redupl. of 540-542 ; accent
of 132, 133 ; w. gen., dat., or ace.
1132, 1179, 1227. Compound
negatives 1607 ; repetition of
1619. Indirect compounds 882 2 ;
how augmented and redupl. 543-
546.
Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus,
1069; w. infin. and /*ij 1615,
1549-1551.
Concessions, opt. in 1510.
438
ENGLISH INDEX.
Conclusion: see Apodosis and Con-
dition.
Condemning, vbs. of, w. gen. and
acc.ll21;w.acc.andtwogen.ll24.
Condition and conclusion 1381 ;
conditional sentences 1381-1424 :
see Contents, p= xx; classifica-
tion of cond. sent. 1385-1389;
general and particular cond. dis-
tirig. 1384 ; comparison of Latin
gen. cond. 1388 ; cond. expr. by
partic. 1413 : see Protasis. Rela-
tive cond. sent. 1428-1441 : see
Relative.
Conjugation 151, 464, 467 ; of
verbs in w 469-499 ; of verbs in
/u 500-509.
Consonants, divisions of 16-22 ;
double 18 ; doubling of 68, 69 ;
euphonic changes in 70-95 ;
movable 56-63. Consonant verb
stems 460. Consonant declen-
sion (Third) 206.
Constructio pregnans 1225.
Continue, verbs signif. to, w. par-
tic. 1580.
Contraction 35; rules of 36-41;
quantity of contr. syll. 104 1 ;
accent of contr. syll. 117, 118;
contr. of nouns: 1st decl. 183,
2d decl. 201, 3d decl. 226-267;
of adject. 310-323; of partic.
340-342 ; of verbs in aw, ea>, and
ow 492 ; in gen. pi. of 1st decl.
170; in augm. and redupl. (ee
to ei) 537, 538, 539 ; in forma-
tion of words 829, 874 2 . See
Crasis and Synizesis.
Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. and
ace. 1121.
Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 23.
Copula 891 1 .
Copulative verbs 908 ; case of pred.
adj. or noun with infin. of 927,
928 ; copulative compounds 887.
Coronis 42, 45.
Correlative pronominal adjectives
429 ; adverbs 436.
Crasis 42-46 ; examples 44 ; quan-
tity of syll. 104 1 ; accent 119.
Cretic 1627 3 ; cretic rhythms 1689.
Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 1634.
Dactyl 1627 2 ; cyclic 1634 ; in an-
apaestic verse 1675 ; in iambic
verse (apparent) 1657; in tro-
chaic verse (cyclic) 1650 ; in
logaoedic verse (cyclic) 1679;
in dactylo-epitritic verse 1684.
Dactylic rhythms 1669-1674.
Dactylo-epitritic rhythms 1684 ; in
Pindar 1685.
Danaans, p. 3.
Danger, vbs. expr., w. ^ and subj.
or opt. 1378.
Dative case 160, 1157; endings of
167, 169, 190; dat. plur. of 3
decl. 224 ; syntax of 1158-1198 i
see Contents, pp. xvi, xvii
Prepositions w. dat. 1201-1219.
Declension 151; of nouns: first
168-188, second 189-204, third
205-286; of irreg. nouns 287-
291; of adjectives: first and
second 298-311, third 312-317,
first and third 318-333 ; of par-
tic. 334-342 ; of adj. w. one end-
ing 343-345 ; of irreg. adj. 346-
349 ; of the article 386-388 ; of
pronouns 389-428 ; of numerals
375. See Contents, pp. x, xi.
Defend, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
1160 ; Afriveiv nvl 1168.
Degree of difference, dat. of 1184.
Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace.
1069.
Demes, names of Attic, in dat
1197.
Demonstrative pronouns 409 ; syn-
tax of 1004-1010; w. article
ENGLISH INDEX.
439
945 1 ; position of 974; distinc-
tions of ouros, 6'5e, ticeivos 1005 :
article asdemonstr. (Horn.) 935,
(Att.) 981-984 ; rel. as demons.
. 1023.
Demosthenes, language of, p. 4.
Denominatives 824 ; denom. nouns
841-848 ; adjectives 851 ; verbs
861-867.
Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and ^
1615, 1551.
Dependent moods 446 ; tenses of
1271-1287.
Deponent verbs 443 ; principal
parts of 463; passive and mid-
dle deponents 444.
Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. ace.
and gen. 1118; w. two acc.1069.
Desiderative verbs 868.
Desire, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1102.
Despise, vbs: signif. to, w. gen.
1102.
Determinative compounds 886.
Diaeresis, mark of ( " ) 9 ; in verse
1643 ; Bucolic 1669.
Dialects, p. 4 ; dialectic changes
in letters 147-149 ; dial, forms
of nouns 188, 204, 286 ; of adj.
322, 332, 347; of numerals 374;
of the article 388 ; of pronouns
393-398, 403, 407, 413, 416 2 ,
418 2 , 424, 428; of verbs in w
777-783 ; of contract vbs. 784-
786 ; of, vbs. in /w 787-792.
Digamma or Vau 3 ; as numeral
372, 384 ; omission of, seen in
inflections 90, 91, 256, 265, 269,
539, 574, 601, 602 ; retained in
Aeol. and Doric 91 ; seen in metre
1673 2 .
Dimeter 1646 ; anapaestic 1676 ;
dactylic 1674 1 ; iambic 1665 3 ;
trochaic 1653, 1654.
Diminutives, suffixes of 844 ; all
neut. 159*.
Diphthongs 7; improper 7, 10, 12 ;
spurious 8, 27, 28 2 ; in contrac-
tion 37, 38 ; in crasis 43 ; elision
of (poet.) 51; augment of 518,
519.
Dipody 1646 ; iambic 1665 1 .
Direct object 892 ; of act. verb
1047. Direct discourse, ques-
tion, and quotations 1475.
Disadvantage, dat. of 1165, 1170.
Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
1160.
Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.
1160.
Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w.
partic. 1580.
Disputing, vbs. of, w. causal gen.
1128.
Distich 1649 ; elegiac 1670.
Distinction, gen. of 1117.
Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160 j
w. infin. and yd] 1615.
Dividing, verbs of, w. two ace.
1076.
Dochmius and dochmiacs 1691.
Doing, verbs of, w. two ace. 1073.
Dorian Greeks, p. 3.
Doric dialect, p. 4 ; has a for Attic
t\ 147 ; Doric future (also in
Attic) 666.
Double consonants 18; make po-
sition 99 1 .
Double negatives 1360, 1361, 1616,
1617. See o* jxVj and JXTJ ov.
Doubtful vowels 5.
Dual 155 ; masc. forms used for
fern. 303, 388, 410, 422 ; of verbs,
1st pers. very rare, 556 2 ; -TOV
and -<r0ov for -rrjv and -ff6r]v 556 3 .
Effect, accus. of 1055.
Elegiac pentameter and distich
1670.
Elision 48-54 ; of diphthongs 51;
in compound words 64; trepl
440
ENGLISH INDEX.
7r/>6, fln, and dat. in i, etc., not
elided 50 ; accent of elided word
120.
EUipsis of verb w. &v 1313; of
protasis 1414 ; of apodosis 1414 2 ,
1416, 1420.
Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1126.
Enclitics 140, 141; w. accent if
emphatic 144; at end of com-
pounds 146 ; successive enclit-
ics 146.
Endings: case-endings of nouns
167; local 292-297; verbal 651-
556 ; personal 552, 553, remarks
on 556.
Endure, vbs. signif . to, w. partic.
1580.
Exhort, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
1097 2 .
Envy, vbs. expr., w. causal gen.
1126 ; w. dat. 1160.
Epic dialect, p. 4.
Epicene nouns 158.
Ethical dative 1171.
Euphony of vowels 34-63 ; of con-
sonants 70-95.
Eupolidean verse 1682 7 , 1644.
Euripides, language of, p. 4.
Exchange of quantity 33, 200, 265.
Exclamations, nom. in 1045 ; voc.
in 1044 ; gen. in 1129 ; relatives
in 1039.
Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Exhortations : see Commands.
Expecting etc., vbs. of, w. fut.,
pres., or aor. infin. 1286.
Extent, accus. of 1062 ; gen. de-
noting 1094 6 .
Falling and rising rhythms 1648.
Fearing, verbs of, w. ^ and subj.
or opt. 1378 ; sometimes w. fut.
ind. 1379 ; w. pres. or past tense
of indie. 1380.
Feet (in verse) 1620, 1627; ictus,
arsis, and thesis of 1621.
Feminine nouns 156-159 ; form in
participles 84 2 , 337; in 2 pf.
partic. (Horn.) 773, 774; femi-
nine caesura 1669.
Festivals, names of, in dat. of
time 1192.
Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and
gen. 1113.
Final clauses 1362 1 ; w. subj. and
opt. 1365 ; w. subj. after past
tenses 1369 ; rarely w. fut. ind.
1366 ; w. &v or /ce 1367; w. past
tenses of indie. 1371; neg. ^
1364 ; final disting. from object
clauses 1363.
Find, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1582.
Finite moods 446.
First aorist tense system 456 ;
form, of tense stem 669, 672.
First passive tense system 456; for-
mation of tense stems 707, 710.
First perfect tense system 456;
formation of tense stem 698.
Fitness, etc., verbal adj. denot.,
formation of 851.
Forbidding, vbs. of, w. ^ and
infin. 1615, 1549, 1551.
Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 1102;
w. partic. 1588.
Formation of words 822-889 : see
Contents, p. xiii, xiv.
Friendliness, vbs. expr., w. dat.
1160.
Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w.
gen. 1112, adject, expr. 1140.
See Fill.
Fulness, format, of adj. expr. 854.
Future 447, 448 ; tense system 456,
662-668 ; of liquid verbs 663 ;
Attic fut. in w and -oC/wu 665;
Doric fut. 666, also Attic 666 ;
passive 710, 716; fut. mid. as
ENGLISH INDEX.
441
pass. 1248. Fut. indie, express-
ing permission or command
1265 ; rarely in final clauses
1366 ; regularly in object clauses
with SITUS 1372 ; rarely with ^
after verbs of fearing 1379 ; in
protasis 1391, 1405 ; not in rel.
cond. 1435 ; in rel. clauses ex-
pressing purpose 1442 ; with ^0'
V or <?0' yre 1460 ; with oi> rf
1360, 1361 ; with &v (Horn.,
rarely Att.) 1303; periphrastic
fut. with fjitXXu 1254 ; optative
1287, never w. &v 1307 j infin.
1276-1278, 1280, 1282, 1286;
partic. 1288.
Future perfect 447, 448 ; in perf .
mid. tense system 456 ; tense
stem formed 703 ; active form
in a few vbs. 705 ; gen. peri-
phrastic 706 ; meaning of 704,
1250 7 ; as emph. fut. 1266 ; infin.
1283 ; partic. 1284.
i lender 156; natural and gram-
matical 157 ; grammat. design,
by article 157 ; common and
epicene 158 ; general rules 159 ;
gen. of 1st decl. 168, of 2d decl.
189, 194, of 3d decl. 280-285.
General, disting. from particular
suppositions 1384 ; forms of
1386, 1387; w. subj. and opt.
1393, 1431 ; w. indie. 1395, 1432;
in Latin 1388.
Genitive case 160, 162-167 ; of 1st
decl. 169, 170; of 2d decl. 190,
191; of 3d decl. 207. Syntax
1083, 1084-1156: see Contents,
p. xv, xvi ; gen. absol. 1152,
1568 ; gen. of infin. w. TOV 1546-
1549.
Gentile nouns, suffixes of 848.
Glyconic verses 1682*.
Gnomic tenses 1291-1295 ; present
1291 ; aorist 1292, 1293 ; as pri-
mary tense 1268, 1394 ; w. iroX-
Xdm, 17577, OVTTW, etc. 1293 ; per-
fect 1295.
Grave accent 107, 108, for acute
in oxy tones 115.
Greece, modern language of, p. 5.
Greek language, history of and re-
lations to other languages, pp.
5,6.
Greeks, why so called, p. 3.
Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102 ;
w. ace. and gen. 1103 ; w. partic.
1688.
Hellenes and their divisions, p. 8 t
of Homer, p. 3.
Hellenistic Greek of New Testa-
ment and Septuagint, p. 5.
Herodotus, dialect of, p. 4.
Heroic hexameter 1669.
Heterogeneous nouns 288.
Hiatus, how avoided 34; allowed
at end of verse 1638 3 .
Hindrance, vbs. of, w. ^ and
infin. etc. 1549-1552.
Hippocrates, dialect of, p. 4.
Historic present 1252, 1268.
Historical (or secondary) tenses?
see Secondary.
Hit, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099.
Homer, dialect of, p. 4 ; verse of
1669 ; books of, numbered by
letters 385 ; Hellenes of, p. 3.
Hoping, etc., vbs. of, w. fut., pres.,
or aor. infin. 1286.
Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160.
Hypercatalectic verse 1641.
Iambus 1627 1 . Iambic rhythms
1657-1667 ; tragic and comic
iambic trimeter 1658-1662 ; iam-
bic systems 1666.
Imperative 445; pers. endings of
653 ; common form of 746-751 ;
442
ENGLISH INDEX.
/it-form of 752-756; aor. pass.
757; perf. rare 748, 758, 1274.
In commands etc. 1824, 1342 ;
in prohib. w. ^ (pres.) 1346;
w. &ye, 0fye, f0i, 1345; after
ol<rff 8 1343.
Imperfect tense 447 ; secondary
448 ; in present tense system
456 ; augment of 513, 515 ; per-
sonal endings 552 ; inflection of :
common form 626, /u-f orm 627 ;
iterat. endings <TKOV and VKOWV
(Ion.) 778. Syntax 1250 2 ; how
disting. from aor. 1259 ; denot-
ing repeated or customary past
action 1253 2 , attempted action
1255 ; how expr. in infin. and
partic. 1285, 1289, in opt. 1488 ;
w. 4v, iterative 1304 2 , 1296, in
unreal conditions 1387, 1397, in
Horn. 1398 ; w. &v as potential
1304 1 , 1335, 1340 ; in rel. cond.
sentences 1433 ; in wishes 1511 ;
in final clauses 1371.
Impersonal verbs 898, 1240 2 ; par-
tic, of, in accus. abs. 1569 ; im-
pers. verbal in -rtov 1597.
Imploring, vbs. of, w. gen. 1101 3 .
Improper diphthongs 7.
Inceptive class of verbs (VI.) 613.
Inclination, formation of adj. de-
noting 849*.
Indeclinable nouns 290.
Indefinite pronouns 415, 416, 425 ;
pronominal adj. 429, 430; ad-
verbs 436 ; syntax of 1015-1018.
Indicative 445 ; personal endings
552 ; thematic vowel 561 ; for-
mation of 564, 565 (see under
special Tenses); tenses of 448,
449, 1250-1266, primary and
secondary (or historical) 1267-
1269. General use of 1318 ; po-
tential w. &v 1335-1340; indep.
v. itf or /if/ 06 1351, fut. w.
and STTWS ^ 1352 ; w. oft ^
(fut.) 1360, 1361 ; in f 
